SEMESTER I

LINEAR ALGEBRA AND CALCULUS CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of

MAT Introduction
101 BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This course introduces students to some basic mathematical ideas and tools which are at
the core of any engineering course. A brief course in Linear Algebra familiarises students with some
basic techniques in matrix theory which are essential for analysing linear systems. The calculus of
functions of one or more variables taught in this course are useful in modelling and analysing
physical phenomena involving continuous change of variables or parameters and have applications
across all branches of engineering.

Prerequisite: A basic course in one-variable calculus and matrix theory.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 solve systems of linear equations, diagonalize matrices and characterise quadratic forms
CO 2 compute the partial and total derivatives and maxima and minima of multivariable functions
CO 3 compute multiple integrals and apply them to find areas and volumes of geometrical shapes,
mass and centre of gravity of plane laminas
CO 4 perform various tests to determine whether a given series is convergent, absolutely
convergent or conditionally convergent
CO 5 determine the Taylor and Fourier series expansion of functions and learn their applications.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
1 7
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO 5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Test 1 Test 2 Examination
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Assignments: Assignment should include specific problems highlighting the applications of the
methods introduced in this course in science and engineering.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Solve systems of linear equations, diagonalize matrices and characterise
quadratic forms
𝑥
1. A is a real matrix of order 3 × 3and 𝑋 = 𝑦 . What can you say about the solution of 𝐴𝑋 =
𝑧
0if rank of A is 1? 2 ?3?

3 0 2
2. Given𝐴 = 0 2 0 , find an orthogonal matrix 𝑃that diagonalizes A.
−2 0 0

3. Find out what type of conic section the following quadratic form represents

17𝑥 − 30𝑥 𝑥 + 17𝑥 = 128

−2 2 −3
4. The matrix 𝐴 = 2 1 −6 has an eigen value5 with corresponding Eigen vector𝑋 =
−1 −2 0
1
2 . Find 𝐴 𝑋
−1

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): compute the partial and total derivatives and maxima and minima of
multivariable functions

1. Find the slope of the surface 𝑧 = 𝑥 𝑦 + 5𝑦 in the x-direction at the point (1,-2)
 2. Given the function 𝑤 = 𝑥𝑦 + 𝑧, use chain rule to find the instantaneous rate of change of
𝑤at each point along the curve 𝑥 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡, 𝑦 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑡, 𝑧 = 𝑡

3. Determine the dimension of rectangular box open at the top , having a volume 32 cubic ft
and requiring the least amount of material for it’s construction.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): compute multiple integrals and apply them to find areas and volumes of
geometrical shapes, mass and centre of gravity of plane laminas.

1. Evaluate ∬ (𝑥 + 2𝑦) 𝐷𝐴where D is the region bounded by the parabolas 𝑦 = 2𝑥 and

𝑦 = 1+𝑥

2. Explain how you would find the volume under the surface 𝑧 = 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦)and over a specific
region 𝐷in the 𝑥𝑦plane using (i) double integral (ii) triple integral?

3. Find the mass and centre of gravity of a triangular lamina with vertices (0,0), (2,1), (0,3) if
the density function is 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 𝑥 + 𝑦

4. Use spherical coordinates to evaluate ∭ (𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 ) 𝑑𝑉where B is the unit ball

defined by 𝐵 = {(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧): 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 ≤ 1}

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): perform various tests to determine whether a given series is convergent,
absolutely convergent or conditionally convergent.

1. What is the difference between a sequence and a series and when do you say that they are
convergent? Divergent?

∞
2. Determine whether the series ∑ converges or diverges.

∞( )
3. Is the series ∑ convergent? Absolutely convergent? Conditionally convergent?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): determine the Taylor and Fourier series expansion of functions and learn
their applications.

1. Assuming the possibility of expansion find the Maclaurin series expansion of

𝑓(𝑥) = (1 + 𝑥) for|𝑥| < 1where 𝑘is any real number. What happens if 𝑘is a positive

integer?

2. Use Maclaurin series of 𝑙𝑛(1 + 𝑥), −1 < 𝑥 ≤ 1to find an approximate value of𝑙𝑛2.

3. Find the Fourier series of the function𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 , −2 ≤ 𝑥 < 2, 𝑓(𝑥 + 4) = 𝑓(𝑥). Hence
using Parseval’s identity prove that 1 + + + … =

4. Expand the function 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 (0 < 𝑥 < 1⁄2) into a (i) Fourier sine series (ii) Fourier cosine
series.
 Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: MAT 101

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

LINEAR ALGEBRA AND CALCULUs

(2019-Scheme)

(Common to all branches)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1 2 −1
1. Determine the rank of the matrix 𝐴 = −2 −4 2 .
3 6 −3
2 0
2. Write down the eigen values of = . What are the eigen values of 𝑃 𝐴𝑃 where
0 −1
−4 2
𝑃= ?
3 −1
3. Find 𝑓 (1,3) and 𝑓 (1,3) for the function 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 2𝑥 𝑦 + 2𝑦 + 4𝑥.
4. Show that the function 𝑢(𝑥, 𝑡) = sin (𝑥 − 𝑐𝑡) is a solution of the equation =𝑐
.
5. Use double integral to find the area of the region enclosed between the parabolas 𝑦 = 𝑥
and the line 𝑦 = 2𝑥.
6. Use polar coordinates to evaluate the area of the region bounded by 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 4, the line
𝑦 = 𝑥 and the y axis in the first quadrant
7. Test the convergence of the series ∑∞ .
8. Test the convergence of the alternating series ∑∞ (−1) using Leibnitz test.
9. Find the Taylor series expansion of 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜋𝑥about𝑥 = .
10. Find the values to which the Fourier series of

𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥for−𝜋 < 𝑥 < 𝜋, with 𝑓(𝑥 + 2𝜋) = 𝑓(𝑥) converges (10x3=30)
 PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module -I
11. (a) Solve the following system of equations
𝑦 + 𝑧 − 2𝑤 = 0
2𝑥 − 3𝑦 − 3𝑧 + 6𝑤 = 2
4𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 − 2𝑤 = 4
−2 2 −3
(b) Find the eigen values and eigen vectors of the matrix 2 1 −6
−1 −2 0
−1 2 −2
12. (a) Diagonalize the matrix 2 4 1
2 1 4
(b) What kind of conic section the quadratic form3𝑥 + 22𝑥 𝑥 + 3𝑥 = 0 represents?
Transform it to principal axes.
Module - II
13. (a) Find the local linear approximation to 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 𝑥 + 𝑦 at the point (3, 4).Use it to
approximate 𝑓(3.04,3.98)
(b) Let 𝑤 = 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 , 𝑥 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃, 𝑦 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃, 𝑧 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃. Use chain rule to find when
𝜃= .
14. (a) Let 𝑧 = 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) where 𝑥 = 𝑟𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃, 𝑦 = 𝑟𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃, prove that
+ = + .
(b) Locate all relative maxima, relative minima and saddle points
𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 𝑥𝑦 + + (𝑎 ≠ 0, 𝑏 ≠ 0).
Module - III
15. (a) Evaluate∬ (2𝑥 𝑦 + 9𝑦 ) 𝑑𝑥𝑑𝑦 where D is the region bounded by 𝑦 = 𝑥 and 𝑦 = 2√𝑥
(b) Evaluate ∫ ∫ 𝑒 𝑑𝑥𝑑𝑦 changing the order of integration.
√
16. (a) Find the volume of the solid bounded by the cylinder 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 4 and the planes
𝑦 + 𝑧 = 4 and 𝑧 = 0..
(b) Evaluate ∭ 1 − 𝑥 − 𝑦 − 𝑧 𝑑𝑥𝑑𝑦𝑑𝑧, taken throughout the volume of
the sphere 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 = 1, by transforming to spherical polar coordinates

Module - IV
17. (a) Test the convergence of the series
(i) ∑∞ (ii) ∑∞
!

( )!
(b) Determine the convergence or divergence of the series ∑∞ (−1)

( )!
18. (a) Check whether the series ∑∞ (−1) ( )!
is absolutely convergent, conditionally
convergent or divergent.
 . . . . . .
(b) Test the convergence of the series 1 + .
+ . .
+ . . .
+⋯

Module - V
19. (a) Obtain the Fourier series of for𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 , in the interval 0 < 𝑥 < 2𝜋.with 𝑓 𝑥 +
( )
2𝜋 = 𝑓(𝑥). Hence deduce the value of∑∞ .
𝑖𝑓 0 < 𝑥 <
(b) Find the half range sine series of 𝑓(𝑥) = ( )
𝑖𝑓 <𝑥<𝐿
20. (a)Expand (1 + 𝑥) .as a Taylor series about 𝑥 = 0and state the region of convergence of
the series.

(b) Find the Fourier series for 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 in the interval −𝜋 < 𝑥 < 𝜋

with 𝑓(𝑥 + 2𝜋) = 𝑓(𝑥).Hence show that + + +⋯ = . (14X5=70)

Syllabus

Module 1 (Linear algebra)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 8.1,8.3,8.4)

Systems of linear equations, Solution by Gauss elimination, row echelon form and rank of a matrix,
fundamental theorem for linear systems (homogeneous and non-homogeneous, without proof),
Eigen values and eigen vectors. Diagonaliztion of matrices, orthogonal transformation, quadratic
forms and their canonical forms.

Module 2 (multivariable calculus-Differentiation)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 13.3, 13.4, 13.5, 13.8)

Concept of limit and continuity of functions of two variables, partial derivatives, Differentials, Local
Linear approximations, chain rule, total derivative, Relative maxima and minima, Absolute maxima
and minima on closed and bounded set.

Module 3(multivariable calculus-Integration)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 14.1, 14.2, 14.3, 14.5, 14.6, 14.8)

Double integrals (Cartesian), reversing the order of integration, Change of coordinates (Cartesian to
polar), finding areas and volume using double integrals, mass and centre of gravity of
inhomogeneous laminas using double integral. Triple integrals, volume calculated as triple integral,
triple integral in cylindrical and spherical coordinates (computations involving spheres, cylinders).
Module 4 (sequences and series)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 9.1, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6)

Convergence of sequences and series, convergence of geometric series and p-series(without proof),
test of convergence (comparison, ratio and root tests without proof); Alternating series and Leibnitz
test, absolute and conditional convergence.

Module 5 (Series representation of functions)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 9.8, 9.9. Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 11.1, 11.2,
11.6 )

Taylor series (without proof, assuming the possibility of power series expansion in appropriate
domains), Binomial series and series representation of exponential, trigonometric, logarithmic
functions (without proofs of convergence); Fourier series, Euler formulas, Convergence of Fourier
series (without proof), half range sine and cosine series, Parseval’s theorem (without proof).

Text Books

1. H. Anton, I. Biven,S.Davis, “Calculus”, Wiley, 10th edition, 2015.

2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10 thEdition, John Wiley & Sons, 2016.

Reference Books

1. J. Stewart, Essential Calculus, Cengage, 2nd edition, 2017

2. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9 th Edition, Pearson, Reprint,
2002.

3. Peter V. O'Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics , Cengage, 7th Edition, 2012

4. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.

5. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36 Edition, 2010.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Linear Algebra (10 hours)

1.1 Systems of linear equations, Solution by Gauss elimination 1

1.2 Row echelon form, finding rank from row echelon form, fundamental 3
theorem for linear systems

1.3 Eigen values and eigen vectors 2

1.4 Diagonaliztion of matrices, orthogonal transformation, quadratic forms 4

 and their canonical forms.

2 Multivariable calculus-Differentiation (8 hours)

2.1 Concept of limit and continuity of functions of two variables, partial 2

derivatives

2.2 Differentials, Local Linear approximations 2

2.3 Chain rule, total derivative 2

2.4 Maxima and minima 2

3 Multivariable calculus-Integration (10 hours)

3.1 Double integrals (Cartesian)-evaluation 2

3.2 Change of order of integration in double integrals, change of coordinates 2

(Cartesian to polar),

3.3 Finding areas and volumes, mass and centre of gravity of plane laminas 3

3.4 Triple integrals 3

4 Sequences and series (8 hours)

4.1 Convergence of sequences and series, geometric and p-series 2

4.2 Test of convergence( comparison, ratio and root ) 4

4.3 Alternating series and Leibnitz test, absolute and conditional convergence 2

5 Series representation of functions (9 hours)

5.1 Taylor series, Binomial series and series representation of exponential, 3

trigonometric, logarithmic functions;

5.2 Fourier series, Euler formulas, Convergence of Fourier series(Dirichlet’s 3

conditions)

5.3 Half range sine and cosine series, Parseval’s theorem. 3

 PHT ENGINEERING PHYSICS A CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
100 (FOR CIRCUIT BRANCHES) INTRODUCTION
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The aim of the Engineering Physics Program is to offer students a solid background in the
fundamentals of Physics and to impart that knowledge in engineering disciplines. The
program is designed to develop scientific attitudes and enable the students to correlate
the concepts of Physics with the core programmes

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics, Mathematical course on vector calculus,

differential equations and linear algebra

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Compute the quantitative aspects of waves and oscillations in engineering systems.

CO 2 Apply the interaction of light with matter through interference, diffraction and identify
these phenomena in different natural optical processes and optical instruments.

CO 3 Analyze the behaviour of matter in the atomic and subatomic level through the principles of
quantum mechanics to perceive the microscopic processes in electronic devices.

CO 4 Classify the properties of magnetic materials and apply vector calculus to static magnetic
fields and use Maxwell’s equations to diverse engineering problems

CO 5 Analyze the principles behind various superconducting applications, explain the working of
solid state lighting devices and fibre optic communication system

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2 1 2 1
CO 2 3 2 1 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 1
CO 4 3 1 1 2 1
CO 5 3 1 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the effect of damping force on oscillators.

2. Distinguish between transverse and longitudinal waves.

3. (a) Derive an expression for the fundamental frequency of transverse vibration in a

stretched string.

(b) Calculate the fundamental frequency of a string of length 2 m weighing 6 g kept

stretched by a load of 600 kg.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain colours in thin films.

2. Distinguish between Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction.

3. (a) Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and obtain the expression for radii of bright and
dark rings in reflected system. Also explain how it is used to determine the wavelength of
a monochromatic source of light.

(b) A liquid of refractive index µ is introduced between the lens and glass plate.
 What happens to the fringe system? Justify your answer.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Give the physical significance of wave function ?

2. What are excitons ?

3. (a) Solve Schrodinger equation for a particle in a one dimensional box and obtain its
energy eigen values and normalised wave functions.

(b) Calculate the first three energy values of an electron in a one dimensional box of width
1 A0 in electron volt.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Compare displacement current and conduction current.

2. Mention any four properties of ferro magnetic materials.

3. (a) Starting from Maxwell’s equations, derive the free space electromagnetic wave
equation and show that velocity of electromagnetic wave is 1/ (µo εo) ½

(b) An electromagnetic wave is described by E = 100 exp 8πi [10 14 t – (10 6 z / 3)] V/m.
Find the direction of propagation of the wave,speed of the wave and magnetic flux
density in the wave.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the working of a solar cell.

2. Distinguish between Type I and Type II super conductors.

3. (a) Define numerical aperture and derive an expression for it.

(b) Explain the working of intensity modulated fibre optic sensor.

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: PHT 100

Course Name: Engineering Physics A

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Compare electrical and mechanical oscillators

2. Distinguish between longitudinal and transverse waves

3. Write a short note on antireflection coating.

4. Diffraction of light is not as evident in daily experience as that of sound waves. Give reason.

5. State and explain Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle. With the help of it explain natural

line broadening.

6. Explain surface to volume ratio of nanomaterials.

7. State Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction.

8. Compare displacement current and conduction current

9. List four important applications of superconductors.

10. Give the working principle of LED. (10x3=30)

PART B

Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module 1
11. (a) Derive the differential equation of damped harmonic oscillator and deduce its
solution.Discuss the cases of over damped, critically damped and under damped cases. (10)

(b) The frequency of a tuning fork is 500 Hz and its Q factor is 7×10 4. Find the relaxation time.
Also calculate the time after which its energy becomes 1/10 of its initial undamped value.(4)

12. (a) Derive an expression for the velocity of propagation of a transverse wave in a stretched
string. Deduce laws of transverse vibrations. (10)

(b) The equation of transverse vibration of a stretched string is given by y =0.00327 sin (72.1x-
2.72t)m, in which the numerical constants are in S.I units. Evaluate (i) Amplitude (ii) Wavelength
(iii) Frequency and (iv)Velocity of the wave. (4)

Module 2

13.(a)Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and show that the radius of dark ring is
proportional to the square root of natural numbers. How can we use Newton’s rings
experiment to determine the refractive index of a liquid. (10)

(b) Two pieces of plane glass are placed together with a piece of paper between two at one
end. Find the angle of the wedge in seconds if the film is viewed with a monochromatic light of
wavelength 4800Å. Given β = 0.0555 cm. (4)

14. (a) Explain the diffraction due to a plane transmission grating. Obtain the grating equation. (10)

(b) A grating has 6000 lines per cm. Find the angular separation of the two yellow lines
of mercury of wavelengths 577 nm and 579 nm in the second order. (4)

Module 3

15.(a) Derive time dependent and independent Schrodinger equations. (10)

(b) An electron is confined to one dimensional potential box of length 2Å. Calculate the energies
corresponding to the first and second quantum states in eV. (4)

16.(a) Classify nanomaterials based on dimensionality of quantum confinement and explain the
following nanostructures. (i) nano sheets (ii) nano wires (iii) quantum dots. (10)

(b) Find the de Broglie wavelength of electron whose kinetic energy is 15 eV. (4)

Module 4

17.(a) State Poynting’s Theorem. Calculate the value of Poynting vector at the surface of the sun if
the power radiated by the sun is 3.8 x 10 26 W and its radius is 7 X 10 8 m. (5)
 (b) Distinguish between paramagnetic, diamagnetic and ferromagnetic materials. (9)

18.(a) Starting from Maxwell’s Equations, derive electromagnetic wave equations in free space. (10)

(b) If the magnitude of H in a plane wave is 1 A/m, find the magnitude of E in free space. (4)

Module 5

19.(a) Show that superconductors are perfect diamagnets. Distinguish between Type I and

Type II superconductors with suitable examples. (10)

(b) Write a short note on high temperature superconductors. (4)

20.(a) Define numerical aperture of an optic fibre and derive an expression for the NA of a step
index fibre with a neat diagram. (10)

(b) Calculate the numerical aperture and acceptance angle of a fibre with a core refractive index
of 1.54 and a cladding refractive index of 1.50 when the fibre is inside water of refractive
index 1.33. (4) (14x5=70)
 Syllabus

ENGINEERING PHYSICS A
(FOR CIRCUIT BRANCHES)

Module 1
Oscillations and Waves
Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of differential equation and its solution,
Over damped, Critically damped and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression, Forced
oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for amplitude and phase of forced
oscillations, Amplitude Resonance-Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness
of Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators

Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its solution, Three dimensional
wave equation and its solution (no derivation), Distinction between transverse and longitudinal
waves, Transverse vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration

Module 2
Wave Optics
Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin films - Cosine law (Reflected
system), Derivation of the conditions of constructive and destructive Interference, Interference due
to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings -
Measurement of wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings

Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, Diffraction grating-Grating

equation, Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive power of a grating with
expression (no derivation)

Module 3
Quantum Mechanics & Nanotechnology
Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of Particles, Uncertainty principle,
Applications-Absence of electrons inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening mechanism,
Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave equations-Physical meaning of
wave function, Particle in a one dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and
energy eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)

Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to volume ratio for nanomaterials,
Quantum confinement in one dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots, Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical,
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)

Module 4
Magnetism & Electro Magnetic Theory
Magnetic field and Magnetic flux density, Gauss’s law for Magnetic flux density, Ampere’s Circuital
law, Faraday’s law in terms of EMF produced by changing magnetic flux, Magnetic permeability and
susceptibility, Classification of magnetic materials-para, dia and ferromagnetic materials
Fundamentals of vector calculus, concept of divergence, gradient and curl along with physical
significance, Line, Surface and Volume integrals, Gauss divergence theorem & Stokes’ theorem,
Equation of continuity, Derivation of Maxwell’s equations in vacuum, Comparison of displacement
current with conduction current. Electromagnetic waves, Velocity of Electromagnetic waves in free
space, Flow of energy and Poynting’s vector (no derivation)

Module 5
Superconductivity & Photonics
Superconducting phenomena, Meissner effect and perfect diamagnetism, Types of superconductors-
Type I and Type II, BCS Theory (Qualitative), High temperature superconductors-Applications of
super conductivity

Introduction to photonics-Photonic devices-Light Emitting Diode, Photo detectors -Junction and PIN
photodiodes, Solar cells-I-V Characteristics, Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of
fibres-Step index and Graded index fibres, Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic
communication system (block diagram), Industrial, Medical and Technological applications of optical
fibre, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity Modulated and Phase modulated sensors.

Text Books

1. M.N.Avadhanulu, P.G.Kshirsagar,TVS Arun Murthy “A Text book of Engineering Physics”, S.Chand

&Co., Revised Edition 2019

2. H.K.Malik , A.K. Singh, “Engineering Physics” McGraw Hill Education, Second Edition 2017

Reference Books

1. Arthur Beiser, “Concepts of Modern Physics ", Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 6th Edition
2003

2. D.K. Bhattacharya, Poonam Tandon, “Engineering Physics”, Oxford University Press, 2015

3. Md.N.Khan & S.Panigrahi “Principles of Engineering Physics 1&2”, Cambridge University

Press, 2016

4. Aruldhas G., “Engineering Physics”, PHI Pvt. Ltd., 2015

5. Ajoy Ghatak, “Optics”, Mc Graw Hill Education, Sixth Edition, 2017

6. T. Pradeep, “Nano:The Essentials’’, McGraw Hill India Ltd, 2007

7. Halliday, Resnick, Walker, “Fundamentals of Physics’’, John Wiley & Sons.Inc, 2001

8. David J Griffiths, “Introduction to Electrodynamics’’, Addison-Wesley publishing, 3rd Edition,

1999

9. Premlet B., “Advanced Engineering Physics”, Phasor Books,10th edition,2017

10. I. Dominic and. A. Nahari, “A Text Book of Engineering physics”, Owl Books Publishers,
Revised edition, 2016
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Oscillations and Waves (9 hours)

1.1 Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of 2 hrs

differential equation and its solution, Over damped, Critically damped
and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression
1.2 Forced oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for
amplitude and phase of forced oscillations, Amplitude Resonance- 3hrs
Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness of
Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators
1.3 Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its
solution, Three dimensional wave equation and its solution (no
derivation) 2 hrs
1.4 Distinction between transverse and longitudinal waves. Transverse 2 hrs
vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration
2 Wave Optics (9 hours)

2.1 Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin 2 hrs

films - Cosine law (Reflected system), Derivation of the conditions of
constructive and destructive Interference
2.2 Interference due to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness 4 hr
and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings - Measurement of
wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings
2.3 Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, 2 hrs
Diffraction grating-Grating equation
2.4 Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive 1 hr
power of a grating with expression (no derivation)
3 Quantum Mechanics &Nanotechnology (9hours)

3.1 Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of 2 hrs
Particles, Uncertainty principle, Applications-Absence of electrons
inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening mechanism
3.2 Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave 4 hrs
equations-Physical Meaning of wave function, Particle in a one
dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and energy
eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)
3.3 Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to 2 hrs
volume ratio for nanomaterials, Quantum confinement in one
dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots
3.4 Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical 1 hr
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)
4 Magnetism & Electro Magnetic Theory (9 hours)
4.1 Magnetic field and Magnetic flux density, Gauss’s law for Magnetic flux 2 hrs
 density, Ampere’s Circuital law, Faraday’s law in terms of EMF
produced by changing magnetic flux
4.2 Explanation for Magnetic permeability and susceptibility Classification 1 hr
of magnetic materials- para, dia and ferromagnetic materials
4.3 Fundamentals of vector calculus, concept of divergence, gradient and 2 hrs
curl along with physical significance, Line, Surface and Volume integrals,
Gauss divergence theorem & Stokes’ theorem
4.4 Equation of continuity, Derivation of Maxwell’s equations in vacuum, 4 hrs
Comparison of displacement current with conduction current.
Electromagnetic waves, Velocity of Electromagnetic waves in free
space, Flow of energy and Poynting’s vector (no derivation)
5 Superconductivity &Photonics (9hours)
5.1 Super conducting Phenomena, Meissner effect and perfect 2 hrs
diamagnetism, Types of superconductors-Type I and Type II
5.2 BCS Theory (Qualitative), High temperature superconductors, 2 hrs
Applications of super conductivity
5.3 Introduction to photonics-Photonic devices-Light Emitting Diode, Photo 2 hrs
detectors -Junction and PIN photodiodes, Solar cells-I-V Characteristics
5.4 Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of fibres-Step index 3 hrs
and Graded index fibres, Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic
communication system (block diagram), Industrial, Medical and
Technological applications of optical fibre, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity
Modulated and Phase modulated sensors
 PHT ENGINEERING PHYSICS B Category L T P CREDIT Year of
110 (FOR NON-CIRCUIT BRANCHES) Introduction
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The aim of the Engineering Physics program is to offer students a solid background in the
fundamentals of Physics and to impart that knowledge in engineering disciplines. The
program is designed to develop scientific attitudes and enable the students to
correlate the concepts of Physics with the core programmes

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics, Mathematical course on vector calculus,

differential equations and linear algebra

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Compute the quantitative aspects of waves and oscillations in engineering systems.

CO 2 Apply the interaction of light with matter through interference, diffraction and identify
these phenomena in different natural optical processes and optical instruments.

CO 3 Analyze the behaviour of matter in the atomic and subatomic level through the principles
of quantum mechanics to perceive the microscopic processes in electronic devices.

CO 4 Apply the knowledge of ultrasonics in non-destructive testing and use the principles of
acoustics to explain the nature and characterization of acoustic design and to provide a safe
and healthy environment

CO 5 Apply the comprehended knowledge about laser and fibre optic communication systems in
various engineering applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1 2 1
CO 2 3 2 1 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 1
CO 4 3 1 2 1
CO 5 3 2 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

MARKS MARKS

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Explain the effect of damping force on oscillators.
2. Distinguish between transverse and longitudinal waves.
3. (a) Derive an expression for the fundamental frequency of transverse vibration in a
stretched string.
(b) Calculate the fundamental frequency of a string of length 2 m weighing 6 g kept
stretched by a load of 600 kg.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain colours in thin films.
2. Distinguish between Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction.
3. (a) Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and obtain the expression for radii of bright
and dark rings in reflected system. Also explain how it is used to determine the
wavelength of a monochromatic source of light.
(b) A liquid of refractive index µ is introduced between the lens and glass plate. What
happens to the fringe system? Justify your answer.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Give the physical significance of wave function?

 2. What are excitons ?
3. (a) Solve Schrodinger equation for a particle in a one dimensional box and obtain its energy
eigen values and normalised wave functions.
(b) Calculate the first three energy values of an electron in a one dimensional box of width
1 A0 in electron volt.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain reverberation and reverberation time.
2. How ultrasonic waves are used in non-destructive testing.
3. (a) With a neat diagram explain how ultrasonic waves are produced by a piezoelectric
oscillator.
(b) Calculate frequency of ultrasonic waves that can be produced by a nickel rod of length 4
cm. (Young’s Modulus = 207 G Pa, Density = 8900 Kg /m3)

Course Outcome 5 (CO 5):

1. Distinguish between spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
2. Explain optical resonators.
3. (a) Explain the construction and working of Ruby Laser.
(b) Calculate the numerical aperture and acceptance angle of a fibre with a core refractive
index of 1.54 and a cladding refractive index of 1.50 when the fibre is inside water of
refractive index 1.33.
.
Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: PHT 110

Course Name: Engineering Physics B

Max.Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Compare electrical and mechanical oscillators.

2. Distinguish between longitudinal and transverse waves.

3. Write a short note on antireflection coating.

4. Diffraction of light is not as evident in daily experience as that of sound waves. Give reason.

5. State and explain Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle. With the help of it explain natural

line broadening.

6. Explain surface to volume ratio of nanomaterials.

7. Define sound intensity level. Give the values of threshold of hearing and threshold of pain.

8. Describe the method of non-destructive testing using ultra sonic waves

9. Explain the condition of population inversion

10. Distinguish between step index and graded index fibre. (10x3=30)

PART B

Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module 1

11. (a) Derive the differential equation of damped harmonic oscillator and deduce its
solution. Discuss the cases of over damped, critically damped and under damped
cases. (10)
 (b) The frequency of a tuning fork is 500 Hz and its Q factor is 7×104. Find the relaxation
time. Also calculate the time after which its energy becomes 1/10 of its initial
undamped value. (4)

12. (a) Derive an expression for the velocity of propagation of a transverse wave in a stretched
string. Deduce laws of transverse vibrations. (10)

(b) The equation of transverse vibration of a stretched string is given by y =0.00327 sin
(72.1x-2.72t ) m, in which the numerical constants are in S.I units. Evaluate (i)
Amplitude (ii) Wavelength (iii) Frequency and (iv) Velocity of the wave. (4)

Module 2

13. (a) Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and show that the radius of dark ring is
proportional to the square root of natural numbers. How can we use Newton’s rings
experiment to determine the refractive index of a liquid? (10)

(b) Two pieces of plane glass are placed together with a piece of paper between two at
one end. Find the angle of the wedge in seconds if the film is viewed with a
monochromatic light of wavelength 4800Å. Given β = 0.0555 cm. (4)

14. (a) Explain the diffraction due to a plane transmission grating. Obtain the grating equation.
(10)

(b) A grating has 6000 lines per cm. Find the angular separation of the two yellow lines
of mercury of wavelengths 577 nm and 579 nm in the second order. (4)

Module 3

15. (a) Derive time dependent and independent Schrodinger equations. (10)

(b) An electron is confined to one dimensional potential box of length 2Å. Calculate the
energies corresponding to the first and second quantum states in eV. (4)

16. (a) Classify nanomaterials based on dimensionality of quantum confinement and explain the
following nanostructures. (i) nano sheets (ii) nano wires (iii) quantum dots. (10)

(b) Find the de Broglie wavelength of electron whose kinetic energy is 15 eV. (4)

Module 4

17. (a) Explain reverberation and reverberation time? What is the significance of
Reverberation time. Explain the factors affecting the acoustics of a building and their
corrective measures? (10)
(b) The volume of a hall is 3000 m3. It has a total absorption of 100m2 sabine. If the hall is filled
with audience who add another 80 m2sabine, then find the difference in reverberation time. (4)

18. (a) With a neat diagram explain how ultrasonic waves are produced by piezoelectric
oscillator. Also discuss the piezoelectric method of detection of ultrasonic waves. (10)
 (b) An ultrasonic source of 0.09 MHz sends down a pulse towards the sea bed which
returns after 0.55 sec. The velocity of sound in sea water is 1800 m/s. Calculate the
depth of the sea and the wavelength of the pulse. (4)
Module 5

19. (a) Outline the construction and working of Ruby laser. (8)

(b) What is the principle of holography? How is a hologram recorded? (6)

20. (a) Define numerical aperture of an optic fibre and derive an expression for the NA of a step
index fibre with a neat diagram. (10)

(b) An optical fibre made with core of refractive index 1.5 and cladding with a fractional
index difference of 0.0006. Find refractive index of cladding and numerical aperture. (4)

(14x5=70)
 SYLLABUS

ENGINEERING PHYSICS B (FOR NON-CIRCUIT BRANCHES)

Module 1
Oscillations and Waves
Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of differential equation and its solution,
Over damped, Critically damped and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression, Forced
oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for amplitude and phase of forced
oscillations, Amplitude Resonance-Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness
of Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators

Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its solution, Three dimensional
wave equation and its solution (no derivation), Distinction between transverse and longitudinal
waves, Transverse vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration

Module 2
Wave Optics
Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin films - Cosine law (Reflected
system), Derivation of the conditions of constructive and destructive Interference, Interference due
to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings -
Measurement of wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings

Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, Diffraction grating-Grating

equation, Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive power of a grating with
expression (no derivation)

Module 3
Quantum Mechanics & Nanotechnology
Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of Particles, Uncertainty principle,
Applications-Absence of electrons inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening Mechanism,
Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave equations-Physical Meaning of
wave function, Particle in a one dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and
energy eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)

Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to volume ratio for nanomaterials,
Quantum confinement in one dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots, Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical,
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)

Module 4
Acoustics & Ultrasonics
Acoustics, Classification of sound-Musical sound-Noise, Characteristics of Musical Sounds-Pitch or
frequency-Loudness or Intensity-Measurement of Intensity level-Decibel-Quality or timbre,
Absorption coefficient, Reverberation-Reverberation time-Significance- Sabine’s formula (no
derivation), Factors affecting architectural acoustics and their remedies

Ultrasonics-Production- Magnetostriction effect and Piezoelectric effect, Magnetostriction oscillator

and Piezoelectric oscillator –Working, Detection of ultrasonic waves - Thermal and Piezoelectric
 methods, Ultrasonic diffractometer- Expression for the velocity of ultrasonic waves in a liquid ,
Applications of ultrasonic waves -SONAR,NDT and Medical

Module 5
Laser and Fibre optics
Properties of laser, Absorption and emission of radiation, Spontaneous and stimulated emission,
Einstein’s coefficients (no derivation), Population inversion, Metastable states, basic components of
laser, Active medium, Pumping mechanism, Optical resonant cavity, working principle, Construction
and working of Ruby laser and Helium neon laser ,Construction and working of semiconductor
laser(Qualitative) ,Applications of laser, Holography, Difference between hologram and photograph,
Recording of hologram and reconstruction of image, Applications

Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of fibres-Step index and Graded index fibres,
Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic communication system (block diagram), Industrial,
Medical and Technological applications, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity Modulated and Phase
modulated sensors

Text Books
1. M.N.Avadhanulu, P.G.Kshirsagar,TVS Arun Murthy “A Text book of Engineering Physics”, S.Chand
&Co., Revised Edition, 2019.

2. H.K.Malik , A.K. Singh, “Engineering Physics” McGraw Hill Education, Second Edition, 2017.

Reference Books

1. Arthur Beiser, “Concepts of Modern Physics ", Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 6th Edition 2003

2. D.K. Bhattacharya, Poonam Tandon, “Engineering Physics”, Oxford University Press, 2015

3. Md.N.Khan & S.Panigrahi “Principles of Engineering Physics 1&2”, Cambridge University Press,
2016

4. Aruldhas G., “Engineering Physics”, PHI Pvt. Ltd., 2015

5. Ajoy Ghatak, “Optics”, Mc Graw Hill Education, Sixth Edition, 2017

6. T. Pradeep, “Nano:The Essentials’’, McGraw Hill India Ltd, 2007

7. B. B. Laud, “Lasers and Non linear optics”, New age International Publishers, 2nd Edition ,2005

8. Premlet B., “Advanced Engineering Physics”, Phasor Books,10th edition ,2017

9. I. Dominic and. A. Nahari, “A Text Book of Engineering physics”, Owl Books Publishers, Revised
edition, 2016
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Oscillations and Waves ( 9 hours)

1.1 Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of 2 hrs

differential equation and its solution, Over damped, Critically damped
and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression
1.2 Forced oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for
amplitude and phase of forced oscillations, Amplitude Resonance- 3hrs
Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness of
Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators
1.3 Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its
solution, Three dimensional wave equation and its solution (no
derivation) 2 hrs
1.4 Distinction between transverse and longitudinal waves, Transverse 2 hrs
vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration
2 Wave Optics (9 hours)

2.1 Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin 2 hrs

films - Cosine law (Reflected system), Derivation of the conditions of
constructive and destructive Interference
2.2 Interference due to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness 4 hrs
and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings - Measurement of
wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings
2.3 Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, 2 hrs
Diffraction grating-Grating equation
2.4 Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive 1 hr
power of a grating with expression (no derivation)
3 Quantum Mechanics &Nanotechnology (9hours)

3.1 Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of 2 hrs
Particles, Uncertainty principle, Applications-Absence of electrons
inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening mechanism
3.2 Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave 4 hrs
equations-Physical Meaning of wave function, Particle in a one
dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and energy
eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)
3.3 Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to 2 hrs
volume ratio for nanomaterials, Quantum confinement in one
dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots
3.4 Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical 1 hr
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)
4 Acoustics & Ultrasonics (9hrs)

4.1 Acoustics, Classification of sound-Musical sound-Noise, Characteristics 3 hrs

 of Musical Sounds-Pitch or frequency-Loudness or Intensity-
Measurement of Intensity level-Decibel-Quality or timbre, Absorption
coefficient, Reverberation-Reverberation time-Significance- Sabine’s
formula (no derivation)
4.2 Factors affecting architectural acoustics and their remedies 1 hr

4.3 Ultrasonics-Production- Magnetostriction effect and Piezoelectric 3hrs

effect, Magnetostriction oscillator and Piezoelectric oscillator –
Working, Detection of ultrasonic waves - Thermal and Piezoelectric
methods
4.4 Ultrasonic diffractometer- Expression for the velocity of ultrasonic 2 hr
waves in a liquid ,Applications of ultrasonic waves -SONAR,NDT and
Medical.
5 Laser and Fibre optics ( 9hours)

5.1 Properties of laser, Absorption and emission of radiation, Spontaneous 2 hrs

and stimulated emission, Einstein’s coefficients (no derivation),
Population inversion, Metastable states, basic components of laser,
Active medium, Pumping mechanism, Optical resonant cavity, working
principle
5.2 Construction and working of Ruby laser and Helium neon laser 3 hrs
,Construction and working of semiconductor laser(Qualitative)
Applications of laser
5.3 Holography, Difference between hologram and photograph, Recording 1 hr
of hologram and reconstruction of image, Applications
5.4 Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of fibres-Step index 3 hrs
and Graded index fibres, Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic
communication system (block diagram), Industrial, Medical and
Technological applications, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity Modulated and
Phase modulated sensors
 CYT ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
100 INTRODUCTION
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: To enable the students to acquire knowledge in the concepts of chemistry for engineering
applications and to familiarize the students with different application oriented topics like
spectroscopy, electrochemistry, instrumental methods etc. Also familiarize the students with topics
like mechanism of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods, SEM, stereochemistry, polymers,
desalination etc., which enable them to develop abilities and skills that are relevant to the study and
practice of chemistry.

Prerequisite: Concepts of chemistry introduced at the plus two levels in schools

Course outcomes: After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO 1 Apply the basic concepts of electrochemistry and corrosion to explore its possible
applications in various engineering fields.
CO 2 Understand various spectroscopic techniques like UV-Visible, IR, NMR and its
applications.
CO 3 Apply the knowledge of analytical method for characterizing a chemical mixture or a
compound. Understand the basic concept of SEM for surface characterisation of
nanomaterials.
CO 4 Learn about the basics of stereochemistry and its application. Apply the knowledge of
conducting polymers and advanced polymers in engineering.
CO 5 Study various types of water treatment methods to develop skills for treating
wastewater.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 1 2 1
CO 2 1 1 1 2
CO 3 1 1 1 2
CO 4 2 1
CO 5 1 1 3
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts- Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10
questions (2 questions from each module), having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module, of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 subdivisions and carries 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO 1):

1. What is calomel electrode? Give the reduction reaction (3 Marks)

2. List three important advantages of potentiometric titration (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain how electroless plating copper and nickel are carried out (10 Marks)

(b) Calculate the emf of the following cell at 30oC, Z n / Zn 2+ (0.1M) // Ag+ (0.01M) // Ag.

Given E0 Zn2+/Zn = -0.76 V, E0 Ag+/Ag = 0.8 V. (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 2 (CO 2)

1. State Beer Lambert’s law (3 Marks)

2. List the important applications of IR spectroscopy (3 Marks)

3. (a) What is Chemical shift? What are factors affecting Chemical shift? How 1H NMR spectrum of
CH3COCH2Cl interpreted using the concept of chemical shift. (10 Marks)

(b) Calculate the force constant of HF molecule, if it shows IR absorption at 4138 cm -1. Given that
atomic masses of hydrogen and fluorine are 1u and 19u respectively. (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 3 (CO 3):

1. Distinguish between TGA and DTA (3 Marks)

2. Give two differences between GSC and GLC (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain the principle, instrumentation and procedure of HPLC (10 Marks)

(b) Interpret TGA of CaC2O4. H2O (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 4 (CO 4):

1. Explain the geometrical isomerism in double bonds (3 Marks)

2. What are the rules of assigning R-S notation? (3 Marks)

3. (a) What are conducting polymers? How it is classified? Give the preparation of polyaniline
(10 Marks)

(b) Draw the stereoisomers possible for CH3-(CHOH)2-COOH (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 5 (CO 5):

1. What is degree of hardness? (3 Marks)

2. Define BOD and COD (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain the EDTA estimation of hardness (10 Marks)

(b) Standard hard water contains 20 g of CaCO3 per liter,50 mL of this required 30mL of EDTA
solution, 50mL of sample water required 20mL of EDTA solution. 50mL sample water after boiling
required 14 mL EDTA solution. Calculate the temporary hardness of the given sample of water, in
terms of ppm. (4 Marks)

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Total Pages:
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CYT100,
Course Name: ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks Marks
1 What is potentiometric titration? How the end point is determined graphically? (3)
2 What is Galvanic series? How is it different from electrochemical series? (3)
3 Which of the following molecules can give IR absorption? Give reason? (3)
(a) O2 (b) H2O (c) N2 (d) HCl
4 Which of the following molecules show UV-Visible absorption? Give reason. (3)
(a) Ethane (b) Butadiene (c) Benzene
5 What are the visualization techniques used in TLC? (3)
6 Write the three important applications of nanomaterials. (3)
7 Draw the Fischer projection formula and find R-S notation of (3)

8 Write the structure of a) Polypyrroleb) Kevlar. (3

9 What is break point chlorination? (3)
10 What is reverse osmosis? (3)

PART B
Answer any one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks
Module 1
11 a) Give the construction of Li-ion cell. Give the reactions that take place at the (10)
electrodes during charging and discharging. What happens to anodic material when
the cell is 100% charged.
b) Calculate the standard electrode potential of Cu, if its electrode potential at 25 °C (4)
2+
is 0.296 V and the concentration of Cu is 0.015 M.
OR
12 a) Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion of iron in oxygen rich and oxygen (10)
deficient acidic and basic environments.
b) Given below are reduction potentials of some species (4)

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5e → Mn2+ + 4H2O; E0 = +1.51 V

Cl2 + 2e → 2Cl- ; E0 = +1.36 V

S2O82- + 2e → 2SO42- ; E0 = +1.98 V

Use the above data to examine whether the acids, dil. HCl and dil. H2SO4 , can be used
to provide acid medium in redox titrations involving KMnO4.
Module 2
13 a) What is spin-spin splitting? Draw the NMR spectrum of (i) CH3 CH2CH2 Br (ii) (10)
CH3CH(Br)CH3 Explain how NMR spectrum can be used to identify the two isomers.
b) A dye solution of concentration 0.08M shows absorbance of 0.012 at 600 nm; while a (4)
test solution of same dye shows absorbance of 0.084 under same conditions. Find the
concentration of the test solution.
OR
14 a) Explain the basic principle of UV-Visible spectroscopy. What are the possible (10)
electronic transitions? Explain with examples.
b) Sketch the vibrational modes of CO2 and H2O. Which of them are IR active? (4)
 Module 3
15 a) Explain the principle, instrumentation and procedure involved in gas chromatography. (10)
b) Explain the DTA of CaC2O4.H2O with a neat sketch. (4)
OR
16 a) Explain the various chemical methods used for the synthesis of nanomaterial (10)
b) How TGA is used to analyse the thermal stability of polymers? (4)

Module 4

17 a) What are conformers? Draw thecis and transisomers of 1, 3-dimethylcylohexane. (10)

Which conformer (chair form) is more stable in each case?
b) What is ABS? Give properties and applications. (4)
OR
18 a) Explain the various structural isomers with suitable example. (10)
b) What is OLED? Draw a labelled diagram. (4)
Module 5
19 a) What are ion exchange resins? Explain ion exchange process for removal of hardness (10)
of water? How exhausted resins are regenerated?
b) 50 mL sewage water is diluted to 2000 mL with dilution water; the initial dissolved (4)
oxygen was 7.7 ppm. The dissolved oxygen level after 5 days of incubation was 2.4
ppm. Find the BOD of the sewage.
OR
20 a) What are the different steps in sewage treatment? Give the flow diagram. Explain the (10)
working of trickling filter.
b) Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of a water sample which contains (4)
[Ca2+] = 160 mg/L, [Mg2+] = 192 mg/L and [HCO3-] = 122 mg/L.

Syllabus

Module 1

Electrochemistry and Corrosion

Introduction - Differences between electrolytic and electrochemical cells - Daniel cell - redox
reactions - cell representation. Different types of electrodes (brief) - Reference electrodes - SHE -
Calomel electrode - Glass Electrode - Construction and Working. Single electrode potential -
definition - Helmholtz electrical double layer -Determination of E0 using calomel
electrode.Determination of pH using glass electrode.Electrochemical series and its applications. Free
energy and EMF - Nernst Equation - Derivation - single electrode and cell (Numericals) -Application -
Variation of emf with temperature. Potentiometric titration - Introduction -Redox titration
only.Lithiumion cell - construction and working.Conductivity- Measurement of conductivity of a
solution (Numericals).

Corrosion-Electrochemicalcorrosion – mechanism. Galvanic series- cathodic protection - electroless

plating –Copper and Nickel plating.
Module 2

Spectroscopic Techniques and Applications

Introduction- Types of spectrum - electromagnetic spectrum - molecular energy levels - Beer

Lambert’s law (Numericals). UV-Visible Spectroscopy – Principle - Types of electronic transitions -
Energy level diagram of ethane, butadiene, benzene and hexatriene. Instrumentation of UV-Visible
spectrometer and applications.IR-Spectroscopy – Principle - Number of vibrational modes -
Vibrational energy states of a diatomic molecule and -Determination of force constant of diatomic
molecule (Numericals) –Applications. 1H NMR spectroscopy – Principle - Relation between field
strength and frequency - chemical shift - spin-spin splitting (spectral problems ) - coupling constant
(definition) - applications of NMR- including MRI (brief).

Module 3

Instrumental Methods and Nanomaterials

Thermal analysis –TGA- Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and applications – TGA of
CaC2O4.H2O and polymers. DTA-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and applications - DTA of
CaC2O4.H2O. Chromatographic methods - Basic principles and applications of column and TLC-
Retention factor. GC and HPLC-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) - retention time and
applications.

Nanomaterials - Definition - Classification - Chemical methods of preparation - Hydrolysis and

Reduction - Applications of nanomaterials - Surface characterisation -SEM – Principle and
instrumentation (block diagram).

Module 4

Stereochemistry and Polymer Chemistry

Isomerism-Structural, chain, position, functional, tautomerism and matamerism - Definition with

examples - Representation of 3D structures-Newman, Sawhorse, Wedge and Fischer projection of
substituted methane and ethane. Stereoisomerism - Geometrical isomerism in double bonds and
cycloalkanes (cis-trans and E-Z notations). R-S Notation – Rules and examples - Optical isomerism,
Chirality, Enantiomers and Diastereoisomers-Definition with examples.Conformational analysis of
ethane, butane, cyclohexane, mono and di methyl substituted cyclohexane.

Copolymers - Definition - Types - Random, Alternating, Block and Graft copolymers - ABS -
preparation, properties and applications.Kevlar-preparation, properties and applications.Conducting
polymers - Doping -Polyaniline and Polypyrrole - preparation properties and applications. OLED -
Principle, construction and advantages.

Module 5

Water Chemistry and Sewage Water Treatment

Water characteristics - Hardness - Types of hardness- Temporary and Permanent - Disadvantages of

hard water -Units of hardness- ppm and mg/L -Degree of hardness (Numericals) - Estimation of
hardness-EDTA method (Numericals). Water softening methods-Ion exchange process-Principle,
procedure and advantages. Reverse osmosis – principle, process and advantages. Municipal water
treatment (brief) - Disinfection methods - chlorination, ozone andUV irradiation.

Dissolved oxygen (DO) -Estimation (only brief procedure-Winkler’s method), BOD and COD-
definition, estimation (only brief procedure) and significance (Numericals). Sewage water treatment
- Primary, Secondary and Tertiary - Flow diagram -Trickling filter and UASB process.

Text Books

1. B. L. Tembe, Kamaluddin, M. S. Krishnan, “Engineering Chemistry (NPTEL Web-book)”,

2018.

2. P. W. Atkins, “Physical Chemistry”, Oxford University Press, 10th edn., 2014.

Reference Books

1. C. N. Banwell, “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy”, McGraw-Hill, 4thedn., 1995.

2. Donald L. Pavia, “Introduction to Spectroscopy”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd., 2015.

3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma, M. S. Pathania, “Principles of Physical Chemistry”, Vishal Publishing

Co., 47th Edition, 2017.

4. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merritt, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, CBS Publishers, 7th Edition,

2005.

5. Ernest L. Eliel, Samuel H. Wilen, “Stereo-chemistry of Organic Compounds”, WILEY, 2008.

6. Raymond B. Seymour, Charles E. Carraher, “Polymer Chemistry: An Introduction”, Marcel

Dekker Inc; 4th Revised Edition, 1996.
7. MuhammedArif, Annette Fernandez, Kavitha P. Nair “Engineering Chemistry”, Owl Books,
2019.

8. Ahad J., “Engineering Chemistry”, Jai Publication, 2019.

9. Roy K. Varghese, “Engineering Chemistry”, Crownplus Publishers, 2019.

10. Soney C. George,RinoLaly Jose, “Text Book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company
Pvt Ltd, 2019.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
(hrs)

1 Electrochemistry and Corrosion 9

1.1 Introduction - Differences between electrolytic and electrochemical cells- Daniel 2

cell - redox reactions - cell representation. Different types of electrodes (brief) -
Reference electrodes- SHE - Calomel electrode - Glass Electrode - Construction
and Working.

1.2 Single electrode potential – definition - Helmholtz electrical double layer - 3

Determination of E0 using calomel electrode. Determination of pH using glass
electrode. Electrochemical series and its applications. Free energy and EMF -
Nernst Equation – Derivation - single electrode and cell (Numericals) -Application
-Variation of emf with temperature.

1.3 Potentiometric titration - Introduction -Redox titration only. Lithiumion cell - 2

construction and working. Conductivity- Measurement of conductivity of a
solution (Numericals).

1.4 Corrosion-Electrochemicalcorrosion – mechanism. Galvanic series- cathodic 2

protection - electroless plating –Copper and Nickel plating.

2 Spectroscopic Techniques and Applications 9

2.1 Introduction- Types of spectrum - electromagnetic spectrum - molecular energy 2

levels - Beer Lambert’s law (Numericals).

2.2 UV-Visible Spectroscopy – Principle - Types of electronic transitions - Energy 2

level diagram of ethane, butadiene, benzene and hexatriene. Instrumentation of
UV-Visible spectrometer and applications.

2.3 IR-Spectroscopy – Principle - Number of vibrational modes -Vibrational energy 2

states of a diatomic molecule and -Determination of force constant of diatomic
molecule (Numericals) –Applications.
1
2.4 H NMR spectroscopy – Principle - Relation between field strength and frequency 3
- chemical shift - spin-spin splitting (spectral problems ) - coupling constant
(definition) - applications of NMR- including MRI (brief).

3 Instrumental Methods and Nanomaterials 9

3.1 Thermal analysis –TGA- Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and 2

applications – TGA of CaC2O4.H2O and polymers. DTA-Principle, instrumentation
(block diagram) and applications - DTA of CaC2O4.H2O.
3.2 Chromatographic methods - Basic principles and applications of column and TLC- 2
Retention factor.

3.3 GC and HPLC-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) - retention time and 2

applications.

3.4 Nanomaterials - Definition - Classification - Chemical methods of preparation - 3

Hydrolysis and Reduction - Applications of nanomaterials - Surface
characterisation -SEM – Principle and instrumentation (block diagram).

4 Stereochemistry and Polymer Chemistry 9

4.1 Isomerism-Structural, chain, position, functional, tautomerism and matamerism 2

- Definition with examples - Representation of 3D structures-Newman, Sawhorse,
Wedge and Fischer projection of substituted methane and ethane.
Stereoisomerism - Geometrical isomerism in double bonds and cycloalkanes (cis-
trans and E-Z notations).

4.2 R-S Notation – Rules and examples - Optical isomerism, Chirality, Enantiomers 1
and Diastereoisomers-Definition with examples.

4.3 Conformational analysis of ethane, butane, cyclohexane, mono and di methyl 2

substituted cyclohexane.

4.4 Copolymers - Definition - Types - Random, Alternating, Block and Graft 4

copolymers - ABS - preparation, properties and applications. Kevlar-preparation,
properties and applications. Conducting polymers - Doping -Polyaniline and
Polypyrrole - preparation properties and applications. OLED - Principle,
construction and advantages.

5 Water Chemistry and Sewage Water Treatment 9

5.1 Water characteristics - Hardness - Types of hardness- Temporary and Permanent 3

- Disadvantages of hard water -Units of hardness- ppm and mg/L -Degree of
hardness (Numericals) - Estimation of hardness-EDTA method (Numericals).
Water softening methods-Ion exchange process-Principle, procedure and
advantages. Reverse osmosis – principle, process and advantages.

5.2 Municipal water treatment (brief) - Disinfection methods - chlorination, ozone 2

andUV irradiation.

5.3 Dissolved oxygen (DO) -Estimation (only brief procedure-Winkler’s method), BOD 2
and COD-definition, estimation (only brief procedure) and significance
(Numericals).

5.4 Sewage water treatment - Primary, Secondary and Tertiary - Flow diagram - 2
Trickling filter and UASB process.
 EST ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of Introduction
100 MECHANICS ESC 2 1 0 3 2019

Preamble: Goal of this course is to expose the students to the fundamental concepts of mechanics
and enhance their problem-solving skills. It introduces students to the influence of applied force
system and the geometrical properties of the rigid bodies while stationary or in motion. After this
course students will be able to recognize similar problems in real-world situations and respond
accordingly.
Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Recall principles and theorems related to rigid body mechanics

CO 2 Identify and describe the components of system of forces acting on the rigid body

Apply the conditions of equilibrium to various practical problems involving different force
CO 3 system.

CO 4 Choose appropriate theorems, principles or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.

CO 5 Solve problems involving rigid bodies, applying the properties of distributed areas and masses

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks) End Semester Examination (Marks)
Remember 10 10 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Part A
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): (One question from each module to meet the course objective 1: To
recall principles and theorems related to rigid body mechanics)
1. Explain D’Alembert’s principle

2. Distinguish static and dynamic friction

3. State and explain perpendicular axis theorem

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) (One question from each module to meet the course objective 2: To
identify and describe the components of system of forces acting on the rigid body)

1. A simply supported beam AB of span 5 m is carrying point loads 5 kN, 3 kN and 2 kN at 1m, 3m
and 4m respectively from support A. Calculate the support reaction at B.

2. A gymnast holding onto a bar, is suspended motionless in mid-air. The bar is supported by two
ropes that attach to the ceiling. Diagram the forces acting on the combination of gymnast and bar

3. While you are riding your bike, you turn a corner following a circular arc. Illustrate the forces that
act on your bike to keep you along the circular path ?

Part B

All the questions under this section shall assess the learning levels corresponding to the course
outcomes listed below.
 To apply the conditions of equilibrium to variou
variouss practical problems involving different force
CO 3
system.

CO 4 To choose appropriate theorems, principles or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.

To solve problems involving rigid bodies, applying the properties of distributed areas and
CO 5 masses

1. Two rollers each of weight 100 N are supported by an inclined plane and a vertical wall. Find the
reaction at the points of contact A, B, C. Assume all the surfaces to be smooth.

Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium Applying – (Sketch the free
CO 3 to various practical problems involving body diagram that represent 4
different force system. equilibrium state of the body )

To choose appropriate theorems, Applying (Choose the equations

CO 4 principles or formulae to solve and formulae required for 4
problems of mechanics. calculation)

To solve problems involving rigid Applying ( Solve the problem

CO 5 bodies, applying the properties of based on the descriptions given 6
distributed areas and masses in CO3 and CO4)

Total 14

2. A cylindrical disc, 50 cm diameter and cm thickness, is in contact with a horizontal conveyor belts
running at uniform speeds of 5 m/s. Assuming there is no slip at points of contact determine (i)
angular velocity of disc (ii) Angular acceleration of disc if velocity of conveyor changes to 8 m/s. Also
compute the moment acting about the axis of the disc in both cases.
 Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Sketch the
CO 3 various practical problems involving different free body diagram that 4
force system. represent state of the
body )
Applying (Choose the
To choose appropriate theorems, principles or
CO 4 equations and formulae 4
formulae to solve problems of mechanics.
required for calculation)

Applying ( Solve the

To solve problems involving rigid bodies,
problem based on the
CO 5 applying the properties of distributed areas 6
descriptions given in CO3
and masses
and CO4)

Total 14

3. Determine the centroid of the given section

Course Marks
outcome Description of course outcome Learning level assessed allocat
identifier ed
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Illustrate the
CO 3 various practical problems involving computation of centroid for 4
different force system. the given geometrical shape)
To choose appropriate theorems, Applying (Choose the
CO 4 principles or formulae to solve problems equations and formulae 4
of mechanics. required for calculation)

To solve problems involving rigid bodies, Applying ( Solve the problem 6

CO 5
applying the properties of distributed based on the descriptions
 areas and masses given in CO3 and CO4)

Total 14

4. A rectangular hole is made in a triangular section as shown. Find moment of inertia about the
section x-x passing through the CG of the section and parallel to BC.

Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Illustrate the 4

CO 3 various practical problems involving different computation of moment

force system. of inertia for the given
geometrical shape)
Applying (Choose the
To choose appropriate theorems, principles
CO 4 equations and formulae 4
or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.
required for calculation)

Applying ( Solve the

To solve problems involving rigid bodies,
problem based on the
CO 5 applying the properties of distributed areas 6
descriptions given in
and masses
CO3 and CO4)

Total 14
 Model Question Paper

QP CODE:
Reg No.:_______________
Name:__________________________ ___

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 100

ENGINEERING MECHANICS

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part A

(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain D’Alembert’s principle

2. Distinguish static and dynamic frictioni.

3. State and explain perpendicular axis theorem.

4. A simply supported beam AB of span 5 m is carrying point loads 5 kN, 3 kN and 2 kN at 1m, 3m
and 4m respectively from support A. Calculate the support reaction at B.

5. A gymnast holding onto a bar, is suspended motionless in mid-air. The bar is supported by two
ropes that attach to the ceiling. Diagram the forces acting on the combination of gymnast and bar

6. While you are riding your bike, you turn a corner following a circular arc. Illustrate the forces that
act on your bike to keep you along the circular path ?

7. Compare damped and undamped free vibrations.

8. State the equation of motion of a rotating rigid body, rotating about its fixed axis.

9. Illustrate the significance of instantaneous centre in the analysis of rigid body undergoing
rotational motion.

10. Highlight the principles of mechanics applied in the evaluation of elastic collusion of rigid bodies.

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module -I

11. Two identical rollers each of weight 100 N are supported by an inclined plane, making an angle
of 30o with the vertical, and a vertical wall. Find the reaction at the points of contact A, B, C. Assume
all the surfaces to be smooth. (14 marks)
 C
A
B

12. A string tied to a wall is made to pass over a pulley placed 2m away from it. A weight P is
attached to the string such that the string stretches by 2m from the support on the wall to the
location of attachment of weight. Determine the force P required to maintain 200 kg body in
position for  = 30o, The diameter of pulley B is negligible. (14 marks)

Module – 2
13. Two blocks A & B are resting against a wall and the floor as shown in figure below. Find the
value of horizontal force P applied to the lower block that will hold the system in equilibrium.
Coefficient of friction are : 0.25 at the floor, 0.3 at the wall and 0.2 between the blocks.
(14 marks)

14. A beam is hinged at A and roller supported at B. It is acted upon by loads as shown below.
Find the reactions at A & B. (14 marks)

Module – 3
15. A rectangular hole is made in a triangular section as shown. Find moment of inertia about the
section x-x passing through the CG of the section and parallel to BC. (14 marks)
16. Support A has ball and socket connection. Roller support at B prevents motion in the —z
direction. Corner C is tied to D by a rope. The triangle is weightless. Determine the unknown force
components acting at A, B, and C. (14 marks)

Module - 4

17. A cricket ball is thrown by a fielder from a height of 2m at an angle of 300 to the horizontal with
an initial velocity of 20 m/s , hits the wickets at a height of 0.5 m from the ground. How far was the
fielder from the wicket? (14 marks)

18. An engine of weight 500 kN pull a train weighing 1500 kN up an incline of 1 in 100. The train
starts from rest and moves with constant acceleration against a resistance of 5 N/kN. It attains a
maximum speed of 36 kmph in 1 km distance. Determine the tension in the coupling between train
and engine and the traction force developed by the engine. (14marks)

Module – 5

19. A cylindrical disc, 50 cm diameter and 10 cm thickness having mass of 10 kg, is in contact with a
horizontal conveyor belt running at uniform speeds of 5 m/s. Assuming there is no slip at points of
contact determine (i) angular velocity of disc (ii) Angular acceleration of disc if velocity of conveyor
changes to 8 m/s in 10 seconds. Also compute the moment acting about the axis of the disc in both
cases. (14 marks)

20. A wheel rotating about fixed axis at 20 rpm is uniformly accelerated for 70 seconds during which
time it makes 50 revolutions. Find the (i) angular velocity at the end of this interval and (ii) time
required for the velocity to reach 100 revolutions per minute. (14 marks)
 SYLLABUS
Module 1
Introduction to Engineering Mechanics-statics-basic principles of statics-Parallelogram law,
equilibrium law, principles of superposition and transmissibility, law of action and reaction(review)
free body diagrams.
Concurrent coplanar forces-composition and resolution of forces-resultant and equilibrium
equations – methods of projections – methods of moments – Varignon’s Theorem of moments.

Module 2
Friction – sliding friction - Coulomb’s laws of friction – analysis of single bodies –wedges, ladder-
analysis of connected bodies .
Parallel coplanar forces – couple - resultant of parallel forces – centre of parallel forces – equilibrium
of parallel forces – Simple beam subject to concentrated vertical loads. General coplanar force
system - resultant and equilibrium equations.

Module 3
Centroid of composite areas- – moment of inertia-parallel axis and perpendicular axis theorems.
Polar moment of inertia,radius of gyration,mass moment of inertia-ring,cylinder and disc.
Theorem of Pappus Guldinus(demonstration only)
Forces in space - vectorial representation of forces, moments and couples –resultant and equilibrium
equations – concurrent forces in space (simple problems only)

Module 4
Dynamics – rectilinear translation - equations of kinematics(review)
kinetics – equation of motion – D’Alembert’s principle. – motion on horizontal and inclined
surfaces, motion of connected bodies. Impulse momentum equation and work energy equation
(concepts only).
Curvilinear translation - equations of kinematics –projectile motion(review), kinetics – equation of
motion. Moment of momentum and work energy equation (concepts only).

Module 5
Rotation – kinematics of rotation- equation of motion for a rigid body rotating about a fixed axis –
rotation under a constant moment.
Plane motion of rigid body – instantaneous centre of rotation (concept only).
Simple harmonic motion – free vibration –degree of freedom- undamped free vibration of spring
mass system-effect of damping(concept only)

Text Books
1. Timoshenko and Young, Engineering Mechanics, McGraw Hill Publishers
2. Shames, I. H., Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India.
3. R. C. Hibbeler and Ashok Gupta, Engineering Mechanics, Vol. I statics, Vol II Dynamics, Pearson
Education.
References
1. Merriam J. L and Kraige L. G., Engineering Mechanics - Vols. 1 and 2, John Wiley.
2. Tayal A K, Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics, Umesh Publications
3. Bhavikkatti, S.S., Engineering Mechanics, New Age International Publishers
4. F.P.Beer abd E.R.Johnston (2011), Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Vol.I-Statics, Vol.II-Dynamics,
9th Ed, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G, Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Course
No. of
Module Topic outcomes
Hours
addressed

1 Module 1 Total: 7

Introduction to engineering mechanics – introduction on statics and

dynamics - Basic principles of statics – Parellogram law, equilibrium CO1 and
1.1 1
law – Superposition and transmissibility, law of action and reaction CO2
(review the topics)

Free body diagrams.

Degree of freedom-types of supports and nature of reactions -
1.2 CO1 and 1
exercises for free body diagram preparation – composition and
CO2
resolution of forces, resultant and equilibrium equations (review the
topics) - numerical exercises for illustration.
Concurrent coplanar forces - analysis of concurrent forces -methods CO1 and
1.3 of projections – illustrative numerical exercise – teacher assisted 1
CO2
problem solving.
Analysis of concurrent forces -methods of moment-Varignon’s CO1 and
1.4 Theorem of Moments - illustrative numerical exercise– teacher 1
CO2
assisted problem solving.
Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4
1.5 1
Session I. and CO5

Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4 1

1.6 and CO5
Session II – learning review quiz.

Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4

1.7 and CO5 1
Session III.
2 Module 2 Total: 7

2.1 Friction – sliding friction - Coulomb’s laws of friction – analysis of CO1 and 1
single bodies –illustrative examples on wedges and ladder-teacher CO2
 assisted problem solving tutorials using problems from wedges and
ladder.
2.2 Problems on friction - analysis of connected bodies. illustrative CO3, CO4 1
numerical exercise– teacher assisted problem solving. and CO5

2.3 Problems on friction-extended problem solving CO3,C04 1

and CO5
2.4 Parallel coplanar forces – couple - resultant of parallel forces – centre CO1 and 1
of parallel forces – equilibrium of parallel forces – Simple beam CO2
subject to concentrated vertical loads.
2.5 General coplanar force system - resultant and equilibrium equations - CO1 and 1
illustrative examples- teacher assisted problem solving. CO2

2.6 General coplanar force system-resultant and equilibrium equations - CO3, CO4 1
illustrative examples and CO5
2.7 General coplanar force system - Extended problem solving - Quiz to CO3, CO4 1
evaluate learning level. and CO5
3 Module 3 Total: 7

3.1 Centroid of simple and regular geometrical shapes – centroid of CO1 and
figures in combination - composite areas- examples for illustration – CO2 1
problems for practice to be done by self.
3.2 Moment of inertia- parallel axis theorem –examples for illustration - CO1 and
1
problems for practice to be done by self. CO2

3.3 Moment of inertia - perpendicular axis theorem - example for CO1 and
illustration to be given as hand out and discussion on the solved CO2 1
example.
3.4 Solutions to practice problems – problems related to centroid and CO3, CO4 1
moment of inertia - problems for practice to be done by self. and CO5
3.5 Polar moment of inertia, Radius of gyration. CO1 and
1
Mass moment of inertia of ring, cylinder and uniform disc. CO2
Theorem of Pappus Guldinus - Demonstration
3.6 Introduction to forces in space – vectorial representation of forces, CO1,and
moments and couples – simple problems to illustrate vector CO2 1
representations of forces, moments and couples to be done in class.
3.7 Solution to practice problems - resultant and equilibrium equations
for concurrent forces in space – concurrent forces in space - 2 simple CO3,CO4 1
problems to illustrate the application of resultant and equilibrium and CO5
equations for concurrent forces in space.
4 Module 4 Total: 7
 Introduction to dynamics – review of rectilinear translation - CO1 and
4.1 equations of kinematics – problems to review the concepts – CO2 1
additional problems involving extended application as exercises .

Solutions to exercises with necessary explanation given as hand out –

introduction to kinetics – equation of motion – D’Alembert’s principle CO1 and
4.2 1
– illustration of the concepts using one numerical exercise from CO2
motion on horizontal and inclined surfaces.
Motion of connected bodies - example for illustration to be given as CO3, CO4 1
4.3 hand out and discussion on the solved example – problems for and CO5
practice to be done by self.
4.4 Motion of connected bodies-extended problem solving. CO3, CO4 1
& CO5
Curvilinear translation - Review of kinematics –projectile motion – 1
simple problems to review the concepts – introduction to kinetics – CO3, CO4
4.5
equation of motion – illustration of the concepts using numerical & CO5
exercises.

4.6 Extended problem solving – rectilinear and curvilinear translation. CO3, CO4 1
& CO5
Concepts on Impulse momentum equation and work energy equation 1
(rectilinear translation – discussions to bring out difference between
4.7 CO1 and
elastic and inelastic collusions).
CO2
Concepts on Moment of momentum and work energy equation
(curvilinear translation).
5 Module 5 Total: 7

Rotation – kinematics of rotation- equation of motion for a rigid body CO1 and 1
5.1 rotating about a fixed axis – simple problems for illustration. CO2
Rotation under a constant moment – teacher assisted problem 1
5.2 solving. CO3,CO4
and CO5
5.3 Rotation under a constant moment - extended problem solving. CO3, CO4 1
and CO5
Plane motion of rigid body- instantaneous centre of rotation (concept CO1 and 1
5.4
only). CO2

Introduction to harmonic oscillation –free vibrations - simple 1

harmonic motion – differential equation and solution.
CO1 and
5.5 Degree of freedom – examples of single degree of freedom (SDOF) CO2
systems – Idealisation of mechanical systems as spring-mass systems
(concept only).
 SDOF spring mass system –equation of motion – undamped free 1
vibration response - concept of natural frequency. CO1 and
5.6 Free vibration response due to initial conditions. CO2
Simple problems on determination of natural frequency and free
vibration response to test the understanding level.
Free vibration analysis of SDOF spring-mass systems – Problem solving CO1and 1
5.7
Effect of damping on free vibration response (concept only). CO2
 EST ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of Introduction
110 GRAPHICS ESC 2 0 2 3 2019

Preamble: To enable the student to effectively perform technical communication through graphical
representation as per global standards.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Draw the projection of points and lines located in different quadrants

CO 2 Prepare multiview orthographic projections of objects by visualizing them in different
positions
CO 3 Draw sectional views and develop surfaces of a given object
CO 4 Prepare pictorial drawings using the principles of isometric and perspective projections to
visualize objects in three dimensions.
CO 5 Convert 3D views to orthographic views
CO 6 Obtain multiview projections and solid models of objects using CAD tools

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 2
CO 6 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
( 15 Marks) (15 Marks) (100 Marks)
Remember
Understand 5 20
Apply 10 10 80
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
CIA for section A carries 25 marks (15 marks for 1 test and Class work 10 marks)
CIA for section B carries 15 marks (10 marks for 1 test and Class work 5 marks)

End Semester Examination Pattern:

ESE will be of 3 hour duration on A4 size answer booklet and will be for 100 marks. The question
paper shall contain two questions from each module of Section A only. Student has to answer any
one question from each module. Each question carries 20 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Locate points in different quadrants as per given conditions.
2. Problems on lines inclined to both planes .
3. Find True length, Inclinations and Traces of lines.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2)
1. Draw orthographic views of solids and combination solids
2. Draw views of solids inclined to any one reference plane.
3. Draw views of solids inclined to both reference planes.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Draw views of solids sectioned by a cutting plane
2. Find location and inclination of cutting plane given true shape of the section
3. Draw development of lateral surface of solids and also its sectioned views
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Draw Isometric views/projections of soilds
2. Draw Isometric views/projections of combination of soilds
3. Draw Perspective views of Soilds
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. Draw Orthographic views of solids from given three dimensional view
Course Outcome 6 (CO6):
1. Draw the given figure including dimensions using 2D software
2. Create 3D model using modelling software from the given orthographic views or 3D figure or
from real 3D objects

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 110

ENGINEERING GRAPHICS

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

Instructions: Retain necessary Construction lines

Show necessary dimensions
Answer any ONE question from each module
Each question carries 20 marks

MODULE I
1. The end point A of a line is 20mm above HP and 10mm in front of VP. The other end of the line is
50mm above HP and 15mm behind VP. The distance between the end projectors is 70mm. Draw
the projections of the line. Find the true length and true inclinations of the line with the principal
planes. Also locate the traces of the line.
2. One end of a line is 20mm from both the principal planes of projection. The other end of the line
is 50mm above HP and 40mm in front of VP. The true length of the line is 70mm. Draw the
projections of the line. Find its apparent inclinations, elevation length and plan length. Also
locate its traces.
MODULE II
3. A pentagonal pyramid of base side 25mm and height 40mm, is resting on the ground on one of
its triangular faces. The base edge of that face is inclined 30o to VP. Draw the projections of the
solid.
4. A hexagonal prism has side 25mm and height 50mm has a corner of its base on the ground and
the long edge containing that corner inclined at 30o to HP and 45o to VP. Draw the projections of
the solid.
MODULE III
5. A triangular prism of base side 40mm and height 70mm is resting with its base on the ground
and having an edge of the base perpendicular to VP. Section the solid such that the true shape of
the section is a trapezium of parallel sides 30mm and 10mm. Draw the projections showing the
true shape. Find the inclination of the cutting plane with the ground plane.
6. Draw the development of a pentagonal pyramid of base side 30mm and height 50mm. A string is
wound from a corner of the base round the pyramid and back to the same point through the
shortest distance. Show the position of the string in the elevation and plan.
MODULE IV
7. The frustum of a cone has base diameter 50mm and top diameter 40mm has a height of 60mm.
It is paced centrally on top of a rectangular slab of size 80x60mm and of thickness 20mm. Draw
the isometric view of the combination.
8. A hexagonal prism has base side 35mm and height 60mm. A sphere of diameter 40mm is
placed centrally on top of it. Draw the isometric projection of the combination.
MODULE V
9. Draw the perspective view of a pentagonal prism, 20mm side and 45mm long lying on one of its
rectangular faces on the ground and having its axis perpendicular to picture plane. One of its
pentagonal faces touches the picture plane and the station point is 50mm in front of PP, 25mm
above the ground plane and lies in a central plane, which is 70mm to the left of the center of the
prism.
10. Draw three orthographic views with dimensions of the object shown in figure below.

(20X5=100)
 Time : 3 hours EST110 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Max. Marks: 100

SCHEME OF VALUATION
1. Locating the points and drawing the projections of the line – 4 marks
Finding true length by any one method – 6 marks
Finding true inclination with VP – 2 marks
Finding true inclination with HP – 2 marks
Locating horizontal trace – 2 marks
Locating vertical trace – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
2. Locating the points and drawing true length of the line – 4 marks
Finding projections by any method – 6 marks
Finding length of elevation and plan – 2 marks
Finding apparent inclinations – 2 marks
Locating horizontal trace – 2 marks
Locating vertical trace – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
3. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks
First inclination views – 4 marks
Second inclination views -8 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Any one method or combination of methods for solving can be used.
If initial position is wrong then maximum 50% marks may be allotted for the answer)

4. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks

First inclination views – 4 marks
Second inclination views -8 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Any one method or combination of methods for solving can be used
If initial position is wrong then maximum 50% marks may be allotted for the answer)

5. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks

Locating section plane as per given condition – 5 marks
Drawing true shape -5 marks
Finding inclination of cutting plane – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
6. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks
Development of the pyramid – 6 marks
 Locating string in development -2 marks
Locating string in elevation – 3 marks
Locating string in plan – 3 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
7. Drawing initial positions – 4 marks
Isometric View of Slab -6 marks
Isometric View of Frustum – 10 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Initial position is optional, hence redistribute if needed.
Reduce 4 marks if Isometric scale is taken)

8. Drawing initial positions – 4 marks

Isometric scale – 4 marks
Isometric projection of prism -5 marks
Isometric projection of sphere – 5 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Initial position is optional, hence redistribute if needed.

9. Drawing the planes and locating the station point – 4 marks

Locating elevation points – 2 marks
Locating plan points – 2 marks
Drawing the perspective view – 10 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
10. Drawing the elevation – 8marks
Drawing the plan – 4 marks
Drawing the side view – 4 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
 SYLLABUS

General Instructions:
 First angle projection to be followed
 Section A practice problems to be performed on A4 size sheets
 Section B classes to be conducted on CAD lab

SECTION A
Module 1
Introduction : Relevance of technical drawing in engineering field. Types of lines, Dimensioning, BIS
code of practice for technical drawing.
Orthographic projection of Points and Lines: Projection of points in different quadrants, Projection of
straight lines inclined to one plane and inclined to both planes. Trace of line. Inclination of lines with
reference planes True length of line inclined to both the reference planes.

Module 2
Orthographic projection of Solids: Projection of Simple solids such as Triangular, Rectangle, Square,
Pentagonal and Hexagonal Prisms, Pyramids, Cone and Cylinder. Projection of solids in simple
position including profile view. Projection of solids with axis inclined to one of the reference planes
and with axis inclined to both reference planes.

Module 3
Sections of Solids: Sections of Prisms, Pyramids, Cone, Cylinder with axis in vertical position and cut
by different section planes. True shape of the sections. Also locating the section plane when the
true shape of the section is given.
Development of Surfaces: Development of surfaces of the above solids and solids cut by different
section planes. Also finding the shortest distance between two points on the surface.

Module 4
Isometric Projection: Isometric View and Projections of Prisms, Pyramids, Cone , Cylinder, Frustum of
Pyramid, Frustum of Cone, Sphere, Hemisphere and their combinations.

Module 5
Perspective Projection: Perspective projection of Prisms and Pyramids with axis perpendicular to the
ground plane, axis perpendicular to picture plane.
Conversion of Pictorial Views: Conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views.

SECTION B
(To be conducted in CAD Lab)
Introduction to Computer Aided Drawing: Role of CAD in design and development of new products,
Advantages of CAD. Creating two dimensional drawing with dimensions using suitable software.
(Minimum 2 exercises mandatory)
Introduction to Solid Modelling: Creating 3D models of various components using suitable modelling
software. (Minimum 2 exercises mandatory)
Text Books
1. Bhatt, N.D., Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
2. John, K.C. Engineering Graphics, Prentice Hall India Publishers.
Reference Books

1. Anilkumar, K.N., Engineering Graphics, Adhyuth narayan Publishers

2. Agrawal, B. And Agrawal, C.M., Engineering Darwing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers.
3. Benjamin, J., Engineering Graphics, Pentex Publishers- 3 rd Edition, 2017
4. Duff, J.M. and Ross, W.A., Engineering Design and Visualisation, Cengage Learning.
5. Kulkarni, D.M., Rastogi, A.P. and Sarkar, A.K., Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD, PHI.
6. Luzaddff, W.J. and Duff, J.M., Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, PHI.
7. Varghese, P.I., Engineering Graphics, V I P Publishers
8. Venugopal, K., Engineering Drawing and Graphics, New Age International Publishers.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No SECTION A No. of
Hours

1 MODULE I

1.1 Introduction to graphics, types of lines, Dimensioning 1

1.2 Concept of principle planes of projection, different quadrants, locating points 2

on different quadrants

1.3 Projection of lines, inclined to one plane. Lines inclined to both planes, 2
trapezoid method of solving problems on lines.

1.4 Problems on lines using trapezoid method 2

1.5 Line rotation method of solving, problems on line rotation method 2

2 MODULE II

2.1 Introduction of different solids, Simple position plan and elevation of solids 2

2.2 Problems on views of solids inclined to one plane 2

2.3 Problems on views of solids inclined to both planes 2

2.4 Practice problems on solids inclined to both planes 2

3 MODULE III

3.1 Introduction to section planes. AIP and AVP. Principle of locating cutting 2
points and finding true shape

3.2 Problems on sections of different solids 2

3.3 Problems when the true shape is given 2

3.4 Principle of development of solids, sectioned solids 2

4 MODULE IV

4.1 Principle of Isometric View and Projection, Isometric Scale. Problems on 2

simple solids

4.2 Isometric problems on Frustum of solids, Sphere and Hemisphere 2

4.3 Problems on combination of different solids 2

5 MODULE V

5.1 Introduction to perspective projection, different planes, station point etc. 2

Perspective problems on pyramids

5.2 Perspective problems on prisms 2

5.3 Practice on conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views 2

SECTION B (To be conducted in CAD lab)

1 Introduction to CAD and software. Familiarising features of 2D software. 2

Practice on making 2D drawings

2 Practice session on 2D drafting 2

3 Introduction to solid modelling and software 2

4 Practice session on 3D modelling 2

 EST BASICS OF CIVIL & MECHANICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
120 ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION
ESC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble:

Objective of this course is to provide an insight and inculcate the essentials of Civil Engineering
discipline to the students of all branches of Engineering and to provide the students an
illustration of the significance of the Civil Engineering Profession in satisfying the societal needs.

To introduce the students to the basic principles of mechanical engineering

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course, the student will be able to

Recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various disciplines of Civil
CO 1 Engineering.

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and

CO 2 building construction

CO 3 Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and
CO 4
ramps
Discuss the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green
CO 5 buildings.

CO 6 Analyse thermodynamic cycles and calculate its efficiency

CO 7 Illustrate the working and features of IC Engines

CO 8 Explain the basic principles of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

CO 9 Describe the working of hydraulic machines

CO 10 Explain the working of power transmission elements

CO 11 Describe the basic manufacturing, metal joining and machining processes

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO1 3 - - - - 3 2 2 - - - -
CO2 3 2 - 1 3 - - 3 - - - -
CO3 3 2 - - 3 - - - 2 - - -
 CO4 3 2 - - 3 - - - 2 - - -
CO5 3 2 - - 3 2 3 - 2 - - -

CO6 3 2

CO7 3 1

CO8 3 1

CO9 3 2

CO10 3 1

CO11 3

Assessment Pattern

Basic Civil Engineering Basic Mechanical Engineering

End End Semester
Bloom’s Category Semester Continuous Examination
Continuous Assessment
Examination Assessment (marks)
Test 1 Test 2 (marks) Test 1 Test 2
marks marks marks marks
Remember 5 5 10 7.5 7.5 15
Understand 20 20 40 12.5 12.5 25
Apply 5 5 10
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part I – Basic Civil Engineering and Part II – Basic Mechanical Engineering.
Part I and PART II carries 50 marks each. For the end semester examination, part I contain 2 parts -
Part A and Part B. Part A contain 5 questions carrying 4 marks each (not exceeding 2 questions from
each module). Part B contains 2 questions from each module out of which one to be answered. Each
question carries 10 mark and can have maximum 2 sub-divisions. The pattern for end semester
examination for part II is same as that of part I. However, student should answer both part I and
part 2 in separate answer booklets.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome CO1: To recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various
disciplines of Civil Engineering.

1.Explain relevance of Civil engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the country.
Course outcome 2 (CO2) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and building
construction
1. Discuss the difference between plinth area and carpet area.

Course outcome 3 (CO3) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

1. Explain the importance of surveying in Civil Engineering

Course outcome 4 (CO4) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps

1. Explain the civil engineering aspects of elevators, escalators and ramps in buildings

Course outcome 5 (CO5) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Discuss the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green buildings.

1. Discuss the relevance of Green building in society

Section II Answer any 1 full question from each module. Each full question carries 10 marks

Course Outcome 1 (CO1) (Two full question from each module and each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions)

To recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various disciplines of Civil Engineering
CO Questions

1. a List out the types of building as per occupancy. Explain any two, each in about five sentences.
b. Discuss the components of a building with a neat figure.
2. a.What are the major disciplines of civil engineering and explain their role in the infrastructural
framework.
 b. Explain the role of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms in building rules and regulations prevailing in our
country.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) & Course Outcome 3 (CO3) (Two full question from each module and
each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions)

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and building
construction & Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

CO Questions

1. a. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use.
b. List the properties of good building bricks. Explain any five.
2. a. List and explain any five modern construction materials used for construction.
b. Explain the objectives and principles of surveying

Course outcome 4 (CO4) & Course outcome 5 (CO5) (Two full question from each module and
each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions)

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps & Discuss
the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green buildings.

CO Questions

1. a. Draw the elevation and plan of one brick thick wall with English bond
b. Explain the energy systems and water management in Green buildings

2. a. Draw neat sketch of the following foundations: (i) Isolated stepped footing;
(ii) Cantilever footing; and (iii) Continuous footing.

b. Discuss the civil engineering aspect of MEP and HVAC in a commercial building

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. In an air standard Otto cycle the compression ratio is 7 and compression begins at 35 oC, 0.1
MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100oC. Find
i) Heat supplied per kg of air,
ii) Work done per kg of air,
iii) Cycle efficiency
Take Cp = 1.005 kJ/kgK and Cv=0.718 kJ/kgK
2. A Carnot cycle works with adiabatic compression ratio of 5 and isothermal expansion ratio of 2.
The volume of air at the beginning of isothermal expansion is 0.3 m3. If the maximum
temperature and pressure is limited to 550K and 21 bar, determine the minimum temperature
in the cycle and efficiency of the cycle.
3. In an ideal diesel cycle, the temperature at the beginning and end of compression is 65oC and
620oC respectively. The temperature at the beginning and end of the expansion is 1850oC and
850 oC. Determine the ideal efficiency of the cycle.
 4. Explain the concepts of CRDI and MPFI in IC Engines.
Course Outcome 7 (CO7)
1. With the help of a neat sketch explain the working of a 4 stroke SI engine
2. Compare the working of 2 stroke and 4 stroke IC engines
3. Explain the classification of IC Engines.
Course Outcome 8(CO8):
1. Explain the working of vapour compression refrigeration system.
2. With the help of suitable sketch explain the working of a split air conditioner.
3. Define: COP, specific humidity, relative humidity and dew point temperature.
Course Outcome 9 (CO9):
1. Explain the working of a single stage centrifugal pump with sketches.
2. With the help of a neat sketch, explain the working of a reciprocating pump.
3. A turbine is to operate under a head of 25 m at 200 rpm. The discharge is 9 m3/s. If the overall
efficiency of the turbine is 90%. Determine the power developed by the turbine.
Course Outcome 10 (CO10):
1. Explain the working of belt drive and gear drive with the help of neat sketches
2. Explain a single plate clutch.
3. Sketch different types of gear trains and explain.

Course Outcome 11 (CO11):

1. Describe the operations which can be performed using drilling machine.
2. Explain the functions of runners and risers used in casting.
3. With a neat sketch, explain the working and parts of a lathe.

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: EST120 page:3

Reg No:__________________

Name:____________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 120

Course Name: BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets

 PART I: BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING

PART A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 4 marks)

1. Explain relevance of Civil engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the

country.
2. Discuss the difference between plinth area and carpet area.
3. Explain different types of steel with their properties.
4. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use?
5. Define bearing capacity of soil.
(5 x 4 = 20)

Part B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE I

6a. List out the types of building as per occupancy. Explain any two, each in about five
sentences. (5)
b. Discuss the components of a building with a neat figure. (5)
OR
7a. What are the major disciplines of civil engineering and explain their role in the
infrastructural framework. (5)
b. Explain the role of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms in building rules and regulations prevailing in our
country. (5)

MODULE II

8a. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use. (5)
b. List the properties of good building bricks. Explain any five. (5)
OR
9a. List and explain any five modern construction materials used for construction. (5)
b. Explain the objectives and principles of surveying (5)

MODULE III

10a. Draw the elevation and plan of one brick thick wall with English bond (5)
b. Explain the energy systems and water management in Green buildings (5)
OR
11a. Draw neat sketch of the following foundations: (i) Isolated stepped footing;
(ii) Cantilever footing; and (iii) Continuous footing. (5)
b. Discuss the civil engineering aspect of MEP and HVAC in a commercial building (5)

[10 x 3 = 30]
 PART II: BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 4 marks

1. Sketch the P-v and T-s diagram of a Carnot cycle and List the processes.
2. Illustrate the working of an epicyclic gear train.
3. Explain cooling and dehumidification processes.
4. Differentiate between soldering and brazing.
5. Explain the principle of Additive manufacturing.
4 x 5 = 20 marks

Part B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE I

6. In an air standard Otto cycle the compression ratio is 7 and compression begins at 35oC,
0.1MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100oC. Find
i) Heat supplied per kg of air,
ii) Work done per kg of air,
iii)Cycle efficiency
Take Cp = 1.005 kJ/kgK and Cv=0.718 kJ/kgK 10 marks

OR

7. a) Explain the working of a 4 stroke SI engine with neat sketches. 7 marks

b) Explain the fuel system of a petrol engine. 3 marks

MODULE II

8. a) Explain the working of a vapour compression system with help of a block

diagram. 7 marks
b) Define: Specific humidity, relative humidity and dew point temperature. 3 marks
OR
9. With the help of a neat sketch, explain the working of a centrifugal pump. 10 marks

MODULE III

10. Explain the two high, three high, four high and cluster rolling mills with neat
sketches. 10 marks
OR

11. a) Describe the arc welding process with a neat sketch. 6 marks
b) Differentiate between up-milling and down-milling operations. 4 marks
 SYLLABUS

Module 1
General Introduction to Civil Engineering: Relevance of Civil Engineering in the overall
infrastructural development of the country. Responsibility of an engineer in ensuring the safety of
built environment. Brief introduction to major disciplines of Civil Engineering like Transportation
Engineering, Structural Engineering, Geo-technical Engineering, Water Resources Engineering and
Environmental Engineering.
Introduction to buildings: Types of buildings, selection of site for buildings, components of a
residential building and their functions.
Building rules and regulations: Relevance of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms (brief discussion only).
Building area: Plinth area, built up area, floor area, carpet area and floor area ratio for a building as
per KBR.

Module 2

Surveying: Importance, objectives and principles.

Construction materials, Conventional construction materials: types, properties and uses of building
materials: bricks, stones, cement, sand and timber
Cement concrete: Constituent materials, properties and types.
Steel: Steel sections and steel reinforcements, types and uses.
Modern construction materials:- Architectural glass, ceramics, Plastics, composite materials,
thermal and acoustic insulating materials, decorative panels, waterproofing materials. Modern uses
of gypsum, pre-fabricated building components (brief discussion only).

Module 3
Building Construction: Foundations: Bearing capacity of soil (definition only), functions of
foundations, types – shallow and deep (brief discussion only). Load bearing and framed structures
(concept only).
Brick masonry: - Header and stretcher bond, English bond & Flemish bond random rubble masonry.
Roofs and floors: - Functions, types; flooring materials (brief discussion only).
Basic infrastructure services: MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps (Civil Engineering aspects
only), fire safety for buildings.
Green buildings:- Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green
buildings. (brief discussion only).
Module 4

Analysis of thermodynamic cycles: Carnot, Otto, Diesel cycles, Derivation of efficiency of these
cycles, Problems to calculate heat added, heat rejected, net work and efficiency. IC Engines: CI, SI, 2-
Stroke, 4-Stroke engines. Listing the parts of different types of IC Engines. Efficiencies of IC
Engines(Definitions only), Air, Fuel, cooling and lubricating systems in SI and CI Engines, CRDI, MPFI.
Concept of hybrid engines.
 Module 5
Refrigeration: Unit of refrigeration, reversed Carnot cycle,COP, vapour compression cycle (only
description and no problems); Definitions of dry, wet & dew point temperatures, specific humidity
and relative humidity, Cooling and dehumidification, Layout of unit and central air conditioners.
Description about working with sketches of: Reciprocating pump, Centrifugal pump, Pelton turbine,
Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine. Overall efficiency, Problems on calculation of input and output
power of pumps and turbines (No velocity triangles)
Description about working with sketches of: Belt and Chain drives, Gear and Gear trains, Single plate
clutches.

Module 6
Manufacturing Process: Basic description of the manufacturing processes – Sand Casting, Forging,
Rolling, Extrusion and their applications.
Metal Joining Processes: List types of welding, Description with sketches of Arc Welding, Soldering
and Brazing and their applications
Basic Machining operations: Turning, Drilling, Milling and Grinding.
Description about working with block diagram of: Lathe, Drilling machine, Milling machine, CNC
Machine. Principle of CAD/CAM, Rapid and Additive manufacturing.

Text Books:

1. Rangwala, S. C., Essentials of Civil Engineering, Charotar Publishing House

2. Mckay, W.B. and Mckay, J. K., Building Construction, Volumes 1 to 4, Pearson India
Education Services

References Books:

1. Chen W.F and Liew J Y R (Eds), The Civil Engineering Handbook. II Edition CRC Press (Taylor
and Francis)
2. Chudley, R and Greeno R, Building construction handbook, Addison Wesley, Longman group,
England
3. Chudley, R, Construction Technology, Vol. I to IV, Longman group, England Course Plan
4. Kandya A A, Elements of Civil Engineering, Charotar Publishing house
5. Mamlouk, M. S., and Zaniewski, J. P., Materials for Civil and Construction Engineering, Pearson
Publishers
6. Rangwala S.C and Dalal K B Building Construction Charotar Publishing house
7. Clifford, M., Simmons, K. and Shipway, P., An Introduction to Mechanical Engineering Part I -
CRC Press
8. Roy and Choudhary, Elements of Mechanical Engineering, Media Promoters &Publishers Pvt.
Ltd., Mumbai.
9. Sawhney, G. S., Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering, PHI
10. G Shanmugam, M S Palanichamy, Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering, McGraw Hill
Education; First edition, 2018
11. Benjamin,J.,Basic Mechanical Engineering,Pentex Books,9th Edition,2018
12. Balachandran, P.Basic Mechanical Engineering,Owl Books
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Course
No. of
No Topic outcomes
Lectures
addressed

1 Module I Total: 7

General Introduction to Civil Engineering: Relevance of Civil

Engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the
1.1 CO1 1
country. Responsibility of an engineer in ensuring the safety of
built environment.

Brief introduction to major disciplines of Civil Engineering like

Transportation Engineering, Structural Engineering, Geo-technical
1.2 CO1 2
Engineering, Water Resources Engineering and Environmental
Engineering.

Introduction to buildings: Types of buildings, selection of site for

1.3 CO2 2
buildings, components of a residential building and their functions.

Building rules and regulations: Relevance of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms
1.4 (brief discussion only) CO2 1

Building area: Plinth area, built up area, floor area, carpet area and
1.5 CO2 1
floor area ratio for a building as per KBR.

2 Module 2 Total: 7

2.1 Surveying: Importance, objectives and principles. CO3 1

2.2 Bricks: - Classification, properties of good bricks, and tests on CO2 1

bricks

Stones: - Qualities of good stones, types of stones and their uses.

2.3 Cement: - Good qualities of cement, types of cement and their CO2 1
uses.

Sand: - Classification, qualities of good sand and sieve analysis

2.4 (basics only). CO2 1
Timber: - Characteristics, properties and uses.

2.5 Cement concrete: - Constituent materials, properties and types, CO2 1

Steel: - Steel sections and steel reinforcements, types and uses.
 Modern construction materials: - Architectural glass, ceramics,
plastics, composite materials, thermal and acoustic insulating
2.6 materials, decorative panels, waterproofing materials, modern CO2 2
uses of gypsum, pre-fabricated building components (brief
discussion only)
3 Module 3 Total: 7

Foundations: - Bearing capacity of soil (definition only), functions

of foundations, types – shallow and deep (brief discussion only).
3.1 Brick masonry: - Header and stretcher bond, English bond & CO2 2
Flemish bond– elevation and plan (one & one and a half brick wall
only).
Random rubble masonry.

3.2 Roofs: Functions, types; roofing materials (brief discussion only) CO2 2
Floors: Functions, types; flooring materials (brief discussion only)

3.3 Basic infrastructure services: MEP, HVAC, Elevators, escalators and CO4 2
ramps (Civil Engineering aspects only) fire safety for buildings

3.4 Green buildings:- Materials, energy systems, water management CO5 1

and environment for green buildings. (brief discussion only)

4 MODULE 4

Analysis of thermodynamic cycles: Carnot, Otto, and Diesel cycle- 4

4.1 Derivation of efficiency of these cycles, Problems to calculate heat
added, heat rejected, net work and efficiency

IC Engines: CI, SI, 2-Stroke, 4-Stroke engines. Listing the parts of 2

4.2 different types of IC Engines, efficiencies of IC Engines(Description
only)

Air, Fuel, cooling and lubricating systems in SI and CI Engines, CRDI, 2

4.3
MPFI. Concept of hybrid engines

5 MODULE 5

Refrigeration: Unit of refrigeration, reversed Carnot cycle, COP, vapour 1

5.1
compression cycle (only description and no problems)

Definitions of dry, wet & dew point temperatures, specific humidity and 1
5.2 relative humidity, Cooling and dehumidification, Layout of unit and
central air conditioners.
 Description about working with sketches : Reciprocating pump, 4
Centrifugal pump, Pelton turbine, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine.
5.3
Overall efficiency, Problems on calculation of input and output power
of pumps and turbines (No velocity triangles)

Description about working with sketches of: Belt and Chain drives, Gear 3
5.4
and Gear trains, Single plate clutches

6 MODULE 6

Manufacturing Process: Basic description of the manufacturing 2

6.1 processes – Sand Casting, Forging, Rolling, Extrusion and their
applications.

Metal Joining Processes :List types of welding, Description with 1

6.2
sketches of Arc Welding, Soldering and Brazing, and their applications

Basic Machining operations: Turning, Drilling, Milling and Grinding 3

6.3 Description about working with block diagrams of: Lathe, Drilling
machine, Milling machine, CNC Machine

6.4 Principle of CAD/CAM, Rapid and Additive manufacturing 1

 EST BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
130 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION
ESC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble:
This course aims to (1) equip the students with an understanding of the fundamental principles of
electrical engineering(2) provide an overview of evolution of electronics, and introduce the working
principle and examples of fundamental electronic devices and circuits (3) provide an overview of
evolution of communication systems, and introduce the basic concepts in radio communication.

Prerequisite: Physics and Mathematics (Pre-university level)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply fundamental concepts and circuit laws to solve simple DC electric circuits
CO 2 Develop and solve models of magnetic circuits
CO 3 Apply the fundamental laws of electrical engineering to solve simple ac circuits in steady
state
CO 4 Describe working of a voltage amplifier
CO 5 Outline the principle of an electronic instrumentation system
CO 6 Explain the principle of radio and cellular communication

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 4 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 6 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
Assessment Pattern

Basic Electrical Engineering Basic Electronics Engineering

Bloom’s Category Continuous End Semester Continuous End Semester
Assessment Tests Examination Assessment Tests Examination
Test 1 Test 2 (Marks) Test 1 Test 2 (Marks)
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 0 0 10 10 10 20
Understand 12.5 12.5 20 15 15 30
Apply 12.5 12.5 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE marks ESE marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part I – Basic Electrical Engineering and
Part II – Basic Electronics Engineering. Part I and PART II carries 50 marks each. For the end semester
examination, part I contain 2 parts - Part A and Part B. Part A contain 5 questions carrying 4 marks
each (not exceeding 2 questions from each module). Part B contains 2 questions from each module
out of which one to be answered. Each question carries 10 mark and can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions. The pattern for end semester examination for part II is same as that of part I. However,
student should answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Solve problems based on current division rule.

2. Solve problems with Mesh/node analysis.

3. Solve problems on Wye-Delta Transformation.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Problems on series magnetic circuits

2. Problems on parallel magnetic circuits

3. Problems on composite magnetic ciruits

4. Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. problems on self inductance, mutual inductance and coefficient of coupling

2. problems on rms and average values of periodic waveforms

3. problems on series ac circuits

4. Compare star and Delta connected 3 phase AC systems.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe working of a voltage amplifier

1.What is the need of voltage divider biasing in an RC coupled amplifier?

2. Define operating point in the context of a BJT amplifier.

3. Why is it required to have a voltage amplifier in a public address system?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Outline the principle of an electronic instrumentation system

1. Draw the block diagram of an electronic instrumentation system.

2. What is a transducer?

3. Explain the working principle of operation of digital multimeter.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Explain the principle of radio and cellular communication

1. What is the working principle of an antenna when used in a radio transmitter?

2. What is the need of two separate sections RF section and IF section in a super heterodyne
receiver?

3. What is meant by a cell in a cellular communication?

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: Pages: 3

Reg No.:_______________

Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 130

Course Name: BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets

PART I

BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions; each question carries 4 marks.

1. Calculate the current through the 4  resistor in the circuit shown, applying current
division rule:
2. Calculate the RMS and average values of a purely sinusoidal current having peak value
15A.

3. An alternating voltage of (80+j60)V is applied to an RX circuit and the current flowing

through the circuit is (-4+j10)A. Calculate the impedance of the circuit in rectangular and
polar forms. Also determine if X is inductive or capacitive.

4. Derive the relation between line and phase values of voltage in a three phase star
connected system.

5. Compare electric and magnetic circuits. (5x4=20)

PART B

Answer one question from each module; each question carries 10 marks.

Module 1

6. . Calculate the node voltages in the circuit shown, applying node analysis:

7. (a) State and explain Kirchhoff’s laws. (4 marks)

(b) Calculate the current through the galvanometer (G) in the circuit shown:

(6 marks)
 Module 2

8. (a) State and explain Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction with examples. (4 marks)

(b) Differentiate between statically and dynamically induced emf. A conductor of length
0.5m moves in a uniform magnetic field of flux density 1.1T at a velocity of 30m/s.
Calculate the emf induced in the conductor if the direction of motion of the conductor is
inclined at 600 to the direction of field. (6 marks)

9. (a) Derive the amplitude factor and form factor of a purely sinusoidal waveform. (5 marks)

(b) A current wave is made up of two components-a 5A dc component and a 50Hz ac

component, which is a sinusoidal wave with a peak value of 5A. Sketch the resultant
waveform and determine its RMS and average values. (5 marks)

Module 3

10. Draw the power triangle and define active, reactive and apparent powers in ac circuits.
Two coils A and B are connected in series across a 240V, 50Hz supply. The resistance of
A is 5  and the inductance of B is 0.015H. If the input from the supply is 3kW and
2kVAR, find the inductance of A and the resistance of B. Also calculate the voltage across
each coil.

11. A balanced three phase load consists of three coils each having resistance of 4Ω and
inductance 0.02H. It is connected to a 415V, 50Hz, 3-phase ac supply. Determine the
phase voltage, phase current, power factor and active power when the loads are connected
in (i) star (ii) delta.

(3x10=30)

PART II

BASIC ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions; each question carries 4 marks.

1. Give the specifications of a resistor. The colour bands marked on a resistor are Blue, Grey,
Yellow and Gold. What are the minimum and maximum resistance values expected from that
resistance?
2. What is meant by avalanche breakdown?
3. Explain the working of a full-wave bridge rectifier.
4. Discuss the role of coupling and bypass capacitors in a single stage RC coupled amplifier.
5. Differentiate AM and FM communication systems.

(5x4=20)
 PART B

Answer one question from each module; each question carries 10 marks.

Module 4
6. a) Explain with diagram the principle of operation of an NPN transistor. (5)
b) Sketch and explain the typical input-output characteristics of a BJT when connected in
common emitter configuration. (5)
OR
7. a) Explain the formation of a potential barrier in a P-N junction diode. (5)
b) What do you understand by Avalanche breakdown? Draw and explain the V-I characteristics
of a P-N junction and Zener diode. (5)
Module 5
8. a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the working of an RC coupled amplifier. (6)
b) Draw the frequency response characteristics of an RC coupled amplifier and state the reasons
for the reduction of gain at lower and higher frequencies. (4)
OR
9. a) With the help of block diagram, explain how an electronic instrumentation system. (6)
b) Explain the principle of an antenna. (4)

Module 6
10. a) With the help of a block diagram, explain the working of Super hetrodyne receiver. (6)
b) Explain the importance of antenna in a communication system. (4)
OR
11. a) With neat sketches explain a cellular communication system. (5)
b) Explain GSM communication with the help of a block diagram. (5)
(3x10=30)
 SYLLABUS

MODULE 1: Elementary Concepts of Electric Circuits

Elementary concepts of DC electric circuits: Basic Terminology including voltage, current, power,
resistance, emf; Resistances in series and parallel; Current and Voltage Division Rules; Capacitors &
Inductors: V-I relations and energy stored. Ohms Law and Kirchhoff's laws-Problems; Star-delta
conversion (resistive networks only-derivation not required)-problems.

Analysis of DC electric circuits: Mesh current method - Matrix representation - Solution of network
equations. Node voltage methods-matrix representation-solution of network equations by matrix
methods. Numerical problems.

MODULE 2: Elementary Concepts of Magnetic circuits, Electromagnetic Induction and AC

fundamentals

Magnetic Circuits: Basic Terminology: MMF, field strength, flux density, reluctance - comparison
between electric and magnetic circuits- Series and parallel magnetic circuits with composite
materials, numerical problems.

Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws, problems, Lenz's law- statically induced and dynamically
induced emfs - Self-inductance and mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling

Alternating Current fundamentals: Generation of alternating voltages-Representation of sinusoidal

waveforms: frequency, period, Average, RMS values and form factor of waveforms-Numerical
Problems.

MODULE 3: AC Circuits

AC Circuits: Phasor representation of sinusoidal quantities. Trignometric, Rectangular, Polar and

complex forms. Analysis of simple AC circuits: Purely resistive, inductive & capacitive circuits;
Inductive and capacitive reactance, concept of impedance. Average Power Power factor. Analysis of
RL, RC and RLC series circuits-active, reactive and apparent power. Simple numerical problems.

Three phase AC systems: Generation of three phase voltages; advantages of three phase systems,
star and delta connections (balanced only), relation between line and phase voltages, line and phase
currents- Numerical problems

MODULE 4
Introduction to Semiconductor devices: Evolution of electronics – Vacuum tubes to nano
electronics. Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors (constructional features not required): types,
specifications. Standard values, color coding. PN Junction diode: Principle of operation, V-I
characteristics, principle of avalanche breakdown. Bipolar Junction Transistors: PNP and NPN
structures, Principle of operation, relation between current gains in CE, CB and CC, input and
output characteristics of common emitter configuration.
MODULE 5
Basic electronic circuits and instrumentation: Rectifiers and power supplies: Block diagram
description of a dc power supply, Working of a full wave bridge rectifier, capacitor filter (no
analysis), working of simple zener voltage regulator. Amplifiers: Block diagram of Public Address
system, Circuit diagram and working of common emitter (RC coupled) amplifier with its frequency
response, Concept of voltage divider biasing. Electronic Instrumentation: Block diagram of an
electronic instrumentation system.

MODULE 6
Introduction to Communication Systems: Evolution of communication systems – Telegraphy to 5G.
Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, frequency bands used for various communication
systems, block diagram of super heterodyne receiver, Principle of antenna – radiation from
accelerated charge. Mobile communication: basic principles of cellular communications, principle
and block diagram of GSM.

Text Books
1. D P Kothari and I J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. D C Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. ChinmoySaha, Arindham Halder and Debarati Ganguly, Basic Electronics - Principles and
Applications, Cambridge University Press, 2018.
4. M.S.Sukhija and T.K.Nagsarkar, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Oxford University
Press, 2012.
5. Wayne Tomasi and Neil Storey, A Textbook On Basic Communication and Information
Engineering, Pearson, 2010.

Reference Books
1. Del Toro V, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Pearson Education.
2. T. K. Nagsarkar, M. S. Sukhija, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Oxford Higher Education.
3. Hayt W H, Kemmerly J E, and Durbin S M, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Tata McGraw-Hill
4. Hughes, “Electrical and Electronic Technology”, Pearson Education.
5. V. N. Mittle and Arvind Mittal, “Basic Electrical Engineering,” Second Edition, McGraw Hill.
6. Parker and Smith, “Problems in Electrical Engineering”, CBS Publishers and Distributors.
7. S. B. Lal Seksena and Kaustuv Dasgupta, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Cambridge
University Press.
8. Anant Agarwal, Jeffrey Lang, Foundations of Analog and Digital Electronic Circuits, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers, 2005.
9. Bernard Grob, Ba sic Electronics, McGraw Hill.
10. A. Bruce Carlson, Paul B. Crilly, Communication Systems: An Introduction to Signals and
Noise in Electrical Communication, Tata McGraw Hill, 5 th Edition.
COURSE CONTENTS AND LECTURE SCHEDULE

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Elementary Concepts of Electric Circuits

1.1 Elementary concepts of DC electric circuits:

Basic Terminology including voltage, current, power, resistance, emf; 1

Resistances in series and parallel; Current and Voltage Division Rules;
Capacitors & Inductors: V-I relations and energy stored.

Ohms Law and Kirchhoff's laws-Problems; 2

Star-delta conversion (resistive networks only-derivation not required)- 1

problems.

1.2 Analysis of DC electric circuits: Mesh current method - Matrix 1

representation - Solution of network equations.

Node voltage methods-matrix representation-solution of network

equations by matrix methods. 1

Numerical problems. 2

2 Elementary Concepts of Magnetic circuits, Electromagnetic Induction and AC

fundamentals

2.1 Magnetic Circuits: Basic Terminology: MMF, field strength, flux density,
reluctance - comparison between electric and magnetic circuits-
1
Series and parallel magnetic circuits with composite materials,
numerical problems. 2

2.2 Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws, problems, Lenz's law- 1

statically induced and dynamically induced emfs -
Self-inductance and mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling 2

2.3 Alternating Current fundamentals: Generation of alternating voltages- 2

Representation of sinusoidal waveforms: frequency, period, Average,
RMS values and form factor of waveforms-Numerical Problems.

3 AC Circuits
3.1 AC Circuits: Phasor representation of sinusoidal quantities. 1
Trigonometric, Rectangular, Polar and complex forms.

Analysis of simple AC circuits: Purely resistive, inductive & capacitive

circuits; Inductive and capacitive reactance, concept of impedance. 2
Average Power, Power factor.

Analysis of RL, RC and RLC series circuits-active, reactive and apparent 1

power.
2
Simple numerical problems.

3.2 Three phase AC systems: Generation of three phase voltages;

advantages of three phase systems, star and delta connections
(balanced only), relation between line and phase voltages, line and 2
phase currents- Numerical problems.

4 Introduction to Semiconductor devices

4.1 Evolution of electronics – Vacuum tubes to nano electronics (In 1

evolutional perspective only)

4.2 Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors: types, specifications. Standard 2

values, color coding (No constructional features)

4.3 PN Junction diode: Principle of operation, V-I characteristics, principle 2

of avalanche breakdown

4.4 Bipolar Junction Transistors: PNP and NPN structures, Principle of 3

operation, relation between current gains in CE, CB and CC, input and
output characteristics of common emitter configuration

5 Basic electronic circuits and instrumentation

5.1 Rectifiers and power supplies: Block diagram description of a dc power 3

supply, Working of a full wave bridge rectifier, capacitor filter (no
analysis), working of simple zener voltage regulator

5.2 Amplifiers: Block diagram of Public Address system, Circuit diagram and 4
working of common emitter (RC coupled) amplifier with its frequency
response, Concept of voltage divider biasing

5.3 Electronic Instrumentation: Block diagram of an electronic 2

instrumentation system

6 Introduction to Communication Systems

6.1 Evolution of communication systems – Telegraphy to 5G 1

6.2 Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, frequency bands used for 4
various communication systems, block diagram of super heterodyne
receiver, Principle of antenna – radiation from accelerated charge

6.3 Mobile communication: basic principles of cellular communications, 2

principle and block diagram of GSM.

Suggested Simulation Assignments for Basic Electronics Engineering

1. Plot V-I characteristics of Si and Ge diodes on a simulator

2. Plot Input and Output characteristics of BJT on a simulator
3. Implementation of half wave and full wave rectifiers
4. Simulation of RC coupled amplifier with the design supplied
5. Generation of AM signal

Note: The simulations can be done on open tools such as QUCS, KiCad, GNURadio or similar software
to augment the understanding.
 CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
HUN LIFE SKILLS INTRODUCTION
101 MNC 2 0 2 --- 2019

Preamble: Life skills are those competencies that provide the means for an individual to be
resourceful and positive while taking on life's vicissitudes. Development of one's personality by being
aware of the self, connecting with others, reflecting on the abstract and the concrete, leading and
generating change, and staying rooted in time-tested values and principles is being aimed at. This
course is designed to enhance the employability and maximize the potential of the students by
introducing them to the principles that underly personal and professional success, and help them
acquire the skills needed to apply these principles in their lives and careers.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Define and Identify different life skills required in personal and professional life
CO 2 Develop an awareness of the self and apply well-defined techniques to cope with emotions
and stress.
CO 3 Explain the basic mechanics of effective communication and demonstrate these through
presentations.
CO 4 Take part in group discussions
CO 5 Use appropriate thinking and problem solving techniques to solve new problems
CO 6 Understand the basics of teamwork and leadership

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 1 2 2 1 3
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 1 1 3
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 1 3

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 50 50 2 hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation
Total Marks: 50

Attendance : 10 marks
Regular assessment : 15 marks
Series test (one test only, should include first three modules) : 25 marks

Regular assessment

 Group Discussion (Marks: 9)

Create groups of about 6 students each and engage them on a GD on a suitable topic
for about 20 minutes. Parameters to be used for evaluation are as follows:

 Communication Skills : 3 marks

 Subject Clarity : 2 marks
 Group Dynamics : 2 marks
 Behaviours & Mannerisms : 2 marks

 Presentation Skills (Marks: 6)

Identify a suitable topic and ask the students to prepare a presentation (preferably a
power point presentation) for about 10 minutes. Parameters to be used for
evaluation are as follows:

 Communication Skills : 2 marks

 Platform Skills : 2 marks
 Subject Clarity/Knowledge : 2 marks

End Semester Examination

Total Marks: 50 Time: 2 hrs.

Part A: Short answer question (25 marks)

There will be one question from each MODULE (five questions in total, five marks each). Each
question should be written in about maximum of 400 words. Parameters to be used for evaluation
are as follows:
(i) Content Clarity/Subject Knowledge
(ii) Presentation style
(iii) Organization of content

Part B: Case Study (25 marks)

The students will be given a case study with questions at the end. The students have to analyze the
case and answer the question at the end. Parameters to be used for evaluation are as follows:
(i) Analyze the case situation
(ii) Key players/characters of the case
(iii) Identification of the problem (both major & minor if exists)
(iv) Bring out alternatives
(v) Analyze each alternative against the problem
(vi) Choose the best alternative
(vii) Implement as solution
(viii) Conclusion
 (ix) Answer the question at the end of the case

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. List 'life skills' as identified by WHO

2. What do you mean by effective communication?

3. What are the essential life skills required by a professional?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Identify an effective means to deal with workplace stress.

2. How can a student apply journaling to stress management?

3. What is the PATH method? Describe a situation where this method can be used effectively.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Identify the communication network structure that can be observed in the given situations.
Describe them.

(a) A group discussion on development.

(b) An address from the Principal regarding punctuality.

(c) A reporter interviewing a movie star.

(d) Discussing the answers of a test with a group of friends.

2. Elucidate the importance of non-verbal communication in making a presentation

3. Differentiate between kinesics, proxemics, and chronemics with examples.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. How can a participant conclude a group discussion effectively?

2. 'Listening skills are essential for effectively participating in a group discussion.' Do you
agree? Substantiate your answer.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Illustrate the creative thinking process with the help of a suitable example

2. Translate the following problem from verbal to graphic form and find the solution : In a quiz,
Ananth has 50 points more than Bimal, Chinmay has 60 points less than Ananth, and Dharini
is 20 points ahead of Chinmay. What is the difference in points between Bimal and Dharini?
 3. List at least five ways in which the problem "How to increase profit?" can be redefined

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. A group of engineers decided to brainstorm a design issue on a new product. Since no one
wanted to disagree with the senior members, new ideas were not flowing freely. What
group dynamics technique would you suggest to avoid this 'groupthink'? Explain the
procedure.

2. “A group focuses on individual contribution, while a team must focus on synergy.” Explain.

3. Identify the type of group formed / constituted in each of the given situations

a) A Police Inspector with subordinates reporting to him

b) An enquiry committee constituted to investigate a specific incident

c) The Accounts Department of a company

d) A group of book lovers who meet to talk about reading

Syllabus

Module 1

Overview of Life Skills: Meaning and significance of life skills, Life skills identified by WHO: Self-
awareness, Empathy, Critical thinking, Creative thinking, Decision making, problem solving, Effective
communication, interpersonal relationship, coping with stress, coping with emotion.

Life skills for professionals: positive thinking, right attitude, attention to detail, having the big
picture, learning skills, research skills, perseverance, setting goals and achieving them, helping
others, leadership, motivation, self-motivation, and motivating others, personality development, IQ,
EQ, and SQ

Module 2

Self-awareness: definition, need for self-awareness; Coping With Stress and Emotions, Human
Values, tools and techniques of SA: questionnaires, journaling, reflective questions, meditation,
mindfulness, psychometric tests, feedback.

Stress Management: Stress, reasons and effects, identifying stress, stress diaries, the four A's of
stress management, techniques, Approaches: action-oriented, emotion-oriented, acceptance-
oriented, resilience, Gratitude Training,

Coping with emotions: Identifying and managing emotions, harmful ways of dealing with emotions,
PATH method and relaxation techniques.
Morals, Values and Ethics: Integrity, Civic Virtue, Respect for Others, Living Peacefully. Caring,
Sharing, Honesty, Courage, Valuing Time, Time management, Co operation, Commitment, Empathy,
Self-Confidence, Character, Spirituality, Avoiding Procrastination, Sense of Engineering Ethics.

Module 3

21st century skills: Creativity, Critical Thinking, Collaboration, Problem Solving, Decision Making,
Need for Creativity in the 21st century, Imagination, Intuition, Experience, Sources of Creativity,
Lateral Thinking, Myths of creativity, Critical thinking Vs Creative thinking, Functions of Left Brain &
Right brain, Convergent & Divergent Thinking, Critical reading & Multiple Intelligence.

Steps in problem solving: Problem Solving Techniques, Six Thinking Hats, Mind Mapping, Forced
Connections. Analytical Thinking, Numeric, symbolic, and graphic reasoning. Scientific temperament
and Logical thinking.

Module 4

Group and Team Dynamics: Introduction to Groups: Composition, formation, Cycle, thinking,
Clarifying expectations, Problem Solving, Consensus, Dynamics techniques, Group vs Team, Team
Dynamics, Virtual Teams. Managing team performance and managing conflicts, Intrapreneurship.

Module 5

Leadership: Leadership framework, entrepreneurial and moral leadership, vision, cultural

dimensions. Growing as a leader, turnaround leadership, managing diverse stakeholders, crisis
management. Types of Leadership, Traits, Styles, VUCA Leadership, Levels of Leadership,
Transactional vs Transformational Leaders, Leadership Grid, Effective Leaders.

Lab Activities

Verbal

Effective communication and Presentation skills.

Different kinds of communication; Flow of communication; Communication networks, Types of
barriers; Miscommunication
Introduction to presentations and group discussions.
Learning styles: visual, aural, verbal, kinaesthetic, logical, social, solitary; Previewing, KWL table,
active listening, REAP method
Note-taking skills: outlining, non-linear note-taking methods, Cornell notes, three column note
taking.
Memory techniques: mnemonics, association, flashcards, keywords, outlines, spider diagrams and
mind maps, spaced repetition.
Time management: auditing, identifying time wasters, managing distractions, calendars and
checklists; Prioritizing - Goal setting, SMART goals; Productivity tools and apps, Pomodoro technique.

Non Verbal:
Non-verbal Communication and Body Language: Forms of non-verbal communication; Interpreting
body-language cues; Kinesics; Proxemics; Chronemics; Effective use of body language,
Communication in a multi cultural environment.
Reference Books
1. Shiv Khera, You Can Win, Macmillan Books, New York, 2003.
2. Barun K. Mitra, “Personality Development & Soft Skills”, Oxford Publishers, Third impression,
2017.
3. ICT Academy of Kerala, "Life Skills for Engineers", McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,
2016.
4. Caruso, D. R. and Salovey P, “The Emotionally Intelligent Manager: How to Develop and Use
the Four Key Emotional Skills of Leadership”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
5. Kalyana, “Soft Skill for Managers”; First Edition; Wiley Publishing Ltd, 2015.
6. Larry James, “The First Book of Life Skills”; First Edition, Embassy Books, 2016.
7. Shalini Verma, “Development of Life Skills and Professional Practice”; First Edition; Sultan
Chand (G/L) & Company, 2014.
8. Daniel Goleman, "Emotional Intelligence"; Bantam, 2006.
9. Remesh S., Vishnu R.G., "Life Skills for Engineers", Ridhima Publications, First Edition, 2016.
10. Butterfield Jeff, “Soft Skills for Everyone”, Cengage Learning India Pvt Ltd; 1 edition, 2011.
11. Training in Interpersonal Skills: Tips for Managing People at Work, Pearson Education, India;
6 edition, 2015.
12. The Ace of Soft Skills: Attitude, Communication and Etiquette for Success, Pearson
Education; 1 edition, 2013.
 PHL ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
120 PHYSICS LAB INTRODUCTION
BSC 0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: The aim of this course is to make the students gain practical knowledge to co-relate with
the theoretical studies and to develop practical applications of engineering materials
and use the principle in the right way to implement the modern technology.

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop analytical/experimental skills and impart prerequisite hands on experience for

engineering laboratories

CO 2 Understand the need for precise measurement practices for data recording

CO 3 Understand the principle, concept, working and applications of relevant technologies and
comparison of results with theoretical calculations
CO 4 Analyze the techniques and skills associated with modern scientific tools such as lasers and
fiber optics
CO 5 Develop basic communication skills through working in groups in performing the laboratory
experiments and by interpreting the results

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 3 1 2 1
CO 2 3 3 1 2 1
CO 3 3 3 1 2 1
CO 4 3 3 1 2 1
CO 5 3 3 1 2 1

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

Duration(Internal)
Marks Marks

100 100 - 1 hour

 Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

(Minimum 8 experiments should be completed)

1. CRO-Measurement of frequency and amplitude of wave forms

2. Measurement of strain using strain gauge and wheatstone bridge
3. LCR Circuit – Forced and damped harmonic oscillations
4. Melde’s string apparatus- Measurement of frequency in the transverse and longitudinal mode
5. Wave length measurement of a monochromatic source of light using Newton’s Rings method.
6. Determination of diameter of a thin wire or thickness of a thin strip of paper using air wedge
method.
7. To measure the wavelength using a millimeter scale as a grating.
8. Measurement of wavelength of a source of light using grating.
9. Determination of dispersive power and resolving power of a plane transmission grating
10.Determination of the particle size of lycopodium powder
11.Determination of the wavelength of He-Ne laser or any standard laser using diffraction grating
12.Calculate the numerical aperture and study the losses that occur in optical fiber cable.
13.I-V characteristics of solar cell.
14.LED Characteristics.
15.Ultrasonic Diffractometer- Wavelength and velocity measurement of ultrasonic waves in a liquid
16.Deflection magnetometer-Moment of a magnet- Tan A position.

Reference books

1. S.L.Gupta and Dr.V.Kumar, “Practical physics with viva voice”, Pragati PrakashanPublishers, Revised
Edition, 2009

2. M.N.Avadhanulu, A.A.Dani and Pokely P.M, “Experiments in Engineering Physics”, S.Chand&Co,2008

3. S. K. Gupta, “Engineering physics practicals”, Krishna Prakashan Pvt. Ltd., 2014

4. P. R. Sasikumar “Practical Physics”, PHI Ltd., 2011.

 CYL ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
120 BSC 0 0 2 1

Preamble: To impart scientific approach and to familiarize with the experiments in chemistry relevant
for research projects in higher semesters

Prerequisite: Experiments in chemistry introduced at the plus two levels in schools

Course outcomes: After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO 1 Understand and practice different techniques of quantitative chemical analysis to

generate experimental skills and apply these skills to various analyses

CO 2 Develop skills relevant to synthesize organic polymers and acquire the practical skill to
use TLC for the identification of drugs
CO 3 Develop the ability to understand and explain the use of modern spectroscopic
techniques for analysing and interpreting the IR spectra and NMR spectra of some
organic compounds
CO 4 Acquire the ability to understand, explain and use instrumental techniques for chemical
analysis
CO 5 Learn to design and carry out scientific experiments as well as accurately record and
analyze the results of such experiments

CO 6 Function as a member of a team, communicate effectively and engage in further

learning. Also understand how chemistry addresses social, economical and
environmental problems and why it is an integral part of curriculum

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 1 3
CO 6 3 1 3
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

marks marks Duration(Internal)

100 100 - 1 hour

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks
End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (MINIMUM 8 MANDATORY)

1. Estimation of total hardness of water-EDTA method

2. Potentiometric titration
3. Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions.
4. Calibration of pH meter and determination of pH of a solution
5. Estimation of chloride in water
6. Identification of drugs using TLC
7. Determination of wavelength of absorption maximum and colorimetric estimation of Fe3+ in
solution
8. Determination of molar absorptivity of a compound (KMnO4 or any water soluble food
colorant)
9. Synthesis of polymers (a) Urea-formaldehyde resin (b) Phenol-formaldehyde resin
10. Estimation of iron in iron ore
11. Estimation of copper in brass
12. Estimation of dissolved oxygen by Winkler’s method
13. (a) Analysis of IR spectra (minimum 3 spectra) (b) Analysis of 1H NMR spectra (
minimum 3 spectra)
14. Flame photometric estimation of Na+ to find out the salinity in sand
15. Determination of acid value of a vegetable oil
16. Determination of saponification of a vegetable oil
Reference Books

1. G. Svehla, B. Sivasankar, “Vogel's Qualitative Inorganic Analysis”, Pearson, 2012.

2. R. K. Mohapatra, “Engineering Chemistry with Laboratory Experiments”, PHI Learning, 2017.

3. Muhammed Arif, “Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual”, Owl publishers, 2019.

4. Ahad J., “Engineering Chemistry Lab manual”, Jai Publications, 2019.

5. Roy K Varghese, “Engineering Chemistry Laboratory Manual”, Crownplus Publishers, 2019.

6. Soney C George, Rino Laly Jose, “Lab Manual of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand &
Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2019.
 ESL YEAR OF
CIVIL & MECHANICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
120 INTRODUCTION
WORKSHOP
0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: The course is designed to train the students to identify and manage the tools, materials
and methods required to execute an engineering project. Students will be introduced to a team
working environment where they develop the necessary skills for planning, preparing and executing
an engineering project.

To enable the student to familiarize various tools, measuring devices, practices and different
methods of manufacturing processes employed in industry for fabricating components.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

Course
Course Outcome Description
Outcome
CO 1 Name different devices and tools used for civil engineering measurements
CO 2 Explain the use of various tools and devices for various field measurements
Demonstrate the steps involved in basic civil engineering activities like plot
CO 3 measurement, setting out operation, evaluating the natural profile of land, plumbing
and undertaking simple construction work.
Choose materials and methods required for basic civil engineering activities like field
CO 4
measurements, masonry work and plumbing.
CO 5 Compare different techniques and devices used in civil engineering measurements
Identify Basic Mechanical workshop operations in accordance with the material and
CO 6
objects
Apply appropriate Tools and Instruments with respect to the mechanical workshop
CO 7
trades
CO 8 Apply appropriate safety measures with respect to the mechanical workshop trades

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11
12
CO 1 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 - -
CO 2 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 - -
CO 3 1 - - - 1 1 - 2 2 2 1 -
CO 4 1 - - - 1 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO 5 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 1
CO 6 2
CO 7 2
CO 8 2

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 70 30 1 hour

Assessment Procedure: Total marks allotted for the course is 100 marks. CIE shall be conducted for
70 marks and ESE for 30 marks. CIE should be done for the work done by the student and also
viva voce based on the work done on each practical session. ESE shall be evaluated by written
examination of one hour duration conducted internally by the institute.

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

PART 1

CIVIL WORKSHOP

Exercise 1. Calculate the area of a built-up space and a small parcel of land- Use standard
measuring tape and digital distance measuring devices

Exercise 2. (a) Use screw gauge and vernier calliper to measure the diameter of a steel rod and
thickness of a flat bar

(b) Transfer the level from one point to another using a water level

(c) Set out a one room building with a given plan and measuring tape

Exercise 3. Find the level difference between any two points using dumpy level

Exercise 4. (a) Construct a 1 thick brick wall of 50 cm height and 60 cm length using English
bond. Use spirit level to assess the tilt of walls.

(b) Estimate the number of different types of building blocks to construct this wall.
Exercise 5. (a) Introduce the students to plumbing tools, different types of pipes, type of
connections, traps, valves ,fixtures and sanitary fittings.

(b) Install a small rainwater harvesting installation in the campus

Reference Books:

1. Khanna P.N, “Indian Practical Civil Engineering Handbook”, Engineers Publishers.

2. Bhavikatti. S, "Surveying and Levelling (Volume 1)", I.K. International Publishing House
3. Arora S.P and Bindra S.P, " Building Construction", Dhanpat Rai Publications
4. S. C. Rangwala, “Engineering Materials,” Charotar Publishing House.

PART II

MECHANICAL WORKSHOP

LIST OF EXERCISES

(Minimum EIGHT units mandatory and FIVE models from Units 2 to 8 mandatory)

UNIT 1:- General : Introduction to workshop practice, Safety precautions, Shop floor ethics, Basic
First Aid knowledge.
Study of mechanical tools, components and their applications: (a) Tools: screw drivers,
spanners, Allen keys, cutting pliers etc and accessories (b) bearings, seals, O-rings, circlips,
keys etc.
UNIT 2:- Carpentry : Understanding of carpentry tools
Minimum any one model
1. T –Lap joint 2. Cross lap joint 3. Dovetail joint 4. Mortise joints
UNIT 3:- Foundry : Understanding of foundry tools
Minimum any one model
1.Bench Molding 2. Floor Molding 3. Core making 4. Pattern making
UNIT 4: - Sheet Metal : Understanding of sheet metal working tools
Minimum any one model
1. Cylindrical shape
2. Conical shape
3. Prismatic shaped job from sheet metal
UNIT 5: - Fitting : Understanding of tools used for fitting
Minimum any one model
1. Square Joint
2. V- Joint
3. Male and female fitting
UNIT 6: - Plumbing : Understanding of plumbing tools, pipe joints
Any one exercise on joining of pipes making use of minimum three types of pipe joints

UNIT 7: - Smithy: Understanding of tools used for smithy.

 Demonstrating the forge-ability of different materials (MS, Al, alloy steel and cast steels)
in cold and hot states.
Observing the qualitative difference in the hardness of these materials
Minimum any one exercise on smithy
1. Square prism
2. Hexagonal headed bolt
3. Hexagonal prism
4. Octagonal prism

UNIT 8: -Welding: Understanding of welding equipments

Minimum any one welding practice
Making Joints using electric arc welding. bead formation in horizontal, vertical
and over head positions

UNIT 9: - Assembly: Demonstration only

Dissembling and assembling of
1. Cylinder and piston assembly
2. Tail stock assembly
3. Bicycle
4. Pump or any other machine

UNIT 10: - Machines: Demonstration and applications of the following machines

Shaping and slotting machine; Milling machine; Grinding Machine; Lathe; Drilling
Machine.
UNIT 11: - Modern manufacturing methods: Power tools, CNC machine tools, 3D printing, Glass
cutting.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No Topic No of Sessions

1 INTRODUCTION

Workshop practice, shop floor precautions, ethics and First Aid

knowledge.
1.1 Studies of mechanical tools, components and their applications: (a) 1
Tools: screw drivers, spanners, Allen keys, cutting pliers etc and
accessories (b) bearings, seals, O-rings, circlips, keys etc

2 CARPENTRY

2.1 Understanding of carpentry tools and making minimum one model 2

 3 FOUNDRY

3.1 Understanding of foundry tools and making minimum one model 2

4 SHEET METAL

Understanding of sheet metal working tools and making minimum

4.1 2
one model

5 FITTING

5.1 Understanding of fitting tools and making minimum one model 2

6 PLUMBING

Understanding of pipe joints and plumbing tools and making

6.1
minimum one model 2

7 SMITHY

7.1 Understanding of smithy tools and making minimum one model 2

8 WELDING

Understanding of welding equipments and making minimum one

8.1
model 2

9 ASSEMBLY

Demonstration of assembly and dissembling of multiple parts

9.1
components 1

10 MACHINES

10.1 Demonstration of various machines 1

11 MODERN MANUFACTURING METHODS

Demonstrations of: power tools, CNC Machine tools, 3D printing,

11.1
Glass cutting 1
ESL 130 ELECTRICAL & CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
ELECTRONICS WORKSHOP INTRODUCTION
ESC 0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: Electrical Workshop is intended to impart skills to plan and carry out simple
electrical wiring. It is essential for the practicing engineers to identify the basic practices and
safety measures in electrical wiring.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Demonstrate safety measures against electric shocks.

CO 2 Identify the tools used for electrical wiring, electrical accessories, wires, cables, batteries
and standard symbols
CO 3 Develop the connection diagram, identify the suitable accessories and materials necessary
for wiring simple lighting circuits for domestic buildings
CO 4 Identify and test various electronic components
CO 5 Draw circuit schematics with EDA tools
CO 6 Assemble and test electronic circuits on boards
CO 7 Work in a team with good interpersonal skills

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 - - - - - 3 - - - - - 1

CO 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1 - -

CO 3 2 - - 1 - 1 - 1 2 2 - 2

CO 4 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2

CO 5 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO 6 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 1

CO 7 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - 2

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

Duration(Internal)

100 100 - 1 hour

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

Syllabus

PART 1

ELECTRICAL

List of Exercises / Experiments

1. a) Demonstrate the precautionary steps adopted in case of Electrical shocks.

b)Identify different types of cables, wires, switches, fuses, fuse carriers, MCB, ELCB
and MCCB with ratings.
2. Wiring of simple light circuit for controlling light/ fan point (PVC conduit wiring)
3. Wiring of light/fan circuit using Two way switches . (Staircase wiring)
4. Wiring of Fluorescent lamps and light sockets (6A) with a power circuit for controlling power
device. (16A socket)
5. Wiring of power distribution arrangement using single phase MCB distribution board with
ELCB, main switch and Energy meter.
6. a)Identify different types of batteries with their specifications.
b)Demonstrate the Pipe and Plate Earthing Schemes using Charts/Site Visit.

PART II

ELECTRONICS

List of Exercises / Experiments (Minimum of 7 mandatory)

1. Familiarization/Identification of electronic components with specification

(Functionality, type, size, colour coding, package, symbol, cost etc. [Active, Passive,
Electrical, Electronic, Electro-mechanical, Wires, Cables, Connectors, Fuses, Switches,
Relays, Crystals, Displays, Fasteners, Heat sink etc.)
2. Drawing of electronic circuit diagrams using BIS/IEEE symbols and introduction to EDA
tools (such as Dia or XCircuit), Interpret data sheets of discrete components and IC’s,
Estimation and costing.

3. Familiarization/Application of testing instruments and commonly used tools.

[Multimeter, Function generator, Power supply, DSO etc.] [Soldering iron, De-
soldering pump, Pliers, Cutters, Wire strippers, Screw drivers, Tweezers, Crimping
tool, Hot air soldering and de- soldering station etc.]

4. Testing of electronic components [Resistor, Capacitor, Diode, Transistor and JFET

using multimeter.]

5. Inter-connection methods and soldering practice. [Bread board, Wrapping, Crimping,

Soldering - types - selection of materials and safety precautions, soldering practice in
connectors and general purpose PCB, Crimping.]

6. Printed circuit boards (PCB) [Types, Single sided, Double sided, PTH, Processing
methods, Design and fabrication of a single sided PCB for a simple circuit with manual
etching (Ferric chloride) and drilling.]
7. Assembling of electronic circuits using SMT (Surface Mount Technology) stations.
8. Assembling of electronic circuit/system on general purpose PCB, test and show the
functioning (Any Two circuits).

1. Fixed voltage power supply with transformer, rectifier diode, capacitor filter,
zener/IC regulator.

2. Square wave generation using IC 555 timer in IC base.

3. Sine wave generation using IC 741 OP-AMP in IC base.
4. RC coupled amplifier with transistor BC107.
SEMESTER II
MAT VECTOR CALCULUS, CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of
102 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND Introduction
TRANSFORMS BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This course introduces the concepts and applications of differentiation and integration of
vector valued functions, differential equations, Laplace and Fourier Transforms. The objective of this
course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with some advanced concepts and methods in
Mathematics which include the Calculus of vector valued functions, ordinary differential equations
and basic transforms such as Laplace and Fourier Transforms which are invaluable for any engineer’s
mathematical tool box. The topics treated in this course have applications in all branches of
engineering.

Prerequisite: Calculus of single and multi variable functions.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Compute the derivatives and line integrals of vector functions and learn their applications
CO 2 Evaluate surface and volume integrals and learn their inter-relations and applications.
CO 3 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous linear differential equation with constant
coefficients
CO 4 Compute Laplace transform and apply them to solve ODEs arising in engineering
CO 5 Determine the Fourier transforms of functions and apply them to solve problems arising in
engineering

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
2 8
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Test 1 Test 2 (Marks)
(Marks (Marks)
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Assignments: Assignment should include specific problems highlighting the applications of the
methods introduced in this course in science and engineering.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Compute the derivatives and line integrals of vector functions and learn
their applications

1. How would you calculate the speed, velocity and acceleration at any instant of a particle moving
in space whose position vector at time 𝑡is 𝒓(𝑡)?

2. Find the work done by the force field 𝐹 = (𝑒 − 𝑦 )𝒊 + (cos 𝑦 + 𝑥 )on a particle that travels
once around the unit circle centred at origin having radius 1.

3. When do you say that a vector field is conservative? What are the implications if a vector field is
conservative?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Evaluate surface and volume integrals and learn their inter-relations and
applications

1. Write any one application each of line integral, double integral and surface integral.

2. Use the divergence theorem to find the outward flux of the vector field 𝐹(𝑥, 𝑦 , 𝑧) = 𝑧𝒌across the

𝑥 +𝑦 +𝑧 =𝑎

3. State Greens theorem. Use Green’s theorem to express the area of a plane region bounded by a
curve as a line integral.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous linear differential equation
with constant coefficients

1. If 𝑦 (𝑥) and 𝑦 (𝑥) are solutions of𝑦 + 𝑝𝑦 + 𝑞𝑦 = 0, where 𝑝, 𝑞 are constants, show that

𝑦 (𝑥) + 𝑦 (𝑥) is also a solution.

2. Solve the differential equation 𝑦 + 𝑦 = 0.001𝑥 using method of undetermined coefficient.

3. Solve the differential equation of𝑦 − 3𝑦 + 3𝑦 − 𝑦 = 𝑒 − 𝑥 − 1.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Compute Laplace transform and apply them to solve ODEs arising in
engineering

1. What is the inverse Laplace Transformof (𝑠) = ?

2. Find Laplace Transform of Unit step function.

3. Solve the differential equation of 𝑦 + 9𝑦 = 𝛿 𝑡 − ? Given 𝑦(0) = 2, 𝑦 (0) = 0

Course Outcome 5(CO5): Determine the Fourier transforms of functions and apply them to solve
problems arising in engineering

1. Find the Fourier integral representation of function defined by

𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 for𝑥 > 0 and 𝑓(𝑥) = 0for𝑥 < 0.

2. What are the conditions for the existence of Fourier Transform of a function 𝑓(𝑥)?

3. Find the Fourier transform of 𝑓(𝑥) = 1 for |𝑥| < 1 and 𝑓(𝑥) = 0 otherwise.

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: MAT 102

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

VECTOR CALCULUS, DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND TRANSFORMS

(2019-Scheme)

(Common to all branches)

 PART A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. Is the vector 𝒓 where 𝒓 = 𝑥𝒊 + 𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧𝒌 conservative. Justify your answer.

2. State Greens theorem including all the required hypotheses
3. What is the outward flux of 𝑭(𝒙, 𝒚, 𝒛) = 𝑥𝒊 + 𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧𝒌 across any unit cube.
4. What is the relationship between Green’s theorem and Stokes theorem?
5. Solve 𝑦 + 4𝑦 + 2.5𝑦 = 0
6. Does the function 𝑦 = 𝐶 cos 𝑥 + 𝐶 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑥form a solution of𝑦 + 𝑦 = 0?. Is it the general
solution? Justify your answer.
7. Find the Laplace transform of 𝑒 sinh 4𝑡
8. Find the Laplace inverse transform of ( )
.

9. Given the Fourier transform 𝑒 of 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 , find the Fourier transform of 𝑥𝑒

√
10. State the convolution theorem for Fourier transform

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module. Each full question carries 14 marks)

MODULE 1

11a) Prove that the force field 𝑭 = 𝑒 𝒊 + 𝑥𝑒 𝒋is conservative in the entire xy-plane

b) Use Greens theorem to find the area enclosed by the ellipse + =1

12 a) Find the divergence of the vector field𝑭 = (𝒙𝟐 𝒚𝟐 𝒛𝟐 )𝟑/𝟐

(𝑥𝒊 + 𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧𝒌)

b) Find the work done by the force field𝑭(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑥𝑦𝒊 + 𝑦𝑧𝒋 + 𝑥𝑧𝒌along C where

C is the curve𝒓(𝑡) = 𝑡𝒊 + 𝑡 𝒋 + 𝑡 𝒌

MODULE II

13 a) Use divergence theorem to find the outward flux of the vector field

𝑭 = 2𝑥𝒊 + 3𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧 𝒌acrossthe unit cube bounded by or 𝑥 = 0, 𝑦 = 0,𝑧 = 0, 𝑥 =

1,𝑦 = 1,𝑧 = 1

b) Find the circulation of 𝑭 = (𝑥 − 𝑧)𝒊 + (𝑦 − 𝑥)𝒋 + (𝒛 − 𝒙𝒚)𝒌 using Stokes theorem

around the triangle with vertices 𝐴(1,0,0), 𝐵(0,2,0)and 𝐶(0,0,1)

14 a) Use divergence theorem to find the volume of the cylindrical solid bounded
by 𝑥 + 4𝑥 + 𝑦 = 7, 𝑧 = −1, 𝑧 = 4, given the vector field 𝑭 = 𝒙𝑖 + 𝒚𝑗 + 𝒛𝑘
across surfaceof the cylinder

b) Use Stokes theorem to evaluate∫𝑪 𝑭. 𝒅𝒓where𝑭 = 𝑥 𝒊 + 3𝑥𝒋 − 𝑦 𝒌where Cis

 the circle 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 1 in the xy- plane with counterclockwise orientation looking

down the positive z-axis

MODULE III

15 a) Solve 𝑦 + 4𝑦 + 4𝑦 = 𝑥 + 𝑒 cos 𝑥
b) Solve 𝑦 − 3𝑦 + 3𝑦 − 𝑦 = 𝑒 − 𝑥 − 1
16 a) Solve𝒚 + 𝟑𝑦 + 3𝑦 + 𝑦 = 30𝑒 given𝑦(0) = 3,𝑦 (0) = −3 , 𝑦 (0) = −47
b) Using method of variation of parameters, solve𝑦 + 𝑦 = 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥

MODULE IV

17 a) Find the inverse Laplace transform of 𝐹(𝑠) =

b) Solve the differential equation𝑦 + 16𝑦 = 4𝛿(𝑡 − 3𝜋); 𝑦(0) = 2,𝑦 (0) = 0 using Laplace
transform

18 a) Solve𝑦 + 3𝑦 + 2𝑦 = 𝑓(𝑡) where 𝑓(𝑡) = 1 for 0 < 𝑡 < 1 and 𝑓(𝑡) = 1for 𝑡 > 1
using Laplace transform

b) Apply convolution theorem to find the Laplace inverse transform of ( )

MODULE V

19 a) Find the Fourier cosine integral representation for 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 for 𝑥 > 0and
∞
𝑘 > 0 and hence evaluate ∫ the function

b) Does the Fourier sine transform 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 sin 𝑥for 0 < 𝑥 < ∞ exist? Justify your
answer

20 a) Find the Fourier transform of 𝑓(𝑥) = |𝑥 |for |𝑥| < 1 and 𝑓(𝑥) = 0 otherwise

b) Find the Fourier cosine transform of 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 for a> 0

 Syllabus

Module 1 (Calculus of vector functions)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 12.1, 12.2, 12.6, 13.6, 15.1, 15.2, 15.3)

Vector valued function of single variable, derivative of vector function and geometrical
interpretation, motion along a curve-velocity, speed and acceleration. Concept of scalar and vector
fields , Gradient and its properties, directional derivative , divergence and curl, Line integrals of
vector fields, work as line integral, Conservative vector fields , independence of path and potential
function(results without proof).

Module 2 ( Vector integral theorems)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 15.4, 15.5, 15.6, 15.7, 15.8)

Green’s theorem (for simply connected domains, without proof) and applications to evaluating line
integrals and finding areas. Surface integrals over surfaces of the form z = g(x, y), y = g(x, z) or x =
g(y, z) , Flux integrals over surfaces of the form z = g(x, y), y = g(x, z) or x = g(y, z), divergence
theorem (without proof) and its applications to finding flux integrals, Stokes’ theorem (without
proof) and its applications to finding line integrals of vector fields and work done.

Module- 3 ( Ordinary differential equations)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 2.1, 2.2, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.10, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3)

Homogenous linear differential equation of second order, superposition principle,general solution,

homogenous linear ODEs with constant coefficients-general solution. Solution of Euler-Cauchy
equations (second order only).Existence and uniqueness (without proof). Non homogenous linear
ODEs-general solution, solution by the method of undetermined coefficients (for the right hand side
of the form 𝑥 ,𝑒 ,𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑥,𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑎𝑥,𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑥𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑎𝑥and their linear combinations), methods of
variation of parameters. Solution of higher order equations-homogeneous and non-homogeneous
with constant coefficient using method of undetermined coefficient.

Module- 4 (Laplace transforms)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 6.1,6.2,6.3,6.4,6.5)

Laplace Transform and its inverse ,Existence theorem ( without proof) , linearity,Laplace transform
of basic functions, first shifting theorem, Laplace transform of derivatives and integrals, solution of
differential equations using Laplace transform, Unit step function, Second shifting theorems. Dirac
delta function and its Laplace transform, Solution of ordinary differential equation involving unit
step function and Dirac delta functions. Convolution theorem(without proof)and its application to
finding inverse Laplace transform of products of functions.
Module-5 (Fourier Tranforms)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 11.7,11.8, 11.9)

Fourier integral representation, Fourier sine and cosine integrals. Fourier sine and cosine transforms,
inverse sine and cosine transform. Fourier transform and inverse Fourier transform, basic properties.
The Fourier transform of derivatives. Convolution theorem (without proof)

Text Books

1. H. Anton, I. Biven S.Davis, “Calculus”, Wiley, 10th edition, 2015.

2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley, 10 th edition, 2015.

Reference Books

1. J. Stewart, Essential Calculus, Cengage, 2nd edition, 2017

2. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9 th Edition, Pearson,Reprint,
2002.

3. Peter O Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 7th Edition, Thomson, 2007.

4. Louis C Barret, C Ray Wylie, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 6 th
edition, 2003.

5. VeerarajanT.”Engineering Mathematics for first year”, Tata McGraw - Hill, 2008.

6. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36 th edition , 2010.

7. Srimanta Pal, Subodh C. Bhunia, “Engineering Mathematics”, Oxford University Press, 2015.

8. Ronald N. Bracewell, “The Fourier Transform and its Applications”, McGraw – Hill
International Editions, 2000.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Calculus of vector functions (9 hours)

1.1 Vector valued function of a scalar variable - derivative of vector valued 2

function of scalar variable t-geometrical meaning

1.2 Motion along a curve-speed , velocity, acceleration 1

1.3 Gradient and its properties, directional derivative , divergent and curl 3

1.4 Line integrals with respect to arc length, line integrals of vector fields. 2
Work done as line integral

1.5 Conservative vector field, independence of path, potential function 1

2 Vector integral theorems( 9 hours)

2.1 Green’s theorem and it’s applications 2

2.2 Surface integrals , flux integral and their evaluation 3

2.3 Divergence theorem and applications 2

2.4 Stokes theorem and applications 2

3 Ordinary Differential Equations (9 hours)

3.1 Homogenous linear equation of second order, Superposition principle, 1

general solution

3.2 Homogenous linear ODEs of second order with constant coefficients 2

3.3 Second order Euler-Cauchy equation 1

3.4 Non homogenous linear differential equations of second order with 3

constant coefficient-solution by undetermined coefficients, variation of
parameters.

3.5 Higher order equations with constant coefficients 2

4 Laplace Transform (10 hours)

4.1 Laplace Transform , inverse Transform, Linearity, First shifting theorem, 2

transform of basic functions

4.2 Transform of derivatives and integrals 1

4.3 Solution of Differential equations, Initial value problems by Laplace 2

transform method.

4.4 Unit step function --- Second shifting theorem 2

4.5 Dirac Delta function and solution of ODE involving Dirac delta function 2

4.6 Convolution and related problems. 1

5 Fourier Transform (8 hours)

5.1 Fourier integral representation 1

5.2 Fourier Cosine and Sine integrals and transforms 2

5.3 Complex Fourier integral representation, Fourier transform and its 3

inverse transforms, basic properties

5.4 Fourier transform of derivatives, Convolution theorem 2

 PHT ENGINEERING PHYSICS A CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
100 (FOR CIRCUIT BRANCHES) INTRODUCTION
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The aim of the Engineering Physics Program is to offer students a solid background in the
fundamentals of Physics and to impart that knowledge in engineering disciplines. The
program is designed to develop scientific attitudes and enable the students to correlate
the concepts of Physics with the core programmes

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics, Mathematical course on vector calculus,

differential equations and linear algebra

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Compute the quantitative aspects of waves and oscillations in engineering systems.

CO 2 Apply the interaction of light with matter through interference, diffraction and identify
these phenomena in different natural optical processes and optical instruments.

CO 3 Analyze the behaviour of matter in the atomic and subatomic level through the principles of
quantum mechanics to perceive the microscopic processes in electronic devices.

CO 4 Classify the properties of magnetic materials and apply vector calculus to static magnetic
fields and use Maxwell’s equations to diverse engineering problems

CO 5 Analyze the principles behind various superconducting applications, explain the working of
solid state lighting devices and fibre optic communication system

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2 1 2 1
CO 2 3 2 1 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 1
CO 4 3 1 1 2 1
CO 5 3 1 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the effect of damping force on oscillators.

2. Distinguish between transverse and longitudinal waves.

3. (a) Derive an expression for the fundamental frequency of transverse vibration in a

stretched string.

(b) Calculate the fundamental frequency of a string of length 2 m weighing 6 g kept

stretched by a load of 600 kg.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain colours in thin films.

2. Distinguish between Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction.

3. (a) Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and obtain the expression for radii of bright and
dark rings in reflected system. Also explain how it is used to determine the wavelength of
a monochromatic source of light.

(b) A liquid of refractive index µ is introduced between the lens and glass plate.
 What happens to the fringe system? Justify your answer.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Give the physical significance of wave function ?

2. What are excitons ?

3. (a) Solve Schrodinger equation for a particle in a one dimensional box and obtain its
energy eigen values and normalised wave functions.

(b) Calculate the first three energy values of an electron in a one dimensional box of width
1 A0 in electron volt.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Compare displacement current and conduction current.

2. Mention any four properties of ferro magnetic materials.

3. (a) Starting from Maxwell’s equations, derive the free space electromagnetic wave
equation and show that velocity of electromagnetic wave is 1/ (µo εo) ½

(b) An electromagnetic wave is described by E = 100 exp 8πi [10 14 t – (10 6 z / 3)] V/m.
Find the direction of propagation of the wave,speed of the wave and magnetic flux
density in the wave.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the working of a solar cell.

2. Distinguish between Type I and Type II super conductors.

3. (a) Define numerical aperture and derive an expression for it.

(b) Explain the working of intensity modulated fibre optic sensor.

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: PHT 100

Course Name: Engineering Physics A

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Compare electrical and mechanical oscillators

2. Distinguish between longitudinal and transverse waves

3. Write a short note on antireflection coating.

4. Diffraction of light is not as evident in daily experience as that of sound waves. Give reason.

5. State and explain Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle. With the help of it explain natural

line broadening.

6. Explain surface to volume ratio of nanomaterials.

7. State Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction.

8. Compare displacement current and conduction current

9. List four important applications of superconductors.

10. Give the working principle of LED. (10x3=30)

PART B

Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module 1
11. (a) Derive the differential equation of damped harmonic oscillator and deduce its
solution.Discuss the cases of over damped, critically damped and under damped cases. (10)

(b) The frequency of a tuning fork is 500 Hz and its Q factor is 7×10 4. Find the relaxation time.
Also calculate the time after which its energy becomes 1/10 of its initial undamped value.(4)

12. (a) Derive an expression for the velocity of propagation of a transverse wave in a stretched
string. Deduce laws of transverse vibrations. (10)

(b) The equation of transverse vibration of a stretched string is given by y =0.00327 sin (72.1x-
2.72t)m, in which the numerical constants are in S.I units. Evaluate (i) Amplitude (ii) Wavelength
(iii) Frequency and (iv)Velocity of the wave. (4)

Module 2

13.(a)Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and show that the radius of dark ring is
proportional to the square root of natural numbers. How can we use Newton’s rings
experiment to determine the refractive index of a liquid. (10)

(b) Two pieces of plane glass are placed together with a piece of paper between two at one
end. Find the angle of the wedge in seconds if the film is viewed with a monochromatic light of
wavelength 4800Å. Given β = 0.0555 cm. (4)

14. (a) Explain the diffraction due to a plane transmission grating. Obtain the grating equation. (10)

(b) A grating has 6000 lines per cm. Find the angular separation of the two yellow lines
of mercury of wavelengths 577 nm and 579 nm in the second order. (4)

Module 3

15.(a) Derive time dependent and independent Schrodinger equations. (10)

(b) An electron is confined to one dimensional potential box of length 2Å. Calculate the energies
corresponding to the first and second quantum states in eV. (4)

16.(a) Classify nanomaterials based on dimensionality of quantum confinement and explain the
following nanostructures. (i) nano sheets (ii) nano wires (iii) quantum dots. (10)

(b) Find the de Broglie wavelength of electron whose kinetic energy is 15 eV. (4)

Module 4

17.(a) State Poynting’s Theorem. Calculate the value of Poynting vector at the surface of the sun if
the power radiated by the sun is 3.8 x 10 26 W and its radius is 7 X 10 8 m. (5)
 (b) Distinguish between paramagnetic, diamagnetic and ferromagnetic materials. (9)

18.(a) Starting from Maxwell’s Equations, derive electromagnetic wave equations in free space. (10)

(b) If the magnitude of H in a plane wave is 1 A/m, find the magnitude of E in free space. (4)

Module 5

19.(a) Show that superconductors are perfect diamagnets. Distinguish between Type I and

Type II superconductors with suitable examples. (10)

(b) Write a short note on high temperature superconductors. (4)

20.(a) Define numerical aperture of an optic fibre and derive an expression for the NA of a step
index fibre with a neat diagram. (10)

(b) Calculate the numerical aperture and acceptance angle of a fibre with a core refractive index
of 1.54 and a cladding refractive index of 1.50 when the fibre is inside water of refractive
index 1.33. (4) (14x5=70)
 Syllabus

ENGINEERING PHYSICS A
(FOR CIRCUIT BRANCHES)

Module 1
Oscillations and Waves
Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of differential equation and its solution,
Over damped, Critically damped and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression, Forced
oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for amplitude and phase of forced
oscillations, Amplitude Resonance-Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness
of Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators

Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its solution, Three dimensional
wave equation and its solution (no derivation), Distinction between transverse and longitudinal
waves, Transverse vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration

Module 2
Wave Optics
Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin films - Cosine law (Reflected
system), Derivation of the conditions of constructive and destructive Interference, Interference due
to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings -
Measurement of wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings

Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, Diffraction grating-Grating

equation, Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive power of a grating with
expression (no derivation)

Module 3
Quantum Mechanics & Nanotechnology
Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of Particles, Uncertainty principle,
Applications-Absence of electrons inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening mechanism,
Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave equations-Physical meaning of
wave function, Particle in a one dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and
energy eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)

Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to volume ratio for nanomaterials,
Quantum confinement in one dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots, Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical,
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)

Module 4
Magnetism & Electro Magnetic Theory
Magnetic field and Magnetic flux density, Gauss’s law for Magnetic flux density, Ampere’s Circuital
law, Faraday’s law in terms of EMF produced by changing magnetic flux, Magnetic permeability and
susceptibility, Classification of magnetic materials-para, dia and ferromagnetic materials
Fundamentals of vector calculus, concept of divergence, gradient and curl along with physical
significance, Line, Surface and Volume integrals, Gauss divergence theorem & Stokes’ theorem,
Equation of continuity, Derivation of Maxwell’s equations in vacuum, Comparison of displacement
current with conduction current. Electromagnetic waves, Velocity of Electromagnetic waves in free
space, Flow of energy and Poynting’s vector (no derivation)

Module 5
Superconductivity & Photonics
Superconducting phenomena, Meissner effect and perfect diamagnetism, Types of superconductors-
Type I and Type II, BCS Theory (Qualitative), High temperature superconductors-Applications of
super conductivity

Introduction to photonics-Photonic devices-Light Emitting Diode, Photo detectors -Junction and PIN
photodiodes, Solar cells-I-V Characteristics, Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of
fibres-Step index and Graded index fibres, Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic
communication system (block diagram), Industrial, Medical and Technological applications of optical
fibre, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity Modulated and Phase modulated sensors.

Text Books

1. M.N.Avadhanulu, P.G.Kshirsagar,TVS Arun Murthy “A Text book of Engineering Physics”, S.Chand

&Co., Revised Edition 2019

2. H.K.Malik , A.K. Singh, “Engineering Physics” McGraw Hill Education, Second Edition 2017

Reference Books

1. Arthur Beiser, “Concepts of Modern Physics ", Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 6th Edition
2003

2. D.K. Bhattacharya, Poonam Tandon, “Engineering Physics”, Oxford University Press, 2015

3. Md.N.Khan & S.Panigrahi “Principles of Engineering Physics 1&2”, Cambridge University

Press, 2016

4. Aruldhas G., “Engineering Physics”, PHI Pvt. Ltd., 2015

5. Ajoy Ghatak, “Optics”, Mc Graw Hill Education, Sixth Edition, 2017

6. T. Pradeep, “Nano:The Essentials’’, McGraw Hill India Ltd, 2007

7. Halliday, Resnick, Walker, “Fundamentals of Physics’’, John Wiley & Sons.Inc, 2001

8. David J Griffiths, “Introduction to Electrodynamics’’, Addison-Wesley publishing, 3rd Edition,

1999

9. Premlet B., “Advanced Engineering Physics”, Phasor Books,10th edition,2017

10. I. Dominic and. A. Nahari, “A Text Book of Engineering physics”, Owl Books Publishers,
Revised edition, 2016
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Oscillations and Waves (9 hours)

1.1 Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of 2 hrs

differential equation and its solution, Over damped, Critically damped
and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression
1.2 Forced oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for
amplitude and phase of forced oscillations, Amplitude Resonance- 3hrs
Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness of
Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators
1.3 Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its
solution, Three dimensional wave equation and its solution (no
derivation) 2 hrs
1.4 Distinction between transverse and longitudinal waves. Transverse 2 hrs
vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration
2 Wave Optics (9 hours)

2.1 Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin 2 hrs

films - Cosine law (Reflected system), Derivation of the conditions of
constructive and destructive Interference
2.2 Interference due to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness 4 hr
and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings - Measurement of
wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings
2.3 Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, 2 hrs
Diffraction grating-Grating equation
2.4 Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive 1 hr
power of a grating with expression (no derivation)
3 Quantum Mechanics &Nanotechnology (9hours)

3.1 Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of 2 hrs
Particles, Uncertainty principle, Applications-Absence of electrons
inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening mechanism
3.2 Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave 4 hrs
equations-Physical Meaning of wave function, Particle in a one
dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and energy
eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)
3.3 Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to 2 hrs
volume ratio for nanomaterials, Quantum confinement in one
dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots
3.4 Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical 1 hr
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)
4 Magnetism & Electro Magnetic Theory (9 hours)
4.1 Magnetic field and Magnetic flux density, Gauss’s law for Magnetic flux 2 hrs
 density, Ampere’s Circuital law, Faraday’s law in terms of EMF
produced by changing magnetic flux
4.2 Explanation for Magnetic permeability and susceptibility Classification 1 hr
of magnetic materials- para, dia and ferromagnetic materials
4.3 Fundamentals of vector calculus, concept of divergence, gradient and 2 hrs
curl along with physical significance, Line, Surface and Volume integrals,
Gauss divergence theorem & Stokes’ theorem
4.4 Equation of continuity, Derivation of Maxwell’s equations in vacuum, 4 hrs
Comparison of displacement current with conduction current.
Electromagnetic waves, Velocity of Electromagnetic waves in free
space, Flow of energy and Poynting’s vector (no derivation)
5 Superconductivity &Photonics (9hours)
5.1 Super conducting Phenomena, Meissner effect and perfect 2 hrs
diamagnetism, Types of superconductors-Type I and Type II
5.2 BCS Theory (Qualitative), High temperature superconductors, 2 hrs
Applications of super conductivity
5.3 Introduction to photonics-Photonic devices-Light Emitting Diode, Photo 2 hrs
detectors -Junction and PIN photodiodes, Solar cells-I-V Characteristics
5.4 Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of fibres-Step index 3 hrs
and Graded index fibres, Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic
communication system (block diagram), Industrial, Medical and
Technological applications of optical fibre, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity
Modulated and Phase modulated sensors
 PHT ENGINEERING PHYSICS B Category L T P CREDIT Year of
110 (FOR NON-CIRCUIT BRANCHES) Introduction
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The aim of the Engineering Physics program is to offer students a solid background in the
fundamentals of Physics and to impart that knowledge in engineering disciplines. The
program is designed to develop scientific attitudes and enable the students to
correlate the concepts of Physics with the core programmes

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics, Mathematical course on vector calculus,

differential equations and linear algebra

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Compute the quantitative aspects of waves and oscillations in engineering systems.

CO 2 Apply the interaction of light with matter through interference, diffraction and identify
these phenomena in different natural optical processes and optical instruments.

CO 3 Analyze the behaviour of matter in the atomic and subatomic level through the principles
of quantum mechanics to perceive the microscopic processes in electronic devices.

CO 4 Apply the knowledge of ultrasonics in non-destructive testing and use the principles of
acoustics to explain the nature and characterization of acoustic design and to provide a safe
and healthy environment

CO 5 Apply the comprehended knowledge about laser and fibre optic communication systems in
various engineering applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1 2 1
CO 2 3 2 1 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 1
CO 4 3 1 2 1
CO 5 3 2 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

MARKS MARKS

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Explain the effect of damping force on oscillators.
2. Distinguish between transverse and longitudinal waves.
3. (a) Derive an expression for the fundamental frequency of transverse vibration in a
stretched string.
(b) Calculate the fundamental frequency of a string of length 2 m weighing 6 g kept
stretched by a load of 600 kg.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain colours in thin films.
2. Distinguish between Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction.
3. (a) Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and obtain the expression for radii of bright
and dark rings in reflected system. Also explain how it is used to determine the
wavelength of a monochromatic source of light.
(b) A liquid of refractive index µ is introduced between the lens and glass plate. What
happens to the fringe system? Justify your answer.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Give the physical significance of wave function?

 2. What are excitons ?
3. (a) Solve Schrodinger equation for a particle in a one dimensional box and obtain its energy
eigen values and normalised wave functions.
(b) Calculate the first three energy values of an electron in a one dimensional box of width
1 A0 in electron volt.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain reverberation and reverberation time.
2. How ultrasonic waves are used in non-destructive testing.
3. (a) With a neat diagram explain how ultrasonic waves are produced by a piezoelectric
oscillator.
(b) Calculate frequency of ultrasonic waves that can be produced by a nickel rod of length 4
cm. (Young’s Modulus = 207 G Pa, Density = 8900 Kg /m3)

Course Outcome 5 (CO 5):

1. Distinguish between spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
2. Explain optical resonators.
3. (a) Explain the construction and working of Ruby Laser.
(b) Calculate the numerical aperture and acceptance angle of a fibre with a core refractive
index of 1.54 and a cladding refractive index of 1.50 when the fibre is inside water of
refractive index 1.33.
.
Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: PHT 110

Course Name: Engineering Physics B

Max.Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Compare electrical and mechanical oscillators.

2. Distinguish between longitudinal and transverse waves.

3. Write a short note on antireflection coating.

4. Diffraction of light is not as evident in daily experience as that of sound waves. Give reason.

5. State and explain Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle. With the help of it explain natural

line broadening.

6. Explain surface to volume ratio of nanomaterials.

7. Define sound intensity level. Give the values of threshold of hearing and threshold of pain.

8. Describe the method of non-destructive testing using ultra sonic waves

9. Explain the condition of population inversion

10. Distinguish between step index and graded index fibre. (10x3=30)

PART B

Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module 1

11. (a) Derive the differential equation of damped harmonic oscillator and deduce its
solution. Discuss the cases of over damped, critically damped and under damped
cases. (10)
 (b) The frequency of a tuning fork is 500 Hz and its Q factor is 7×104. Find the relaxation
time. Also calculate the time after which its energy becomes 1/10 of its initial
undamped value. (4)

12. (a) Derive an expression for the velocity of propagation of a transverse wave in a stretched
string. Deduce laws of transverse vibrations. (10)

(b) The equation of transverse vibration of a stretched string is given by y =0.00327 sin
(72.1x-2.72t ) m, in which the numerical constants are in S.I units. Evaluate (i)
Amplitude (ii) Wavelength (iii) Frequency and (iv) Velocity of the wave. (4)

Module 2

13. (a) Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and show that the radius of dark ring is
proportional to the square root of natural numbers. How can we use Newton’s rings
experiment to determine the refractive index of a liquid? (10)

(b) Two pieces of plane glass are placed together with a piece of paper between two at
one end. Find the angle of the wedge in seconds if the film is viewed with a
monochromatic light of wavelength 4800Å. Given β = 0.0555 cm. (4)

14. (a) Explain the diffraction due to a plane transmission grating. Obtain the grating equation.
(10)

(b) A grating has 6000 lines per cm. Find the angular separation of the two yellow lines
of mercury of wavelengths 577 nm and 579 nm in the second order. (4)

Module 3

15. (a) Derive time dependent and independent Schrodinger equations. (10)

(b) An electron is confined to one dimensional potential box of length 2Å. Calculate the
energies corresponding to the first and second quantum states in eV. (4)

16. (a) Classify nanomaterials based on dimensionality of quantum confinement and explain the
following nanostructures. (i) nano sheets (ii) nano wires (iii) quantum dots. (10)

(b) Find the de Broglie wavelength of electron whose kinetic energy is 15 eV. (4)

Module 4

17. (a) Explain reverberation and reverberation time? What is the significance of
Reverberation time. Explain the factors affecting the acoustics of a building and their
corrective measures? (10)
(b) The volume of a hall is 3000 m3. It has a total absorption of 100m2 sabine. If the hall is filled
with audience who add another 80 m2sabine, then find the difference in reverberation time. (4)

18. (a) With a neat diagram explain how ultrasonic waves are produced by piezoelectric
oscillator. Also discuss the piezoelectric method of detection of ultrasonic waves. (10)
 (b) An ultrasonic source of 0.09 MHz sends down a pulse towards the sea bed which
returns after 0.55 sec. The velocity of sound in sea water is 1800 m/s. Calculate the
depth of the sea and the wavelength of the pulse. (4)
Module 5

19. (a) Outline the construction and working of Ruby laser. (8)

(b) What is the principle of holography? How is a hologram recorded? (6)

20. (a) Define numerical aperture of an optic fibre and derive an expression for the NA of a step
index fibre with a neat diagram. (10)

(b) An optical fibre made with core of refractive index 1.5 and cladding with a fractional
index difference of 0.0006. Find refractive index of cladding and numerical aperture. (4)

(14x5=70)
 SYLLABUS

ENGINEERING PHYSICS B (FOR NON-CIRCUIT BRANCHES)

Module 1
Oscillations and Waves
Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of differential equation and its solution,
Over damped, Critically damped and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression, Forced
oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for amplitude and phase of forced
oscillations, Amplitude Resonance-Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness
of Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators

Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its solution, Three dimensional
wave equation and its solution (no derivation), Distinction between transverse and longitudinal
waves, Transverse vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration

Module 2
Wave Optics
Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin films - Cosine law (Reflected
system), Derivation of the conditions of constructive and destructive Interference, Interference due
to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings -
Measurement of wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings

Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, Diffraction grating-Grating

equation, Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive power of a grating with
expression (no derivation)

Module 3
Quantum Mechanics & Nanotechnology
Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of Particles, Uncertainty principle,
Applications-Absence of electrons inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening Mechanism,
Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave equations-Physical Meaning of
wave function, Particle in a one dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and
energy eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)

Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to volume ratio for nanomaterials,
Quantum confinement in one dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots, Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical,
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)

Module 4
Acoustics & Ultrasonics
Acoustics, Classification of sound-Musical sound-Noise, Characteristics of Musical Sounds-Pitch or
frequency-Loudness or Intensity-Measurement of Intensity level-Decibel-Quality or timbre,
Absorption coefficient, Reverberation-Reverberation time-Significance- Sabine’s formula (no
derivation), Factors affecting architectural acoustics and their remedies

Ultrasonics-Production- Magnetostriction effect and Piezoelectric effect, Magnetostriction oscillator

and Piezoelectric oscillator –Working, Detection of ultrasonic waves - Thermal and Piezoelectric
 methods, Ultrasonic diffractometer- Expression for the velocity of ultrasonic waves in a liquid ,
Applications of ultrasonic waves -SONAR,NDT and Medical

Module 5
Laser and Fibre optics
Properties of laser, Absorption and emission of radiation, Spontaneous and stimulated emission,
Einstein’s coefficients (no derivation), Population inversion, Metastable states, basic components of
laser, Active medium, Pumping mechanism, Optical resonant cavity, working principle, Construction
and working of Ruby laser and Helium neon laser ,Construction and working of semiconductor
laser(Qualitative) ,Applications of laser, Holography, Difference between hologram and photograph,
Recording of hologram and reconstruction of image, Applications

Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of fibres-Step index and Graded index fibres,
Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic communication system (block diagram), Industrial,
Medical and Technological applications, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity Modulated and Phase
modulated sensors

Text Books
1. M.N.Avadhanulu, P.G.Kshirsagar,TVS Arun Murthy “A Text book of Engineering Physics”, S.Chand
&Co., Revised Edition, 2019.

2. H.K.Malik , A.K. Singh, “Engineering Physics” McGraw Hill Education, Second Edition, 2017.

Reference Books

1. Arthur Beiser, “Concepts of Modern Physics ", Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 6th Edition 2003

2. D.K. Bhattacharya, Poonam Tandon, “Engineering Physics”, Oxford University Press, 2015

3. Md.N.Khan & S.Panigrahi “Principles of Engineering Physics 1&2”, Cambridge University Press,
2016

4. Aruldhas G., “Engineering Physics”, PHI Pvt. Ltd., 2015

5. Ajoy Ghatak, “Optics”, Mc Graw Hill Education, Sixth Edition, 2017

6. T. Pradeep, “Nano:The Essentials’’, McGraw Hill India Ltd, 2007

7. B. B. Laud, “Lasers and Non linear optics”, New age International Publishers, 2nd Edition ,2005

8. Premlet B., “Advanced Engineering Physics”, Phasor Books,10th edition ,2017

9. I. Dominic and. A. Nahari, “A Text Book of Engineering physics”, Owl Books Publishers, Revised
edition, 2016
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Oscillations and Waves ( 9 hours)

1.1 Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of 2 hrs

differential equation and its solution, Over damped, Critically damped
and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression
1.2 Forced oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for
amplitude and phase of forced oscillations, Amplitude Resonance- 3hrs
Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness of
Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators
1.3 Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its
solution, Three dimensional wave equation and its solution (no
derivation) 2 hrs
1.4 Distinction between transverse and longitudinal waves, Transverse 2 hrs
vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration
2 Wave Optics (9 hours)

2.1 Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin 2 hrs

films - Cosine law (Reflected system), Derivation of the conditions of
constructive and destructive Interference
2.2 Interference due to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness 4 hrs
and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings - Measurement of
wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings
2.3 Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, 2 hrs
Diffraction grating-Grating equation
2.4 Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive 1 hr
power of a grating with expression (no derivation)
3 Quantum Mechanics &Nanotechnology (9hours)

3.1 Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of 2 hrs
Particles, Uncertainty principle, Applications-Absence of electrons
inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening mechanism
3.2 Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave 4 hrs
equations-Physical Meaning of wave function, Particle in a one
dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and energy
eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)
3.3 Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to 2 hrs
volume ratio for nanomaterials, Quantum confinement in one
dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots
3.4 Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical 1 hr
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)
4 Acoustics & Ultrasonics (9hrs)

4.1 Acoustics, Classification of sound-Musical sound-Noise, Characteristics 3 hrs

 of Musical Sounds-Pitch or frequency-Loudness or Intensity-
Measurement of Intensity level-Decibel-Quality or timbre, Absorption
coefficient, Reverberation-Reverberation time-Significance- Sabine’s
formula (no derivation)
4.2 Factors affecting architectural acoustics and their remedies 1 hr

4.3 Ultrasonics-Production- Magnetostriction effect and Piezoelectric 3hrs

effect, Magnetostriction oscillator and Piezoelectric oscillator –
Working, Detection of ultrasonic waves - Thermal and Piezoelectric
methods
4.4 Ultrasonic diffractometer- Expression for the velocity of ultrasonic 2 hr
waves in a liquid ,Applications of ultrasonic waves -SONAR,NDT and
Medical.
5 Laser and Fibre optics ( 9hours)

5.1 Properties of laser, Absorption and emission of radiation, Spontaneous 2 hrs

and stimulated emission, Einstein’s coefficients (no derivation),
Population inversion, Metastable states, basic components of laser,
Active medium, Pumping mechanism, Optical resonant cavity, working
principle
5.2 Construction and working of Ruby laser and Helium neon laser 3 hrs
,Construction and working of semiconductor laser(Qualitative)
Applications of laser
5.3 Holography, Difference between hologram and photograph, Recording 1 hr
of hologram and reconstruction of image, Applications
5.4 Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of fibres-Step index 3 hrs
and Graded index fibres, Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic
communication system (block diagram), Industrial, Medical and
Technological applications, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity Modulated and
Phase modulated sensors
 CYT ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
100 INTRODUCTION
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: To enable the students to acquire knowledge in the concepts of chemistry for engineering
applications and to familiarize the students with different application oriented topics like
spectroscopy, electrochemistry, instrumental methods etc. Also familiarize the students with topics
like mechanism of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods, SEM, stereochemistry, polymers,
desalination etc., which enable them to develop abilities and skills that are relevant to the study and
practice of chemistry.

Prerequisite: Concepts of chemistry introduced at the plus two levels in schools

Course outcomes: After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO 1 Apply the basic concepts of electrochemistry and corrosion to explore its possible
applications in various engineering fields.
CO 2 Understand various spectroscopic techniques like UV-Visible, IR, NMR and its
applications.
CO 3 Apply the knowledge of analytical method for characterizing a chemical mixture or a
compound. Understand the basic concept of SEM for surface characterisation of
nanomaterials.
CO 4 Learn about the basics of stereochemistry and its application. Apply the knowledge of
conducting polymers and advanced polymers in engineering.
CO 5 Study various types of water treatment methods to develop skills for treating
wastewater.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 1 2 1
CO 2 1 1 1 2
CO 3 1 1 1 2
CO 4 2 1
CO 5 1 1 3
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts- Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10
questions (2 questions from each module), having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module, of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 subdivisions and carries 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO 1):

1. What is calomel electrode? Give the reduction reaction (3 Marks)

2. List three important advantages of potentiometric titration (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain how electroless plating copper and nickel are carried out (10 Marks)

(b) Calculate the emf of the following cell at 30oC, Z n / Zn 2+ (0.1M) // Ag+ (0.01M) // Ag.

Given E0 Zn2+/Zn = -0.76 V, E0 Ag+/Ag = 0.8 V. (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 2 (CO 2)

1. State Beer Lambert’s law (3 Marks)

2. List the important applications of IR spectroscopy (3 Marks)

3. (a) What is Chemical shift? What are factors affecting Chemical shift? How 1H NMR spectrum of
CH3COCH2Cl interpreted using the concept of chemical shift. (10 Marks)

(b) Calculate the force constant of HF molecule, if it shows IR absorption at 4138 cm -1. Given that
atomic masses of hydrogen and fluorine are 1u and 19u respectively. (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 3 (CO 3):

1. Distinguish between TGA and DTA (3 Marks)

2. Give two differences between GSC and GLC (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain the principle, instrumentation and procedure of HPLC (10 Marks)

(b) Interpret TGA of CaC2O4. H2O (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 4 (CO 4):

1. Explain the geometrical isomerism in double bonds (3 Marks)

2. What are the rules of assigning R-S notation? (3 Marks)

3. (a) What are conducting polymers? How it is classified? Give the preparation of polyaniline
(10 Marks)

(b) Draw the stereoisomers possible for CH3-(CHOH)2-COOH (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 5 (CO 5):

1. What is degree of hardness? (3 Marks)

2. Define BOD and COD (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain the EDTA estimation of hardness (10 Marks)

(b) Standard hard water contains 20 g of CaCO3 per liter,50 mL of this required 30mL of EDTA
solution, 50mL of sample water required 20mL of EDTA solution. 50mL sample water after boiling
required 14 mL EDTA solution. Calculate the temporary hardness of the given sample of water, in
terms of ppm. (4 Marks)

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Total Pages:
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CYT100,
Course Name: ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks Marks
1 What is potentiometric titration? How the end point is determined graphically? (3)
2 What is Galvanic series? How is it different from electrochemical series? (3)
3 Which of the following molecules can give IR absorption? Give reason? (3)
(a) O2 (b) H2O (c) N2 (d) HCl
4 Which of the following molecules show UV-Visible absorption? Give reason. (3)
(a) Ethane (b) Butadiene (c) Benzene
5 What are the visualization techniques used in TLC? (3)
6 Write the three important applications of nanomaterials. (3)
7 Draw the Fischer projection formula and find R-S notation of (3)

8 Write the structure of a) Polypyrroleb) Kevlar. (3

9 What is break point chlorination? (3)
10 What is reverse osmosis? (3)

PART B
Answer any one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks
Module 1
11 a) Give the construction of Li-ion cell. Give the reactions that take place at the (10)
electrodes during charging and discharging. What happens to anodic material when
the cell is 100% charged.
b) Calculate the standard electrode potential of Cu, if its electrode potential at 25 °C (4)
2+
is 0.296 V and the concentration of Cu is 0.015 M.
OR
12 a) Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion of iron in oxygen rich and oxygen (10)
deficient acidic and basic environments.
b) Given below are reduction potentials of some species (4)

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5e → Mn2+ + 4H2O; E0 = +1.51 V

Cl2 + 2e → 2Cl- ; E0 = +1.36 V

S2O82- + 2e → 2SO42- ; E0 = +1.98 V

Use the above data to examine whether the acids, dil. HCl and dil. H2SO4 , can be used
to provide acid medium in redox titrations involving KMnO4.
Module 2
13 a) What is spin-spin splitting? Draw the NMR spectrum of (i) CH3 CH2CH2 Br (ii) (10)
CH3CH(Br)CH3 Explain how NMR spectrum can be used to identify the two isomers.
b) A dye solution of concentration 0.08M shows absorbance of 0.012 at 600 nm; while a (4)
test solution of same dye shows absorbance of 0.084 under same conditions. Find the
concentration of the test solution.
OR
14 a) Explain the basic principle of UV-Visible spectroscopy. What are the possible (10)
electronic transitions? Explain with examples.
b) Sketch the vibrational modes of CO2 and H2O. Which of them are IR active? (4)
 Module 3
15 a) Explain the principle, instrumentation and procedure involved in gas chromatography. (10)
b) Explain the DTA of CaC2O4.H2O with a neat sketch. (4)
OR
16 a) Explain the various chemical methods used for the synthesis of nanomaterial (10)
b) How TGA is used to analyse the thermal stability of polymers? (4)

Module 4

17 a) What are conformers? Draw thecis and transisomers of 1, 3-dimethylcylohexane. (10)

Which conformer (chair form) is more stable in each case?
b) What is ABS? Give properties and applications. (4)
OR
18 a) Explain the various structural isomers with suitable example. (10)
b) What is OLED? Draw a labelled diagram. (4)
Module 5
19 a) What are ion exchange resins? Explain ion exchange process for removal of hardness (10)
of water? How exhausted resins are regenerated?
b) 50 mL sewage water is diluted to 2000 mL with dilution water; the initial dissolved (4)
oxygen was 7.7 ppm. The dissolved oxygen level after 5 days of incubation was 2.4
ppm. Find the BOD of the sewage.
OR
20 a) What are the different steps in sewage treatment? Give the flow diagram. Explain the (10)
working of trickling filter.
b) Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of a water sample which contains (4)
[Ca2+] = 160 mg/L, [Mg2+] = 192 mg/L and [HCO3-] = 122 mg/L.

Syllabus

Module 1

Electrochemistry and Corrosion

Introduction - Differences between electrolytic and electrochemical cells - Daniel cell - redox
reactions - cell representation. Different types of electrodes (brief) - Reference electrodes - SHE -
Calomel electrode - Glass Electrode - Construction and Working. Single electrode potential -
definition - Helmholtz electrical double layer -Determination of E0 using calomel
electrode.Determination of pH using glass electrode.Electrochemical series and its applications. Free
energy and EMF - Nernst Equation - Derivation - single electrode and cell (Numericals) -Application -
Variation of emf with temperature. Potentiometric titration - Introduction -Redox titration
only.Lithiumion cell - construction and working.Conductivity- Measurement of conductivity of a
solution (Numericals).

Corrosion-Electrochemicalcorrosion – mechanism. Galvanic series- cathodic protection - electroless

plating –Copper and Nickel plating.
Module 2

Spectroscopic Techniques and Applications

Introduction- Types of spectrum - electromagnetic spectrum - molecular energy levels - Beer

Lambert’s law (Numericals). UV-Visible Spectroscopy – Principle - Types of electronic transitions -
Energy level diagram of ethane, butadiene, benzene and hexatriene. Instrumentation of UV-Visible
spectrometer and applications.IR-Spectroscopy – Principle - Number of vibrational modes -
Vibrational energy states of a diatomic molecule and -Determination of force constant of diatomic
molecule (Numericals) –Applications. 1H NMR spectroscopy – Principle - Relation between field
strength and frequency - chemical shift - spin-spin splitting (spectral problems ) - coupling constant
(definition) - applications of NMR- including MRI (brief).

Module 3

Instrumental Methods and Nanomaterials

Thermal analysis –TGA- Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and applications – TGA of
CaC2O4.H2O and polymers. DTA-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and applications - DTA of
CaC2O4.H2O. Chromatographic methods - Basic principles and applications of column and TLC-
Retention factor. GC and HPLC-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) - retention time and
applications.

Nanomaterials - Definition - Classification - Chemical methods of preparation - Hydrolysis and

Reduction - Applications of nanomaterials - Surface characterisation -SEM – Principle and
instrumentation (block diagram).

Module 4

Stereochemistry and Polymer Chemistry

Isomerism-Structural, chain, position, functional, tautomerism and matamerism - Definition with

examples - Representation of 3D structures-Newman, Sawhorse, Wedge and Fischer projection of
substituted methane and ethane. Stereoisomerism - Geometrical isomerism in double bonds and
cycloalkanes (cis-trans and E-Z notations). R-S Notation – Rules and examples - Optical isomerism,
Chirality, Enantiomers and Diastereoisomers-Definition with examples.Conformational analysis of
ethane, butane, cyclohexane, mono and di methyl substituted cyclohexane.

Copolymers - Definition - Types - Random, Alternating, Block and Graft copolymers - ABS -
preparation, properties and applications.Kevlar-preparation, properties and applications.Conducting
polymers - Doping -Polyaniline and Polypyrrole - preparation properties and applications. OLED -
Principle, construction and advantages.

Module 5

Water Chemistry and Sewage Water Treatment

Water characteristics - Hardness - Types of hardness- Temporary and Permanent - Disadvantages of

hard water -Units of hardness- ppm and mg/L -Degree of hardness (Numericals) - Estimation of
hardness-EDTA method (Numericals). Water softening methods-Ion exchange process-Principle,
procedure and advantages. Reverse osmosis – principle, process and advantages. Municipal water
treatment (brief) - Disinfection methods - chlorination, ozone andUV irradiation.

Dissolved oxygen (DO) -Estimation (only brief procedure-Winkler’s method), BOD and COD-
definition, estimation (only brief procedure) and significance (Numericals). Sewage water treatment
- Primary, Secondary and Tertiary - Flow diagram -Trickling filter and UASB process.

Text Books

1. B. L. Tembe, Kamaluddin, M. S. Krishnan, “Engineering Chemistry (NPTEL Web-book)”,

2018.

2. P. W. Atkins, “Physical Chemistry”, Oxford University Press, 10th edn., 2014.

Reference Books

1. C. N. Banwell, “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy”, McGraw-Hill, 4thedn., 1995.

2. Donald L. Pavia, “Introduction to Spectroscopy”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd., 2015.

3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma, M. S. Pathania, “Principles of Physical Chemistry”, Vishal Publishing

Co., 47th Edition, 2017.

4. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merritt, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, CBS Publishers, 7th Edition,

2005.

5. Ernest L. Eliel, Samuel H. Wilen, “Stereo-chemistry of Organic Compounds”, WILEY, 2008.

6. Raymond B. Seymour, Charles E. Carraher, “Polymer Chemistry: An Introduction”, Marcel

Dekker Inc; 4th Revised Edition, 1996.
7. MuhammedArif, Annette Fernandez, Kavitha P. Nair “Engineering Chemistry”, Owl Books,
2019.

8. Ahad J., “Engineering Chemistry”, Jai Publication, 2019.

9. Roy K. Varghese, “Engineering Chemistry”, Crownplus Publishers, 2019.

10. Soney C. George,RinoLaly Jose, “Text Book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company
Pvt Ltd, 2019.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
(hrs)

1 Electrochemistry and Corrosion 9

1.1 Introduction - Differences between electrolytic and electrochemical cells- Daniel 2

cell - redox reactions - cell representation. Different types of electrodes (brief) -
Reference electrodes- SHE - Calomel electrode - Glass Electrode - Construction
and Working.

1.2 Single electrode potential – definition - Helmholtz electrical double layer - 3

Determination of E0 using calomel electrode. Determination of pH using glass
electrode. Electrochemical series and its applications. Free energy and EMF -
Nernst Equation – Derivation - single electrode and cell (Numericals) -Application
-Variation of emf with temperature.

1.3 Potentiometric titration - Introduction -Redox titration only. Lithiumion cell - 2

construction and working. Conductivity- Measurement of conductivity of a
solution (Numericals).

1.4 Corrosion-Electrochemicalcorrosion – mechanism. Galvanic series- cathodic 2

protection - electroless plating –Copper and Nickel plating.

2 Spectroscopic Techniques and Applications 9

2.1 Introduction- Types of spectrum - electromagnetic spectrum - molecular energy 2

levels - Beer Lambert’s law (Numericals).

2.2 UV-Visible Spectroscopy – Principle - Types of electronic transitions - Energy 2

level diagram of ethane, butadiene, benzene and hexatriene. Instrumentation of
UV-Visible spectrometer and applications.

2.3 IR-Spectroscopy – Principle - Number of vibrational modes -Vibrational energy 2

states of a diatomic molecule and -Determination of force constant of diatomic
molecule (Numericals) –Applications.
1
2.4 H NMR spectroscopy – Principle - Relation between field strength and frequency 3
- chemical shift - spin-spin splitting (spectral problems ) - coupling constant
(definition) - applications of NMR- including MRI (brief).

3 Instrumental Methods and Nanomaterials 9

3.1 Thermal analysis –TGA- Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and 2

applications – TGA of CaC2O4.H2O and polymers. DTA-Principle, instrumentation
(block diagram) and applications - DTA of CaC2O4.H2O.
3.2 Chromatographic methods - Basic principles and applications of column and TLC- 2
Retention factor.

3.3 GC and HPLC-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) - retention time and 2

applications.

3.4 Nanomaterials - Definition - Classification - Chemical methods of preparation - 3

Hydrolysis and Reduction - Applications of nanomaterials - Surface
characterisation -SEM – Principle and instrumentation (block diagram).

4 Stereochemistry and Polymer Chemistry 9

4.1 Isomerism-Structural, chain, position, functional, tautomerism and matamerism 2

- Definition with examples - Representation of 3D structures-Newman, Sawhorse,
Wedge and Fischer projection of substituted methane and ethane.
Stereoisomerism - Geometrical isomerism in double bonds and cycloalkanes (cis-
trans and E-Z notations).

4.2 R-S Notation – Rules and examples - Optical isomerism, Chirality, Enantiomers 1
and Diastereoisomers-Definition with examples.

4.3 Conformational analysis of ethane, butane, cyclohexane, mono and di methyl 2

substituted cyclohexane.

4.4 Copolymers - Definition - Types - Random, Alternating, Block and Graft 4

copolymers - ABS - preparation, properties and applications. Kevlar-preparation,
properties and applications. Conducting polymers - Doping -Polyaniline and
Polypyrrole - preparation properties and applications. OLED - Principle,
construction and advantages.

5 Water Chemistry and Sewage Water Treatment 9

5.1 Water characteristics - Hardness - Types of hardness- Temporary and Permanent 3

- Disadvantages of hard water -Units of hardness- ppm and mg/L -Degree of
hardness (Numericals) - Estimation of hardness-EDTA method (Numericals).
Water softening methods-Ion exchange process-Principle, procedure and
advantages. Reverse osmosis – principle, process and advantages.

5.2 Municipal water treatment (brief) - Disinfection methods - chlorination, ozone 2

andUV irradiation.

5.3 Dissolved oxygen (DO) -Estimation (only brief procedure-Winkler’s method), BOD 2
and COD-definition, estimation (only brief procedure) and significance
(Numericals).

5.4 Sewage water treatment - Primary, Secondary and Tertiary - Flow diagram - 2
Trickling filter and UASB process.
 EST ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of Introduction
100 MECHANICS ESC 2 1 0 3 2019

Preamble: Goal of this course is to expose the students to the fundamental concepts of mechanics
and enhance their problem-solving skills. It introduces students to the influence of applied force
system and the geometrical properties of the rigid bodies while stationary or in motion. After this
course students will be able to recognize similar problems in real-world situations and respond
accordingly.
Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Recall principles and theorems related to rigid body mechanics

CO 2 Identify and describe the components of system of forces acting on the rigid body

Apply the conditions of equilibrium to various practical problems involving different force
CO 3 system.

CO 4 Choose appropriate theorems, principles or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.

CO 5 Solve problems involving rigid bodies, applying the properties of distributed areas and masses

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks) End Semester Examination (Marks)
Remember 10 10 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Part A
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): (One question from each module to meet the course objective 1: To
recall principles and theorems related to rigid body mechanics)
1. Explain D’Alembert’s principle

2. Distinguish static and dynamic friction

3. State and explain perpendicular axis theorem

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) (One question from each module to meet the course objective 2: To
identify and describe the components of system of forces acting on the rigid body)

1. A simply supported beam AB of span 5 m is carrying point loads 5 kN, 3 kN and 2 kN at 1m, 3m
and 4m respectively from support A. Calculate the support reaction at B.

2. A gymnast holding onto a bar, is suspended motionless in mid-air. The bar is supported by two
ropes that attach to the ceiling. Diagram the forces acting on the combination of gymnast and bar

3. While you are riding your bike, you turn a corner following a circular arc. Illustrate the forces that
act on your bike to keep you along the circular path ?

Part B

All the questions under this section shall assess the learning levels corresponding to the course
outcomes listed below.
 To apply the conditions of equilibrium to variou
variouss practical problems involving different force
CO 3
system.

CO 4 To choose appropriate theorems, principles or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.

To solve problems involving rigid bodies, applying the properties of distributed areas and
CO 5 masses

1. Two rollers each of weight 100 N are supported by an inclined plane and a vertical wall. Find the
reaction at the points of contact A, B, C. Assume all the surfaces to be smooth.

Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium Applying – (Sketch the free
CO 3 to various practical problems involving body diagram that represent 4
different force system. equilibrium state of the body )

To choose appropriate theorems, Applying (Choose the equations

CO 4 principles or formulae to solve and formulae required for 4
problems of mechanics. calculation)

To solve problems involving rigid Applying ( Solve the problem

CO 5 bodies, applying the properties of based on the descriptions given 6
distributed areas and masses in CO3 and CO4)

Total 14

2. A cylindrical disc, 50 cm diameter and cm thickness, is in contact with a horizontal conveyor belts
running at uniform speeds of 5 m/s. Assuming there is no slip at points of contact determine (i)
angular velocity of disc (ii) Angular acceleration of disc if velocity of conveyor changes to 8 m/s. Also
compute the moment acting about the axis of the disc in both cases.
 Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Sketch the
CO 3 various practical problems involving different free body diagram that 4
force system. represent state of the
body )
Applying (Choose the
To choose appropriate theorems, principles or
CO 4 equations and formulae 4
formulae to solve problems of mechanics.
required for calculation)

Applying ( Solve the

To solve problems involving rigid bodies,
problem based on the
CO 5 applying the properties of distributed areas 6
descriptions given in CO3
and masses
and CO4)

Total 14

3. Determine the centroid of the given section

Course Marks
outcome Description of course outcome Learning level assessed allocat
identifier ed
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Illustrate the
CO 3 various practical problems involving computation of centroid for 4
different force system. the given geometrical shape)
To choose appropriate theorems, Applying (Choose the
CO 4 principles or formulae to solve problems equations and formulae 4
of mechanics. required for calculation)

To solve problems involving rigid bodies, Applying ( Solve the problem 6

CO 5
applying the properties of distributed based on the descriptions
 areas and masses given in CO3 and CO4)

Total 14

4. A rectangular hole is made in a triangular section as shown. Find moment of inertia about the
section x-x passing through the CG of the section and parallel to BC.

Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Illustrate the 4

CO 3 various practical problems involving different computation of moment

force system. of inertia for the given
geometrical shape)
Applying (Choose the
To choose appropriate theorems, principles
CO 4 equations and formulae 4
or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.
required for calculation)

Applying ( Solve the

To solve problems involving rigid bodies,
problem based on the
CO 5 applying the properties of distributed areas 6
descriptions given in
and masses
CO3 and CO4)

Total 14
 Model Question Paper

QP CODE:
Reg No.:_______________
Name:__________________________ ___

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 100

ENGINEERING MECHANICS

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part A

(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain D’Alembert’s principle

2. Distinguish static and dynamic frictioni.

3. State and explain perpendicular axis theorem.

4. A simply supported beam AB of span 5 m is carrying point loads 5 kN, 3 kN and 2 kN at 1m, 3m
and 4m respectively from support A. Calculate the support reaction at B.

5. A gymnast holding onto a bar, is suspended motionless in mid-air. The bar is supported by two
ropes that attach to the ceiling. Diagram the forces acting on the combination of gymnast and bar

6. While you are riding your bike, you turn a corner following a circular arc. Illustrate the forces that
act on your bike to keep you along the circular path ?

7. Compare damped and undamped free vibrations.

8. State the equation of motion of a rotating rigid body, rotating about its fixed axis.

9. Illustrate the significance of instantaneous centre in the analysis of rigid body undergoing
rotational motion.

10. Highlight the principles of mechanics applied in the evaluation of elastic collusion of rigid bodies.

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module -I

11. Two identical rollers each of weight 100 N are supported by an inclined plane, making an angle
of 30o with the vertical, and a vertical wall. Find the reaction at the points of contact A, B, C. Assume
all the surfaces to be smooth. (14 marks)
 C
A
B

12. A string tied to a wall is made to pass over a pulley placed 2m away from it. A weight P is
attached to the string such that the string stretches by 2m from the support on the wall to the
location of attachment of weight. Determine the force P required to maintain 200 kg body in
position for  = 30o, The diameter of pulley B is negligible. (14 marks)

Module – 2
13. Two blocks A & B are resting against a wall and the floor as shown in figure below. Find the
value of horizontal force P applied to the lower block that will hold the system in equilibrium.
Coefficient of friction are : 0.25 at the floor, 0.3 at the wall and 0.2 between the blocks.
(14 marks)

14. A beam is hinged at A and roller supported at B. It is acted upon by loads as shown below.
Find the reactions at A & B. (14 marks)

Module – 3
15. A rectangular hole is made in a triangular section as shown. Find moment of inertia about the
section x-x passing through the CG of the section and parallel to BC. (14 marks)
16. Support A has ball and socket connection. Roller support at B prevents motion in the —z
direction. Corner C is tied to D by a rope. The triangle is weightless. Determine the unknown force
components acting at A, B, and C. (14 marks)

Module - 4

17. A cricket ball is thrown by a fielder from a height of 2m at an angle of 300 to the horizontal with
an initial velocity of 20 m/s , hits the wickets at a height of 0.5 m from the ground. How far was the
fielder from the wicket? (14 marks)

18. An engine of weight 500 kN pull a train weighing 1500 kN up an incline of 1 in 100. The train
starts from rest and moves with constant acceleration against a resistance of 5 N/kN. It attains a
maximum speed of 36 kmph in 1 km distance. Determine the tension in the coupling between train
and engine and the traction force developed by the engine. (14marks)

Module – 5

19. A cylindrical disc, 50 cm diameter and 10 cm thickness having mass of 10 kg, is in contact with a
horizontal conveyor belt running at uniform speeds of 5 m/s. Assuming there is no slip at points of
contact determine (i) angular velocity of disc (ii) Angular acceleration of disc if velocity of conveyor
changes to 8 m/s in 10 seconds. Also compute the moment acting about the axis of the disc in both
cases. (14 marks)

20. A wheel rotating about fixed axis at 20 rpm is uniformly accelerated for 70 seconds during which
time it makes 50 revolutions. Find the (i) angular velocity at the end of this interval and (ii) time
required for the velocity to reach 100 revolutions per minute. (14 marks)
 SYLLABUS
Module 1
Introduction to Engineering Mechanics-statics-basic principles of statics-Parallelogram law,
equilibrium law, principles of superposition and transmissibility, law of action and reaction(review)
free body diagrams.
Concurrent coplanar forces-composition and resolution of forces-resultant and equilibrium
equations – methods of projections – methods of moments – Varignon’s Theorem of moments.

Module 2
Friction – sliding friction - Coulomb’s laws of friction – analysis of single bodies –wedges, ladder-
analysis of connected bodies .
Parallel coplanar forces – couple - resultant of parallel forces – centre of parallel forces – equilibrium
of parallel forces – Simple beam subject to concentrated vertical loads. General coplanar force
system - resultant and equilibrium equations.

Module 3
Centroid of composite areas- – moment of inertia-parallel axis and perpendicular axis theorems.
Polar moment of inertia,radius of gyration,mass moment of inertia-ring,cylinder and disc.
Theorem of Pappus Guldinus(demonstration only)
Forces in space - vectorial representation of forces, moments and couples –resultant and equilibrium
equations – concurrent forces in space (simple problems only)

Module 4
Dynamics – rectilinear translation - equations of kinematics(review)
kinetics – equation of motion – D’Alembert’s principle. – motion on horizontal and inclined
surfaces, motion of connected bodies. Impulse momentum equation and work energy equation
(concepts only).
Curvilinear translation - equations of kinematics –projectile motion(review), kinetics – equation of
motion. Moment of momentum and work energy equation (concepts only).

Module 5
Rotation – kinematics of rotation- equation of motion for a rigid body rotating about a fixed axis –
rotation under a constant moment.
Plane motion of rigid body – instantaneous centre of rotation (concept only).
Simple harmonic motion – free vibration –degree of freedom- undamped free vibration of spring
mass system-effect of damping(concept only)

Text Books
1. Timoshenko and Young, Engineering Mechanics, McGraw Hill Publishers
2. Shames, I. H., Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India.
3. R. C. Hibbeler and Ashok Gupta, Engineering Mechanics, Vol. I statics, Vol II Dynamics, Pearson
Education.
References
1. Merriam J. L and Kraige L. G., Engineering Mechanics - Vols. 1 and 2, John Wiley.
2. Tayal A K, Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics, Umesh Publications
3. Bhavikkatti, S.S., Engineering Mechanics, New Age International Publishers
4. F.P.Beer abd E.R.Johnston (2011), Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Vol.I-Statics, Vol.II-Dynamics,
9th Ed, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G, Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Course
No. of
Module Topic outcomes
Hours
addressed

1 Module 1 Total: 7

Introduction to engineering mechanics – introduction on statics and

dynamics - Basic principles of statics – Parellogram law, equilibrium CO1 and
1.1 1
law – Superposition and transmissibility, law of action and reaction CO2
(review the topics)

Free body diagrams.

Degree of freedom-types of supports and nature of reactions -
1.2 CO1 and 1
exercises for free body diagram preparation – composition and
CO2
resolution of forces, resultant and equilibrium equations (review the
topics) - numerical exercises for illustration.
Concurrent coplanar forces - analysis of concurrent forces -methods CO1 and
1.3 of projections – illustrative numerical exercise – teacher assisted 1
CO2
problem solving.
Analysis of concurrent forces -methods of moment-Varignon’s CO1 and
1.4 Theorem of Moments - illustrative numerical exercise– teacher 1
CO2
assisted problem solving.
Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4
1.5 1
Session I. and CO5

Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4 1

1.6 and CO5
Session II – learning review quiz.

Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4

1.7 and CO5 1
Session III.
2 Module 2 Total: 7

2.1 Friction – sliding friction - Coulomb’s laws of friction – analysis of CO1 and 1
single bodies –illustrative examples on wedges and ladder-teacher CO2
 assisted problem solving tutorials using problems from wedges and
ladder.
2.2 Problems on friction - analysis of connected bodies. illustrative CO3, CO4 1
numerical exercise– teacher assisted problem solving. and CO5

2.3 Problems on friction-extended problem solving CO3,C04 1

and CO5
2.4 Parallel coplanar forces – couple - resultant of parallel forces – centre CO1 and 1
of parallel forces – equilibrium of parallel forces – Simple beam CO2
subject to concentrated vertical loads.
2.5 General coplanar force system - resultant and equilibrium equations - CO1 and 1
illustrative examples- teacher assisted problem solving. CO2

2.6 General coplanar force system-resultant and equilibrium equations - CO3, CO4 1
illustrative examples and CO5
2.7 General coplanar force system - Extended problem solving - Quiz to CO3, CO4 1
evaluate learning level. and CO5
3 Module 3 Total: 7

3.1 Centroid of simple and regular geometrical shapes – centroid of CO1 and
figures in combination - composite areas- examples for illustration – CO2 1
problems for practice to be done by self.
3.2 Moment of inertia- parallel axis theorem –examples for illustration - CO1 and
1
problems for practice to be done by self. CO2

3.3 Moment of inertia - perpendicular axis theorem - example for CO1 and
illustration to be given as hand out and discussion on the solved CO2 1
example.
3.4 Solutions to practice problems – problems related to centroid and CO3, CO4 1
moment of inertia - problems for practice to be done by self. and CO5
3.5 Polar moment of inertia, Radius of gyration. CO1 and
1
Mass moment of inertia of ring, cylinder and uniform disc. CO2
Theorem of Pappus Guldinus - Demonstration
3.6 Introduction to forces in space – vectorial representation of forces, CO1,and
moments and couples – simple problems to illustrate vector CO2 1
representations of forces, moments and couples to be done in class.
3.7 Solution to practice problems - resultant and equilibrium equations
for concurrent forces in space – concurrent forces in space - 2 simple CO3,CO4 1
problems to illustrate the application of resultant and equilibrium and CO5
equations for concurrent forces in space.
4 Module 4 Total: 7
 Introduction to dynamics – review of rectilinear translation - CO1 and
4.1 equations of kinematics – problems to review the concepts – CO2 1
additional problems involving extended application as exercises .

Solutions to exercises with necessary explanation given as hand out –

introduction to kinetics – equation of motion – D’Alembert’s principle CO1 and
4.2 1
– illustration of the concepts using one numerical exercise from CO2
motion on horizontal and inclined surfaces.
Motion of connected bodies - example for illustration to be given as CO3, CO4 1
4.3 hand out and discussion on the solved example – problems for and CO5
practice to be done by self.
4.4 Motion of connected bodies-extended problem solving. CO3, CO4 1
& CO5
Curvilinear translation - Review of kinematics –projectile motion – 1
simple problems to review the concepts – introduction to kinetics – CO3, CO4
4.5
equation of motion – illustration of the concepts using numerical & CO5
exercises.

4.6 Extended problem solving – rectilinear and curvilinear translation. CO3, CO4 1
& CO5
Concepts on Impulse momentum equation and work energy equation 1
(rectilinear translation – discussions to bring out difference between
4.7 CO1 and
elastic and inelastic collusions).
CO2
Concepts on Moment of momentum and work energy equation
(curvilinear translation).
5 Module 5 Total: 7

Rotation – kinematics of rotation- equation of motion for a rigid body CO1 and 1
5.1 rotating about a fixed axis – simple problems for illustration. CO2
Rotation under a constant moment – teacher assisted problem 1
5.2 solving. CO3,CO4
and CO5
5.3 Rotation under a constant moment - extended problem solving. CO3, CO4 1
and CO5
Plane motion of rigid body- instantaneous centre of rotation (concept CO1 and 1
5.4
only). CO2

Introduction to harmonic oscillation –free vibrations - simple 1

harmonic motion – differential equation and solution.
CO1 and
5.5 Degree of freedom – examples of single degree of freedom (SDOF) CO2
systems – Idealisation of mechanical systems as spring-mass systems
(concept only).
 SDOF spring mass system –equation of motion – undamped free 1
vibration response - concept of natural frequency. CO1 and
5.6 Free vibration response due to initial conditions. CO2
Simple problems on determination of natural frequency and free
vibration response to test the understanding level.
Free vibration analysis of SDOF spring-mass systems – Problem solving CO1and 1
5.7
Effect of damping on free vibration response (concept only). CO2
 EST ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of Introduction
110 GRAPHICS ESC 2 0 2 3 2019

Preamble: To enable the student to effectively perform technical communication through graphical
representation as per global standards.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Draw the projection of points and lines located in different quadrants

CO 2 Prepare multiview orthographic projections of objects by visualizing them in different
positions
CO 3 Draw sectional views and develop surfaces of a given object
CO 4 Prepare pictorial drawings using the principles of isometric and perspective projections to
visualize objects in three dimensions.
CO 5 Convert 3D views to orthographic views
CO 6 Obtain multiview projections and solid models of objects using CAD tools

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 2
CO 6 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
( 15 Marks) (15 Marks) (100 Marks)
Remember
Understand 5 20
Apply 10 10 80
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
CIA for section A carries 25 marks (15 marks for 1 test and Class work 10 marks)
CIA for section B carries 15 marks (10 marks for 1 test and Class work 5 marks)

End Semester Examination Pattern:

ESE will be of 3 hour duration on A4 size answer booklet and will be for 100 marks. The question
paper shall contain two questions from each module of Section A only. Student has to answer any
one question from each module. Each question carries 20 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Locate points in different quadrants as per given conditions.
2. Problems on lines inclined to both planes .
3. Find True length, Inclinations and Traces of lines.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2)
1. Draw orthographic views of solids and combination solids
2. Draw views of solids inclined to any one reference plane.
3. Draw views of solids inclined to both reference planes.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Draw views of solids sectioned by a cutting plane
2. Find location and inclination of cutting plane given true shape of the section
3. Draw development of lateral surface of solids and also its sectioned views
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Draw Isometric views/projections of soilds
2. Draw Isometric views/projections of combination of soilds
3. Draw Perspective views of Soilds
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. Draw Orthographic views of solids from given three dimensional view
Course Outcome 6 (CO6):
1. Draw the given figure including dimensions using 2D software
2. Create 3D model using modelling software from the given orthographic views or 3D figure or
from real 3D objects

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 110

ENGINEERING GRAPHICS

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

Instructions: Retain necessary Construction lines

Show necessary dimensions
Answer any ONE question from each module
Each question carries 20 marks

MODULE I
1. The end point A of a line is 20mm above HP and 10mm in front of VP. The other end of the line is
50mm above HP and 15mm behind VP. The distance between the end projectors is 70mm. Draw
the projections of the line. Find the true length and true inclinations of the line with the principal
planes. Also locate the traces of the line.
2. One end of a line is 20mm from both the principal planes of projection. The other end of the line
is 50mm above HP and 40mm in front of VP. The true length of the line is 70mm. Draw the
projections of the line. Find its apparent inclinations, elevation length and plan length. Also
locate its traces.
MODULE II
3. A pentagonal pyramid of base side 25mm and height 40mm, is resting on the ground on one of
its triangular faces. The base edge of that face is inclined 30o to VP. Draw the projections of the
solid.
4. A hexagonal prism has side 25mm and height 50mm has a corner of its base on the ground and
the long edge containing that corner inclined at 30o to HP and 45o to VP. Draw the projections of
the solid.
MODULE III
5. A triangular prism of base side 40mm and height 70mm is resting with its base on the ground
and having an edge of the base perpendicular to VP. Section the solid such that the true shape of
the section is a trapezium of parallel sides 30mm and 10mm. Draw the projections showing the
true shape. Find the inclination of the cutting plane with the ground plane.
6. Draw the development of a pentagonal pyramid of base side 30mm and height 50mm. A string is
wound from a corner of the base round the pyramid and back to the same point through the
shortest distance. Show the position of the string in the elevation and plan.
MODULE IV
7. The frustum of a cone has base diameter 50mm and top diameter 40mm has a height of 60mm.
It is paced centrally on top of a rectangular slab of size 80x60mm and of thickness 20mm. Draw
the isometric view of the combination.
8. A hexagonal prism has base side 35mm and height 60mm. A sphere of diameter 40mm is
placed centrally on top of it. Draw the isometric projection of the combination.
MODULE V
9. Draw the perspective view of a pentagonal prism, 20mm side and 45mm long lying on one of its
rectangular faces on the ground and having its axis perpendicular to picture plane. One of its
pentagonal faces touches the picture plane and the station point is 50mm in front of PP, 25mm
above the ground plane and lies in a central plane, which is 70mm to the left of the center of the
prism.
10. Draw three orthographic views with dimensions of the object shown in figure below.

(20X5=100)
 Time : 3 hours EST110 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Max. Marks: 100

SCHEME OF VALUATION
1. Locating the points and drawing the projections of the line – 4 marks
Finding true length by any one method – 6 marks
Finding true inclination with VP – 2 marks
Finding true inclination with HP – 2 marks
Locating horizontal trace – 2 marks
Locating vertical trace – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
2. Locating the points and drawing true length of the line – 4 marks
Finding projections by any method – 6 marks
Finding length of elevation and plan – 2 marks
Finding apparent inclinations – 2 marks
Locating horizontal trace – 2 marks
Locating vertical trace – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
3. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks
First inclination views – 4 marks
Second inclination views -8 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Any one method or combination of methods for solving can be used.
If initial position is wrong then maximum 50% marks may be allotted for the answer)

4. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks

First inclination views – 4 marks
Second inclination views -8 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Any one method or combination of methods for solving can be used
If initial position is wrong then maximum 50% marks may be allotted for the answer)

5. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks

Locating section plane as per given condition – 5 marks
Drawing true shape -5 marks
Finding inclination of cutting plane – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
6. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks
Development of the pyramid – 6 marks
 Locating string in development -2 marks
Locating string in elevation – 3 marks
Locating string in plan – 3 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
7. Drawing initial positions – 4 marks
Isometric View of Slab -6 marks
Isometric View of Frustum – 10 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Initial position is optional, hence redistribute if needed.
Reduce 4 marks if Isometric scale is taken)

8. Drawing initial positions – 4 marks

Isometric scale – 4 marks
Isometric projection of prism -5 marks
Isometric projection of sphere – 5 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Initial position is optional, hence redistribute if needed.

9. Drawing the planes and locating the station point – 4 marks

Locating elevation points – 2 marks
Locating plan points – 2 marks
Drawing the perspective view – 10 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
10. Drawing the elevation – 8marks
Drawing the plan – 4 marks
Drawing the side view – 4 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
 SYLLABUS

General Instructions:
 First angle projection to be followed
 Section A practice problems to be performed on A4 size sheets
 Section B classes to be conducted on CAD lab

SECTION A
Module 1
Introduction : Relevance of technical drawing in engineering field. Types of lines, Dimensioning, BIS
code of practice for technical drawing.
Orthographic projection of Points and Lines: Projection of points in different quadrants, Projection of
straight lines inclined to one plane and inclined to both planes. Trace of line. Inclination of lines with
reference planes True length of line inclined to both the reference planes.

Module 2
Orthographic projection of Solids: Projection of Simple solids such as Triangular, Rectangle, Square,
Pentagonal and Hexagonal Prisms, Pyramids, Cone and Cylinder. Projection of solids in simple
position including profile view. Projection of solids with axis inclined to one of the reference planes
and with axis inclined to both reference planes.

Module 3
Sections of Solids: Sections of Prisms, Pyramids, Cone, Cylinder with axis in vertical position and cut
by different section planes. True shape of the sections. Also locating the section plane when the
true shape of the section is given.
Development of Surfaces: Development of surfaces of the above solids and solids cut by different
section planes. Also finding the shortest distance between two points on the surface.

Module 4
Isometric Projection: Isometric View and Projections of Prisms, Pyramids, Cone , Cylinder, Frustum of
Pyramid, Frustum of Cone, Sphere, Hemisphere and their combinations.

Module 5
Perspective Projection: Perspective projection of Prisms and Pyramids with axis perpendicular to the
ground plane, axis perpendicular to picture plane.
Conversion of Pictorial Views: Conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views.

SECTION B
(To be conducted in CAD Lab)
Introduction to Computer Aided Drawing: Role of CAD in design and development of new products,
Advantages of CAD. Creating two dimensional drawing with dimensions using suitable software.
(Minimum 2 exercises mandatory)
Introduction to Solid Modelling: Creating 3D models of various components using suitable modelling
software. (Minimum 2 exercises mandatory)
Text Books
1. Bhatt, N.D., Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
2. John, K.C. Engineering Graphics, Prentice Hall India Publishers.
Reference Books

1. Anilkumar, K.N., Engineering Graphics, Adhyuth narayan Publishers

2. Agrawal, B. And Agrawal, C.M., Engineering Darwing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers.
3. Benjamin, J., Engineering Graphics, Pentex Publishers- 3 rd Edition, 2017
4. Duff, J.M. and Ross, W.A., Engineering Design and Visualisation, Cengage Learning.
5. Kulkarni, D.M., Rastogi, A.P. and Sarkar, A.K., Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD, PHI.
6. Luzaddff, W.J. and Duff, J.M., Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, PHI.
7. Varghese, P.I., Engineering Graphics, V I P Publishers
8. Venugopal, K., Engineering Drawing and Graphics, New Age International Publishers.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No SECTION A No. of
Hours

1 MODULE I

1.1 Introduction to graphics, types of lines, Dimensioning 1

1.2 Concept of principle planes of projection, different quadrants, locating points 2

on different quadrants

1.3 Projection of lines, inclined to one plane. Lines inclined to both planes, 2
trapezoid method of solving problems on lines.

1.4 Problems on lines using trapezoid method 2

1.5 Line rotation method of solving, problems on line rotation method 2

2 MODULE II

2.1 Introduction of different solids, Simple position plan and elevation of solids 2

2.2 Problems on views of solids inclined to one plane 2

2.3 Problems on views of solids inclined to both planes 2

2.4 Practice problems on solids inclined to both planes 2

3 MODULE III

3.1 Introduction to section planes. AIP and AVP. Principle of locating cutting 2
points and finding true shape

3.2 Problems on sections of different solids 2

3.3 Problems when the true shape is given 2

3.4 Principle of development of solids, sectioned solids 2

4 MODULE IV

4.1 Principle of Isometric View and Projection, Isometric Scale. Problems on 2

simple solids

4.2 Isometric problems on Frustum of solids, Sphere and Hemisphere 2

4.3 Problems on combination of different solids 2

5 MODULE V

5.1 Introduction to perspective projection, different planes, station point etc. 2

Perspective problems on pyramids

5.2 Perspective problems on prisms 2

5.3 Practice on conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views 2

SECTION B (To be conducted in CAD lab)

1 Introduction to CAD and software. Familiarising features of 2D software. 2

Practice on making 2D drawings

2 Practice session on 2D drafting 2

3 Introduction to solid modelling and software 2

4 Practice session on 3D modelling 2

 EST BASICS OF CIVIL & MECHANICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
120 ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION
ESC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble:

Objective of this course is to provide an insight and inculcate the essentials of Civil Engineering
discipline to the students of all branches of Engineering and to provide the students an
illustration of the significance of the Civil Engineering Profession in satisfying the societal needs.

To introduce the students to the basic principles of mechanical engineering

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course, the student will be able to

Recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various disciplines of Civil
CO 1 Engineering.

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and

CO 2 building construction

CO 3 Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and
CO 4
ramps
Discuss the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green
CO 5 buildings.

CO 6 Analyse thermodynamic cycles and calculate its efficiency

CO 7 Illustrate the working and features of IC Engines

CO 8 Explain the basic principles of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

CO 9 Describe the working of hydraulic machines

CO 10 Explain the working of power transmission elements

CO 11 Describe the basic manufacturing, metal joining and machining processes

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO1 3 - - - - 3 2 2 - - - -
CO2 3 2 - 1 3 - - 3 - - - -
CO3 3 2 - - 3 - - - 2 - - -
 CO4 3 2 - - 3 - - - 2 - - -
CO5 3 2 - - 3 2 3 - 2 - - -

CO6 3 2

CO7 3 1

CO8 3 1

CO9 3 2

CO10 3 1

CO11 3

Assessment Pattern

Basic Civil Engineering Basic Mechanical Engineering

End End Semester
Bloom’s Category Semester Continuous Examination
Continuous Assessment
Examination Assessment (marks)
Test 1 Test 2 (marks) Test 1 Test 2
marks marks marks marks
Remember 5 5 10 7.5 7.5 15
Understand 20 20 40 12.5 12.5 25
Apply 5 5 10
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part I – Basic Civil Engineering and Part II – Basic Mechanical Engineering.
Part I and PART II carries 50 marks each. For the end semester examination, part I contain 2 parts -
Part A and Part B. Part A contain 5 questions carrying 4 marks each (not exceeding 2 questions from
each module). Part B contains 2 questions from each module out of which one to be answered. Each
question carries 10 mark and can have maximum 2 sub-divisions. The pattern for end semester
examination for part II is same as that of part I. However, student should answer both part I and
part 2 in separate answer booklets.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome CO1: To recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various
disciplines of Civil Engineering.

1.Explain relevance of Civil engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the country.
Course outcome 2 (CO2) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and building
construction
1. Discuss the difference between plinth area and carpet area.

Course outcome 3 (CO3) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

1. Explain the importance of surveying in Civil Engineering

Course outcome 4 (CO4) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps

1. Explain the civil engineering aspects of elevators, escalators and ramps in buildings

Course outcome 5 (CO5) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Discuss the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green buildings.

1. Discuss the relevance of Green building in society

Section II Answer any 1 full question from each module. Each full question carries 10 marks

Course Outcome 1 (CO1) (Two full question from each module and each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions)

To recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various disciplines of Civil Engineering
CO Questions

1. a List out the types of building as per occupancy. Explain any two, each in about five sentences.
b. Discuss the components of a building with a neat figure.
2. a.What are the major disciplines of civil engineering and explain their role in the infrastructural
framework.
 b. Explain the role of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms in building rules and regulations prevailing in our
country.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) & Course Outcome 3 (CO3) (Two full question from each module and
each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions)

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and building
construction & Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

CO Questions

1. a. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use.
b. List the properties of good building bricks. Explain any five.
2. a. List and explain any five modern construction materials used for construction.
b. Explain the objectives and principles of surveying

Course outcome 4 (CO4) & Course outcome 5 (CO5) (Two full question from each module and
each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions)

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps & Discuss
the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green buildings.

CO Questions

1. a. Draw the elevation and plan of one brick thick wall with English bond
b. Explain the energy systems and water management in Green buildings

2. a. Draw neat sketch of the following foundations: (i) Isolated stepped footing;
(ii) Cantilever footing; and (iii) Continuous footing.

b. Discuss the civil engineering aspect of MEP and HVAC in a commercial building

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. In an air standard Otto cycle the compression ratio is 7 and compression begins at 35 oC, 0.1
MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100oC. Find
i) Heat supplied per kg of air,
ii) Work done per kg of air,
iii) Cycle efficiency
Take Cp = 1.005 kJ/kgK and Cv=0.718 kJ/kgK
2. A Carnot cycle works with adiabatic compression ratio of 5 and isothermal expansion ratio of 2.
The volume of air at the beginning of isothermal expansion is 0.3 m3. If the maximum
temperature and pressure is limited to 550K and 21 bar, determine the minimum temperature
in the cycle and efficiency of the cycle.
3. In an ideal diesel cycle, the temperature at the beginning and end of compression is 65oC and
620oC respectively. The temperature at the beginning and end of the expansion is 1850oC and
850 oC. Determine the ideal efficiency of the cycle.
 4. Explain the concepts of CRDI and MPFI in IC Engines.
Course Outcome 7 (CO7)
1. With the help of a neat sketch explain the working of a 4 stroke SI engine
2. Compare the working of 2 stroke and 4 stroke IC engines
3. Explain the classification of IC Engines.
Course Outcome 8(CO8):
1. Explain the working of vapour compression refrigeration system.
2. With the help of suitable sketch explain the working of a split air conditioner.
3. Define: COP, specific humidity, relative humidity and dew point temperature.
Course Outcome 9 (CO9):
1. Explain the working of a single stage centrifugal pump with sketches.
2. With the help of a neat sketch, explain the working of a reciprocating pump.
3. A turbine is to operate under a head of 25 m at 200 rpm. The discharge is 9 m3/s. If the overall
efficiency of the turbine is 90%. Determine the power developed by the turbine.
Course Outcome 10 (CO10):
1. Explain the working of belt drive and gear drive with the help of neat sketches
2. Explain a single plate clutch.
3. Sketch different types of gear trains and explain.

Course Outcome 11 (CO11):

1. Describe the operations which can be performed using drilling machine.
2. Explain the functions of runners and risers used in casting.
3. With a neat sketch, explain the working and parts of a lathe.

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: EST120 page:3

Reg No:__________________

Name:____________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 120

Course Name: BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets

 PART I: BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING

PART A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 4 marks)

1. Explain relevance of Civil engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the

country.
2. Discuss the difference between plinth area and carpet area.
3. Explain different types of steel with their properties.
4. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use?
5. Define bearing capacity of soil.
(5 x 4 = 20)

Part B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE I

6a. List out the types of building as per occupancy. Explain any two, each in about five
sentences. (5)
b. Discuss the components of a building with a neat figure. (5)
OR
7a. What are the major disciplines of civil engineering and explain their role in the
infrastructural framework. (5)
b. Explain the role of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms in building rules and regulations prevailing in our
country. (5)

MODULE II

8a. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use. (5)
b. List the properties of good building bricks. Explain any five. (5)
OR
9a. List and explain any five modern construction materials used for construction. (5)
b. Explain the objectives and principles of surveying (5)

MODULE III

10a. Draw the elevation and plan of one brick thick wall with English bond (5)
b. Explain the energy systems and water management in Green buildings (5)
OR
11a. Draw neat sketch of the following foundations: (i) Isolated stepped footing;
(ii) Cantilever footing; and (iii) Continuous footing. (5)
b. Discuss the civil engineering aspect of MEP and HVAC in a commercial building (5)

[10 x 3 = 30]
 PART II: BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 4 marks

1. Sketch the P-v and T-s diagram of a Carnot cycle and List the processes.
2. Illustrate the working of an epicyclic gear train.
3. Explain cooling and dehumidification processes.
4. Differentiate between soldering and brazing.
5. Explain the principle of Additive manufacturing.
4 x 5 = 20 marks

Part B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE I

6. In an air standard Otto cycle the compression ratio is 7 and compression begins at 35oC,
0.1MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100oC. Find
i) Heat supplied per kg of air,
ii) Work done per kg of air,
iii)Cycle efficiency
Take Cp = 1.005 kJ/kgK and Cv=0.718 kJ/kgK 10 marks

OR

7. a) Explain the working of a 4 stroke SI engine with neat sketches. 7 marks

b) Explain the fuel system of a petrol engine. 3 marks

MODULE II

8. a) Explain the working of a vapour compression system with help of a block

diagram. 7 marks
b) Define: Specific humidity, relative humidity and dew point temperature. 3 marks
OR
9. With the help of a neat sketch, explain the working of a centrifugal pump. 10 marks

MODULE III

10. Explain the two high, three high, four high and cluster rolling mills with neat
sketches. 10 marks
OR

11. a) Describe the arc welding process with a neat sketch. 6 marks
b) Differentiate between up-milling and down-milling operations. 4 marks
 SYLLABUS

Module 1
General Introduction to Civil Engineering: Relevance of Civil Engineering in the overall
infrastructural development of the country. Responsibility of an engineer in ensuring the safety of
built environment. Brief introduction to major disciplines of Civil Engineering like Transportation
Engineering, Structural Engineering, Geo-technical Engineering, Water Resources Engineering and
Environmental Engineering.
Introduction to buildings: Types of buildings, selection of site for buildings, components of a
residential building and their functions.
Building rules and regulations: Relevance of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms (brief discussion only).
Building area: Plinth area, built up area, floor area, carpet area and floor area ratio for a building as
per KBR.

Module 2

Surveying: Importance, objectives and principles.

Construction materials, Conventional construction materials: types, properties and uses of building
materials: bricks, stones, cement, sand and timber
Cement concrete: Constituent materials, properties and types.
Steel: Steel sections and steel reinforcements, types and uses.
Modern construction materials:- Architectural glass, ceramics, Plastics, composite materials,
thermal and acoustic insulating materials, decorative panels, waterproofing materials. Modern uses
of gypsum, pre-fabricated building components (brief discussion only).

Module 3
Building Construction: Foundations: Bearing capacity of soil (definition only), functions of
foundations, types – shallow and deep (brief discussion only). Load bearing and framed structures
(concept only).
Brick masonry: - Header and stretcher bond, English bond & Flemish bond random rubble masonry.
Roofs and floors: - Functions, types; flooring materials (brief discussion only).
Basic infrastructure services: MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps (Civil Engineering aspects
only), fire safety for buildings.
Green buildings:- Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green
buildings. (brief discussion only).
Module 4

Analysis of thermodynamic cycles: Carnot, Otto, Diesel cycles, Derivation of efficiency of these
cycles, Problems to calculate heat added, heat rejected, net work and efficiency. IC Engines: CI, SI, 2-
Stroke, 4-Stroke engines. Listing the parts of different types of IC Engines. Efficiencies of IC
Engines(Definitions only), Air, Fuel, cooling and lubricating systems in SI and CI Engines, CRDI, MPFI.
Concept of hybrid engines.
 Module 5
Refrigeration: Unit of refrigeration, reversed Carnot cycle,COP, vapour compression cycle (only
description and no problems); Definitions of dry, wet & dew point temperatures, specific humidity
and relative humidity, Cooling and dehumidification, Layout of unit and central air conditioners.
Description about working with sketches of: Reciprocating pump, Centrifugal pump, Pelton turbine,
Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine. Overall efficiency, Problems on calculation of input and output
power of pumps and turbines (No velocity triangles)
Description about working with sketches of: Belt and Chain drives, Gear and Gear trains, Single plate
clutches.

Module 6
Manufacturing Process: Basic description of the manufacturing processes – Sand Casting, Forging,
Rolling, Extrusion and their applications.
Metal Joining Processes: List types of welding, Description with sketches of Arc Welding, Soldering
and Brazing and their applications
Basic Machining operations: Turning, Drilling, Milling and Grinding.
Description about working with block diagram of: Lathe, Drilling machine, Milling machine, CNC
Machine. Principle of CAD/CAM, Rapid and Additive manufacturing.

Text Books:

1. Rangwala, S. C., Essentials of Civil Engineering, Charotar Publishing House

2. Mckay, W.B. and Mckay, J. K., Building Construction, Volumes 1 to 4, Pearson India
Education Services

References Books:

1. Chen W.F and Liew J Y R (Eds), The Civil Engineering Handbook. II Edition CRC Press (Taylor
and Francis)
2. Chudley, R and Greeno R, Building construction handbook, Addison Wesley, Longman group,
England
3. Chudley, R, Construction Technology, Vol. I to IV, Longman group, England Course Plan
4. Kandya A A, Elements of Civil Engineering, Charotar Publishing house
5. Mamlouk, M. S., and Zaniewski, J. P., Materials for Civil and Construction Engineering, Pearson
Publishers
6. Rangwala S.C and Dalal K B Building Construction Charotar Publishing house
7. Clifford, M., Simmons, K. and Shipway, P., An Introduction to Mechanical Engineering Part I -
CRC Press
8. Roy and Choudhary, Elements of Mechanical Engineering, Media Promoters &Publishers Pvt.
Ltd., Mumbai.
9. Sawhney, G. S., Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering, PHI
10. G Shanmugam, M S Palanichamy, Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering, McGraw Hill
Education; First edition, 2018
11. Benjamin,J.,Basic Mechanical Engineering,Pentex Books,9th Edition,2018
12. Balachandran, P.Basic Mechanical Engineering,Owl Books
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Course
No. of
No Topic outcomes
Lectures
addressed

1 Module I Total: 7

General Introduction to Civil Engineering: Relevance of Civil

Engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the
1.1 CO1 1
country. Responsibility of an engineer in ensuring the safety of
built environment.

Brief introduction to major disciplines of Civil Engineering like

Transportation Engineering, Structural Engineering, Geo-technical
1.2 CO1 2
Engineering, Water Resources Engineering and Environmental
Engineering.

Introduction to buildings: Types of buildings, selection of site for

1.3 CO2 2
buildings, components of a residential building and their functions.

Building rules and regulations: Relevance of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms
1.4 (brief discussion only) CO2 1

Building area: Plinth area, built up area, floor area, carpet area and
1.5 CO2 1
floor area ratio for a building as per KBR.

2 Module 2 Total: 7

2.1 Surveying: Importance, objectives and principles. CO3 1

2.2 Bricks: - Classification, properties of good bricks, and tests on CO2 1

bricks

Stones: - Qualities of good stones, types of stones and their uses.

2.3 Cement: - Good qualities of cement, types of cement and their CO2 1
uses.

Sand: - Classification, qualities of good sand and sieve analysis

2.4 (basics only). CO2 1
Timber: - Characteristics, properties and uses.

2.5 Cement concrete: - Constituent materials, properties and types, CO2 1

Steel: - Steel sections and steel reinforcements, types and uses.
 Modern construction materials: - Architectural glass, ceramics,
plastics, composite materials, thermal and acoustic insulating
2.6 materials, decorative panels, waterproofing materials, modern CO2 2
uses of gypsum, pre-fabricated building components (brief
discussion only)
3 Module 3 Total: 7

Foundations: - Bearing capacity of soil (definition only), functions

of foundations, types – shallow and deep (brief discussion only).
3.1 Brick masonry: - Header and stretcher bond, English bond & CO2 2
Flemish bond– elevation and plan (one & one and a half brick wall
only).
Random rubble masonry.

3.2 Roofs: Functions, types; roofing materials (brief discussion only) CO2 2
Floors: Functions, types; flooring materials (brief discussion only)

3.3 Basic infrastructure services: MEP, HVAC, Elevators, escalators and CO4 2
ramps (Civil Engineering aspects only) fire safety for buildings

3.4 Green buildings:- Materials, energy systems, water management CO5 1

and environment for green buildings. (brief discussion only)

4 MODULE 4

Analysis of thermodynamic cycles: Carnot, Otto, and Diesel cycle- 4

4.1 Derivation of efficiency of these cycles, Problems to calculate heat
added, heat rejected, net work and efficiency

IC Engines: CI, SI, 2-Stroke, 4-Stroke engines. Listing the parts of 2

4.2 different types of IC Engines, efficiencies of IC Engines(Description
only)

Air, Fuel, cooling and lubricating systems in SI and CI Engines, CRDI, 2

4.3
MPFI. Concept of hybrid engines

5 MODULE 5

Refrigeration: Unit of refrigeration, reversed Carnot cycle, COP, vapour 1

5.1
compression cycle (only description and no problems)

Definitions of dry, wet & dew point temperatures, specific humidity and 1
5.2 relative humidity, Cooling and dehumidification, Layout of unit and
central air conditioners.
 Description about working with sketches : Reciprocating pump, 4
Centrifugal pump, Pelton turbine, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine.
5.3
Overall efficiency, Problems on calculation of input and output power
of pumps and turbines (No velocity triangles)

Description about working with sketches of: Belt and Chain drives, Gear 3
5.4
and Gear trains, Single plate clutches

6 MODULE 6

Manufacturing Process: Basic description of the manufacturing 2

6.1 processes – Sand Casting, Forging, Rolling, Extrusion and their
applications.

Metal Joining Processes :List types of welding, Description with 1

6.2
sketches of Arc Welding, Soldering and Brazing, and their applications

Basic Machining operations: Turning, Drilling, Milling and Grinding 3

6.3 Description about working with block diagrams of: Lathe, Drilling
machine, Milling machine, CNC Machine

6.4 Principle of CAD/CAM, Rapid and Additive manufacturing 1

 EST BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
130 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION
ESC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble:
This course aims to (1) equip the students with an understanding of the fundamental principles of
electrical engineering(2) provide an overview of evolution of electronics, and introduce the working
principle and examples of fundamental electronic devices and circuits (3) provide an overview of
evolution of communication systems, and introduce the basic concepts in radio communication.

Prerequisite: Physics and Mathematics (Pre-university level)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply fundamental concepts and circuit laws to solve simple DC electric circuits
CO 2 Develop and solve models of magnetic circuits
CO 3 Apply the fundamental laws of electrical engineering to solve simple ac circuits in steady
state
CO 4 Describe working of a voltage amplifier
CO 5 Outline the principle of an electronic instrumentation system
CO 6 Explain the principle of radio and cellular communication

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 4 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 6 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
Assessment Pattern

Basic Electrical Engineering Basic Electronics Engineering

Bloom’s Category Continuous End Semester Continuous End Semester
Assessment Tests Examination Assessment Tests Examination
Test 1 Test 2 (Marks) Test 1 Test 2 (Marks)
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 0 0 10 10 10 20
Understand 12.5 12.5 20 15 15 30
Apply 12.5 12.5 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE marks ESE marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part I – Basic Electrical Engineering and
Part II – Basic Electronics Engineering. Part I and PART II carries 50 marks each. For the end semester
examination, part I contain 2 parts - Part A and Part B. Part A contain 5 questions carrying 4 marks
each (not exceeding 2 questions from each module). Part B contains 2 questions from each module
out of which one to be answered. Each question carries 10 mark and can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions. The pattern for end semester examination for part II is same as that of part I. However,
student should answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Solve problems based on current division rule.

2. Solve problems with Mesh/node analysis.

3. Solve problems on Wye-Delta Transformation.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Problems on series magnetic circuits

2. Problems on parallel magnetic circuits

3. Problems on composite magnetic ciruits

4. Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. problems on self inductance, mutual inductance and coefficient of coupling

2. problems on rms and average values of periodic waveforms

3. problems on series ac circuits

4. Compare star and Delta connected 3 phase AC systems.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe working of a voltage amplifier

1.What is the need of voltage divider biasing in an RC coupled amplifier?

2. Define operating point in the context of a BJT amplifier.

3. Why is it required to have a voltage amplifier in a public address system?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Outline the principle of an electronic instrumentation system

1. Draw the block diagram of an electronic instrumentation system.

2. What is a transducer?

3. Explain the working principle of operation of digital multimeter.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Explain the principle of radio and cellular communication

1. What is the working principle of an antenna when used in a radio transmitter?

2. What is the need of two separate sections RF section and IF section in a super heterodyne
receiver?

3. What is meant by a cell in a cellular communication?

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: Pages: 3

Reg No.:_______________

Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 130

Course Name: BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets

PART I

BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions; each question carries 4 marks.

1. Calculate the current through the 4  resistor in the circuit shown, applying current
division rule:
2. Calculate the RMS and average values of a purely sinusoidal current having peak value
15A.

3. An alternating voltage of (80+j60)V is applied to an RX circuit and the current flowing

through the circuit is (-4+j10)A. Calculate the impedance of the circuit in rectangular and
polar forms. Also determine if X is inductive or capacitive.

4. Derive the relation between line and phase values of voltage in a three phase star
connected system.

5. Compare electric and magnetic circuits. (5x4=20)

PART B

Answer one question from each module; each question carries 10 marks.

Module 1

6. . Calculate the node voltages in the circuit shown, applying node analysis:

7. (a) State and explain Kirchhoff’s laws. (4 marks)

(b) Calculate the current through the galvanometer (G) in the circuit shown:

(6 marks)
 Module 2

8. (a) State and explain Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction with examples. (4 marks)

(b) Differentiate between statically and dynamically induced emf. A conductor of length
0.5m moves in a uniform magnetic field of flux density 1.1T at a velocity of 30m/s.
Calculate the emf induced in the conductor if the direction of motion of the conductor is
inclined at 600 to the direction of field. (6 marks)

9. (a) Derive the amplitude factor and form factor of a purely sinusoidal waveform. (5 marks)

(b) A current wave is made up of two components-a 5A dc component and a 50Hz ac

component, which is a sinusoidal wave with a peak value of 5A. Sketch the resultant
waveform and determine its RMS and average values. (5 marks)

Module 3

10. Draw the power triangle and define active, reactive and apparent powers in ac circuits.
Two coils A and B are connected in series across a 240V, 50Hz supply. The resistance of
A is 5  and the inductance of B is 0.015H. If the input from the supply is 3kW and
2kVAR, find the inductance of A and the resistance of B. Also calculate the voltage across
each coil.

11. A balanced three phase load consists of three coils each having resistance of 4Ω and
inductance 0.02H. It is connected to a 415V, 50Hz, 3-phase ac supply. Determine the
phase voltage, phase current, power factor and active power when the loads are connected
in (i) star (ii) delta.

(3x10=30)

PART II

BASIC ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions; each question carries 4 marks.

1. Give the specifications of a resistor. The colour bands marked on a resistor are Blue, Grey,
Yellow and Gold. What are the minimum and maximum resistance values expected from that
resistance?
2. What is meant by avalanche breakdown?
3. Explain the working of a full-wave bridge rectifier.
4. Discuss the role of coupling and bypass capacitors in a single stage RC coupled amplifier.
5. Differentiate AM and FM communication systems.

(5x4=20)
 PART B

Answer one question from each module; each question carries 10 marks.

Module 4
6. a) Explain with diagram the principle of operation of an NPN transistor. (5)
b) Sketch and explain the typical input-output characteristics of a BJT when connected in
common emitter configuration. (5)
OR
7. a) Explain the formation of a potential barrier in a P-N junction diode. (5)
b) What do you understand by Avalanche breakdown? Draw and explain the V-I characteristics
of a P-N junction and Zener diode. (5)
Module 5
8. a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the working of an RC coupled amplifier. (6)
b) Draw the frequency response characteristics of an RC coupled amplifier and state the reasons
for the reduction of gain at lower and higher frequencies. (4)
OR
9. a) With the help of block diagram, explain how an electronic instrumentation system. (6)
b) Explain the principle of an antenna. (4)

Module 6
10. a) With the help of a block diagram, explain the working of Super hetrodyne receiver. (6)
b) Explain the importance of antenna in a communication system. (4)
OR
11. a) With neat sketches explain a cellular communication system. (5)
b) Explain GSM communication with the help of a block diagram. (5)
(3x10=30)
 SYLLABUS

MODULE 1: Elementary Concepts of Electric Circuits

Elementary concepts of DC electric circuits: Basic Terminology including voltage, current, power,
resistance, emf; Resistances in series and parallel; Current and Voltage Division Rules; Capacitors &
Inductors: V-I relations and energy stored. Ohms Law and Kirchhoff's laws-Problems; Star-delta
conversion (resistive networks only-derivation not required)-problems.

Analysis of DC electric circuits: Mesh current method - Matrix representation - Solution of network
equations. Node voltage methods-matrix representation-solution of network equations by matrix
methods. Numerical problems.

MODULE 2: Elementary Concepts of Magnetic circuits, Electromagnetic Induction and AC

fundamentals

Magnetic Circuits: Basic Terminology: MMF, field strength, flux density, reluctance - comparison
between electric and magnetic circuits- Series and parallel magnetic circuits with composite
materials, numerical problems.

Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws, problems, Lenz's law- statically induced and dynamically
induced emfs - Self-inductance and mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling

Alternating Current fundamentals: Generation of alternating voltages-Representation of sinusoidal

waveforms: frequency, period, Average, RMS values and form factor of waveforms-Numerical
Problems.

MODULE 3: AC Circuits

AC Circuits: Phasor representation of sinusoidal quantities. Trignometric, Rectangular, Polar and

complex forms. Analysis of simple AC circuits: Purely resistive, inductive & capacitive circuits;
Inductive and capacitive reactance, concept of impedance. Average Power Power factor. Analysis of
RL, RC and RLC series circuits-active, reactive and apparent power. Simple numerical problems.

Three phase AC systems: Generation of three phase voltages; advantages of three phase systems,
star and delta connections (balanced only), relation between line and phase voltages, line and phase
currents- Numerical problems

MODULE 4
Introduction to Semiconductor devices: Evolution of electronics – Vacuum tubes to nano
electronics. Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors (constructional features not required): types,
specifications. Standard values, color coding. PN Junction diode: Principle of operation, V-I
characteristics, principle of avalanche breakdown. Bipolar Junction Transistors: PNP and NPN
structures, Principle of operation, relation between current gains in CE, CB and CC, input and
output characteristics of common emitter configuration.
MODULE 5
Basic electronic circuits and instrumentation: Rectifiers and power supplies: Block diagram
description of a dc power supply, Working of a full wave bridge rectifier, capacitor filter (no
analysis), working of simple zener voltage regulator. Amplifiers: Block diagram of Public Address
system, Circuit diagram and working of common emitter (RC coupled) amplifier with its frequency
response, Concept of voltage divider biasing. Electronic Instrumentation: Block diagram of an
electronic instrumentation system.

MODULE 6
Introduction to Communication Systems: Evolution of communication systems – Telegraphy to 5G.
Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, frequency bands used for various communication
systems, block diagram of super heterodyne receiver, Principle of antenna – radiation from
accelerated charge. Mobile communication: basic principles of cellular communications, principle
and block diagram of GSM.

Text Books
1. D P Kothari and I J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. D C Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. ChinmoySaha, Arindham Halder and Debarati Ganguly, Basic Electronics - Principles and
Applications, Cambridge University Press, 2018.
4. M.S.Sukhija and T.K.Nagsarkar, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Oxford University
Press, 2012.
5. Wayne Tomasi and Neil Storey, A Textbook On Basic Communication and Information
Engineering, Pearson, 2010.

Reference Books
1. Del Toro V, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Pearson Education.
2. T. K. Nagsarkar, M. S. Sukhija, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Oxford Higher Education.
3. Hayt W H, Kemmerly J E, and Durbin S M, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Tata McGraw-Hill
4. Hughes, “Electrical and Electronic Technology”, Pearson Education.
5. V. N. Mittle and Arvind Mittal, “Basic Electrical Engineering,” Second Edition, McGraw Hill.
6. Parker and Smith, “Problems in Electrical Engineering”, CBS Publishers and Distributors.
7. S. B. Lal Seksena and Kaustuv Dasgupta, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Cambridge
University Press.
8. Anant Agarwal, Jeffrey Lang, Foundations of Analog and Digital Electronic Circuits, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers, 2005.
9. Bernard Grob, Ba sic Electronics, McGraw Hill.
10. A. Bruce Carlson, Paul B. Crilly, Communication Systems: An Introduction to Signals and
Noise in Electrical Communication, Tata McGraw Hill, 5 th Edition.
COURSE CONTENTS AND LECTURE SCHEDULE

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Elementary Concepts of Electric Circuits

1.1 Elementary concepts of DC electric circuits:

Basic Terminology including voltage, current, power, resistance, emf; 1

Resistances in series and parallel; Current and Voltage Division Rules;
Capacitors & Inductors: V-I relations and energy stored.

Ohms Law and Kirchhoff's laws-Problems; 2

Star-delta conversion (resistive networks only-derivation not required)- 1

problems.

1.2 Analysis of DC electric circuits: Mesh current method - Matrix 1

representation - Solution of network equations.

Node voltage methods-matrix representation-solution of network

equations by matrix methods. 1

Numerical problems. 2

2 Elementary Concepts of Magnetic circuits, Electromagnetic Induction and AC

fundamentals

2.1 Magnetic Circuits: Basic Terminology: MMF, field strength, flux density,
reluctance - comparison between electric and magnetic circuits-
1
Series and parallel magnetic circuits with composite materials,
numerical problems. 2

2.2 Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws, problems, Lenz's law- 1

statically induced and dynamically induced emfs -
Self-inductance and mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling 2

2.3 Alternating Current fundamentals: Generation of alternating voltages- 2

Representation of sinusoidal waveforms: frequency, period, Average,
RMS values and form factor of waveforms-Numerical Problems.

3 AC Circuits
3.1 AC Circuits: Phasor representation of sinusoidal quantities. 1
Trigonometric, Rectangular, Polar and complex forms.

Analysis of simple AC circuits: Purely resistive, inductive & capacitive

circuits; Inductive and capacitive reactance, concept of impedance. 2
Average Power, Power factor.

Analysis of RL, RC and RLC series circuits-active, reactive and apparent 1

power.
2
Simple numerical problems.

3.2 Three phase AC systems: Generation of three phase voltages;

advantages of three phase systems, star and delta connections
(balanced only), relation between line and phase voltages, line and 2
phase currents- Numerical problems.

4 Introduction to Semiconductor devices

4.1 Evolution of electronics – Vacuum tubes to nano electronics (In 1

evolutional perspective only)

4.2 Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors: types, specifications. Standard 2

values, color coding (No constructional features)

4.3 PN Junction diode: Principle of operation, V-I characteristics, principle 2

of avalanche breakdown

4.4 Bipolar Junction Transistors: PNP and NPN structures, Principle of 3

operation, relation between current gains in CE, CB and CC, input and
output characteristics of common emitter configuration

5 Basic electronic circuits and instrumentation

5.1 Rectifiers and power supplies: Block diagram description of a dc power 3

supply, Working of a full wave bridge rectifier, capacitor filter (no
analysis), working of simple zener voltage regulator

5.2 Amplifiers: Block diagram of Public Address system, Circuit diagram and 4
working of common emitter (RC coupled) amplifier with its frequency
response, Concept of voltage divider biasing

5.3 Electronic Instrumentation: Block diagram of an electronic 2

instrumentation system

6 Introduction to Communication Systems

6.1 Evolution of communication systems – Telegraphy to 5G 1

6.2 Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, frequency bands used for 4
various communication systems, block diagram of super heterodyne
receiver, Principle of antenna – radiation from accelerated charge

6.3 Mobile communication: basic principles of cellular communications, 2

principle and block diagram of GSM.

Suggested Simulation Assignments for Basic Electronics Engineering

1. Plot V-I characteristics of Si and Ge diodes on a simulator

2. Plot Input and Output characteristics of BJT on a simulator
3. Implementation of half wave and full wave rectifiers
4. Simulation of RC coupled amplifier with the design supplied
5. Generation of AM signal

Note: The simulations can be done on open tools such as QUCS, KiCad, GNURadio or similar software
to augment the understanding.
HUN PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
102 MNC 2 0 2 --

Preamble: Clear, precise, and effective communication has become a sine qua non in today's
information-driven world given its interdependencies and seamless connectivity. Any aspiring
professional cannot but master the key elements of such communication. The objective of this
course is to equip students with the necessary skills to listen, read, write, and speak so as to
comprehend and successfully convey any idea, technical or otherwise, as well as give them the
necessary polish to become persuasive communicators.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop vocabulary and language skills relevant to engineering as a profession

CO 2 Analyze, interpret and effectively summarize a variety of textual content
CO 3 Create effective technical presentations
CO 4 Discuss a given technical/non-technical topic in a group setting and arrive at
generalizations/consensus
CO 5 Identify drawbacks in listening patterns and apply listening techniques for specific needs
CO 6 Create professional and technical documents that are clear and adhering to all the
necessary conventions

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 1 3
CO 3 1 1 3
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 1 2 3
CO 6 1 1 1 3

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 50 50 2 hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation
Total Marks: 50
Attendance : 10 marks
Regular assessment : 25 marks
Series test (one test only, should include verbal aptitude for placement and higher studies, this test
will be conducted for 50 marks and reduced to 15) : 15 marks
Regular assessment
Project report presentation and Technical presentation through PPT : 7.5 marks
Listening Test : 5 marks
Group discussion/mock job interview : 7.5 marks
Resume submission : 5 marks

End Semester Examination

Total Marks: 50, Time: 2 hrs.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. List down the ways in which gestures affect verbal communication.
2. Match the words and meanings
Ambiguous promotion
Bona fide referring to whole
Holistic not clear
Exaltation genuine
3. Expand the following Compound Nouns - a. Water supply. b. Object recognition. c. Steam
turbine
Course Outcome 2 (CO2)
1. Read the passage below and prepare notes:
Mathematics, rightly viewed, possesses not only truth, but supreme beauty—a beauty cold and
austere, like that of sculpture, without appeal to any part of our weaker nature, without the
gorgeous trappings of painting or music, yet sublimely pure, and capable of a stern perfection such
as only the greatest art can show. The true spirit of delight, the exaltation, the sense of being more
than man, which is the touchstone of the highest excellence, is to be found in mathematics as surely
as in poetry. What is best in mathematics deserves not merely to be learnt as a task, but to be
assimilated as a part of daily thought, and brought again and again before the mind with ever-
renewed encouragement. Real life is, to most men, a long second-best, a perpetual compromise
between the ideal and the possible; but the world of pure reason knows no compromise, no
practical limitations, no barrier to the creative activity embodying in splendid edifices the passionate
aspiration after the perfect from which all great work springs. Remote from human passions, remote
even from the pitiful facts of nature, the generations have gradually created an ordered cosmos,
where pure thought can dwell as in its natural home, and where one, at least, of our nobler impulses
can escape from the dreary exile of the actual world.
So little, however, have mathematicians aimed at beauty, that hardly anything in their work has had
this conscious purpose. Much, owing to irrepressible instincts, which were better than avowed
beliefs, has been moulded by an unconscious taste; but much also has been spoilt by false notions of
what was fitting. The characteristic excellence of mathematics is only to be found where the
reasoning is rigidly logical: the rules of logic are to mathematics what those of structure are to
architecture. In the most beautiful work, a chain of argument is presented in which every link is
important on its own account, in which there is an air of ease and lucidity throughout, and the
premises achieve more than would have been thought possible, by means which appear natural and
inevitable. Literature embodies what is general in particular circumstances whose universal
significance shines through their individual dress; but mathematics endeavours to present whatever
is most general in its purity, without any irrelevant trappings.
How should the teaching of mathematics be conducted so as to communicate to the learner as much
as possible of this high ideal? Here experience must, in a great measure, be our guide; but some
maxims may result from our consideration of the ultimate purpose to be achieved.
- From "On the teaching of mathematics" – Bertrand Russell

2. Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages of speed reading. Discuss how it can impact
comprehension.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. What are the key elements of a successful presentation?

2. Elucidate the importance of non-verbal communication in making a presentation
3. List out the key components in a technical presentation.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Discuss: 'In today's world, being a good listener is more important than being a good
Speaker.'
2. Listen to a video/live group discussion on a particular topic, and prepare a brief summary of
the proceedings.
3. List the do's and don'ts in a group discussion.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. Watch a movie clip and write the subtitles for the dialogue.
2. What do you mean by barriers to effective listening? List ways to overcome each of these.
3. What are the different types of interviews? How are listening skills particularly important in
Skype/telephonic interviews?
Course Outcome 6 (CO6):
1. Explain the basic structure of a technical report.
2. You have been offered an internship in a much sought-after aerospace company and are
very excited about it. However, the dates clash with your series tests. Write a letter to the
Manager – University Relations of the company asking them if they can change the dates to
coincide with your vacation.
3. You work in a well-reputed aerospace company as Manager – University Relations. You are
in charge of offering internships. A student has sent you a letter requesting you to change
the dates allotted to him since he has series exams at that time. But there are no vacancies
available during the period he has requested for. Compose an e-mail informing him of this
and suggest that he try to arrange the matter with his college.
 Syllabus

Module 1

Use of language in communication: Significance of technical communication Vocabulary

Development: technical vocabulary, vocabulary used in formal letters/emails and reports, sequence
words, misspelled words, compound words, finding suitable synonyms, paraphrasing, verbal
analogies. Language Development: subject-verb agreement, personal passive voice, numerical
adjectives, embedded sentences, clauses, conditionals, reported speech, active/passive voice.

Technology-based communication: Effective email messages, slide presentations, editing skills using
software. Modern day research and study skills: search engines, repositories, forums such as Git
Hub, Stack Exchange, OSS communities (MOOC, SWAYAM, NPTEL), and Quora; Plagiarism

Module 2

Reading, Comprehension, and Summarizing: Reading styles, speed, valuation, critical reading,
reading and comprehending shorter and longer technical articles from journals, newspapers,
identifying the various transitions in a text, SQ3R method, PQRST method, speed reading.
Comprehension: techniques, understanding textbooks, marking and underlining, Note-taking:
recognizing non-verbal cues.

Module 3

Oral Presentation: Voice modulation, tone, describing a process, Presentation Skills: Oral
presentation and public speaking skills, business presentations, Preparation: organizing the material,
self-Introduction, introducing the topic, answering questions, individual presentation practice,
presenting visuals effectively.

Debate and Group Discussions: introduction to Group Discussion (GD), differences between GD and
debate; participating GD, understanding GD, brainstorming the topic, questioning and clarifying, GD
strategies, activities to improve GD skills

Module 4

Listening and Interview Skills Listening: Active and Passive listening, listening: for general content, to
fill up information, intensive listening, for specific information, to answer, and to understand.
Developing effective listening skills, barriers to effective listening, listening to longer technical talks,
listening to classroom lectures, talks on engineering /technology, listening to documentaries and
making notes, TED talks.

Interview Skills: types of interviews, successful interviews, interview etiquette, dress code, body
language, telephone/online (skype) interviews, one-to-one interview & panel interview, FAQs
related to job interviews
 Module 5

Formal writing: Technical Writing: differences between technical and literary style. Letter Writing
(formal, informal and semi formal), Job applications, Minute preparation, CV preparation
(differences between Bio-Data, CV and Resume), and Reports. Elements of style, Common Errors in
Writing: describing a process, use of sequence words, Statements of Purpose, Instructions,
Checklists.

Analytical and issue-based Essays and Report Writing: basics of report writing; Referencing Style
(IEEE Format), structure of a report; types of reports, references, bibliography.

Lab Activities

Written: Letter writing, CV writing, Attending a meeting and Minute Preparation, Vocabulary
Building
Spoken: Phonetics, MMFS (Multimedia Feedback System), Mirroring, Elevator Pitch, telephone
etiquette, qualities of a good presentation with emphasis on body language and use of visual aids.
Listening: Exercises based on audio materials like radio and podcasts. Listening to Song. practice and
exercises.
Reading: Speed Reading, Reading with the help of Audio Visual Aids, Reading Comprehension Skills
Mock interview and Debate/Group Discussion: concepts, types, Do’s and don’ts- intensive practice

Reference Books

1. English for Engineers and Technologists (Combined edition, Vol. 1 and 2), Orient Blackswan 2010.
2. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma,”Technical Communication: Principles and Practice”, 2nd
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011
th
3. Stephen E. Lucas, "The Art of Public Speaking", 10 Edition; McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
nd
4. Ashraf Rizvi, "Effective Technical Communication", 2 Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
th
5. William Strunk Jr. & E.B. White, "The Elements of Style", 4 Edition, Pearson, 1999.
6. David F. Beer and David McMurrey, Guide to writing as an Engineer, John Willey. New York, 2004.
7. Goodheart-Willcox, "Professional Communication", First Edition , 2017.
8. Training in Interpersonal Skills: Tips for Managing People at Work, Pearson Education, India, 6 edition,
2015.
9. The Ace of Soft Skills: Attitude, Communication and Etiquette for Success, Pearson Education; 1
edition, 2013.
10. Anand Ganguly, “Success in Interview”, RPH, 5th Edition, 2016.
11. Raman Sharma, “Technical Communications”, Oxford Publication, London, 2004.
 YEAR OF
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
EST PROGRAMING IN C INTRODUCTION
102
ESC 2 1 2 4 2019

Preamble: The syllabus is prepared with the view of preparing the Engineering Graduates capable of writing
readable C programs to solve computational problems that they may have to solve in their professional life.
The course content is decided to cover the essential programming fundamentals which can be taught
within the given slots in the curriculum. This course has got 2 Hours per week for practicing programming in
C. A list showing 24 mandatory programming problems are given at the end. The instructor is supposed to
give homework/assignments to write the listed programs in the rough record as and when the required
theory part is covered in the class. The students are expected to come prepared with the required program
written in the rough record for the lab classes.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyze a computational problem and develop an algorithm/flowchart to find its solution

Develop readable* C programs with branching and looping statements, which uses
CO 2
Arithmetic, Logical, Relational or Bitwise operators.

Write readable C programs with arrays, structure or union for storing the data to be
CO 3
processed

Divide a given computational problem into a number of modules and develop a readable
CO 4 multi-function C program by using recursion if required, to find the solution to the
computational problem

CO 5 Write readable C programs which use pointers for array processing and parameter passing

CO 6 Develop readable C programs with files for reading input and storing output

readable* - readability of a program means the following:

1. Logic used is easy to follow
2. Standards to be followed for indentation and formatting
3. Meaningful names are given to variables
4. Concise comments are provided wherever needed
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

End Semester
Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 Examination Marks
(Marks) (Marks)

Remember 15 10 25

Understand 10 15 25

Apply 20 20 40

Analyse 5 5 10

Evaluate

Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test 1 (for theory, for 2 hrs) : 20 marks

Continuous Assessment Test 2 (for lab, internal examination, for 2 hrs) : 20 marks

Internal Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions
with 2 questions from each module (2.5 modules x 2 = 5), having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B also contains 5 questions with 2 questions from each module (2.5
modules x 2 = 5), of which a student should answer any one. The questions should not have sub-
divisions and each one carries 7 marks.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Write an algorithm to check whether largest of 3 natural numbers is prime or
not. Also, draw a flowchart for solving the same problem.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Write an easy to read C program to process a set of n natural numbers and to
find the largest even number and smallest odd number from the given set of numbers. The program
should not use division and modulus operators.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):Write an easy to read C program to process the marks obtained by n students
of a class and prepare their rank list based on the sum of the marks obtained. There are 3 subjects for
which examinations are conducted and the third subject is an elective where a student is allowed to
take any one of the two courses offered.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Write an easy to read C program to find the value of a mathematical function
f which is defined as follows. f(n) = n! / (sum of factors of n), if n is not prime and f(n) = n! / (sum of
digits of n), if n is prime.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Write an easy to read C program to sort a set of n integers and to find the
number of unique numbers and the number of repeated numbers in the given set of numbers. Use a
function which takes an integer array of n elements, sorts the array using the Bubble Sorting Technique
and returns the number of unique numbers and the number of repeated numbers in the given array.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Write an easy to read C program to process a text file and to print the
Palindrome words into an output file.
 Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 102

Course Name: Programming in C (Common to all programs)

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Write short note on processor and memory in a computer.

2. What are the differences between compiled and interpreted languages? Give example for
each.
3. Write a C program to read a Natural Number through keyboard and to display the reverse
of the given number. For example, if “3214567” is given as input, the output to be shown is
“7654123”.
4. Is it advisable to use goto statements in a C program? Justify your answer.
5. Explain the different ways in which you can declare & initialize a single dimensional array.
6. Write a C program to read a sentence through keyboard and to display the count of white
spaces in the given sentence.
7. What are the advantages of using functions in a program?
8. With a simple example program, explain scope and life time of variables in C.
9. Write a function in C which takes the address of a single dimensional array (containing a
finite sequence of numbers) and the number of numbers stored in the array as arguments
and stores the numbers in the same array in reverse order. Use pointers to access the
elements of the array.
10. With an example, explain the different modes of opening a file. (10x3=30)

Part B
Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

11. (a) Draw a flow chart to find the position of an element in a given sequence, using linear
searching technique. With an example explain how the flowchart finds the position of a
given element. (10)
(b) Write a pseudo code representing the flowchart for linear searching. (4)
OR
12. (a) With the help of a flow chart, explain the bubble sort operation. Illustrate with an
example. (10)
(b) Write an algorithm representing the flowchart for bubble sort. (4)

13. (a) Write a C program to read an English Alphabet through keyboard and display whether
the given Alphabet is in upper case or lower case. (6)
(b) Explain how one can use the builtin function in C, scanfto read values of different data
types. Also explain using examples how one can use the builtin function in C, printffor text
formatting. (8)
OR

14. (a) With suitable examples, explain various operators in C. (10)

(b) Explain how characters are stored and processed in C. (4)

15. (a) Write a function in C which takes a 2-Dimensional array storing a matrix of numbers and
the order of the matrix (number of rows and columns) as arguments and displays the sum
of the elements stored in each row. (6 )
(b) Write a C program to check whether a given matrix is a diagonal matrix. (8)
OR

16. (a) Without using any builtin string processing function like strlen, strcat etc., write a
program to concatenate two strings. (8)
(b) Write a C program to perform bubble sort. (6)

17. (a) Write a function namely myFact in C to find the factorial of a given number. Also, write
another function in C namelynCr which accepts two positive integer parameters n and r and
returns the value of the mathematical functionC(n,r)( n! / ( r! x (n - r)!) ). The function nCr is
expected to make use of the factorial function myFact. (10)
(b) What is recursion? Give an example. (4)

OR

18. (a) With a suitable example, explain the differences between a structure and a union in C.
(6)
(b) Declare a structure namely Student to store the details (roll number, name, mark_for_C)
of a student. Then, write a program in C to find the average mark obtained by the students
in a class for the subject Programming in C (using the field mark_for_C). Use array of
structures to store the required data (8)

19. (a) With a suitable example, explain the concept of pass by reference. (6)
(b) With a suitable example, explain how pointers can help in changing the content of a
single dimensionally array passed as an argument to a function in C.
(8)
OR

20. (a) Differentiate between sequential files and random access files? (4)
 (b) Using the prototypes explain the functionality provided by the following functions. (10)
rewind()
i. fseek()

ii. ftell()

iii. fread()

iv. fwrite() (14X5=70)

SYLLABUS
Programming in C (Common to all disciplines)

Module 1
Basics of Computer Hardware and Software
Basics of Computer Architecture: processor, Memory, Input& Output devices
Application Software & System software: Compilers, interpreters, High level and low level languages
Introduction to structured approach to programming, Flow chart Algorithms, Pseudo code (bubble
sort, linear search - algorithms and pseudocode)

Module 2
Program Basics
Basic structure of C program: Character set, Tokens, Identifiers in C, Variables and Data Types ,
Constants, Console IO Operations, printf and scanf
Operators and Expressions: Expressions and Arithmetic Operators, Relational and Logical Operators,
Conditional operator, size of operator, Assignment operators and Bitwise Operators. Operators
Precedence
Control Flow Statements: If Statement, Switch Statement, Unconditional Branching using goto
statement, While Loop, Do While Loop, For Loop, Break and Continue statements.(Simple programs
covering control flow)
Module 3
Arrays and strings
Arrays Declaration and Initialization, 1-Dimensional Array, 2-Dimensional Array
String processing: In built String handling functions (strlen, strcpy, strcat and strcmp, puts, gets)
Linear search program, bubble sort program, simple programs covering arrays and strings

Module 4
Working with functions
Introduction to modular programming, writing functions, formal parameters, actual parameters
Pass by Value, Recursion, Arrays as Function Parameters structure, union, Storage Classes, Scope
and life time of variables, simple programs using functions
 Module 5
Pointers and Files
Basics of Pointer: declaring pointers, accessing data though pointers, NULL pointer,array access
using pointers, pass by reference effect
File Operations: open, close, read, write, append
Sequential access and random access to files: In built file handlingfunctions (rewind() ,fseek(), ftell(),
feof(), fread(), fwrite()), simple programs covering pointers and files.

Text Books
1. Schaum Series, Gottfried B.S.,Tata McGraw Hill,Programming with C
2. E. Balagurusamy, Mcgraw Hill,Programming in ANSI C
3. Asok N Kamthane, Pearson,Programming in C
4. Anita Goel, Pearson, Computer Fundamentals
Reference Books
1. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, Pearson, Computer fundamentals and Programming in C
2. Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, Pearson, C Programming Language
3. Rajaraman V, PHI, Computer Basics and Programming in C
4. Yashavant P, Kanetkar, BPB Publications, Let us C

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

Module 1: Basics of Computer Hardware and Software (7 hours)

1.1 Basics of Computer Architecture: Processor, Memory, Input& Output devices 2 hours

Application Software & System software: Compilers, interpreters, High level

1.2 2 hours
and low level languages

1.3 Introduction to structured approach to programming, Flow chart 1 hours

Algorithms, Pseudo code (bubble sort, linear search - algorithms and

1.4 2 hours
pseudocode)

Module 2: Program Basics (8 hours)

Basic structure of C program: Character set, Tokens, Identifiers in C, Variables

2.1 2 hours
and Data Types , Constants, Console IO Operations, printf and scanf

Operators and Expressions: Expressions and Arithmetic Operators, Relational

2.2 and Logical Operators, Conditional operator, sizeof operator, Assignment 2 hours
operators and Bitwise Operators. Operators Precedence
 Control Flow Statements: If Statement, Switch Statement, Unconditional
2.3 Branching using goto statement, While Loop, Do While Loop, For Loop, Break 4 hours
and Continue statements.(Simple programs covering control flow)

Module 3: Arrays and strings: (6 hours)

Arrays Declaration and Initialization, 1-Dimensional Array, 2-Dimensional Array 2 hours

3.1

String processing: In built String handling functions(strlen, strcpy, strcat and

3.2 2 hours
strcmp, puts, gets)

Linear search program, bubble sort program, simple programs covering arrays
3.3 3 hours
and strings

Module 4: Working with functions (7 hours)

4.1 Introduction to modular programming, writing functions, formal parameters, 2 hours

actual parameters

4.2 Pass by Value, Recursion, Arrays as Function Parameters 2 hours

4.3 structure, union, Storage Classes,Scope and life time of variables, simple 3 hours
programs using functions

Module 5: Pointers and Files (7 hours)

5.1 Basics of Pointer: declaring pointers, accessing data though pointers, NULL 3 hours
pointer,array access using pointers, pass by reference effect

5.2 File Operations: open, close, read, write, append 1 hours

Sequential access and random access to files: In built file handlingfunctions

5.3 (rewind() ,fseek(), ftell(), feof(), fread(), fwrite()), simple programs covering 2 hours
pointers and files.

C PROGRAMMING LAB (Practical part of EST 102, Programming in C)

Assessment Method: The Academic Assessment for the Programming lab should be done internally
by the College. The assessment shall be made on 50 marks and the mark is divided as follows:
Practical Records/Outputs - 20 marks (internal by the College), Regular Lab Viva - 5 marks (internal
by the College), Final Practical Exam – 25 marks (internal by the College).

The mark obtained out of 50 will be converted into equivalent proportion out of 20 for CIE
computation.
 LIST OF LAB EXPERIMENTS
1. Familiarization of Hardware Components of a Computer
2. Familiarization of Linux environment – How to do Programming in C with Linux
3. Familiarization of console I/O and operators in C
i) Display “Hello World”
ii) Read two numbers, add them and display theirsum
iii) Read the radius of a circle, calculate its area and display it
iv)Evaluate the arithmetic expression ((a -b / c * d + e) * (f +g)) and display its solution.Read
the values of the variables from the user through console.

4. Read 3 integer values and find the largest amoung them.

5. Read a Natural Number and check whether the number is prime or not
6. Read a Natural Number and check whether the number is Armstrong or not
7. Read n integers, store them in an array and find their sum and average
8. Read n integers, store them in an array and search for an element in the
array using an algorithm for Linear Search
9. Read n integers, store them in an array and sort the elements in the array using Bubble Sort
algorithm
10. Read a string (word), store it in an array and check whether it is a palindrome word or not.
11.Read two strings (each one ending with a $ symbol), store them in
arrays and concatenate them without using library functions.
12. Read a string (ending with a $ symbol), store it in an array and count the number of vowels,
consonants and spaces in it.
13. Read two input each representing the distances between two points in the Euclidean space,
store these in structure variables and add the two distance values.
14. Using structure, read and print data of n employees (Name, Employee Id and Salary)
15. Declare a union containing 5 string variables (Name, House Name, City Name, State and Pin
code) each with a length of C_SIZE (user defined constant). Then, read and display the address of a
person using a variable of the union.
16. Find the factorial of a given Natural Number n usingrecursive and non recursive functions
17. Read a string (word), store it in an array and obtain its reverse by using a user defined function.
18. Write a menu driven program for performing matrix addition, multiplication and finding the
transpose. Use functions to (i) read a matrix, (ii) find the sum of two matrices, (iii) find the product
of two matrices, (i) find the transpose of a matrix and (v) display a matrix.
19. Do the following using pointers
i) add two numbers
ii) swap two numbers using a user defined function
20. Input and Print the elements of an array using pointers
21. Compute sum of the elements stored in an array using pointers and user defined function.
22. Create a file and perform the following
iii) Write data to the file
iv) Read the data in a given file & display the file content on console
v) append new data and display on console
23. Open a text input file and count number of characters, words and lines in it; and store the results
in an output file.
 PHL ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
120 PHYSICS LAB INTRODUCTION
BSC 0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: The aim of this course is to make the students gain practical knowledge to co-relate with
the theoretical studies and to develop practical applications of engineering materials
and use the principle in the right way to implement the modern technology.

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop analytical/experimental skills and impart prerequisite hands on experience for

engineering laboratories

CO 2 Understand the need for precise measurement practices for data recording

CO 3 Understand the principle, concept, working and applications of relevant technologies and
comparison of results with theoretical calculations
CO 4 Analyze the techniques and skills associated with modern scientific tools such as lasers and
fiber optics
CO 5 Develop basic communication skills through working in groups in performing the laboratory
experiments and by interpreting the results

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 3 1 2 1
CO 2 3 3 1 2 1
CO 3 3 3 1 2 1
CO 4 3 3 1 2 1
CO 5 3 3 1 2 1

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

Duration(Internal)
Marks Marks

100 100 - 1 hour

 Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

(Minimum 8 experiments should be completed)

1. CRO-Measurement of frequency and amplitude of wave forms

2. Measurement of strain using strain gauge and wheatstone bridge
3. LCR Circuit – Forced and damped harmonic oscillations
4. Melde’s string apparatus- Measurement of frequency in the transverse and longitudinal mode
5. Wave length measurement of a monochromatic source of light using Newton’s Rings method.
6. Determination of diameter of a thin wire or thickness of a thin strip of paper using air wedge
method.
7. To measure the wavelength using a millimeter scale as a grating.
8. Measurement of wavelength of a source of light using grating.
9. Determination of dispersive power and resolving power of a plane transmission grating
10.Determination of the particle size of lycopodium powder
11.Determination of the wavelength of He-Ne laser or any standard laser using diffraction grating
12.Calculate the numerical aperture and study the losses that occur in optical fiber cable.
13.I-V characteristics of solar cell.
14.LED Characteristics.
15.Ultrasonic Diffractometer- Wavelength and velocity measurement of ultrasonic waves in a liquid
16.Deflection magnetometer-Moment of a magnet- Tan A position.

Reference books

1. S.L.Gupta and Dr.V.Kumar, “Practical physics with viva voice”, Pragati PrakashanPublishers, Revised
Edition, 2009

2. M.N.Avadhanulu, A.A.Dani and Pokely P.M, “Experiments in Engineering Physics”, S.Chand&Co,2008

3. S. K. Gupta, “Engineering physics practicals”, Krishna Prakashan Pvt. Ltd., 2014

4. P. R. Sasikumar “Practical Physics”, PHI Ltd., 2011.

 CYL ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
120 BSC 0 0 2 1

Preamble: To impart scientific approach and to familiarize with the experiments in chemistry relevant
for research projects in higher semesters

Prerequisite: Experiments in chemistry introduced at the plus two levels in schools

Course outcomes: After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO 1 Understand and practice different techniques of quantitative chemical analysis to

generate experimental skills and apply these skills to various analyses

CO 2 Develop skills relevant to synthesize organic polymers and acquire the practical skill to
use TLC for the identification of drugs
CO 3 Develop the ability to understand and explain the use of modern spectroscopic
techniques for analysing and interpreting the IR spectra and NMR spectra of some
organic compounds
CO 4 Acquire the ability to understand, explain and use instrumental techniques for chemical
analysis
CO 5 Learn to design and carry out scientific experiments as well as accurately record and
analyze the results of such experiments

CO 6 Function as a member of a team, communicate effectively and engage in further

learning. Also understand how chemistry addresses social, economical and
environmental problems and why it is an integral part of curriculum

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 1 3
CO 6 3 1 3
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

marks marks Duration(Internal)

100 100 - 1 hour

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks
End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (MINIMUM 8 MANDATORY)

1. Estimation of total hardness of water-EDTA method

2. Potentiometric titration
3. Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions.
4. Calibration of pH meter and determination of pH of a solution
5. Estimation of chloride in water
6. Identification of drugs using TLC
7. Determination of wavelength of absorption maximum and colorimetric estimation of Fe3+ in
solution
8. Determination of molar absorptivity of a compound (KMnO4 or any water soluble food
colorant)
9. Synthesis of polymers (a) Urea-formaldehyde resin (b) Phenol-formaldehyde resin
10. Estimation of iron in iron ore
11. Estimation of copper in brass
12. Estimation of dissolved oxygen by Winkler’s method
13. (a) Analysis of IR spectra (minimum 3 spectra) (b) Analysis of 1H NMR spectra (
minimum 3 spectra)
14. Flame photometric estimation of Na+ to find out the salinity in sand
15. Determination of acid value of a vegetable oil
16. Determination of saponification of a vegetable oil
Reference Books

1. G. Svehla, B. Sivasankar, “Vogel's Qualitative Inorganic Analysis”, Pearson, 2012.

2. R. K. Mohapatra, “Engineering Chemistry with Laboratory Experiments”, PHI Learning, 2017.

3. Muhammed Arif, “Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual”, Owl publishers, 2019.

4. Ahad J., “Engineering Chemistry Lab manual”, Jai Publications, 2019.

5. Roy K Varghese, “Engineering Chemistry Laboratory Manual”, Crownplus Publishers, 2019.

6. Soney C George, Rino Laly Jose, “Lab Manual of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand &
Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2019.
 ESL YEAR OF
CIVIL & MECHANICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
120 INTRODUCTION
WORKSHOP
0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: The course is designed to train the students to identify and manage the tools, materials
and methods required to execute an engineering project. Students will be introduced to a team
working environment where they develop the necessary skills for planning, preparing and executing
an engineering project.

To enable the student to familiarize various tools, measuring devices, practices and different
methods of manufacturing processes employed in industry for fabricating components.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

Course
Course Outcome Description
Outcome
CO 1 Name different devices and tools used for civil engineering measurements
CO 2 Explain the use of various tools and devices for various field measurements
Demonstrate the steps involved in basic civil engineering activities like plot
CO 3 measurement, setting out operation, evaluating the natural profile of land, plumbing
and undertaking simple construction work.
Choose materials and methods required for basic civil engineering activities like field
CO 4
measurements, masonry work and plumbing.
CO 5 Compare different techniques and devices used in civil engineering measurements
Identify Basic Mechanical workshop operations in accordance with the material and
CO 6
objects
Apply appropriate Tools and Instruments with respect to the mechanical workshop
CO 7
trades
CO 8 Apply appropriate safety measures with respect to the mechanical workshop trades

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11
12
CO 1 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 - -
CO 2 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 - -
CO 3 1 - - - 1 1 - 2 2 2 1 -
CO 4 1 - - - 1 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO 5 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 1
CO 6 2
CO 7 2
CO 8 2

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 70 30 1 hour

Assessment Procedure: Total marks allotted for the course is 100 marks. CIE shall be conducted for
70 marks and ESE for 30 marks. CIE should be done for the work done by the student and also
viva voce based on the work done on each practical session. ESE shall be evaluated by written
examination of one hour duration conducted internally by the institute.

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

PART 1

CIVIL WORKSHOP

Exercise 1. Calculate the area of a built-up space and a small parcel of land- Use standard
measuring tape and digital distance measuring devices

Exercise 2. (a) Use screw gauge and vernier calliper to measure the diameter of a steel rod and
thickness of a flat bar

(b) Transfer the level from one point to another using a water level

(c) Set out a one room building with a given plan and measuring tape

Exercise 3. Find the level difference between any two points using dumpy level

Exercise 4. (a) Construct a 1 thick brick wall of 50 cm height and 60 cm length using English
bond. Use spirit level to assess the tilt of walls.

(b) Estimate the number of different types of building blocks to construct this wall.
Exercise 5. (a) Introduce the students to plumbing tools, different types of pipes, type of
connections, traps, valves ,fixtures and sanitary fittings.

(b) Install a small rainwater harvesting installation in the campus

Reference Books:

1. Khanna P.N, “Indian Practical Civil Engineering Handbook”, Engineers Publishers.

2. Bhavikatti. S, "Surveying and Levelling (Volume 1)", I.K. International Publishing House
3. Arora S.P and Bindra S.P, " Building Construction", Dhanpat Rai Publications
4. S. C. Rangwala, “Engineering Materials,” Charotar Publishing House.

PART II

MECHANICAL WORKSHOP

LIST OF EXERCISES

(Minimum EIGHT units mandatory and FIVE models from Units 2 to 8 mandatory)

UNIT 1:- General : Introduction to workshop practice, Safety precautions, Shop floor ethics, Basic
First Aid knowledge.
Study of mechanical tools, components and their applications: (a) Tools: screw drivers,
spanners, Allen keys, cutting pliers etc and accessories (b) bearings, seals, O-rings, circlips,
keys etc.
UNIT 2:- Carpentry : Understanding of carpentry tools
Minimum any one model
1. T –Lap joint 2. Cross lap joint 3. Dovetail joint 4. Mortise joints
UNIT 3:- Foundry : Understanding of foundry tools
Minimum any one model
1.Bench Molding 2. Floor Molding 3. Core making 4. Pattern making
UNIT 4: - Sheet Metal : Understanding of sheet metal working tools
Minimum any one model
1. Cylindrical shape
2. Conical shape
3. Prismatic shaped job from sheet metal
UNIT 5: - Fitting : Understanding of tools used for fitting
Minimum any one model
1. Square Joint
2. V- Joint
3. Male and female fitting
UNIT 6: - Plumbing : Understanding of plumbing tools, pipe joints
Any one exercise on joining of pipes making use of minimum three types of pipe joints

UNIT 7: - Smithy: Understanding of tools used for smithy.

 Demonstrating the forge-ability of different materials (MS, Al, alloy steel and cast steels)
in cold and hot states.
Observing the qualitative difference in the hardness of these materials
Minimum any one exercise on smithy
1. Square prism
2. Hexagonal headed bolt
3. Hexagonal prism
4. Octagonal prism

UNIT 8: -Welding: Understanding of welding equipments

Minimum any one welding practice
Making Joints using electric arc welding. bead formation in horizontal, vertical
and over head positions

UNIT 9: - Assembly: Demonstration only

Dissembling and assembling of
1. Cylinder and piston assembly
2. Tail stock assembly
3. Bicycle
4. Pump or any other machine

UNIT 10: - Machines: Demonstration and applications of the following machines

Shaping and slotting machine; Milling machine; Grinding Machine; Lathe; Drilling
Machine.
UNIT 11: - Modern manufacturing methods: Power tools, CNC machine tools, 3D printing, Glass
cutting.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No Topic No of Sessions

1 INTRODUCTION

Workshop practice, shop floor precautions, ethics and First Aid

knowledge.
1.1 Studies of mechanical tools, components and their applications: (a) 1
Tools: screw drivers, spanners, Allen keys, cutting pliers etc and
accessories (b) bearings, seals, O-rings, circlips, keys etc

2 CARPENTRY

2.1 Understanding of carpentry tools and making minimum one model 2

 3 FOUNDRY

3.1 Understanding of foundry tools and making minimum one model 2

4 SHEET METAL

Understanding of sheet metal working tools and making minimum

4.1 2
one model

5 FITTING

5.1 Understanding of fitting tools and making minimum one model 2

6 PLUMBING

Understanding of pipe joints and plumbing tools and making

6.1
minimum one model 2

7 SMITHY

7.1 Understanding of smithy tools and making minimum one model 2

8 WELDING

Understanding of welding equipments and making minimum one

8.1
model 2

9 ASSEMBLY

Demonstration of assembly and dissembling of multiple parts

9.1
components 1

10 MACHINES

10.1 Demonstration of various machines 1

11 MODERN MANUFACTURING METHODS

Demonstrations of: power tools, CNC Machine tools, 3D printing,

11.1
Glass cutting 1
ESL 130 ELECTRICAL & CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
ELECTRONICS WORKSHOP INTRODUCTION
ESC 0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: Electrical Workshop is intended to impart skills to plan and carry out simple
electrical wiring. It is essential for the practicing engineers to identify the basic practices and
safety measures in electrical wiring.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Demonstrate safety measures against electric shocks.

CO 2 Identify the tools used for electrical wiring, electrical accessories, wires, cables, batteries
and standard symbols
CO 3 Develop the connection diagram, identify the suitable accessories and materials necessary
for wiring simple lighting circuits for domestic buildings
CO 4 Identify and test various electronic components
CO 5 Draw circuit schematics with EDA tools
CO 6 Assemble and test electronic circuits on boards
CO 7 Work in a team with good interpersonal skills

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 - - - - - 3 - - - - - 1

CO 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1 - -

CO 3 2 - - 1 - 1 - 1 2 2 - 2

CO 4 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2

CO 5 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO 6 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 1

CO 7 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - 2

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

Duration(Internal)

100 100 - 1 hour

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

Syllabus

PART 1

ELECTRICAL

List of Exercises / Experiments

1. a) Demonstrate the precautionary steps adopted in case of Electrical shocks.

b)Identify different types of cables, wires, switches, fuses, fuse carriers, MCB, ELCB
and MCCB with ratings.
2. Wiring of simple light circuit for controlling light/ fan point (PVC conduit wiring)
3. Wiring of light/fan circuit using Two way switches . (Staircase wiring)
4. Wiring of Fluorescent lamps and light sockets (6A) with a power circuit for controlling power
device. (16A socket)
5. Wiring of power distribution arrangement using single phase MCB distribution board with
ELCB, main switch and Energy meter.
6. a)Identify different types of batteries with their specifications.
b)Demonstrate the Pipe and Plate Earthing Schemes using Charts/Site Visit.

PART II

ELECTRONICS

List of Exercises / Experiments (Minimum of 7 mandatory)

1. Familiarization/Identification of electronic components with specification

(Functionality, type, size, colour coding, package, symbol, cost etc. [Active, Passive,
Electrical, Electronic, Electro-mechanical, Wires, Cables, Connectors, Fuses, Switches,
Relays, Crystals, Displays, Fasteners, Heat sink etc.)
2. Drawing of electronic circuit diagrams using BIS/IEEE symbols and introduction to EDA
tools (such as Dia or XCircuit), Interpret data sheets of discrete components and IC’s,
Estimation and costing.

3. Familiarization/Application of testing instruments and commonly used tools.

[Multimeter, Function generator, Power supply, DSO etc.] [Soldering iron, De-
soldering pump, Pliers, Cutters, Wire strippers, Screw drivers, Tweezers, Crimping
tool, Hot air soldering and de- soldering station etc.]

4. Testing of electronic components [Resistor, Capacitor, Diode, Transistor and JFET

using multimeter.]

5. Inter-connection methods and soldering practice. [Bread board, Wrapping, Crimping,

Soldering - types - selection of materials and safety precautions, soldering practice in
connectors and general purpose PCB, Crimping.]

6. Printed circuit boards (PCB) [Types, Single sided, Double sided, PTH, Processing
methods, Design and fabrication of a single sided PCB for a simple circuit with manual
etching (Ferric chloride) and drilling.]
7. Assembling of electronic circuits using SMT (Surface Mount Technology) stations.
8. Assembling of electronic circuit/system on general purpose PCB, test and show the
functioning (Any Two circuits).

1. Fixed voltage power supply with transformer, rectifier diode, capacitor filter,
zener/IC regulator.

2. Square wave generation using IC 555 timer in IC base.

3. Sine wave generation using IC 741 OP-AMP in IC base.
4. RC coupled amplifier with transistor BC107.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CHT CHEMISTRY FOR PROCESS CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

201 ENGINEERING BSC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, two are devoted to Analytical Chemistry which includes the
principles, instrumentation and applications of most modern analytical techniques. By
understanding the working principles of these significant tools they can easily perform
analytical experiments. Significant topics from Physical chemistry which are very much
relevant to process engineering students are introduced in the remaining modules. After the
completion of this course, students will be able to describe adsorption isotherms,
photochemistry of chemical processes, chemical kinetics, distribution law and properties of
colloids. They also attain the skill to solve various physical chemistry problems.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Engineering Chemistry

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the principles, instrumentation and applications of advanced

electrochemical analytical tools.
CO 2 Explain the working principles, instrumentation and applications of atomic and
molecular spectroscopic techniques and Electron microscopy.
CO 3 Illustrate distribution law and apply the knowledge in solvent extraction and describe
the kinetics of different chemical processes.
CO 4 Interpret different adsorption isotherms and familiarize colloids, emulsion and
surfactants.
CO 5 Explain the basic concepts of nuclear chemistry and photochemical process and
solve decay kinetic problems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO 4 3 3 1 3 2 2
CO 5 3 3 1 2 3 3 2
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the principle and instrumentation of amperometric titration.

2. Half wave potential in a polarogram is the important characteristic of a metal ion. Justify
the statement

3. Construct a biosensor for the estimation of blood glucose. Illustrate the principle.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the principle, instrumentation and applications of Mass spectrometry.

2. XRD is a useful technique for estimating crystal parameters. Explain.

3. Describe the working principle of Scanning Electron Microscopy.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Derive Nernst distribution law.

2. The distribution co-efficient of isobutytric acid between ether and water is 3 at 25 oC. What
will be the amount of isobutyric acid removed if 4g of isobutyric acid in 100ml of water is
extracted with 100ml of ether at 25oC?

3. Derive the rate expression for the second order reaction 2AP
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Derive Langmuir adsorption isotherm.

2. Define Gibbs surface excess. Using Gibbs isotherm explain the change of surface tension
of water in the presence of NaCl and Soap.

3. Describe the mechanism of action of various surfactants.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe the factors affecting nuclear stability.

2. Derive the kinetic rate expression for the photochemical combination of hydrogen and
chlorine.

3. An archaeological specimen when subjected to carbon dating showed β-ray activity 10. A
similar sample of fresh material displayed activity 21. Calculate the age of the archaeological
sample. The half life of C-14 is 5730 years.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY THIRD SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CHT 201

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

CHEMISTRY FOR PROCESS ENGINEERING

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. What is DME? What are the advantages and disadvantages of DME?

2. Describe half wave potential in polarography. What is its significance?

3. Give the principle of Auger electron spectroscopy.

4. Bragg’s law is the backbone of this analytical tool. Identify the technique and explain
the principle.

5. The distribution co-efficient of isobutytric acid between ether and water is 3 at 25oC.
What will be the amount of isobutyric acid removed if 4g of isobutyric acid in 100ml
of water is extracted with 100ml of ether at 25oC?

6. Derive the rate expression for primary salt effect.

7. What are the limitations of Freundlich adsorption isotherm?

8. Describe the terms critical micelle concentration and micellar aggregation number.

9. Nuclear fission can be beautifully portrayed with the help of liquid drop model.
Comment.

10. Differentiate between fluorescence and phosphorescence.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) Suppose you are provided with a zinc sulphate solution of approximate
concentration 10-10M. Which analytical tool will you choose for the estimation of this
solution? Give the working principle of this technique. (7M)

b) Calculate the amount of copper deposited from copper sulphate solution if one
passes 10 A of current for 20 minutes (3M)

c) Explain various currents involved in Polarography (4M)

12. a) How potentiometry is useful for precipitation titration? Explain with an example

(7M)

b) Give the principle and any two applications of amperometric titration (7M)

Module II

13. a) A salt crystallises in the orthorhombic system with the unit cell dimensions are
a=542pm, b=917 pm and c=645 pm. Calculate the diffraction angles for first order X-
ray reflection from (100), (010) and (111) planes using X-ray with λ= 154 pm (8M)

b) Describe the principle of Scanning Electron Microscopy (6M)

14. a) Give the principle, instrumentation and applications of XPS. (7M)

b) Draw a schematic diagram of mass spectrometer and label the component. Explain
the working principle of mass spectrometry (7M)

Module -III

15. a) Define critical solution temperature? Explain phenol-water system and nicotine-
water system with diagrams (8M)

b) Derive the integrated rate expression for third order reaction of the type 3AP

(6M)

16. a) Describe four methods for the determination of order of reaction (8M)

b) In the distribution of succinic acid between ether and water at 15ºC, 20 ml of the
ethereal layer contains 0.092 g of the acid. Find out the weight of the acid present in
50 ml of the aqueous solution in equilibrium with it if the distribution coefficient for
succinic acid between water and ether is 5.2. (6M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module -IV

17. a) Derive Gibbs adsorption isotherm and explain surface excess (10M)

b) Define zeta potential? How it is determined? (4M)

18. a) Give the classification of surfactants. (8M)

b) Calculate the surface area per gram of silica gel if it adsorbs 130cm3/g of nitrogen
at 00C and at 1atm pressure (6M)

Module -V

19. a) Derive the integrated rate expression for the disintegration of radioactive substance
and calculate half life of disintegration (7M)

b) Illustrate the principle of Neutron activation analysis. Write any three applications
of it. (7M)

20. a) Calculate the age of an arheological sample showing an beta ray activity 30% when
compared to the living sample. The half life of 14C is 5760 years. (7M)

b) Derive the kinetic rate expression for the photochemical reaction between H 2 and
Cl2 ? (7M)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Electroanalytical techniques: Conductometric titrations. Potentiometry,

Polarography Dropping mercury electrode (DME), Anodic stripping voltammetry.
Amperometry, Coulometric titrations, Electrogravimetry. Electrochemical sensors.

Module 2: Spectroscopic and Surface Analytical Techniques- Mass spectrometry, Atomic

Absorption spectroscopy (AAS), Atomic Emission spectroscopy (AES), X–Ray
photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS), auger electron spectroscopy, X-Ray Diffraction Studies
(XRD), Scanning electron microscopy (SEM), scanning tunneling electron microscopy
(STM) and atomic force microscopy (AFM).

Module 3: Phase equilibrium and Chemical Kinetics- Nernst distribution law and
applications. Solvent extraction, Parke’s process. Solubility of partially miscible liquids.
Critical solution temperature. Order and molecularity of reactions- Rate expression for First,
second, third and zero order reactions, half lives, determining order of reactions- Primary Salt
effect.

Module 4: Adsorption and Surface Chemistry –Adsorption, Adsorption Isotherms –

Langmuir, Freundlich and BET, Gibbs adsorption isotherm – derivation. Colloids –,
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Protective colloids, Gold number, Zeta potential, Emulsion, Micelles- Critical micelle
concentration, Micellar catalysis. Surfactants.

Module 5: Nuclear and Photochemistry -Radioactivity, Nuclear stability,First order decay

expression, transient & secular equilibria. Nuclear reaction cross-section. Liquid drop model,
nuclear fission, Neutron activation analysis. Medical isotopes, Tracers, dating techniques,
Consequences of light absorption- Jabalonski diagram. Laws of photochemistry, Kinetics of
Hydrogen-Chlorine reaction. Chemiluminescence and bioluminescence

Text Books

1. B. R. Puri, L.R. Sharma, M.S. Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal

Publishing Co., 2013.

2. R. L. Madan and G. D. Tuli Physical Chemistry, published by S. Chand Publishing,

Edition 2016
3. A. Bahl, B. S Bhal and G D Tuli, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, S. Chand
Publishing, Edition 2010

Reference Books

1. D.A. Skoog, D.M. West, F.J. Holler, S.R. Crouch, Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry,
8th edition, Saunders College Pub., 2007.

2. H.H. Willard, L.L. Merritt Jr. J.A. Dean, F. A. Settle Jr., 7th ed., Wadsworth Publishing
Co., 1988.

3. G.R. Chatwal, S.K. Anand, Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis, 5th edition,
Himalaya, 2007.

4. W. Atkins, Physical Chemistry, OxofordUniversity Press, 10th edn., 2014

5. Thomas Engel, Philip Reid, Physical Chemistry, Pearson Education Publications 2018

6. D. Harvey, Modern analytical chemistry, McGraw-Hill, Inc. 2000.

7. J. A. C. Broekaert, Analytical Atomic Spectrometry with Flames and Plasmas, Wiley-

VCH, 2002.

8. P. Atkins, J. de Paula, Elements of Physical Chemistry, 5th edition, Oxford University

Press, 2009.

9. P. J. Gellings, H. J. M. Bouwmeester (editors), The CRC handbook of solid state

electrochemistry, CRC Press, Inc., 1996.

10. J. Wang, Analytical Electrochemistry, 2nd edition, Wiley-VCH, 2000.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Electro-analytical chemistry (9 hours)

1.1 Conductometry- principle and applications (acid-base titrations 3

and precipitation titrations). Potentiometry – Principle,
determination of equivalence points for acid–base, complexation,
redox, and precipitation titrations.

1.2 Polarography -Residual current, migration current, diffusion 2

current (Ilkovic equation) and limiting current. Half wave
potential. Dropping mercury electrode (DME). Applications of
polarogarphy.

1.3 Anodic stripping voltammetry. Amperometry. Coulometric 4

titrations. Electrogravimetry. Electrochemical sensors (Biosensors
for glucose, ethanol and urea, gas sensors for Oxygen and CO2)
2 Spectroscopic and Surface Analytical Techniques (9 hours)
2.1 Principle, instrumentation and applications of Mass spectrometry, 3
Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy (AAS) , Atomic Emission
spectroscopy (AES)
2.2 X–Ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS), Auger electron 4
spectroscopy, X-Ray Diffraction Studies (XRD).
2.3 Scanning electron microscopy (SEM), scanning tunneling electron 2
microscopy (STM) and atomic force microscopy (AFM).
3 Phase equilibrium and Chemical Kinetics (9 hours)
3.1 Nernst distribution law (thermodynamic derivation), association 3
and dissociation of solute, chemical combination of solute with
solvent. Application of Nernst distribution law, principles of
solvent extraction, Parke’s process. Numerical problems of
distribution law.
3.2 Solubility of partially miscible liquids. Critical solution 2
temperature. Phenol – water, triethylamine – water and nicotine –
water systems.
3.3 Order and molecularity of reactions- Rate expression for First, 4
second, third and zero order reactions – Half lives (Derivation and
numerical problems)- Methods for determining order of reactions-
Primary Salt effect-Derivation
4 Adsorption and Surface Chemistry (9 hours)
4.1 Adsorption- Types, Adsorption Isotherms – Langmuir, Freundlich 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

and BET equations (no derivation for BET). Determination of

surface area using BET equation. Gibbs adsorption isotherm –
derivation, Gibbs surface excess.
4.2 Colloids – classification, preparation and purification, Protective 2
colloids, Gold number, stability of colloids, Zeta potential- factors
affecting, determination of zeta potential.
4.3 Emulsion – properties and applications, Hydrophilic and 4
Lipophilic balances (HLB), Micelles- Shape and Structure,
Micellar aggregation Number, Critical micelle concentration
(CMC) and factors affecting CMC, Micellar catalysis. Surfactants
- types and uses.
5 Nuclear and Photochemistry (9 hours)
5.1 Radioactivity, types of radioactive decays. Nuclear stability-n/p 4
ratio, binding energy and Magic numbers. First order decay
expression, half life- numerical problems. Consecutive decays-
transient & secular equilibria. Nuclear reaction cross-section.
Liquid drop model of nuclear fission and fissionability parameters.
5.2 Neutron activation analysis. Medical isotopes and treatment. 2
Tracers, dating techniques, numerical problems.
5.3 Consequences of light absorption-Radiative and Non radiative 3
transitions, Jabalonski diagram- fluorescence and
phosphorescence. Laws of photochemistry, Quantum yield.
Kinetics of Hydrogen-Chlorine reaction. Chemiluminescence,
bioluminescence in fire fly.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT201 POLYMERS & POLYMERISATION CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PRINCIPLES PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first three modules are devoted to monomers and polymer
materials. Final two modules are detailed study of the polymerisation types and techniques.
After the completion of this course, students will be able to understand the basic
terminologies associated with polymer materials and the method of its manufacture. They
also attain ability to analyse various techniques and methods for polymer conversion.

Prerequisite: No prerequisite

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the structural requirement for polymerisation.

CO 2 Explain the structure- property relationship of monomers and polymers.
CO 3 Illustrate structural formula of simple plastic and rubber materials.
CO 4 Compare and correlate various polymerisation techniques.
CO 5 Explain the basic concepts of stereo-regularity, ionic polymerisation and co
polymerisation.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2 1
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 1
CO 5 3 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is meant by functionality?

2. What is the monomer?

3. Give the structure of PVC.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the principle requirements of polymerisation.

2. Conversion of monomers in stereoregular arrangement is important. Explain.

3. Describe the working principle of polymerisation reactors.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Give the structure of Styrene butadiene rubber.

2. Plastics are brittle . Why?

3. Compare thermoplastics with rubber.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain auto acceleration.

2. Define the fuctions of each ingredient in suspension polymerisation with examples .

3. Describe the mechanism of action of various surfactants.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe the factors affecting isomerism.

2. Discuss on the significance of Copolymer and their industrial uses.

3. What is living polymer. Why it is named so?

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: POT201

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POLYMERS & POLYMERISATION PRINCIPLES

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define functionality?

2. Write down the structure of monomers of polypropylene and polyvinyl chloride?

3. Give the principle of polymerisation by bulk method.

4. Define polydispersity index.

5. Describe critical miscelle concentration.

6. How is Nylon 6 polymerised?

7. What is the relation between intrinsic viscosity and relative viscosity?

8. Describe the terms critical micelle concentration and micellar aggregation number.

9. What is meant by interfacial polymerisation?

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
10. Differentiate between anionic and cationic polymerisation..

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) Explain the structural requirement for a monomer to get polymerised. Explain the
steps in polymerisation. (7M)

b) Explain the structure of monomers and polymers of the following a) PMMA b)

Polystyrene c) Polycarbonate. (3M)

c) Explain various types of polymerisation. (4M)

12. a) Explain the major advantages of polymer materials over conventional materials?
Explain with examples.

(14M)

Module II

13. a) Explain on different types of average molecular weights of polymers. (8M)

b) Describe the principle of molecular weight distribution. (6M)

14. a) Give the principle, instrumentation and applications Light scattering.

(7M)

b) Draw a schematic diagram Osmometry. Explain the working principle of

Osmometry. (7M)

Module -III

15. a) Correlate property of polyethylene with its chemical structure.

(8M)

b) Explain how structure wise Rubbers are different from Plastics.

(6M)

16. a) Describe any two methods for the determination of polymer structure. (8M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
b) What is meant by Kevlar? Why it is a significant polymer?

(6M)

Module -IV

17. a) Discuss about monomers capable of undergoing cationic polymerisation and its
mechanism. (10M)

b) Define Ziegler –Natta catalyst and its mechanisms. (4M)

18. a) Describe the mechanism and kinetics of anionic polymerisation in detail. (8M)

b) Derive Carother’s equation and mention its importants in detail. (6M)

Module -V

19. a) Discuss in detail about bulk polymerisation with suitable example and mention its
merits and demerits. (9M)

b) Illustrate the principle of solution polymerisation with an example. (5M)

20. a) Explain in detail on Emulsion polymerisation and its commercial importance. (9M)

b) Illustrate the mechanism of suspension polymerisation. (5M)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Monomers and Polymers: Definitions of monomer, repeat unit, oligomer,

polymer, degree of polymerization, representation of polymer, functionality, bi-functional
systems, poly-functional systems, polymerisability, advantages and disadvantages of
polymers.

Module 2: Molecular weight: High molecular weight of polymers, concept of averaging,

different averages in polymer molecular weight, number average, weight average, viscosity
average, z-average, MWD, polydispersity index, principles of osmotic pressure method and
viscometry.

Module 3: Polymer structure and properties: Polymer nomenclature, structure of

monomer, repeat unit and polymer of the following- polyethylene, polypropylene,
polystyrene, PVC, polyacrylonitrile, polycarbonate, PMMA, PF resin, MF resin, Nylon 6,
Nylon 66 and PET, epoxy polymer, Kevlar, natural rubber, silicone rubber.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Module 4: Types of Polymerisation : Linear step polymerisation, Carothers equation, non
linear step polymerization, Addition polymerization, Cationic polymerization, anionic
polymerization, Co-ordination polymerization, Co polymerisation, different types of
copolymers, alternating, random, block and graft copolymer, copolymerization drift,
derivation of copolymer equation.

Module 5: Polymerisation techniques: Bulk polymerisation, Solution polymerisation,

Suspension polymerization, Emulsion polymerisation, Interfacial polymerisation.

Text Books

1. A. Rudin, P. Choi, The Elements of Polymer Science and Engineering, Academic

Press, 2012
2. F. W. Billmeyer, Textbook of Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, 2007
3. L H. Sperling, Introduction to Physical Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, 2015
4. V. R. Gowariker, N. V. Viswanathan, Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Age
International, 2015

Reference Books

1. 1. S. Fakirov, Fundamentals of Polymer Science for Engineers, John Wiley &

Sons, 2017
2. Charles E. Carraher Jr., Polymer Chemistry, CRC Press, 2013
3. Robert J. Young, Introduction to Polymers, CRC Press, 2011
4. F. Rodrigues, Principles of Polymer Systems, CRC Press, 2014
5. J. M. G. Cowie, Polymers: Chemistry and Physics of Modern Materials, Nelson
Thornes Ltd, 2001

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Monomers and Polymers (9 hours)

1.1 Definitions of monomer, repeat unit, oligomer 3

1.2 Degree of polymerization, representation of polymer, 3
functionality, bi-functional systems, poly-functional systems,

1.3 Polymerisability, advantages and disadvantages of polymers. 3

2 Molecular weight (9 hours)
2.1 High molecular weight of polymers, concept of averaging 3
2.2 Different averages in polymer molecular weight, number average, 3
weight average, viscosity average, z-average
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
2.3 Molecular weight distribution, polydispersity index, osmotic 3
pressure method and viscometry.
3 Polymer structure and properties (9 hours)
3.1 Polymer nomenclature, structure of monomer, repeat unit 3
3.2 Structure of polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, PVC, 3
polyacrylonitrile, polycarbonate, PMMA, PF resin, MF resin
3.3 Nylon 6, Nylon 66 and PET, epoxy polymer, Kevlar, natural 3
rubber, silicone rubber.
4 Types of Polymerisation (9 hours)
4.1 Linear step polymerisation, Carothers equation, non linear step 3
polymerization, Addition polymerization, Cationic polymerization,
anionic polymerization.
4.2 Addition polymerization, Cationic polymerization, anionic 3
polymerization.
4.3 Different types of copolymers, alternating, random, block and 3
graft copolymer, copolymerization drift, derivation of copolymer
equation.
5 Polymerisation Techniques (9 hours)
5.1 Bulk polymerisation, solution polymerisation 4
5.2 Suspension polymerization, emulsion polymerisation 4
5.3 Interfacial polymerisation 1
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT203 POLYMER SCIENCE
PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Objective of this course is to establish fundamental principles of Polymer science in a

simple and up-front manner and to provide the broad background.This course introduces students
to basic concepts of polymer microstructures, polymer solutions, chemical reactions and
properties of polymer materials which acts as thefundamental to thecore areas of Polymer
Engineering course.
Prerequisite: Nil.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of Tg, crystallinity and polymer morphology.
CO2 Estimatethe properties of polymer solutions.
CO3 Correlate the structure of polymers and their electrical and optical properties.
CO4 Definethe reactions and degradation of polymers.
CO5 Develop polymer systems capable of resistance to various degrading agents.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 3 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 3 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 3 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 4 3 3 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 5 3 3 … … … … … … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 50
Analyze
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Understand the basic concepts of Tg, crystallinity and polymer
morphology.
1. Understand polymer structure and its features. Name various types of polymer
macrostructures and the conditions for their development.
2. What is the relation between crystallinity and Glass transition temperature?
3. Discuss the property changes occurring in polymers with temperature variation.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Estimate the properties of polymer solutions.

1. Understand Flory Huggins theory of polymer solutions.

2. Explain the significance of critical solution temperatures.
3. Correlate thermodynamic aspect of polymer miscibility.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):Correlate the structure of polymers and their electrical and optical properties.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

1. Compare the structure of polyethylene and PVC and find the reason for the difference in
their dielectric constant.
2. Polycarbonates are used for optical transparent applications. Why?
3. Certain polymer materials can be used for optical active products. What are its structural
requirements?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Define the reactions and degradation of polymers.

1. Polymer degradation is by various agents. How can it be prevented?
2. Estimate reactivity of polymer materials by hydrolysis and acidalysis.
3. Polymer oxidation can be prevented by chain breaking antioxidants. How?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Develop polymer systems capable of resistance to various degrading
agents.
1. Formulate polymer compounds capable to resist crazing.
2. UV radiations are harmful to plastics and rubbers. Explain the mechanism of degradation.
3. Continuous exposure to elevated temperature can cause degradation of plastics. Give the
processing and degradation behavior of commodity plastics.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 203
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
POLYMER SCIENCE
PART – A
Answer All the Questions(10 x 3 = 30)

1. Mention the names of different molecular weight.

2. Write the advantages and disadvantages of addition polymerisation.
3. Illustrate different types of copolymers.
4. Mention the specific examples of monomers undergoing radical polymerization..
5. Describe the types of polymer solutions.
6. State the theta condition.
7. Define miscibility in thermodynamics.
8. Write the significance of hydrolysis reaction with example.
9. Mention the methods suitable to prevent polymer degradation.
10. Point out the important features of condensation polymerization.

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. (a) Mention various methods for determination of glass transition properties of polymer
materials. Describe any one method in detail.
(b) Write short note on : 1) Degree of crystallinity
2) Thermodynamic view of glass transition.
(7+7 = 14 Marks)

OR
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

12. (a) Explain the specialities of polymer structure with special reference to molecular
motion and first order and second order transitions.
13. (b) Degree of crystallinity of polymer materials are very significant. Why? Give details of
methods used to study the degree of crystallinity of polymers. (7+7 = 14 Marks)
Module 1I
14. Explain Flory Huggins theory in detail.
OR
15. (a) Describe the importance of concentration regimes in polymer solutions.
(b) Give a note on Hildebrand approach. (8+6 = 14 Marks)

ModuleIII
16. Describe the effect of structure and additives on electrical properties of polymers.
OR
17. Write short notes on the following
a ) Transmittance and Haze in polymers (5 Marks)
b) Loss factor and its significance (5 Marks)
c) Effect of polymer structure on refractive index. (4 marks)

ModuleIV
18. Explain on the addition and substitution reactions of polymer materials.
OR
19. (a) Acidolysis and aminolysis reactions are significant in polymer systems .Why? Explain
with example.
b) Explain the various methods of polymer crosslinking reactions.(7+7 = 14 Marks)

Module V
20. Explain chain and random degradation of polymers with examples.
OR
21. (a) Explain polymer bound reagents and their significance. (5 Marks)
(b) Explain various methods to prevent polymer degradation from light, oxygen and
ozone. (9 Marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Amorphous state, molecular motion, first order and second order transitions, Tg, Tm, secondary
transitions, free volume, kinetic and thermodynamic views of glass transition, factors influencing
glass transition temperature, Crystalline state, crystal systems, unit cells, primitive cell, Bravais
lattices, polymorphism, polymer single crystals, lamellae, spherulites, supermolecular structures,
fringed micelle model, degree of crystallinity, factors affecting crystallinity, X-ray diffraction.

Module 2
Polymer solutions, terms and definitions, types of solutions, Hildebrand approach, Flory-
Huggins theory, thermodynamic view of miscibility, upper critical solution temperature (UCST),
lower critical solution temperature (LCST), concentration regimes in polymer solutions, theta
conditions.

Module 3
Effect of polymer structure on dielectric constant, capacitance, dielectric loss, power factor,
dissipation factor and loss factor, prediction of molar polarization and effective dipole moment,
effect of additives on electrical properties of polymers, effect of polymerstructure on optical
properties, clarity, transparency, haze, transmittance, reflectance, gloss, prediction of refractive
indices of polymers by group contributions.

Module 4
Chemical reactivity of linear and crosslinked polymers, hydrolysis, acidolysis, aminolysis,
hydrogenation, addition and substitution reactions, cross linking reactions, reactivity of
functional groups.

Module 5
Polymer analogous reactions, polymer bound reagents, chain end and random degradation,
degradation by oxygen, ozone, heat, UV light, microorganism, crazing, weathering, stabilisation
to prevent degradation.

Text Books:
1. Paul C. Painter, M.M. Coleman, Essentials of Polymer Science and Engineering,
DEStech Publications, Inc, 2008
2. U.W. Gedde, Polymer Physics, Springer Science & Business Media, 2013
3. J. E. Mark (Ed.), Physical Properties of Polymers Handbook, Springer, 2007
4. I. M. Ward, J. Sweeney, An Introduction to the Mechanical Properties of Solid Polymers.
John Wiley & Sons, 2005

Reference Books:
1. “D.W. V. Krevelen, K. Nijenhuis, Properties of Polymers, Elsevier, 2009
2. J. Bicerano, Prediction of Polymer Properties, CRC Press, 2002
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

1. D. A. Seanor, Electrical Properties of Polymers, Elsevier, 2013

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 10
Amorphous state, molecular motion, first order and second order
1.1 2
transitions, Tg, Tm, secondary transitions
Free volume, kinetic and thermodynamic views of glass transition,
1.2 3
factors influencing glass transition temperature,
Crystalline state, crystal systems, unit cells, primitive cell, Bravais
1.3 lattices, polymorphism, polymer single crystals, lamellae, spherulites, 3
supermolecular structures, fringed micelle model
1.4 Degree of crystallinity, factors affecting crystallinity, X-ray diffraction 2
2 Module II 9

2.1 Polymer solutions, terms and definitions, types of solutions 3

Hildebrand approach, Flory-Huggins theory, thermodynamic view of

2.2 2
miscibility
Upper critical solution temperature (UCST), lower critical solution
2.3 2
temperature (LCST),
2.4 Concentration regimes in polymer solutions, theta conditions 2
3 Module III 9
3.1 Effect of polymer structure on dielectric constant, capacitance 1
Polymer structure and dielectric loss, power factor, dissipation factor and
3.2 3
loss factor, prediction of molar polarization and effective dipole moment
Effect of additives on electrical properties of polymers, effect of polymer
3.3 3
structure on optical properties
Clarity, transparency, haze, transmittance, reflectance, gloss, prediction
3.4 2
of refractive indices of polymers by group contribution
4 Module IV 9
4.1 Chemical reactivity of linear and crosslinked polymers, hydrolysis 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Acidolysis, aminolysis, hydrogenation, addition and substitution

4.2 3
reactions,.

4.3 Cross linking reactions, reactivity of functional groups 3

5 Module V 8

5.1 Polymer analogous reactions, polymer bound reagents 3

Chain end and random degradation, degradation by oxygen, ozone, heat,

5.2 4
UV light, microorganism, crazing, weathering

5.3 Stabilizers to prevent degradation 1

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POL201 CHEMISTRY LAB
PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble:The chemistry lab ids designed to impart skills in organic synthesis and analytical
methods.

Prerequisite: Basic Engineering Chemistry.

Course Outcomes:After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse and estimate parameters for synthesis of organic materials.

CO 2 Develop skilltouse analytical and chemical methods to purify organic compounds.

CO 3 Develop skills of accuracy in estimating organic compounds and mixtures.

CO 4 Evaluate the characteristic features of organic mixtures.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 3 3
1
CO 3 3
2
CO 2 2 1
3
CO 2 1
4

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern

The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference :25 Marks
(d) Viva voce :20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions: Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second

series test covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be
conducted under the equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The
number of candidates evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for
the University examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external
examiner shall endorse the record.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Perform the experiment for benzoylation of phenol.

2. Conduct the experiment to purify organic compound by fractionation.

3. Determine the components of binary organic mixture.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1.Calculate the level of nitration of aromatic compounds.
2. Estimate the extend of purification obtained by chromatographic process.
3. Estimate the liquid –liquid extraction of the given organic mixture.
Course Outcome 3(CO3):
1. Mention the experiment to determine the average molecular weight of an oil sample,
2. Estimate the purity of the given organic liquid.
3. Design the separation method of given azeotropic mixture.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Evaluate the properties of given organic mixture.
2.Analysing the interpretationof fractionation methods and process.
3.Calculate experimental data, results of organic chemical synthesis.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

List of Experiments:

A. Organic synthesis
1. Synthesis of ethyl n- butyl acetoacetate by the acetoacetic ester condensation
2. Synthesis of 3-nitrobenzoic acid from benzoic acid
3. Nitration of aromatic hydrocarbons.
4. Side chain oxidation of aromatic hydrocarbons.
5. Benzoylation of phenols.
6. Preparation of solid esters.
7. Bromination of amines

B. Purification and characterization of organic compounds

Purification of organic compounds by fractionation
crystallization,chromatography.

C. Separation of the components of a binary organic mixture

Liquid-liquid, liquid-solid and solid-solid

D. Identify the components of the given binary mixture

Reference Books

1. S.Mumtazuddin, Organic Chemistry: a Laboratory Manuel, Alpha Science

International, 2013
2. A. O. Thomas, Practical Chemistry, Scientific Book Centre, 2003
3. W. J. Criddle, Qualitative Organic Chemical Analysis, Springer, 2013
4. V.K. Ahluwalia, S. Dhingra, Comprehensive Practical Organic Chemistry: Qualitative
Analysis, Universities Press, 2004
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POL203 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING LAB
PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: This lab is intended the make the students’ familiar with the basics of Computer
Aided Design and Drafting and how it is used for geometric modelling and analysis.

Prerequisite : Exposure to Geometrical Drawing, Sections of solids.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse different software used to create and manipulate geometric models.

CO 2 Develop skill to model different shapes using the design tools in CAD software.
CO 3 Develop 3Dgeometricmodelsofmachinecomponents.

CO 4 Creating Orthographic projection drawings.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 3
1
CO 3
2
CO 2 1
3
CO 3
4

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
End Semester Examination Pattern
The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of CAD tools) :25 Marks
(d) Viva voce :20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions: Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second

series test covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be
conducted under the equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The
number of candidates evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for
the University examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external
examiner shall endorse the record.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. How to create CAD files for two dimensional drawings .

2. Conduct the experiment to draw simple geometrical structures with CAD commands.

3. Determine the co-ordinate systems with commands for various views.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1.Find the different methods for dimensioning CAD drawings.
2. Determine the tools to be used in modifying a CAD drawing with commands.
3. Estimate the CAD drawings in various layers and compare the features.
Course Outcome 3(CO3):
1. Preparation of cube and cone using CAD commands.
2. Determine the tools to be used in modifying solid models and projections.
3. Analyse 3D models and compare their volumes.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Evaluating the experimentation of orthographic projection of simple structures.
2.Analysing the orthographic projection with various views and dimensioning them.
3. Reporting of CAD drawings for product design.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
List of Experiments

1. Creation of CAD files.

2. Drawing of lines and other simple geometrical features with various CAD commands.

3. Drawing of different layers with co-ordionate systems and Grid, Snap, Ortho, Object
snap, dynamic input.

4. Draw commands: line, circle, arc, ellipse, rectangle, polygon, spline, polyline.

5. Modify commands: erase, copy, move, rotate, scale, offset, mirror, fillet, trim, extend,
etc.

6. Annotation: Dimensioning, Text, Leaders, Tables.

7. Creating Orthographic projection drawings (Front view, Top view, Side view) of
various components from given Isometric view.

8. Drawing with 3D commands , Multi-view drawing environment.

9. Prepare 3D models like cone, cube, wedge etc. by extruding simple 2D objects.

10.World and User Coordinate systems ,dimension and name of objects.

Reference Books

1. IbrahimZeid(2004).MasteringCAD/CAM.McGraw-HillEducation.

2. JamesD.Bethune(2008).EngineeringGraphicswithAutoCAD2009.PeachpitPress.

3. ShamTickoo(2011).SolidWorks2011forDesigners.CADCIMTechnologies.

4. GerogeOmura(2011).MasteringAutoCAD2012andAutoCADLT2012.Wiley.

.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -4
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CHT CHEMICAL ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

202 PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

This course aims to impart the basic concepts of Classical Thermodynamics. It covers the laws of
Thermodynamics and their applications to open and closed systems and property relations for pure
substances and solutions. Concepts of Ideal and Non ideal solutions, Phase equilibrium with special
emphasis to Vapour Liquid Equilibria, Activity coefficient models and Chemical Reaction Equilibria
are also covered. The major focus is to build a strong foundation in the subject and to familiarise
with the applications of thermodynamic principles in chemical engineering problems.

Prerequisite: Knowledge of fundamental Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply the laws of thermodynamics to analyse various processes

CO 2 Define thermodynamic properties and processes of a system

CO 3 Relate various thermodynamic properties to easily measurable properties

CO 4 Calculate the change in properties when given substances are mixed under specified
conditions

CO 5 Construct phase diagrams and Explain VLE of completely miscible, partially miscible and
immiscible liquids

CO 6 Evaluate equilibrium constant, composition and degrees of freedom for reactions taking
place in a given mixture of components at given conditions of temperature and pressure

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 3
CO 2 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO 5 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO 6 3 3 3 3 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the application of the Zeroth law of thermodynamics in temperature measurement

2. Develop expression for maximum velocity of fluid flow through a horizontal pipe.

3. Explain the application of the Third law of thermodynamics with suitable example.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Differentiate between intensive properties and extensive properties with suitable examples

2. Define primary properties and energy properties

3. Differentiate between reversible and irreversible processes

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Derive the fundamental property relations

2. Derive Clausius- Clapeyron equation from fundamental property relations

3. Derive expression for Joule-Thomson coefficient in terms of measurable properties

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Define partial molar properties.

2. Define chemical potential.

3. Define excess properties.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Illustrate VLE for completely miscible system with the help of a neat phase diagram.

2. Explain with a neat phase diagram the VLLE in a partially miscible system

3. Explain the vapour liquid equilibria in a system of two immiscible liquids

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Explain the different methods of determination of equilibrium constant of a given reaction

2. Derive the effect of temperature on equilibrium constant

3. Obtain the degrees of freedom of gaseous system containing CO, CO2, N2, O2 and CH4
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:4

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE

EXAMINATION,

MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CHT202

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

CHEMICAL ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS

(2019-Scheme)

Part A
(Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 Marks)
1. Comment on the limitations of first law of thermodynamics with suitable
examples.
2. Deduce Raoult’s law from Lewis Randall rule.
3. Give any three Maxwell’s equations.
4. Estimate the approximate pressure at which a boiler is to be operated if it is
desired to boil water at 150oC. Assume that no other data is available except
that water boils at 100oC at 0.10133 MPa with the enthalpy of vaporization
being 2256.94 kJ/kg.
5. List any three applications of Gibbs-Duhem equation.
6. Give the criterion of stability for a binary mixture.
7. State Duhem’s Theorem. Give the number of independent extensive variables
required to completely define the state of a closed system with benzene and its
vapour in equilibrium.
8. Define excess property. List the circumstance under which the property
change of mixing and the excess properties are identical.
9. Water vapour decomposed according to the following reaction:
H2O  H2 + ½ O2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Derive the expression for the mole fraction of each species in terms of the
extent of reaction assuming that the system contained moles of water
vapour initially.
10. Determine the degrees of freedom for a system prepared by partially
decomposing CaCO3 into an evacuated space.
(10 × 3 = 30 marks)

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)
Module - I
11. a. Water at 90°C flowing at the rate of 2 kg/s mixes adiabatically with (8)
another stream at 30°C flowing at the rate of 1 kg/s. Estimate the rate of
entropy generation and rate of energy loss due to mixing. Take T0 = 300 K.
b. Water flows through a horizontal coil heated from outside. During its (6)
passage, it changes state from liquid at 200 kPa and 80oC to vapor at 100
kPa and 125oC. The entering and exit velocities are 3 m/s and 200 m/s
respectively. Determine the heat transferred through the coil per unit mass
of water. Hinlet = 334.9 kJ/kg; Houtlet = 2726 kJ/kg.
12. a. An ideal gas undergoes the following sequence of mechanically reversible (10)
processes in a closed system:
a). From an initial state of 70oC and 1 bar, it is compressed adiabatically to
150oC.
b). It is then cooled from 150oC to 70oC at constant pressure.
c). Finally, it is expanded isothermally to its original state.
Calculate W, Q, ∆U and ∆H for each of the three processes and for the
entire cycle. Take Cv = (3/2)R and Cp =(5/2)R.
b. State and prove the Clausius inequality. (4)
Module - II
13. a. Derive expressions to show the effect of temperature and pressure on (7)
fugacity.
b. The volume coefficient of expansion of water at 373 K is 7.8 × 10-4 K-1. (7)
Calculate the change in entropy when the pressure is increased from 1 bar
to 100 bar. At 373 K, density of water is 958 kg/m3.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

14. a. Using Redlich-Kwong equation determine the molal volumes of saturated (10)
liquid and saturated vapour of toluene at 300 K. The saturation pressure of
methyl chloride at 300 K is 2 bar. The critical temperature and pressure are
respectively 591.8 K and 41.09 bar.
b. Illustrate the Pressure –Temperature diagram for a pure material. (4)

Module - III
15. a. Derive coexistence equation from Gibbs-Duhem equation. List the major (9)
applications of coexistence equation.
b. The need arises in a laboratory for 2000 cm3 of an antifreeze solution (5)
consisting of 30 mol % methanol in water. Determine the volumes of pure
methanol and pure water at 25oC to be mixed to form 2000 cm3 of
antifreeze at 25oC. Partial molar volumes of methanol and water in a 30
mol % methanol solution and their pure-species molar volumes, both at
25oC are
Methanol: 1 = 38.632 cm3 mol-1 ; 1 = 40.727 cm3 mol-1
Water : 2 = 17.765 cm3 mol-1 ; 2 = 18.068 cm3 mol-1
16. a. Explain the effect of pressure and temperature on activity coefficient. (9)
b. Show that for equilibrium between phases of a pure substance, the (5)
fugacities in both phases should be equal.

Module - IV
17. a. The azeotrope of the n-propanol-water system has a composition 56.83% (9)
water with a boiling point of 360.9 K at a pressure of 101.3 kPa. At this
temperature, the vapour pressures of water and propanol respectively are
64.25 kPa and 60.7 kPa. Evaluate the activity coefficients for a solution
containing 20% water through the Van Laar equations.
b. Explain the principle steam distillation. (5)
18. a. A mixture contains 35% (mol) methanol (A), 40% ethanol (B) and the rest (14)
n-propanol (C). The liquid solution may be assumed to be ideal and perfect
gas law is valid for the vapour phase. Calculate the bubble point and
vapour composition at a total pressure of 101.3 kPa.
The vapour pressures of the pure liquids are given below:
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Temp. K 333 343 353 363

PA, kPa 81.97 133.29 186.61 266.58
PB, kPa 49.32 73.31 106.63 166.61
PC, kPa 39.32 62.65 93.30 133.29

Module - V
19. a. The reaction is N2(g) + O2 (g)  2 NO (g) is carried out at 2700oC and (10)
2025 kPa. The reaction mixture initially comprises of 25 mol% oxygen, 65
mol% nitrogen and the rest an inert gas. The standard Gibbs free energy
change for the reaction is 113.83 kJ/mol at the given conditions. Calculate
the partial pressures of all species in the equilibrium reaction mixture.
Make suitable assumptions, if required.
b. Derive the relation between conversion and extent of reaction. (4)
20. a. Estimate the equilibrium constant Ka at 1000K and 0.1 MPa for the (14)
reaction
CO2(g) + H2(g)  CO(g) +H2O(g)
taking into account the variation of ∆H0 with temperature.
Given: Ka at 298.15 is 8.685 × 10-6
, is in J/mol K and is in K

Compound

CO2 45.369 8.688 - - -9.619

CO 28.068 4.631 - - -0.258
H2 O 28.850 12.055 - - 1.006
H2 27.012 3.509 - - 0.690

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Scope of Thermodynamics, Thermodynamic Systems - closed, open and isolated system, intensive
and extensive properties, path and state functions, reversible and irreversible process, Zeroth law of
Thermodynamics, First Law of Thermodynamics - Energy Balance for Closed Systems, Limitations of
First Law, Second Law of Thermodynamics – Carnot’s principles - definition of entropy - calculation
of entropy change in processes involving ideal gases, Third law of Thermodynamics, Energy balance
of open systems - flow through pipe, nozzles, compressors.

Module 2

P-V and P-T diagram of pure substances, Equations of state for real gases - van der Waal’s, Redlich
Kwong, Peng Robinson and Virial equations, Principle of corresponding states and generalized
compressibility chart, Fundamental property relations, Maxwell’s Equations, Clausius-Clapeyron
equation, Entropy-heat capacity relationships - equations for entropy, internal energy and enthalpy
in terms of measurable quantities, Joule-Thomson coefficient, Gibbs Helmholtz equation, Fugacity
and activity of pure fluids - selection of standard state, effect of temperature and pressure on
fugacity and activity, Concept of Residual properties

Module 3

Definition of partial molar properties and chemical potential, Fugacity in solution, Ideal solution-
Lewis-Randall rule - Raoult’s law, Henry’s law, Activity in solutions, Activity coefficient - effect of
temperature and pressure on activity coefficient - Gibbs-Duhem equations, Property change of
mixing, excess properties.

Criterion of phase equilibria - phase equilibrium in single component systems - phase equilibria in
multicomponent systems - criterion of stability

Module 4

Phase rule for non-reacting systems, Duhem’s theorem, Vapour-liquid equilibrium- phase diagram
for binary solutions- VLE in ideal solutions- non-ideal solutions- positive and negative deviation-
azeotropes- VLE at low pressures

Activity coefficient models - Wohl’s equation - Margules equation - van Laar equation - Wilson
equation - NRTL, UNIQUAC and UNIFAC models (General concepts only). Equations of VLE at high
pressures. Definition of vaporisation equilibrium constant. bubble point, dew point and flash
Calculations in multi component systems (derivations only). Phase diagrams of VLLE in partially
miscible and immiscible.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module 5

Chemical reaction equilibria - extent of reaction - equilibrium constant - standard free energy change -
feasibility of reaction - effect of temperature on equilibrium constant – evaluation of equilibrium
constant, Equilibrium conversion in gas-phase reactions, Effect of pressure and other parameters on
conversion, Simultaneous reactions, Phase-rule for reacting systems

Text Books

1. Smith J. M. & Van Ness H.V., Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, 8 th Edn,
McGraw Hill, 2018.

2. Narayanan K. V., A Textbook of Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, 2nd Edn., Prentice-

Hall of India, 2013.

Reference Books

1. Stanley I. Sandler, Chemical and Engineering Thermodynamics, 2nd Edn., John Wiley &
Sons,USA, 1989

2. Kyle B.G., Chemical and Process Thermodynamics, 3rd Edn, Prentice-Hall, 1999

3. Y.V.C. Rao, Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, Universities Press, 1997

4. Milo D. Koretsky, Engineering and Chemical Thermodynamics, 2nd Edn, Wiley, 2012

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Scope of Thermodynamics (10 hours)
1.1 Thermodynamic Systems: Closed, open and isolated system, intensive 2
and extensive properties, path and state functions, reversible and
irreversible process
1.2 Laws of Thermodynamics: Zeroth law of Thermodynamics, First Law of 2
Thermodynamics- Energy Balance for Closed Systems, Limitations of
First Law
1.3 Second Law of Thermodynamics-Carnot’s principles- definition of 3
entropy-calculation of entropy change in processes involving ideal
gases.
1.4 Third law of Thermodynamics, Energy balance of open systems-flow 3
through pipe, nozzles, compressors.
2 Thermodynamic properties (10 hours)
2.1 P-V and P-T diagram of pure substances, 1
2.2 Equations of state for real gases- van der Waal’s, Redlich Kwong, Peng 2
Robinson and Virial equations, Principle of corresponding states and
generalized compressibility chart
2.3 Fundamental property relations, Maxwell’s Equations, Clausius- 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Clapeyron equation, Entropy- heat capacity relationships-

2.4 Equations for entropy, internal energy and enthalpy in terms of 2
measurable quantities, Joule-Thomson coefficient, Gibbs Helmholtz
equation,
2.5 Fugacity and activity of pure fluids- selection of standard state, effect of 3
temperature and pressure on fugacity and activity, Concept of Residual
properties

3 Solution Thermodynamics (8 hours)

3.1 Definition of partial molar properties and chemical potential, Fugacity 2
in solution.

3.2 Ideal solution- Lewis-Randall rule- Raoult’s law, Henry’s law, Activity in 3
solutions, Activity coefficient- effect of temperature and pressure on
activity coefficient- Gibbs-Duhem equations

3.3 Property change of mixing, excess properties. 3

Criterion of phase equilibria - phase equilibrium in single component
systems - phase equilibria in multicomponent systems - criterion of
stability.

4 Vapour-liquid equilibrium (9 hours)

4.1 Phase rule for non-reacting systems, Duhem’s theorem. 1
4.2 Vapour-liquid equilibrium- phase diagram for binary solutions- VLE in 1
ideal solutions.
4.3 non-ideal solutions- positive and negative deviation- azeotropes- 2
4.4 VLE at low pressures. Activity coefficient models- Wohl’s equation- 2
Margules equation- van Laar equation- Wilson equation- NRTL,
UNIQUAC and UNIFAC models (General concepts only).
4.5 Equations of VLE at high pressures. Definition of vaporisation 3
equilibrium constant, bubble point, dew point and flash
calculations in multi component systems. Phase diagrams of VLLE in
partially miscible and immiscible systems.
5 Chemical reaction equilibria (8 hours)
5.1 Chemical reaction equilibria- extent of reaction- equilibrium constant - 2
standard free energy change - feasibility of reaction -
5.2 Effect of temperature on equilibrium constant– evaluation of equilibrium 2
constant,
5.3 Equilibrium conversion in gas-phase reactions, Effect of pressure and 2
other parameters on conversion,
5.4 Simultaneous reactions, Phase-rule for reacting systems 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT202 POLYMER PHYSICS
PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: In Polymer Physics, the first priority is given to understand the basics of polymer
properties in elasticity and viscosity, and flow and deformation. Significant topics from
mathematical modelling, superposition principle and long term properties are included in the
third and fourth module. Final part of this paper deals with the specialities of rubber
elasticity. After the completion of this course, students will be able to describe physical
properties and its implications on long term properties of polymers through time- temperature
relations and WLF equations along with elasticity properties of rubbers. They also attain the
analyse to solve various polymer material’s long term properties.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Engineering Chemistry

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Summarise the behaviour of polymers at different loading and temperature

conditions.
CO 2 Explain the representations and equations of Maxwell’s , Voigt’s and Kelvin’s
models.
CO 3 Illustrate WLF law and apply the knowledge in time –temperature properties and
describe the long term properties.
CO 4 Compare creep and stress relaxation behaviour of plastics and rubbers.
CO 5 Explain the basic concepts of rubber elasticity and describe Gough-Joule effect.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 1 1
CO 2 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 3 1 3 1
CO 5 3 3 1 2 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the principle of short term and long term behaviour.

2. Contrast behaviour of plastics with rubbers.

3. Identify applications where long term behaviour of polymers play a crucial role.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the principle of stress relaxation as per Voigt’s model.

2. Permanent deformation and viscoelasticity are related. Explain.

3. Molecular movement is significant in creep. How?

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Derive WLF equation.

2. Reference temperature of the sample and Glass transition temperature are significant in
long term behaviour. Why ?

3. Explain time –temperature superposition principle.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
1. Strain rate can vary polymer properties. How?

2. Define stress-strain curves of plastics, fibres and rubbers.

3. Compare generalised creep curves and creep modulus curves.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe the significance of rubber elasticity.

2. Summarise how rubber elasticity is affected by temperature.

3. Explain Gough- Joule effect.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY THIRD SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: POT 202

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POLYMER PHYSICS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. What is True strain? What are its differences with Engineering strain?

2. Describe Voigt model. What is its significance?

3. Give the principle of time temperature superposition.

4. Gough-Joule effect is critical feature in rubber elasticity. Why?

5. What is meant by energy driven elasticity and entropy driven elasticity?

6. Derive the expression for Hook’s law.

7. What are the limitations of WLF equation?

8. Describe the terms Elastic solid and viscous fluid.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
9. Polymers exhibit longterm properties. Comment.

10. Differentiate between tensile and bulk modulus.

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) What is the significance of Youngs Modulus. (7M)

b) Compare dynamic loading and static loading. (3M)

c) Relate bulk modulus and Poisson’s ratio. (4M)

12. a) How stress strain curves are useful in determining physical properties of polymers?
Explain with example (6M)

b) Compare yielding and cracking of plastic samples subjected to flexing.

(4M)

c) Molecular flexibility and heat build up are related. How? (4M)

Module II

13. a) Define psuedoplasticity and dilatancy in rheology. (4M)

b) Describe the principle of Power law. (5M)

c) Explain how the long term properties are related to structure of polymer materials?
(5M)

14. a) Give the significance of Non Newtonian behaviours in plastic processing.

(7M)

b) Explain the factors that contribute towards the rheological behaviour of polymers
(7M)

Module -III

15. a) Define Stress relaxation. Explain its relation to long term application of polymers.
(6M)

b) What is dynamic loading? Give details of polymer properties affected by dynamic

loading.

(8M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
16. a) With necessary figures explain Dynamic Mechanical Analysis of polymer samples.
(8M)

b) Explain various factors affecting polymer viscoelasticity.

(6M)

Module -IV

17. a) Derive governing equation for Maxwell’s model (8M)

b) Define Deborah number? How it is determined? Explain its significance.

(6M)

18. a) Give the significance and features of WLF equation and explain how it is useful in
predicting polymer properties. (8M)

b) Calculate Derive the governing equation for Voigt model in determining stress
relaxation. (6M)

Module -V

19. a) Derive the equations to find the thermodynamics of rubber elasticity.

(7M)

b) Write a short note on rubber elasticity and its specialities.

(7M)

20. a) Explain on the various requirements for a material to exhibit rubber like properties.
(5M)

b) How glass transition and rubber properties are related. (4M)

b) Explain the differences in elasticity of metals and rubbers.

(5M)

..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Syllabus

Module 1: Elasticity & Viscosity : Stress – engineering stress, true stress. Strain –
engineering strain, true strain. Modulus- Young’s modulus, shear modulus, bulk modulus,
compliance, Poisson’s ratio, elastic solid, Hooke’s Law, viscous fluid, Newton’s law, Static
loading and dynamic loading, differences between elastic solid and viscous fluid.

Module 2: Rheology: Newtonian fluids and non- Newtonian fluids, Power law, shear rate
dependent fluids- psuedoplasticity, dilatancy. Time dependent fluids – thixotropy, rheopexy.

Module 3: Viscoelastic Materials: Short Term, Long Term and Dynamic Properties:
Viscoelastic materials, properties of viscoelastic materials, factors affecting
viscoelasticity. Short-term properties: stress-strain curves, stress-strain curve of a typical
plastic, comparison of the stress-strain curves for plastic, rubber and fibre, hysteresis. Long-
term properties: creep, stress relaxation. Dynamic properties: behavior of elastic solids,
viscous fluids and viscoelastic materials under dynamic loading, dynamic mechanical
analysis (DMA), storage modulus, loss modulus, tan δ, damping.

Module 4: Mechanical Models and Superposition Principle:

Spring, dashpot, Maxwell model, Voigt model, Derivation of the following equations:
Governing equation for Maxwell model, Equation for Maxwell model under creep, Equation
for Maxwell model under stress relaxation, Governing equation for Voigt model, Equation
for Voigt model under creep, Equation for Voigt model under stress relaxation, Maxwell-
Wiechert model, Burgers model, Deborah number. Basis of Time-Temperature
superposition principle, WLF equation.

Module 5: Rubber Elasticity: Rubber elasticity, Molecular requirements of rubber-like

elasticity, Gough-Joule effect, Thermoelastic experiment, difference in the elasticity of
metals and rubbers, energy driven elasticity, entropy driven elasticity, thermodynamics of
rubber elasticity.

Text Books

1. B. R. Puri, L.R. Sharma, M.S. Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal

Publishing Co., 2013.

2. R. L. Madan and G. D. Tuli Physical Chemistry, published by S. Chand Publishing,

Edition 2016
3. A. Bahl, B. S Bhal and G D Tuli, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, S. Chand
Publishing, Edition 2010

Reference Books

1. David J. Williams (1978). Polymer Science and Engineering. Maclaren & Sons.
2. H. F. Haufman & J. J. Falcetta (1997). Introduction to Polymer Science and
Technology. John Wiley & Sons.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
3. John D. Ferry (1980). Viscoelastic Properties of Polymers (3rd ed.). John Wiley &
Sons.
4. R. J. Samuels (1974). Structured Polymer Properties. John Wiley & Sons.
5. J. A. Brydson (1981). Flow Properties of Polymer Melts. George Godwin Ltd.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Elasticity & Viscosity : (9 hours)

1.1 Stress – engineering stress, true stress. Strain – engineering strain, 4

true strain. Modulus- Young’s modulus, shear modulus, bulk
modulus, compliance, Poisson’s ratio.
1.2 Elastic solid, Hooke’s Law, viscous fluid, Newton’s law. 2
1.3 Static loading and dynamic loading, differences between elastic 3
solid and viscous fluid.
2 Rheology: (7 hours)
2.1 Newtonian fluids and non- Newtonian fluids. 3
2.2 Power law, shear rate dependent fluids- psuedoplasticity, 2
dilatancy.
2.3 Time dependent fluids – thixotropy, rheopexy. 2
3 Viscoelastic Materials: Short Term, Long Term and Dynamic Properties (10
Hrs)
3.1 Viscoelastic materials, properties of viscoelastic 3
materials, factors affecting viscoelasticity.
3.2 Short-term properties: stress-strain curves, tangent modulus, 2
secant modulus, elastic limit, yielding, stress-strain curve of a
typical plastic, comparison of the stress-strain curves for plastic,
rubber and fibre, hysteresis.
3.3 Long-term properties: creep, stress relaxation. 2
3.4 Dynamic properties: behavior of elastic solids, viscous fluids
and viscoelastic materials under dynamic loading, dynamic 3
mechanical analysis (DMA), storage modulus, loss modulus, tan
δ, damping.
4 Mechanical Models and Superposition Principle: (9 Hrs)

4.1 Spring, dashpot, Maxwell model, Voigt model. 2

4.2 Derivation of the following equations: Governing equation for 3
Maxwell model, Equation for Maxwell model under creep,
Equation for Maxwell model under stress relaxation, Governing
equation for Voigt model.
4.3 Equation for Voigt model under creep, Equation for Voigt model 4
under stress relaxation, Maxwell-Wiechert model, Burgers
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
model, Deborah number. Basis of Time-Temperature
superposition principle, WLF equation.
5 Rubber Elasticity: (9 hours)
5.1 Rubber elasticity, Molecular requirements of rubber-like elasticity, 3
Gough-Joule effect.
5.2 Thermoelastic experiment, difference in the elasticity of metals 2
and rubbers.
5.3 Energy driven elasticity, entropy driven elasticity, 4
thermodynamics of rubber elasticity.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT204 LATEX TECHNOLOGY
PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first one is the detailed study of composition, features and
concentration methods of Natural rubber latex. Second module deals with the specification
tests of latex along with preparation of emulsions and dispersions to compound latex.
Significant topics from latex product manufacture is included in the remaining modules.
After the completion of this course, students will be able to understand properties of latex and
methods of latex product manufacture. They also attain the skill to formulate various
compounds and recipe for latex products.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials and Polymer science.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the principles, instrumentation and applications of latex concentration.

CO 2 Explain the significance and methods of latex specification tests and various grades
of NR latex.
CO 3 Illustrate different latex product manufacture techniques and formulate compounds
for the same.
CO 4 Compare and contrast between various latex product manufacture methods and the
significant steps involved in each.
CO 5 Explain the significance safety aspects in latex processing. Also how production and
processing of NR latex affects the economy of Kerala.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 2
CO 2 3 3 2 1
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO 4 3 3 1 1
CO 5 2 2 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the principle and instrumentation of latex centrifugation.

2. Latex concentration by creaming is not industrially used. Comment on this statement

3.Natural Rubber Latex concentration is advised for latex product manufacture. Why?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the significance of VFA content of latex?

2. What is the significance of magnesium content of latex. Explain.

3. Comment on the various technical specification parameters used for latex classification.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Give an account of various types of coacervants used for latex dipping.

2.Explain the method of preparation of suspension for latex compounds?

3. Formulate latex compound for rubber band.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Prepare latex formulation for surgical gloves.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
2. Understand the various methods of latex foam manufacture.

3. Plan the production line of latex thread manufacture.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Estimate DRC and productivity of rubber plantation in kerala.

2. Ammonia preservative is commonly used as de-ammoniation is easy. How de-

ammoniation is performed in latex concentrates.

3.Explain the safety measures to be followed in latex processing.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY THIRD SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

CODE:POT204

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

LATEX TECHNOLOGY

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define Brownian movement in Natural Rubber Latex?

2. Describe latex compounding. What is its significance?

3. Give the principle of latex concentration.

4. Centrifugation is a globally accepted method in latex procesing. explain its theory.

5. How can you find the MST of a latex sample?

6. Differentiate spreading and impregnation.

7. What are the limitations and advantages of gelling systems?

8. Describe the terms involved in carpet backing.

9. VFA can be controlled. How?

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
10. Detail how Oaks mixture are used?

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) Suppose you are provided with a natural rubber field latex. How can you
determine the amount and type of preservatives required for latex?
(9M)

b) How can you evaluate Zeta potential and molecular movement of latex particles

(5M)

12. a) Explain various types of latex preservation methods.

(9M)

b) Give formulations of Low ammonia latex preservation systems. (5M)

Module II

13. a) With suitable diagram explain methods used for preparation of dispersion and
emulsion with one example each. (8M)

b) Describe the principle of latex prevulcunisation. (6M)

14. a) Suppose you are provided with a natural rubber latex of unknown DRC. Which
analytical tool will you choose for the estimation of DRC? Give the working principle
of this technique. (9M)

b) How can you calculate the non rubber content of a latex.

(5M)

15. Module -III

16. a) Compare the formulations of gloves used for household and surgical applications.
Justify the selection of ingredients. (8M)

b) Give formulations of rubber balloons and justify the compounding ingredients and
their quantity.
(6M)

17. a) Describe any three after treatment process in latex dipping with significance of
each. (6M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
b) Explain various dipping methods in detail.
(8M)

Module -IV

18. a) Describe the significant products made from of rubber-textile composites with any
two examples. (6M)

b) Explain the formulation for NR latex adhesives? (4M)

c) Latex foam manufacture requires special additives. Give the names and purposes of
special additives used in foam manufacture. (4M)

19. a) Explain gelation. Give the classification of gelling systems.

(8M)

b) Explain the manufacturing process used for latex – coir composites with any one
example. (6M)

Module -V

20. a) Give a typical formulation of latex adhesive.

(7M)

b) Illustrate the manufacture of latex –bitumin mixture for road rubberisation.

(7M)

21. a) Explain the manufacture process of latex thread. (7M)

b) Explain the process of latex casting with typical formulation of a product.

(7M)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Natural rubber latex, general composition, preservation, fundamental latex

characteristics, particle size and distribution, stability and destabilisation, coacervation,
viscosity-concentration relationship, surface free energy and wetting behaviour, zeta
potential, electrical properties of colloidal system, thermal movement of molecules,
Brownian motion, synthetic latices and their blends, latex concentration methods,
concentrated latex, significance of specification limits.

Module 2: Test methods, total solids, dry rubber content, total alkalinity, coagulum content,
sludge content, pH, KOH number, mechanical, chemical and thermal stability, VFA number,
zinc oxide stability principles of latex compounding, de-ammoniation of latex, vulcanising
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
agents, accelerators, antioxidants, fillers, dispersing and emulsifying agents, stabilisers,
thickening agents, and other miscellaneous additives, special ingredients, preparation of
dispersions and emulsions, latex compounding, pre-vulcanised latex.

Module 3: Dipping methods- straight dipping, coagulant dipping, different types of formers,
dipping process, after treatments, defects in dipped goods, Manufacture of dipped goods like
rubber band, medical gloves, household gloves, industrial gloves, dipped fabric gloves,
balloon, nipples, prophylactics, impregnation, spreading, fabric proofing and coating.

Module 4: Rubber-textile composite products, latex bonded fibrous structures, coir foam,
latex treated rugs and carpet backing. latex foam processing methods, compounding,
mechanical frothing by beating, vulcanisation, washing and drying, gelling, gelling systems,
merits and demerits of gelling systems, continuous foam production, typical latex compounds
for foam production.

Module 5: Latex castings and mouldings- principles and production of hollow articles, solid
articles, use of porous moulds in casting, manufacture of latex thread, latex cement and
adhesives, latex paints, protective coatings, chewing gum, use of latex in road rubberisation.

Text Books

1. Rani Joseph, Practical Guide to Latex Technology, Smithers Rapra, 2013

2. D.C. Blackley, Polymer Latices: Science and Technology, Vol 1, 2 and 3, Springer
Science, 1997
3. N.R. Peethambaran, Natural Rubber Latex Technology, 2016

Reference Books

1. E. W. Madge, Latex Foam Rubber, Elsevier, 1982

2. D. C. Blackley, High Polymer Lattices, Vol 1 and 2, Maclaren, 1966
3. David Eaves, Handbook of Polymer Foams, Smithers Rapra Publishing, 2004
4. R. F.Mausser (Ed.), The Vanderbilt Latex Handbook, R.T. Vanderbilt Company, 1987
5. Journal of Rubber Developments, Dipped Goods, Vol. 25, 1972

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Natural rubber latex (9 hours)

1.1 Natural rubber latex, general composition, preservation, 3

fundamental latex characteristics, particle size and distribution,
stability and destabilization.
1.2 Coacervation, viscosity-concentration relationship, surface free 3
energy and wetting behaviour, zeta potential, electrical properties
of colloidal system.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
1.3 Thermal movement of molecules, Brownian motion, synthetic 3
latices and their blends, latex concentration methods, concentrated
latex, significance of specification limits.
2 Latex specifications (9 hours)
2.1 Test methods, total solids, dry rubber content, total alkalinity, 3
coagulum content, sludge content, pH, KOH number, mechanical,
chemical and thermal stability, VFA number, zinc oxide stability
principles of latex compounding.
2.2 Deammoniation of latex, vulcanising agents, accelerators, 4
antioxidants, fillers, dispersing and emulsifying agents, stabilisers,
thickening agents, and other miscellaneous additives, special
ingredients.
2.3 Preparation of dispersions and emulsions, latex compounding, 2
prevulcanised latex.

3 Dipping methods and Dipped products (9 hours)

3.1 Straight dipping, coagulant dipping, different types of formers, 3
dipping process.
3.2 After treatments, defects in dipped goods, trouble shooting in 2
dipped goods.
3.3 Manufacture of dipped goods like rubber band, medical gloves, 4
household gloves, industrial gloves, dipped fabric gloves, balloon,
nipples, prophylactics, impregnation, spreading, fabric proofing
and coating.
4 Latex products manufacture (9 hours)
4.1 Rubber-textile composite products, latex bonded fibrous 3
structures, coir foam, latex treated rugs and carpet backing.
4.2 Latex foam processing methods, compounding, mechanical 3
frothing by beating, vulcanisation, washing and drying.
4.3 Gelling, gelling systems, merits and demerits of gelling systems, 3
continuous foam production, typical latex compounds for foam
production.
5 Latex castings and mouldings (9 hours)
5.1 Principles and production of hollow articles, solid articles, use of 4
porous moulds in casting.

5.2 Manufacture of latex thread, latex cement and adhesives. 2

5.3 Latex paints, protective coatings, chewing gum, latex processing 3
in road rubberisation.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POL SPECIFICATION TEST LAB CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

202 PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The specification tests lab is equipped with equipment to carry out the basic
experiments related to natural rubber latex. Experiments to find dry rubber content and the
alkalinity of latex samples and tests to estimate nitrogen content, magnesium content and
sludge content are included.

Prerequisite: Engineering Chemistry Lab.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop skill to conduct the specification tests for field and preserved latex.
CO 2 Develop skill on the specification tests for dry rubber.
CO 3 Develop skills to correlate latex specifications with properties of latex.

CO 4 Develop team work skills through group activities.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 10 11 12
CO 1 2 3 1
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 2 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
End Semester Examination Pattern
The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) :25 Marks
(d) Viva voce :20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions: Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second

series test covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be
conducted under the equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The
number of candidates evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for
the University examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external
examiner shall endorse the record.
Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Perform the experiments to find the Total solid content of the given sample of latex.
2. Conduct the experiment to find the alkaline content of given sample of NR latex.

3. Determine the alkaline content, DRC, and VFA in the given sample of latex.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1.Find the Po and PRI values of various types of rubber samples..
2. Estimate the nitrogen content of given rubber sample .
3. Estimate the volatile matter and ash content of dry rubber sample.
Course Outcome 3(CO3):
1. Mention the experiment to determine the ageing resistance of rubber
2. Estimate the MST in the given sample of latex and analysis its quality.
3. Determine the sludge content of latex and report on the quality latex.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Evaluating the experimentation capacity of student’s in group.
2.Analysing the interpretation skill of results with group discussion.
3. Reporting of experimental data, results and report within the stipulated time through team
effort.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Specification tests for field latex

Viscosity, density, pH

2. Specification tests for preserved latex

Ammonia content

Magnesium content

Copper and manganese content

Dry rubber content

Total solid content

KOH number

Volatile fatty acid number

Sludge content

Coagulum content

Mechanical stability time

Heat stability time

ZnO stability

3. Specification tests for dry rubber

Volatile matter

Ash content

Dirt content

Nitrogen content

Estimation of Cu

Estimation of Fe

Estimation of Mn, P0, PRI

Reference Books

1. Rani Joseph, Practical Guide to Latex Technology, Smithers Rapra, 2013

2. D.C. Blackley, Polymer Latices: Science and technology, Springer Science, 1997.
3. S. K. De and J. R. White, Rubber Technologist's Handbook, Vol 1, Smithers Rapra
Publishing, 2001
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POL204
POLYMER PREPARATION CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
AND ANALYSIS LAB PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The polymer preparation and analysis lab is equipped with equipment for analysis
of polymer materials. Experiments like molecular weight determination and estimation of the
compounding ingredients are included in this paper. Estimation of monomers and the
methods of preparation of polymers are also part of this subject.

Prerequisite: Engineering Chemistry Lab.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop skill to prepare polymers.

CO 2 Develop skill to find out the molecular weight and constituents of polymer
materials.
CO 3 Develop skill identify a polymer by chemical analysis.

CO 4 Develop skill to analyse a polymer compound.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 10 11 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern

The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) :25 Marks
(d) Viva voce :20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions: Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second

series test covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be
conducted under the equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The
number of candidates evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for
the University examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external
examiner shall endorse the record.
Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Perform the experiment for preparation of Phenol-formaldehyde resins.

2. Conduct the experiment for regeneration of cellulose.
3. Conduct experiment for synthesis of urea-formaldehyde resin.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1.Find the molecular weight of the given sample of PVC by viscometry.
2. Estimate the chlorine content of given sample of chloroprene rubber.
3. Estimate the hydrocarbon content of given NR sample.
Course Outcome 3(CO3):
1. Conduct the experiment to determine the given Plastic sample.
2. Estimate the type of rubber in the given sample.
3. Conduct experiment to identify the type of thermoplastic elastomer.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Evaluating the carbon black content of the rubber compound.
2.Determine the silica content of the given rubber compound.
3. Reporting of experimental data, of thermo gravimetric analysis.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Synthesis of the following Polymers: Polymethyl methacrylate, Polyacrylamide,

Regenerated Cellulose, Phenol-Formaldehyde Resin (Novolac and Resol),
Polystyrene, Polyurethanes and Glyptal resins, Urea-Formaldehyde and Melamine-
Formaldehyde.
2. Quantitative estimation of the following monomers: Aniline, Phenol, Acetone, Ethyl
Acetate, Formaldehyde, Acrylonitrile, Urea, Glycol, Methyl methacrylate
3. Determination of molecular weight by viscosity method and end group analysis.
4. Estimation of Polymers: Acrylonitrile content of NBR, Chlorine content of CR,
Rubber hydrocarbon content of NR.
5. Analysis of Polymer Compounds: Iodine value of rubber compounds, Carbon black
content, Free sulphur content, Total inorganic content, Silica content.
6. Identification of Rubbers: NR, SBR, BR, IR, IIR, EPDM, CR, NBR, Hypalon,
Thiokol, Silicone.
7. Identification of Plastics: PE, PP, PS, PVC, PVA, PF, UF, MF, Polyester
8. Identification of Thermoplastic Elastomers: SIS, SBS, SEBS, Hytrel.

Reference Books

1. S. R. Sandler, W.Karo, J. Bonesteel and E.M. Pearce, Polymer Synthesis and

Characterization: A Laboratory Manual, Elsevier, 1998
2. D. Braun, H. Cherdon and H.Ritter, Polymer Synthesis: Theory and Practice, Springer
Science, 2013
3. Kuruvilla Joseph and Gem Mathew, Advanced Practical Polymer Chemistry, Polymer
Publications, 2004
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -4
HONOURS
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT FUNDEMENTALS OF CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
292 MANUFACTURING VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first one is introduction to primary manufacturing process.
Second module deals with various types of mould and die casting. Significant topics from
forming, coining and embossing are included in the third module. Fourth and fifth modules
gives emphasis on the manufacture based on forging and welding techniques. After the
completion of this course, students will be able to understand manufacture methods to create
tools and dies for polymer product manufacture. They also attain the skill to identify the
proper machining process to make such tools.

Prerequisite: Basic Mechanical Engineering.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the principles, instrumentation and applications of machining process.

CO 2 Explain the significance and methods of forming methods.
CO 3 Illustrate different casting techniques and prepare materials for the same.
CO 4 Compare and contrast between various manufacturing processes and do judicious
selection for each part.
CO 5 Exposure towards modern manufacturing process in forging, welding, and extrusion.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 1 1 1 1
CO 2 3 1 1 1
CO 3 3 2 1 1
CO 4 3 2 1 1
CO 5 3 1 1 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the principles, instrumentation and applications of

machining process.

1. Describe the principle and instrumentation of cutting tools.

2. Effect of carbon content on the mechanical properties of carbon steels.

3.Compare brittle and ductile failure of metals.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Explain the significance and methods of forming methods.

1. Explain the significance of notching and piercing.

2. Illustrate the significance and procedure in estimating power requirement for shearing
operation.

3. Comment on the features of hydro-forming.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate different casting techniques and prepare materials for
the same.
1. Explain the significance of foundry equipment and furnaces.

2. What is the significance of pit mould casting. Explain.

3. Comment on the various die casting methods.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Compare and contrast between various manufacturing processes
and do judicious selection for each part.

1. Compare cutting and casting tool manufacture.

2. Insert moulds are preferred over integer moulds. Why?

3. Drilling of channels in metal pieces requires additional care. Why?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Exposure towards modern manufacturing process in forging,

welding, and extrusion.

1. Plasma arc welding is preferred in certain tools. Explain.

2. Give an account of different products made by extrusion.

3.Explain the application of fusion welding process.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FOURTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 POT292 Duration: 3 Hours

FUNDEMENTALS OF MANUFACTURING

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Compare low, medium and high carbon steel.

2. Describe deep drawing. What is its significance?

3. Give the principle of directional solidification.

4. Define weldability and factors affecting it.

5. Compare and contrast between blanking and punching?

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
6. Differentiate friction welding and resistance welding.

7. What are the limitations and advantages of magneto forming?

8. Describe the terms conventional spinning and shear spinning.

9. Define extrusion ratio? What is its significance.

10. Detail how stretch forming is carried out?

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) With a labelled diagram explain the parts and working of a grinding machine.
(9)

b) What is the role of shaping machine in mould manufacture? (5)

OR

12. a) Explain various functions of cutting tools. Explain the working of one cutting
machine. (9)

b) Explain the role of coolant materials used in tooling process.

(5)

Module II

13. a) With suitable diagram explain hot chamber die casting machine . (8)

b) Describe the principle of centrifugal casting. (6)

OR

14. a) Explain the factors to be considered in gate design. (9)

b) Compare and contrast between parting gate and step gate (5)

Module -III

15. a) Write the detailed process involved in coining and embossing with suitable
examples. . (8)

b) What is meant by rubber forming. Explain. (6)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
OR

16. a) Describe the after treatment process used in forming process. (6)

b) Explain various applications of drawing and cupping. (8)

Module -IV

17. a) Describe any four forging defects and reason for them. Explain the design
modifications that can be used to minimise forging defects.
(8)

b) Explain the design features used in forging dies? (6)

OR

18. a) Explain roll pass design and its features. (8)

b) Explain the manufacturing process used in hot rolling and cold rolling. (6)

Module -V

19. a) Give a detailed description on the components used in ultrasonic welding. (7)

b) Illustrate on the troubleshooting guide used in pressure welding. (7)

OR

20. a) Explain leftward and rightward techniques used in gas welding. (7)

b) Explain polarity in arc welding. Explain its significance. How is it related to heat
generation? (7)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: General introduction to manufacturing methods, Material removal process,

Cutting, Cutting tools, grinding and finishing.

Module 2: Casting -Introduction; History of the technology; Definition and major

classification; Casting materials, Sand mould casting:- Basic principles with simple examples
of a solid casting and a hollow casting. Patterns; types, material and design including pattern
allowances; Moulding sands; composition, preparation, properties and testing; Core; Purpose,
definition, materials, preparation and applications; Design of gating system; pouring basin,
sprue, runner and risers; Advantages, limitations and applications of top gate, bottom gate,
parting gate and step gate; Estimation of pouring time for top gate and bottom gate type
moulds. Foundry equipment and furnaces. Melting, pouring and solidification. Principles,
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
method, relative advantages and applications of floor mould casting, shell mould casting, pit
mould and loam mould casting CO2 mould casting; centrifugal casting ( pure, semi and
centrifuging types) investment casting including mercasting ; Permanent mould casting. Die
casting; types, methods, relative advantages and applications Slush casting; principle and use,
Casting defects; types, causes and remedy.

Module 3 Forming Processes - Introduction; General principles; major classification with

typical examples ; Hot working and cold working; principle, purpose, relative advantages and
applications. Shearing; Parting, notching, blanking and piercing. Cupping(drawing) and deep
drawing. Design of blanks for any shearing and cupping operation. Estimation of forces and
power required for shearing and cupping operations. Coining and embossing ; basic principle
and methods. Other forming processes:- Principles, methods, essential requirements and
applications of Spinning and flow turning; Bulging; Hydro forming; Magneto forming;
Explosive forming.
Module 4: Forging:-Definition and classification giving few example of application; work
materials different forging operations, tools and equipment ; Smithy, drop forging and press
forging (pressing) methods and use. Forging dies: types, materials and design. Rolling:-
Introduction ; basic principles and general applications; Characteristics and applications of
hot rolling and cold rolling; various processes and applications and rolled products; Roll pass
design for different products. Wire drawing and Extrusion:- Basic principles and
requirements; Classification, methods and applications; Work materials and products; Press
tool works; Basic principles, system, operations and applications.

Module 5: Welding- Introduction: Major classes of joining; Mechanical joining; temporary,

semi permanent and permanent; Welding; Brazing and soldering; Adhesive bonding;
Welding in Liquid state. Fusion welding: - Introduction; basic principle, definition and major
classification; characteristics and applications of different fusion welding processes using
different heat-sources. Heat source:-chemical; gas welding; thermit welding; Heat source:-
electrical; Arc welding; Manual arc welding; Submerged arc welding; TIG and MIG.
Induction welding; Plasma arc welding; Resistance welding; Spot welding; Butt welding;
Seam welding; Projection welding. Laser beam welding and electron beam welding. Solid
state welding: - Principles. Methods, requirements and application of the different types;
Solid state welding in hot condition; Forge welding; Friction welding; Diffusion welding
Ultrasonic welding. Pressure welding. Welding defects; Types, causes, effects and remedy.

Reference Books

1. Rao, Posinasetti Nageswara. Manufacturing technology. Vol. 1. Tata McGraw-Hill

Education, 2013.
2. Ghosh, Amitabha, and Asok Kumar Mallik. "Manufacturing science." Ellis Horwood,
1986. (1986)
3. Kalpakjian, Serope. Manufacturing processes for engineering materials. Pearson
Education India, 1984.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
4. Campbell, James S. Principles of manufacturing materials and processes. McGraw-Hill,
1961.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction (3 hrs)

1.1 General introduction to manufacturing methods, Cutting, 3

Grinding, finishing.
2 Casting Process (12 hrs)
2.1 Casting -Introduction; History of the technology; Definition and 3
major classification; Casting materials, Sand mould casting:- Basic
principles with simple examples of a solid casting and a hollow
casting.
.
2.2 Patterns; types, material and design including pattern allowances; 2
Moulding sands; composition, preparation, properties and testing;
Core; Purpose, definition, materials, preparation and applications;
Design of gating system; pouring basin, sprue, runner and risers;
Advantages, limitations and applications of top gate, bottom gate,
parting gate and step gate;
2.3 Estimation of pouring time for top gate and bottom gate type 4
moulds. Foundry equipment and furnaces. Melting, pouring and
solidification. Principles, method, relative advantages and
applications of floor mould casting, shell mould casting, pit mould
and loam mould casting CO2 mould casting; centrifugal casting (
pure, semi and centrifuging types) investment casting including
mercasting ; Permanent mould casting.
2.4 Die casting; types, methods, relative advantages and applications 3
Slush casting; principle and use, Casting defects; types, causes and
remedy.
3 Forming (10 Hrs)
3.1 Forming Processes - Introduction; General principles; major 4
classification with typical examples ;Hot working and cold
working; principle, purpose, relative advantages and applications.

3.2 Shearing; Parting, notching, blanking and piercing. 3

Cupping(drawing) and deep drawing. Design of blanks for any
shearing and cupping operation. Estimation of forces and power
required for shearing and cupping operations. Coining and
embossing ; basic principle and methods.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
3.3 Other forming processes:- Principles, methods, essential 3
requirements and applications of Spinning and flow turning;
Bulging; Hydro forming; Magneto forming; Explosive forming.
4 Forging and Extrusion (10 Hrs)
4.1 Forging:-Definition and classification giving few example of 4
application; work materials different forging operations, tools and
equipment ; Smithy, drop forging and press forging (pressing)
methods and use.

4.2 Forging dies: types, materials and design. Rolling:-Introduction ; 3

basic principles and general applications; Characteristics and
applications of hot rolling and cold rolling; various processes and
applications and rolled products; Roll pass design for different
products
4.3 Wire drawing and Extrusion:- Basic principles and requirements; 3
Classification, methods and applications; Work materials and
products; Press tool works; Basic principles, system, operations
and applications.
5 Welding (10 Hrs)
Welding- Introduction: Major classes of joining; Mechanical
5.1 joining; temporary, semi permanent and permanent; Welding; 4
Brazing and soldering; Adhesive bonding; Welding in Liquid state
Fusion welding: - Introduction; basic principle, definition and
major classification; characteristics and applications of different
5.2 fusion welding processes using different heat-sources. Heat 3
source:-chemical; gas welding; thermit welding; Heat source:-
electrical; Arc welding; Manual arc welding; Submerged arc
welding; TIG and MIG;
Induction welding; Plasma arc welding; Resistance welding; Spot
welding; Butt welding; Seam welding; Projection welding. Laser
beam welding and electron beam welding. Solid state welding: -
5.3 Principles. Methods, requirements and application of the different 3
types; Solid state welding in hot condition; Forge welding;
Friction welding; Diffusion welding Ultrasonic welding. Pressure
welding. Welding defects; Types, causes, effects and remedy.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ENERGY TECHNOLOGY
294 VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: In Energy technology, the first priority is given to understand the sources of
energy and methods for its storage. Significant topics from fuel cell design, solar and wind
energy are included in the third and fourth module. Final part of this paper deals with the
nuclear energy and its prospectus. After the completion of this course, students will be able to
describe the significance of storage and conversion of energy. They also attain the knowledge
related to ease and difficulties to store energy from different sources.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Engineering Chemistry

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Summarise the features of conventional and non-conventional energy resources.

CO 2 Explain the modern methods for tapping solar and wind energy for sustainability.
CO 3 Develop different batteries and energy efficient solar cells.
CO 4 Create awareness on the Global warming and other weather changes due to
conventional energy usage.
CO 5 Explain the basic concepts of nuclear energy and describe power plant features.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2 1 1
CO 2 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 2 3 2
CO 4 3 3 1 3 1
CO 5 3 2 1 2 2 1 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the principle of combustion thermodynamics.

2. Contrast behaviour of conventional and non-conventional energy resources.

3. Estimate the future energy requirement and possible resources for the same.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain the principle of wind mills in power generation.

2. Explain how windmills generates power in a sustainable way.

3. What is heliostat. What is the role of heliostat in solar tower?

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Design procedure of fuel cell battery for energy efficiency.

2. Understand p n junction and characteristics of solar cell.

3. Explain time –temperature superposition principle.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Fuel combustion affects global warming . How?

2. Define nuclear irradiation effect.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
3. Compare efficiency of alkali and mercury cells..

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe the significance uranium isoptopes in nuclear plants.

2. Summarise why coolants are significant in nuclear power generation.

3. Explain the reason for failure of two nuclear power plants.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FOURTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

POT294

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

ENERGY TECHNOLOGY

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Draw the I V characteristic of solar cell.

2. Describe declination angle and zenith angle. What is its significance?

3. Give the principle of wind energy generation.

4. What is meant by tilt factor. What is the expression for tilt factor?

5. What is meant by energy driven elasticity and entropy driven elasticity?

6. Derive the expression for DNI and solar constant.

7. What are the limitations of wind energy?

8. Describe the terms shielding materials and fuel rods in a nuclear plant.

9. Polymers are used in photo voltaic cells. Comment.

10. Differentiate between flux concentration and area concentration ratio.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) Define the term clean coal technology. (7M)

b) PV cells are used in solar grids. Explain its working principle

(3M)

c) Compare acid and alkaline fuel cells. (4M)

12. a) Derivation of efficiency and testing of flat plate collectors in solar cells.
(8M)

b) What do each regions characterize on the Li-ion battery's Nyquist-plot?(4M)

c) What all are the steps involve from metal ore to synthesis of battery grade sulphates
to make NMC cathode materials for Li-ion battery? (4M)

Module II

13. a) Discuss the principle and working of PEM Fuel Cell (8M)

b) Discuss the configuration of fuel cell systems with fuel processors.

(6M)

14. a) Derive expressions for temperature dependence of the reversible voltage obtained
from a fuel cell.
(8M)

b) Write a note on the characteristics of fuel cell charge transport resistance

(6M)

Module -III

15. a) Explain the principle of conversion of solar energy into heat. Explain a flat plate
solar collector. (6M)

b) What is meant by solar pond ? Explain. Describe the working of solar power plant
(8M)

16. a) Explain Thermal Energy storage for solar heating and cooling. What are limitations
of solar plants ?
(8M)

b) Explain sensible heat storage, latent heat storage and thermochemical storage of
solar energy.
(6M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module -IV

17. a) What do you understand by the nature of wind ? Describe with the help of of a neat
sketch the construction and working of a Wind Energy Conversion System (WECS).
(9M)

b) What methods are used to overcome the fluctuating power generation of a windmill
? Discuss their merits and demerits.
(5M)

18. a) Give the significance and features of Betz limit. Derive the expression for Betz
limit and power co efficient. (8M)

b) Explain the main components and functioning of wind turbain.

(6M)

Module -V

19. a) What is radioactive decay? Explain decay constant and half life of a radioactive
element.
(7M)

b) Explain Gamow, theory of alpha decay. How is Geiger-Nuttal law derived from it?
(7M)

20. a) Explain the working principle of cyclotron with neat sketch.

(5M)

b) What do you mean by prompt and delayed neutrons. (4M)

b) Explain Gamov’s theory of alpha decay. How far does this explain the Gieger
Nuttall law. (5M)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Fuels and combustion :

Fuels & Fuel Analysis, Combustion Stoichiometry, theoretical & actual combustion
processes, Air fuel ratio. Combustion Thermodynamics- calculation of heat of formation &
heat of combustion, First law analysis of reacting systems. Combustion Appliances- Gas
burners- Functional requirement of burners, Gas burner Classification, Stoker firing,
pulverized system of firing.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Module 2: Batteries and Fuel cells:

Storage Cell Technologies-Storage cell fundamentals, Characteristics Emerging trends in

batteries. Specifications, Storage cell definitions & specifications, Carbon-zinc & alkaline
cells, Mercury, zinc-air, & silver oxide button cells, Lead –acid, Edison, Nicad &Nimh cells,
Lithium technology, Applications, Storage cell summary, Applications of storage cell,
Industrial Fuel cell fundamentals, The alkaline fuel cell, Acidic fuel cells Applications,
Industrial and commercial.

Module 3: Solar energy:

Source of radiation, solar constant, solar charts, Measurement of diffuse, global and direct
solar radiation: pyrheliometer, pyranometer, pyregeometer, net pyradiometer-sunshine
recorder Solar Non-Concentrating Collectors- Design considerations, Classification air, liquid
heating collectors, Derivation of efficiency and testing of flat plate collectors, Analysis of
concentric tube collector, Solar green house. Design, Classification, Concentrator mounting,
Focusing solar concentrators Heliostats. Solar powered absorption A/C system, water pump,
chimney, drier, dehumidifier, still, cooker. Photo-voltaic cell, characteristics-cell arrays,
power electric circuits for output of solar panels, choppers-inverters-batteries-charge
regulators, Construction concepts.
Module 4: Wind energy:

Measurement and instrumentation, Beau fort number, Gust parameters, wind, power law
index, Betz constant -Terrain value. Energy in wind, study of wind applicable Indian
standards, Steel Tables, Structural Engineering. Variables in wind energy conversion
systems, wind power, power in a wind stream, wind turbine efficiency, Forces on the blades
of a propeller, Solidity and selection curves.

Module 5: Nuclear Materials:

Introduction to nuclear energy / reactors, comparison of different modes of energy

generation, ecological and environmental aspects. Nuclear reactions, concept of half-life,
nuclear minerals, related exploration and processing. Material requirements, structural
materials, coolants, shielding materials and fuel rods, fabrication requirements. Nuclear
irradiation effects on structural materials, safe guards, safety and health protection.

Reference Books

1. Raja etal, Introduction to Non-Conventional Energy Resources Scitech Publications.

2. John Twideu and Tony Weir, Renewal Energy Resources BSP Publications, 2006.
3. M.V.R. Koteswara Rao, Energy Resources: Conventional & Non-Conventional BSP
Publications,2006.
4. D.S. Chauhan, Non-conventional Energy Resources New Age International.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
5. C.S. Solanki, Renewal Energy Technologies: A Practical Guide for Beginners PHI
Learning.
6. Peter Auer, “Advances in Energy System and Technology”. Vol. 1 & II Edited by
Academic Press.
7. Godfrey Boyle, Renewable Energy Power for A Sustainable Future, Oxford
University Press.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Fuels and combustion: (9 hours)

1.1 Fuels & Fuel Analysis, Combustion Stoichiometry, theoretical & 4

actual combustion processes, Air fuel ratio.
1.2 Combustion Thermodynamics- calculation of heat of formation & 2
heat of combustion, First law analysis of reacting systems.
1.3 Combustion Appliances- Gas burners- Functional requirement of 3
burners, Gas burner Classification, Stoker firing, pulverized
system of firing.
2 Batteries and Fuel cells : (8 hours)

2.1 Storage Cell Technologies-Storage cell fundamentals, 3

Characteristics Emerging trends in batteries. Specifications.

2.2 Storage cell definitions & specifications, Carbon-zinc & alkaline 3

cells, Mercury, zinc-air, & silver oxide button cells, Lead –acid,
Edison, Nicad &Nimh cells, Lithium technology.

2.3 Applications of storage cell, Industrial Fuel cell fundamentals, The 2

alkaline fuel cell, Acidic fuel cells Applications, Industrial and
commercial.
3 Solar energy: (10 Hrs)

3.1 Source of radiation, solar constant, solar charts, Measurement of 3

diffuse, global and direct solar radiation: pyrheliometer,
pyranometer, pyregeometer, net pyradiometer-sunshine recorder.
3.2 Solar Non-Concentrating Collectors- Design considerations, 2
Classification air, liquid heating collectors, Derivation of
efficiency and testing of flat plate collectors, Analysis of
concentric tube collector, Solar green house. Design,
Classification, Concentrator mounting, Focusing solar
concentrators Heliostats.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
3.3 Solar powered absorption A/C system, water pump, chimney, 2
drier, dehumidifier, still, cooker.
3.4 Photo-voltaic cell, characteristics-cell arrays, power electric
circuits for output of solar panels, choppers-inverters-batteries- 3
charge regulators, Construction concepts.
4 Wind energy: (9 Hrs)

4.1 Measurement and instrumentation, Beau fort number, Gust 2

parameters, wind, power law index, Betz constant -Terrain value..

4.2 Energy in wind, study of wind applicable Indian standards, Steel 3

Tables, Structural Engineering
4.3 Variables in wind energy conversion systems, wind power, power 4
in a wind stream, wind turbine efficiency, Forces on the blades of
a propeller, Solidity and selection curves.
5 Nuclear Materials: (9 hours)

5.1 Introduction to nuclear energy reactors, comparison of different 3

modes of energy generation, ecological and environmental aspects.
5.2 Nuclear reactions, concept of half-life, nuclear minerals, related 4
exploration and processing. Material requirements, structural
materials, coolants, shielding materials and fuel rods, fabrication
requirements.
5.3 Nuclear irradiation effects on structural materials, safe guards, 2
safety and health protection.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POLYMERS IN CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT296
CONSTRUCTION VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Objective of this course is to acquire knowledge and skills toutilize polymer
materials as a base in construction purpose.This course introduces students to polymer
applications in building, coatings, foams and for various design purposes.
Prerequisite: Polymer science and Polymerpreparation.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand the concepts of powder coating, sand witch panels, pipes and cables.
CO2 Estimatethe properties of polymer sealants, gaskets and adhesives.
CO3 Illustrate the design of FRP composites and to strengthen RC slabs.
CO4 Definethe role of polymers in sustainable development and ecology.
CO5 Develop polymer systems for various constructional requirements.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 2 1 … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 3 … 1 … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 3 … … 2 … … … … … … …

CO 4 3 2 … … … 2 3 3 - 2 … 1

CO 5 1 2 … … 2 … … … 1 … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 10 10 10
Apply 10 10 10
Analyze 10 10
Evaluate 10 20
Create 10 10 20
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Understand the concepts of powder coating, sand witch panels, pipes
and cables.

1. Compare with examples on polymer materials used in construction of structural and non-
structural applications.
2. What is meant by Intumescent coatings?
3. Design a fluidized bed powder coating system for various materials.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Estimatethe properties of polymer sealants, gaskets and adhesives.

1. Understand properties of polymer adhesives and its manufacture.

2. Explain the significance of sealant design.
3. Correlate material specified properties of different polymers to its structure.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):Illustrate the design of FRP composites and to strengthen RC slabs.

1. Compare the structure of FRP and find the reason for the difference in their strength.
2. Understand the critical features in FRP composite design.
3. Design RC slabs with improved stiffness by plastics.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Define the role of polymers in sustainable development and ecology.

1. Polymerscause several environment problems. How can it be prevented?

2. Estimate the role of polymers in making sustainable development through case studies.
3. Design modern equipment based on plastics for better ecology balance.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Develop polymer systems for various constructional requirements.
1. Formulate polymer compounds for civil engineering use.
2. Understand manufacture of natural and synthetic geotextiles.
3. Design polymer structures with low flammability and improved recyclability.

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 296
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
POLYMERS IN CONSTRUCTION
PART – A
Answer All the Questions(10 x 3 = 30)

1. What is the problem with incomplete combustion of PVC?

2. Write the advantages and disadvantages of FRP in construction.
3. Illustrate different types of powder coat application methods.
4. Mention the specific use of cellular plastic in civil construction.
5. Name any four plastics used in windows and glazings.
6. Compare Epoxy floors with ceramic floor.
7. Define SPI coding of plastic recycling.
8. Write the significance of hydrolysis reaction with example.
9. What are the advantages of using plastics in constructing drainages?
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

10. Give short note on different types of glass fibre commercially used in FRP.

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. (a) Explain various applications with structural features of polymer sand witch panels.
(b) Write short note on : 1) Polymer adhesives
2) Earthquake resistance of polymer structures.
(7+7 = 14 Marks)

OR
12. (a) Explain the specialties of polymer structure for acoustic sealing.
13. (b) Explain various methods for manufacture of wood plastic composite. (7+7 = 14
Marks)
Module 1I
14. Compare solvent based and water based polymer coatings.
OR
15. (a) Describe the process of powder coating.
(b)Give a note on polymers suitable for powder coating and its preparation.
(8+6 = 14 Marks)

ModuleIII
16. Describe the manufacture, applications and testing of polymer concrete.
OR
17. Write short notes on the following
a)Natural and synthetic geotextile (5 Marks)
b) Bond strength models and its significance (5 Marks)
c) Effect of polymerin RC structure construction (4 marks)

ModuleIV
18. Explain on the various process associated with thermoplastic foam manufacture.
OR
19. a) Compare and contrast between PS and PVC foams.
b) Static discharge behavior of plastics can be modified.How ?(7+7 = 14 Marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module V
20. Explain the compounding ingredients used in manufacture of flame resistant and
sustainable designs.
OR
21. (a) Explain polymer bound reagents and their significance in durability. (5 Marks)
(b) Explain various methods to repair polymer structural members. (9 Marks)

Syllabus
Module 1
Plastics in Building and Construction, structural, secondary structural and Non-structural uses,
Sand witch panel, piping, cables, cladding and profiles, insulation, sealant, gaskets and
adhesives. Roofing and flooring systems, glazing and wall covering.
Module 2
Polymer coating, Materials, solvent based coatings, water based coatings, curing techniques,
Powder coatings, Intumescent coatings.
Module 3
Polymers in civil engineering, geotechnical, roadways, pavements, drainage and erosion control
systems, polymer concrete, FRP composites, bond strength models, strengthening of RC beams,
RC slabs, RC columns, masonry wall and infills strengthening.
Module 4
Polymer foams, foam manufacturing technology, Thermoplastic foams, thermosetting foams,
Special applications, ageing studies.
Module 5
Polymer in repair, Injection grouting, patching, coating, sustainable construction, eco-design,
recycling of scraps, flammability of polymer foams and composites.

Reference Books:
1. Halliwell, Sue M. Polymer composites in construction. CRC, 2000.
2. Hornbostel, Caleb. Construction materials: Types, uses and applications. John Wiley &
Sons, 1991.
3. GuneriAkoveli, Polymers in Construction, Rapra review report, 2004.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 10
1.1 Plastics in Building and Construction 2
1.2 Polymers for structural, secondary structural and Non-structural uses 3
Sand witch panel, piping, cables, cladding and profiles, insulation,
1.3 3
sealant, gaskets and adhesives
Roofing and flooring systems, glazing and wall covering.
1.4 2

2 Module II 9
2.1 Polymer coating, Materials, solvent based coatings 3

2.2 Water based coatings, curing techniques 2

2.3 Powder coatings, Intumescent coatings 4

3 Module III 9
3.1 Polymers in civil engineering, geotechnical, roadways, pavements, 3
Drainage and erosion control systems, polymer concrete, FRP
3.2 3
composites, bond strength models
Strengthening of RC beams, RC slabs, RC columns, masonry wall and
3.3 3
infills strengthening
4 Module IV 9
4.1 Polymer foams, foam manufacturing technology 3

4.2 Thermoplastic foams, manufacture and applications 3

Thermosetting foams, Special applications, ageing studies.

4.3 3

5 Module V 8

5.1 Polymer in repair, Injection grouting, patching, coating 3

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

5.2 Sustainable construction, eco-design, recycling of scraps 3

Flammability of polymer foams and composites.

5.3 2
 HUMANITIES

COMMON COURSES S3 & S4

SEMESTER -3
 HUMANITIES
CODE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MCN201 SUSTAINABLE ENGINEERING 2 0 0 NIL

Preamble: Objective of this course is to inculcate in students an awareness of environmental issues and the
global initiatives towards attaining sustainability. The student should realize the potential of technology in
bringing in sustainable practices.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Understand the relevance and the concept of sustainability and the global initiatives in this
direction
CO 2 Explain the different types of environmental pollution problems and their sustainable
solutions
CO 3 Discuss the environmental regulations and standards
CO 4 Outline the concepts related to conventional and non-conventional energy
CO 5 Demonstrate the broad perspective of sustainable practices by utilizing engineering
knowledge and principles

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 3 2
CO 2 2 3 2
CO 3 2 3 2
CO 4 2 3 2
CO 5 2 3 2
Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 20 20 40
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2
questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions
and carry 14 marks.

1
 HUMANITIES
Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the relevance and the concept of sustainability and the global initiatives in this
direction
1. Explain with an example a technology that has contributed positively to sustainable development.
2. Write a note on Millennium Development Goals.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the different types of environmental pollution problems and their sustainable
solutions

1. Explain the 3R concept in solid waste management?

2. Write a note on any one environmental pollution problem and suggest a sustainable solution.

3. In the absence of green house effect the surface temperature of earth would not have been suitable for survival
of life on earth. Comment on this statement.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Discuss the environmental regulations and standards

1. Illustrate Life Cycle Analysis with an example of your choice.

2. “Nature is the most successful designer and the most brilliant engineer that has ever evolved”. Discuss.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Outline the concepts related to conventional and non-conventional energy
1. Suggest a sustainable system to generate hot water in a residential building in tropical climate.

2. Enumerate the impacts of biomass energy on the environment.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Demonstrate the broad perspective of sustainable practices by utilizing engineering
knowledge and principles

1. Suggest suitable measures to make the conveyance facilities used by your institution sustainable.

Model Question paper

Part A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks each)

1. Define sustainable development.

2. Write a short note on Millennium Development Goals.

3. Describe carbon credit.

4. Give an account of climate change and its effect on environment.

5. Describe biomimicry? Give two examples.

6. Explain the basic concept of Life Cycle Assessment.

7. Name three renewable energy sources.

2
 HUMANITIES
8. Mention some of the disadvantages of wind energy.

9. Enlist some of the features of sustainable habitat.

10. Explain green engineering.

Part B

(Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks)

11. Discuss the evolution of the concept of sustainability. Comment on its relevance in the modern world.

OR

12. Explain Clean Development Mechanism.

13. Explain the common sources of water pollution and its harmful effects.

OR

14. Give an account of solid waste management in cities.

15. Explain the different steps involved in the conduct of Environmental Impact Assessment.

OR

16. Suggest some methods to create public awareness on environmental issues.

17. Comment on the statement, “Almost all energy that man uses comes from the Sun”.

OR

18. Write notes on:

a. Land degradation due to water logging.

b. Over exploitation of water.

19. Discuss the elements related to sustainable urbanisation.

OR

20. Discuss any three methods by which you can increase energy efficiency in buildings.

3
 HUMANITIES
Syllabus

Sustainability- need and concept, technology and sustainable development-Natural resources and their pollution, Carbon
credits, Zero waste concept. Life Cycle Analysis, Environmental Impact Assessment studies, Sustainable habitat, Green
buildings, green materials, Energy, Conventional and renewable sources, Sustainable urbanization, Industrial Ecology.

Module 1

Sustainability: Introduction, concept, evolution of the concept; Social, environmental and economic sustainability
concepts; Sustainable development, Nexus between Technology and Sustainable development; Millennium Development
Goals (MDGs) and Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), Clean Development Mechanism (CDM).

Module 2

Environmental Pollution: Air Pollution and its effects, Water pollution and its sources, Zero waste concept and 3 R
concepts in solid waste management; Greenhouse effect, Global warming, Climate change, Ozone layer depletion,
Carbon credits, carbon trading and carbon foot print, legal provisions for environmental protection.

Module 3

Environmental management standards: ISO 14001:2015 frame work and benefits, Scope and goal of Life Cycle Analysis
(LCA), Circular economy, Bio-mimicking, Environment Impact Assessment (EIA), Industrial ecology and industrial
symbiosis.

Module 4

Resources and its utilisation: Basic concepts of Conventional and non-conventional energy, General idea about solar
energy, Fuel cells, Wind energy, Small hydro plants, bio-fuels, Energy derived from oceans and Geothermal energy.

Module 5

Sustainability practices: Basic concept of sustainable habitat, Methods for increasing energy efficiency in buildings,
Green Engineering, Sustainable Urbanisation, Sustainable cities, Sustainable transport.

Reference Books

1. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case Studies, Prentice Hall.
2. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo,A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and development,
Cengage learning
3. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006
4. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication, London, 1998
5. ECBC Code 2007, Bureau of Energy Efficiency, New Delhi Bureau of Energy Efficiency Publications-Rating
System, TERI Publications - GRIHA Rating System
6. Ni bin Chang, Systems Analysis for Sustainable Engineering: Theory and Applications, McGraw-Hill
Professional.
7. Twidell, J. W. and Weir, A. D., Renewable Energy Resources, English Language Book Society (ELBS).
8. Purohit, S. S., Green Technology - An approach for sustainable environment, Agrobios Publication

4
 HUMANITIES
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Sustainability
1.1 Introduction, concept, evolution of the concept 1
1.2 Social, environmental and economic sustainability concepts 1
1.3 Sustainable development, Nexus between Technology and Sustainable 1
development
1.4 Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) and Sustainable Development Goals 1
(SDGs)
1.5 Clean Development Mechanism (CDM) 1
2 Environmental Pollution

2.1 Air Pollution and its effects 1

2.2 Water pollution and its sources 1
2.3 Zero waste concept and 3 R concepts in solid waste management 1
2.4 Greenhouse effect, Global warming, Climate change, Ozone layer depletion 1
2.5 Carbon credits, carbon trading and carbon foot print. 1
2.6 Legal provisions for environmental protection. 1
3 Environmental management standards

3.1 Environmental management standards 1

3.2 ISO 14001:2015 frame work and benefits 1
3.3 Scope and Goal of Life Cycle Analysis (LCA) 1
3.4 Circular economy, Bio-mimicking 1
3.5 Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) 1
3.6 Industrial Ecology, Industrial Symbiosis 1
4 Resources and its utilisation

4.1 Basic concepts of Conventional and non-conventional energy 1

4.2 General idea about solar energy, Fuel cells 1
4.3 Wind energy, Small hydro plants, bio-fuels 1
4.4 Energy derived from oceans and Geothermal energy 1
5 Sustainability Practices

5.1 Basic concept of sustainable habitat 1

5.2 Methods for increasing energy efficiency of buildings 1
5.3 Green Engineering 1
5.4 Sustainable Urbanisation, Sustainable cities, Sustainable transport 1

5
 HUMANITIES
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
2 0 0 2
EST 200 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING

Preamble:
The purpose of this course is to
i) introduce the undergraduate engineering studentsthe fundamental principles of
design engineering,
ii) make them understand the steps involved in the design process and
iii) familiarize them with the basic tools used and approaches in design.
Students are expected to apply design thinking in learning as well as while practicing
engineering, which is very important and relevant for today. Case studies from various
practical situations will help the students realize that design is not only concerned about the
function but also many other factors like customer requirements, economics, reliability, etc.
along with a variety of life cycle issues.

The course will help students to consider aesthetics, ergonomics and sustainability factors in
designs and also to practice professional ethics while designing.

Prerequisite:

Nil.The course will be generic to all engineering disciplines and will not require specialized
preparation or prerequisites in any of the individual engineering disciplines.

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the different concepts and principles involved in design engineering.

CO 2 Apply design thinking while learning and practicing engineering.
CO 3 Develop innovative, reliable, sustainable and economically viable designs
incorporating knowledge in engineering.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 1 1 1
CO 2 2 1 1 2
CO 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
 HUMANITIES
Assessment Pattern

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination (ESE) Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B.
Part A : 30 marks
part B : 70 marks
Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions.
Part B contains 2 case study questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question carry 14 marks and can have maximum 2 sub questions.

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

1 2 Examination
Remember 5 5 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 35 35 70
Analyse - - -
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
 HUMANITIES
Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Appreciate the different concepts and principles involved in design
engineering.

1. State how engineering design is different from other kinds of design

2. List the different stages in a design process.

3. Describedesign thinking.

4. State the function of prototyping and proofing in engineering design.

5. Write notes on the following concepts in connection with design engineering 1) Modular Design,
2) Life Cycle Design , 3) Value Engineering, 4) Concurrent Engineering, and 5) Reverse Engineering

6. State design rights.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) Apply design thinking while learning and practicing engineering.

1. Construct the iterative process for design thinking in developing simple products like a pen,
umbrella, bag, etc.

2. Show with an example how divergent-convergent thinking helps in generating alternative designs
and then how to narrow down to the best design.

3. Describe how a problem-based learning helps in creating better design engineering solutions.

4. Discuss as an engineer, how ethics play a decisive role in your designs

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Develop innovative, reliable, sustainable and economically viable designs
incorporating different segments of knowledge in engineering.

1. Illustratethe development of any simple product by passing through the different stages of design
process

2. Show thegraphical design communication with the help of detailed 2D or 3D drawings for any
simple product.

3. Describe how to develop new designs for simple products through bio-mimicry.
 HUMANITIES
Model Question paper

Page 1 of 2
Reg No.: Name:
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
THIRD/FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: EST 200
Course Name: DESIGN AND ENGINEERING
Max. Marks: 100Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
Use only hand sketches

(1) Write aboutthe basic design process.

(2) Describe how to finalize the design objectives.
(3) State the role of divergent-convergent questioning in design thinking.
(4) Discuss how to perform design thinking in a team managing the conflicts.
(5) Show how engineering sketches and drawings convey designs.
(6) Explain the role of mathematics and physics in design engineering process.
(7) Distinguish between project-based learning and problem-based learning in design
engineering.
(8) Describe how concepts like value engineering , concurrent engineering and reverse
engineering influence engineering designs?
(9) Show how designs are varied based on the aspects of production methods, life span,
reliability and environment?
(10) Explain how economics influence the engineering designs?
(10x3 marks =30 marks)

Part B
Answer any ONE question from each module. Each question carry 14 marks

Module 1
(11) Show the designing of a wrist watch going through the various stages of the design
process. Use hand sketches to illustrate the processes.
or
(12) Find the customer requirements for designing a new car showroom. Show how the
design objectives were finalized considering the design constraints?
 HUMANITIES
Module 2
(13) Illustrate the design thinking approach for designing a bag for college students within a
limited budget. Describe each stage of the process and the iterative procedure
involved. Use hand sketches to support your arguments.
or
(14) Construct a number of possible designs and then refine them to narrow down to the
best design for a drug trolley used in hospitals. Show how the divergent-convergent
thinking helps in the process. Provide your rationale for each step by using hand
sketches only.

Module 3
(15) Graphically communicate the design of a thermo flask used to keep hot coffee. Draw
the detailed 2D drawings of the same with design detailing, material selection, scale
drawings, dimensions, tolerances, etc. Use only hand sketches.
or
(16) Describe the role of mathematical modelling in design engineering. Show how
mathematics and physics play a role in designing a lifting mechanism to raise 100 kg of
weight to a floor at a height of 10 meters in a construction site.

Module 4
(17) Show the development of a nature inspired design for a solar poweredbus waiting shed
beside a highway. Relate between natural and man-made designs. Use hand sketches
to support your arguments.
or
(18) Show the design of a simple sofa and then depict how the design changes when
considering 1) aesthetics and 2) ergonomics into consideration. Give hand sketches and
explanations to justify the changes in designs.

Module 5
(19) Examine the changes in the design of a foot wear with constraints of 1) production
methods, 2) life span requirement, 3) reliability issues and 4) environmental factors.
Use hand sketches and give proper rationalization for the changes in design.
or
(20) Describe the how to estimate the cost of a particular design using ANY of the following:
i) a website, ii) the layout of a plant, iii) the elevation of a building, iv) anelectrical or
electronic system or device and v) a car.
Show how economics will influence the engineering designs. Use hand sketches to support
your arguments.

(5x14 marks =70 marks)

Page 2 of 2
 HUMANITIES
Syllabus

Module 1
Design Process:- Introduction to Design and Engineering Design, Defining a Design
Process-:Detailing Customer Requirements, Setting Design Objectives, Identifying
Constraints, Establishing Functions, Generating Design Alternatives and Choosing a
Design.

Module 2
Design Thinking Approach:-Introduction to Design Thinking, Iterative Design
Thinking Process Stages: Empathize, Define, Ideate, Prototype and Test. Design
Thinking as Divergent-Convergent Questioning. Design Thinking in a Team
Environment.

Module 3
Design Communication (Languages of Engineering Design):-Communicating
Designs Graphically, Communicating Designs Orally and in Writing. Mathematical
Modeling In Design, Prototyping and Proofing the Design.

Module 4
Design Engineering Concepts:-Project-based Learning and Problem-based Learning
in Design.Modular Design and Life Cycle Design Approaches. Application of Bio-
mimicry,Aesthetics and Ergonomics in Design. Value Engineering, Concurrent
Engineering, and Reverse Engineering in Design.

Module 5
Expediency, Economics and Environment in Design Engineering:-Design for
Production, Use, and Sustainability. Engineering Economics in Design. Design
Rights. Ethics in Design

Text Books
1) YousefHaik, SangarappillaiSivaloganathan, Tamer M. Shahin, Engineering Design Process,
Cengage Learning 2003, Third Edition, ISBN-10: 9781305253285,

2) Voland, G., Engineering by Design, Pearson India 2014, Second Edition, ISBN 9332535051

Reference Books
1. Philip Kosky, Robert Balmer, William Keat, George Wise, Exploring Engineering, Fourth
Edition: An Introduction to Engineering and Design, Academic Press 2015, 4th Edition,
ISBN: 9780128012420.
2. Clive L. Dym, Engineering Design: A Project-Based Introduction, John Wiley & Sons,
New York 2009, Fourth Edition, ISBN: 978-1-118-32458-5
3. Nigel Cross, Design Thinking: Understanding How Designers Think and Work, Berg
Publishers 2011, First Edition, ISBN: 978-1847886361
4. Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J., Grote, K.-H., Engineering Design: A Systematic
Approach, Springer 2007, Third Edition, ISBN 978-1-84628-319-2
 HUMANITIES
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Module 1: Design Process
1.1 Introduction to Design and Engineering Design.
What does it mean to design something? How Is
engineering design different from other kinds of design? 1
Where and when do engineers design? What are the basic
vocabularyin engineering design? How to learn and do
engineering design.
1.2 Defining a Design Process-: Detailing Customer
Requirements.
How to do engineering design? Illustrate the process with 1
an example. How to identify the customer requirements of
design?
1.3 Defining a Design Process-: Setting Design Objectives,
Identifying Constraints, Establishing Functions.
How to finalize the design objectives? How to identify the 1
design constraints? How to express the functions a design
in engineering terms?
1.4 Defining a Design Process-: Generating Design
Alternatives and Choosing a Design.
1
How to generate or create feasible design alternatives?
How to identify the "best possible design”?
1.5 Case Studies:- Stages of Design Process.
Conduct exercises for designing simple products going 1
through the different stages of design process.
2 Module 2: Design Thinking Approach
2.1 Introduction to Design Thinking
How does the design thinking approach help engineers in 1
creating innovative and efficient designs?
2.2 Iterative Design Thinking Process Stages: Empathize,
Define, Ideate, Prototype and Test.
How can the engineers arrive at better designs utilizing 1
the iterative design thinking process (in which knowledge
acquired in the later stages can be applied back to the
earlier stages)?
2.3 Design Thinking as Divergent-Convergent Questioning.
Describe how to create a number of possible designs and 1
then how to refine and narrow down to the 'best design'.
2.4 Design Thinking in a Team Environment.
How to perform design thinking as a team managing the 1
conflicts ?
2.5 Case Studies: Design Thinking Approach.
1
Conduct exercises using the design thinking approach for
 HUMANITIES
designing any simple products within a limited time and
budget
3 Module 3: Design Communication (Languages of Engineering Design)
3.1 Communicating Designs Graphically.
1
How do engineering sketches and drawings convey designs?
3.2 Communicating Designs Orally and in Writing.
How can a design be communicated through oral 1
presentation or technical reports efficiently?
First Series Examination
3.3 Mathematical Modelling in Design.
How do mathematics and physics become a part of the 1
design process?
3.4 Prototyping and Proofing the Design.
1
How to predict whether the design will function well or not?
3.5 Case Studies: Communicating Designs Graphically.
Conduct exercises for design communication through
detailed 2D or 3D drawings of simple products with 1
design detailing, material selection, scale drawings,
dimensions, tolerances, etc.
4 Module 4: Design Engineering Concepts
4.1 Project-based Learning and Problem-based Learning in 1
Design.
How engineering students can learn design engineering
through projects?
How students can take up problems to learn design
engineering?
4.2 Modular Design and Life Cycle Design Approaches. 1
What is modular approach in design engineering? How it
helps?
How the life cycle design approach influences design
decisions?
4.3 Application of Bio-mimicry, Aesthetics and Ergonomics 1
in Design.
How do aesthetics and ergonomics change engineering
designs?
How do the intelligence in nature inspire engineering
designs? What are the common examples of bio-mimicry
in engineering?
4.4 Value Engineering, Concurrent Engineering, and Reverse 1
Engineering in Design.
How do concepts like value engineering , concurrent
engineering and reverse engineering influence
engineering designs?
4.5 Case Studies: Bio-mimicry based Designs. 1
Conduct exercises to develop new designs for simple
 HUMANITIES
products using bio-mimicry and train students to bring out
new nature inspired designs.
5 Module 5: Expediency, Economics and Environment in Design
Engineering
5.1 Design for Production, Use, and Sustainability. 1
How designs are finalized based on the aspects of
production methods, life span, reliability and
environment?
5.2 Engineering Economics in Design. 1
How to estimate the cost of a particular design and how
will economics influence the engineering designs?
5.3 Design Rights. 1
What are design rights and how can an engineer put it
into practice?
5.4 Ethics in Design. 1
How do ethics play a decisive role in engineering design?
5.5 Case Studies: Design for Production, Use, and 1
Sustainability.
Conduct exercises using simple products to show how designs
change with constraints of production methods, life span
requirement, reliability issues and environmental factors.
Second Series Examination
 HUMANITIES

Code. Course Name L T P Hrs Credit

HUT 200 Professional Ethics 2 0 0 2 2

Preamble:To enable students to create awareness on ethics and human values.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Understand the core values that shape the ethical behaviour of a professional.
CO 2 Adopt a good character and follow an ethical life.
Explain the role and responsibility in technological development by keeping personal ethics
CO 3 and legal ethics.
Solve moral and ethical problems through exploration and assessment by established
CO 4 experiments.
Apply the knowledge of human values and social values to contemporary ethical values and
CO 5 global issues.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO1 PO1 PO1

1 0 1 2
CO 1 2 2
CO 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3 2
CO 5 3 2

Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment Tests
Bloom’s category End Semester Exam
1 2
Remember 15 15 30
Understood 20 20 40
Apply 15 15 30
Mark distribution
Total
CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

 HUMANITIES
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Tests (2 Nos) : 25 marks
Assignments/Quiz : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions
with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions.
Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Define integrity and point out ethical values.
2. Describe the qualities required to live a peaceful life.
3. Explain the role of engineers in modern society.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Derive the codes of ethics.
2. Differentiate consensus and controversy.
3. Discuss in detail about character and confidence.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the role of professional’s ethics in technological development.
2. Distinguish between self interest and conflicts of interest.
3. Review on industrial standards and legal ethics.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Illustrate the role of engineers as experimenters.
2. Interpret the terms safety and risk.
3. Show how the occupational crimes are resolved by keeping the rights of employees.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Exemplify the engineers as managers.
2. Investigate the causes and effects of acid rain with a case study.
3. Explorate the need of environmental ethics in technological development.
 HUMANITIES
Model Question paper
QP CODE: Reg No: _

PAGES:3 Name : _

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY THIRD/FOURTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: HUT 200

Course Name: PROFESSIONAL ETHICS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define empathy and honesty.

2. Briefly explain about morals, values and ethics.

3. Interpret the two forms of self-respect.

4. List out the models of professional roles.

5. Indicate the advantages of using standards.

6. Point out the conditions required to define a valid consent?

7. Identify the conflicts of interests with an example?

8. Recall confidentiality.

9. Conclude the features of biometric ethics.

10. Name any three professional societies and their role relevant to engineers.

(10x3 = 30 marks)

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

MODULE I

11. a) Classify the relationship between ethical values and law?

b) Compare between caring and sharing. (10+4 = 14 marks)

Or

12. a) Exemplify a comprehensive review about integrity and respect for others.
 HUMANITIES
b) Discuss about co-operation and commitment. (8+6 = 14 marks)

MODULE II

13.a) Explain the three main levels of moral developments, deviced by Kohlberg.

b) Differentiate moral codes and optimal codes. (10+4 = 14 marks)

Or

14. a) Extrapolate the duty ethics and right ethics.

b) Discuss in detail the three types of inquiries in engineering ethics (8+6 = 14 marks)

MODULE III

Summarize the following features of morally responsible engineers.

(i) Moral autonomy (ii) Accountability

b)Explain the rights of employees (8+6 = 14 marks)

Or

16. a) Explain the reasons for Chernobyl mishap ?

b) Describe the methods to improve collegiality and loyalty. (8+6 = 14 marks)

MODULE IV

17.a) Execute collegiality with respect to commitment, respect and connectedness.

b) Identify conflicts of interests with an example. (8+6 = 14 marks)

Or

18. a) Explain in detail about professional rights and employee rights.

b) Exemplify engineers as managers.
MODULE V

19.a) Evaluate the technology transfer and appropriate technology.

b) Explain about computer and internet ethics. (8+6 = 14 marks)
Or

20. a) Investigate the causes and effects of acid rain with a case study.
b) Conclude the features of ecocentric and biocentric ethics. (8+6 = 14 marks)
 HUMANITIES
Syllabus

Module 1 – Human Values.

Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity- Academic integrity-Work Ethics- Service Learning- Civic Virtue-
Respect for others- Living peacefully- Caring and Sharing- Honestly- courage-Cooperation commitment-
Empathy-Self Confidence -Social Expectations.

Module 2 - Engineering Ethics & Professionalism.

Senses of Engineering Ethics - Variety of moral issues- Types of inquiry- Moral dilemmas –Moral Autonomy –
Kohlberg’s theory- Gilligan’s theory- Consensus and Controversy-Profession and Professionalism- Models of
professional roles-Theories about right action –Self interest-Customs and Religion- Uses of Ethical Theories.

Module 3- Engineering as social Experimentation.

Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters- Codes of Ethics- Plagiarism-

A balanced outlook on law - Challenges case study- Bhopal gas tragedy.

Module 4- Responsibilities and Rights.

Collegiality and loyalty – Managing conflict- Respect for authority- Collective bargaining- Confidentiality-
Role of confidentiality in moral integrity-Conflicts of interest- Occupational crime- Professional rights-
Employee right- IPR Discrimination.

Module 5- Global Ethical Issues.

Multinational Corporations- Environmental Ethics- Business Ethics- Computer Ethics -Role in Technological
Development-Engineers as Managers- Consulting Engineers- Engineers as Expert witnesses and advisors-Moral
leadership.

Text Book

1. M Govindarajan, S Natarajan and V S Senthil Kumar, Engineering Ethics, PHI Learning

Private Ltd, New Delhi,2012.

2. R S Naagarazan, A text book on professional ethics and human values, New age international
(P) limited ,New Delhi,2006.

Reference Books

1. Mike W Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering,4th edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,2014.
2. Charles D Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India, New
Jersey,2004.
3. Charles E Harris, Michael S Protchard and Michael J Rabins, Engineering Ethics- Concepts and
cases, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United states,2005.
4. http://www.slideword.org/slidestag.aspx/human-values-and-Professional-ethics.
 HUMANITIES

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

SL.N Topic No. of Lectures

o 25
1 Module 1 – Human Values.

1.1 Morals, values and Ethics, Integrity, Academic Integrity,Work Ethics 1

1.2 Service Learning, Civic Virtue, Respect for others, Living peacefully 1
1.3 Caring and Sharing, Honesty, Courage, Co-operation commitment 2
1.4 Empathy, Self Confidence, Social Expectations 1
2 Module 2- Engineering Ethics & Professionalism.

2.1 Senses of Engineering Ethics, Variety of moral issues, Types of inquiry 1

2.2 Moral dilemmas, Moral Autonomy, Kohlberg’s theory 1
Gilligan’s theory, Consensus and Controversy,Profession&
2.3 2
Professionalism, Models of professional roles, Theories about right action
2.4 Self interest-Customs and Religion, Uses of Ethical Theories 1
3 Module 3- Engineering as social Experimentation.

3.1 Engineering as Experimentation, Engineers as responsible Experimenters 1

3.2 Codes of Ethics,Plagiarism, A balanced outlook on law 2
3.3 Challenger case study, Bhopal gas tragedy 2
4 Module 4- Responsibilities and Rights.

4.1 Collegiality and loyalty, Managing conflict, Respect for authority 1

Collective bargaining, Confidentiality, Role of confidentiality in moral
4.2 2
integrity, Conflicts of interest
Occupational crime, Professional rights, Employee right, IPR
4.3 2
Discrimination
5 Module 5- Global Ethical Issues.

Multinational Corporations, Environmental Ethics, Business Ethics,

5.1 2
Computer Ethics
5.2 Role in Technological Development, Moral leadership 1
Engineers as Managers, Consulting Engineers, Engineers as Expert
5.3 2
witnesses and advisors
 HUMANITIES

SEMESTER -4
 HUMANITIES
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MCN202 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA 2 0 0 NIL

Preamble:

The study of their own country constitution and studying the importance environment as
well as understanding their own human rights help the students to concentrate on their day
to day discipline. It also gives the knowledge and strength to face the society and people.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the background of the present constitution of India and features.

CO 2 Utilize the fundamental rights and duties.

CO 3 Understand the working of the union executive, parliament and judiciary.

CO 4 Understand the working of the state executive, legislature and judiciary.

CO 5 Utilize the special provisions and statutory institutions.

CO 6 Show national and patriotic spirit as responsible citizens of the country

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 2 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3
CO 5 3 2 3 3
CO 6 3 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 20 20 40
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
 HUMANITIES
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of
which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions
and carry 14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1 Discuss the historical background of the Indian constitution.

2 Explain the salient features of the Indian constitution.

3 Discuss the importance of preamble in the implementation of constitution.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1 What are fundamental rights ? Examine each of them.

2 Examine the scope of freedom of speech and expression underlying the constitution.

3 The thumb impression of an accused is taken by the police against his will. He contends

that this is a violation of his rights under Art 20(3) of the constitution. Decide.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1 Explain the powers of the President to suspend the fundamental rights during emergency.
 HUMANITIES
2 Explain the salient features of appeal by special leave.

3. List the constitutional powers of President.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1 Discuss the constitutional powers of Governor.

2 Examine the writ jurisdiction of High court.

3 Discuss the qualification and disqualification of membership of state legislature.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1 Discuss the duties and powers of comptroller of auditor general.

2 Discuss the proclamation of emergency.

3 A state levies tax on motor vehicles used in the state, for the purpose of maintaining roads

in the state. X challenges the levy of the tax on the ground that it violates the freedom of

interstate commerce guaranteed under Art 301. Decide.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1 Explain the advantages of citizenship.

2 List the important principles contained in the directive principles of state policy.

3 Discuss the various aspects contained in the preamble of the constitution

Model Question paper

PART A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1 Define and explain the term constitution.

2 Explain the need and importance of Preamble.

3 What is directive principle of state policy?

4 Define the State.

5 List the functions of Attorney general of India.

 HUMANITIES
6 Explain the review power of Supreme court.

7 List the qualifications of Governor.

8 Explain the term and removal of Judges in High court.

9 Explain the powers of public service commission.

10 List three types of emergency under Indian constitution.

(10X3=30marks)

PART B

(Answer on question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks)

Module 1

11 Discuss the various methods of acquiring Indian citizenship.

12 Examine the salient features of the Indian constitution.

Module 2

13 A high court passes a judgement against X. X desires to file a writ petition in the supreme

court under Art32, on the ground that the judgement violates his fundamental rights.

Advise him whether he can do so.

14 What is meant by directive principles of State policy? List the directives.

Module3

15 Describe the procedure of election and removal of the President of India.

16 Supreme court may in its discretion grant special leave to appeal. Examine the situation.

Module 4

17 Discuss the powers of Governor.

18 X filed a writ petition under Art 226 which was dismissed. Subsequently, he filed a writ

petition under Art 32 of the constitution, seeking the same remedy. The Government

argued that the writ petition should be dismissed, on the ground of res judicata. Decide.

Module 5
 HUMANITIES
19 Examine the scope of the financial relations between the union and the states.

20 Discuss the effects of proclamation of emergency.

(14X5=70marks)

Syllabus

Module 1 Definition, historical back ground, features, preamble, territory, citizenship.

Module 2 State, fundamental rights, directive principles, duties.

Module 3 The machinery of the union government.

Module 4 Government machinery in the states

Module 5 The federal system, Statutory Institutions, miscellaneous provisions.

Text Books

1 D D Basu, Introduction to the constitution of India, Lexis Nexis, New Delhi, 24e, 2019

2 PM Bhakshi, The constitution of India, Universal Law, 14e, 2017

Reference Books

1 Ministry of law and justice, The constitution of India, Govt of India, New Delhi, 2019.

2 JN Pandey, The constitutional law of India, Central Law agency, Allahabad, 51e, 2019

3 MV Pylee, India’s Constitution, S Chand and company, New Delhi, 16e, 2016

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Module 1
1.1 Definition of constitution, historical back ground, salient features 1
of the constitution.
1.2 Preamble of the constitution, union and its territory. 1
1.3 Meaning of citizenship, types, termination of citizenship. 2
2 Module 2
2.1 Definition of state, fundamental rights, general nature, 2
classification, right to equality ,right to freedom , right against
exploitation
 HUMANITIES
2.2 Right to freedom of religion, cultural and educational rights, right 2
to constitutional remedies. Protection in respect of conviction for
offences.
2.3 Directive principles of state policy, classification of directives, 2
fundamental duties.
3 Module 3
3.1 The Union executive, the President, the vice President, the 2
council of ministers, the Prime minister, Attorney-General,
functions.
3.2 The parliament, composition, Rajya sabha, Lok sabha, 2
qualification and disqualification of membership, functions of
parliament.

3.3 Union judiciary, the supreme court, jurisdiction, appeal by special 1

leave.
4 Module 4
4.1 The State executive, the Governor, the council of ministers, the 2
Chief minister, advocate general, union Territories.
4.2 The State Legislature, composition, qualification and 2
disqualification of membership, functions.
4.3 The state judiciary, the high court, jurisdiction, writs jurisdiction. 1
5 Module 5
5.1 Relations between the Union and the States, legislative relation, 1
administrative relation, financial Relations, Inter State council,
finance commission.
5.2 Emergency provision, freedom of trade commerce and inter 2
course, comptroller and auditor general of India, public Services,
public service commission, administrative Tribunals.
5.3 Official language, elections, special provisions relating to certain 2
classes, amendment of the Constitution.
 HUMANITIES
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
2 0 0 2
EST 200 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING

Preamble:
The purpose of this course is to
i) introduce the undergraduate engineering studentsthe fundamental principles of
design engineering,
ii) make them understand the steps involved in the design process and
iii) familiarize them with the basic tools used and approaches in design.
Students are expected to apply design thinking in learning as well as while practicing
engineering, which is very important and relevant for today. Case studies from various
practical situations will help the students realize that design is not only concerned about the
function but also many other factors like customer requirements, economics, reliability, etc.
along with a variety of life cycle issues.

The course will help students to consider aesthetics, ergonomics and sustainability factors in
designs and also to practice professional ethics while designing.

Prerequisite:

Nil.The course will be generic to all engineering disciplines and will not require specialized
preparation or prerequisites in any of the individual engineering disciplines.

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the different concepts and principles involved in design engineering.

CO 2 Apply design thinking while learning and practicing engineering.
CO 3 Develop innovative, reliable, sustainable and economically viable designs
incorporating knowledge in engineering.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 1 1 1
CO 2 2 1 1 2
CO 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
 HUMANITIES
Assessment Pattern

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination (ESE) Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B.
Part A : 30 marks
part B : 70 marks
Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions.
Part B contains 2 case study questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question carry 14 marks and can have maximum 2 sub questions.

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

1 2 Examination
Remember 5 5 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 35 35 70
Analyse - - -
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
 HUMANITIES
Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Appreciate the different concepts and principles involved in design
engineering.

1. State how engineering design is different from other kinds of design

2. List the different stages in a design process.

3. Describedesign thinking.

4. State the function of prototyping and proofing in engineering design.

5. Write notes on the following concepts in connection with design engineering 1) Modular Design,
2) Life Cycle Design , 3) Value Engineering, 4) Concurrent Engineering, and 5) Reverse Engineering

6. State design rights.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) Apply design thinking while learning and practicing engineering.

1. Construct the iterative process for design thinking in developing simple products like a pen,
umbrella, bag, etc.

2. Show with an example how divergent-convergent thinking helps in generating alternative designs
and then how to narrow down to the best design.

3. Describe how a problem-based learning helps in creating better design engineering solutions.

4. Discuss as an engineer, how ethics play a decisive role in your designs

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Develop innovative, reliable, sustainable and economically viable designs
incorporating different segments of knowledge in engineering.

1. Illustratethe development of any simple product by passing through the different stages of design
process

2. Show thegraphical design communication with the help of detailed 2D or 3D drawings for any
simple product.

3. Describe how to develop new designs for simple products through bio-mimicry.
 HUMANITIES
Model Question paper

Page 1 of 2
Reg No.: Name:
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
THIRD/FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: EST 200
Course Name: DESIGN AND ENGINEERING
Max. Marks: 100Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks
Use only hand sketches

(1) Write aboutthe basic design process.

(2) Describe how to finalize the design objectives.
(3) State the role of divergent-convergent questioning in design thinking.
(4) Discuss how to perform design thinking in a team managing the conflicts.
(5) Show how engineering sketches and drawings convey designs.
(6) Explain the role of mathematics and physics in design engineering process.
(7) Distinguish between project-based learning and problem-based learning in design
engineering.
(8) Describe how concepts like value engineering , concurrent engineering and reverse
engineering influence engineering designs?
(9) Show how designs are varied based on the aspects of production methods, life span,
reliability and environment?
(10) Explain how economics influence the engineering designs?
(10x3 marks =30 marks)

Part B
Answer any ONE question from each module. Each question carry 14 marks

Module 1
(11) Show the designing of a wrist watch going through the various stages of the design
process. Use hand sketches to illustrate the processes.
or
(12) Find the customer requirements for designing a new car showroom. Show how the
design objectives were finalized considering the design constraints?
 HUMANITIES
Module 2
(13) Illustrate the design thinking approach for designing a bag for college students within a
limited budget. Describe each stage of the process and the iterative procedure
involved. Use hand sketches to support your arguments.
or
(14) Construct a number of possible designs and then refine them to narrow down to the
best design for a drug trolley used in hospitals. Show how the divergent-convergent
thinking helps in the process. Provide your rationale for each step by using hand
sketches only.

Module 3
(15) Graphically communicate the design of a thermo flask used to keep hot coffee. Draw
the detailed 2D drawings of the same with design detailing, material selection, scale
drawings, dimensions, tolerances, etc. Use only hand sketches.
or
(16) Describe the role of mathematical modelling in design engineering. Show how
mathematics and physics play a role in designing a lifting mechanism to raise 100 kg of
weight to a floor at a height of 10 meters in a construction site.

Module 4
(17) Show the development of a nature inspired design for a solar poweredbus waiting shed
beside a highway. Relate between natural and man-made designs. Use hand sketches
to support your arguments.
or
(18) Show the design of a simple sofa and then depict how the design changes when
considering 1) aesthetics and 2) ergonomics into consideration. Give hand sketches and
explanations to justify the changes in designs.

Module 5
(19) Examine the changes in the design of a foot wear with constraints of 1) production
methods, 2) life span requirement, 3) reliability issues and 4) environmental factors.
Use hand sketches and give proper rationalization for the changes in design.
or
(20) Describe the how to estimate the cost of a particular design using ANY of the following:
i) a website, ii) the layout of a plant, iii) the elevation of a building, iv) anelectrical or
electronic system or device and v) a car.
Show how economics will influence the engineering designs. Use hand sketches to support
your arguments.

(5x14 marks =70 marks)

Page 2 of 2
 HUMANITIES
Syllabus

Module 1
Design Process:- Introduction to Design and Engineering Design, Defining a Design
Process-:Detailing Customer Requirements, Setting Design Objectives, Identifying
Constraints, Establishing Functions, Generating Design Alternatives and Choosing a
Design.

Module 2
Design Thinking Approach:-Introduction to Design Thinking, Iterative Design
Thinking Process Stages: Empathize, Define, Ideate, Prototype and Test. Design
Thinking as Divergent-Convergent Questioning. Design Thinking in a Team
Environment.

Module 3
Design Communication (Languages of Engineering Design):-Communicating
Designs Graphically, Communicating Designs Orally and in Writing. Mathematical
Modeling In Design, Prototyping and Proofing the Design.

Module 4
Design Engineering Concepts:-Project-based Learning and Problem-based Learning
in Design.Modular Design and Life Cycle Design Approaches. Application of Bio-
mimicry,Aesthetics and Ergonomics in Design. Value Engineering, Concurrent
Engineering, and Reverse Engineering in Design.

Module 5
Expediency, Economics and Environment in Design Engineering:-Design for
Production, Use, and Sustainability. Engineering Economics in Design. Design
Rights. Ethics in Design

Text Books
1) YousefHaik, SangarappillaiSivaloganathan, Tamer M. Shahin, Engineering Design Process,
Cengage Learning 2003, Third Edition, ISBN-10: 9781305253285,

2) Voland, G., Engineering by Design, Pearson India 2014, Second Edition, ISBN 9332535051

Reference Books
1. Philip Kosky, Robert Balmer, William Keat, George Wise, Exploring Engineering, Fourth
Edition: An Introduction to Engineering and Design, Academic Press 2015, 4th Edition,
ISBN: 9780128012420.
2. Clive L. Dym, Engineering Design: A Project-Based Introduction, John Wiley & Sons,
New York 2009, Fourth Edition, ISBN: 978-1-118-32458-5
3. Nigel Cross, Design Thinking: Understanding How Designers Think and Work, Berg
Publishers 2011, First Edition, ISBN: 978-1847886361
4. Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J., Grote, K.-H., Engineering Design: A Systematic
Approach, Springer 2007, Third Edition, ISBN 978-1-84628-319-2
 HUMANITIES
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Module 1: Design Process
1.1 Introduction to Design and Engineering Design.
What does it mean to design something? How Is
engineering design different from other kinds of design? 1
Where and when do engineers design? What are the basic
vocabularyin engineering design? How to learn and do
engineering design.
1.2 Defining a Design Process-: Detailing Customer
Requirements.
How to do engineering design? Illustrate the process with 1
an example. How to identify the customer requirements of
design?
1.3 Defining a Design Process-: Setting Design Objectives,
Identifying Constraints, Establishing Functions.
How to finalize the design objectives? How to identify the 1
design constraints? How to express the functions a design
in engineering terms?
1.4 Defining a Design Process-: Generating Design
Alternatives and Choosing a Design.
1
How to generate or create feasible design alternatives?
How to identify the "best possible design”?
1.5 Case Studies:- Stages of Design Process.
Conduct exercises for designing simple products going 1
through the different stages of design process.
2 Module 2: Design Thinking Approach
2.1 Introduction to Design Thinking
How does the design thinking approach help engineers in 1
creating innovative and efficient designs?
2.2 Iterative Design Thinking Process Stages: Empathize,
Define, Ideate, Prototype and Test.
How can the engineers arrive at better designs utilizing 1
the iterative design thinking process (in which knowledge
acquired in the later stages can be applied back to the
earlier stages)?
2.3 Design Thinking as Divergent-Convergent Questioning.
Describe how to create a number of possible designs and 1
then how to refine and narrow down to the 'best design'.
2.4 Design Thinking in a Team Environment.
How to perform design thinking as a team managing the 1
conflicts ?
2.5 Case Studies: Design Thinking Approach.
1
Conduct exercises using the design thinking approach for
 HUMANITIES
designing any simple products within a limited time and
budget
3 Module 3: Design Communication (Languages of Engineering Design)
3.1 Communicating Designs Graphically.
1
How do engineering sketches and drawings convey designs?
3.2 Communicating Designs Orally and in Writing.
How can a design be communicated through oral 1
presentation or technical reports efficiently?
First Series Examination
3.3 Mathematical Modelling in Design.
How do mathematics and physics become a part of the 1
design process?
3.4 Prototyping and Proofing the Design.
1
How to predict whether the design will function well or not?
3.5 Case Studies: Communicating Designs Graphically.
Conduct exercises for design communication through
detailed 2D or 3D drawings of simple products with 1
design detailing, material selection, scale drawings,
dimensions, tolerances, etc.
4 Module 4: Design Engineering Concepts
4.1 Project-based Learning and Problem-based Learning in 1
Design.
How engineering students can learn design engineering
through projects?
How students can take up problems to learn design
engineering?
4.2 Modular Design and Life Cycle Design Approaches. 1
What is modular approach in design engineering? How it
helps?
How the life cycle design approach influences design
decisions?
4.3 Application of Bio-mimicry, Aesthetics and Ergonomics 1
in Design.
How do aesthetics and ergonomics change engineering
designs?
How do the intelligence in nature inspire engineering
designs? What are the common examples of bio-mimicry
in engineering?
4.4 Value Engineering, Concurrent Engineering, and Reverse 1
Engineering in Design.
How do concepts like value engineering , concurrent
engineering and reverse engineering influence
engineering designs?
4.5 Case Studies: Bio-mimicry based Designs. 1
Conduct exercises to develop new designs for simple
 HUMANITIES
products using bio-mimicry and train students to bring out
new nature inspired designs.
5 Module 5: Expediency, Economics and Environment in Design
Engineering
5.1 Design for Production, Use, and Sustainability. 1
How designs are finalized based on the aspects of
production methods, life span, reliability and
environment?
5.2 Engineering Economics in Design. 1
How to estimate the cost of a particular design and how
will economics influence the engineering designs?
5.3 Design Rights. 1
What are design rights and how can an engineer put it
into practice?
5.4 Ethics in Design. 1
How do ethics play a decisive role in engineering design?
5.5 Case Studies: Design for Production, Use, and 1
Sustainability.
Conduct exercises using simple products to show how designs
change with constraints of production methods, life span
requirement, reliability issues and environmental factors.
Second Series Examination
 HUMANITIES

Code. Course Name L T P Hrs Credit

HUT 200 Professional Ethics 2 0 0 2 2

Preamble:To enable students to create awareness on ethics and human values.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Understand the core values that shape the ethical behaviour of a professional.
CO 2 Adopt a good character and follow an ethical life.
Explain the role and responsibility in technological development by keeping personal ethics
CO 3 and legal ethics.
Solve moral and ethical problems through exploration and assessment by established
CO 4 experiments.
Apply the knowledge of human values and social values to contemporary ethical values and
CO 5 global issues.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO1 PO1 PO1

1 0 1 2
CO 1 2 2
CO 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3 2
CO 5 3 2

Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment Tests
Bloom’s category End Semester Exam
1 2
Remember 15 15 30
Understood 20 20 40
Apply 15 15 30
Mark distribution
Total
CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

 HUMANITIES
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Tests (2 Nos) : 25 marks
Assignments/Quiz : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions
with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions.
Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Define integrity and point out ethical values.
2. Describe the qualities required to live a peaceful life.
3. Explain the role of engineers in modern society.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Derive the codes of ethics.
2. Differentiate consensus and controversy.
3. Discuss in detail about character and confidence.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Explain the role of professional’s ethics in technological development.
2. Distinguish between self interest and conflicts of interest.
3. Review on industrial standards and legal ethics.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Illustrate the role of engineers as experimenters.
2. Interpret the terms safety and risk.
3. Show how the occupational crimes are resolved by keeping the rights of employees.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Exemplify the engineers as managers.
2. Investigate the causes and effects of acid rain with a case study.
3. Explorate the need of environmental ethics in technological development.
 HUMANITIES
Model Question paper
QP CODE: Reg No: _

PAGES:3 Name : _

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY THIRD/FOURTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: HUT 200

Course Name: PROFESSIONAL ETHICS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define empathy and honesty.

2. Briefly explain about morals, values and ethics.

3. Interpret the two forms of self-respect.

4. List out the models of professional roles.

5. Indicate the advantages of using standards.

6. Point out the conditions required to define a valid consent?

7. Identify the conflicts of interests with an example?

8. Recall confidentiality.

9. Conclude the features of biometric ethics.

10. Name any three professional societies and their role relevant to engineers.

(10x3 = 30 marks)

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

MODULE I

11. a) Classify the relationship between ethical values and law?

b) Compare between caring and sharing. (10+4 = 14 marks)

Or

12. a) Exemplify a comprehensive review about integrity and respect for others.
 HUMANITIES
b) Discuss about co-operation and commitment. (8+6 = 14 marks)

MODULE II

13.a) Explain the three main levels of moral developments, deviced by Kohlberg.

b) Differentiate moral codes and optimal codes. (10+4 = 14 marks)

Or

14. a) Extrapolate the duty ethics and right ethics.

b) Discuss in detail the three types of inquiries in engineering ethics (8+6 = 14 marks)

MODULE III

Summarize the following features of morally responsible engineers.

(i) Moral autonomy (ii) Accountability

b)Explain the rights of employees (8+6 = 14 marks)

Or

16. a) Explain the reasons for Chernobyl mishap ?

b) Describe the methods to improve collegiality and loyalty. (8+6 = 14 marks)

MODULE IV

17.a) Execute collegiality with respect to commitment, respect and connectedness.

b) Identify conflicts of interests with an example. (8+6 = 14 marks)

Or

18. a) Explain in detail about professional rights and employee rights.

b) Exemplify engineers as managers.
MODULE V

19.a) Evaluate the technology transfer and appropriate technology.

b) Explain about computer and internet ethics. (8+6 = 14 marks)
Or

20. a) Investigate the causes and effects of acid rain with a case study.
b) Conclude the features of ecocentric and biocentric ethics. (8+6 = 14 marks)
 HUMANITIES
Syllabus

Module 1 – Human Values.

Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity- Academic integrity-Work Ethics- Service Learning- Civic Virtue-
Respect for others- Living peacefully- Caring and Sharing- Honestly- courage-Cooperation commitment-
Empathy-Self Confidence -Social Expectations.

Module 2 - Engineering Ethics & Professionalism.

Senses of Engineering Ethics - Variety of moral issues- Types of inquiry- Moral dilemmas –Moral Autonomy –
Kohlberg’s theory- Gilligan’s theory- Consensus and Controversy-Profession and Professionalism- Models of
professional roles-Theories about right action –Self interest-Customs and Religion- Uses of Ethical Theories.

Module 3- Engineering as social Experimentation.

Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters- Codes of Ethics- Plagiarism-

A balanced outlook on law - Challenges case study- Bhopal gas tragedy.

Module 4- Responsibilities and Rights.

Collegiality and loyalty – Managing conflict- Respect for authority- Collective bargaining- Confidentiality-
Role of confidentiality in moral integrity-Conflicts of interest- Occupational crime- Professional rights-
Employee right- IPR Discrimination.

Module 5- Global Ethical Issues.

Multinational Corporations- Environmental Ethics- Business Ethics- Computer Ethics -Role in Technological
Development-Engineers as Managers- Consulting Engineers- Engineers as Expert witnesses and advisors-Moral
leadership.

Text Book

1. M Govindarajan, S Natarajan and V S Senthil Kumar, Engineering Ethics, PHI Learning

Private Ltd, New Delhi,2012.

2. R S Naagarazan, A text book on professional ethics and human values, New age international
(P) limited ,New Delhi,2006.

Reference Books

1. Mike W Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering,4th edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,2014.
2. Charles D Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India, New
Jersey,2004.
3. Charles E Harris, Michael S Protchard and Michael J Rabins, Engineering Ethics- Concepts and
cases, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United states,2005.
4. http://www.slideword.org/slidestag.aspx/human-values-and-Professional-ethics.
 HUMANITIES

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

SL.N Topic No. of Lectures

o 25
1 Module 1 – Human Values.

1.1 Morals, values and Ethics, Integrity, Academic Integrity,Work Ethics 1

1.2 Service Learning, Civic Virtue, Respect for others, Living peacefully 1
1.3 Caring and Sharing, Honesty, Courage, Co-operation commitment 2
1.4 Empathy, Self Confidence, Social Expectations 1
2 Module 2- Engineering Ethics & Professionalism.

2.1 Senses of Engineering Ethics, Variety of moral issues, Types of inquiry 1

2.2 Moral dilemmas, Moral Autonomy, Kohlberg’s theory 1
Gilligan’s theory, Consensus and Controversy,Profession&
2.3 2
Professionalism, Models of professional roles, Theories about right action
2.4 Self interest-Customs and Religion, Uses of Ethical Theories 1
3 Module 3- Engineering as social Experimentation.

3.1 Engineering as Experimentation, Engineers as responsible Experimenters 1

3.2 Codes of Ethics,Plagiarism, A balanced outlook on law 2
3.3 Challenger case study, Bhopal gas tragedy 2
4 Module 4- Responsibilities and Rights.

4.1 Collegiality and loyalty, Managing conflict, Respect for authority 1

Collective bargaining, Confidentiality, Role of confidentiality in moral
4.2 2
integrity, Conflicts of interest
Occupational crime, Professional rights, Employee right, IPR
4.3 2
Discrimination
5 Module 5- Global Ethical Issues.

Multinational Corporations, Environmental Ethics, Business Ethics,

5.1 2
Computer Ethics
5.2 Role in Technological Development, Moral leadership 1
Engineers as Managers, Consulting Engineers, Engineers as Expert
5.3 2
witnesses and advisors
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PLASTIC MATERIALS
301 PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, the first two are the detailed study of monomer preparation,
polymerisation properties, and application of PE,PP,PVCand PMMA. The second and third
module contains PU, styrene and its copolymers, fluorine containing plastics. Last two modules
include aliphatic and aromatic polyamide and thermoset polymers. After the completion of this
course, students will be able to understand advantages and disadvantages of plastics, synthesis,
properties and application of plastics.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer science.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the importance of plastic materials

CO 2 Describe the structure ,monomer synthesis and properties of chlorine containing

CO 3 Explain the manufacturing processes and application of fluorine containing and

CO 4 Describe the comparison between aliphatic and aromatic amide.

CO 5 Explain the manufacturing processes,properties and applications of thermosets

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CO 1 2 2

CO 2 2 2

CO 3 2 2

CO 4 2 2

CO 5 2 2

Assessment Pattern
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Continuous Assessment
Tests End Semester
Bloom’s Category
Examination
1 2

Remember 10 10 10

Understand 20 20 20

Apply 20 20 70

Analyse

Evaluate

Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of plastics POLYMER ENGINEERING

2.Explain the applications and properties of plastics in different sectors

3Explain the differences between high pressure and low pressure process

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. How are the properties of acrylates related to their structure? and discuss important
applications and outstanding characteristics of acrylates

2. Compare the structure of polyvinyl chloride with that of polyethylene and explain how the
structure related to its properties

3. Name the important copolymers of PVC and mention their important properties and uses

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Name the fluorine containing polymers and give their structures and specific characteristics

2.Dicuss the relation between the structure and the properties of polyacetal resin

3. Explain the important reactions of isocyanates and their significances in the formation of PU
resin

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Mention the important cellulose plastics commercially produced and explain different sources
of cellulose.

2.Explain condensation of polycarbonate polymers and the various processes by which they can
be produced.

3. How are different nylons named? Explain how the structures of nylons are related to their
properties.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the thermosetting and thermoplastic behaviour of a polymer.

2. Explain on ‘introduction of UF-resin as a commercial thermoset’ and the commercially

important principal aminoplasts in general

3.How are PF-moulding compounds prepared?.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT301 PLASTIC MATERIALS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. What is irradiated polyethylene?

2. Name the important copolymers of PVC mention their important properties and uses.
3. What are the sources for the monomer of polyethylene?
4. What are the outstanding characteristics and uses of polyacrylates ?
5. What are the applications of PTFE?
6. What are epoxy polymers?
7. Describe the history of formation of PS.
8. What are the properties of nylon- 66
9. What is a thiourea resin?
10. What is novolac?

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a)How is HDPE prepared industrially? Discuss briefly the various process and their
salient features (9M)

b) What is irradiated polyethylene? What are its important properties? (5M)

12. a) Describe with neat diagram, the UNIPOL process of manufacturing polypropylene
(9M)

b)Compare the properties of LDPE and HDPE. (5M)

Module II

13. a) With suitable diagram explain how vinyl chloride monomer is prepared industrially
from acetylene (8M)

b) What are the outstanding characteristics and uses of polyacrylates?

(6M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
14. a) What are the properties and synthesis methods of PVA? (8M)

b)What is vinylidene chloride? What are its important properties and applications?
(6M)

Module -III

15. a)What is polyoxymethylene? How is it manufactured? What are their important

properties and applications? (9M)

b) What is expanded polystyrene? How is it manufactured? (5M)

16 a) With necessary flow diagrams, describe the process of manufacturing PTFE,

Which are the important uses and properties of PTFE? (6M)

b) Explain the methods of preparation of ABS and SAN polymers,

What are their properties and applications? (8M)

Module -IV

17 a) Describe the preparation, properties and uses of acrylamide. (6M)

b)Describe the preparation, properties and uses of aramide? (8M)

18 a)Describe the preparation, properties and uses of polycarbonate (7M)

b) Describe the preparation,properties and uses of epoxies (7M)

Module -V

19 a) Describe the preparation,properties and uses of MF resin. (6M)

b) With necessary flow diagrams, describe the process of manufacturing of one -stage

and two-stage moulding compound (8M)

20 a) Mention how urea is prepared and explain the different types of reactions involved in

the production of UF resin (7M)

b)Describe the reaction between phenol and formaldehyde and process of forming

novolac resin. (7M)

..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1:Brief history of plastics - Advantages and disadvantages - thermoplastics

and thermosets. monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of LDPE,
HDPE, cross linked and chlorinated PE and PP

Module 2:Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PVC,

polyvinylidene chloride, PVA, polyvinyl acetate, PMMA and PAN

Module 3:Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PU, PTFE,

polyvinyl fluoride polyvinylidene fluoride.,PS,HIPS,ABS,SAN, and
polyacetal.Thermoplastic polyesters, unsaturated polyester laminating resins, polyester
moulding compositions, fibre and film forming polyesters.

Module 4:Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of nylon-5, 6, 66,

6,12,aromatic polyamide and polyacrylamide ,regenerated cellulose,PC and epoxies

Module 5:.Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PF, preparation

of phenol formaldehyde moulding powders, PF laminates. novolac, resol, MF and UF resins

Text Books

1. J.A.Brydson, Plastics Materials, Newnes Butterworth Heinmann

Reference Books

1 K.J. Saunders, “Organic Polymer Chemistry, Chapman and Hall materials”,

2 Encyclopaedia of Polymer Science and Technology.
3 Industrial Polymers - Ulrich, Hanser Pub. Munich, N.Y.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures

1 Polyethylene (9 hours)

1.1 Brief history of plastics - Advantages and disadvantages - thermoplastics and 2

thermosets.

1.2 monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of LDPE 3

1.3 HDPE, cross linked and chlorinated PE and PP 4

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

2 Chlorine containing and Acrylic plastic (9 hours)

2.1 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PVC 2

2.2 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of 4

polyvinylidene chloride, PVA

2.3 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of 3

polyvinyl acetate, PMMA and PAN

3 Fluorine containing and styrene plastics(9 hours)

3.1 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PU, 2

PTFE,

3.2 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of polyvinyl 2

fluoride polyvinylidene fluoride,PS

3.3 Preparation,, properties and application of HIPS,ABS,SAN, 5

polyacetal.Thermoplastic polyesters, unsaturated polyester laminating resins,
polyester moulding compositions, fibre and film forming polyesters.

4 Polyamides (9 hours)

4.1 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of nylon-5, 2

nylon 6.

4.2 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of nylon 6 2

6,nylon 6 12

4.3 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of aromatic 5

polyamide,acrylamide regenerated cellulose,PC and epoxies

5 Thermosets(9 hours)

5.1 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PF, 3

5.2 preparation of phenol formaldehyde moulding powders, novolac, resol and 3

PF laminates.

5.3 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of MF and 3

UF resins
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT303 FLUID MECHANICS
PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This course introduces students to the concepts of fluid mechanics that are
relevant and used for applications in process industries. This course summarizes various
properties of fluids and distinguishes the different types of flow systems, examine the
mathematical models for flow behaviour in different systems utilizing the principles of
kinematics, explain the concepts of flow in boundary layers and select suitable flow
measuring devices, fluid moving machineries.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Fluid Mechanics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply the basic properties and transport laws to fluid in different conditions like
statics and dynamics.
CO 2 Apply the fluid flow principles in the application of the mass, momentum and
energy equations.
CO 3 Design a piping network using the concept of fluid dynamics
CO 4 Select pumps, flow measuring devices in process industries with the knowledge of
the basic principles.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 1
CO 2 2 3 1
CO 3 2 2 3
CO 4 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 20 20
Apply 10 20 30
Analyse 20 20
Evaluate 10
Create 10
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): To apply the basic properties and transport laws to fluid in
different conditions like statics and dynamics.
1. Differentiate between absolute viscosity and apparent viscosity.
2. What is rheology? Explain the rheological classification of fluids.
3. Define Pascal’s law.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): To apply the fluid flow principles in the application of the mass,
momentum and energy equations.
1. An oil of specific gravity 0.7 is flowing through a pipe of diameter 30 cm at the rate 500
lit/sec. Find the head loss due to friction and power required to maintain the flow for a length
of 1000 m. Take viscosity is 5 cp and f = 0.79 NRe0.25.
2. Derive momentum balance equation.
3. What are the correction factors incorporated in the Bernoulli’s equation. Explain.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):To design a piping network using the concept of fluid dynamics
1. Derive the f v/s NRe relationship in turbulent flow.
2. Write the applications of friction factor chart.
3. Exhaust gases from a power plant passes through a 30 x 45 cm rectangular duct at an
average velocity of 15 m/s. The total length of the duct is 80 m and there are two 900 bends
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

(Kf = 0.9). The gas is at room temperature and about 1 atm. And the properties are similar to
those of air. Calculate the pressure drop in the duct and the power required to overcome the
pressure losses.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): To judge the selection of pumps and flow measuring devices in
process industries with the knowledge of the basic principles.
1. Compare Rotary pumps and Reciprocating pumps.
2. What are characteristic curves in centrifugal pump?
3. Explain different flow measuring devices with neat diagram.

Model Question paper

QP CODE:Reg No:______________

PAGES:3Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIFTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREEEXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT303 FLUID MECHANICS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define Newton’s law of viscosity.

2. Discuss the thermal (with respect to temperature) variation of viscosity of gases.
3. Give the importance of Reynolds number.
4. Differentiate between steady and unsteady flow.
5. Why the kinetic energy correction factor is included in the Bernoulli’s equation.
6. Explain nose bleeding and shortness of breath at high elevation.
7. Derive Hagen Poiseuille equation.
8. What is frictional velocity?
9. What is NPSH? Explain.
10. Differentiate between Pipes and tubes.
(10x3 = 30 marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) A tubular centrifuge is to separate chlorobenzene with a density of 1090 Kg/m3 from
an aqueous wash liquor having a density of 1010 Kg/m3. The centrifuge has an inside dia of
200mm and rotates at 10000 rpm. The free liquid surface inside the bowl is 60 mm from the
axis of rotation. If the centrifuge bowl is to contain equal masses of two liquids. What should
be the radial distance from the axis to the top of the over flow of the heavy liquid.
b) Derive Barometric equation. (10+4 = 14 marks)

12. a) A simple U tube manometer is installed across an orifice meter. The manometer isfilled
with mercury (specific gravity=13.6) and the liquid above mercury is CCl4(specific gravity =
1.6). The manometer reads 200mm. Calculate the pressure difference is N/m2.
b) With neat diagram explain the working of gravity decanter. (8+6 = 14 marks)

Module II

13.a) Discuss Reynolds experiment. With suitable sketches, explain the major conclusions
from his experiment.

b) Turbulence in flow results in higher loss of energy compared to that in laminar flow. Do
you agree to this statement? Why? (8+6 = 14 marks)

14. a) Define the following terms: Streak line, stream line, path line, stream tube, steady flow.

b) Explain the boundary layer separation and wake formation. (7+7= 14marks)

Module -III

15. Derive Bernoulli’s equation for an ideal fluid and modify is to account for frictional
losses. (14 marks)
16. a) 1250 lit/sec of water is to be pumped from a reservoir through a steel pipe 25 mm dia
and 30 m long to a tank 20 m higher than its reservoir. Calculate theoretical power required.
b) Explain the statistical nature of turbulence. (10+4 = 14 marks)

Module -IV

17. Derive universal velocity distribution equation. Mention its limitations. (14 marks)

18. a) Glycerine of viscosity 0.9 cp and specific gravity 1.26 is pumped along a horizontal
pipe of 6.5 m long and dia 1 cm at a flow rate of 1.8 lit/sec. Calculate the frictional loss in the
pipe due to friction effects.

b) Derive the equation for shear stress distribution in pipe under laminar flow.

(7+7 = 14marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module -V

19.a) With neat diagram explain the working of centrifugal pump.

b) Derive the flow rate equation for venturimeter. (7+7 = 14 marks)

20.a) A pump draws benzene at 250C from a tank, whose level is 2.6 m above the pumpinlet.
The suction line has a head loss of 0.8 Nm/N. The atmospheric pressure is measured to be
98.5 Kpa (abs). Calculate the available NPSH. The vapour pressure of benzene is 13.3Kpa
(abs).

b) Explain the principles of operation of Pitot tube. (10+4 =14 marks)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Fluids: properties and nature of fluids, ideal fluids, real fluids, physical properties
of fluids, density, viscosity, effect of viscosity on temperature and pressure, specific volume,
stress and strain, bulk modulus, specific weight, relative density, surface tension,
compressibility, capillarity. Rheology of fluids, Rheological classification of fluids:
Newtonian and non-newtonian fluids, Newton’s law of viscosity, classifications of non-
newtonian fluids, power law, momentum flux.
Barometric equation. Principles of continuous gravity decanter and centrifugal decanter.
Lapse rate.
Fluid Pressure Measurements: Pascal’s law, vacuum and gauge pressures, hydrostatic law,
measurement of fluid pressure using manometers and its different classifications, problems
based on manometer.

Module 2: Introduction to fluid flow: Fluid flow classifications, Flow field, Eulerain and
Lagrangian approach, velocity potential, stream function, circulation and vorticity. Stream
line, Path line, Streak line, Stream tube classification of flow, Reynolds experiment,
Reynolds number, Mach number, Turbulence, Reynolds stress. Boundary-layer formation in
straight tubes, Boundary-layer separation and wake formation.

Module 3:Basic equations of fluid flow: Continuity Equation, Macroscopic momentum

Balance (Navier stokes equation), Euler equation, Bernoulli’s theorem, Kinetic energy
correction factor. Correction for fluid friction, Pumpwork, and compressible flow in
Bernoulli’s equation. Problems based on Bernoulli’s theorem.

Module 4:Laminar flow of incompressible fluids in pipes and conduits, shear stress and
velocity distribution, maximum and average velocity-Hagen Poiseuille equation- Friction
factor and Reynolds number relationship in laminar flow. Turbulent flow of incompressible
fluids in pipes and conduits: Universal velocity distribution equation, Friction factor and
Reynolds number relationship-Nikuradse and Karman equation-Blasius equation (derivation
not required), Prandtl one seventh power law-Friction factor chart - Friction from changes in
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

velocity or directionSudden expansion and contraction-Effect of fittings and valves.

Hydraulic radius and Equivalent diameter.

Module 5: Applications of Fluid Mechanics: Transportation and metering of fluids, pipes and
tubings, different types of pumps (limited to application and operation). Centrifugal pumps,
various losses, Characteristic curves, NPSH, Cavitation, Specific speed and Priming.
Reciprocating pumps – power required, indicator diagram, delivery pipe, suction pipe,
efficiency. Flow through nozzles.
Flow measurement devices: Flow rate equation for Venturimeter, Orificemeter, Pitot tube and
Rotameter.

Text Books

1. W. McCabe, J. C. Smith and P. Harriott, Unit operations of Chemical Engineering

(7th ed.). McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
2. J. Lal, Fluid mechanics and Hydraulics with Computer Applications (9th ed.).
Metropolitan Book Co, 2014
3. R. K. Bansal, A Text Book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines (9th
ed.)Laxmi Publications, 2005
4. P. N Modi and S. M. Seth, Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulics
Machines (20th ed.). Standard Book House, 2013

Reference Books

1. F. M. White, Fluid Mechanics (8thed.). McGraw-Hill Education, 2016

2. Y. A. Cengel and J. M. Cimbala, Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and
Applications(3rd ed.). McGraw-Hill Education, 2013
3. V. Streeter, E. B. Wylie and K. W. Bedford, Fluid Mechanics (9th ed.). McGraw-Hill
Education, 2010
4. Y. Nakayama, Introduction to Fluid mechanics (2nd ed.).Butterworth-Heinemann,
2018
5. A.S. Foust, L.A. Wenzel, C.W. Clump, L.B. Andersen and L.Maus, Principles of unit
operations (2nd ed.). John Wiley & Sons, 2008
6. N.de. Noel, Fluid Mechanics for Chemical Engineers (3rd ed.). McGraw Hill, 2004

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Properties, classification of fluid and Fluid statics (9 hours)
1.1 Definition of fluid, Newton’s law of viscosity. Physical properties of
3
fluid
1.2 Rheology of fluids, Pascal’s law,Barometric equation and Lapse rate 3
1.3 Principles of continuous gravity decanter and centrifugal
decanter,Principles of Manometer-Simple manometer, inclined tube 3
manometer.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

2 Introduction to fluid flow(9 hours)

2.1 Classification of flow, Reynolds experiment and turbulence, Flow
field, Eulerain and Lagrangian approach, velocity potential, stream
function, circulation and vorticity. Stream line, Path line, Streak 5
line,Stream tube.

2.2 Boundary layer and wake formation 4

3 Basic equations of fluid flow (9 hours)
3.1 Basic equations of fluid flow- mass, momentum and energy 6
3.2 Problems based on Bernoulli’s theorem. 3
4 Internal flow of incompressible fluids in pipes and conduit(10 hours)
4.1 Shear stress and Velocity distribution in laminar flow,Hagen 4
Poiseuille equation, Friction factor
4.2 Universal velocity distribution equation, Friction factor and 3
Reynolds number relationship in turbulent flow
4.3 Friction factor chart, sudden expansion and contraction 3
5 Pumps and Flow measuring devices (10 hours)
5.1 Pumps, different types, efficiency, NPSH, problems 4

5.2 Flowmeters- flow rate derivation, coefficient of discharge 4

5.3 Flowthrough nozzles 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

RUBBERS - SCIENCE Category L T P Credit

POT305
AND TECHNOLOGY PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of the five modules, first module is the detailed study of the structure, properties
and different forms of natural rubber. Second module deals with vulcanization of natural rubber
followed by crosslinking of the same. Third module deals with different curing systems and
vulcanization techniques. Remaining modules deals with the synthesis,properties,applications
and crosslinking methods of various synthetic rubbers. After the completion of this course,
students will be able to understand about the various aspects of naturalrubber like properties,
vulcanization, crosslinking. They will also get an understanding about various synthetic rubbers.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials and polymer science.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO1 To study about natural rubber, its property and applications

CO2 To impart awareness on various synthetic rubbers
CO3 To describe the mechanism of crosslinking

Mapping of course outcome with programme outcome:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1
CO2 3 1
CO3 3 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Continuous assessment test End Semester

Category Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution
Total Marks CIE ESE ESE duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part Acontain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of whichstudent
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the sources of natural number.

2. Give the structure of Natural number.
3. Comment on the strength of rubbers.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the polymerization of acrylic rubbers.

2. What are the important properties of butyl rubber
3. Explain about the crosslinking of Chloroprene rubber.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3)

1. Define scorch time

2. Explain vulcanisation
3. Compare between EV and semi EV system
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________
Name: ______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: POT305

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

RUBBERS - SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

(2019-Scheme)

PART A
(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)
1. Explain strain induced crystallization.
2. Define scorch time and optimum cure time
3. What are the various curemeters used for assessment of state of cure
4. Explain Drum curing.
5. What are X-NBR and H-NBR
6. What are chloro sulphonated polymers? Give their application.
7. Comment on the source of Natural rubber
8. Explain the vulcanisation of chloroprene Rubber
9. Comment on the polymerization of acrylic rubbers
10. What are the non sulphur vulcanizing agents for non olefin rubbers.
PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) Discuss the manufacturing steps involved in Ribbed Smoke Sheet production. What
are the common defects seen in the ribbed smoked sheets (14 M)

OR

12. a) Discuss the structure property relationship in natural rubber

13. Write short notes on i) SP Rubber ii) DPNR (8+6= 14 M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module II
14. a) Explain the mechanism of cross linking by i) metal oxide ii) peroxide
b) Draw and explain typical cure characteristics of a rubber compound (8+6=14M)

OR
15. a) Explain the theory of sulphur vulcanisaton.
b) Explain the i) mechanism of cross linking by diamines ii) accelerators ( 6+8 =14M)

Module III
16. Discuss about different cure systems. (14M)

OR

17. Describe the vulcanisation technique by a) autoclave b) fluidized bed (14M)

Module 1V

18. Explain briefly manufacture, crosslinking, properties and applications of SBR (14M)
OR
19. Discuss briefly manufacture, vulcanisation, properties and uses of butyl rubber (14M)
Module V
20. Write short notes on i) acrylic rubbers ii) polysulphide rubber
OR
21. Explain about i) chlorosulphonated rubbers ii) thermoplastic elastomers
………………………………………………………………………………

Syllabus:

Module1: Natural rubber, source, chemical formula, molecular weight distribution,

crystallisation, structure-property relationship, chemical reactivity, electrical and oxidation
properties, anti degradants, strength of rubbers, Various forms of natural rubber- crumb, sheet,
crepe, SP rubber, DPNR, LNR, liquid rubber, classes of liquid elastomers, powdered rubber

Module 2: Vulcanisation, chemical and physical aspects, curing characteristics such as scorch
time, induction time, cure time, activators, accelerators, promoters, Mechanism of crosslinking
by different crosslinking agents- sulphur, sulphur monochloride, nitrosourethane, diazo esters,
phenolic resins, metal oxide, diamines, peroxides, oximes

Module 3: Different curing systems, EV, semiEV, conventional and sulphur less cure,
assessment of state of cure, Vulcanisation techniques, batch and continuous vulcanization: press
cure, autoclave, hot air, cold and hot water, fluidised bed, molten salt bath, drum curing,
radiation, microwave curing
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module 4: IR, BR, IIR, SBR, NBR, CR, PU, silicone and EP rubbers -- synthesis of monomers,
polymerisation, structure, properties, application, crosslinking by different methods, oxidation
and ageing, halogenation of IIR, characterization, Comparison of the oxidation properties of
saturated and unsaturated rubbers, antioxidants, antiozonants.

Module 5: Monomer preparation, polymerization, structure, properties and application of the

following rubbers- chlorosulphonated polymers, fluorine containing rubbers,
nitrosofluoroelastomers, phosphonitrillic elastomers, poly(thiocarbonyl fluoride) and related
elastomers, acrylic rubbers, poly (vinyl ether) elastomers, polysulphide rubber, polyalkenamers,
polynorbornene, thermoplastic rubbers, polycarbonate rubbers

Text books:-

1. J. A Brydson, Rubber Chemistry. Applied Science Publishers, London, 1978

2. M. Morton, Rubber Technology, Springer Science, 2013
3. C. M. Blow, C.Hepburn, Rubber technology and manufacture, Butterworths, 1971

Reference books :-

1. J. E. Mark, B.Erman, Science and Technology of Rubber, Elsevier, 2011

2. Barlow, Rubber Compounding: Principles: Materials, and Techniques, CRC Press, 1993,
4. A. Whelan and K.S. Lee. Developments in Rubber Technology (Vol. I-IV), Applied Science
Publishers
5. R. N. Datta, Rubber Curing Systems, iSmithersRapra Publishing, 2002
3. A. Ciesielski, An Introduction to Rubber Technology, iSmithersRapra Publishing, 1999

Course Content and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No.of Lectures

1 Module 1 (9 hours)
1.1 Natural rubber, source, chemical formula, molecular weight
3
distribution, crystallisation,
1.2 Structure-property relationship,
chemical reactivity, electrical and oxidation properties, anti 3
degradants, strength of rubbers,
1.3 Various forms of natural rubber- crumb, sheet, crepe, SP rubber,
DPNR, LNR, liquid rubber, classes of liquid elastomers, telechelic 3
polymers, powdered rubber
2 Module 2 ( 8 Hours)
2.1 Vulcanisation, chemical and physical aspects 2
2.2 Curing characteristics such as scorch time, induction time, cure 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

time, activators, accelerators, promoters

2.3 Mechanism of crosslinking by different crosslinking agents-
sulphur, sulphur monochloride, nitrosourethane, diazo esters, 4
phenolic resins, metal oxide, diamines, peroxides, oximes
3 Module 3 (8hours)
3.1 Different curing systems, EV, semiEV, conventional and
2
sulphur less cure
3.2 Assessment of state of cure, Vulcanisation
2
techniques
3.3 Batch and continuous vulcanization: press cure,
autoclave, hot air, cold and hot water, fluidised bed, molten 4
salt bath, drum curing, radiation, microwave curing
4 Module 4 (10 hours)
4.1 IR, BR, IIR, SBR -- synthesis of monomers, polymerisation,
structure, properties, application, crosslinking by different methods, 3
oxidation and ageing, halogenation of IIR
4.2 NBR, CR, PU-- synthesis of monomers, polymerisation, structure,
3
properties, application, crosslinking by different methods
4.3 Silicone and EP rubbers -- synthesis of monomers, polymerisation,
structure, properties, application, crosslinking by different methods,
4
Comparison of the oxidation properties of saturated and
unsaturated rubbers, antioxidants, antiozonants
5 Module 5 ( 10 hours)
5.1 Monomer preparation, polymerization, structure, properties
and application of the following rubbers- chlorosulphonated
3
polymers, fluorine containing rubbers, nitrosofluoro
elastomers
5.2 Monomer preparation, polymerization, structure, properties
and application of the following rubbers- phosphonitrillic
3
elastomers, poly(thiocarbonyl fluoride) and related elastomers,
acrylic rubbers, poly (vinylether) elastomers
5.3 Monomer preparation, polymerization, structure, properties
and application of the following rubbers--polysulphide rubber,
4
polyalkenamers, polynorbornene, thermoplastic rubbers,
polycarbonate rubbers
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT307 POLYMER PROCESSING
PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules is the detailed study of compounding
ingredients used in plastics and rubbers. Third module deals with the different compounding
methods and formulations used for rubber industry. Different processing techniques for
polymer product manufacture is included in the remaining modules. After the completion of
this course, students will be able to understand compounding ingredients, different
processing methods and techniques used in the polymer product manufacture. They also
attain the skill to formulate various compounds and recipe for rubber and plastic products.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in rubber and plastic science.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the main compounding ingredients in plastics

CO 2 Explain the significance and importance of compounding ingredients used in
rubbers.
CO 3 Illustrate different rubber compounding methods for rubbers and compound
formulations for specific applications.
CO 4 Compare and contrast between various processing techniques for polymers.
CO 5 Explain the significant machineries for specific products.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 2 2 1
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3 2
CO 5 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the factors to be considered for compound development

2.. Comment on reinforcing fillers.

3.Give an account on curing agents used in rubber compounding.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the significance of plasticisers?

2. What is the function of blowing agents. Explain.

3. Comment on the various extenders used for rubber compounding.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Give an account on two-roll mixing.

2.Explain dispersive and distributive mixing.

3. Formulate rubber compound for oil seal.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain compression moulding.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

2. Understand the various moulding presses used in rubber products.

3. What is automatic compression moulding?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1.What are he important advantages and limitations of transfer moulding?

2. Explain calenders and accessories.

3.Explain the machineries used for tyre production.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIFTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT307 POLYMER PROCESSING

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. What is formulation of a mix?

2. Give different nonblack fillers used in rubber compounding.

3. What is facice?

4. Explain the function of blowing agents.

5. What are the advantages of internal mixer?

6. Describe mastication in rubber compounding.

7. What are different types of moulds used in compression moulding?

8. Detail how calenders are used in carpet backing?

9. What is cold retreading?

10. Explain automatic compression moulding.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) How carbon black affect the reinforcing of rubbers? (9M)

b) How can you evaluate the functions of different antidegradents? (5M)

12. a) Explain various types of curing agents used in rubber compounding. (9M)

b) Give an account on peptiser and retarder. (5M)

Module II

13. a)Describe the extenders used in rubber compounding. (8M)

b) Describe the principle and types of blowing agents. (6M)

14. a) Explain the function and types of mould release agents. (9M)

b) Explain various processing aids used in polymer compounding (5M)

Module -III

15. a) Compare the working of inter mixing and banbury mixing with neat diagram. (8M)

b) Give formulations of mc sheet and justify the compounding ingredients and their
quantity.
(6M)

16. a) Describe any three after treatment process in rubber product manufacturing.
(6M)

b) Explain two rollmixing.

(8M)

Module -IV

17. a) Describe compression moulding (8M)

b)Explain compression moulding cycle. (6M)

18. a) Explain automatic compression moulding. (8M)

b)Explain the moulding process used for thermosets.

(6M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module -V

19. a) Give an account on transfer moulding. (7M)

b) Illustrate the working of calenders . (7M)

20. a) Explain the manufacture process of latex foam (7M)

b)Explain the process of foot wear production with formulation. (7M)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Compound development, factors to be considered for compound development,

formulation of a mix, Compounding ingredients stabilizers, fillers, antioxidants, antiozonants,
UV absorbers, flame retardants, peptiser, retarder, curing agents.

Module 2: Compounding ingredients- plasticisers, process aids, extenders, factice, mould

release agents, tackifying agents, blowing agents, bonding agents, fragrances, antistatic
agents, colorants, and other special additives.

Module 3: Compounding, different methods, principles of mixing, dispersive and distributive

mixing, mastication, two-roll mill mixing, internal mixers, comparison between open mill
and internal mixer, Banbury mixing, Brabender plasticorder, continuous mixing, master
batching
Compounding for specific applications- ozone resistance, heat resistance, weather resistance,
oil resistance, electrical, optical and medical applications.

Module 4: Processing techniques, compression moulding, moulding presses, flash, positive

and semipositive moulds, compression moulding cycle, trouble-shooting, automatic
compression moulding.

Module 5: Transfer moulding, transfer moulding cycle, advantages, limitations, theoretical

and design considerations, general mould design consideration, troubleshooting. Calenders
and accessories, machineries for specific products- tyre and tubes, footwear, hoses and
belting, wires and cables, latex and fibre foam.

Text Books

1. J. E. Mark, B. Erman, Science and Technology of Rubber, Elsevier, 2011

2. R. C. Progelhof, J. L. Throne, Polymer Engineering Principles. Hanser, 1993
3. M. Morton, Rubber Technology, Springer Science, 2013
4. C. M. Blow, C.Hepburn, Rubber technology and manufacture, Butterworths, 1971
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. N. P. Charemisinoff and P.N Chere, Handbook of Applied Polymer Processing Tech.,

Edited by Marcel Dekker Inc, NY, 1996
2. Barlow, Rubber Compounding: Principles: Materials, and Techniques, CRC Press,
1993.
3. Ciesielski, An Introduction to Rubber Technology,Smithers Rapra Publishing, 1999

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Compound development(9 hours)
1.1 Compound development, factors to be considered for compound 3
development, formulation of a mix
1.2 Compounding ingredients stabilizers, fillers, antioxidants, 3
antiozonants
1.3 UV absorbers, flame retardants, peptiser, retarder, curing agents. 3

2 Compounding ingredients(9 hours)

2.1 Compounding ingredients- plasticisers, process aids, extenders, 3
factice
2.2 mould release agents, tackifying agents, blowing agents, bonding 4
agents
2.3 fragrances, antistatic agents, colorants, and other special additives 2

3 Compounding methods(9 hours)

3.1 Compounding, different methods, principles of mixing, dispersive 1
and distributive mixing
3.2 mastication, two-roll mill mixing, internal mixers, comparison 4
between open mill and internal mixer
3.3 Banbury mixing, Brabender plasticorder, continuous mixing, 4
master batching Compounding for specific applications- ozone
resistance, heat resistance, weather resistance, oil resistance,
electrical, optical and medical applications.
4 Processing techniques (9 hours)
4.1 Processing techniques, compression moulding, moulding presses, 4
4.2 flash, positive and semipositive moulds, compression moulding 4
cycle, trouble-shooting,
4.3 automatic compression moulding. 1
5 Transfer moulding & Calenders(9 hours)
5.1 Transfer moulding, transfer moulding cycle, advantages, 3
limitations, theoretical and design considerations, general mould
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

design consideration, troubleshooting.

5.2 Calenders and accessories, machineries for specific products- tyre 3

and tubes,
5.3 footwear, hoses and belting, wires and cables, latex and fibre foam 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

FLUID MECHANICS LAB
331 PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The Fluid Mechanics lab is equipped with Centrifugal pump to transport fluid,
flow measuring devices like Venturimeters, Orificemeters, Rotameters, and Weirs, etc. The
determination of viscosity of Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluid, pipeline assembling and
layout drawing can be performed in the lab.

Prerequisite: Course in Fluid & Particle Mechanics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse Bernoulli’s theorem and verify Reynolds experiment

Plan and perform experiments in fluid moving machinery and analyse the principles
CO 2
involved
CO 3 Plan and perform experiments in flow measuring equipment

Demonstrate capacity to work in teams and exhibit knowledge of safety, health and
CO 4 environment by practicing laboratory ethics.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 1 1
CO 2 3 2 1 1
CO 3 3 2 1 1
CO 4 3 2 1 3

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
End Semester Examination Pattern:

The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of marks

(a) Preliminary work :15Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment :10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) :25Marks
(d) Viva voce :20 marks
(e) Record :5 Marks

General instructions: Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second

series test covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be
conducted under the equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The
number of candidates evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for
the University examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external
examiner shall endorse the record.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Perform experiments to analyse the influence of Reynolds number on the fluid flow
2. Perform experiments to verify Bernoulli’s Theorem

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1 Study the performance characteristics of Centrifugal Pump and determine the maximum
efficiency, optimum flow rate and head developed at maximum efficiency.
2. Study the performance characteristics of Reciprocating Pump and determine the maximum
efficiency, optimum flow rate and head developed at maximum efficiency.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Conduct experiments to establish the head-discharge relationship for venturimeter
2. Conduct experiments to establish the head-discharge relationship for orifice meter
3. Perform experiments to determine the coefficient of discharge Cd, coefficient of velocity
Cv, and coefficient of contraction Cc of the given orifice, under constant head flow
conditions.
4. Calibrate rotameter

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Evaluate the experimentation capacity of student’s in group.
2. Analyse the interpretation skill of results with group discussion.
3. Report experimental data, results within the stipulated time through team effort.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Minimum of 7 experiments are mandatory)

1. Experiments on Reynolds apparatus for determination of flow regime and construction of

fanning friction factor vs. Reynolds No. plot
2. Determination of co efficient of discharge for orifice meter
3. Determination of co efficient of discharge for venturimeter
4. Determination of co-efficient of Pitot tube and construction of velocity profile across the
cross section of pipe.
5. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for different types of weirs.
6. Determination of efficiency of a centrifugal pump.
7. Pipe line assembling and a layout drawing with standard symbols.
8. Calibration of a Rotameter
9. Determination of viscosity of Newtonian & non-Newtonian fluid by Falling Sphere
method
10. Verification of Bernoulli’s Theorem
11. Determination of efficiency of a reciprocating pump.
12. Determination of coefficient of discharge Cd, coefficient of velocity Cv, and coefficient of
contraction Cc for open orifice.

Reference Books

1. W. McCabe, J. C. Smith and P. Harriott, Unit operations of Chemical Engineering (7th ed.).
McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
2. A.S. Foust, L.A. Wenzel, C.W. Clump, L.B. Andersen and L.Maus, Principles of unit
operations (2nd ed.). John Wiley & Sons, 2008
3. R. K. Bansal, A Text Book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines (9th ed.) Laxmi
Publications, 2005
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POL333 LATEX PRODUCTS LAB
PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The latex products lab is equipped with equipment to carry out the manufacturing
experiments related to natural rubber latex. Experiments to carry out the concentration of
natural rubber latex by creaming,preparation of latex compounds and manufacturing of
different types of products.

Prerequisite: Engineering Chemistry Lab.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop skill to concentrate the latex by creaming.

CO 2 Develop skill in the preparation of latex compounds.
CO 3 Develop skills to correlate properties of latex with manufacturing methods.

CO 4 Develop teamwork skills through group activities.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 1
CO 2 2 2 1
CO 3 2 3 2 1
CO 4 2 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed

regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and troubleshooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions: Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second

series test covering the entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to
be conducted under the equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The
number of candidates evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for
the University examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external
examiner shall endorse the record.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Perform the experiments to concentrate latex by creaming.

2.Conduct the experiment to find out DRC of field latex

3. Conduct the experiment to find out DRC of creamed latex

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1.Experiments to prepare dispersions..
2.Experiments to prepare emulsions.
3.Experiments to prepare latex compound.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Mention the experiment to product manufactured by dipping and casting.
2. Experiment to conduct vulcanization of dipped and casted products.
3. Experiment conducted to demoulding of dipped and casted products.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Evaluating the experimentation capacity of student’s in a group.
2. Analysing the interpretation skill of results with group discussion.
3. Reporting of experimental data, results and reports within the stipulated time through team
effort.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Minimum of 7 experiments are mandatory)

1 Creaming of NR latex.

2. Preparation of dispersion, slurry and emulsions.

3. Manufacture of rubber bands, latex thread and articles by casting.

4.Manufacture of rubber balloons.

5.Manufacture of Household Gloves.

6. Manufacture of Finger caps.

7. Manufacture of Surgeons Gloves.

8. Latex impregnation in textiles.

9. Preparation of latex based adhesives.

Reference Books

1. Rani Joseph, Practical Guide to Latex Technology, Smithers Rapra, 2013

2. D.C. Blackley, Polymer Latices: Science and technology, Springer Science, 1997.
3. S. K. De and J. R. White, Rubber Technologist's Handbook, Vol 1, Smithers Rapra
Publishing, 2001
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V
HONOURS
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
MOULD AND DIE DESIGN
393 VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first one is detailed study of fundamentals of mould design.
Second module deals with Injection mould design. Significant topics from die design and its
variants are included in the third module. Fourth module deals with blow mould, thermoform
moulds, foam and rotational mould design. Fifth modules give emphasis on the design of
compression, transfer and stack mould and computer aided design methods and techniques
used in plastic and rubber mould design. After the completion of this course, students will be
able to understand design aspects to design tools and dies for polymer product manufacture.

Prerequisite: Polymer Processing, Polymer Products design.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the principles of mould design.

CO 2 Detail the features of extrusion die design.
CO 3 Illustrate different mould design features for blow moulding and thermoforming
CO 4 Describe features of compression and transfer moulds.
CO 5 Exposure towards modern tools used in Design of tools and dies.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3 2
1
CO 3 3
2
CO 3 3
3
CO 3 3
4
CO 3 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 20
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Analyse 20
Evaluate 20
Create 10

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1) Describe the principles of mould design.

1. Describe the principle core design.

2. Cavity Layout and balancing.

3.Compare parting surface in two plate and three plate moulds.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Detail the features of extrusion die design.

1. Explain the significance of mould flow in die design.

2. Advantages of offset dies over straight through dies.

3. Comment on the features of wire coating dies.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate different mould design features for blow moulding and
thermoforming.

1. Explain the significance of core rod design.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
2. What is the significance of accumulator in injection blow moulds.

3. Comment on the various parts associated with stretch blow moulds.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe features of compression and transfer moulds.

1. Compare vertical flash and horizontal flash.

2. Screw transfer moulds has some special advantages and disadvantages. Explain

3. Positive moulds are costlier. Why?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Exposure towards modern tools used in Design of tools and dies.

1. CAD is preferred in plastic product and tool design. Explain its advantages.

2. Give an account of different software used in die design.

3.Explain the application of analysis softwares.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 POT393 Duration: 3 Hours

MOULD AND DIE DESIGN

(2019-Scheme-Honours in Polymer Engineering)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Compare gate with rectangular edge and overlap design.

2. Describe sprue holding. What is its significance?

3. Give the principle of gate balancing.

4. Define baffle cooling and factors affecting its reduction of temperature.

5. Compare and contrast between stripper plate and pin ejection?

6. Differentiate soft and hard metals in machining and tolerances.

7. What is meant by pinch off?

8. Describe the features of cull design of transfer moulds.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
9. Define the significance of factor in polymer analysis and design?

10. Detail how parison is programmed ?

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) With a labelled diagram explain the parts of a two plate mould. (9)

b) What is the role of parting surface design in mould manufacture? (5)

OR

12. a) Explain various functions of sprue tapering. Draw various designs of spure pullers.
(9)

b) Explain on various bcoolant materials and temperature control mechanism in moulds.

(5)
Module II

13. a) With suitable diagram explain undercut moulding by cam actuation . (8)

b) Describe the principle of runner efficiency with examples. (6)

OR

14. a) Explain the factors to be considered in gate design and location. (9)

b) Compare and contrast between insert moulds and integer mould design (5)

Module -III

15. a) Write the detailed process involved in die design and development. (8)

b) What is meant by blow up ratio, frost line and lay flat width. Explain. (6)

OR

16. a) Describe the design of calibration unit in pipe manufacture. (6)

b) Explain design features for plastic sheets and films. (8)

Module -IV

17. a) Describe thermoform moulds for plug assist forming. (8)

b) Explain the design features used in snap back forming? (6)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
OR

18. a) Explain tools used for injection blow mould and its design steps. (8)

b) Explain the design features used in roto mould design. (6)

Module -V

19. a) Give a detailed description of stack mould design. (7)

b) Explain the significance of hot runner moulds with its special features. (7)

OR

20. a) Explain design steps using mechanical desktop. (7)

b) Explain various tools used in evaluating plastic flow in a mould and its significance
(7)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: General introduction to core cavity design, parting surface, sprue, sprue pullers,
mould cooling, Ejection system, mould daylights.

Module 2: Feed system design, cooling system and Ejection system design for Injection
moulds, split, undercuts, side core threads. Runnerless, hot and cold runner moulds, working
of various ejection actuators, cooling of insert moulds, types and features.

Module 3: Extrusion die design, flow through a die, die land, die body, straight through die,
Cross head, Offset die design, Coat hanger, fishtail, annular, pipe die design, wire coating
die, cold feed and hot feed die design.

Module 4: Extrusion blow mould, single and multicavity design, injection blow mould, core
rod design, stectch blow features of core rod , slush mould design. Thermoforming by
matched mould, drape design, design of rotomoulds, foam mould features.

Module 5: Semipositive, positive and flash design, vertical flash, horizontal flash, Transfer
moulds by plunger ,multilayer moulds. Design tools and features of CAD, MDT, Unigraphics
and software tools for design and analysis of moulds and dies.

Text Books:

1. Injection Mould & Molding - Dym

2. Injection Moulds – 130 Proven Design - Gastrow, H

3. Plastics Product Design Engineering Hand Book - Dubois, H

4. Plastics Product Design & Process Engineering - Belofsky, Harold

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Reference Books

1. Design of Plastic Moulds and Die– Laszlo Sors- Elsevier Science Ltd -1989
2. Injection Mould Design- RGW Pye- PRI Publications-1996
3 Die Design for Extrusion of Plastic Tubes and Pipes: A Practical Guide –Sushil Kainth-
Hanser Publications- 2017

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction (7 hrs)
1.1 Core cavity design, parting surface, Sprue design, sprue pullers 3
1.2 Mould cooling - System design fundamentals 2
1.3 Ejection system, mould daylights, Multi daylight and multiplate 2
moulds.
2 Injection mould design (9 hrs)
2.1 Feed system design, cooling system and Ejection system design 3
for Injection moulds.

2.2 Split actation design, undercuts, side core threads. 3

2.3 Runnerless, hot and cold runner moulds, working of various 3
ejection actuators, cooling of insert moulds, types and features.
3 Extrusion Die Design (9 Hrs)
3.1 Extrusion die design, flow through a die, die land, die body, 3
3.2 Straight through die, Cross head, Offset die design, Coat hanger, 3
fishtail,
3.3 Annular, pipe die design, wire coating die, cold feed and hot feed 3
die design
4 Blow mould and thermoform mould design (10 Hrs)
4.1 Extrusion blow mould, single and multicavity design, injection 5
blow mould, core rod design, stectch blow features of core rod ,
slush mould design.
4.2 Thermoforming by matched mould, drape design, design of 5
rotomoulds, foam mould features.
5 Compresssion, Transfer Moulds and CAD (10 Hrs)
Semipositive, positive and flash design, vertical flash, horizontal
5.1 3
flash.
5.2 Transfer moulds by plunger, multilayer moulds. 3
Design tools and features of CAD, MDT, UNIGRAPHICS and
5.3 4
software tools for design of moulds and dies.
POT POLYMER ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CONDUCTING POLYMERS
395 VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first one is introduction to electronic states and
triboelectricity. Second module deals with of electrical conduction mechanisms and topics
related to charge storage and energy transfer. Significant topics of piezoelectricity, pyro
electricity and ferroelectric properties in polymers are explained in module three. Fourth
module is dedicated for detailing processing methods of conducting polymers. Fifth module
gives emphasis on the properties and applications of conducting polymers. After the
completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of mechanism of
electrical conduction in electroactive polymers and analyse the properties of conducting
polymers with respect to the structure and choose conducting polymers for specific
applications.

Prerequisite: Polymer Materials and Polymer Physics.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the principles of electrical conduction in polymer materials.

CO 2 Explain the significance of electrical charge storage and energy transfer.
CO 3 Illustrate different techniques to impart conductivity in polymers.
CO 4 Understand the properties and synthesis of electroactive polymers.
CO 5 Explain the applications of conducting polymers.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3
1
CO 3
2
CO 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate POLYMER ENGINEERING
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the principles of electrical conduction in polymer

materials.

1. Describe the principle of electrical conduction based on quantum theory.

2. Explain the relevance of fermi energy level in conjugated polymers.

3. Conduction mechanism of polyacetylene.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Explain the significance of electrical charge storage and energy
transfer.

1. Explain the concept of Excitons.

2 Correlate absorption spectrum and fluorescence spectrum in energy transfer .

3. Comment on the excimer decay in PVCA.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate different techniques to impart conductivity in

polymers.

1. Explain the significance of encapsulation technique in polymer conduction.

2. What is the role of graft copolymers in enhancing conducting segments in polymers.
3. Comment on the various die casting methods. POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Understand the properties and synthesis of electroactive
polymers.

1. Explain the synthesis of Organometallic polymers with transition metals.

2. Explain the process of making electro active polymers from precursors?

3. What is the role of Exotic solvents in making plastic conducting films?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the applications of conducting polymers.

1. Organic resist materials are widely used in photolithography. Explain its function.

2. Give an account of different application based on L-B films.

3.Explain the application of polymers in sonar hydrophones and pyroelectric sensors.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FOURTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 POT 395 Duration: 3 Hours

CONDUCTING POLYMERS

(2019-Scheme- Honors)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. What is blue black thin films.

2. Give the structure of polypyrrole?

3. Give the principle of piezoelectric properties exhibited by PVDF.

4. Define conduction based on polymer structures and factors affecting it.

5. Compare and contrast between photogeneration and photosensitisation?

6. Define hole drift mobility and its significance.

7. What are the limitations of plastics used as NLO materials?

8. Describe the terms ESCA and ARC.

9. Define L-B film manufacture process? What is itsPOLYMER
significance. ENGINEERING

10. Detail how MIS (metal Insulator semiconductor) is designed for transducers.

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) With a labelled diagram explain the parts and working of a photoresist. (9)

b) What is the role of band gap in determining conductivity in polymers ? (5)

OR

12. a) Explain various functions of pn junction diodes and its structure in electrical
conductivity? (9)

b) Explain the role of dipole polarization in charge conduction process. (5)

Module II

13. a) With suitable diagram explain charge measurement equipments . (8)

b) Describe the principle of electronic energy transfer. (6)

OR

14. a) Explain the factors to be considered in doping of polymer material for conduction .
(9)

b) Compare and contrast between parting gate and step gate (5)

Module -III

15. a) Write the detailed process involved in piezoelectric conduction. (8)

b) What is meant by polar crystals. Explain. (6)

OR

16. a) Describe the after treatment process used in ceramic composites. (6)

b) Explain various applications of biopolymers as conduction medium. (8)

Module -IV

17. a) Describe any four synthesis methods of conducting polymers. (8)

b) Explain the design features of L-B films? (6)

OR
 POLYMER
18. a) Explain in situ polymerisation and its advantages ENGINEERING
in conducting properties.
(8)

b) Explain the manufacturing process used in precursor method for electroactive

materials. (6)

Module -V

19. a) Give a detailed description on the design of light emitting diodes. (7)

b) Illustrate on the main materials used in polymer batteries. (7)

OR

20. a) Explain the significance and application of polymer membranes in EMI shielding.
(7)

b) Explain its significance of polymer sensors and how is it designed?

(7)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Electronic states, structural disorder, tight-binding theory, band structure of c-c
bonds, band gap, pendant groups and electronic states, electron-hole interaction, molecular-
ion model, photoemission, intrinsic bulk states, extrinsic bulk state, energy level diagram.

Module 2: Charge carriers in semiconductors, dopant atoms and energy levels,donors and
acceptors, probability function, charge neutrality, position of fermi energy level, fermi-dirac
integral. Charging techniques, charge measuring techniques, interpretation of real charge and
dipole polarization, concepts of electronic energy transfer, interpretation and measurement of
electronic energy transfer.

Module 3: Piezoelectricity of polypeptides, formation of electrets, structure of PVDF

electrets, piezo and pyroelectric properties of polar crystals, properties of ceramic
composites, piezoelectric relaxation.
Module 4: Solubility of conducting polymers, solvents, soluble and sulfonated conducting
polymers, processing and coating by insitu polymerisation, melt and heat processability,
colloidal solution and precursor methods, L-B films, direct vapour deposition, other
deposition methods.

Module 5: Applications of conducting polymers as batteries, light emitting diodes, sensors,

electro optic devices, microwave and electrochromic devices, membranes, corrosion
protection, imaging and lithography.

Text Books
1. Kasap, Safa, and Peter Capper, eds. Springer handbook of electronic and photonic
materials. Springer, 2017.
 POLYMER
2. Malhotra, Bansi D. Handbook of polymers in electronics. ENGINEERING
ISmithers Rapra Publishing,
2001.
3. Nalwa, Hari Singh, ed. Handbook of Advanced Electronic and Photonic Materials
and Devices, Ten-Volume Set. Vol. 1. Academic Press, 2000.

Reference Books

1 Yilmaz, Faris. Conducting polymers. 2016..

2 Taherian, Reza, and Ayesha Kausar. Electrical Conductivity in Polymer-Based Composites:
Experiments, Modelling, and Applications. William Andrew, 2018.
3 Kiess, Helmut G., and Dionys Baeriswyl, eds. Conjugated conducting polymers. Vol. 102.
Berlin: Springer-Verlag, 1992..
4. Margolis, James, ed. Conductive polymers and plastics. Springer Science & Business
Media, 2012..

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction and theory of Conducting Polymers (6 hrs)
1.1 Electronic states, structural disorder, tight-binding theory, band 3
structure of c-c bonds, band gap, pendant groups and electronic
states,

1.2 Electron-hole interaction, molecular- ion model, photoemission, 3

intrinsic bulk states, extrinsic bulk state, energy level diagram.
2 Charge carriers (12 hrs)
2.1 Charge carriers in semiconductors, dopant atoms and energy 3
levels,donors and acceptors,
2.2 Probability function, charge neutrality, position of fermi energy 3
level, fermi-dirac integral.
2.3 Charging techniques, charge measuring techniques, interpretation 3
of real charge and dipole polarization,
2.4 Concepts of electronic energy transfer, interpretation and 3
measurement of electronic energy transfer..
3 Piezo-pyero electricity (9 Hrs)
3.1 Piezoelectricity of polypeptides, formation of electrets. 3
3.2 Structure of PVDF electrets, piezo and pyroelectric properties of 3
polar crystals.
3.3 Properties of ceramic composites, piezoelectric relaxation. 3
4 Processing of CP’s (9 Hrs)
4.1 Solubility of conducting polymers, solvents, soluble and 3
sulfonated conducting polymers,
4.2 Processing and coating by insitu polymerisation, melt and heat 3
processability,
4.3 Colloidal solution and precursor methods, L-B films, direct vapour 3
 deposition, other deposition methods. POLYMER ENGINEERING
5 Applications of CP’s(9 Hrs)
5.1 Applications of conducting polymers as batteries, light emitting 3
diodes.
5.2 Sensors, electro optic devices, microwave and electrochromic 3
devices, membranes.
5.3 Corrosion protection, drug delivery and lithography. 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PROCESSING OF PAINTS
397 VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules details about the surface preparation
,treatments and paint processing machinery. Third module deals with various types of paint
application techniques. Fourth and fifth modules gives emphasis on the explains paint
properties and their evaluation. After the completion of this course, students will be able to
understand processing methods for paints and surface coatings.

Prerequisite: Polymer physics and Polymer processing.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the formulation of paints for various applications.

CO 2 Explain the methods of paint manufacture.
CO 3 Illustrate different application methods for paints.
CO 4 Compare and contrast between various paints properties expected and its evaluation
CO 5 Exposure towards latest quality measurement techniques of paints.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3
1
CO 3
2
CO 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the formulation of paints for various applications.

1. Describe the principle of polymer solubility.

2. Explain the role of each constituent of paint.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Explain the methods of paint manufacture.

1. Explain the process of Enamel production.

2. Detail the procedure in preparing powder coating.

3. Comment on the properties of each type of coating.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate different application methods for paints.

1. Explain the advantages of spraying.

2. What is the significance of electrodeposition.

3. Explain Electrostatic spraying methods.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Compare and contrast between various paint properties expected
and its evaluation

1. Evaluation of mechanical and viscoelastic properties of paints.

2. How do hiding power of paint is related to Rayleigh’s law .

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
3. Estimation of paint ageing properties.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Exposure towards latest quality measurement techniques of

paints.

1. How to estimate viscosity of paints. Explain.

2. Give an account of covering capacity.

3.Explain the application of moisture detector.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 POT397 Duration: 3 Hours

PROCESSING OF PAINTS

(Polymer Engineering-Honours-2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Compare monochromic and analogous colour scheme..

2. Describe airless spray. What is its significance?

3. Give the principle of dispersion of pigments.

4. Define oxidative drying and factors affecting it.

5. What is meant by alkaline treatment?

6. Write a note on chemiphoretic deposition.

7. What are the limitations and advantages of accelerated laboratory test of paints?

8. What is the role of polymer solubility in paint formulations?

9. Define the factors contributing towards adhesive forces in paint application.

10. Detail how water borne coatings are made?

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. Explain in detail the principles used in the selection of solvents for paint formulations.
(14)

OR

12. Explain the pretreatment methods in steel substrates before paint application process.

(14)

Module II

13. Describe the principle of design of paints for marine applications. (14)

OR

14. a) Explain the factors to be considered in painting system for wood. (9)

b) Compare and contrast between glossy and mat finishes (5)

Module -III

15. a) Write the detailed process involved in spraying of paints. (8)

b) What is meant by Electrostatic spraying. Explain. (6)

OR

16. a) What are the advantages and disadvantages of electrostatic spraying. (6)

b) Explain various applications of dip coating. (8)

Module -IV

17. a) Describe any four mechanical testing done on polymer coatings. (8)

b) Explain the design features used in controlling hiding power of paints? (6)

OR

18. a) Explain schematic representation of specular glossmeter. (8)

b) Explain the torsional braid analysis used for paint QC . (6)

Module -V

19. a) Give a detailed description on troubleshooting of paints with common defects and
their rectifications. ( 14)

OR
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
20. a) Explain Surface defects and the remedies of each commonly seen surface defects.
(14)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Chemical and mechanical pre treatments, for steel substrates, solvent degreasing,
alkaline cleaning, pickling, treatment on aluminium substrate, etching, anodising, solvents
and paint formulations.

Module 2: Treatment for wood substrates, automotive refinishes, industrial uses, chemical
resistance, Marine paints.

Module 3: Paint application techniques, brushing, dip coating, flow coating, curtain coating,
roller coating, spray painting, electrodeposition.
Module 4: Mechanical properties of coatings, optical properties, ageing properties,
rheological properties, adhesive properties.

Module 5: Storage stability, surface properties, floating, flooding, silking, foaming, skinning,
flame retardancy, slip resistance, blistering, chalking, efflorescence, pinholing, flaking,
sagging, bittiness,saponification, orange peel, floatation.

Text Books
1. Tracton, Arthur A., ed. Coatings materials and surface coatings. CRC Press, 2006.
2. Licari, James J., and Laura A. Hughes. Handbook of polymer coatings for electronics:
chemistry, technology and applications. William Andrew, 1990.
3. Brock, Thomas, Michael Groteklaes, and Peter Mischke. European coatings
handbook. Vincentz Network, 2014.
Reference Books

1. Tracton, Arthur A., ed. Coatings technology handbook. CRC press, 2005.
2. Sward, George G., and A. E. Jacobsen. "Paint testing manual." American Society for
Testing & Materials, 1972.
3. Pfanstiehl, John. Automotive paint handbook: paint technology for auto enthusiasts & body
shop professionals. Penguin, 1998.
4. Malshe, V. C. Basics of paint technology part I. Prakash C. Malshe, 2010.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures

1 Surface Treatment (7 hrs)

1.1 Chemical and mechanical pre treatments, for steel substrates, 4
1.2 Solvent degreasing, alkaline cleaning, pickling, treatment on 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
aluminium substrate, etching, anodising, Paint solvents
2 Treatment for wood , automotives (9 hrs)
2.1 Treatment for wood substrates 3
2.2 Automotive refinishes, industrial uses 3
2.3 Chemical resistance, Marine paints 3
3 Paint application techniques (10 Hrs)
3.1 brushing, dip coating, flow coating, curtain coating 5
3.2 Roller coating, spray painting, electrodeposition. 5
4 Properties evaluation (9 Hrs)
4.1 Mechanical properties of coatings, optical properties 5

4.2 Ageing properties, rheological properties, adhesive properties. 4

5 Quality control (10 Hrs)
5.1 Storage stability, surface properties. 4

5.2 Floating, flooding, silking, foaming, skinning, flame retardancy, 4

slip resistance, blistering.
Chalking, efflorescence, pinholing,flaking, sagging,
5.3 bittiness,saponification, orange peel, floatation 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POLYMER MACHINERY AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT302
PRODUCT MANUFACTURING PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Objective of this course is to provide in depth knowledge about the product
manufacturing processes used in polymer industries.This course introduces students to
machineries usedto develop various types of products. After this course the student will be able
to select the best processing options available and also to troubleshoot when a processing
problem arise during production of parts.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about polymer materials and their flow properties.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand the basic concepts, machinery and troubleshooting of injection moulding.
CO2 Define the importance of die design and process of Extrusion .
CO3 Correlate the processing parameters and product manufacture by Blow moulding.
Differentiate various thermoforming and rotational moulding process for different
CO4
products.
CO5 Understand the decoration of plastic products and methods of joining plastic products.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10 11 12
CO
3 1 … … … … … … … … … …
1
CO
3 1 … … … … … … … … … …
2
CO
3 2 … … … … … … … … … …
3
CO
3 1 … … … … … … … … … …
4
CO
3 1 … … … … … … … … … …
5

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 50
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Analyze
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Understand the basic concepts, machinery and troubleshooting of

injection moulding.

1. How Injection moulding machines are classified?

2. Various types of Injection moulding Screws.
3. Which are the major processing parameters that control the quality of moulded goods?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Define the importance of die design and process of Extrusion.

1. Understand Die design and plastic flow.

2. Design of die for various types of extruded products.
3. Compare hot feed and cold feed extruders.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):Correlate the processing parameters and product manufacture by

Blow moulding.

1. Classification of extrusion blow moulding methods.

2. Stretch blow moulding gives financial and aesthetic advantages.How?
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

3. Injection blow moulding is suitable for precision products. Why?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Differentiate various thermoforming and rotational moulding

process for different products.

1. Forming of deep draw products is difficult in thermoforming.Why?

2. Rotomoulding ensures quality product with minimum internal stress. Why?
3. Plug assist thermoforming is better than vacuum forming. Why?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand the decoration of plastic products and methods of
joining plastic products.

1. Advantages of snap fits over press fits.

2. Explain various methods used for powder coating.
3. Mechanism of Ultrasonic welding of plastic parts.

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT302
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
POLYMER MACHINERY AND PRODUCT MANUFACTURING
PART – A
Answer All the Questions(10 x 3 = 30)

1. Define feed system associated with Injection moulding.

2. What is meant by screw plasticisation?

3. Define Blow up ratio and lay flat width.

4. What are the significance of screen pack?

5. Which are the major plastic materials suitable for thermoforming?

6. Why plastics in the form of powders are used in rotational moulding?

7. What is meant by plastic welding?

8. What is the major difference between injection and stretch blow moulding?
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

9. Write any two applications of Calendering.

10. What is meant by fluidized bed coating?

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. a) With a neat sketch explain parts of an Injection Mould.

b) What are the specialities of subsurface gate?

(9+5 = 14)

OR

12. a) With a neat sketch explain parts of an Injection moulding machine.

b) Toggle clamping has several advantages over hydraulic clamping.Summarize

(10+4= 14)

Module 1I
13. a) Describe the machinery and manufacturing process of PVC pipe.

b) Explain significant features of extrusion screws. (9+5=14)

OR

14. Explain the process of a) Blown film extrusion b) Co extrusion (7+7=14)

Module III
15. Elaborate on the machineries used in extrusion blow moulding.

OR

16. Explain in detail about multi cavity injection blow moulding.

Module IV
17. Explain a) Drape forming b) Matched mould forming c) Reverse draw forming (5+5+4)

OR

18. Explain main features of thermoforming process and compare its advantages with moulding
process.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module V
19. Explain the significance, methods and materials used in Powder coating.

OR

20. Explain in detail about different methods of thermoforming with examples.

Syllabus
Module 1
Injection moulding, terminology, process description, moulding cycle, classification of moulds,
2-plate and 3-plate moulds, different types of gates, cavity lay-out, setting up of mould, types of
injection unit, elements of plasticating process, classification of screw, screw design, process
control, clamping unit, classification of machine hydraulics, ancillary equipment, computer
operation, trouble shooting of injection moulding, reaction injection moulding.

Module 2
Extrusion, principle, types of extruders, single screw and twin-screw extruders, metering, screw
design, process control variables, types of dies, die design, typical extrusion diesstraight through
dies, offset dies, crosshead dies, wire coating, dies for tubular film, flat film dies, sheet dies, tube
dies, elastic properties and die swell, manufacturing of pipes, cables, wire coating, extrusion
profiles, blown films, flat film, sheets, filaments, lamination, calibrators for rigid and semi rigid
tubes, calibration of profiles, extrusion of elastomers.

Module 3
Blow moulding, terminology, basis, process variables, injection & stretch blow moulding, single
and multi layer, extrusion blow moulding, extrusion heads, process controls for blow moulding
machine, process and product controls, trouble shooting in blow moulding.

Module 4
Thermoforming, definition, methods of forming, thermoforming machinery, heating of
sheet,heating cycle, stretching, concept, hot strength, blistering, sags, cooling and trimming the
parts, heat balance, shrinkage, trimming operations.

Module 5
Rotational moulding, types of machines, moulds, materials, part design, calendering, types of
calenders and strainer, embosser, winder, crowning, machinery powder coating, manufacturing
methods, application methods, types of powder coating, finishing and machining of plastics,
joining, welding and assembling of plastics.

Text Books:

1. Engelmann, Sven. Advanced thermoforming: methods, machines and materials,

applications and automation. Vol. 8. John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

2. Bouvier, Jean-Marie, and Osvaldo H. Campanella. "Extrusion processing

technology." Hoboken: Wiley (2014).
3. Lee, Norman C. Practical guide to blow moulding. iSmithersRapra Publishing, 2006.

Reference Books:
1. Berins, M. (Ed.). (1991). Plastics engineering handbook of the society of the plastics industry.
Springer Science & Business Media.

2. Throne, J. L. (1996). Technology of thermoforming, Hanser..

3. Stevens, M. J., &Covas, J. A. (2012). Extruder principles and operation. Springer Science &
Business Media.

4. Rosato, D. V., Rosato, A. V., & Di Mattia, D. P. (2004). Blow molding handbook: technology,
performance, markets, economics: the complete blow molding operation. HanserVerlag.

5. Pye, R. G. W. (1983). Injection mould design: a design manual for the thermoplastics
Industry. Godwin Books.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 10
Injection moulding, terminology, process description, moulding cycle,
1.1 2
classification of moulds, 2-plate and 3-plate moulds
Different types of gates, cavity lay-out, setting up of mould, types of
1.2 injection unit, elements of plasticating process, classification of screw, 3
screw design, process control
Clamping unit, classification of machine hydraulics, ancillary equipment,
1.3 3
computer operation
1.4 Trouble shooting of injection moulding, reaction injection moulding 2
2 Module II 9
Extrusion, principle, types of extruders, single screw and twin-screw
2.1 3
extruders, metering, screw design, process control variables
Types of dies, die design, typical extrusion diesstraight through dies,
2.2 2
offset dies, crosshead dies
Wire coating, dies for tubular film, flat film dies, sheet dies, tube dies,
2.3 elastic properties and die swell, manufacturing of pipes, cables, extrusion 2
profiles
Blown films, flat film, sheets, filaments, lamination, calibrators for rigid
2.4 2
and semi rigid tubes, calibration of profiles, extrusion of elastomers
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

3 Module III 9
Blow moulding, terminology, basis, process variables, injection & stretch
3.1 blow moulding, single and multi layer blowmoulding 3

Extrusion blow moulding, extrusion heads, Continuous extrusion blow

3.2 3
moulding
Process controls for blow moulding machine, process and product
3.3 1
controls, trouble shooting in extrusion blow moulding.
3.4 Stretch blow moulding advantages, machinery, trouble shooting 2
4 Module IV 9
4.1 Thermoforming, definition, methods of forming, 3
Thermoforming machinery, heating of sheet,heating cycle, stretching,
4.2 concept, hot strength, blistering, sags, 3

Cooling and trimming the parts, heat balance, shrinkage, trimming

4.3 3
operations, troubleshooting.

5 Module V 8
5.1 Rotational moulding, types of machines, moulds, materials, part design, 2

5.2 calendering, types of calenders and strainer, embosser, winder, crowning, 2

Machinery powder coating, manufacturing methods, application
5.3 methods, types of powder coating, finishing and machining of plastics, 4
joining, welding and assembling of plastics.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT304 TYRE TECHNOLOGY
PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Objective of this course is to explain the Industrial manufacturing of tyres along with
its research and development.This course introduces students to machineries usedto manufacture
various types of tyres. The formulation of tyre compounds, its processing, building and curing
process is included. After this course the student will be able to explain the tyre grip mechanism,
tyre design features and tyre testing methods.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about polymer processing and elastomers.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand the parts and functions of tyre.
CO2 Define tyre sizing, tyre design and tyre grip mechanisms.
CO3 Correlate the formulation of tyre with the property required from each part of the tyre.
Explain the industrial manufacture of tyre including building, curing and post cure
CO4
treatments.
Understand various raw material, in process and product tests performed in tyre
CO5
companies for quality control.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10 11 12

CO 1 3 1 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 1 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 2 2 … … … 1 … … … … …

CO 4 3 2 … … 1 … … … … … … …

CO 5 3 2 … … 1 … … … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 50
Analyze
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Understand the parts and functions of tyre.

1. What is the role of carcass in tyre?

2. What is meant by tread patterns.
3. Which are the major functions of a passenger car tyre?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Define tyre sizing, tyre design and tyre grip mechanisms.

1. Understand the tyre designation on the side wall of a tyre.

2. Design and formulate thetube and tyre compounds.
3. Compare tyres for different applications.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):Correlate the formulation of tyre with the property required from each
part of the tyre.

1. Formulation oftyre compounds and give justification for the selection.

2. Explain the treatment for tyre reinforcements?
3. Explain the specific functions of the components of a tyre?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain the industrial manufacture of tyre including building, curing
and post cure treatments.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

1. Explain the tyre building process?

2. Explain the equipments and method of tyre curing?
3. Explain the green tyre and post cure treatments.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand various raw material, in process and product tests
performed in tyre companies for quality control.

1. Explain various types of tess performed for quality control of tyres.

2. Explain the test processes of non destructivetests ontyres.
3. Compare field tests and track test of tyres

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT304
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
TYRE TECHNOLOGY
PART – A
Answer All the Questions(10 x 3 = 30)

1. What is Tyresizing?
2. Which are the properties significant for tyre cords?
3. Define tyre flat spotting.
4. What are the majortyre tread patterns and their significance?
5. Which are the major rubbers used in tyre manufacture? Why?
6. Why slip angle and cornering force are critical in tyres?
7. What is meant by tyreimbalance?
8. What is the major difference between radial and bias tyres?
9.Define tyre noises and its reasons.

10. What is meant by tyre non uniformity? How can it be avoided?

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. a) With a neat sketch explain parts of a bias tyre.

b) Explain Self align torque and its significance. (9+5 = 14)

OR

12. a) Explain tyre grip mechanism and tyre tread features.

b) Explain the functions of the tyre and contradictory requirements expected from tyre as a
product. . (8+6 = 14)

Module 2
13.a) Explain the major differences in structural design of radial tyres compared to bias tyre.

b) What are the specialities of OTR tyres. (8+6 = 14)

OR

14. a) Explain the constructional features of tubeless tyres.

b) Explain the functional design of winter tyres with figures (8+6 = 14)

Module 3
15. a) Describe the significance and methods of Tyre Cord treatment.

b)Explain the synthesis of RFL solution. (8+6 = 14)

OR

16.a) Compare and contrast between various cords materials used in tyres.

b) Compare the performance of Bias tyre with radial tyres in fuel efficiency. (8+6 = 14)

Module 4
17. Elaborate on the machineries used in tyre building with its functions.

OR

18. Explain in detail about green tyre treatments and tyre curing. (7+7= 14)

Module 5
19. Explain the major destructive tests done in tyreindustries. Compare Raw material test and In-
Process tests. (9+5 = 14)

OR
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

20.Explain in detail about tyre analysis for conicity, ply steer andtyrenon uniformity.

(9+5 = 14)

Syllabus
Module 1
Tyre functions, History on the design and development of tyres, current status of tyre industry in
Indiaand its future prospects, tyre sizing, different components of a tyre, its geometry,basic
functions, functions of a pneumatic tyre, load carrying, vibration and noise reduction, the tyre
function as a spring, contribution to road adhesion, tyre friction contribution to driving control,
steering control and self aligning torque.

Module 2
Solid tyres, concave tyres, winter tyres, OTR tyre, bicycle tyre, different types of tyres, bias, bias
belted, radial, relative merits and demerits, their components, tube and tubeless tyres basic
features.

Module 3
Manufacturing techniques of various tyres - two wheeler, car tyres, truck tyres, cycle tyres, cycle
tubes, OTR tyres, aircraft tyres, automotive tubes, manufacture of tyre treads, beads, sidewalls,
compounding techniques, principles of designing formulations for various rubber components,
tyre reinforcement materials (textile, steel, glass, aramid), criteria of selection, different styles
and construction, textile treatment (RFL dip).

Module 4
Tyremould design, green tyre design principles, methods of building green tyres for bias, bias
belted, radial and tubeless tyres, green tyre treatments, tyre curing methods, curing bags,
bladders, diaphragms, autoclave, airbag, bagomatic, autoform, post cure inflation, different types
of tyre building machines, bead winding machine, bias cutters, curing presses.

Module 5
Tyre Testing and Quality Control ,Measurement of tyre properties, dimension and size-static and
loaded, tyre construction analysis, endurance test, wheel and plunger tests, traction, cornering
coefficient aligning torque coefficient, rolling resistance, non-uniformity dimensional variations,
force variations, radial force variation, lateral force variation concentricity and ply steer, tyre
balance, mileage, X-ray holography, foot print pressure distribution, BIS standards for tyres,
tubes and flaps, quality control tests, failure mechanism of cord reinforced rubber, tyre forces on
dry and wet road surface, traction forces on dry, wet, ice, snow and irregular pavements, tyre
noise, mechanism of noise generation, flatspotting, fatigue resistance, pantographing, pneumatic
resilience effect.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books:

1. De, Sadhan K., and Jim R. White, eds. Rubber technologist's handbook. Vol. 1.
iSmithersRapra Publishing, 2001.
2. Cebon, David. Handbook of vehicle-road interaction. 1999.
3. Flintsch, Gerardo W., Kevin K. McGhee, Edgar de León Izeppi, and ShahriarNajafi. "The
little book of tire pavement friction." Pavement Surface Properties Consortium 1 (2012).

Reference Books:
1. Clark, S. K. (Ed.). (1981). Mechanics of pneumatic tires. US Government Printing Office.

2. French, T. (1989). Tyre technology.

3. Kovac, F. J. (1973). Tire technology.

4. Rodgers, B., & Waddell, W. (2005). Tire engineering. In Science and Technology of
Rubber(Third Edition).

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 10
Tyre functions, History on the design and development of tyres, current
1.1 status of tyre industry in India and its future prospects 2

1.2 Tyre sizing, different components of a tyre, its geometry,basic functions 3

Functions of a pneumatic tyre, load carrying, vibration and noise
1.3 3
reduction, the tyre function as a spring
Contribution to road adhesion, tyre friction contribution to driving
1.4 2
control, steering control and self aligning torque
2 Module II 9
2.1 Solid tyres, concave tyres, wintertyres, OTR tyre, bicycle tyre 3
2.2 Different types of tyres, bias, bias belted, radial 3
Relative merits and demerits, their components, tube and tubeless tyres
2.3 3
basic features
3 Module III 9
Manufacturing techniques of various tyres - two wheeler, car tyres, truck
3.1 tyres, cycle tyres, cycle tubes, OTR tyres, aircraft tyres 3

3.2 Automotive tubes, manufacture of tyretreads, beads, sidewalls 2

Compounding techniques, principles of designing formulations for
3.3 2
various rubber components
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Tyre reinforcement materials (textile, steel, glass, aramid), criteria of

3.4 2
selection, different styles and construction, textile treatment (RFL dip)
4 Module IV 9
4.1 Tyremould design, green tyre design principles 3
Methods of building green tyres for bias, bias belted, radial and tubeless
4.2 tyres, green tyre treatments, tyre curing methods, curing bags, bladders, 3
diaphragms, autoclave, airbag, bagomatic, autoform

Post cure inflation, different types of tyre building machines, bead

4.3 winding machine, bias cutters, curing presses 3

5 Module V 8
Measurement of tyre properties, dimension and size-static and loaded,
5.1 tyre construction analysis 2

Endurance test, wheel and plunger tests, traction, cornering coefficient

aligning torque coefficient, rolling resistance, non-uniformity
dimensional variations, force variations, radial force variation, lateral
5.2 force variation concentricity and ply steer, tyre balance, mileage, X-ray 3
holography, foot print pressure distribution, BIS standards for tyres,
tubes and flaps, quality control tests

Failure mechanism of cord reinforced rubber, tyre forces on dry and wet
road surface, traction forces on dry, wet, ice, snow and irregular
5.3 3
pavements, tyre noise, mechanism of noise generation, flatspotting,
fatigue resistance, pantographing, pneumatic resilience effect
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

PAINTS AND SURFACE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT306
COATINGS PCC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed studyof
fundamentals of paint science and components of paint. Significant topics frommethodology
of paint manufacturing,classification of paint, different testing methods and paint film
defectsare included in the remaining modules.After the completion of this course, students
should achieve sufficient knowledge aboutthe basics of paint technology.

Prerequisite:Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe fundamentals of paint science.

CO 2 Explain the significance ofcomponents of paint.
CO 3 Illustrate classification of paints based on binders and application.
CO 4 Explain properties of paint.
CO 5 Explain the significance of paint testing, defects and application methods.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3 1
1
CO 3 1 2
2
CO 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 3 1 2
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Describe the principle of reflection and refraction

2. Explain the chromaticity diagrams for colour measurements.

3.What is haze and gloss?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Explain the significance of solvents in paint formulation?

2. What is the function and types of extender pigment in paint.

3. Comment on pigment properties.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Give an account of various types of binders used in paint industry.

2.Explain alkyd paints.

3.Comment on marine coatings.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Understand various paint drying methods.

2. Understand the factors affecting coating properties.

3. Evaluate mechanical properties of coating.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1.Explain paint film defects.

2. Comment on various paint application methods.

3.Explain the destructive testing of paint.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT306 PAINTS AND SURFACE COATINGS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Definereflection?

2. Describe haze. What is its significance?

3. Give the importance of metallic pigments.

4. What is the function of binders?

5. Give application of alkyd paints.

6. Differentiate ball mill and sand mill.

7. What is PVC?

8. Describe optical properties of coating.

9. How skinning of paints can be controlled?

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

10. Detail how mechanical cleaning can be done on substrates?

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) Describe chromaticity diagrams for colour measurements. (9M)

b) How can you determine haze and gloss? (5M)

12. a) Explain reflection, refraction and diffraction. (14M)

Module II

13. a)With suitable diagram explain methods used for preparation of dispersion of
pigments. (8M)

b) Describe solvent properties. (6M)

14. a) Describe pigment properties. (9M)

b) Explain different additives used in paint foarmulation. (5M)

Module -III

15. a)Explain the importance of alkyd resins in paint industry. (8M)

b) Give classification of paints based on application (6M)

16. a) Describe polyurethane coatings (6M)

b) Explain can coatings. (8M)

Module -IV

17. a) Describe mechanism of paint film formation (8M)

b)Explain how film thickness affect coating properties. (6M)

18. a) Explain optical properties of coatings. (8M)

b)Explain the effect of rheological behaviour on paint performance. (6M)

Module -V

19. a) Give destructive testing of paint material. (7M)

b) Illustrate paint film defects. (7M)

20. a) Explain the surface cleaning methods used on metal surfaces. (7M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

b)Explain paint application methods. (7M)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1

Fundamentals of paint science, reflection, refraction, diffraction, colour science, surface

uniformity, chromaticity diagrams for colour measurements, dry film properties –gloss,
hiding power, colour.

Module 2

Paint components, pigments, pigment properties, different types, selection, dispersion and
colour matching of pigments, paint manufacture,solvents, different types, solvent properties,
binder or resins,oils, driers, dilutents, additives, Oleo resinous Varnishes.

Module 3

Classification based on polymeric resin, emulsion, oil and alkyd paints, acrylic paints, epoxy
coatings, polyurethanes, silicones, formaldehydebased resins,Polyester resins, chlorinated
rubbers, hydrocarbon resins, vinyl resins,Classification based on application appliance
finishes, automotive finishes, coil coatings, can coatings, marine coatings, aircraftfinishes.

Module 4

Mechanism of film formation and drying, factors affecting coating properties, film thickness,
film density, internal stresses, pigment volume concentration (PVC). different methods used
for film preparation, Mechanical and optical properties of coatings, ageing properties, effect
of rheological behaviour on paint performance.

Module 5

Adhesion properties of coatings, factors affecting adhesive bond, thermodynamics of

adhesion, testing of paint materials- destructive and nondestructive methods, paint film
defects, surface cleaning treatments, paint application methods.

Text Books

1. Manufacturing Technology, M. Hastle Hurst. Swaraj Paul, “ Surface coating: Science

and Technology”, 1985,Wiley- Interscience

2.R. Lambourne. “ Paint and Surface Coatings-Theory and Practice”, 1987(1) Ellis

Horwood Chichester Paint and Surface Coatings Lambourne and Strivens.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. Bentley, John, and Gerald Patrick Anthony Turner. Introduction to paint chemistry and
principles of paint technology. CRC Press, 1997.

2. Sjoblom, Johan, ed. Encyclopedic handbook of emulsion technology. CRC press, 2001.

3. Hess, Manfred. "Paint film defects. Their causes and cure." (1951).

4. Herbst, Willy, and Klaus Hunger. Industrial organic pigments: production, properties,
applications. John Wiley & Sons, 2006.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Paint Science(9 hours)
1.1 Fundamentals of paint science, reflection, refraction, diffraction, 3
1.2 colour science, surface uniformity, chromaticity diagrams for 3
colour measurements,
1.3 dry film properties –gloss, hiding power, colour. 3

2 Paint Components(9 hours)

2.1 Paint components, pigments, pigment properties, different types, 3
selection, dispersion and colour matching of pigments
2.2 solvents, different types, solvent properties, binder or resins oils 3
and Oleo resinous Varnishes , Alkyd resins, Polyester resins,
2.3 Acrylicresins, amino resins, epoxy resins,Urethaneresins 3
,extenders, additives, oils and driers, dilutents.
3 Paint Classifications (9 hours)
3.1 Paint classifications- based on polymeric resin, emulsion, oil and 3
alkyd paints, acrylic paints, epoxy coatings,
3.2 polyurethanes, silicones, formaldehyde based resins, Polyester 3
resins, chlorinated rubbers, acrylics, hydrocarbon resins.
3.3 Classification based on application, appliance finishes, automotive 3
finishes,coil coatings, can coatings, marine coatings, aircraft
finishes.

4 Paint properties (9 hours)

4.1 Mechanism of film formation and drying, factors affecting coating 4
properties, film thickness, film density, internal stresses, pigment
volume concentration (PVC).
4.2 different methods used for film preparation, Mechanical and 3
optical properties of coatings, ageing properties,
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

4.3 effect of rheological behaviour on paint performance 2

5 Paint defects and testing(9 hours)

5.1 Adhesion properties of coatings, factors affecting adhesive bond, 3
thermodynamics of adhesion,

5.2 testing of paint materials- destructive and nondestructive methods, 3

5.3 paint film defects, surface cleaning treatments, paint application 3
methods.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

YEAR OF
COMPREHENSIVE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT308 INTRODUCTION
COURSE WORK PCC 1 0 0 1 2019

Preamble: The course is designed to ensure that the student have firmly grasped the foundational
knowledge in Polymer Engineering familiar enough with the technological concepts. It provides an
opportunity for the students to demonstrate their knowledge in various in Polymer Engineering subjects.

Pre-requisite: Nil

Course outcomes: After the course, the student will able to:

CO1 Learn to prepare for a competitive examination

CO2 Comprehend the questions in in Polymer Engineering and answer them with confidence
CO3 Communicate effectively with faculty in scholarly environments
Analyze the comprehensive knowledge gained in basic courses in the field of in Polymer
CO4 Engineering

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Comprehensive
Course Work
POT 308

CO1 3 1 1 2 1 1
CO2 3 1 2 3
CO3 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 1 2

Assessment pattern

Bloom’s End Semester Examination

Category (Marks)
Remember 25
Understand 15
Apply 5
Analyze 5
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

End Semester Examination Pattern:

A written examination will be conducted by the University at the end of the sixth semester.
The written examination will be of objective type similar to the GATE examination. Syllabus
for the comprehensive examination is based on following five in Polymer Engineering core
courses.
POT 203- Polymer Science

POT 204- Latex Technology

POT 301- Plastic Materials

POT 305- Rubbers- Science & Technology

POT 307–Polymer Processing

The written test will be of 50 marks with 50 multiple choice questions (10 questions from
each module) with 4 choices of 1 mark each covering all the five core courses. There will
be no negative marking. The pass minimum for this course is 25. The course should be
mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for practicing questions based on the core
courses listed above.

Written examination : 50marks

Total : 50 marks

Course Level Assessment and Sample Questions:

1. Match the properties of the Column 1 and Column 2.

a. Toughness 1. Resistance to plastic deformation

b. Resilience 2.Time depend end permanent deformation under constant load
c. Creep 3.Total Elongation at failure
d. Hardness 4. Area under the stress-strain curve
5.Area under the elastic part of the stress strain curve

2. Which of the following polymer is sensitive to moisture absorption?

(Polyethylene, Polystyrene, Polybutadiene, Polyamide)

3. High styrene Resin is used in ---------------------- Industry.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

(Conveyor Belt, Shoe sole, Cable, Hose)

4. Glass Transition temperature is dependent on

(Chemical structure of the Polymer , Addition of plasticizer, Crosslink density, All the 3
parameters)

5. The polymer having Unsaturation in the side chain is

(NBR, SBR, EPDM, all the 3)

6. Non Newtonian behavior means________________

(Variation of viscosity with shear, variation of viscosity with temperature, variation of
viscosity with pressure, All the 3 paramerters)

7. Furnace black with smallest particle size is_____________(SAF, ISAF,GPF,FEF)

8. Storage hardening of NR is due to____________bonds. (C-C,C-H, C=O,C-Cl)
9. Preform is a term associated with____________blowmoulding. (IBM,EBM,SBM,All)

10. Melting temperature of Nylon 6 is___________

(218 degcel, 278 degcel, 267 deg cel,320 degcel)
11. Polycarbonate is made from____________________(Bisphenol A, Naphtha, Crude oil,
Styrene)
12. High temperature & shorter curing time is preferred for_________________
(thick moulded article, thin moulded goods, SR compounds, NR compounds)
13. Typical friction ratio for NR compound is ______________(1:1.25,1:3, 1:2,1:1.5)
14. DRC of Cenex is ______________(30,60,45,80)
15. Write the normal percentage of isoprene in IIR.(10, 15, 3, 12)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Code: POT 308

Comprehensive Course Work
MODULE 1

Kinetic and thermodynamic views of glass transition, factors influencing glass transition
temperature, degree of crystallinity, factors affecting crystallinity, polymer solutions,
thermodynamic view of miscibility, effect of polymer structure onelectrical properties of
polymers, clarity, transparency, haze, transmittance, reflectance, gloss. Chemical reactivity of
linear and crosslinkedpolymers , polymer analogous reactions, chain end and random
degradation, degradation by oxygen, ozone, heat, stabilisation to prevent degradation.

MODULE 2

Natural rubber latex, general composition, preservation, fundamental latex characteristics,

particle size and distribution, stability and destabilisation, coacervation, test methods, total
solids, dry rubber content, total alkalinity, coagulum content, sludge content, pH, KOH number,
mechanical, chemical and thermal stability, VFA number, zinc oxide stability principles of latex
compounding, de-ammoniation of latex,dipping methods,rubber-textile composite products, latex
bonded fibrous structures, coir foam, latex treated rugs and carpet backing,latex foam processing
methods,latex castings and moldings.

MODULE 3

Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of LDPE, HDPE, cross linked
and chlorinated PE and PP,PVC, polyvinylidene chloride, PVA, polyvinyl acetate, PMMA and
PAN, PU, PTFE, polyvinyl fluoride polyvinylidenefluoride.,PS,HIPS,ABS,SAN, and
polyacetal.Thermoplastic polyesters, unsaturated polyester laminating resins, nylon-5, 6, 66,
6,12,aromatic polyamide,properties and application of PF, preparation of phenol formaldehyde
moulding powders, PF laminates. novolac, resol, MF and UF resins.

MODULE 4

Natural rubber, source, chemical formula, molecular weight distribution, crystallisation,

structure-property relationship, chemical reactivity, various forms of natural rubber- crumb,
sheet, crepe, SP rubber, DPNR, LNR, liquid rubber, classes of liquid elastomers, powdered
rubber,IR, BR, IIR, SBR, NBR, CR, PU, silicone and EP rubbers -- synthesis of monomers,
polymerisation, structure, properties, application, crosslinking by different methods, oxidation
and ageing, halogenation of IIR.

MODULE 5
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Compounding ingredients- plasticisers, process aids, extenders, factice, mould release agents,
tackifying agents, blowing agents, bonding agents, fragrances, antistatic agents, colorants, and
other special additives, stabilizers, fillers, antioxidants, antiozonants, UV absorbers, flame
retardants, peptiser, retarder, curing agents,Compounding, different methods, principles of
mixing, dispersive and distributive mixing, mastication, two-roll mill mixing, internal mixers,
compression moulding, transfer moulding.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PRODUCT MANUFACTURING LAB
332 PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The product manufacturing lab is equipped with equipments to carry out the
manufacturing of various rubber and plastic products.

Prerequisite: Engineering Chemistry Lab.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop skill to operate two roll mill, hydraulic press, hand press, various moulds
etc.
CO 2 Develop skill on measuring cure time and to correlate mastication time on plasticity/
viscosity
CO 3 Develop skills to manufacture various rubber and plastic products

CO 4 Develop team work skills through group activities.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 2 1 2 2
1
CO 2 1 2 2
2
CO 2 2 2 2
3
CO 2 1 1 3
4
Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed
regarding award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and trouble shooting) :25 Marks
(d) Viva voce :20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions: Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second

series test covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be
conducted under the equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The
number of candidates evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for
the University examination only on submitting the duly certified record. The external
examiner shall endorse the record.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

Develop skill to operate different mixing and moulding equipments

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)
Develop skill to measure cure time and understand the effect of mastcation time on
plasticity/viscosity
Course Outcome 3(CO3):
Develop skill to manufacture various rubber and plastic products
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Evaluating the experimentation capacity of student’s in group.
2.Analysing the interpretation skill of results with group discussion.
3. Reporting of experimental data, results and report within the stipulated time through team
effort.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

(List at least 18 experiments out of which 12 are mandatory.

Along with each experiment indicate the name of equipment required for conducting the
experiment. This is mandatory as per an order received from AICTE )
Two-roll mixing mill, hydraulic press, hand press, various moulds etc. are needed for the
following experiments

1. Determination of cure time and

2. Effect of mastication time on plasticity/ viscosity
3. Work practice in mastication, band formation, homogenisation and mixing using a
laboratory mill
4. Preparation of micro cellular sheet
5. V-strap
6. Tea mat POLYMER ENGINEERING
7. Injection bottle cap
8. Play ball
9. Solid tyre
10. Sponge
11. Eraser and oil seal
12. Man made hose
13. Solvent based adhesives
14. Hand lay-up: Plates prepared using glass fibre reinforced polyester composite
15. Compression moulding- glass fibre reinforced polyester composite
16. Two-roll mill and hydraulic press: Coir fibre reinforced natural rubber composite
17. Work Practice in calendaring, Injection moulding, Rotational moulding and Extrusion
18. Visit to factories manufacturing tyres and non tyre products

Reference Books

1. J.A. Brydson, Rubber Chemistry, Allied Science publishers, London, 1978

2. C M. Blow and C. hepburn, Rubber Technology and manufacture, Butterworths, 1971
3. J. A. Brydson, Rubber Materials and their Compounds, Elsevier, 1988
4. J.A. Brydson, Plastic materials, Newnes Butterworths, 1999
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POD334 MINIPROJECT PWS 0 0 3 2

Preamble: This course is designed for enabling the students to apply the knowledge to
address the real-world situations/problems and find solutions. The course is also intended to
estimate the ability of the students in transforming theoretical knowledge studied as part of
the curriculum so far in to a working model of a polymer system. The students are expected
to design and develop a project to innovatively solve a real-world problem.
Prerequisites: Subjects studied up to sixth semester.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO Course Outcome (CO) Bloom's

No. Category Level
Make use of acquired knowledge within the selected area of
CO 1 Level 3: Apply
technology for project development.
Identify, discuss and justify the technical aspects and design
CO 2 Level 3: Apply
aspects of the project with a systematic approach.
Interpret, improve and refine technical aspects for
CO 3 Level 3: Apply
engineering projects.
Associate with a team as an effective team player for the
CO 4 Level 3: Apply
development of technical projects.
Level 2:
CO 5 Report effectively the project related activities and findings.
Understand

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

POs PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
COs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 3 - 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 - 2 3 3
CO 4 3 3 2 2 - - - 3 3 3 3 3
CO 5 3 - - - 2 - - 3 2 3 2 3
3/2/1: high/medium/low

Assessment Pattern
The End Semester Evaluation (ESE) will be conducted as an internal evaluation based on the
product, the report and a viva- voce examination, conducted by a 3-member committee
appointed by Head of the Department comprising HoD or a senior faculty member, academic
coordinator for that program and project guide/coordinator. The Committee will be
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

evaluating the level of completion and demonstration of functionality/specifications,

presentation, oral examination, working knowledge and involvement.

The Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is conducted by evaluating the progress of the
mini project through minimum of TWO reviews. At the time of the 1st review, students are
supposed to propose a new system/design/idea, after completing a thorough literature study
of the existing systms under their chosen area. In the 2nd review students are expected to
highlight the implementation details of the proposed solution. The review committee should
assess the extent to which the implementation reflects the proposed design. A well coded,
assembled and completely functional product is the expected output at this stage. The final
CIE mark is the average of 1st and 2nd review marks.
A zeroth review may be conducted before the beginning of the project to give a chance for
the students to present their area of interest or problem domain or conduct open brain
storming sessions for innovative ideas. Zeroth review will not be a part of the CIE evaluation
process.

Marks Distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE

150 75 75

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Marks awarded by Guide : 15 marks
Project Report : 10 marks
Evaluation by the Committee : 40 Marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of marks.

(a) Demonstration : 50 Marks
(b) Project report : 10 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 15marks

Course Plan
In this course, each group consisting of three/four members is expected to design and develop
a moderately complex polymer product with practical applications. The basic concept of
product design may be taken into consideration.

Students should identify a topic of interest in consultation with Faculty-in-charge of

miniproject/Advisor. Review the literature and gather information pertaining to the chosen
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

topic. State the objectives and develop a methodology to achieve the objectives. Carryout the
design/fabrication or develop compounds / chemical formulations to achieve the objectives.
Demonstrate the novelty of the project through the results and outputs. The progress of the
mini project is evaluated based on a minimum of two reviews.

The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A project report is
required at the end of the semester. The product has to be demonstrated for its full design
specifications. Innovative design concepts, reliability considerations, aesthetics/ergonomic
aspects taken care of in the project shall be given due weight.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
PROGRAM ELECTIVE I
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT312 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The students will be able to analyse chemical engineering operations involving
mass transfer.This course will familiarise the modes of heat transfer and the various heat
transfer equipments used in process industries. First two modules deals with heat transfer and
rest of the modules are about mass transfer and the various unit operations and its material
balances.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in heat transfer and various unit operations.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Familiarise with the modes of heat transfer and the associated laws
CO 2 Apply dimensional analysis for forced and free convection
CO 3 Know about diffusion and the governing laws
CO 4 Learn about various unit operations and material balances
CO 5 Design of heat exchangeequipment and rectification columns

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 3
1
CO 3
2
CO 2 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 2 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 20 20
Apply 10 20 30
Analyse 20 20
Evaluate 10
Create 10
Mark distribution POLYMER ENGINEERING

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Tofamiliarise with the modes of heat transfer and the associated
laws.
1. Explain with examples the various modes of heat transfer.
2. Develop Laplace equation.
3.The composite wall of an oven consists of three materials, two of which are of known
thermal conductivity𝑘𝑘𝐴𝐴 = 20 W/m K and 𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐 = 50 W/m K and known thicknessLA = 0.3 m and
𝐿𝐿𝑐𝑐 = 0.15 m. The third material, B, which is sandwiched between materials A and C is of
known thickness LB = 0.15 m, but unknown thermal conductivity 𝑘𝑘𝐵𝐵 . Under steady state
conditions, measurements reveal an outer surface temperature of 20⁰C, an inner surface
temperature of 600⁰C and oven air temperature of 800⁰C. The inside convection coefficient h
is known to be 25 W/𝑚𝑚2 K. Determine the value of 𝑘𝑘𝐵𝐵 .

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Toapply dimensional analysis for forced and free convection.
1.What is characteristic length and equivalent diameter?
2.A metal wire of 0.01 m diameter and thermal conductivity 200 W/m K is exposed to a fluid
stream with a convective coefficient 1000 W/m2K. Determine the Biot number.
3. Define Stanton number.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):To know about diffusion and the governing laws
1. Show that the diffusivity is same for diffusion of A in B or B in A.
2. Explain the analogies between heat and mass transfer.
3. Define Henry’s and Raoult’s law.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):To learn the various unit operations and material balances
1. Explain time of drying in detail.
2. Explain leaching operation.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
3. Give the material and enthalpy balance for simple distillation.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): To design heat exchangers and distillation column

1. Explain NTU method of heat exchanger analysis?
2. Two fluids exchange heat in a counter current heat exchanger. Fluid A enters at 420⁰C and
has a mass flow rate of 1 kg/s. Fluid B enters at 20⁰C and also has a mass rate of 1 kg/s. The
effectiveness of the heat exchanger is 75%. Specific heat of fluid A is 1 kJ/Kg K, and that of
B is 4 kJ/Kg K. Determine the exit temperature of fluid B and the heat transfer rate.
3.Explain in detail the McCabe Thiele method.

Model Question paper

QP CODE:Reg No:______________

PAGES:3Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY SIXTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREEEXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT312 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER

(2019-Scheme)

Data Book (Approved for use in the examination)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define is thermal diffusivity. Give its significance? Write its units in SI system.
2. Explain fin efficiency.
3. Give the significance of Grashoff number.
4. Explain Buckingham pie theorem.
5. Define Fick’s law of diffusion.
6. Explain diffusivity in gases.
7. Explain freeze drying.
8. Explain the significance of Absorption factor.
9. Explain the characteristics of packings.
10. Explain flash distillation.(10x3 = 30 marks)

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11.a)What are the basic modes of heat transfer? State the phenomenological laws in each
mode of heat transfer. Write the relevant equations.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
b) The wall of a building is a multi-layered composite consisting of 100-mm layer of brick, a
100-mm layer of glass fiber, a10-mm layer of gypsum plaster, and a 6-mm layer of pine
panel. If hinsideis 10W/𝑚𝑚2 K and houtside is 70 W/𝑚𝑚2 K. Calculate the total thermal
resistance and the overall coefficient for heat transfer. Also determine the interface
temperatures.
Properties: T= 300K, Thermal conductivity of: Brick = 1.3 W/m K, Glass fiber = 0.038W/m
K, Gypsum = 0.17W/m K, Pine panel=0.12W/m K. (6+8 = 14 marks)

12.a)The inside surface of a brick wall (k = 1 W/m K) of 10 cm thickness is at a temperature

of 930⁰C and the outside surface is exposed to ambient air at 30⁰C providing a heat transfer
coefficient of 20 W/𝑚𝑚2 K. Calculate the temperature of the outside surface. Calculate the
thickness of insulation (k = 0.1 W/m K) that is needed so that outside surface temperature
exposed to air will not exceed 90⁰C.
b) Develop an equation for temperature profile for a hollow cylinder with internal
generation? (8+6 = 14 marks)

Module II

13.a)Using dimensional analysis obtain the relation Nu=f(Re,Pr).State the assumptions and
conditions clearly.
b)Derive Reynolds analogy between heat and momentum transfer. (9+5 = 14 marks)

14. a) Water flowing in a steel pipe of diameter 0.02 m is to be cooled from 40⁰C to 30⁰C.The
velocity of water in the steel pipe is 1.5 m/s. The inside surface temperature of the steel pipe
is maintained at 25⁰C. The physical properties of water at mean bulk temperature of fluid are
specific heat= 4.174 kJ/kg K, Density= 995 kg/𝑚𝑚3 , Thermal conductivity= 0.623 W/m K,
Viscosity= 7.65×10−4 Pa.s. Calculate the convective heat transfer coefficient for water. Also
calculate the length of tube required.
b)Define Reynolds number and Nusselt number. Explain its physical significance.
(9+5= 14marks)

Module -III

15. a) Explain equimolar counter diffusion.

b) Ammonia diffuses through nitrogen gas under equimolal counter diffusion at a total
pressure of 1.013 x 105 Pa and at a temperature of 298 K. The diffusion path is 0.15 m. The
partial pressure of ammonia at one point is1.5 x 104 Pa and at the other point is 5 x 103 Pa.
Diffusivity under the given condition is 2.3 x 10−5 𝑚𝑚2/s. Calculate the flux of ammonia.
(5+9 = 14 marks)
16. a) Explain the material balance for various processes.
b)Explain molecular diffusion and eddy diffusion. (10+4 = 14 marks)

Module -IV

17. Explain tray tower in detail with a schematic diagram. (14 marks)
18. a) Explain the properties of solvent for absorption. POLYMER ENGINEERING

b) 1000 kg dry weight of non-porous solid is dried under constant drying conditions with an
air velocity of 0.75 m/s, so that the surface area of drying is 55𝑚𝑚2 . The critical moisture
content of the material may be taken as 0.125 kg water/kg dry solids. If the initial rate of
drying is 0.3 g/ 𝑚𝑚2 .s. How long will it take to dry the material from 0.15 to 0.025 kg water/
kg dry solid? (5+9 = 14marks)

Module -V

19.a) Explain single and multiple effect evaporator.

b)Explain differential distillation and derive Rayleigh’s equation (6+8 = 14 marks)

20. Using McCabe Thiele method how you will determine the number of theoretical plates in
a fractionating column. (14 marks)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1:Modes of heat transfer, laws governing heat transfer, thermal conductivity, general
heat conduction equation in Cartesian coordinates,steady state one dimensional heat flow
through rectangular, cylindrical and spherical system,steady state conduction through
compound resistances in series, heat conduction with internal heat generation, thermal
diffusivity, extended surfaces in heat transfer- fins, fin efficiency.

Module 2: Convection thermal boundary layer concept, individual and overall heat transfer
coefficients, Dimensional analysis for forced and free convection by Buckingham pie
theorem, correlations used in both cases,Analogy between heat and momentum transfer-
Reynolds and Colburn analogy, concept of LMTD for parallel and counter current flow,
temperature-distance plots for different flow arrangements, determination of area, length,
heat exchanger effectiveness- NTU, HTU.

Module 3:Molecular diffusion, diffusion in liquids and gases, Ficks law, diffusivity of gases
and liquids, steady state and equimolar counter diffusion in gases and liquids, analogies
between heat and mass transfer, Daltons law, Henrys law, Raoults law, ideal and non- ideal
liquid solutions, various unit operations and material balances- drying, absorption,
distillation, evaporation, leaching.

Module 4:Drying:equilibrium moisture content, bound and unbound moisture, critical

moisture content, time of drying, rate of drying, drying curves, equipments for drying. Gas
absorption- tray, spray and packed column, types and properties of tower packings, solubility
of gas in a liquid and choice of solvent.

Module 5:Distillation, plate efficiency, rectification, construction of fractionating column,

determination of theoretical plates by McCabe Thiele method, relative volatility.
Evaporation- single and multiple effect evaporators, POLYMER
performance ofENGINEERING
evaporators, boiling
point elevation, Duhrings rule, methods of feeding.

Text Books
1.Binay K Dutta, Principles of Mass Transfer and Separation Processes. PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2015.
2. K.V.Narayanan and B. Lakshmikutty, Mass Transfer,Theory and Applications.CBS
Publishers.
3.D.S Kumar, Heat and Mass Transfer.S. K. Kataria& Sons, 2009.
4. K. A. Gavhane, Hear Transfer.NiraliPrakashan, 2008.
5. R. K Rajput, Heat and Mass Transfer. S. Chand, 2007.
6. Welty, Fundamentals of Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer (5th ed.).John Wiley &Sons,
Inc.,2000.

Reference Books

1. Robert E Treybal, Mass Transfer Operations(3th ed.). McGraw Hill, 1980

2. Badger, Introduction to Chemical Engineering. Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 1984.
3. Warren L McCabe, Julian C Smith, P Harriot, Unit operations of chemical
Engineering(7th ed.).McGraw Hill, 2005.

Data Book (Approved for use in the examination):

1.C P Kothandaraman, S Subramanyan, Heat and Mass Transfer Data Book(8th ed.).New Age
International (P) Limited, 2014.
2. Steam table

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to Heat Transfer (7 hours)
1.1 Modes of heat transfer, laws governing heat transfer, thermal
conductivity, general heat conduction equation in Cartesian 3
coordinates.
1.2 Steady state one dimensional heat flow through rectangular, 2
cylindrical and spherical system, steady state conduction through
compound resistances in series, heat conduction with internal heat
generation, thermal diffusivity
1.3 Extended surfaces in heat transfer- fins, fin efficiency.Numerical 2
problems related to heat transfer
2 Formation of various Dimensionless numbers (7 hours)
2.1 Concept of convection thermal boundary layer, concept of
individual and overall heat transfer coefficients, Dimensional 2
analysis for forced and free convection by Buckingham pie theorem,
Correlations used in both cases, Numerical problems
2.2 Significance of dimensionless numbers,Analogy between heat and
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
momentum transfer- Reynolds and Colburn analogy 2
2.3 Concept of logarithmic mean temperature difference for parallel and
counter current flow, temperature-distance plots for different flow 3
arrangements, determination of area, length, heat exchanger
effectiveness- NTU, HTU. Numerical problems.
3 Introduction to Mass Transfer(7 hours)
3.1 Molecular diffusion, diffusion in liquids and gases, Ficks law,
diffusivity of gases and liquids, steady state and equimolar counter 3
diffusion in gases and liquids. Numerical problems related to
diffusion.
3.2 Analogies between heat and mass transfer, Dalton’s law, Henry’s
law, Raoult’s law, ideal and non- ideal liquid solutions. 2
Unit operations: drying, absorption, distillation, evaporation, 2
leaching (Material balances only).
4 Features of unit operations (7 hours)
4.1 Drying- equilibrium moisture content, bound and unbound moisture, 2
critical moisture content, time of drying, rate of drying, drying
curves. Numerical problems on time of drying.
4.2 Equipments for drying: rotary dryers, conveyor dryer, drum dryer, 2
spray dryer. Freeze drying
4.3 Gas absorption- solubility of gas in a liquid and choice of solvent,
tray and packed column, counter and cocurrent operation (design 3
and problems not required),types and properties of tower packings,
associated problems - channeling, loading, flooding.
5 Design of unit operations (7 hours)
5.1 Distillation methods: flash distillation (material and enthalpy 3
balancesonly),differential distillation (Rayleigh’s
equation),construction of fractionating column, plate efficiency.
5.2 Continuous rectification: Principles of rectification, design of 2
fractionation columns by McCabe-Thiele method, relative volatility.
(Problems not required)
5.3 Evaporation: single and multiple effect evaporators, performance of 2
evaporators, boiling point elevation, Duhrings rule, methods of
feeding.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT322 ENERGY ENGINEERING
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: After studying this course students will be aware of different form of energy and
methods for harnessing different energy resources. They also understand the importance of
energy conservation and the different methods employed for energy conservation in industry
and day to day life.

Prerequisite:NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Identify different sources of energy , analyse the energy scenario and understand
different conventional energy production systems
CO 2 Explain the concepts of solar and ocean energy conversion
CO 3 Explain the Wind and biomass energy conversion technologies
CO 4 Explain the working and types of fuel cells and MHD systems
CO 5 Explain the concepts of energy conservation and energy audit and apply the
knowledge in process plants and daily life

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 3 2 2 2 2
1
CO
2
CO 2 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 3 3 2 2 2
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 10 10 60
Analyse 10 10 10
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Differentiate between renewable and non renewable energy resources

2. Analyse the energy situation in India and give your suggestions for a better energy
independence
3. Classify the different energy resources

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Discuss different Solar energy conversion technologies

2. Analyse the working of Solar PV system and suggest the methods to improve the
efficiency
3. Discuss the different ocean energy conversion technologies and comment on their
future

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Analyse the wind energy harnessing status in India

2. Discuss different wind energy conversion technologies
3. Analyse the process of biomass conversion technologies
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the working of a fuel cell and discuss the classification

2. Explain the working of MHD systems

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. discuss the energy conservation methods employed in chemical process plants

2. Analyse the concept of pinch Technology
3. Discuss the use of cogeneration as a energy conservation tool

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:2
Reg No:______________
Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 322 ENERGY ENGINEERING
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

(2019-Scheme)
PART A
(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1.Write a note on classification of energy resources

2.Explain the principle of fluidised bed combustion
3.Write the principle and working of solar pond
4.Discuss the principle of tidal energy conversion
5.Explain the steps in the anaerobic digestion of biomass
6.Discuss the wind energy situation in India
7.What is a fuel cell? Explain the principle and working
8.Explain the methods to harness geothermal energy
9.Distillation is an energy intensive operation. Give the energy conservation measures in a
distillation column
10. Explain the concept of Pinch Technology (10x3=30 marks)

PART B

11. Discuss the present Indian energy scenario and give your suggestions for a better
energy sustainability (14 marks)
OR

12. With a neat lay out explain the working of thermal power plant. List out the merits and
demerits (14 marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

OR

13. a) Explain the working of different solar collectors (7 marks)

b) Solar PV cells and its future. Comment (7 marks)

14. With a neat diagram explain the working of open and closed cycle ocean thermal energy
conversion systems (14 marks)

OR

15. Explain different wind energy conversion systems (14 marks)

16. Thermo chemical routes of biomass energy conversion systems: Explain the principle
and working (14 marks)

OR

17. Discuss the classification of fuel cell. Explain the working any two fuel cells (14 marks)

18. With a neat diagram explain the working MHD systems (14 marks)

19. What is energy audit? Discuss different types and objectives (14 marks)

OR

20. Write in detail about the energy conservation measures in a chemical process plants
(14marks)

Syllabus
Module 1 (6 hours)

Energy, general classification of energy, world energy resources and energy consumption,
Indian energy resources and energy consumption, energy Crisis, energy alternatives, thermal,
hydel and nuclear power plants, efficiency, merits and demerits of the above power plants,
fluidized bed combustion, combined cycle power plants

Module 2 (7 hours)

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water
heating, solar cooling, solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar
thermal power generation, solar energy application in India, , photo voltaic systems , energy
plantations.

Ocean wave energy conversion, ocean thermal energy conversion, tidal energy conversion,

Module 3 (7 hours)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Wind energy, types of windmills, types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Savanius rotor,
wind electric power generation, wind power in India, economics of wind farm

Biomass energy resources, thermochemical and biochemical methods of biomass conversion,

combustion, gasification, pyrolysis, fermentation, anaerobic digestion

Module 4 (7 hours)

Fuel cells, alkaline fuel cell, phosphoric acid fuel cell, molten carbonate fuel cell, solid oxide
fuel cell, solid polymer electrolyte fuel cell, Basic concepts of Microbial Fuel Cell
Magneto hydro dynamics: open cycle and closed cycle systems,geothermal energy.

Module 5 (8 hours)

Energy audit and Energy conservation in chemical process plants, energy saving in heat
exchangers, distillation columns, furnaces and boilers, steam economy in chemical plants,
energy conservation in petroleum, fertilizer and steel industry, cogeneration (CHP), pinch
technology, recycling for energy saving, electrical energy conservation in chemical Process
plants, environmental aspects of energy use.

Text Books

1. Rao S. &Parulekar B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers.

2. Bansal N.K., Kleeman M. &Meliss M., Renewable Energy Sources & Conversion Tech.,
Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Goldmberg J., Johansson, Reddy A.K.N. & Williams R.H., Energy for a Sustainable
World, John Wiley

Reference Books

1. Sukhatme S.P., Solar Energy, Tata McGraw Hill

2. Mittal K.M., Non-Conventional Energy Systems, Wheeler Publications
3. Venkataswarlu D.I, Chemical Technology, S. Chand
4. Pandey G.N., A Text Book on Energy System and Engineering, Vikas Publishing.
5. Rai G.D., Non-Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers.
6. S.S.Thipse, Energy conservation and management, Narosa Publishing House

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Energy classification, energy scenario and types of power plants (6 hours)
1.1 general classification of energy, 1

1.2 world energy resources and energy consumption, Indian energy 1

resources and energy consumption
1.3 energy Crisis, energy alternatives, 1
1.4 thermal, hydel and nuclear power plants 1
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

1.5 efficiency , merits and demerits of the above power plants, fluidized 1
bed combustion
1.6 combined cycle power plants 1
2 Solar energy and ocean energy (7 hours)
2.1 solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors 1
2.2 solar water heating, solar cooling, solar distillation 1
2.3 solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond 1
2.4 solar thermal power generation, solar energy application in India 1
2.5 photo voltaic systems , energy plantations 1
2.6 Ocean wave energy conversion, ocean thermal energy conversion, , 1

2.7 tidal energy conversion 1

3 Wind Energy and Biomass Energy (7 hours)

3.1 Wind energy, types of windmills 1

3.2 Types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Savanius rotor, 1

3.3 Wind electric power generation, wind power in India 1
3.4 , economics of wind farm 1
3.5 Biomass energy resources, 1

3.6 Thermo-chemical methods of biomass conversion, combustion, 1

gasification, pyrolysis
3.7 Biochemical methods of biomass conversion: fermentation, 1
anaerobic digestion
4 Fuel cells, MHD and geothermal energy(7 hours)
4.1 Fuel cells, alkaline fuel cell, 1

4.2 Phosphoric acid fuel cell, Molten carbonate fuel cell 1

4.3 Solid oxide fuel cell, solid polymer electrolyte fuel cell, Basic 1
concepts of Microbial Fuel Cell
4.4 Magneto hydro dynamics: introduction 1
4.5 Open cycle and closed cycle systems, 1
4.6 Geothermal energy 1
4.7 Methods for harnessing geothermal energy 1
5 Energy audit and Energy conservation (8 hours)

5.1 Energy audit and Energy conservation in chemical process plants, 1

5.2 Energy saving in heat exchangers, distillation columns, furnaces and 1

boilers
5.3 steam economy in chemical plants, 1
5.4 energy conservation in petroleum, fertilizer and steel industry, 1
5.5 cogeneration (CHP), 1
5.6 pinch technology 1
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

5.7 recycling for energy saving 1

5.8 Electrical energy conservation in chemical Process plants, 1
environmental aspects of energy use.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT332 INDUSTRIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
PCC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:This course gives students an insight into the essential concepts of industrial
bioprocessing. This course summarizes the biological and engineering principles involved in
the production of bioproducts and enzymes. Students get familiarize with the manufacturing
techniques of various biotechnology industry products in a very cost effective manner.

Prerequisite:Basic knowledge in Biotechnology.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Understand on fermentation and its upstream and downstream processing.

CO 2 Know about the production of commercially important primary and secondary
metabolites.
CO 3 Have an idea on biopolymers,vaccines and monoclonal antibodies.
CO 4 Understand the use of biotechnology in human life like biofertilizers,
bioremediation techniques.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3 2
1
CO 2 2
2
CO 2 3
3
CO 2 2
4

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 20 20
Apply 10 20 30
Analyse 20 20
Evaluate 10
Create 10
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Tounderstand on fermentation and its upstream and downstream
processing.
1.Explain the different modes of fermentation operation.
2. With a neat diagram explain the working of rotary filters.
3.Draw a microbial growth curve and explain the different phases.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Toknow about the production of commercially important

primary and secondary metabolites.
1. Name any two essential amino acids.
2. Comment on the characteristics of a fermenter used in antibiotic production.
3. With a neat process flow diagram explain the production of any one amino acid.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):To familiarise with biopolymer, vaccines and monoclonal

antibodies.
1. Explain azeotropic distillation.
2. Explain recombinant DNA technology.
3. Mention the different types of bacteria used as SCP.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):To understand the use of biotechnology in human life like
biofertilizers, bioremediation techniques.
1. What is composting?
2. Explain any two methods for algal production.
3. What is biopreservation? Explain the biological methods of biopreservation.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QP CODE:Reg No:______________

PAGES:3Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY SIXTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREEEXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT 332INDUSTRIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain about microbial metabolites.

2.What is upstream processing?
3. What are primary metabolites? Name any two primary metabolites.
4. What are the commercial uses of lactic acid?
5.Explain about the types of antibiotics.
6. Mention the types of proteases and their applications.
7. Give examples for biopesticides
8. What is SCP? Give its uses.
9. What is attenuation?
10. What is biotransformation?
(10x3 = 30 marks)

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11.a) Explain the different steps in bioprocess.

b) Explain in detail about Solid state fermentation. (8+6 = 14 marks)

12.a) Elaborate the different methods used for cell disruption.

b) Draw a microbial growth curve and explain the different phases. (8+6 = 14 marks)

Module II

13. With a neat process flow diagram explain the production of any one amino acid.

(14 marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

14. Explain about citric acid production. (14marks)

Module -III

15. With a neat process flow diagram explain the production of penicillin. (14 marks)
16. Explain the production of an enzyme used in leather and wool industry. (14 marks)

Module -IV

17.Explain the production of SCP. (14 marks)

18. a) Describe the process of cheese making.

b) Explain the steps involved in biofertilizer production. (7+7 = 14marks)

Module -V

19.a) Explain the ex-situ method of bioremediation.

b)Explain about bubble column bioreactor. (8+6 = 14 marks)

20.a) Explain the different steps in recombinant vaccine production.

b) What are biopiles? Explain. (10+4 =14 marks)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Introduction to Industrial Bioprocess, Fermentation- Solid State Fermentation and

Submerged Fermentation, brief survey of organisms - bacteria, viruses, fungi, their products,
fermenter, basic concepts of upstream and downstream process, process flow sheet, block
diagrams.

Module 2: Primary metabolites- production of commercially important primary metabolites

like amino acids, organic acids and vitamins. Production of alcohol.

Module 3:Secondary metabolites- production processes for various classes of secondary

metabolites like antibiotics, Production of Enzymes.

Module 4: Biopolymer, SCP, biopesticides, biofertilizers, beer, wine, dairy products.

Module 5: Biopreservatives, bioremediation, production of vaccines, monoclonal antibodies,

human insulin production, bioreactors.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. P T Kalaichelvan and I Arul Pandi, Bioprocess Technology. MJP Publishers, 2007.

2. Satyanarayana, U., Biotechnology. Books & Allied (P) Ltd., 2005.
3. L. E. Casida Jr., Industrial Microbiology. New Age International Pvt. Ltd.
4. Balasubramanian, D. et al., Concepts in Biotechnology. Universities Press Pvt.
Ltd.,2004.
5. Kumar, H.D., A Textbook on Biotechnology (2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ed.). Affiliated East West Press Pvt.
Ltd., 1998.

Reference Books

1. Ratledge, Colin and Bjorn Kristiansen, Basic Biotechnology (2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ed.).Cambridge

University Press, 2001.
2. Michael L Schuler and Fikret Kargi, Bioprocess Engineering Basic Concepts.
Prentice Hall PTR, 2002.
3. Moo-Young. M, Comprehensive Biotechnology(Vol 1-3). Pergamon Press (Oxford),
2004.
4. S. C. Prescott, C. G. Dunn, Industrial Microbiology. Agrobios, 2005.
5. K. Buchholz, V. Kasche, U.T. Bornscheuer, Biocatalysts and Enzyme Technology.
WILEY-VCH, 2005.
6. Dubey, R.C., A Textbook of Biotechnology. S.Chand & Co. Ltd., 2006.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to Industrial Bioprocess and Fermentation (8 hours)
1.1 Introduction to Industrial Bioprocess, brief survey of organisms:
bacteria, viruses, fungi. Microbial growth : Need for artificial 2
culture, phases of microbial growth, Monod equation, Microbial
metabolites
1.2 Fermentation technology, types of fermentation- SSF:
microorganisms, substrates and environmental factors needed for 3
SSF, SmF – types of culture systems: batch, continuous and fed
batch culture. Fermenter: batch reactors, continuous reactors and fed
batch bioreactors. Structure of a fermenter
1.3 Outline of various unit operations involved in the upstream and
downstream operation –centrifugation, filtration,cell disruption 3
techniques, precipitation, dialysis, BFD, PFD.
2 Primary metabolites and alcohol (6hours)
2.1 Manufacture of the following products with flow diagram- Amino
acids: Glutamic acid, Lysine, Aspartic acid, production with its PFD 3
– Organic acids: Citric acid, lactic acid, Gluconic acid.
2.2 Vitamins: Riboflavin, vitamin C, vitamin B12 – Alcohol: Ethanol,
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

organisms, raw materials used, processing steps, fermentation, and 3

product recovery.
3 Secondary metabolites and Enzymes (8 hours)
3.1 Production of secondary metabolites of industrial importance –
Antibiotics: its classification, Penicillin, Streptomycin, tetracycline, 4
griseofulvin, bacitracin
3.2 Enzymes: its classification, general purification methods for
enzymes, Biosynthesis of Amylase, Protease, Lipases, Cellulase by 4
microorganisms.
4 Biotechnology in human life(6 hours)
4.1 Production of Biopolymer: Xanthan Gum and PHB, Single Cell
Protein, Biopesticides: production - submerged fermentation, surface 2
methodology and in vivo methodology, Bt-toxin.
4.2 Biofertilizers: its types, production of azotobacter, production of 2
algae: trough method, pit method, field scale method, vermiculture
4.3 Beer, Wine, production of diary product: cheese 2
5 Biotechnology in human life (7hours)
5.1 Bioremediation : in situ and ex situ methods, composting, 3
biofiltration, Biopreservatives: Bacteriocin, nisin
5.2 Production of vaccines, monoclonal antibodies and human insulin. 2
5.3 Bioreactors: Batch or stir tank, air-driven column, bubble column, 2
airlift bioreactor, fluidized bed reactor.
 MATERIAL SCIENCE AND POLYMER ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT342
ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:Material Science is an interdisciplinary field. It deals with the design and

discovery of new materials. Material science incorporates elements of physics, chemistry and
engineering. The course deals with various aspects of material science such as atomic
structure, properties of materials, selection of materials etc.

Prerequisite:A basic knowledge in physics and chemistry.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Define qualitatively the structure and bonding schemes of solids.

CO 2 Explain physical properties and possible applications of a given material.

CO 3 Determine the stability of materials with all sorts of environments using phase
diagrams.

CO 4 Identify and compare the properties of alloys, ceramics, polymers, composite

materials and their engineering applications.

CO 5 Select suitable material for construction in chemical industries.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3
CO 5 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution POLYMER ENGINEERING

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Define qualitatively the structure and bonding schemes of
solids.

1. Define coordination number

2. Differentiate between crystalline and amorphous solids
3. Draw and explain the miller indices of unit cell of cubic crystal lattice

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) :Explain physical properties and possible applications of a given
material.

1. Compare isotropy and anisotropy

2. Differentiate between ductility and malleability
3. Explain the technological properties of solid materials

Course Outcome 3(CO3):Predict the stability of materials with all sorts of environments
using phase diagrams.

1. State and explain Hume Rothery rules

2. Draw and explain eutectic system with examples
3. Draw and explain Iron carbon diagram

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Identify and compare the properties of alloys, ceramics,
polymers, composite materials and their engineering applications.

1. Write a note on aluminium and its alloys

2. Classify ceramic and non-ceramic structures
3. List some materials used for high temperature applications
 POLYMERin ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Select suitable material for construction chemical industries

1. What are the factors affecting selection of materials for construction in chemical
industry?
2. What are the factors affecting corrosion?
3. Explain aging of rubber

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES:2

Reg No:______________
Name :______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 342
Max. Marks: 100
Duration: 3 Hours
MATERIAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
(2019-Scheme)
PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Distinguish between crystalline and amorphous solids

2. Explain Schottky defect.

3. Distinguish between castability, machinability.

4. List three mechanical properties of materials and define them

5. Draw and explain Iron-Carbon diagram

6. State and explain Hume Rothery rules

7. Compare ceramic and non-ceramic structures

8. List some materials used for high temperature applications

9. What are corrosion inhibitors?

10. Explain aging of rubber

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)
Module -I

11. Describe the various bonding patterns in solids

12. Explain with neat sketches the 14 Bravais lattices in a cubic crystal lattice.
 Module - II POLYMER ENGINEERING

13. (a) Write a note on the mechanical properties of engineering materials.

(b) Distinguish between paramagnetism and ferromagnetism

14. (a) Describe stress-strain relationship using suitable diagram.

(b) Define Poisson’s ratio.

Module -III

15. What are solid solutions? Give an account of various types of solid solutions.

16. Distinguish between eutectic and peritectic systems using a phase diagram

Module -IV

17. What are alloys?. Briefly describe aluminium and its alloys.

18. What are composite materials? Describe four applications of composite materials

Module -V

19. Describe the mechanism and factors influencing corrosion

20. Explain the factors affecting the selection of materials.

(14x5 =70)
 Syllabus POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module 1:Crystal Structure (5 hours)

Structure of atom-present concept of atom-Rutherford’s and Bhor’s model, Bonding in

solids-Types of solids-crystalline and amorphous solids-crystal systems-Bravais lattices-
millerindices-coordination number-crystal defects-determination of crystal structure-X-
raydiffraction-electron diffraction methods.

Module 2:Properties of Engineering Materials(8 hours)

Properties of engineering materials-mechanicalproperties -isotropy and anisotropy-elasticity,

plasticity, toughness, resilience, tensilestrength, ductility, malleability, brittleness, hardness,
fatigue, creep, wear resistance-Poisson’s ratio-stress-strain relation-true stress and true strain-
electrical and magneticproperties-resistivity-conductivity-ionic and electrical conductivity,
semiconductors, superconductivity, insulators, ferroelectricity, piezoelectricity,
magnetization, paramagnetism, ferromagnetism, and diamagnetism -technological properties-
castability,machinability, weldability, solderability, workability, formability.

Module 3: Solid solutions(8 hours)

Solid solutions-types of solid solutions-Hume Rothery rules-intermediate phases-mechanical

mixtures-phasediagrams-eutectic systems-peritectic system,eutectoid and peritectoid systems-
carbon diagram-T-T-T diagram-plastic deformation-recrystallisation-hot and coldworking of
metals,Heat treatments-elementary study of various metals and alloys like castiron,
carbonsteel, alloy steels.

Module 4: Alloys and Composites(7 hours)

Non-ferrous metals and alloys-aluminium and its alloys-copper and its alloys-Non
ferrousmetals and alloys used for high temperature services and nuclear application
Polymers and their properties-ceramics-classification-comparison of ceramic and non-
ceramicstructures-properties and application of ceramicsComposite materials-classification-
generalcharacteristics, Introduction to Nanocomposites.

Module 5:Selection of Materials(7 hours)

Corrosion-different types, mechanism and factors influencing corrosion-corrosionprevention-

inhibitors and their applications-oxidation-aging of rubber-oxidation of metalsand radiation
damage-factors affecting the selection of materials for engineering purposesselectionof
suitable materials for construction in chemical industry.

Text Books

1. Khanna O.P., A Text Book of Material Science & Metallurgy, Dhanpat Rai publishers
2. Hajra Choudhary, Material Science & Processes, Dhanpat Rai publishers
Reference Books POLYMER ENGINEERING

1. Van Vlack, Elements of Material Science, Pearson publishers

2. Material Science and Engineering, William F. Smith, Javad Hashemi, Ravi Prakash,
Mc Graw Hill
3. Material Science and Engineering, Nehal Dash Kaushik Kumar, Apurba Kumar Roy,
Wiley
4. Callister’s Material Science and Engineering, R. Balasubramaniam, Wiley

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Crystal Structure (5 hours)
1.1 Structure of atom-present concept of atom-Rutherford’s and
1
Bhor’s model
1.2 Bonding in solids- Types of solids-crystalline and amorphous
2
solids-crystal systems
1.3 Bravais lattices-miller indices-coordination number-crystal
defects-determination of crystal structure-X-ray diffraction- 2
electron diffraction methods
2 Properties of Engineering Materials (8 hours)

2.1 Mechanical properties -isotropy and anisotropy-elasticity,

plasticity, toughness, resilience, tensile strength, ductility, 2
malleability, brittleness, hardness, fatigue, creep, wear resistance

2.2 Poisson’s ratio-stress-strain relation-true stress and true strain-

electrical and magnetic properties-resistivity -conductivity-ionic
and electrical conductivity, semiconductors, superconductivity, 2
insulators

2.3 Ferroelectricity, piezoelectricity, magnetization, paramagnetism,

ferromagnetism, and diamagnetism 2

2.4 Technological properties-castability, machinability, weldability,

2
solderability, workability, formability
3 Solid Solutions (8 hours)
3.1 Solid solutions-types of solid solutions-Hume Rothery rules-
1
intermediate phases-mechanical mixtures
3.2 Phase diagrams-eutectic systems-peritectic system 1
3.3 Eutectoid and peritectoid systems 1
3.4 Iron - carbon diagram-T-T-T diagram 2
3.5 Plastic deformation-recrystallisation-hot and cold
1
working of metals
3.6 Heat treatments-elementary study of various metals and alloys like
2
cast iron,carbonsteel,alloy steels.
4 Alloys and Composites (7 hours)
4.1 Non-ferrous metals and alloys-aluminium andPOLYMER ENGINEERING
its alloys-copper
1
and its alloys
4.2 Non ferrousmetals and alloys used for high temperature services
2
and nuclear application
4.3 Organic polymers and its properties-ceramics-classification-
comparison of ceramic and non-ceramic 2
structures-
4.4 Properties and application of ceramics-composite materials-
classification-general characteristics. Introduction to 2
nanomaterials.
5 Selection of Materials(7 hours)
5.1 Corrosion-different types, mechanism and factors influencing
2
corrosion
5.2 Corrosion prevention-inhibitors and their applications-oxidation-
2
aging of rubber-oxidation of metalsand radiation damage
5.3 Factors affecting the selection of materials for engineering
purposes selection of suitable materials for construction in 3
chemical industry.
 POT POLYMER LENGINEERING
CATEGORY T P CREDIT
OPERATIONS RESEARCH
352 PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:Operational Research (OR) is a discipline to aid decision making and improving

efficiency of the system by applying advanced analytical methods. The tools of Operational
Research are not from any one discipline; rather Mathematics, Statistics, Information
Technology, Economics, Engineering, etc. have contributed to this discipline of knowledge.
This course aims at familiarizing the students with quantitative tools and techniques, which
are frequently applied to business decision-making and to provide a formal quantitative
approach to problem solving and an intuition about situations where such an approach is
appropriate.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Recognize the importance and value of Operations Research and mathematical

modelling to optimally solve a wide variety of engineering and management
problems.
CO 2 Formulate Linear Programming models and apply operations research techniques
and algorithms to solve LP problems.

CO 3 Understand the concept of duality and conduct post optimal analysis

CO 4 Formulate transportation, assignment problems and drive their optimal solution.
CO 5 Formulate Network models and apply operations research techniques and algorithms
to solve Network problems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO 5 3 3 3 2 1 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 10POLYMER ENGINEERING
20
Apply 20 20 50
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Recognize the importance and value of Operations Research and
mathematical modelling to optimally solve a wide variety of engineering and management
problems.
1. Define Operations research. Write any two area of feasible application of OR.
2. Explain different phases of Operation Research.
3. Write down the basic structure of a linear programming problem in the mathematical
form.
4. Write down the applications of OR with examples.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):Formulate Linear Programming models and apply operations

research techniques and algorithms to solve these LP problems.
1. Solve the following problem by Simplex method and comment on the result.
Maximize: Z = 5X1 +3X2
Subject to: 4X1 - X2 ≤ 10; 2X1 +2X2 ≤ 50; X1, X2 ≥ 0
2. A pharmaceutical company has 100kg of A, 180kg of B and 120kg of C ingredients
available per month. The company can use these materials to make three basic
pharmaceutical products namely 5-10-5, 5-5-10 and 20-5-10, where the numbers in
each case represent the percentage of weight of A, B and C respectively in each of the
products. The cost of these raw materials is as follows.
Ingredients Cost/kg (Rs.)
A 80
 B 20 POLYMER ENGINEERING
C 50
Inert 20
The selling prices of these products are Rs.40.50, Rs.43 and Rs.45/kg respectively.
There is a capacity restriction of the company for product 5-10-5 because of which
company cannot produce more than 30kg per month. Determine how much of each of
the product the company should produce in order to maximize its monthly profit. Use
simplex method for solving the problem.
3. Solve the following LPP by simple method:
Maximize Z = 3X1 + 2X2
Subject to: 2X1 + X2≤ 5, X1 + X2≤ 3 and X1, X2≥ 0

Course Outcome 3(CO3):Understand the concept of duality and conduct post optimal
analysis.
1. Write the dual of the following LPP
Minimize Z = 3X1−2X2+6X3
Subject to: 4X1+5X2+3X3 ≥ 7; 3X1+X2+6X3 ≥ 5; 7X1−2X2−3X3 ≤ 10
X1−2X2+5X3 ≥ 3; 4X1+7X2−9X3 ≥ 2 and X1, X2, X3 ≥ 0
2. Use penalty (Big-M) method to solve the LP problem below.
Minimize Z = 5X1+3X2
Subject to: 2X1+4X2 ≤ 12; 2X1+2X2 = 10; 5X1+2X2 ≥ 10; X1 and X2 ≥ 0
3. Use two-phase simplex method to solve the following LP problem.
Maximize Z = 3X1+2X2+2X3
Subject to 5X1+7X2+4X3 ≤ 7; -4X1+7X2+5X3 ≥ -2
3X1+4X2−6X3 ≥ 29/7; X1, X2 and X3 ≥ 0
4. State the general rules for formulating a dual LP problem from its primal. Write the
dual to the following LP problem.
Maximize Z = X1 - X2 + 3X3
Subject to Constraints:
X1 + X2 + X3 ≤ 10
2X1 - X3 ≤ 2
2X1 - 2X2 - 3X3 ≤ 6 and X1, X2, X3 ≥ 0

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Formulate transportation, assignment problems and drive their

optimal solution.
1. Raw materials from four different warehouses are to be transported to five different
plants. The availability at each of the warehouses is 25, 30, 20 and 30 tons
respectively. The demands in the corresponding plants are 20,20,30,10 and 25 tons. It
is not possible to ship the raw material from warehouse 4 to plant 4. From the unit
cost of transportation given below, find the initial basic feasible solution using least
cost cell method.

1 2 3 4 5 Supply
1 10 2 3 15 9 25
Source
2 5 10 15 2 4 30
3 15 5 14 7 15 20
 4 20 15 13POLYMER
… ENGINEERING
8 30
Demand 20 20 30 10 25 105

2. A Computer Centre has three expert programmers. The centre wants three application
programs to be developed. The head of the Computer Centre, after studying carefully
the programmes to be developed, estimates the computer time in minutes required by
the experts for the application programmes as follows:

Programmers
A B C
1 120 100 80
Program
2 80 90 110
mes
3 110 140 120
Assign the programmers to the programmes in such a way that the total computer time
is minimum.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):Formulate Network models and apply operations research

techniques and algorithms to solve these Network problems.
1. Define following terms with respect to CPM/PERT: event, merge event, burst, event,
activity, processor activity, successor activity, dummy activity.
2. The flow capacities in a pipe network are shown in table below. Find the maximal
flow from node 1 to node 6.

To 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 ... 30 60 15 ... ...

2 20 ... 20 25 5 ...
3 40 15 ... 20 ... 50
4 25 20 40 ... 10 35
From 5 ... 10 ... 40 ... 30
6 ... ... 40 35 30 ...

3. The details of a project consisting of activities A to K are summarized in table below.

Immediate Immediate
Activity Duration Activity Duration
Predecessor(s) Predecessor(s)
A ... 7 G C 3
B ... 3 H E, F 4
C ... 4 I E, F 5
D A 2 J D, H 6
E A, B 3 K I, G 3
F C 5
Construct the CPM network, determine the critical path and project completion time.
Model Question paper POLYMER ENGINEERING
QP CODE: PAGES: 3
Reg No: ______________ Name: __________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 352
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
OPERATIONS RESEARCH

PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)
1. Define Operations research. Write any two area of feasible application of OR.
2. Explain different phases of Operation Research.
3. Explain clearly the following terms in LPP.
i. Objective function
ii. Decision Variables
iii. Slack and Surplus Variables
4. Explain the term duality in linear programming.
5. Write the dual of the following LPP
Minimize Z = 3X1−2X2+6X3
Subject to: 4X1+5X2+3X3 ≥ 7; 3X1+X2+6X3 ≥ 5; 7X1−2X2−3X3 ≤ 10
X1−2X2+5X3 ≥ 3; 4X1+7X2−9X3 ≥ 2 and X1, X2, X3 ≥ 0
6. Describe Big-M method. Explain when do you prefer to use it.
7. Differentiate between Transportation and Transhipment problem
8. List different time estimates used with reference to PERT. Write the expressions for
expected duration of a project, and its standard deviation.
9. Differentiate between PERT and CPM.
10. Explain the conditions under which crashing of project is necessary. Write its effect
on the project cost.

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. (a) Maximize Z = 10X1 + 15X2 Subject to constraints,
2X1 + X2 ≤ 26; 2X1 + 4X2 ≤ 56;
X1 - X2 ≥ -5,
X1, X2 ≥ 0
(b) Maximize Z = 40X1 + 35X2 Subject to constraints,
2X1 + 3X2 ≤ 60,
4X1 + 3X2 ≤ 96,
X1, X2 ≥ 0
OR

12. (a) Use the graphical method to solve the following LP problem.
Maximize Z=2X1+X2subject to the constraints:
X1 + 2X2 ≤ 10
 X1 + X2 ≤ 6 POLYMER ENGINEERING
X1 - X2 ≤ 2
X1 -2X2 ≤ 1 and
X1, X2≥ 0
(b) The manager of an oil refinery decides on the optimal mix of two possible
blending processes of which the inputs and outputs per production run are as follows

Process Input (units) Output (units)

(units) Crude A Crude B Gasoline X Gasoline Y
1 5 3 5 8
2 4 5 4 4

The maximum amount available for crude A and B are 200 units and 150 units
respectively. Market requirements shows that at least 100 units of gasoline X and 80
units of gasoline Y must be produced. The profit per production run for processes 1
and 2 are Rs.300 and Rs.400 respectively. Formulate the LP problem.

Module 2
13. (a) Use penalty (Big-M) method to solve the LP problem below.
Minimize Z = 5X1+3X2
Subject to: 2X1+4X2 ≤ 12; 2X1+2X2 = 10; 5X1+2X2 ≥ 10; X1 and X2 ≥ 0
OR
14. Use two-phase simplex method to solve the following LP problem.
Maximize Z = 3X1+2X2+2X3
Subject to 5X1+7X2+4X3≤ 7
-4X1+7X2+5X3 ≥ -2
3X1+4X2−6X3 ≥ 29/7; X1, X2 and X3 ≥ 0

Module 3
15. State the general rules for formulating a dual LP problem from its primal. Write the
dual to the following LP problem.
Maximize Z = X1 - X2 + 3X3
Subject to Constraints:
X1 + X2 + X3 ≤ 10
2X1 - X3 ≤ 2
2X1 - 2X2 - 3X3 ≤ 6 and
X1, X2, X3 ≥ 0
OR
16. Write the dual of the following linear programming problem.
Minimize, Z = 20X1 + 23X2
Subjected to:
- 4X1 - X2 ≤ -8
5X1 - 3X2 = - 4
X1, X2 ≥ 0
Solve the Dual problem using simplex method and predict the value of variables X1
and X2 from the solution of dual linear programming problem.
 Module 4 POLYMER ENGINEERING
17. A manufacturing company has three factories, F1, F2 and F3, and two retail outlets,
R1 and R2. It wishes to transport its products from its factories to its outlets at
minimum total cost. The table below gives details of demand and supply, and also the
unit costs of transportation.

(i) Prepare the North-West corner rule solution for the balanced form of this problem.
(ii) Check the optimality of the solution and comment on it.
OR
18. A Computer Centre has three expert programmers. The centre wants three application
programs to be developed. The head of the Computer Centre, after studying carefully
the programmes to be developed, estimates the computer time in minutes required by
the experts for the application programmes as follows:

Programmers

A B C

1 120 100 80
Program
2 80 90 110
mes
3 110 140 120

Assign the programmers to the programmes in such a way that the total computer time
is minimum.

Module 5
19. The flow capacities in a pipe network are shown in table below. Find the maximal
flow from node 1 to node 6.

To 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 ... 30 60 15 ... ...

2 20 ... 20 25 5 ...
3 40 15 ... 20 ... 50
4 25 20 40 ... 10 35
From 5 ... 10 ... 40 ... 30
6 ... ... 40 35 30 ...

OR
20. The details of a project consisting of activities A to K are summarized in table below.
 Immediate POLYMER ENGINEERING
Immediate
Activity Duration Activity Duration
Predecessor(s) Predecessor(s)
A ... 7 G C 3
B ... 3 H E, F 4
C ... 4 I E, F 5
D A 2 J D, H 6
E A, B 3 K I, G 3
F C 5
Construct the CPM network, determine the critical path and project completion time.
******************

Syllabus

Module 1(8 Hrs.)

Introduction to Operations Research: Introduction to OR models, Linear programming -
Typical Applications of Linear programming problems, Problem formulation, Graphical and
Algebraic method solutions of LPP, Simplex method for LPP.

Module 2(7 Hrs.)

Special cases in simplex method: Big-M method, Two Phase simplex method, Degeneracy,
Multiple solutions, Unbounded solutions, Infeasible solutions, Sensitivity Analysis:
Graphical and algebraic approaches.

Module 3(6 Hrs.)

Duality and Post-optimal analysis: Dual of an LP, Primal-Dual relationships, Economic
interpretation of duality, Dual Simplex method, Generalised simplex algorithm, Post-optimal
analysis, Changes affecting feasibility and changes affecting optimality.

Module 4(7 Hrs.)

Transportation model and its variants: Definition, non-traditional transportation models,
Transportation algorithm: Determination of the starting solution and iteration computations,
Simplex method explanation of method of multipliers, Assignment model: Hungarian
method and its simplex explanation.

Module 5(7 Hrs.)

Network models: Scope and definition, Minimal spanning tree algorithm, Shortest route
problem, maximum flow model, CPM and PERT: Network representation, Critical path
computation, construction of the time schedule, LP formulation of CPM, PERT calculations.

Text Books
1. Hamdy A. Taha, “Operations Research, an introduction”, Eighth Edition, Prentice
Hall of India, 2003.
2. Edgar T. F., Himmelblau D. M., Optimisation of Chemical Processes, McGraw Hill.
Reference Books POLYMER ENGINEERING
1. Miller D.M. and Schmidt J. W., Industrial Engineering and Operations Research, John
Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 1990.
2. Shennoy G.V. and Srivastava U.K., “Operation Research for Management”, Wiley
Eastern, 1994.
3. Bazara M.J., Jarvis and Sherali H., “Linear Programming and Network Flows”, John
Wiley, 1990.
4. Philip D.T. and Ravindran A., “Operations Research”, John Wiley, 1992.
5. Hillier and Liebermann, “Operations Research”, Holden Day, 1986
6. Budnick F.S., “Principles of Operations Research for Management”, Richard D Irwin,
1990.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction to Operations Research (8 Hrs.)
Introduction to OR models, Linear programming - Typical Applications
1.1 2
of Linear programming problems
1.2 Problem formulation 2
1.3 Graphical method solutions of LPP 1
1.4 Algebraic method solutions of LPP 1
1.5 Simplex method for LPP 2
2 Special cases in simplex method (7 Hrs.)
2.1 Big-M method 2
2.2 Two Phase simplex method 1
2.3 Degeneracy, Multiple solutions 1
24 Unbounded solutions, Infeasible solutions 1
2.5 Sensitivity Analysis: Graphical and algebraic approaches 2
3 Duality and Post-optimal analysis (6 Hrs.)
3.1 Dual of an LP, Primal-Dual relationships 1
3.2 Economic interpretation of duality 1
3.3 Dual Simplex method 1
3.4 Generalised simplex algorithm 1
3.5 Post-optimal analysis 1
3.6 Changes affecting feasibility and changes affecting optimality 1
4 Transportation model and its variants (7 Hrs.)
4.1 Definition, non-traditional transportation models 1
Transportation algorithm: Determination of the starting solution and
4.2 2
iteration computations
4.3 Simplex method explanation of method of multipliers 2
4.4 Assignment model: Hungarian method and its simplex explanation 2
5 Network models (7 Hrs.)
5.1 Scope and definition 1
5.2 Minimal spanning tree algorithm 1
5.3 Shortest route problem POLYMER ENGINEERING 1
5.4 Maximum flow model 1
5.5 CPM and PERT: Network representation, Critical path computation 1
5.6 Construction of the time schedule 1
5.7 LP formulation of CPM, PERT calculations. 1
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT362 AIR POLLUTION CONTROL
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: After studying this course students will be aware of air pollution and methods for
controlling different pollutants. They also understand the importance of measurementof air
contents and quality control and the different methods employed for purification of air in
industry and day to day life.

Prerequisite:NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Identify different sources of air pollution.

CO 2 Explain the concepts of air purification.
CO 3 Explain the chemistry of pollutants and its effects.
CO 4 Explain the effects of air pollution on environment and human beings.
CO 5 Explain the concepts of air quality control and audit.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3 2
1
CO 2
2
CO 2
3
CO 3
4
CO 3 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 10 10 60
Analyse 10 10 10
Evaluate
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Differentiate between emission and spread.

2. Analyse the air pollution level in industrial area.
3. Classify the different pollutants.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Discuss different air purification technologies

2. Analyse the working of air purifiers and methods to improve the efficiency.
3. Discuss the different air conversion technologies and comment on their future.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Analyse the air purification based on its chemistry.

2. Discuss different chemical changes that occur by air pollution.
3. Analyse the process of emission and diffusion.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the effect of air pollution on atmospheric visibility.

2. Explain the health issues for workers in industries due to air impurities.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Analyse the concept of IAQ profile.

2. Discuss the use of HVAC systems.

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:2
Reg No:______________
Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 362 AIR POLLUTION CONTROL
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

(2019-Scheme)
PART A
(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1.Write a note on air quality.

2.Write a note on photo chemical smog
3.Write the principle and working of sellting chamber.
4.Discuss the principle of noise pollution.
5.Distinguish between primary and secondary air pollutants.
6.Discuss the air pollution situation in India
7.Write the significance of sulphur dioxide as a pollutant.
8.Define the meteriological parameters to evaluate pollution.
9.List different types of srubbers.
10. Name the air quality monitoring methods. (10x3=30 marks)

PART B

11. Discuss the present methods for evaluating air purity and give your suggestions for a
better environment. (14 marks)
OR

12. Explain the various aspects of Air pollution legislations. List out the merits and demerits
of them. (14 marks)

13. Explain the working of air purifiers used in Various Industries.

(14 marks)

OR
14. With a neat diagram explain the working of automobile pollution control system.
(14 marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

15. Explain different meteorological parameters that contribute to air quality and humidity
(14 marks)

OR

16. Particulates are significant in determining the air Quality. Explain the methods for
controlling particulates with advantages of each process.
(14 marks)

17. Discuss the Exhaust gas analyser. Explain the working of petrol gas analyser. (14 marks)

OR

18. With a neat diagram explain air optics and factors controlling visibility. (14 marks)

19. What is meant by internal air purification? Discuss different types and principle of any
two processes. (14 marks)

OR

20. Write in detail about the management measures in maintaining air quality through audit
and evaluation. (14 marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (5 Hours)
Introduction - Significance of air pollution studies, factors that contribute to air pollution -
possibilities to air pollution abatemant - air pollution legislation - Techno - administrative
aspects of air pollution - Emission and noise standards of Kerala State Pollution Control
board.

Module 2 (6 Hours)

Gaseous pollutants-source, chemistry, adverse effects on plants, animals and human beings,
properties - tolerance levels - carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, aldehydes, hydrocarbons -
compounds of sulphur, compounds of Nitrogen, Oxidants, Hydrogen fluoride - Control of
gaseous pollutants - Automobile pollution control.

Module 3 (9 Hours)

Particulates in the air - source, nature and adverse effects - control of particulates - settling,
filtration, collection in fluids, electrostatic precipitation, conversion to harmless and useful
products. Meteorology related to atmosphere - pressure, temperature, lapse rates - humidity -
condensation - wind direction and velocity. Effects of meteorological parameters on transport
and diffussion. Atmospheric electricity.

Module 4 (8 Hours)

Optics of the atmosphere - Effects of air pollutants on atmospheric visibility - methods of

measurement of visibility - Introduction to noise pollution. Photochemical reactions of the
atmosphere. Purpose and principles of measurement of (1) High volume sampler (2) Exhaust
gas analyser (petrol and diesel) (3) Stack sampler (4) Sound level meter - industrial hygiene
and in plant safety to workers.

Module 5 (7 hours)

Ventilation and Indoor Air Quality Control, An Overview of Indoor Air Quality, Basics of
HVAC Systems; IAQ Issues and Impacts on Occupants; Application of Audits to Developing
an IAQ Profile, Developing Management Plans, IAQ Problems; Control, Quantification and
Measurement, Air Pollution Dispersion-Dispersion Theory Basics- Air Quality Impact of
Stationary Sources- Models and Resources.

Text Books:

1. C.S.Rao, Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, New Age International, New

Delhi, 1999.
2. Paul N. Cheremsinoff, AirPollution Control and Design for Industry, Taylor and
Francis, New York, 1993.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Reference Books:

1. Cooper, C. D., & Alley, F. C. (2002). Air pollution control: A design approach (Vol.
65). Long Grove, Ill: Waveland press.
2. Stern, A. C. (Ed.). (2014). Fundamentals of air pollution. Elsevier.
3. De Nevers, N. (2010). Air pollution control engineering. Waveland press.
4. Rao, M. N., & Rao, H. V. N. (1996). Air Pollution Control Tata Mc Graw Hill
NewDelhi.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Significance of pollution studies (5 Hours)
1.1 Significance of air pollution studies, factors that contribute to air 3
pollution - possibilities to air pollution abatemant - air pollution
legislation

1.2 Techno - administrative aspects of air pollution - Emission and noise 2

standards of Kerala State Pollution Control board.

2 Source and Chemistry of pollutants (6 hours)

2.1 Gaseous pollutants-source, chemistry, adverse effects on plants, 2
animals and human beings, properties -.

2.2 Tolerance levels - carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, aldehydes, 2

hydrocarbons
2.3 Compounds of sulphur, compounds of Nitrogen, Oxidants, Hydrogen 2
fluoride - Control of gaseous pollutants - Automobile pollution
control
3 Chemistry of pollution (7 hours)
3.1 Particulates in the air - source, nature and adverse effects - control of 3
particulates - settling, filtration, collection in fluids, electrostatic
precipitation, conversion to harmless and useful products.

3.2 Meteorology related to atmosphere - pressure, temperature, lapse 2

rates - humidity - condensation - wind direction and velocity.

3.3 Effects of meteorological parameters on transport and diffussion. 2

atmospheric electricity.

4 Effects of Pollution(8 hours)

4.1 Optics of the atmosphere - Effects of air pollutants on atmospheric 2
visibility - methods of measurement of visibility -

4.2 Introduction to noise pollution. Photochemical reactions of the 2

atmosphere.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

4.3 Purpose and principles of measurement of (1) High volume sampler 2

(2) Exhaust gas analyser (petrol and diesel) (3) Stack sampler (4).
4.4 Sound level meter - industrial hygiene and in plant safety to workers 2
5 Air Quality control & Audit(7 hours)

5.1 Overview of Indoor Air Quality, Basics of HVAC Systems, IAQ 3

Issues and Impacts on Occupants;

5.2 Application of Audits to Developing an IAQ Profile, Developing 2

Management Plans, IAQ Problems; Control, Quantification and
Measurement,
5.3 Air Pollution Dispersion-Dispersion Theory Basics- Air Quality 2
Impact of Stationary Sources- Models and Resources
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATALYST SCIENCE AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT372
CATALYTIC PROCESSES PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The science and technology of catalysis is of great significance as it affects our
daily life. Four major sectors of the world economy; petroleum and energy production,
chemicals and polymer production, food industry and pollution control, involve catalytic
processes. Catalysis involves understanding of the thermodynamics, kinetics, electronic
interaction, crystal structure, reactor design and process development for a catalytic process.
The Topics included in the course are different types of Catalysis, Thermodynamics of
adsorption, reparative methods and Characterisation of catalysts, industrial catalysis and
modern trends in catalysis.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply the basic concepts & theory for characterization of catalysts.

CO 2 Describe the preparation of catalysts for various unit processes.
CO 3 Explain various catalytic processes in industries.
CO 4 Describe the deactivation of catalysts.
CO 5 Analyse modern trends in catalysis

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3
1
CO 3
2
CO 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Classify catalysts on the basis of catalytic structure.

2. Describe Langmuir adsorption isotherm in various forms.

3. what are the different steps in catalytic reaction.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Describe Sol gel process with a neat sketch and flow charts.

2. Describe co-precipitation with example.

3. What are catalytic agents? Give examples.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. List any three transition metal catalysts with application.

2. List any five industrial application of Zeolite

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What is the significance of regeneration of catalysts?

2. Describe poisoning method of catalyst deactivation.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Describe photo catalytic reaction with an example

2. List the advantages of nano catalysis over conventional catalytic processes.

3. Describe Sintering method of catalyst deactivation.

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 3
Reg No: ______________ Name: __________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 372
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
CATALYST SCIENCE AND CATALYTIC PROCESSES

PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)

1. Write notes on catalyst selectivity.

2. Differentiate physisorption & Chemisorption

3. With example explain flame hydrolysis.

4. Mention industrial application of zeolite.

5. What are catalytic promoters.

6. Define Bragg’s law.

7. What you mean by deactivation of catalyst.

8. What is sintering of catalysts.

9. Give any three examples for biocatalysts.

10. What are the types of phase transfer catalysis.

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module -I

11. a)Explain any two adsorption isotherms. (10 marks)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

b) explain different steps involved in heterogenous catalytic reaction. (4marks)

12. a).write the general characteristics of catalysis (7marks)

b). explain classification of catalysts. (7marks)

Module -II

13 a). Describe precipitation & co-precipitation method of catalyst preparation with

suitable examples. (7marks)
b). Explain sol gel method of catalyst synthesis with necessary steps, and suitable
example. (7marks)

14. a).Explain chemical vapour decomposition technique with example. (7marks)

b). Explain zeolite preparation. Mention its uses as a catalysts. (7marks)

Module -III

15. a).Explain BET method to find the surface area of catalysts. (7marks)

b).Explain XRD for catalyst characterization. (7marks)

16. a).Explain Chemisorption techniques for catalyst characterization. Classify the method
according to gases used. (6marks)

b). State the importance of catalyst characterization. Classify different characterization

methods. (7marks)

Module -IV

17. a).Describe on catalyst deactivation? Classify based on mechanisms. (6marks)

b). Explain the mechanism of coke formation on catalysts with neat sketches. (8marks).

18. a).Explain regeneration of deactivated catalysis. (9marks)

b). Explain coke formation on catalysts. (5marks)

Module -V

19. a). Explain transition metal catalysts & list any two industrial application. (7marks)
b). Explain the different transfer catalysis with industrial application. (7marks)

20. a). Differentiate homogenous & heterogenous catalysis. Explain any two heterogenous
catalysts with industrial application. (7marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

b). describe bio catalysis &phocatalysis with industrial application. (7marks)

Syllabus

Module 1(6 Hrs.)

General characteristics of catalysis, Classification of Catalyst, Thermodynamics of

adsorption, Physical adsorption and chemisorption.

Module 2(7 Hrs.)

Catalyst preparative Methods-Precipitation and co precipitation, Sol gel process, Flame

hydrolysis, Supported catalyst from CVD and related techniques, methods preparation and
structure of supports, Synthesis of aluminosilicate zeolites.

Module 3(7 Hrs.)

Catalyst Characterisation- surface area measurements, BET theory, Pore size distribution,
Porosimetry, Chemisorption techniques, Static and dynamic methods, Crystallography and
surface analysis techniques – XRD, NMR.

Module 4(7 Hrs.)

Deactivation -classification of catalyst deactivation processes. poisoning of catalysts,

poisoning of metallic catalysts, poisoning of non-metallic catalysts, poisoning of bifunctional
catalysts, coke formation on catalysts, metal deposition on catalysts ,sintering of
catalysts.Regeneration of deactivated catalyst.

Module 5(8 Hrs.)

Industrial catalysis -Homogeneous, Heterogeneous catalysis, Biocatalysts and their typical

industrial applications. Transition metal catalyst, Organo-metallic catalyst, Dual function
catalyst, Zeolite and their typical industrial applications. Modern trends in catalysis – Phase
transfer catalysis, electro catalysis,Nano catalysis, Polymer supported catalysis, Bio catalysis,
Photo catalysis.
Text Books

• Smith, J.M, Chemical Engineering Kinetics, McGraw Hill 2.

Reference Books

1. B. Viswanathan, S. Sivasanker A. V. Ramaswamy, Catalysis: Principles and

Applications, Academic Press
2. Diazo Kunii, and Octave Levenspiel, Fluidization Engineering, ButterworthHeinemann
3. Fogler H.S, Elements of Chemical Reaction Engineering, Prentice Hall of India
4. Levenspiel O, Chemical Reaction Engineering, John Wiley.
5. Emmett, P.H , Catalysis Vol I and II, Reinhold Corp, New York, 1954
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

6. Hill C.G., An Introduction to Chemical Engineering Kinetics & Reactor Design, John
Wiley
7. Thomas and Thomas , Introduction to Heterogeneous Catalysis, Academic Press,
London, 1967
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Module 1 (6 Hrs.)
1.1 General characteristics of catalysis, Classification of Catalyst 2
1.2 Thermodynamics of adsorption, Physical adsorption and 2
chemisorption.
1.3 Adsorption isotherms. Catalyst selectivity. 2
2 Module 2 (7 Hrs.)
2.1 Catalyst preparative Methods- 2
Precipitation and co precipitation, Sol gel process
2.2 Flame hydrolysis, Supported catalyst from CVD and related 3
techniques,
2.3 methods preparation and 2
structure of supports, Synthesis of aluminosilicate zeolites.
3 Module 3 (7 Hrs.)
3.1 Catalyst Characterisation- surface area measurements, BET 3
theory, Pore size distribution, Porosimetry
3.2 Chemisorption techniques, Static and dynamic methods 2
3.3 Crystallography and surface analysis techniques – XRD, NMR. 2
4 Module 4 (7 Hrs.)
4.1 Deactivation -classification of catalyst deactivation processes. 1
4.2 poisoning of catalysts, poisoning of metallic catalysts, poisoning 2
of non-metallic catalysts, poisoning of bifunctional catalysts,
4.3 coke formation on catalysts, metal deposition on catalysts 2
,sintering of catalysts.
4.4 Regeneration of deactivated catalyst. 2
5 Module 5 (8 Hrs.)
5.1 Industrial catalysis -Homogeneous, Heterogeneous catalysis, 2
Biocatalysts and their typical industrial applications
5.2 Transition metal catalyst, Organo metallic catalyst, Dual function 3
catalyst, Zeolite and their typical industrial applications
5.3 Modern trends in catalysis – Phase transfer catalysis, electro 3
catalysis, Nano catalysis, Polymer supported catalysis, Bio
catalysis, Photo catalysis.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI
HONOURS
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT ADVANCED MOULD CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

394 MANUFACTURING VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first one is detailed study of mould materials. Second
module deals with mould manufacture by CIM and CAM. Significant topics from
electroforming, polishing, surface texturing and its variants are included in the third module.
Fourth module deals with advanced mould casting. Fifth modules give emphasis on the
mould standards and mould repair. After the completion of this course, students will be able
to understand latest technics, tools and procedure of polymer mould manufacture.

Prerequisite: Polymer Processing, Polymer Products design.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the materials used in mould manufacture.

CO 2 Understand the features of Computer aided manufacture.
CO 3 Explain advances in forming, hobbing, polishing, surface texturing.
CO 4 Describe features of mould casting and metal spraying.
CO 5 Exposure towards standard components for mould manufacture and process of
repair.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3
1
CO 3
2
CO 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 40
Understand 20 20 40
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Apply 20 20 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the materials used in mould manufacture.

1. Describe the principle of steel hardening.

2. Aluminium alloys and its machining.

3.Compare prototype moulds and metallic moulds.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Understand the features of Computer aided manufacture.

1. Explain the significance of computer integrated manufacturing.

2. Advantages of CAM and CAQ.

3. Comment on the data preparation for machining.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Explain advances in forming, hobbing polishing, surface

texturing.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

1. Explain the manufacture of PU Foam by electroforming.

2. What is the significance of automated hobbing press.

3. Comment on surface treatments used in plating of moulds.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe features of mould casting and metal spraying.

1. Identify technical problems associated with casting.

2. Define applications of metal spraying.

3. Selective plating is costlier. Why?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Exposure towards standard components for mould manufacture
and process of repair.

1. Explain advantages of mould base in manufacture of moulds.

2. Give an account of different standards bases used in manufacture of moulds.

3.Explain the process of repairing moulds at sealing faces.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 POT394 Duration: 3 Hours

ADVANCED MOULD MANUFACTURING

(2019-Scheme-Honours in Polymer Engineering)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Quenching can affect core strength. Why?

2. Moulds for PVC require corrosion resistant coating. What is its significance?

3. Give the principle of carbide growth during tempering.

4. What is CNC programming.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

5. Compare and contrast between EDM and EDP?

6. Differentiate path agitated sinking and Orbital sinking.

7. What is meant by corner weakness?

8. Describe the features of automated hobbing presses.

9. Define the significance of plasma nitriding?

10. Detail how indirect pressure transducers help in mould function ?

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. Compare various hardening process used in steel moulds with advantages of each (14)

OR

12. a) Explain various functions of Maraging steels. (9)

b) Explain on various hardness measurement used in polymer moulds. (5)

Module II

13. a) With suitable diagram explain CAD interface and its functions . (8)

b) Describe the advantages of CAM machining. (6)

OR

14. a) Explain the stages to be considered CAQ assurance. (9)

b) Complex designs requires minimum processing time by CIM, Explain with a 3D

part drawing? (5)

Module -III

15. a) Write the detailed process involved in manufacture of porous nickel moulds.
(8)

b) Explain the major elements of Hobbing. (6)

OR

16. a) Describe the stages of mould polishing. (6)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

b) With mention to graining, Explain the process of photochemical etching.

(8)

Module -IV

17. a) Describe the process and applications of metal spraying. (8)

b) Explain the design features used in GMT moulds for protection against wear? (6)

OR

18. a) Describe the process and applications of boriding. (8)

b) Explain the features used in physical vapour deposition for metal coating. (6)

Module -V

19. a) Give a detailed description of elective plating in mould manufacture. (7)

b) Explain the significance of use of standard mould materials in gate area. (7)

OR

20. a) Explain the analysis methods used for mould strength. (7)

b) Explain mould periodic maintenance and associated mould repairs (7)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Mould materials, Nitriding steels, case hardened steels, corrosion resistant steels,
through hardened steels, maraging steels, hard material alloys, steel castings, physical
properties, Aluminium mould making.

Module 2: CAM mould making, EDP sytems, interfaces, Data preparation for machining,
Machining process, steps involved.

Module 3: Electroforming, EDM, Hobbing, polishing, surface structuring, surface

treatments, heat treatment, hard chrome plating, chemical and physical vapour deposition.

Module 4: Cast Bronze and light alloy moulds, surface treatments, sand casting, ceramic
casting, Temperature controlling systems, metal spraying, low melting and high melting point
systems.

Module 5: Standard components of a mould base, Standards for gate area, standards for
ejection, standards for mould heating, standards for pressure indication, standards between
mould and machine, suppliers of mould standards, Mould maintenance, Servicing and
Inspection, Repairs, Storage, corrosion protection.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books
1. Kalpakjian, Serope. Manufacturing processes for engineering materials. Pearson
Education India, 1984.
2. Walsh, Ronald A. McGraw-Hill machining and metalworking handbook. McGraw-
Hill Education, 2006.
Reference Books

1. Mold making Handbook- Gunter Menning, Hanser Publications,1998

2. Altan, Tet al, et al. "Advanced techniques for die and mold manufacturing." CIRP
annals 42.2 1993.
3. Geng, Hwaiyu, and P. E. CMfgE. Manufacturing engineering handbook. McGraw-Hill
Education, 2016.
4. Menges, Georg, Walter Michaeli, and Paul Mohren. How to make injection molds. Carl
Hanser Verlag GmbH Co KG, 2013.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Mould materials (9 hrs)
1.1 Nitriding steels, case hardened steels, 3
1.2 Corrosion resistant steels, through hardened steels, maraging steels 3
1.3 Hard material alloys, steel castings, physical properties. 3
Aluminium mould making.
2 Computer Integrated Manufacturing (9 hrs)
2.1 CAM mould making 3

2.2 EDP sytems, interfaces, 3

2.3 Data preparation for machining, Machining process, steps 3
involved.
3 Forming and polishing (9 Hrs)
3.1 Electroforming, EDM process 3
3.2 Hobbing, polishing,surface structuring, surface treatments 3
3.3 Heat treatment, hard chrome plating, chemical and physical 3
vapour deposition.
4 Mould casting and Spraying (9 Hrs)
4.1 Cast Bronze and light alloy moulds, surface treatments, sand 5
casting, ceramic casting.
4.2 Temperature controlling systems, metal spraying, low melting and 5
high melting point systems.
5 Standard mould base and repairs (9 Hrs)
5.1 Standard components of a mould base, Standards for gate area, 2
5.2 standards for ejection, standards for mould heating, standards for 4
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

pressure indication, standards between mould and machine,

suppliers of mould standards,
Mould maintenance, Servicing and Inspection, Repairs, Storage,
5.3 3
corrosion protection
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT POLYMERS & PHOTOVOLTAIC CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
396 TECHNOLOGY VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first one is introduction to Solar energy and solar cells.
Second module deals with various types of PV modules. Significant topics from materials &
processing of photovoltaic cells are included in the third module. Fourth and fifth modules
gives emphasis on the manufacture of photovoltaic cells. After the completion of this course,
students will be able to understand manufacture methods for polymer and organic based
photovoltaic cells.

Prerequisite: Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Plastic materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the principles and instrumentation of photovoltaic cells.

CO 2 Explain the power generation process of OPV cells .
CO 3 Understand different materials used for solar cells.
CO 4 Understand the functions of each part of the PV module.
CO 5 Exposure towards modern manufacturing process in OPV cells.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3
1
CO 3
2
CO 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the principles and instrumentation of photovoltaic

cells.

1. Describe the principle of current density and conversion efficiency.

2. Effect of polymers as active layer in PV cells.

3.Compare wide and small band gap donors.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Explain the power generation process of OPV cells .

1. Explain the significance of open circuit voltage.

2. Illustrate the of peak power and fill factor.

3. Comment on the features of hybrid cells in power conversion.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Understand different materials used for solar cells.

1. Explain the category of materials and their structural features.

2. PEDOT is a peculiar material used in solar cells. Explain.

3. Comment on the various p type polymers and their structural features.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Understand the functions of each part of the PV module.

1. Compare the requirements of layers in PV module.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
2. Instrumentation of PV modules requires atmost care for high efficiency. Why?

3. Humidity based delamination is a major problem in PV modules. Why?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Exposure towards modern manufacturing process in OPV cells.

1. What is meant by tiled coating. Explain.

2. Give an account of luminescent solar concentrator.

3.Explain the application of luminescence Imaging.

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 POT396 Duration: 3 Hours

POLYMERS & PHOTOVOLTAIC TECHNOLOGY

(2019-Scheme- Honors)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. What is meant by energy band and band gap.

2. Describe carrier life time. What is its significance?

3. Give the principle of refraction, reflection and transmission.

4. Define photo generation and factors affecting it.

5. Compare and contrast between line defects and volume defects?

6. Define the role of flexible substrates in PV modules.

7. What are the limitations and advantages of OPV cells?

8. Describe band to band recombination and its effect in PV cells .

9. Define Augur recombination? What is its significance.

10. Detail free carrier absorption?

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) With a labelled diagram explain the parts and working of a p n junction solar cell.

(9)

b) What is the role of p-i-n structure in a solar cell? (5)

OR

12. a) Explain various types of recombination in solar cell. (9)

b) Explain Shockley solar cell equation. (5)

Module II

13. a) Write the detailed process involved in manufacture of screen printed cells. (8)

b) Describe the principle of Laser doped selective emitter(LDSE) cell.

(6)

OR

14. a) Explain the factors to be considered in light trapping. (9)

b) Explain Liquid phase Epitaxy in silicone based cells (5)

Module -III

15. a) Write the details of polymer materials used in manufacturing solar cell . (8)

b) What is the role of PANI and PEDOT in synthesis of PV module. Explain. (6)

OR

16. a) Describe the donor- accepter combinations used in all-polymer solar cells. (6)

b) Explain the role of polysilsesquioxines as a hybrid material. (8)

Module -IV

17. a) Describe relaxation dynamics of hot electrons in quantum dot cells. (8)

b) Explain the design features intermediate band solar cells? (6)

OR

18. a) Explain FLATCON module and its features. (8)

b) Explain the manufacturing process used in tandem cells for high concentration. (6)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Module -V

19. a) Give a detailed description on the components used in monolithic polymer solar
modules. (7)

b) Illustrate on the photoactive materials and their design. (7)

OR

20. a) Explain non-contact coating process and lamination techniques. (7)

b) Explain various flexible substrates and barriers used in OPV. (7)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Solar energy, solar neutrinos, radiant power, types of solar cells, organic solar
cells, band gap and efficiency, photo generated current density, absorption coefficient, power
conversion efficiency, auger and SRH lifetime, multiple junctions, hot carrier cells.

Module 2: Photo voltaic modules, Modelling, electrical characteristic of PV module, double

diode model, single diode model, model parameters, circuit parameters, short circuit current,
open circuit voltage, loading conditions, photovoltaic generator current-voltage
characteristics, peak power, fill factor.

Module 3: Materials and processing –substrate, front electrode, first intermediate layer,
materials used, processing, active layer, materials and processing, polymer-polymer solar
cells, polymer-fullerene solar cells, organic-inorganic hybrid solar cells, p type and n type
polymers, second intermediate layer, materials used, processing.
Module 4: Stability and characterisation of devices, stability measurement, manufacture of
polymer solar cells, photoactive wide band gap donor, small band gap donor, polymer tandem
cells, small molecule tandem cells, semi-transparent tandem solar cells.

Module 5: Solution processed organic photovoltaics, slot-die coating process, inkjet printing
process, roll to roll printing process, materials for functional layers, flexible substrates, silver
back electrodes, interfacial layer, hole transport layer, electron transport layer, issues in
scalable OPVs.

Text Books

1. Fonash, Stephen. Solar cell device physics. Elsevier, 2012.

2. Poortmans, Jef, and Vladimir Arkhipov, eds. Thin film solar cells: fabrication,
characterization and applications. Vol. 18. John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
3. Hoogers, Gregor, ed. Fuel cell technology handbook. CRC press, 2002.
4. Rauschenbach, Hans S. Solar cell array design handbook: the principles and
technology of photovoltaic energy conversion. Springer Science & Business Media,
2012.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. Hoppe, Harald, and N. Serdar Sariciftci. "Polymer solar cells." Photoresponsive Polymers
II (2007):
2. Krebs, Frederik C., ed. Stability and degradation of organic and polymer solar cells. John
Wiley & Sons, 2012.
3. Tian, Haining, Gerrit Boschloo, and Anders Hagfeldt, eds. Molecular devices for solar
energy conversion and storage. Singapore: Springer, 2018.
4. Soga, Tetsuo, ed. Nanostructured materials for solar energy conversion. Elsevier, 2006.
5. Rahaman, Mostafizur, Dipak Khastgir, and Ali Kanakhir Aldalbahi, eds. Carbon-
containing polymer composites. Singapore: Springer, 2019.
6. Huang, Fei, Hin-Lap Yip, and Yong Cao, eds. Polymer photovoltaics: materials, physics,
and device engineering. Royal Society of Chemistry, 2015.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Solar energy and solar cells (8 hrs)
1.1 Solar energy, solar neutrinos, radiant power, types of solar cells, 4
organic solar cells, band gap and efficiency
1.2 Photogenerated current density,absorption coefficient, power 4
conversion efficiency, auger and SRH lifetime, multiple junctions,
hot carrier cells.
2 PV modules (10 hrs)
2.1 Photo voltaic modules, Modelling, electrical characteristic of PV 4
module, double diode model.
2.2 Single diode model, model parameters, circuit parameters, short 3
circuit current, open circuit voltage, loading conditions,
2.3 Photovoltaic generator current-voltage characteristics, peak power, 3
fill factor
3 Materials & processing (8 Hrs)
3.1 Materials and processing –substrate, front electrode, first 4
intermediate layer, materials used, processing, active layer,
materials and processing, polymer-polymer solar cells,.
3.2 polymer-fullerene solar cells, organic-inorganic hybrid solar cells, 4
p type and n type polymers, second intermediate layer,materials
used, processing.
4 Stability , band gap ( 9 Hrs)
4.1 Stability and characterisation of devices, stability measurement, 4
manufacture of polymer solar cells.
4.2 Photoactive wide band gap donor, small band gap donor, polymer 5
tandem cells, small molecule tandem cells, semi-transparent
tandem solar cells.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
5 OPV manufacture (10 Hrs)
5.1 Solution processed organic photovoltaics, slot-die coating process, 5
inkjet printing process, roll to roll printing process
materials for functional layers, flexible substrates, silver back
5.2 electrodes, interfacial layer, hole transport layer, electron transport 5
layer, issues in scalable OPVs.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PLASTICS & DECORATION
398 VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Out of five modules, first one is introduction to surface processing and colour
classification. Second module deals with painting of plastic substrates. Significant topics
from plating methods for plastics is included in the third module. Fourth and fifth modules
gives emphasis on the manufacture based on spray coating, metallizing and hot stamping.
After the completion of this course, students will be able to understand manufacture methods
to create polymer product manufacture more aesthetically attractive. They also attain the skill
to identify the proper treatment for plastic stamping and painting.

Prerequisite: Paints and surface coatings.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the process of surface treatments of plastics.

CO 2 Explain the significance and methods of painting of plastics.
CO 3 Illustrate different plating techniques and prepare materials for the same.
CO 4 Compare and contrast between various types of spray coating processes.
CO 5 Exposure towards manufacturing process in metallizing and stamping of plastics.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3
1
CO 3
2
CO 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the process of surface treatments of plastics.

1. Describe the principle and thermodynamics of surface wetting.

2. Effect of carbon content on the surface properties of steel.

3.Compare methods of wetting plastic surfaces.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Explain the significance and methods of painting of plastics.

1. Comment on the features of paint conductivity.

2. Illustrate the significance and procedure in multiple paint films.

3.Explain various types of painting employed with plastics.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate different plating techniques and prepare materials for
the same.
1. Explain the significance of electroplating.
2. What is the significance of chrome plating.

3. Comment on the copper plating process.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Compare and contrast between various types of spray coating
processes.

1. Explain the electrostatic spray process .

2.What is meant by arc spraying.?

3. Flame spraying requires additional equipment. Which are they?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Exposure towards manufacturing process in metallizing and

stamping of plastics.

1. Metallizing and stamping are done based on the product requirement. Explain.

2. Give an account of metallizing equipment.

3.Explain the application of hot stamping.

Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name: ______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SIXTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 POT 398 Duration: 3 Hours

PLASTICS AND DECORATION

(2019-Scheme- HONORS)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. What is meant by machine rolling.

2. Give details of disadvantages associated with conventional spraying.

3. Give the principle of hot stamping.

4. Define curtain coating.

5. Compare and contrast between electrodeposition and barrelling?

6. Differentiate corona discharge and plasma treatment.

7. What are the limitations and advantages of acid anodising?

8. Give 3 examples of metallic pigments used in paints.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
9. Define Kaolin? What is its role in paint manufacture?

10. Detail how binder solubility affects paint stability?

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) Explain surface treatment process for steel substrates. (9)

b) What is alkaline cleaning? Explain. (5)

OR

12. a) Explain various types of colorants used in paints. (9)

b) Explain the role of colour concentrators in painting Industry. (5)

Module -II

13. a) Write the detailed process involved in Plastic painting (8)

b) What is meant by plastic substrate conductivity. Explain its significance.(6)

OR

14. a) Describe the after treatment process used in painting operation. (6)

b) Explain various applications of high energy radiation in plastic painting. (8)

Module III

15. a) With suitable diagram explain chromium electroplating process . (8)

b) Describe the principle of nickel plating. (6)

OR

16. a) Explain the factors to be considered in selecting a plastic for decoration by plating.
(9)

b) Compare and contrast between electro and electroless plating with examples of
plastics for each. (5)

Module -IV

17. a) Describe any four spray equipment used in plastic decoration. (8)

b) Explain the design features used in plastic plating? (6)

OR
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
18. a) Explain flame spraying and its applications with respect to plastics.
(8)

b) Explain the sealing process done with thermal spraying. (6)

Module -V

19. a) Give a detailed description on the components used in stamping. (7)

b) Illustrate on the troubleshooting guide used in plastic hot stamping. (7)

OR

20. a) Explain the process of vacuum metallizing withits advantages and special features .
Give details of 4 products utilising metallising as a treatment method. (14)

..............................................................................................

Syllabus

Module 1: Surface treatment for plastics and steel, thermodynamics of wetting, methods of
wetting of surfaces, chemical analysis of polymer surfaces, decorating plastics with colour,
colour selection criteria, colorant classification, pigment dispersion, colour concentrators.

Module 2: Painting on plastics, modifications on plastic part surfaces, plastic surface

conductivity, aerosol paints, application of multiple paint films, plastic film - substrate
interactions, measurement of quality of painted films.

Module 3: Plating on plastics, electro less copper or nickel plating, electroplating, straight
through electroplating, trivalent chromium electroplating, microporous chrome plating,
plating chemical removal methods, palatable plastics, individual plastic character to plating,
design factors.
Module 4: Thermal spray coating on plastics, flame spraying, arc spraying, plasma,
cosmetics, priming, priming with sprayed zinc, steps in plating, finishing methods, sealing
surfaces and applications.

Module 5: Vacuum metallizing, metallizing equipment, coating application, drying,

equipment for drying, process control of metallizing, plastic hot stamping, foils, silicone dies
for stamping, hot stamping machines, vertical presses, linear contact machines.

Text Books

1. Pfanstiehl, John. Automotive paint handbook: paint technology for auto enthusiasts &
body shop professionals. Penguin, 1998.

2. Weismantel, Guy E. Paint handbook. 1981.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
3. Talbert, Rodger. Paint technology handbook. CRC Press, 2007.

Reference Books

1. Love, J. C., and Vannessa Goodship. In-Mould decoration of plastics. Rapra Technology
Limited, 2002.
2. Muccio, Edward A. Decoration and Assembly of Plastic Parts. ASM International, 1999.
3. Pinner, Solomon H., and Wilfred Gordon Simpson, eds. Plastics: Surface and finish.
Elsevier, 2013.
4. Campbell, James S. Principles of manufacturing materials and processes. McGraw-Hill,
1961
5. Crutchley, Edward B. Innovation Trends in Plastics Decoration and Surface Treatment.
Smithers Rapra, 2014..
6. Robinson, P. J. "Decorating and coating of plastics." Rapra Rev. Rep.(USA) 6, no. 5
(1993):

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Introduction of surface treatment (7 hrs)
1.1 Surface treatment for plastics and steel, thermodynamics of 3
wetting, methods of wetting of surfaces,
1.2 Chemical analysis of polymer surfaces 2
1.3 Decorating plastics with colour, colour selection criteria, colorant 2
classification, pigment dispersion, colour concentrators
2 Painting Process (10 hrs)
2.1 Painting on plastics, modifications on plastic part surfaces, 3

2.2 Plastic surface conductivity, aerosol paints, 3

2.3 Application of multiple paint films, plastic film - substrate 4
interactions, measurement of quality of painted films.
3 Plating (10 Hrs)
3.1 Plating on plastics, electro less copper or nickel plating, 4
electroplating,

3.2 Straight through electroplating, trivalent chromium electroplating, 3

microporous chrome plating,

3.3 Plating chemical removal methods, platable plastics, individual 3

plastic character to plating, design factors.

4 Spray coating (10 Hrs)

4.1 Thermal spray coating on plastics, flame spraying 4

4.2 Arc spraying, plasma, cosmetics, priming, priming with sprayed 3

zinc, steps in plating
4.3 Finishing methods, sealing surfaces and applications 3
5 Metallizing & stamping (8 Hrs)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Vacuum metallizing, metallizing equipment, coating application,
5.1 4
drying, equipment for drying, process control of metallizing,
Plastic hot stamping, foils, silicone dies for stamping, hot
5.2 4
stamping machines, vertical presses, linear contact machines.
COMMON COURSES
(S5 & S6)
 YEAR OF
Category L T P CREDIT
MCN DISASTER INTRODUCTION
301 MANAGEMENT Non -
2 0 0 Nil 2019
Credit

Preamble: The objective of this course is to introduce the fundamental concepts of hazards and
disaster management.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Define and use various terminologies in use in disaster management parlance and
CO1 organise each of these terms in relation to the disaster management cycle (Cognitive
knowledge level: Understand).
Distinguish between different hazard types and vulnerability types and do
CO2
vulnerability assessment (Cognitive knowledge level: Understand).
Identify the components and describe the process of risk assessment, and apply
CO3
appropriate methodologies to assess risk (Cognitive knowledge level: Understand).
Explain the core elements and phases of Disaster Risk Management and develop
CO4 possible measures to reduce disaster risks across sector and community (Cognitive
knowledge level: Apply)
Identify factors that determine the nature of disaster response and discuss the various
CO5
disaster response actions (Cognitive knowledge level: Understand).
Explain the various legislations and best practices for disaster management and risk
CO6 reduction at national and international level (Cognitive knowledge level:
Understand).

1
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO PO1 PO1 PO1
9 0 1 2
CO1 2 2 2 2

CO2 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 2

CO3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 3 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 2 3 3 2

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex
PO4 PO10 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

2
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Examination Marks
Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks)
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 15 15 30
Analyze
Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment - Test : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment - Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks. First series test shall
be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the syllabus. There will be two
parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3 marks for each
question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part A.

3
Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1
question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions, a student
should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

4
 SYLLABUS

MCN 301 Disaster Management

Module 1

Systems of earth

Lithosphere- composition, rocks, soils; Atmosphere-layers, ozone layer, greenhouse effect,

weather, cyclones, atmospheric circulations, Indian Monsoon; hydrosphere- Oceans, inland water
bodies; biosphere

Definition and meaning of key terms in Disaster Risk Reduction and Management- disaster,
hazard, exposure, vulnerability, risk, risk assessment, risk mapping, capacity, resilience, disaster
risk reduction, disaster risk management, early warning systems, disaster preparedness, disaster
prevention, disaster mitigation, disaster response, damage assessment, crisis counselling, needs
assessment.

Module 2

Hazard types and hazard mapping; Vulnerability types and their assessment- physical, social,
economic and environmental vulnerability.

Disaster risk assessment –approaches, procedures

Module 3

Disaster risk management -Core elements and phases of Disaster Risk Management

Measures for Disaster Risk Reduction – prevention, mitigation, and preparedness.

Disaster response- objectives, requirements; response planning; types of responses.

Relief; international relief organizations.

Module 4

Participatory stakeholder engagement; Disaster communication- importance, methods, barriers;

Crisis counselling

Capacity Building: Concept – Structural and Non-structural Measures, Capacity Assessment;

Strengthening Capacity for Reducing Risk

5
Module 5

Common disaster types in India; Legislations in India on disaster management; National disaster
management policy; Institutional arrangements for disaster management in India.

The Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction- targets, priorities for action, guiding
principles

Reference Text Book

1. R. Subramanian, Disaster Management, Vikas Publishing House, 2018

2. M. M. Sulphey, Disaster Management, PHI Learning, 2016

3. UNDP, Disaster Risk Management Training Manual, 2016

4. United Nations Office for Disaster Risk Reduction, Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk
Reduction 2015-2030, 2015

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. What is the mechanism by which stratospheric ozone protects earth from harmful UV
rays?

2. What are disasters? What are their causes?

3. Explain the different types of cyclones and the mechanism of their formation

4. Explain with examples, the difference between hazard and risk in the context of disaster
management

5. Explain the following terms in the context of disaster management (a) exposure (b)
resilience (c) disaster risk management (d) early warning systems, (e) damage assessment
(f) crisis counselling (g) needs assessment

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. What is hazard mapping? What are its objectives?

2. What is participatory hazard mapping? How is it conducted? What are its advantages?

3. Explain the applications of hazard maps

4. Explain the types of vulnerabilities and the approaches to assess them

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain briefly the concept of ‘disaster risk’

6
 2. List the strategies for disaster risk management ‘before’, ‘during’ and ‘after’ a disaster
3. What is disaster preparedness? Explain the components of a comprehensive disaster
preparedness strategy

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What is disaster prevention? Distinguish it from disaster mitigation giving examples

2. What are the steps to effective disaster communication? What are the barriers to
communication?

3. Explain capacity building in the context of disaster management

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Briefly explain the levels of stakeholder participation in the context of disaster risk
reduction

2. Explain the importance of communication in disaster management

3. Explain the benefits and costs of stakeholder participation in disaster management

4. How are stakeholders in disaster management identified?

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Explain the salient features of the National Policy on Disaster Management in India

2. Explain the guiding principles and priorities of action according to the Sendai Framework
for Disaster Risk Reduction

3. What are Tsunamis? How are they caused?

4. Explain the earthquake zonation of India

7
 Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________ Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIFTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: MCN 301

Course Name: Disaster Management

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. What is the mechanism by which stratospheric ozone protects earth from harmful UV
rays?

2. What are disasters? What are their causes?

3. What is hazard mapping? What are its objectives?

4. Explain briefly the concept of ‘disaster risk’

5. List the strategies for disaster risk management ‘before’, ‘during’ and ‘after’ a disaster

6. What is disaster prevention? Distinguish it from disaster mitigation giving examples

7. Briefly explain the levels of stakeholder participation in the context of disaster risk
reduction

8. Explain the importance of communication in disaster management

9. What are Tsunamis? How are they caused?

10. Explain the earthquake zonation of India

Part B
Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

8
11. a. Explain the different types of cyclones and the mechanism of their formation [10]

b. Explain with examples, the difference between hazard and risk in the context of
disaster management
[4]

OR

12. Explain the following terms in the context of disaster management [14]

(a) exposure (b) resilience (c) disaster risk management (d) early warning systems, (e) damage
assessment (f) crisis counselling (g) needs assessment

13. a. What is participatory hazard mapping? How is it conducted? What are its advantages?

[8]

b. Explain the applications of hazard maps [6]

OR

14. Explain the types of vulnerabilities and the approaches to assess them [14]

15. a. Explain the core elements of disaster risk management [8]

b. Explain the factors that decide the nature of disaster response [6]

OR

16. a. What is disaster preparedness? Explain the components of a comprehensive disaster

preparedness strategy [6]

b. Explain the different disaster response actions [8]

17. a. Explain the benefits and costs of stakeholder participation in disaster management [10]

b. How are stakeholders in disaster management identified? [4]

OR

18. a. What are the steps to effective disaster communication? What are the barriers to
communication? [7]

b. Explain capacity building in the context of disaster management [7]

9
19. Explain the salient features of the National Policy on Disaster Management in India

[14]

OR

20. Explain the guiding principles and priorities of action according to the Sendai Framework
for Disaster Risk Reduction [14]

10
 Teaching Plan

Module 1 5 Hours
1.1 Introduction about various Systems of earth, Lithosphere- 1 Hour
composition, rocks, Soils; Atmosphere-layers, ozone layer,
greenhouse effect, weather
1.2 Cyclones, atmospheric circulations, Indian Monsoon; hydrosphere- 1 Hour
Oceans, inland water bodies; biosphere
1.3 Definition and meaning of key terms in Disaster Risk Reduction 1 Hour
and Management- disaster, hazard,
1.4 Exposure, vulnerability, risk, risk assessment, risk mapping, 1 Hour
capacity, resilience, disaster risk reduction, Disaster risk
management, early warning systems
1.5 Disaster preparedness, disaster prevention, disaster, Mitigation, 1 Hour
disaster response, damage assessment, crisis counselling, needs
assessment.
Module 2 5 Hours
2.1 Various Hazard types, Hazard mapping; Different types of 1 Hour
Vulnerability types and their assessment
2.2 Vulnerability assessment and types, Physical and social 1 Hour
vulnerability
2.3 Economic and environmental vulnerability, Core elements of 1 Hour
disaster risk assessment
2.4 Components of a comprehensive disaster preparedness strategy 1 Hour
approaches, procedures
2.5 Different disaster response actions 1 Hour
Module 3 5 Hours
3.1 Introduction to Disaster risk management, Core elements of 1 Hour
Disaster Risk Management
3.2 Phases of Disaster Risk Management, Measures for Disaster Risk 1 Hour
Reduction
3.3 Measures for Disaster prevention, mitigation, and preparedness. 1 Hour

11
3.4 Disaster response- objectives, requirements. Disaster response 1 Hour
planning; types of responses.
3.5 Introduction- Disaster Relief, Relief; international relief 1 Hour
organizations.
Module 4 5 Hours
4.1 Participatory stakeholder engagement 1 Hour
4.2 Importance of disaster communication. 1 Hour
4.3 Disaster communication- methods, barriers. Crisis counselling 1 Hour
4.4 Introduction to Capacity Building. Concept – Structural Measures, 1 Hour
Non-structural Measures.
4.5 Introduction to Capacity Assessment, Capacity Assessment; 1 Hour
Strengthening, Capacity for Reducing Risk
Module 5 5 Hours
5.1 Introduction-Common disaster types in India. 1 Hour
5.2 Common disaster legislations in India on disaster management 1 Hour
5.3 National disaster management policy, Institutional arrangements 1 Hour
for disaster management in India.
5.4 The Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction and targets 1 Hour
5.5 The Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction-priorities for 1 Hour
action, guiding principles

12
 Category L T P CREDIT
Industrial Economics &
HUT 300
Foreign Trade HSMC 3 0 0 3

Preamble: To equip the students to take industrial decisions and to create awareness of economic
environment.
Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the problem of scarcity of resources and consumer behaviour, and to evaluate
CO1 the impact of government policies on the general economic welfare. (Cognitive
knowledge level: Understand)

Take appropriate decisions regarding volume of output and to evaluate the social cost
CO2
of production. (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply)

Determine the functional requirement of a firm under various competitive conditions.

CO3
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyse)
Examine the overall performance of the economy, and the regulation of economic
CO4 fluctuations and its impact on various sections in the society. (Cognitive knowledge
level: Analyse)
Determine the impact of changes in global economic policies on the business
CO5
opportunities of a firm. (Cognitive knowledge level: Analyse)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 3

CO2 2 2 2 2 3 3

CO3 2 2 1 3

CO4 2 2 1 1 3

CO5 2 2 1 3

1
 Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex
PO4 PO10 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Examination Marks
Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 15 15 30

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

2
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment - Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Continuous Assessment - Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks. First series test shall
be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the syllabus. There will be two
parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3 marks for each
question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part A.
Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1
question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions, a student
should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B.

Part A : 30 marks
Part B : 70 marks

Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of
which a student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 3 sub-divisions and
carries 14 marks.

3
 SYLLABUS

HUT 300 Industrial Economics & Foreign Trade

Module 1 (Basic Concepts and Demand and Supply Analysis)

Scarcity and choice - Basic economic problems- PPC – Firms and its objectives – types of firms
– Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility – Demand and its determinants – law of demand
– elasticity of demand – measurement of elasticity and its applications – Supply, law of supply
and determinants of supply – Equilibrium – Changes in demand and supply and its effects –
Consumer surplus and producer surplus (Concepts) – Taxation and deadweight loss.

Module 2 (Production and cost)

Production function – law of variable proportion – economies of scale – internal and external
economies – Isoquants, isocost line and producer’s equilibrium – Expansion path – Technical
progress and its implications – Cobb-Douglas production function - Cost concepts – Social cost:
private cost and external cost – Explicit and implicit cost – sunk cost - Short run cost curves -
long run cost curves – Revenue (concepts) – Shutdown point – Break-even point.

Module 3 (Market Structure)

Perfect and imperfect competition – monopoly, regulation of monopoly, monopolistic completion

(features and equilibrium of a firm) – oligopoly – Kinked demand curve – Collusive oligopoly
(meaning) – Non-price competition – Product pricing – Cost plus pricing – Target return pricing
– Penetration pricing – Predatory pricing – Going rate pricing – Price skimming.

Module 4 (Macroeconomic concepts)

Circular flow of economic activities – Stock and flow – Final goods and intermediate goods -
Gross Domestic Product - National Income – Three sectors of an economy- Methods of
measuring national income – Inflation- causes and effects – Measures to control inflation-
Monetary and fiscal policies – Business financing- Bonds and shares -Money market and Capital
market – Stock market – Demat account and Trading account - SENSEX and NIFTY.

Module 5 (International Trade)

Advantages and disadvantages of international trade - Absolute and Comparative advantage

theory - Heckscher - Ohlin theory - Balance of payments – Components – Balance of Payments

4
deficit and devaluation – Trade policy – Free trade versus protection – Tariff and non-tariff
barriers.

Reference Materials

1. Gregory N Mankiw, ‘Principles of Micro Economics’, Cengage Publications

2. Gregory N Mankiw, ‘Principles of Macro Economics’, Cengage Publications

3. Dwivedi D N, ‘Macro Economics’, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

4. Mithani D M, ‘Managerial Economics’, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.

5. Francis Cherunilam, ‘International Economics’, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Why does the problem of choice arise?
2. What are the central problems?
3. How do we solve the basic economic problems?
4. What is the relation between price and demand?
5. Explain deadweight loss due to the imposition of a tax.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. What is shutdown point?

2. What do you mean by producer equilibrium?
3. Explain break-even point;
4. Suppose a chemical factory is functioning in a residential area. What are the external costs?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain the equilibrium of a firm under monopolistic competition.

2. Why is a monopolist called price maker?
3. What are the methods of non-price competition under oligopoly?

5
4. What is collusive oligopoly?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What is the significance of national income estimation?

2. How is GDP estimated?
3. What are the measures to control inflation?
4. How does inflation affect fixed income group and wage earners?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What is devaluation?
2. Suppose a foreign country imposes a tariff on Indian goods. How does it affect India’s
exports?
3. What is free trade?
4. What are the arguments in favour of protection?

6
 Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________ Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIFTH /SIXTH SEMESTER

B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: HUT 300

Course Name: Industrial Economics & Foreign Trade

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Why does an economic problem arise?

2. What should be the percentage change in price of a product if the sale is to be increased by 50

percent and its price elasticity of demand is 2?

3. In the production function Q= 2L 1/2K 1/2 if L=36 how many units of capital are needed to

produce 60 units of output?

4. Suppose in the short run AVC 4. Suppose in the short run AVC<P<AC. Will this firm produce

or shut down? Give reason.

5. What is predatory pricing?

6. What do you mean by non- price competition under oligopoly?

7. What are the important economic activities under primary sector?

8. Distinguish between a bond and share?

9. What are the major components of balance of payments?

7
10. What is devaluation? (10 x 3 = 30 marks)

PART B
(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

MODULE I
11. a) Prepare a utility schedule showing units of consumption, total utility and marginal
utility, and explain the law of diminishing marginal utility. Point out any three
limitations of the law.
b) How is elasticity of demand measured according to the percentage method? How is
the measurement of elasticity of demand useful for the government?
Or
12. a) Explain the concepts consumer surplus and producer surplus.
b) Suppose the government imposes a tax on a commodity where the tax burden met
by the consumers. Draw a diagram and explain dead weight loss. Mark consumer
surplus, producer surplus, tax revenue and dead weight loss in the diagram.
MODULE II
13. a) What are the advantages of large-scale production?
b) Explain Producer equilibrium with the help of isoquants and isocost line. What is
expansion path?

Or
14. a) Explain break-even analysis with the help of a diagram.
b) Suppose the monthly fixed cost of a firm is Rs. 40000 and its monthly total variable
cost is Rs. 60000.
i. If the monthly sales is Rs. 120000 estimate contribution and break-even sales.
ii. If the firm wants to get a monthly profit of Rs.40000, what should be the sales?

c) The total cost function of a firm is given as TC=100+50Q - 11Q2+Q3. Find

marginal cost when output equals 5 units.

MODULE III

8
15. a) What are the features of monopolistic competition?
b) Explain the equilibrium of a firm earning supernormal profit under monopolistic
competition.
Or
16.a) Make comparison between perfect competition and monopoly.
b) Explain price rigidity under oligopoly with the help of a kinked demand curve.

MODULE IV
17. a) How is national income estimated under product method and expenditure method?
b) Estimate GDPmp, GNPmp and National income

Private consumption = 2000 (in 000 cores)

expenditure
= 500
Government Consumption
NFIA = -(300)
Investment = 800
Net=exports =700
Depreciation = 400
Net-indirect tax = 300

Or
18. a) What are the monetary and fiscal policy measures to control inflation?
b) What is SENSEX?
MODULE V
19. a) What are the advantages of disadvantages of foreign trade?
b) Explain the comparative cost advantage.
Or
20. a) What are the arguments in favour protection?
b) Examine the tariff and non-tariff barriers to international trade.
(5 × 14 = 70 marks)

9
 Teaching Plan
Module 1 (Basic concepts and Demand and Supply Analysis) 7 Hours

1.1 Scarcity and choice – Basic economic problems - PPC 1 Hour

1.2 Firms and its objectives – types of firms 1 Hour

1.3 Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility – Demand – law of demand 1 Hour

1.4 Measurement of elasticity and its applications 1 Hour

1.5 Supply, law of supply and determinants of supply 1 Hour

1.6 Equilibrium – changes in demand and supply and its effects 1 Hour
Consumer surplus and producer surplus (Concepts) – Taxation and
1.7 1 Hour
deadweight loss.
Module 2 (Production and cost) 7 Hours

2.1 Productions function – law of variable proportion 1 Hour

2.2 Economies of scale – internal and external economies 1 Hour

2.3 producers equilibrium – Expansion path 1 Hour

2.4 Technical progress and its implications – cob Douglas Production function 1 Hour
Cost concepts – social cost: private cost and external cost – Explicit and
2.5 1 Hour
implicit cost – sunk cost

2.6 Short run cost curves & Long run cost curves 1 Hour

2.7 Revenue (concepts) – shutdown point – Break-even point. 1 Hour

Module 3 (Market Structure) 6 hours

3.1 Equilibrium of a firm, MC – MR approach and TC – TR approach 1 Hour

3.2 Perfect competition & Imperfect competition 1 Hour

3.3 Monopoly – Regulation of monopoly – Monopolistic competition 1 Hour

3.4 Oligopoly – kinked demand curve 1 Hour

3.5 Collusive oligopoly (meaning) – Non price competition 1 Hour

Cost plus pricing – Target return pricing – Penetration, Predatory pricing –
3.6 1 Hour
Going rate pricing – price skimming

10
 Module 4 (Macroeconomic concepts) 7 Hours

4.1 Circular flow of economic activities 1 Hour

Stock and flow – Final goods and intermediate goods – Gross Domestic
4.2 1 Hour
Product - National income – Three sectors of an economy

4.3 Methods of measuring national income 1 Hour

4.4 Inflation – Demand pull and cost push – Causes and effects 1 Hour

4.5 Measures to control inflation – Monetary and fiscal policies 1 Hour

Business financing – Bonds and shares – Money market and capital
4.6 1 Hour
market
Stock market – Demat account and Trading account – SENSEX and
4.7 1 Hour
NIFTY
Module 5 (International Trade) 8 Hours

5.1 Advantages and disadvantages of international trade 1 Hour

5.2 Absolute and comparative advantage theory 2 Hour

5.3 Heckscher – Ohlin theory 1 Hour

5.4 Balance of payments - components 1 Hour

5.5 Balance of payments deficit and devaluation 1 Hour

5.6 Trade policy – Free trade versus protection 1 Hour

5.7 Tariff and non tariff barriers. 1 Hour

11
 Category L T P Credit
HUT
Management for Engineers
310 HMC 3 0 0 3

Preamble: This course is intended to help the students to learn the basic concepts and functions
of management and its role in the performance of an organization and to understand various
decision-making approaches available for managers to achieve excellence. Learners shall have a
broad view of different functional areas of management like operations, human resource, finance
and marketing.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the characteristics of management in the contemporary context (Cognitive

CO1
Knowledge level: Understand).
CO2 Describe the functions of management (Cognitive Knowledge level: Understand).
Demonstrate ability in decision making process and productivity analysis (Cognitive
CO3
Knowledge level: Understand).
Illustrate project management technique and develop a project schedule (Cognitive
CO4
Knowledge level: Apply).
Summarize the functional areas of management (Cognitive Knowledge level:
CO5
Understand).
Comprehend the concept of entrepreneurship and create business plans (Cognitive
CO6
Knowledge level: Understand).

1
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 2 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 2 1
CO6 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability
PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems PO10 Communication
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Test 1 (Marks in Test 2 (Marks in End Semester Examination

Category percentage) percentage) (Marks in percentage)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 15 15 30
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

2
Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 Hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment - Test : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment - Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks. First series test shall
be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the syllabus. There will be two
parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3 marks for each
question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part A.
Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1
question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions, a student
should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

3
 SYLLABUS

HUT 310 Management for Engineers (35 hrs)

Module 1 (Introduction to management Theory- 7 Hours)

Introduction to management theory, Management Defined, Characteristic of Management,

Management as an art-profession, System approaches to Management, Task and Responsibilities
of a professional Manager, Levels of Manager and Skill required.

Module 2 (management and organization- 5 hours)

Management Process, Planning types , Mission, Goals, Strategy, Programmes, Procedures,

Organising, Principles of Organisation, Delegation, Span of Control, Organisation Structures,
Directing, Leadership, Motivation, Controlling..

Module 3 (productivity and decision making- 7 hours)

Concept of productivity and its measurement; Competitiveness; Decision making process;

decision making under certainty, risk and uncertainty; Decision trees; Models of decision
making.

. Module 4 (project management- 8 hours)

Project Management, Network construction, Arrow diagram, Redundancy. CPM and PERT
Networks, Scheduling computations, PERT time estimates, Probability of completion of project,
Introduction to crashing.

Module 5 (functional areas of management- 8 hours)

Introduction to functional areas of management, Operations management, Human resources

management, Marketing management, Financial management, Entrepreneurship, Business plans,
Corporate social responsibility, Patents and Intellectual property rights.

References:

4
 1. H. Koontz, and H. Weihrich, Essentials of Management: An International Perspective. 8th
ed., McGraw-Hill, 2009.

2. P C Tripathi and P N Reddy, Principles of management, TMH, 4th edition, 2008.

3. P. Kotler, K. L. Keller, A. Koshy, and M. Jha, Marketing Management: A South Asian

Perspective. 14th ed., Pearson, 2012.

4. M. Y. Khan, and P. K. Jain, Financial Management, Tata-McGraw Hill, 2008.

5. R. D. Hisrich, and M. P. Peters, Entrepreneurship: Strategy, Developing, and Managing a

New Enterprise, 4th ed., McGraw-Hill Education, 1997.

6. D. J. Sumanth, Productivity Engineering and Management, McGraw-Hill Education,

1985.

7. K.Ashwathappa, ‘Human Resources and Personnel Management’, TMH, 3 rd edition,

2005.

8. R. B. Chase, Ravi Shankar and F. R. Jacobs, Operations and Supply Chain Management,
14th ed. McGraw Hill Education (India), 2015.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome1 (CO1): Explain the systems approach to management?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the following terms with a suitable example Goal,
Objective, and Strategy.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Mr. Shyam is the author of what promises to be a successful novel.
He has the option to either publish the novel himself or through a publisher. The publisher is
offering Mr. Shyam Rs. 20,000 for signing the contract. If the novel is successful, it will sell
200,000 copies. Else, it will sell 10,000 copies only. The publisher pays a Re. 1 royalty per copy.
A market survey indicates that there is a 70% chance that the novel will be successful. If Mr.
Shyam undertakes publishing, he will incur an initial cost of Rs. 90,000 for printing and
marketing., but each copy sold will net him Rs. 2. Based on the given information and the

5
decision analysis method, determine whether Mr. Shyam should accept the publisher’s offer or
publish the novel himself.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain the concepts of crashing and dummy activity in project
management.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Derive the expression for the Economic order quantity (EOQ)?

Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Briefly explain the theories of Entrepreneurial motivation.?

6
 Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 4

Reg No:_______________ Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: HUT 310
Course name: Management for Engineers
Max Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART-A (Answer All Questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. “Management is getting things done through other.” Elaborate.

2. Comment on the true nature of management. Is it a science or an art?

3. Planning is looking ahead and controlling is looking back. Comment with suitable examples

4. Explain the process of communication?

5. Explain the hierarchy of objectives?

6. Explain the types of decisions?

7. Describe the Economic man model?

8. Explain the concepts of crashing and dummy activity in project management.

9. Differentiate the quantitative and qualitative methods in forecasting.

10. What are the key metrics for sustainability measurement? What makes the measurement and
reporting of sustainability challenging?

PART-B (Answer any one question from each module)

11. a) Explain the systems approach to management. (10)

b) Describe the roles of a manager (4)

OR

7
12. a) Explain the 14 principles of administrative management? (10)

b) Explain the different managerial skills (4)

13. a) What are planning premises, explain the classification of planning premises. (10)

b) Distinguish between strategy and policy. How can policies be made effective. (4)

OR

14 a) Explain three motivational theories. (9)

b) Describe the managerial grid. (5)

15. a) Modern forest management uses controlled fires to reduce fire hazards and to stimulate
new forest growth. Management has the option to postpone or plan a burning. In a specific forest
tract, if burning is postponed, a general administrative cost of Rs. 300 is incurred. If a controlled
burning is planned, there is a 50% chance that good weather will prevail and burning will cost
Rs. 3200. The results of the burning may be either successful with probability 0.6 or marginal
with probability 0.4. Successful execution will result in an estimated benefit of Rs. 6000, and
marginal execution will provide only Rs. 3000 in benefits. If the weather is poor, burning will be
cancelled incurring a cost of Rs. 1200 and no benefit. i) Develop a decision tree for the problem.
(ii) Analyse the decision tree and determine the optimal course of action. (8)

b) Student tuition at ABC University is $100 per semester credit hour. The Education department
supplements the university revenue by matching student tuition, dollars per dollars. Average
class size for typical three credit course is 50 students. Labour costs are $4000 per class, material
costs are $20 per student, and overhead cost are $25,000 per class. (a) Determine the total factor
productivity. (b) If instructors deliver lecture 14 hours per week and the semester lasts for 16
weeks, what is the labour productivity? (6)

OR

16. a) An ice-cream retailer buys ice cream at a cost of Rs. 13 per cup and sells it for Rs. 20 per
cup; any remaining unsold at the end of the day, can be disposed at a salvage price of Rs. 2.5 per
cup. Past sales have ranged between 13 and 17 cups per day; there is no reason to believe that

8
sales volume will take on any other magnitude in future. Find the expected monetary value and
EOL, if the sales history has the following probabilities:
(9)

Market Size 13 14 15 16 17
Probability 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.35

b) At Modem Lumber Company, Kishore the president and a producer of an apple crates sold to
growers, has been able, with his current equipment, to produce 240 crates per 100 logs. He
currently purchases 100 logs per day, and each log required 3 labour hours to process. He
believes that he can hire a professional buyer who can buy a better quality log at the same cost. If
this is the case, he increases his production to 260 crates per 100 logs. His labour hours will
increase by 8 hours per day. What will be the impact on productivity (measured in crates per
labour-hour) if the buyer is hired? What is the growth in productivity in this case?
(5)

17. a) A project has the following list of activities and time estimates:

Activity Time (Days) Immediate Predecessors

A 1 -
B 4 A
C 3 A
D 7 A
E 6 B
F 2 C, D
G 7 E, F
H 9 D
I 4 G, H

(a) Draw the network. (b) Show the early start and early finish times. (c) Show the
critical path. (10)

9
 b) An opinion survey involves designing and printing questionnaires, hiring and training
personnel, selecting participants, mailing questionnaires and analysing data. Develop the
precedence relationships and construct the project network. (4)

OR

18. a) The following table shows the precedence requirements, normal and crash times, and
normal and crash costs for a construction project:

Immediate Required Time (Weeks) Cost (Rs.)

Activity
Predecessors Normal Crash Normal Crash
A - 4 2 10,000 11,000
B A 3 2 6,000 9,000
C A 2 1 4,000 6,000
D B 5 3 14,000 18,000
E B, C 1 1 9,000 9,000
F C 3 2 7,000 8,000
G E, F 4 2 13,000 25,000
H D, E 4 1 11,000 18,000
I H, G 6 5 20,000 29,000

Draw the network. (b) Determine the critical path. (c) Determine the optimal duration and the
associated cost. (10)

b) Differentiate between CPM and PERT. (4)

19. a) What is meant by market segmentation and explain the process of market segmentation (8)

b) The Honda Co. in India has a division that manufactures two-wheel motorcycles. Its budgeted
sales for Model G in 2019 are 80,00,000 units. Honda’s target ending inventory is 10,00, 000
units and its beginning inventory is 12, 00, 000 units. The company’s budgeted selling price to its
distributors and dealers is Rs. 40, 000 per motorcycle. Honda procures all its wheels from an

10
outside supplier. No defective wheels are accepted. Honda’s needs for extra wheels for
replacement parts are ordered by a separate division of the company. The company’s target
ending inventory is 3,00,000 wheels and its beginning inventory is 2,00,000 wheels. The
budgeted purchase price is Rs. 1,600 per wheel.

(a) Compute the budgeted revenue in rupees.

(b) Compute the number of motorcycles to be produced.

Compute the budgeted purchases of wheels in units and in rupees.? (6)

OR

20. a) a) “Human Resource Management policies and principles contribute to effectiveness,

continuity and stability of the organization”. Discuss. (b) What is a budget? Explain how sales
budget and production budgets are prepared? (10)

b) Distinguish between the following: (a) Assets and Liabilities (b) Production concept and
Marketing concept (c) Needs and Wants (d) Design functions and Operational control functions
in operations (4)

11
 Teaching Plan

Sl.No TOPIC SESSION

Module I
1.1 Introduction to management 1
1.2 Levels of managers and skill required 2
1.3 Classical management theories 3
1.4 neo-classical management theories 4
1.5 modern management theories 5

1.6 System approaches to Management, 6

1.7 Task and Responsibilities of a professional Manager 7
Module 2
2.1 Management process – planning 8
Mission – objectives – goals – strategy – policies – programmes
2.2 9
– procedures
2.3 Organizing, principles of organizing, organization structures 10
2.4 Directing, Leadership 11
2.5 Motivation, Controlling 12
Module III
3.1 Concept of productivity and its measurement Competitiveness 13
3.2 Decision making process; 14
3.3 Models in decision making 15

3.4 Decision making under certainty and risk 16

3.5 Decision making under uncertainty 17
3.6 Decision trees 18
3.7 Models of decision making. 19
Module IV
4.1 Project Management 20

12
Sl.No TOPIC SESSION
Module I
4.2 Network construction 21

4.3 Arrow diagram, Redundancy 22

4.4 CPM and PERT Networks 23
4.5 Scheduling computations 24
4.6 PERT time estimates 25
4.7 Probability of completion of project 26
4.8 Introduction to crashing

Module V
5.1 Introduction to functional areas of management, 28
5.2 Operations management 29

5.3 Human resources management , 30

5.4 Marketing management 31

5.5 Financial management 32

5.6 Entrepreneurship, 33
5.7 Business plans 34

Corporate social responsibility, Patents and Intellectual property

5.8 35
rights

13
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

S7 POLYMER ENGINEERING
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT401 POLYMER TESTING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PCC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Testing of polymer focuses on the testing, analysis and characterization of

polymeric materials, including both synthetic and natural or bio-based polymers.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials and properties.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Realize the need for testing of polymers for different standards and specifications.
CO 2 Understand the specimen preparation with condition, shape and size of test specimen
and significance of long-term testing methods
CO 3 Understand various mechanical testing methods
CO 4 Explain various spectroscopic testing methods
CO 5 Explain the significance of thermal, electrical and optical testing methods

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1 2
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 1 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Realize the need for testing of polymers for different standards and
specifications.

1. Differentiate between Standards and Specifications?

2. Describe preparation and conditioning of test pieces for a tensile test

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Understand the specimen preparation with condition, shape and
size of test specimen and significance of long term testing methods.

1. Explain the determination of abrasion resistance of plastic materials.

2. What is ageing? Discuss the factors that contribute to heat build up and ageing of NR.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Understand various mechanical testing methods

1 How the X –ray diffraction data is useful in size analysis of polymers?

2. Explain how IR spectroscopy is useful in identifying general purpose rubbers.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain various spectroscopic testing methods.

1. Explain volume and surface resistivity.

2. How gloss is determined?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the significance of thermal, electrical and optical testing
methods.

1. Define VST. How is it determined?

2. Explain HDT
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT401 POLYMER TESTING

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain Standards and Specification?

2. Describe BIS Standards. What is its significance?

3. Give the importance of short-term testing.

4. What is creep and stress relaxation?

5. Give the importance of FTIR.

6. Differentiate between SEM and AFM.

7. Define volume resistivity?

8. Describe optical properties of polymers.

9. How VST is determined?

10. How TG is measured?

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) Describe preparation and conditioning of test pieces for a tensile test (9M)

b) Name the different standards for product testing of polymers and explain their
significance? (5M)

12. a) Explain preparation and conditioning of samples. 14M)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module II

13. a) Explain DMA of plastics materials (8M)

b) Describe method for determining the impact strength of materials. (6M)

14. a) What is mean by resilience? How it is determined? (9M)

b) Explain how abrasion resistance of a rubber sample is determined. (5M)

Module -III

15. a) Explain the importance of NMR in chemical analysis of polymers. (14M)

16. a) Describe in detail the principle of IR spectroscopy (14M)

Module -IV

17. a) Distinguish between transparency and haze (8M)

b) Explain how dielectric strength is determined? 6M)

18. a) Explain gloss and how it is measured? (8M)

b) Explain power factor. (6M)

Module -V

19. a) Outline the principle of TGA and DSC. (7M)

b) Explain MFI and how it is measured? (7M)

20. a) Explain how TG and TM of polymers measured. (14M)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Introduction – Need for testing, need for standards and specifications, national and international
standards BIS, ASTM, BS, DIN, FDA etc. Specimen preparation and conditioning, standard for
test specimen preparation like moulding, machining, stamping and punching of specimens,
conditioning of specimen.

Module 2
Mechanical properties:

a) Short term strengths: Tensile properties, compression properties, flexural properties, shear
properties, impact resistance, toughness, Tear resistance, abrasion resistance and hardness.
b) Long term strengths: Dynamic stress and strain properties and their measurements, creep,
stress relaxation, fatigue properties, flexing, and resilience, heat build- up, ageing properties.

Module 3
Structural evaluation of polymers: Principles, theories and applications to polymeric systems
with suitable illustration of the following techniques: Fourier transform infrared spectrometry,
Ultraviolet - visible spectrometry, Nuclear magnetic resonance spectrometry, Mass
spectrometry, X-ray diffraction spectrometry, Gas chromatography, Scanning Electron
Microscopy, atomic force microscopy.

Module 4
Electrical properties: volume resistivity, surface resistivity, breaks down voltage, dielectric
strength, dielectric constant, arc resistance, power factor. Optical properties: Gloss, haze,
refractive index, transmittance

Module 5
Thermal properties of polymers: Glass transition temperature, melting temperature, heat
distortion temperature, etc. Principle and uses of DTA, TGA, DSC and TMA.
Miscellaneous properties: MFI, MVI, specific gravity, weathering properties, toxicity,
resistance to chemicals, VST, HDT.

Text Books

1. Brown, R., Physical Testing of Rubber, Springer Science & Business Media, 2006
2. M.N. Subramanian, N.S. Muralisrinivasan, Polymer Testing: New Instrumental
Methods, Momentum Press, 2012

Reference Books

1. Jack L. Koenig, Spectroscopy of Polymers, Elsevier, 1918

2. Morton, M. (Ed.), Rubber Technology, Springer Science & Business Media, 2013
3. Grellmann, W., Polymer Testing, Hanser, 2013
4. Brown, R. (Ed.), Handbook of polymer testing: physical methods, CRC press, 1999
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction (6 hours)

1.1 Standards organizations, BIS, ASTM, BS, DIN, FDA, 2

1.2 preparation and conditioning of test pieces 2

1.3 conditioning of specimen 2

2 Mechanical testing (6 hours)

2.1 Short term strengths 2
2.2 Long term strengths 2
2.3 heat build- up, ageing properties. 2
3 Structural evaluation of polymers (6 hours)
3.1 Fourier transform infrared spectrometry, Ultraviolet - visible 2
spectrometry, Nuclear magnetic resonance spectrometry
3.2 Mass spectrometry, X-ray diffraction spectrometry, 2
3.3 Gas chromatography, Scanning Electron 2
Microscopy, atomic force microscopy.

4 Electrical and optical properties (8 hours)

4.1 Electrical properties: volume resistivity, surface resistivity, breaks 4
down voltage, dielectric strength, dielectric constant, arc
resistance, power factor
4.2 Optical properties: Gloss, haze, refractive index, transmittance 4

5 Thermal properties of polymers (8 hours)

5.1 Glass transition temperature, melting temperature, heat distortion 4
temperature, etc. Principle and use of DTA, TGA, DSC and TMA.
5.2 Miscellaneous properties: MFI, MVI, specific gravity, weathering 4
properties, toxicity, resistance to chemicals, VST, HDT.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT413 ENGINEERING STATISTICS AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

QUALITY CONTROL PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course introduces the basic idea of hypothesis testing and improves the quality
of products through various techniques during the manufacturing stage and after.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in quality controls.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the hypothesis testing.

CO 2 Explain the significance of variable control chart.
CO 3 Explain the significance of the attribute control chart.
CO 4 Describe various sampling plans.
CO 5 Explain reliability.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1 2
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 1 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have a maximum 2 subdivisions and carry 14
marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the hypothesis testing.

1. Describe one tailed test and two tailed tests.

2. A machine puts out 16 imperfect articlesin a sample of 500. After the machine is overhauled,
it puts out 3 imperfect articles in a batch of 100. Has the machine improved? Use 𝛼 = 0.01

3. A manufacturer of car batteries claims that the life of his batteries is approximately normally
distributed with a standard deviation of 0.9 year. If a random sample of 10 of these batteries has
a SD of 1.2 years, do you think that 𝜎 > 0.9year? Use 0.05 level of significance.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Explain the significance of variable control chart.

1. Describe R chart.
2. Define a variable control chart with an example.
3. Draw an𝑋̅ and R chart for the following.

Sample 1 Sample 2 Sample 3 Sample 4 Sample 5

11.1 10.1 9.8 11.3 11.2
9.2 11.2 10.2 10.1 9.4
11.3 9.9 9.9 10.1 8.9

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Explain the significance of the attribute control chart.

1. Explain attribute control chart.

2.draw a suitable control chart for the following.

Lot Sample size No: of defects in the sample

1 500 12
2 500 14
3 500 16
4 500 18
5 500 16
5 500 14
6 500 12
7 500 12
8 500 32
9 500 16
10 500 18
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

3.Draw a control chart for defective

Sample no No of inspected No of defectives

1 200 5
2 150 6
3 300 8
4 150 4
5 100 3
6 200 6
7 250 8
8 200 6
9 200 6
10 150 7

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe various sampling plans.

1. Distinguish between process control and product control.

2. Explain the construction of D S P.Obtain ASN and ATI for DSP

3.Explain OC curve

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain reliability.

1.Define failure rate?

2. Give the reliability of a two-component system connected in series.

3.Define maintainability. How is it different from reliability? Explain the different types of
maintenance.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER

BRANCH: POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT413

ENGINEERING STATISTICS AND QUALITY CONTROL

TIME:3 HOURS MAXIMUM:100 MARKS

PART A

ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.EACH CARRIES 3 MARKS(10x3=30)

1. Distinguish between simple random sampling and stratified random sampling.

2. Describe F distribution. State one of its use .

3. Describe average run length of a mean chart.

4. Distinguish between process control and product control.

5. Give the applications of c chart.

6. Explain d chart.

7. Define (I )AQL (ii) LTPD.

8. Explain a single sampling plan.

9. Explain reliability with an example.

10. Define failure rate.

PART B

ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE

MODULE –I

11 a .A random sample of 100 articles selected from a batch of 2000 articles, shows that the
average diameter of the article is 0.354 with a standard deviation of 0.048.Find a 95%
confidence interval for the average diameter of the batch of 2000 articles? (7)

b. The standard deviation of weights of 18 new-born babies is 0.32 kg. Test at 1% of

significance that the standard deviation of weight of new-born babies is less than 0.35 kg. (7)

OR
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

12 a. Explain chi-square goodness of fit (7)

b. In a certain district A,450 persons were considered regular consumers of tea out of a sample
of 1000 persons. In another district B 400 were regular consumers of tea out of a sample of 800
persons. Do these facts reveal a significant difference between the two districts as far as tea
drinking is concerned ?( use 5% level of significance.) (7)

MODULE - 2

13 a What is a control chart? Explain the principles underlying use of 3-sigma limits. (7)

b. Describe the construction of mean and range chart (7)

OR

14 a Define (i) OC function of a control chart (ii) ARL of a control chart (5)

b. From a factory producing metal sheets, a sample of 5 sheets is taken every hour and the
data is obtained as under .Draw a control chart for the mean and examine whether the process is
under control or not. Given n=5, A2=0.58.

SAMPLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NO

MEAN 0.025 0.032 0.042 0.022 0.028 0.010 0.25 0.04 0.026 0.029
THICKN
ESS

SAMPLE 0.025 0.048 0.012 0.012 0.019 0.010 0.006 0.046 0.010 0.032
RANGE

(9)

MODULE - 3

15 a. Explain how the control limits are determined for (i) c chart (ii)d chart. (5)

b . A manufacturer of transistors found the following number of defects in 25 sub-groups

of 50 transistors:

3,5,4,2,3,2,7,0,2,4,2,3,4,1,2,4,8,2,4,2,6,4,3,1,4.

Construct a control chart for the fraction defective .Plot the sample data on the chart and
comment on the state of control.
. (9)

OR

16 a. Explain the difference between defect and defectives with an example. (5)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

b. Construct a suitable control chart for the following data and state your conclusions:

Sample no.

(each of 100 items:) : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

No. of defectives :12 10 6 8 9 9 7 10 11 8 (9)

MODULE - 4

17 a. Draw an OC curve for an SSP where N=100,n=5,c=2. (9)

b. Explain producers risk and consumer's risk. (5)

OR

18 a. Distinguish between type A and type B OC curves. Give the shape of ideal OC curve

b. Explain double sampling plan. (8).

(6)

MODULE - 5

19 a. The reliability function of a system is given by R(t)=𝑒 −𝑡 ;t >0.Find the failure rate and
MTBF. (6)

b. Define maintainability. Compute it for the following distribution function

f(x)=α𝑒 −𝛼𝑥 ;𝛼,x >0. (8)

20a. What is the reliability of the system shown in the figure; if

P(A)=P(B)=P(C)=0.8,P(D)=0.95,P(E)=0.85

How would the reliability improve further if subsystem E is also made parallel redundant?
Show the configuration of the system. (9)

b .Define reliability function .Show that the failure rate uniquely determines the reliability
function. (4)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (8 hours)
Population and sampling, large and small samples, random sampling, stratified sampling,
estimating the mean and variance, confidence intervals, choice of sample size for estimation.
Testing of hypotheses for large samples, means, proportions, difference of means and
standard deviations. Testing of hypothesis for small samples, t-distribution, test of hypothesis
for mean, difference of means, test for paired data, F-distribution, f-tests and properties,
contingency table, χ2 distribution, goodness of fit and independence of attributes

Module 2 (7 hours)
Meaning of quality, variables and attributes data, benefits of control charts, control charts for
variables, checklist for 𝑋̅and R charts, calculation of 3-sigma limits for,𝑋̅control charts for
range, OC curve for 𝑋̅chart, OC curve for R chart, average run length (ARL) for the 𝑋̅chart

Module 3 (7 hours)
Control charts for fraction rejected, control chart for attributes, control limit for the p-chart,
control chart for nonconformities, c-chart in statistical process control, applications of chart,
limits for c-chart, Q-chart for quality scores, D-chart for demerit classification

Module 4(7 hours)

Acceptance sample, types of acceptance, sampling plans, determination of probability of
acceptance by these sampling plans, sampling risks, design of sampling for stipulated
producer's risk and consumer's risk. Concepts of AQL, LTPD, AOQL in sampling, QC curves,
construction, standard sampling plans, continuous and sequential sampling plans.
Module 5 (6 hours)
Definition of reliability, maintainability, failure rate, mean time between failures, factors
contributing to reliability of products, failure cycle of products, bathtub curve, reliability tests,
operating characteristics, curves for acceptance.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

References
1. I.W.Burr, Engineering Statics and Quality Control, Mc-Graw Hill, 1975
2. A.J.Duncan, Quality Control and Industrial Statistics, Richard. Irwin, Inc., 1975
3. Granth and Leavenworth, Statistical Quality Control, TMH, 7th edition, 1996
4. Sigmund Halpern, An Introduction to Quality Control and Reliability,

Text Books

1 .R.C.Gupta, Statistical Quality Control, Khanna Publishers, 8th edition, Delhi, 2008

2. Quality Control Handbook (TMH)

3.. Gupta and Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Testing of hypothesis (8 hours)

1.1 Population and sampling, large and small samples, random 3

sampling, stratified sampling,
estimating the mean and variance, confidence intervals, choice of
sample size for estimation
1.2 Testing of hypotheses for large samples, means, proportions, 3
difference of means and
standard deviations. Testing of hypothesis for small samples, t-
distribution, test of hypothesis
for mean, difference of means, test for paired data
1.3 F-distribution, f-tests and properties, 2
contingency table, χ2 distribution, goodness of fit and
independence of attributes

2 Control chart for variables(7 hours)

2.1 Meaning of quality, variables and attributes data, benefits of 3
control charts, control charts for
variables,
2.2 Checklist for𝑋̅and R charts, calculation of 3-sigma limits for 𝑋̅, 3
control charts for
range, OC curve for 𝑋̅chart
2.3 OC curve for R chart, average run length (ARL) for the 𝑋̅chart 1

3 Control chart for attributes (7 hours)

3.1 Control charts for fraction rejected, control chart for attributes, 3
control limit for the p-chart,
control chart for nonconformities
3.2 C-chart in statistical process control, applications of chart, 3
limits for c-chart,
3.3 Q-chart for quality scores, D-chart for demerit classification 1

4 Acceptance sampling (7 hours)

4.1 Acceptance sample, types of acceptance, sampling plans, 3
determination of probability of
acceptance by these sampling plans, sampling risks
4.2 Design of sampling for stipulated 3
producer's risk and consumer's risk. Concepts of AQL, LTPD,
AOQL in sampling, QC curves,
construction
4.3 Concepts of AQL, LTPD, AOQL in sampling, QC curves, 1
construction, standard sampling plans, continuous and sequential
sampling plans.

5 Reliability (6 hours)
5.1 Definition of reliability, maintainability, failure rate, mean time 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

between failures, factors

contributing to reliability of products

5.2 Operating characteristics, curves for acceptance 3

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

OIL AND NATURAL GAS CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT423
ENGINEERING
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The field of natural gas engineering is very much important for petroleum engineers
specializing in gas processing technology. The course outlines an optimal balance between
natural gas production, natural gas processing and gas transportation. An extensive treatise on
natural gas engineering, both upstream and gas refining processes with key equipment and
facility design will be covered. This course will also highlight the current status of production
of natural gas through unconventional sources/technics and the applications of natural gas.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Identify different source rocks from which hydrocarbons are generated.

Gain knowledge of how and why fluid hydrocarbons migrate from a source rock
CO2
toreservoir rock, entrapment and accumulation of hydrocarbons.

CO3 Identify sources of natural gas and its applications in variety of fields.

CO4 Explain various methods of natural gas processing for dehydration and sweetening.

CO5 Describe gas compression, gas gathering and transport installation.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 3
CO 2 3 3
CO 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3
CO 5 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Identify different source rocks from which hydrocarbons are
generated.
1. Differentiate between source rocks, reservoir rocks and cap rocks.
2. Explain how original oil and gas in place calculated. Differentiate between recoverable
reserves and original oil and gas in place.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Gain knowledge of how and why fluid hydrocarbons migrate from
a source rock toreservoir rock, entrapment and accumulation of hydrocarbons.
1. Enlist various factors affecting the gas-liquid separation and processing of natural gas.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):Identify sources of natural gas and its applications in variety of
fields.
1. Explain how original oil and gas in place calculated. Differentiate between recoverable
reserves and original oil and gas in place.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain various methods of natural gas processing for dehydration
and sweetening.
1. Explain the glycol dehydration process with a neat sketch
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Describe gas compression, gas gathering and transport installation.
1. Elaborate on gas compressor design on mollier charts.
2. Write short notes on natural gas storage and pipelines
3. Explain the NGL train process with neat flow diagram.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No: ______________ Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 423
OIL AND NATURAL GAS ENGINEERING
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A
Answer All the Questions(10 x 3 = 30)

1. State the two mechanisms of natural gas formation.

2. Differentiate between associated and non-associated gas.
3. Differentiate between source rocks, reservoir rocks and cap rocks.
4. List the effects of hydrate formation in subsea system and give any two methodsfor
preventing hydrate formation.
5. List various problems in the production of natural gas.
6. Enlist various factors affecting the gas-liquid separation and processing of natural gas.
7. List the major steps involved in lean oil absorption process.
8. Explain the hot potassium carbonate process.
9. Classify the mode of transport of LNG.
10. List the important terminologies used for underground storage.

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)
Module 1
11. Explain how original oil and gas in place calculated. Differentiate between recoverable
reserves and original oil and gas in place. (14)
OR
12. Explain the following terms: (i) Heavy and extra heavy oil, (ii) Natural bitumen, (iii)
Shale oil, (iv) Tar sand,and (v) tight reservoirs. (14)
Module 1I
13. Explain in detail, different hydrate production methods. (14)
OR
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

14. Draw a Schematic diagram of CBM reservoir to understandheterogeneity. Explain how

it is different from Shale Gas. (14)
Module III
15. Explain the principle and operation of Vertical and Horizontal gas liquid separator with
neat sketch. (14)
OR
16. Size a gas-oil separator both horizontally and vertically for the following conditions.
(14)
Gas flowrate = 5 MMscfd, Operating pressure = 800 psig
Condensate flowrate = 200 bbl/MMscf
Module IV
17. a) Explain in detail solvent absorption for natural gas. (7)
b) Give different properties of a suitable solvent. (7)
OR
18. a) Explain the parts of a reciprocating compressor. (7)
b) Elaborate on gas compressor design on mollier charts. (7)
Module V
19. a) Write short notes on natural gas storage and pipelines (7)
b) Explain the NGL train process with neat flow diagram. (7)
OR
20. a) Describe the safety and environmental considerations of LNG facility.(9)
b) Write a note on regasification process. (5)

**********
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (6 Hours)
Fundamentals of petroleum geology and exploration: Introduction, origin, formation,
geological occurrence andcharacteristics of oil and natural gas.Source Rocks, Reservoir Rocks,
and Cap rocks: Definition, Characteristics, Classificationand nomenclature, Concept of Shale
oil,Reservoir Properties,Hydrocarbonmigration,Petroleum Exploration.

Module 2 (7 Hours)
Conventional natural gas: Associated gas, non-associated gas, Gas condensate.
Unconventional production of natural gas: Coal bed methane, Natural gas hydrate, shale gas
and tight gas sands.
Coal bed methane - Introduction, present status, formation and properties of coal bed methane.
Natural Gas Hydrate - Concepts and Structures, Evaluation and Prediction,Production
Techniques.
Shale Gas - Exploration, Production-Drilling andcompletion.

Module 3 (8 Hours)
Estimation and Production of Natural Gas:Estimation of gas reserves by volumetric method
– Production of natural gas –Pressuredecline method – Problems in the production of natural
gas.
Separation and Processing: Gas and liquid separation – internal construction of separators,
types of separators, factors affecting separation, separator design, stage separation, low
temperature separation.

Module 4 (8 Hours)
Dehydration of Natural gas: Water content of natural gas streams, hydrate control in gas
production, dehydration systems - Glycol dehydration and Solid desiccant dehydration.
Acid gas removal: Metal oxide process, Slurry process, Amine process, Carbonatewashing
process, Methanol based process and Sulphur recoveryprocess.
Compression of Natural Gas:Types of Compressors, Selection of reciprocating and
centrifugal compressors, Thermodynamics of Compressors, Compression calculations.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module 5 (6 Hours)
Gas flow measurement: Fundamentals, Methods of measurements, Orifice meters
equation,turbine meters, Selection, Recording charts, Uncertainties in flow.
Gas Gathering, Transportation and Storage: Gas GatheringSystem, SteadyState and
Unsteady State Flow in Pipelines, Transmission of Natural Gas,Specifications. Underground
Storage and Conservationof Natural Gas.
Liquefied Natural Gas: Gas treating before liquefaction- Liquefaction cycles- Storage of
LNG, Transportation- Regasification and cold utilization of LNG.Economics - Plant efficiency
- Safety andenvironmental considerations.

Reference Books:
1. Elements of Petroleum Geology, Richard, C. Selley, Elsevier, 1997
2. Fundamental of Natural Gas Processing, Arthur J. Kidnay, William R. Parrish, Taylor
and
Francis, 2006.
3. Beggs D. H., “Gas Production Operations”, OGCI Publications, 1984
4. Natural Gas: A Basic Handbook, James G. Speight, Gulf Publishing Company, 2007.
5. Gas Conditioning and Processing, John M. Campbell, Volume 2, 7th Edition,
CampbellPetroleum Series, 1992.
6. Ikoku, Chi, “Natural Gas Production Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons, 1984.
7. Kumar Sanjay, “Gas Production Engineering”, Gulf Publishing Company, TX, USA,
1987.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 6
Introduction, origin, formation, geological occurrence andcharacteristics of
1.1 1
oil and natural gas.
Source Rocks: Definition of source rock, Organic rich sediments as source
rocks, Nature and type of source rocks - Claystone / shale.
Reservoir Rocks: Characteristics of Reservoir rocks, Classification and
1.2 1
nomenclature: Sandstone Reservoir Rocks, Carbonate Reservoir Rocks,
Unconventional, Fractured and Miscellaneous reservoir rocks, Marine and
non-marine reservoir rocks, Concept of Shale oil.
Reservoir Properties and Cap Rocks: Reservoir pore space, porosity -
primaryand secondary porosity, effective porosity, fracture porosity -
1.3 2
permeability – effective and relative permeability. Cap rocks:Definition and
characteristics of cap rocks.
Hydrocarbon migration: Geological framework of migration
1.4 andaccumulation, The concept of hydrocarbon migration from sourcebeds to 1
the carrier beds, Carrier beds to the reservoir.
Petroleum Exploration – gravimetric method, magnetic method,seismic
1.5 1
method, borehole logging.
2 Module II 7
Conventional natural gas: Associated gas, non-associated gas, Gas
2.1 1
condensate.
Coal bed methane - Introduction, present status, formation and properties of
2.2 2
coal bed methane.
Natural Gas Hydrate - Concepts and Structures, Evaluation and Prediction,
2.3 2
Production Techniques.
2.4 Shale Gas - Exploration, Production - Drilling and completion. 2

3 Module III 8
Estimation and Production of Natural Gas: Estimation of gas reserves by
3.1 volumetric method – Production of natural gas – Pressure decline method – 4
Problems in the production of natural gas.
Separation and Processing: Gas and liquid separation – internal construction
3.2 of separators, types of separators, factors affecting separation, separator 4
design, stage separation, low temperature separation.
4 Module IV 8
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Dehydration of Natural gas: Water content of natural gas streams, hydrate

4.1 control in gas production, dehydration systems - Glycol dehydration and 2
Solid desiccant dehydration.
Acid gas removal: Metal oxide process, Slurry process, Amine process,
4.2 Carbonate washing process, Methanol based process and Sulphur recovery 3
process.
Compression of Natural Gas: Types of Compressors, Selection of
4.3 reciprocating and centrifugal compressors, Thermodynamics of 3
Compressors, Compression calculations.
5 Module V 6
Gas flow measurement: Fundamentals, Methods of measurements, Orifice
5.1 meters equation, turbine meters, Selection, Recording charts, Uncertainties 2
in flow.
Gas Gathering, Transportation and Storage: Gas Gathering System, Steady
5.2 State and Unsteady State Flow in Pipelines, Transmission of Natural Gas, 2
Specifications. Underground Storage and Conservation of Natural Gas.
Liquefied Natural Gas: Gas treating before liquefaction- Liquefaction cycles-
Storage of LNG, Transportation- Regasification and cold utilization of
5.3 2
LNG.Economics - Plant efficiency - Safety andenvironmental
considerations.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT PROCESS MODELLING AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

433 SIMULATION PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course gives students ability to develop mathematical models of chemical
engineering processes and do simulation.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of heat transfer, mass transfer, and fluid flow operations.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Understand the important physical phenomena from the problem statement

CO 2 Develop model equations for the given system
CO 3 Perform parameter estimations
CO 4 Apply suitable numerical simulation methods for solution of models

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 1
CO 2 2 2
CO 3 2
CO 4 1 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 20 20
Apply 10 20 30
Analyse 20 20
Evaluate 10
Create 10

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): To understand the important physical phenomena from the problem
statement

1.Define modelling and simulation.

2. Explain the kinetics of first order reaction.
3.Explain transport equations and equations of state.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): To develop model equations for the given system

1. Develop the model of continuous flow tank.

2.Develop the model of steam jacketed vessel.
3. Develop the model for batch distillation.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): To perform parameter estimations

1.What is finite difference method?

2. Explain the general algorithm for numerical parameter estimation.
3. Explain least square criterion.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): To apply suitable numerical simulation methods for solution of
models.

1. Write the algorithm for the simulation of non-isothermal CSTR.

2. Write the algorithm for the simulation of batch reactor
3. Write the algorithm for gravity flow tanks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QP CODE: Reg No:______________

PAGES:3 Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREEEXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

POT 433 PROCESS MODELLING AND SIMULATION

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define modelling and simulation

2. List down the classification of modelling techniques.
3. Explain energy equation.
4. What are distributed systems?
5. Explain the basic principle for distillation.
6. What is finite difference method?
7. What is the function of enriching and stripping section?
8. Explain about steam jacketed vessel.
9. Write the model equations of partial condenser.
10. Differentiate deterministic and probabilistic techniques.

(10x3 = 30 marks)

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11.a) What are the basic modelling principles.

b) Explain the parameter estimation techniques. (6+8 = 14 marks)

12.
a)Explain the classification of modelling techniques.
b) Explain the application of mathematical models. (8+6 = 14 marks)

Module II
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

13.Develop the model of continuous flow tank.(14 marks)

14. Derive the energy equation of CSTR with heat removal.(14marks)

Module -III

15. Develop the model of mixing vessel without reaction. (14 marks)
16. Develop the model of isothermal variable volume CSTR in series. (14 marks)

Module -IV

17. Develop the model for binary distillation column.(14 marks)

18. Develop the model equations for partial condenser. (14marks)

Module -V

19.Develop the model of jacketed tubular reactor. (14 marks)

20.Write the algorithm for the simulation of batch reactor. (14 marks)

..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1: Definitions of Modelling, uses of mathematical modelling, classification of modelling

techniques, basic modelling principles.
Parameter estimation techniques in theoretical as well as numerical models.

Module 2: Fundamental laws of chemical engineering: Energy equations, continuity equation,

equation of motion, transport equations, equations of state, Equilibrium states and chemical
kinetics, modelling of continuous flow tank.

Module 3: Models of reactors: Mixing with reaction - reversible reaction-steam jacketed

vessel-isothermal constant and variable holdup CSTR in series.

Module 4: Models of separation processes: Multicomponent flash drum- ideal binary

distillation column – multicomponent distillation column, batch distillation-condensation

Module 5: Distributed system modelling: Jacketed tubular reactor - laminar flow in a pipe
counter current liquid-liquid heat exchanger.
Numerical simulation techniques: Finite difference, method of weighted residuals. Simulation
of gravity flow tank- CSTR in series - non-isothermal CSTR- batch reactor

Text Books

1. Amiya K.Jana, Computer Process Modelling and Computer Simulation, Prentice Hall of
India.
2. Biquette W.B., Process Dynamics - Modeling Analysis and Simulation, Prentice Hall of
India.
3. Franks R.G.E., Mathematical Modeling in Chemical Engineering, John Wiley.
4. John Ingham et.al, Chemical Engineering Dynamics - Modeling with PC Simulation, VCH
Publishers.

Reference Books

1. Denn M. M., Process Modeling, Longman, 1986.

2. Holland C. D., Fundamentals and Modeling of Separation Processes, Prentice Hall,1975.
3. Luyben W. L., Process Modeling Simulation and Control for Chemical Engineers, 2nd Ed.,
McGraw Hill, 1990.
4. Najim K., Process Modeling and Control in Chemical Engineering, CRC, 1990.
5. Aris R., Mathematical Modeling, Vol. 1: A Chemical Engineering Perspective (Process
System Engineering), Academic Press, 1999.
6. R. G. E. Franks, Modeling and Simulation in Chemical Engineering, Wiley- Interscience,
New York, 1972.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Definitions and basic concepts (7 hours)
1.1 Definition of Modelling, Simulation Classification of modelling
techniques 2
1.2 Basic modelling principles 2
1.3 Parameter estimation techniques in theoretical as well as numerical
models. 3
2 Fundamental laws of chemical engineering(6 hours)
2.1 Energy equations, continuity equation, equation of motion,transport
equations, equations of state 3

2.2 Equilibrium states and chemical kinetics-examples

Modelling of continuous flow tank 3
3 Models of reactors(6 hours)
3.1 Mixing with reaction - reversible reaction 3
3.2 Steam jacketed vessel-isothermal constant and variable holdup 3
CSTR in series
4 Models of separation processes(6 hours)
4.1 Multicomponent flash drum- ideal binary distillation column 3
4.2 Multicomponent distillation column, batch distillation-condensation 3
5 Distributed system modelling & Numerical simulation techniques (10hours)
5.1 Jacketed tubular reactor - laminar flow in a pipe, counter current 5
liquid-liquid heat exchanger
5.2 Numerical simulation techniques: Finite difference, method of 2
weighted residuals.
5.3 Simulation of gravity flow tank- CSTR in series - non-isothermal 3
CSTR- batch reactor
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT443 CORROSION ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course is intended to impart knowledge on the importance of corrosion and its
prevention and control in process industries.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Identify and explain different types of corrosion

CO 2 Demonstrate various corrosion testing techniques
CO 3 Explain various corrosion prevention techniques
CO 4 Select the appropriate corrosion control technique for different engineering
materials
CO 5 Know the corrosion control techniques used in various industries

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 1 1
CO 4 3 3 1 1
CO 5 3 3 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 20 20
Apply 10 20 30
Analyse 20 20
Evaluate 10
Create 10

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): To identify different types of corrosion

1.Define Corrosion & derive the expression for determining corrosion rate.
2. Describe the environmental effects of corrosion.
3.Describe the different types of hydrogen damage and its mechanisms.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Todemonstrate various corrosion testing techniques

1. Explain the Tafel extrapolation method in corrosion testing.
2.Describe with a schematic sketch the principle and working of a galvanostat for corrosion
testing.
3. Explain how salt spray test can be used for corrosion testing.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):To explain various corrosion prevention techniques

1.Write a note on Inhibitors in Corrosion prevention.

2. Describe the design rules to be adopted for the prevention of Corrosion.
3.Explain the mechanism of Cathodic Protection.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):To select the appropriate corrosion control technique for different
engineering materials
1. Describe the corrosion control technique in concrete structures.
2. Describe the corrosion control techniques in stainless steels.
3. Describe in detail about the corrosion map of India.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): To know the corrosion control techniques used in various
industries
1.Describe the corrosion control techniques in petrochemical industry.
2.Describe the corrosion control techniques in fertilizer industry.
3. Outline the steps practised in corrosion auditing of different industries.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QP CODE: Reg No:______________

PAGES:3 Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREEEXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

POT 443 CORROSION ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1.Define corrosion & derive the expression for determining corrosion rate.
2.Explain selective leaching with an example.
3. Explain salt spray test.
4. Explain thermogravimetric technique.
5. Write a note on Inhibitors in corrosion prevention.
6. Explain the mechanism of cathodic protection.
7. Differentiate duplex and super duplex stainless steels.
8. Describe the corrosion control techniques in ceramics.
9. Outline the steps practised in corrosion auditing of different industries
10. Describe in detail about the Corrosion map of India. (10x3 = 30 marks)

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. (a) Iron is corroding in sea water at a current density of 1.69 x 10−4 𝐴⁄𝑐𝑚2 . Determine the
corrosion rate in
(i) mdd
(ii) ipy
(b) Describe the different types of hydrogen damage and its mechanisms. (6+8 = 14)
OR
12. (a) Describe the environmental effects of corrosion.
( b) Describe the electrochemical reactions involved in corrosion kinetics. (6+8 = 14)

Module II
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

13.Describe with a schematic sketch the principle and working of a galvanostat for corrosion
testing. (14)
OR
14. Describe the design rules to be adopted for the prevention of corrosion. (14)

Module -III

15. Describe with a schematic sketch the principle and working of a galvanostat for corrosion
testing. (14)
OR
16. Write a note on impedance spectroscopy. Explain how it can be applied for corrosion
testing. (14
Module -IV
17. Describe the corrosion control technique in concrete structures. (14)
OR
18. Describe the corrosion control techniques in stainless steels. (14)

Module -V

19. Describe the corrosion control techniques in fertilizer industry. (14)

OR
20. Describe the corrosion control techniques in petrochemical industry. (14)

..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 hours)

Definition and importance of corrosion: Principles of corrosion phenomenon: Corrosion

rate expressions, Electrochemical aspects, Environmental effects, Metallurgical and other
aspects.

Module 2 (7 hours)

Different forms of corrosion: Galvanic or two metal corrosion, Crevice corrosion, Pitting,
Intergranular corrosion, Selective leaching, Erosion corrosion, Stress corrosion, Hydrogen
damage.

Module 3 (6 hours)

Corrosion testing and monitoring: non-electrochemical and electrochemical methods:

potentiostat, Tafel extrapolation, linear polarization, galvanostat, impedance spectroscopy,
thermogravimetric technique, salt spray test, weight change measurements.

Module 4 (7 hours)

Corrosion prevention: Design and coatings, inhibitors and surface engineering, cathodic
protection and anodic protection.

Module 5 (8 hours)

Corrosion and its control in different engineering materials: concrete structures, duplex,
super duplex stainless steels, ceramics, composites and polymers.
Corrosion and its control in industries: Power, Process, Petrochemical, ship building, marine
and fertilizer industries. Corrosion auditing in industries, Corrosion map of India.

Text Books

1. Fontana M. G., Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2005.
2. Jones D. A, Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Prentice-Hall, Inc., 2nd Edition,
1996.

Reference Books

1. Scully J. C, The Fundamentals of Corrosion, 2nd Ed., Pergamon Press.

2. Stansbury E. E. and Buchanan, R. A, Fundamentals of Electrochemical Corrosion, ASM
International.
3. Uhlig H. H. and Revie R. W., Corrosion and Corrosion Control, 3rd Ed., John Wiley &
Sons.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Definition and importance of corrosion(7 hours)
1.1 Definition and importance of corrosion, Principles of corrosion 4
phenomenon: Corrosion rate expressions, electrochemical aspects,
1.2 Environmental effects, Metallurgical and other aspects. 3
2 Different forms of corrosion (7 hours)
2.1 Different forms of corrosion: Galvanic or two metal corrosion, 3
Crevice corrosion, Pitting
2.2 Intergranular corrosion, Selective leaching, Erosion corrosion, Stress 4
corrosion, Hydrogen damage.
3 Corrosion testing and monitoring(6 hours)
3.1 Corrosion testing and monitoring: Non-electrochemical and 3
electrochemical methods: potentiostat, Tafel extrapolation, linear
polarization, galvanostat
3.2 Impedance spectroscopy, thermogravimetric technique, salt spray 3
test, weight change measurements.
4 Corrosion prevention(7 hours)
4.1 Corrosion prevention: Design and coatings, inhibitors and surface 5
engineering, cathodic protection and anodic protection.
4.2 Corrosion auditing in industries, Corrosion map of India. 2
5 Corrosion and its control in industries (8 hours)
5.1 Corrosion and its control in different engineering materials: concrete 4
structures, duplex, super duplex stainless steels, ceramics,
composites and polymers.
5.2 Corrosion and its control in industries: Power, Process, 4
Petrochemical, ship building, marine and fertilizer industries.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT453 PROJECT ENGINEERING
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The objective is set out to impart the undergraduate students, a basic knowledge in
project planning, plant process design, economic evaluation and financial control. Emphasis is
givento process plants due to the fact that these are usually more complicated than othertypes of
industrial plants, yet both in fact follow very similar steps along projectimplementation
practices.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
Identify process equipment and P&ID symbols and read the process flow diagrams of a
CO1
chemicalplant.

CO2 Describe the role of a project engineer in the design and erection of a process plant.

Develop skills required for project planning & formulation and analyze processes for
CO3
project execution&control.

Describe the fundamental elements of a contract and choose the right contract type for a
CO4
given situation.

Differentiate the equipments and able to prepare specification sheet. Estimate the
CO5 capital investment required for an industrial process and determine the total product
cost associated with an industrial process

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 2 3 3

CO 2 3 2

CO 3 3 2

CO 4 3 2 2

CO 5 3 2 2 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Identify process equipment and P&ID symbols and read the
process flow diagrams of a chemicalplant.
1. List the types of flow diagrams that are in common use.
2. List and explain different stages in the production of customer-built chemical processing
equipment.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Describe the role of a project engineer in the design and erection of
a process plant.
1. State and explain various factors for techno-economic feasibility survey of a chemical
process plant.
2. Explain the principles of the storage layout and equipment layoutin a process plant.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):Develop skills required for project planning & formulation and
analyze processes for project execution&control.
1. Write a note on PERT and CPM mentioning their role in scheduling of projects.
2. Explain the significance of guarantee run.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Describe the fundamental elements of a contract and choose the
right contract type for a given situation.
1. Explain the procedure of tendering and selection of successful contractor for projects.
2. As a project manager you are vested with the responsibility of bidding for an industrial
project. What bidding strategies would you consider? Discuss withjustification.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Differentiate the equipments and able to prepare specification
sheet. Estimate the capital investment required for an industrial process and determine the total
product cost associated with an industrial process.
1. State the advantages of standard equipment over special equipment.
2. State the preliminary specifications for equipments.
3. Prepare the specification sheet for a heat exchanger.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 3
Reg No: ______________ Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 453
PROJECT ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)

1. Differentiate between a commercial and a semicommercial plant.

2. List the types of flow diagrams that are in common use.
3. Explain how plant terrain influences the site selection?
4. Briefly discuss on the venting and draining in process plant design
5. Explain the different stages in site development.
6. Write a note on cost-plus contract.
7. Differentiate between scope estimate and contractor’s estimate.
8. List the items that are included in the fixed capital investment, for chemical process
industry.
9. Explain the method of determining profitability using net present value method.
10. Write a note on the two major financial reporting documents.

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. List and explain the main factors to be considered in the feasibility study of a project.
OR
12. A plant layout is to be prepared for a batch process which involves process equipments
such as plugflow reactor, an overhead condenser, steam heating jacket for reactor, a
centrifuge and twocentrifugal pumps. Discuss the factors to be considered in preparing this
layout.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module 1I
13. Explain the following terms in network analysis: (i) Event, (ii) Critical Path, (iii) Dummy
Activity and (iv) Float.
OR
14. Define a pilot plant. Write the subsequent development stages of semi-
commercial/commercial production.

Module III
15. List and explain the major steps in company formation.
OR
16. Explain the procedure of tendering and selection of successful contractor for projects

Module IV
17. Write a note on institutions in India, supporting the industry for long term financing.
OR
18. State the preliminary specifications for equipment. Prepare the specification sheet for a heat
exchanger.

Module V
19. Explain the need of working capital for an industrial plant and write the components
ofmoney to be provided.
OR
20. Write short notes on (i) Fixed Costs and Cost of Production, (ii) Break-even Analysis.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1 (8 Hours)
Classification of Projects, Scope of Project engineering - the role of project engineer.
Development of project – R&D, TEFR, Importance of Laboratory development – Bench scale
experiments – pilot plant studies – Semi-commercial plant. Plant location and site selection –
preliminary data for construction projects - process engineering - flow diagrams – plot plans -
engineering design and drafting.

Module 2 (7 Hours)
Planning and scheduling of projects – use of bar chart, PERT/ CPM - Critical path calculations.
Site development – foundation – Erection and site fabrication – Construction – Alignment and
insulation – Start up and commissioning – Trial runs – Guarantees sums and hand over.

Module 3 (6 Hours)
Company formation process license – Technology Transfer – statutory sanctions. Contracts and
Contractors – Introduction, detailing of scope of work, factors in selecting scope of work,
detailing of contract types, Factors in selecting type of contract, contractor selection.

Module 4 (6 Hours)
Selection of process equipments: Standard versus special equipment selection criteria,
specification sheets.Project financing: Means of finance, financial institutions, special schemes,
Financing with special reference to financial institutions in India, key financial indicators and
ratios, personnel recruitment and training.

Module 5 (8 Hours)
Scope of piping engineering, pipe sizing technique, Codes and standards, Piping design,
thermal insulation and buildings, safety in plant design. Economic evaluation of projects-
Capital requirements and cost of production – profitability -Break even analysis and minimum
cost analysis.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books:
1. Rase & Barrow, Project Engineering of Process Plants, John Wiley
Reference Books:
1. Bhasin, S.D.: “Project Engineering of Process Plants”, Chemical Engineering Education
Development Centre, I.I.T., Madras (1979).
2. Peter S. Max & Timmer Haus, “Plant design and economics for chemical engineers”.Mc
Graw Hill (2002).
3. Srinath L. S., “PERT and CPM.” affiliated east press Pvt. Ltd., New York (1973)
4. Perry J. H. “Chemical engineering handbook” 7TH ed. Mc Graw Hill (1997).
5. Jelen. F. C., “Cost and optimization in engineering”. Mc Graw Hill (1983).
6. Frederick B. Plummer, “Project Engineering”, BH
7. Ernest E. Ludwig, “Applied project engineering and Management”, Gulf Pub. Co.,
(1988)

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 8
Classification of Projects, Scope of Project engineering - the role of
1.1 1
project engineer.
1.2 Development of project – R&D, TEFR 2
Importance of Laboratory development – Bench scale experiments – pilot
1.3 1
plant studies – Semi-commercial plant.
Plant location and site selection – preliminary data for construction
1.4 2
projects - process engineering
1.5 flow diagrams – plot plans - engineering design and drafting 2
2 Module II 7
2.1 Planning and scheduling of projects – use of bar chart 1
2.2 PERT/ CPM - Critical path calculations. 2
Site development – foundation – Erection and site fabrication –
2.3 Construction – Alignment and insulation – Start up and commissioning – 4
Trial runs – Guarantees sums and hand over.
3 Module III 6
Company formation process license – Technology Transfer – statutory
3.1 2
sanctions.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Contracts and Contractors – Introduction, detailing of scope of work,

3.2 2
factors in selecting scope of work.
Detailing of contract types, Factors in selecting type of contract,
3.3 2
contractor selection.
4 Module IV 6
Selection of process equipments: Standard versus special equipment
4.1 2
selection criteria, specification sheets.
Project financing: Means of finance, financial institutions, special
4.2 schemes, Financing with special reference to financial institutions in 1
India,
4.3 Key financial indicators and ratios. 2
4.4 Personnel recruitment and training. 1
5 Module V 8
Scope of piping engineering, pipe sizing technique, Codes and standards,
5.1 3
Piping design, thermal insulation and buildings, safety in plant design.
Economic evaluation of projects - Capital requirements and cost of
5.2 production – profitability – Break even analysis and minimum cost 5
analysis.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

463 MANUFACTURE PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: To understand how computers are integrated at various levels of manufacturing

and its impact on productivity, product cost, and quality.
To understand the use of computers in planning, manufacturing and inspection.

Prerequisite: Nil.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Explain the basic concepts of computer aided design

CO2 Develop the basic ideas of 2D and 3Ddrawing.
CO3 Understand basic ideas behind solid modeling
CO4 Have a basic knowledge in finite element analysis procedures.
CO5 Understand various formulations of structural problems

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO1 3 2 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester

Tests Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance :10marks
Continuous Assessment Test(2numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project :15marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the basic concepts of computer aided design.
1. To understand the need of CAD in engineering and design
2. To study various tools and software packages used for CAD
3. To understand all the requirements to develop CAD workstation

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Develop the basic ideas of 2D and 3Ddrawing.

1. To develop the ideas of transformation of points, lines,2D rotation, reflection,

scaling and combined transformation
2. To study algorithms for generation of lines, curves and plane surfaces

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Understand basic ideas behind solid modeling

1. To understand the concept of solid modeling

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Have a basic knowledge in finite element analysis procedures.

1. To develop the skills needed to apply Finite Element Methods to problems

in Engineering.
2. To develop basic concept of Finite element method

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand various formulations of structural problems.

1. Apply the procedure involved to solve a problem using Finite Element Methods.
2. Analysis of a 2D structural problem using line, triangular, and quadrilateral element.
3. To apply the procedure of iso-parametric formulation to solve 2D structural problems
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

RegNo: Name:

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH& YEAR
POT 463 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE

Max.Marks:100 Duration:3Hours

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3marks)

1. Discuss the steps in conventional design process.

2. Name three each software packages for Computer Aided Design (Modeling) and
Computer Aided Analysis.

3. Write the transformation matrices for front view and top view in orthographic
projection.

4. Identify the advantages of Bezier curves over cubic curves.

5. List the method for solid modelling?

6. Calculate the slope of the tangent and normal to the function y=3x3+2x2-x+5atx=2

7. List the various steps in FEM.

8. Differentiate between global coordinates, local coordinate and natural coordinates.

9. What are iso parametric elements?

10. Differentiate LST and CST elements

PARTB

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14marks)

Module I

11. a) What are steps in conventional design?

b) List some engineering applications of CAD.
c) Explain GUI and ICG
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

OR
12. a) Illustrate basic working principle of any interactive device.

b) Write basic specifications of three hardware components in CAD.

c) List five advantages using CAD.

Module II
a) A line of end points (5,8) and (6,11) should be rotated about one of its end-point
(5,8) through 30⁰ anticlockwise. Explain the transformation.

d) Write 2D transformation operators for shearing, scaling, reflection and rotation

OR
13. a) A square having co-ordinates (2,2), (5,2), (5,4) and (2,4) is to be rotated about the
point(2,2) in clockwise direction at an angle 60ͦ and after that it is scaled to 3 unit in X
direction and 2 unit in Y direction. Find and plot the final co-ordinates of the
geometry.

b) With a suitable example explain the formulation of tangent and normal to a curve.

Module-III

14. a) Differentiate between Bezier curve and Hermit curve.

b) Digitize and plot the line with end points (2,4) and (6,9) using any line drawing
algorithm.
OR

15. a) With the aid sketches give comparison between linear sweep and rotational sweep.

b) List and state four modeling tools in solid modeling.

c) With sketches describe constructive solid geometry method.

Module-IV

16. a) List and describe steps involved in FEA.

b) Derive the shape for one dimensional linear element and plot it distribution along
the element. Also obtain the expression for the gradient of shape function and plot it.

OR
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

17. A tapered bar of length 600mm is having cross sectional areas of 650mm2 and
350mm2 at two ends. The bar is fixed at the end having larger area and subjected to
axial forces 40kN which is acting axially outwards at the smaller end and 10kN,
acting at a point 200mm from smaller end and directing axially towards the larger
side. The Modulus of Elasticity of the bar is 200*10 3 N/mm2. Model the bar with
three finite elements and Determine
i) The nodal displacements.
ii) The stresses in each element.
iii) The reaction for ceat the support.

Module-V

18. a) Determine the shape functions N1, N2 and N3 at the interior point P for the
triangular elements shown in the figure.

b) Derive the stiffness matrix for CST(2D) element.

19. a) For the plane stress element whose co-ordinates are given by (100,100), (400,100)
and (200,400). The nodal displacements are u1=2mm, v1=1mm, u2=1mm,v2=1.5mm,
u3=2.5mm, v3=0.5mm. Determine the elemental stress. Assume E=200GN/m2,
µ=0.3, t=10mm.

..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module1: Introduction to CAD, Historical developments, Industrial look at CAD,
Comparison of CAD with traditional designing, Application of computers in Design, Basics
of geometric and solid modelling, Packages for CAD/CAM/CAE/CAPP. Hardware in CAD
components, user interaction devices, design database, graphic Standards, data Exchange
Formats, virtual Reality.
Module 2: Transformation of points and line, 2-D rotation, reflection, scaling and combined
transformation, homogeneous coordinates, 3-Dscaling. Shearing, rotation, reflection and
translation, combined transformations, ortho graphic and perspective projections,
reconstruction of 3-D objects. Algebraic and geometric forms, tangents and normal, blending
functions, re-parametrization, straight lines, conics, cubic splines, Bezier curves and B-spline
curves.
Module 3: Plane surface, ruled surface, surface of revolution, tabulated cylinder, bi cubic
surface, Bezier surface, B-spline surfaces and their modelling techniques. Solid models and
representation scheme, boundary representation, constructive solid geometry. Sweep
representation, cell decomposition, spatial occupancy enumeration, coordinate systems for
solid modelling.

Module4:
Introduction to finite element analysis- steps involved in FEM; Pre-processing phase –
discretisation-types of elements. Formulation of stiffness matrix(directmethod,1-Delement)
-20%formulationofloadvector-assemblyofglobalequations-
implementationofboundaryconditions - solution procedure - post processing phase. Simple
problems with axial barelement(structural problems only)

Module 5: Interpolation – selection of interpolation functions - CST element – iso parametric

formulation (using minimum PE theorem) – Gauss quadrature; Solution of 2D plane stress
solid mechanics problems(linear static analysis)

Text Books

1. M.P.Groover,E.M.Zimmers,Jr.CAD/CAM;ComputerAidedDesignandManuf
acturing,PrenticeHallof India, 1987
2. T.R. Chandrupatla and A.D.Belagundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in
Engineering,Pearson Education, 2001

Reference Books

1. Chris Mcmahonand Jimmie Browne-CAD/CAM –Principle Practice and

Manufacturing Management , Addision WesleyEngland,1998
2. D.F.Rogersand J.A.Adams, Mathematical Elements in Computer Graphics,
McGrawHill,1990
3. Daryl Logan,A First course in Finite Element Method, Thomson Learning,2007
4. David V Hutton, Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis,THM,2003
5. Donald Hearn,M.Pauline Bakerand Warren Carithers,Computer Graphics with open
GL, Pearson Education,2001
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

6. P. Radhakrishnan and S. Subramanyan, CAD /CAM/CIM, New AgeInt. Ltd.,2008

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Module1 (6 hours)

1.1 Introduction to CAD, Historical developments, Industrial look 2

at CAD, Comparison of CAD with traditional designing,
Application of computers in Design
1.2 Basics of geometric and solid modeling, Packages for 2
CAD/CAM/CAE/CAPP.

1.3 Hardware in CAD components, user interaction devices ,design 2

Data base, graphic Standards, data Exchange Formats, virtual
Reality.
2 Module2 (7 hours)
2.1 Transformation of points and line, 2-D rotation, reflection, scaling 3
and combined transformation, homogeneous coordinates, 3-D
Scaling.
2.2 Shearing, rotation, reflection and translation, combined 2
transformations, orthographic and perspective projections,
re construction of 3-D objects.
2.3 Algebraic and geometric forms, tangents and normal, blending 2
functions, re- parameterization, straight lines, conics, cubic
splines, Bezier curves and B-spline curves.

3 Module3 (8 hours)
3.1 Plane surface, ruled surface, surface of revolution, tabulated 3
cylinder, bicubicsurface, Bezier surface,B-spline surfaces and
their modelling techniques.
3.2 Solid models and representation scheme, boundary 3
representation, constructive solid geometry.
3.3 Sweep representation, cell decomposition, spatial occupancy 2
enumeration, coordinate systems for solid modeling.

4 Module4 (8 hours)
4.1 Introduction to finite element analysis - steps involved in FEM; 3
Pre-processing phase – discretisation - types of elements. – post
processing phase. Simple problems with axial bar element
(structural problems only)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
4.2 Formulation of stiffness matrix (direct method, 1-D element)- 3
20% formulation of load vector-assembly of global equations-
Implementation of boundary conditions-solution procedure
4.3 Problem Solving (Structural problems only) 2
5 Module5 (6 hours)
5.1 Interpolation–selection of inter polation functions-CST element 2

5.2 Iso parametric formulation (using minimum PE theorem)– Gauss 2

quadrature
5.3 Solution of 2D plane stress solid mechanics problems (linear 2
statistical analysis)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT BIO REACTOR DESIGN CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
473 PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course is intended to introduce the state of the arts in bioreactor technology and its broad
range of applications.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in bioprocess industries.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain how different bioreactors work.

CO 2 Estimate substrate conversion and biomass productivity in a chemostat.
CO 3 Calculate reactor length and residence time.
CO 4 Describe the design aspects of bioreactors.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3
CO 4 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 20 20
Apply 10 20 30
Analyse 20 20
Evaluate 10
Create 10

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): To explain how different bioreactors work.

1. Explain trickling filter bioreactor.
2. Explain different modes of operation.
3. Explain airlift bioreactor

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): To estimate substrate conversion and biomass productivity in a chemostat.
1. Explain how growth of microbes are maintained in a batch bioreactor.
2.List down the various supplements for microbial growth.
3. Explain growth curve.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):To calculate reactor length and residence time.

1.Explain mean residence time.
2. Explain Plug flow tubular reactor (PFTR).
3.Explain chemostat with cell recycle.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):To describe the design aspects of bioreactors.

1. Explain in detail the various requirements of a bioreactor.
2.Schematic diagram of a bioreactor.
3. Explain the effects of agitation on mass transfer.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Model Question paper

QP CODE:Reg No:______________

PAGES:3 Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREEEXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

POT 473 BIO REACTOR DESIGN

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain trickling filter bioreactor.

2. What is disposable culture systems?
3.Explain endogenous metabolism.
4. Explain batch and semibatch operation.
5. Explain chemostat with cell recycle.
6. Explain substrate conversion andbiomass productivity.
7. Explain the advantages of recycling in a reactor.
8.Explain Plug flow tubular reactor (PFTR).
9. Explain mass transfer between phases.
10. Explain the effects of agitation on mass transfer. (10x3 = 30 marks)

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11.a) Explainrotating drum bioreactor, spin filter bioreactor.

b) Explain fluidized bed reactor with a schematic diagram. (8+6 = 14 marks)

12. a) Differentiate trickle bed and flocculated cell bioreactors

b)Explain stirred tank bioreactor, its advantages and disadvantages. (8+6 = 14 marks)

Module II

13.a)Explain how growth of microbes are maintained in a batch bioreactor.

b) Derive an expression for batch growth of microbes in a bioreactor. (6+8 = 14 marks)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

14.a)Explain the kinematics of enzyme catalysed reaction.

b) Explain enzyme deactivation. (8+6 = 14 marks)

Module -III

15.a) Compare a batch bioreactor and single stage CFSTBR.

b) Explain chemostat with cell recycle. (8+6 = 14 marks)
16.a) Explain ideal continuous flow stirred tank bioreactor (CFSTBR) its substrate conversion and biomass
productivity.
b) Explain mean residence time. (8+6 = 14 marks)
Module -IV

17.a) Explain Plug flow tubular reactor (PFTR).

b) Calculate reactor length and residence time in a PFTR. (8+6 = 14 marks)

18. a) Compare ideal mixed flow (batch and CFSTBR) and plug flow tubular reactors.

b) Explain recycle reactors. (8+6 = 14 marks)

Module -V

19.Explain in detail the various requirements of a bioreactor. (14 marks)

20.Explain different types of agitators and its effect on mass transfer. (14 marks)

..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1: Bioreactors - Function, description, working, advantages and limitations of stirred tank,
airlift, airlift pressure cycle bioreactor, packed bed, fluidized bed, trickle bed and flocculated cell
bioreactors. Novel Bioreactors - inverse fluid flow units, hollow fibre reactors, centrifugal field
reactors, rotating drum bioreactor, spin filter bioreactor, disposable culture systems and wave
bioreactor.

Module 2: Batch bioreactor, cell death in batch reactor, endogenous metabolism, maintenance,
calculation of batch reaction time from ideal system for enzyme reaction and cell culture, batch
reaction time with enzyme deactivation, calculation of total batch time.

Module 3:Ideal continuous flow stirred tank bioreactor(CFSTBR) - chemostat, substrate conversion
andbiomass productivity, mean residence time, comparison of batch bioreactor and single stage CFSTBR,
washout condition, stability of the chemostat, chemostat with cell recycle, comparison of steady-state
biomass concentration and volumetric biomass productivity for a chemostat with and without cell recycle.

Module 4:Plug flow tubular reactor (PFTR), comparison of ideal mixed flow (batch and CFSTBR) and
plug flow tubular reactors, calculation of reactor length and residence time, recycling in PFTRs, analysis of
recycle reactors.

Module 5: Design aspects of bioreactors, bioreactor geometry, guidelines for bioreactor design,
bioreactor vessels, agitator assembly, mass transfer aspects, rheology and mixing, design, operation
and types of agitators, power requirements for agitation, effects of agitation on mass transfer, oxygen
delivery system - spargers, foam control system, factors affecting antifoam requirements, mass transfer
between phases – factors affecting mass transfer between phases, oxygen uptake in fermenters.

Text Books

1. Pauline M Doran, Bioprocess Engineering Principles, Academic Press, 2013.

2. Douglas S Clark, Harvey W Blanch, Biochemical Engineering, 2 edition, Marcel Dekker,
1997.

Reference Books

1. Klaasvan'tRiet, Johannes Tramper, Basic Bioreactor Design, Marcel Dekker, 1991.

2. Tapobrata Panda, Bioreactors: Analysis and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.
3. Alan H Scragg, Bioreactors in Biotechnology - A Practical Approach, Ellis Horwood, 1991.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Bioreactors (7 hours)
1.1 Bioreactors - Function, description, working, advantages and 2
limitations of stirred tank, airlift, airlift pressure cycle bioreactor
1.2 Packed bed, fluidized bed, trickle bed and flocculated cell 2
bioreactors.
Novel Bioreactors - inverse fluid flow units, hollow fibre reactors,
1.3 centrifugal field reactors, rotating drum bioreactor, spin filter 3
bioreactor, disposable culture systems and wave bioreactor.
2 Batch bioreactor (7 hours)
2.1 Batch bioreactor, cell death in batch reactor, endogenous 4
metabolism, maintenance, calculation of batch reaction time from
ideal system for enzyme reaction and cell culture
2.2 Batch reaction time with enzyme deactivation, calculation of total 3
batch time.
3 Ideal continuous flow stirred tank bioreactor (7 hours)
3.1 Ideal continuous flow stirred tank bioreactor (CFSTBR) - chemostat 1
3.2 Substrate conversion and biomass productivity, mean residence 3
time, comparison of batch bioreactor and single stage CFSTBR,
washout condition, stability of the chemostat, chemostat with cell
recycle
3.3 Comparison of steady-state biomass concentration and volumetric 3
biomass productivity for a chemostat with and without cell recycle.
4 Plug flow tubular reactor (7 hours)
4.1 Plug flow tubular reactor (PFTR), comparison of ideal mixed flow 4
(batch and CFSTBR) and plug flow tubular reactors
4.2 Calculation of reactor length and residence time, recycling in
PFTRs, analysis of recycle reactors. 3
5 Design aspects of bioreactors (7 hours)
5.1 Design aspects of bioreactors, bioreactor geometry, guidelines for
bioreactor design, bioreactor vessels, agitator assembly, mass 4
transfer aspects, rheology and mixing, design, operation and types of
agitators, power requirements for agitation
5.2 Effects of agitation on mass transfer, oxygen delivery system -
spargers, foam control system, factors affecting antifoam 3
requirements, mass transfer between phases – factors affecting mass
transfer between phases, oxygen uptake in fermenters.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POL POLYMER TESTING LAB CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
411 PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The Polymer Testing lab is equipped with mechanical testing of plastic and rubbers. The
thermal and rheological testing of polymers can be performed in the lab.

Prerequisite: Knowledge in rubber and plastic materials and properties

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Expertise in mechanical testing of plastics and rubbers

CO 2 Familiarize machines used in testing of polymer products
CO 3 Perform experiments in cure time measurements and thermal analysis

CO 4 Demonstrate capacity to work in teams and exhibit knowledge of safety, health and
environment by practicing laboratory ethics.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 2
1
CO 3
2
CO 3
3
CO 3
4

Assessment Pattern

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 75 75 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed regarding award
of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15Marks
(b) Implementing the work/Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipments and troubleshooting)
: 25Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions: Practical examination to be conducted immediately after the second series test
covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is a serious process that is to be conducted under the
equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates evaluated
per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the University examination only on
submitting the duly certified record. The external examiner shall endorse the record.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Expertise in mechanical testing of plastics and rubbers

Perform experiments in mechanical testing of rubbers and plastics like tensile strength, tear strength,
modulus, compression strength, hardness, rebound resilience, abrasion resistance measurements etc.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Familiarize machines used in testing of polymer products
Study the effect of filler loading on various properties of a rubber compound
Course Outcome 3(CO3): Perform experiments in cure time measurements and thermal analysis

1. Conduct experiments to determine cure time of rubber

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Demonstrate capacity to work in teams and exhibit knowledge of safety,
health and environment by practicing laboratory ethics.
1. Evaluate the experimentation capacity of students in group.
2. Analyse the interpretation skill of results with group discussion.
3. Report experimental data, results within the stipulated time through team effort.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Part A: Mechanical testing of plastics and rubbers

1. Tensile strength, modulus, elongation at break etc. (Tensile testing machine)

2. Compression strength (Tensile testing machine)
3. Flexural strength (Tensile testing machine)
4. Tear strength (Tensile testing machine)
5. Izod and Charpy impact strength (Impact testers)
6. Falling dart impact strength
7. Shore Hardness (durometer)
8. Abrasion resistance (DIN abrader)
9. Rebound resilience (Tripsometer)
10. Flex resistance (Flexing apparatus)
11. Compression set (compression set apparatus)

Part B: Thermal spectroscopic and rheological testing

Visit to industries/R&D institutes to see the following experiments.

1. Cure time determination of rubber
2. Capillary rheometer
3. Melt Flow Indexer
4. Mechanical Stability Time of latex
5. TGA, DMA, DSC, IR, NMR, SEM, TEM, AFM etc

Reference Books

1. Bhowmick, A. K., & Stephens, H. (Eds.), Handbook of elastomers, CRC Press, 2000
2. Brydson, J. A. (Ed.), Rubbery materials and their compounds, Springer, 1988
3. Bralia, J. G., Handbook of product design for manufacturing: a practical guide to low-cost
production. McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1986
4. Wagner, M. P., & Morton, M., Rubber Technology. Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York,
1987
5. Lee, K. S., & Whelan, A. (Eds.), Developments in Rubber Technology—4. Springer Science &
Business Media, 2012
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POQ413 SEMINAR
PWS 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The course ‘Seminar’ is intended to enable a B.Tech graduate to read, understand, present
and prepare report about an academic document. The learner shall search in the literature including
peer reviewed journals, conference, books, project reports etc., and identify an appropriate
paper/thesis/report in her/his area of interest, in consultation with her/his seminar guide. This course
can help the learner to experience how a presentation can be made about a selected academic
document and also empower her/him to prepare a technical report.

Course Objectives:

 To do literature survey in a selected area ofstudy.

 To understand an academic document from the literate and to give a presentation
about it.
 To prepare a technical report.

Course Outcomes [COs] : After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:

CO1 Identify academic documents from the literature which are related to her/his areas of
interest (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Read and apprehend an academic document from the literature which is related to
CO2
her/ his areas of interest (Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).

Prepare a presentation about an academic document (Cognitive knowledge

CO3
level: Create).

Give a presentation about an academic document (Cognitive knowledge level:

CO4
Apply).

CO5 Prepare a technical report (Cognitive knowledge level: Create).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3

CO2 3 3 2 3 2 1 3

CO3 3 2 3 1 2 3

CO4 3 2 1 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of PO9 Individual and team work

solutions
Conduct investigations of complex PO10
PO4 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

General Guidelines

 The Department shall form an Internal Evaluation Committee (IEC) for the seminar with
academic coordinator for that program as the Chairperson/Chairman and seminar coordinator &
seminar guide as members. During the seminar presentation of a student, all members of IEC
shall be present.

 Formation of IEC and guide allotment shall be completed within a week after the University
examination (or last working day) of the previous semester.

 Guide shall provide required input to their students regarding the selection of topic/ paper.

 Choosing a seminar topic: The topic for a UG seminar should be current and broad based rather
than a very specific research work. It's advisable to choose a topic for the Seminar to be closely
linked to the final year project area. Every member of the project team could choose or be
assigned Seminar topics that covers various aspects linked to the Project area.

 A topic/paper relevant to the discipline shall be selected by the student during the semester break.

 Topic/Paper shall be finalized in the first week of the semester and shall be submitted to the IEC.

 The IEC shall approve the selected topic/paper by the second week of the semester.

 Accurate references from genuine peer reviewed published material to be given in the report and
to be verified.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Evaluation pattern

Total marks: 100, only CIE, minimum required to pass 50

Seminar Guide: 20 marks (Background Knowledge – 10 (The guide shall give deserving marks for a
candidate based on the candidate's background knowledge about the topic selected), Relevance of
the paper/topic selected – 10).

Seminar Coordinator: 20 marks (Seminar Diary – 10 (Each student shall maintain a seminar diary
and the guide shall monitor the progress of the seminar work on a weekly basis and shall approve
the entries in the seminar diary during the weekly meeting with the student), Attendance – 10).

Presentation: 40 marks to be awarded by the IEC (Clarity of presentation – 10, Interactions – 10 (to
be based on the candidate's ability to answer questions during the interactive session of her/his
presentation), Overall participation – 10 (to be given based on her/his involvement during
interactive sessions of presentations by other students), Quality of the slides – 10).

Report: 20 marks to be awarded by the IEC (check for technical content, overall quality, templates
followed, adequacy of references etc.).
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POD415 PROJECT PHASE I
PWS 0 0 6 2

Preamble: The course ‘Project Work’ is mainly intended to evoke the innovation and invention
skills in a student. The course will provide an opportunity to synthesize and apply the knowledge
and analytical skills learned, to be developed as a prototype or simulation. The project extends to
2 semesters and will be evaluated in the 7th and 8th semester separately, based on the achieved
objectives. One third of the project credits shall be completed in 7 th semester and two third in 8th
semester. It is recommended that the projects may be finalized in the thrust areas of the respective
engineering stream or as interdisciplinary projects. Importance should be given to address societal
problems and developing indigenous technologies.

Course Objectives
 To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving.
 To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems.
 To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems.

Course Outcomes [COs] : After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:

Model and solve real world problems by applying knowledge across domains
CO1
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Develop products, processes or technologies for sustainable and socially relevant
CO2
applications (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Function effectively as an individual and as a leader in diverse teams and to
CO3
comprehend and execute designated tasks (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Plan and execute tasks utilizing available resources within timelines, following
CO4
ethical and professional norms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Identify technology/research gaps and propose innovative/creative solutions
CO5
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Organize and communicate technical and scientific findings effectively in written
CO6
and oral forms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1

CO1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2

CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 1

CO4 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 3 1 2 1

CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of PO10 Communication
PO4 complex problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

PROJECT PHASE I
Phase 1 Target

 Literature study/survey of published literature on the assigned topic

 Formulation of objectives
 Formulation of hypothesis/ design/ methodology
 Formulation of work plan and task allocation.
 Block level design documentation
 Seeking project funds from various agencies
 Preliminary Analysis/Modeling/Simulation/Experiment/Design/Feasibility study
 Preparation of Phase 1 report

Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics

Total: 100 marks (Minimum required to pass: 50 marks).

 Project progress evaluation by guide: 30 Marks.

 Interim evaluation by the Evaluation Committee: 20 Marks.
 Final Evaluation by the Evaluation Committee: 30 Marks.
 Project Phase - I Report (By Evaluation Committee): 20 Marks.

(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator
and project supervisor).
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Evaluation by the Guide

The guide/supervisor shall monitor the progress being carried out by the project groups on a
regular basis. In case it is found that progress is unsatisfactory it shall be reported to the
Department Evaluation Committee for necessary action. The presence of each student in the group
and their involvement in all stages of execution of the project shall be ensured by the guide.
Project evaluation by the guide: 30 Marks. This mark shall be awarded to the students in his/her
group by considering the following aspects:

Topic Selection: innovativeness, social relevance etc. (2)

Problem definition: Identification of the social, environmental and ethical issues of the project
problem. (2)
Purpose and need of the project: Detailed and extensive explanation of the purpose and need of
the project. (3)
Project Objectives: All objectives of the proposed work are well defined; Steps to be followed to
solve the defined problem are clearly specified. (2)
Project Scheduling & Distribution of Work among Team members: Detailed and extensive
Scheduling with timelines provided for each phase of project. Work breakdown structure well
defined. (3)

Literature survey: Outstanding investigation in all aspects. (4)

Student’s Diary/ Daily Log: The main purpose of writing daily diary is to cultivate the habit of
documenting and to encourage the students to search for details. It develops the students’ thought
process and reasoning abilities. The students should record in the daily/weekly activity diary the
day to day account of the observations, impressions, information gathered and suggestions given,
if any. It should contain the sketches & drawings related to the observations made by the students.
The daily/weekly activity diary shall be signed after every day/week by the guide. (7)

Individual Contribution: The contribution of each student at various stages. (7)

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Interim Evaluation

No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The team has identified a topic. The
Topic The team has failed to come with a Good evidence of the group thinking The group has brainstormed in an excellent
originally selected topic lacks
identification, relevant topic in time. Needed full and brainstorming on what they are manner on what they were going to build.
substance and needs to be revised.
selection, assistance to find a topic from the going to build. The results of the The topic selected is highly relevant, real
There were suggestions given to
formulation of guide. They do not respond to brainstorming are documented and the world problem and is potentially innovative.
improve the relevance and quality of
objectives and/or suggestions from the evaluation selection of topic is relevant. The The group shows extreme interest in the
the project topic. Only a few relevant
1-a literature survey. 10 committee and/or the guide. No review of related references was good, topic and has conducted extensive literature
references were consulted/ studied and
(Group literature review was conducted. but there is scope of improvement. survey in connection with the topic. The
there is no clear evidence to show the
assessment) The team tried to gather easy Objectives formed with good clarity, team has come up with clear objectives
team's understanding on the same.
information without verifying the however some objectives are not which are feasible.
Some objectives identified, but not
[CO1] authenticity. No objectives formed realistic enough.
clear enough.
yet.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Excellent evidence of enterprising and
extensive project planning. Gantt charts
were used to depict detailed project
Project scheduling. A project
Some evidence of a primary plan. Good evidence of planning done. management/version
Planning, No evidence of planning or
There were some ideas on the Materials were listed and thought out, control tool is used to track the project,
Scheduling and scheduling of the project. The
materials /resources required, but not but the plan wasn't quite complete. which shows familiarity with modern tools.
Resource/ Tasks students did not plan what they
really thought out. The students have Schedules were prepared, but not All materials / resources were identified and
Identification and were going to build or plan on
some idea on the finances required, detailed, and needs improvement. listed and anticipation of procuring time is
allocation. what materials / resources to use in
but they have not formalized a budget Project journal is presented but it is not done. Detailed budgeting is done. All tasks
(Group the project. The students do not
1-b 10 plan. Schedules were not prepared. complete in all respect / detailed. were identified and incorporated in the
assessment) have any idea on the budget
The project journal has no details. There is better task allocation and schedule. A well-kept project journal shows
required. The team has not yet
[CO4] Some evidence on task allocation individual members understand about evidence for all the above, in addition to the
decided on who does what. No
among the team members. their tasks. There is room for interaction with the project guide. Each
project journal kept.
improvement. member knows well about their individual
tasks.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Phase 1 Interim Evaluation Total Marks: 20
 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Final Evaluation
Sl.
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

Formulation of
None of the team members show The students have some knowledge on The students are comfortable with Shows clear evidence of having a well-
Design and/or
any evidence of knowledge about the design procedure to be adopted, and design methods adopted, and they have defined design methodology and adherence to
Methodology
and Progress. the design and the methodology the methodologies. However, the team made some progress as per the plan. it. Excellent knowledge in design procedure
(Group adopted till now/ to be adopted in has not made much progress in the The methodologies are understood to a and its adaptation. Adherence to project plan
1-c assessment) [CO1] 5 the later stages. The team has not design, and yet to catch up with the large extent. is commendable.
progressed from the previous stage project plan.
of evaluation.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

The student show some interest and The student shows very good interest in
Individual and The student does not show any project, and takes up tasks and attempts The student takes a leadership position and
participates in some of the activities.
interest in the project activities, and to complete them. Shows excellent supports the other team members and leads
Teamwork However, the activities are mostly easy
1-d is a passive member. responsibility and team skills. the project. Shows clear evidence of
Leadership and superficial in nature.
10 Supports the other members well. leadership.
(Individual
assessment)
[CO3]

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Preliminary The team has not done any The team has started doing some There is some evidence to show that the Strong evidence for excellent
Analysis/ preliminary work with respect to preliminary work with respect to the team has done good amount of progress in the project. The team has
Modeling / the analysis/modeling/ project. The students however are not preliminary investigation and design/ completed the required
1-e
Simulation/ simulation/experiment/desig prepared enough for the work and they analysis/ modeling etc. preliminary work already and are poised to
Experiment / 10 n/feasibility study/ algorithm need to improve a lot. finish the phase I in an excellent manner.
They can improve further.
Design/ development. They have shown
Feasibility results to prove their progress.
study
[CO1] (0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)
 The project stages are extensively
documented in the report.
Professional documentation tools
The team did not document the
Some documentation is done, but not like LaTeX were used to document the
Documentation work at all. The project
extensive. Interaction with the guide is Most of the project details were progress of the project along with the
and journal/diary is not presented. The
1-f minimal. documented well enough. There is project journal. The
presentation. 5 presentation was shallow in content
Presentation include some points of scope for improvement. The documentation structure is well-
(Individual & and dull in appearance.
interest, but overall quality needs to be presentation is satisfactory. Individual planned and can easily grow into the project
group The individual student has no idea
improved. Individual performance to be performance is good. report.
assessment). on the presentation of his/her part.
improved.
The presentation is done professionally and
[CO6]
with great clarity. The individual’s
performance is
excellent.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Total 30 Phase - I Final Evaluation Marks: 30

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Report Evaluation
Sl.
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

Project report shows evidence of

The prepared report is shallow and Project report follows the
systematic documentation. Report
not as per standard format. It does standard format to some The report is exceptionally good. Neatly organized.
is following the standard format
not follow proper organization. extent. However, its All references cited properly.
1-g and there are only a few issues.
Report [CO6] 20 Contains mostly organization is not very good. Diagrams/Figures, Tables and equations are
Organization of the report is
Unacknowledged content. Lack of Language needs to be properly numbered, and listed and clearly shown.
good. Most of references are
effort in preparation is evident. improved. All references are not Language is excellent and follows standard styles.
cited
cited properly in the
properly.
report.

(0 - 7 Marks) (8 - 12 Marks) (13 - 19 Marks) (20 Marks)

Phase - I Project Report Marks: 20
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

S7 HONOURS
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT495 ADVANCED PRODUCT DESIGN
VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Objective of this course is to explain tools and concepts in advanced design of polymer
products. This course introduces students to sustainable concept of design. The life cycle assessment
of products and patent, trademark procedures are also explained. After this course the student will be
able to explain the concept of product development with sustainable design.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about polymer processing, plastics and elastomers.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand the steps involved in product design project.

CO2 Ensure sustainable design procedure in products.

CO3 Illustrate the significance of Life cycle assessment in product design.

CO4 Understand the international patent filing process.

CO5 Understand the procedure for registration of trademarks.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 4 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 5 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 30
Analyze 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the steps involved in product design project.

1. What is meant by prototyping.

2. Which are the major functions of preliminary draft design?
3. Which are the major factors considered in cost analysis of products.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Ensure sustainable design procedure in products.

1. Explain the significance of material flow in a product.

2. Design and formulate multiple objective design.
3. Understand the sustainability in product design through innovative design features.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate the significance of Life cycle assessment in product design.

1. Understand the significance of life cycle assessment.

2. Design and formulate products with improved life.
3. Compare various materials used in product manufacture.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Understand the international patent filing process.

1. Explain the need for patents?

2. Explain the steps involved in patent filing?
3. Explain the documentation required in patent writing.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand the procedure for registration of trademarks.

1. Explain the law behind trademarks.

2. Explain the stages of fixing a trademark for a company or product.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

3. Understand the legal steps in enforcing copyrights.

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 495 (HONOURS)
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
ADVANCED PRODUCT DESIGN
PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)

1. What is meant by cost estimation of products?

2. Which are the types of prototyping?

3. Define sustainable development.

4. What are the major concepts in automotive design for sustainability?

5. Light weight products find enhanced application in construction? Why?

6. Why durability and LCA are significant in products?

7. What is meant by CAE?

8. What is the major difference between trademark and emblem?

9. Define infringement of patents.

10. What is meant by inventory analysis? How can it be useful?

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. a) Explain modern tools used in product design.

b) Explain how IoT helps in product design. (9+5 = 14)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
OR

12. a) Explain prototype verification mechanism and it improvement.

b) Explain the role of softwares in product design. (8+6 = 14)

Module 2
13.a) Explain the major aspects in design based on green technologies.

b) What are the specialities of smart data systems in selection of raw materials.(8+6 = 14)

OR

14. a) Explain the constructional features of products for long term applications.

b) Explain the functional design of plastic products with design features.

. (8+6 = 14)

Module 3
15. a) Describe the significance and methods of life time design.

b) Explain the peculiarity of carbon footprinting. (8+6 = 14)

OR

16.a) Compare and contrast between various methods of inventory management.

b) Recyclability is significant parameter in product design. Explain. (8+6 = 14)

Module 4
17. Elaborate on the legal procedure for the procurement and transfer of patents in India.

OR

18. Explain in detail about intellectual property rights and various types of applications for obtaining
patents.

Module 5
19. Explain the major points on the trademarks act of 1999 and its amended act of 2010
.

OR

20. Explain in detail about trade mark application and trade mark registry in India.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Estimation of Manufacturing cost-reducing the component costs and assembly costs , Minimize
system complexity , Prototype basics , Principles of prototyping , Planning for prototypes , Economic
Analysis , Understanding and representing tasks-baseline project planning , accelerating the project,
project execution.

Module 2
Infrastructure for managing flows of materials, energy and activities; sustainable value creation
approaches for all stakeholders, environmental design characteristics; design changes & continual
improvement; inclusive sustainable design principles, crowd sourcing, multiple-objective designs;
infrastructures that support system thinking; knowledge management for sustainable design, learning
systems and experimentation; smart data systems, understanding variation.

Module 3
Sustainable Engineering Design Tools , Life cycle analysis, carbon footprinting. Life cycle
assessment (LCA), Types of LCA’s: baseline, comparative, streamlined. LCA inventory analysis:
process or input‐output. Hybrid inventory analysis. Sustainable Product Design. Whole systems
design. Light weighting and materials reduction. Designing for a lifetime. Design for durability,
repair and upgrade, disassembly and recycling. Energy use in design. Reducing energy losses in
design.

Module 4
Purpose of a Patent ,Recognised conditions for Patentability ,Originality of Inventions , Novelty ,
Non-obviousness , Utility. Exclusive rights conferred by a Patent , National Protection , International
Protection. , Patent Filing Procedure and Prosecution , Infringement of Patents ,Acquisition and
Transfer of Patent Rights.

Module 5
Copyright subsists, Meaning of word ‘Original’, Fair dealing ,Rights of Owners of Copy Rights ,
Procedures , Authorities and Institutions under the Copy Right Act – Infringement and remedies.
Trademarks (TM) , Different types of Trade marks ,Service Mark ,Classification Mark , Collective
Mark, Importance of TM , Difference between registered TM and TM in use , Basic requirements for
the registration of TM ,Procedure for registration ,Rights of registered TM owners , Infringement and
remedies.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books:

1.Keoleian, Gregory A., and Dan Menerey. "Sustainable development by design: review of life cycle
design and related approaches." Air & Waste 44, no. 5 (1994).

2. Lyle, John Tillman. Regenerative design for sustainable development. John Wiley & Sons, 1996.

Reference Books:
1.Spence, Robin, and Helen Mulligan. "Sustainable development and the construction
industry." Habitat international 19, no. 3 (1995)

2. Yang, Wen Guang, Haibao Lu, Wei Min Huang, Hang Jerry Qi, Xue Lian Wu, and Ke Yuan Sun.
"Advanced shape memory technology to reshape product design, manufacturing and
recycling." Polymers 6, no. 8 (2014)

3. Silva, Dulce CM, and Nuno MC Oliveira. "Model based design of polymer product." In Computer
Aided Chemical Engineering, vol. 24, pp. 455-460. Elsevier, 2007.

4. Arteiro, A., C. Furtado, G. Catalanotti, P. Linde, and P. P. Camanho. "Thin-ply polymer composite
materials: a review." Composites Part A: Applied Science and Manufacturing 132 (2020).
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 9
Estimation of Manufacturing cost-reducing the component costs and
1.1 assembly costs. 2

Minimize system complexity, Prototype basics, Principles of

1.2 prototyping. 2

Planning for prototypes, Economic Analysis, Understanding and

1.3 representing tasks-baseline project planning. 3

Accelerating the project, project execution.

1.4 2

2 Module II 8
Infrastructure for managing flows of materials, energy and activities;
2.1 sustainable value creation approaches for all stakeholders. 3

Environmental design characteristics; design changes & continual

2.2 improvement; inclusive sustainable design principles, crowd sourcing, 3
multiple-objective designs; infrastructures that support system thinking.

Knowledge management for sustainable design, learning systems and

2.3 experimentation; smart data systems, understanding variation. 2

3 Module III 10
Sustainable Engineering Design Tools, Life cycle analysis, carbon
3.1 footprinting. Life cycle assessment (LCA), 3

Types of LCA’s: baseline, comparative, streamlined. LCA inventory

3.2 analysis: process or input‐output. 3

Hybrid inventory analysis. Sustainable Product Design. Whole systems

3.3 design. Light weighting and materials reduction. Designing for a 2
lifetime.

Design for durability, repair and upgrade, disassmbly and recycling.

3.4 Energy use in design. Reducing energy losses in design. 2

4 Module IV 9
Purpose of a Patent, Recognised conditions for Patentability, Originality
4.1 of Inventions , Novelty , Non-obviousness , Utility. 3

Exclusive rights conferred by a Patent, National Protection, International

4.2 Protection. 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Patent Filing Procedure and Prosecution, Infringement of Patents

4.3 ,Acquisition and Transfer of Patent Rights. 3

5 Module V 9
Copyright subsists, Meaning of word ‘Original’, Fair dealing, Rights of
5.1 Owners of Copy Rights, Procedures, Authorities and Institutions under 3
the Copy Right Act – Infringement and remedies.

Trademarks (TM) , Different types of Trademarks ,Service Mark

5.2 ,Classification Mark , Collective Mark, Importance of TM , Difference 3
between registered TM and TM in use.
Basic requirements for the registration of TM, Procedure for registration,
5.3 3
Rights of registered TM owners, Infringement and remedies.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

ADVANCED POLYMER CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT497
ELECTRONICS VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Objective of this course is to explain the advances in electronic applications of polymers.
This course introduces students to various applications of polymer materials and systems in
transistors and sensors.
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about polymer materials.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand electronic properties of conjugated polymers.

CO2 Illustrate the characteristics of polymer OLEDs and FETs.

CO3 Correlate the properties and design of SCLT and SCLC.

CO4 Explain the industrial application and development of biosensors and devices

CO5 Understand various electronic coating process with polymer materials.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 4 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 5 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 50
Analyze
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand electronic properties of conjugated polymers.

1. What is the structural peculiarity of conjugated polymers?

2. What is meant by optical spectra.
3. Which are the major characters of crystalline conjugated polymers?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Illustrate the characteristics of polymer OLEDs and FETs .

1. Understand the design of OLED.

2. Design and formulate the field effect transistor.
3. Understand charge support theory in polymer materials.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Correlate the properties and design of SCLT and SCLC.

1. Elaborate design of organic vertical transistors.

2. Explain the operational principles of organic solid state vacuum tubes?
3. Explain the specific features of polymer SCLTs?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain the industrial application and development of biosensors and
devices.

1. Understand a biosensor parts?

2. Explain the equipment and method of functioning of biosensors?
3. Explain the working of pressure biosensors?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand various electronic coating process with polymer materials.

1. Explain various types of electronic coating materials.

2. Explain the application methods of device coatings.
3. Illustrate various coating parameters affecting electronic devices.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT497 (Honours)
Max Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
ADVANCED POLYMER ELECTRONICS
PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)

1. What is meant by ionic impurities?

2. Which are the properties significant for printed polymer FETs?

3. Define polaron theory.

4. What are the major types of simulations?

5. Which are the major parameters that control phosphorescence? Why?

6. Why photocurrent analysis and quantum efficiency become critical in SCLTs?

7. What is meant by planar diodes?

8. What is the major difference between doping and illumination effect?

9. Define optimum resin to hardner ratio in polymer coatings for devices.

10. What is meant by solvent soluble coating? How can it be used in device fabrication?

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1

11. a) With a neat sketch explain conjugation and pie energy band.

b) Explain electroluminescence with respect to conjugated structure. (9+5 = 14)

OR

12. a) Explain polymer materials employed in organic light emitting diodes with its features.

b) Explain the fabrication and device design techniques of OLED. (8+6 = 14)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module 2

13.a) Explain the major components and design of FET.

b) What are the specialities of polymer FETs. (8+6 = 14)

OR

14. a) Explain the various types of polymer FETs.

b) Explain the significance of ambipolar FETs.

. (8+6 = 14)

Module 3
15. a) Describe the significance and process of photo multiplication effect.

b) Explain the photocurrent analysis of photo transistors. (8+6 = 14)

OR

16.a) Compare and contrast between various types of solid-state vacuum tubes.

b) Explain the performance of SCLC and its two-dimensional simulations. (8+6 = 14)

Module 4

17. a) Describe the significance and methods of designing pressure sensors.

b) Explain the theory of biosensors. (8+6 = 14)

OR

18. a) Describe the significance and methods of manufacturing Light emitting transistors.

b) Give details of polymers used in LETs. (8+6 = 14)

Module 5

19.Explain in detail about thin film coatings and its applications in electronics.

OR

20. Explain in detail about various tests used to assess moisture and purity of polymer coatings in
devices.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1
Semiconducting conjugated polymers, polaron, exciton, optical spectra, electroluminescence,
photoconductivity, crystalline conjugated polymers, solution processed organic light emitting diodes,
blue and white phosphorescence, green phosphorescence, red phosphorescence.

Module 2
Polymer field effect transistor, metal insulator semiconductor capacitor,contact resistance, bias stress,
charge transport theory in polymer FETS, high performance n type conjugated polymers, ambipolar
polymer field effect transistors, all printed polymer field effect transistors .

Module 3
Polymer vertical transistors: solid state vacuum tubes operational principles, space charge limited
current and SCLC mobility, two-dimensional simulation, channel potential profile, transfer and
output characteristics, space charge limited transistor, grid field shielding in polymer SCLTs, doping
and illumination effect, polymer vertical photo transistor.
Module 4
Polymer in light emitting transistors, pressure sensors, pressure sensor based on organic field effect
transistors, polymer proximity sensors, electrochemical sensors, biosensors.

Module 5
Plastic thin film coatings, hybrid microcircuits, particle immobilizing coatings, parylene coatings,
particle getters, application methods, casting, dipping, dropping, spinning, fluidised bed coating,
parameters affecting electronic devises, stresses and stress relief, purity, moisture resistance,
corrosivity, adhesion.

Text Books:

1. Geoghegan, Mark, and Georges Hadziioannou. Polymer electronics. Vol. 22. OUP Oxford,
2013.Cebon, David. Handbook of vehicle-road interaction. 1999.
2. Licari, James J., and Laura A. Hughes. Handbook of polymer coatings for electronics:
chemistry, technology and applications. William Andrew, 1990.

Reference Books:
1. Goosey, Martin. "Polymer Electronics." Circuit World (2014)..

2. Schoch, K. F. "Conductive adhesives for electronics packaging [Book Review]." IEEE Electrical
Insulation Magazine 19, no. 2 (2003).

3. Gamota, Daniel R., Paul Brazis, Krishna Kalyanasundaram, and Jie Zhang, eds. Printed organic
and molecular electronics. Springer Science & Business Media, 2013..
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 10
1.1 Semiconducting conjugated polymers, polaron, exciton, optical spectra. 2

Electroluminescence, photoconductivity, crystalline conjugated

1.2 2
polymers.
1.3 Solution processed organic light emitting diodes. 3
Blue and white phosphorescence, green phosphorescence, red
1.4 3
phosphorescence.
2 Module II 9

2.1 Polymer field effect transistor, metal insulator semiconductor capacitor. 3

Contact resistance, bias stress, charge transport theory in polymer FETS,

2.2 3
high performance n type conjugated polymers.
Ambipolar polymer field effect transistors, all printed polymer field
2.3 3
effect transistors.
3 Module III 9
3.1
Polymer vertical transistors: solid state vacuum tubes operational 2
principles, space charge limited current and SCLC mobility,
3.2 Two-dimensional simulation, channel potential profile, transfer and 3
output characteristics.
Space charge limited transistor, grid field shielding in polymer SCLTs,
3.3 doping and illumination effect, polymer vertical photo transistor. 2

Doping and illumination effect, polymer vertical photo transistor.

3.4 2

4 Module IV 9
4.1 Polymer in light emitting transistors, pressure sensors. 3

4.2 Pressure sensor based on organic field effect transistors. 3

4.3 Polymer proximity sensors, electrochemical sensors, biosensors. 3

5 Module V 8

5.1 Plastic thin film coatings, hybrid microcircuits. 2

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Particle immobilizing coatings, parylene coatings, particle getters,
5.2 application methods, casting, dipping, dropping, spinning. 3

Fluidised bed coating, parameters affecting electronic devises, stresses

5.3 and stress relief, purity, moisture resistance, corrosivity, adhesion. 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

TECHNOLOGY OF PRINTING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT499
INKS PEC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: Objective of this course is to explain the Industrial manufacturing of printing inks with its
various types of applications. This course introduces students to machineries used to manufacture
various types of inks. The machinery used ink processing, environmental aspects regarding
composition of inks are also included. After this course the student will be able to explain the
manufacturing steps of printing inks with each specialisation.
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about paints.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand the nature of printing Inks.

CO2 Differentiate the composition of different inks.

CO3 Understand the formulation of inks of different applications.

CO4 Explore the techniques for manufacture of inks.

CO5 Evaluate inks based on environmental and standard tests aspects.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 4 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 5 3 … … … … … 2 … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 20 20 40
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 10 10 20
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the nature of printing Inks.

1. What is meant by dying of ink.

2. Which are the major drying methods used in printing inks?
3. What is meant by ink resistance properties?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Differentiate the composition of different inks.

1. Understand the significance of vegetable oils in ink drying.

2. Design and formulate the solvents and resins in printing ink.
3. Compare types of deforming agents in printing inks.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Understand the formulation of inks of different applications.

1. Formulation of lithographic inks with its physical properties.

2. Differentiate types of screen ink formulation for textile and plastic substrate?
3. Explain the specific functions of radiation curable systems?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explore the techniques for manufacture of inks.

1.Explain the types of milling equipments in manufacture of inks.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

2.Explain the precautions taken in storage of UV inks.

3. Explain the steps involved in the preparation of newspaper ink.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Evaluate inks based on environmental and standard tests aspects.

1. Explain the test processes for measurement of ink drying.

2. Compare tack measurement methods used for inks.
3. Explain the cautious approach in handling VOC in inks?
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT499
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
TECHNOLOGY OF PRINTING INKS
PART – A
Answer All the Questions(10 x 3 = 30)

1. What is meant by fluorescent pigment?

2. Which are the properties significant for dyestuffs?

3. What is the role of chelating agents used in inks.

4. What are the major properties to be considered for gravure inks?

5. Which are the major components of flexographic inks? Why?

6. Why rheology plays a critical role in the properties of printing inks?

7. What is meant by radio frequency drying?

8. What is the major difference between Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids?

9. Define steps in metal decorating.

10. What is meant by fluidised bed coating? How can it be utilised in metal printing?

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. a) With a neat sketch explain soft lithographic process.

b) Explain substrate selection and its treatment for flexographic process. (9+5 = 14)

OR
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

12. a) Explain various parameters used to characterise inks.

b) Explain the methods used to evaluate the adhesive properties of

inks based on ageing. (8+6 = 14)

Module 2

13.a) Explain the major differences in pigment type with its characteristics.

b) What are the specialities of disperse dyes. (8+6 = 14)

OR

14. a) Explain the types of solvents used in inks and its applications.

b) Explain the major types of antioxidants used and its mode of action.

. (8+6 = 14)

Module 3

15. a) Describe the formulating principles of screen inks.

b) Explain the synthesis of special purpose varnishes. (8+6 = 14)

OR

16.a) Compare and contrast between various speciality inks used in electronics industry.

b) Give details of radiation curing equipment and its parts. (8+6 = 14)

Module 4

17. Elaborate on the manufacture of newspaper inks.

OR

18. Explain in detail about milling equipments used in printing industries.

Module 5

19. Explain the major tests done in printing inks. Explain drying tests used in UV assisted printing.
(9+5 = 14)

OR

20. Explain in detail about major test standards followed in evaluating inks. Give details of
environmental issues associated with ink handling in printing industries

(9+5 = 14)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Nature of printing Inks, drying characteristics, adhesive nature, resistance properties, printing
processes, letterpress, lithographic, gravure, screen printing, non-impact printing, substrate selection,
print recognition.

Module 2
Raw materials for printing Inks, pigments, dyestuffs, Oils, resins, solvents, plasticisers,
driers,chelating agents, antioxidants, deodrants and reodrants, deforming agents, laking agents.

Module 3
Formulating principles of letterpress inks, lithographic inks, gravure inks, flexographic inks, screen
inks,radiation curable systems, inks for special purposes.

Module 4
Manufacture of inks and varnishes, processes, mixing equipment, milling equipment, handling,
storage and manufacture of UV inks, manufacture of newspaper inks, handling and storage of inks,
modern production trends.

Module 5
Rheology of printing inks, viscosity, powerlaw, Newtonian and Non Newtonian fluids, tack and tack
measurements, dry paint performance tests, analysis of printing inks, safety measures in handling
printing chemicals, mechanical and operational aspects, international standards and national standards
in ink manufacturing area, environmental aspects.

Text Books:

3. Thompson, Robert. Printing materials: science and technology. Pira International, 2004.
4. Magdassi, Shlomo, ed. The chemistry of inkjet inks. World scientific, 2009.

Reference Books:
1. Magdassi, Shlomo, and Alexander Kamyshny, eds. Nanomaterials for 2D and 3D Printing. John
Wiley & Sons, 2017.

2. Izdebska-Podsiadły, Joanna, and Sabu Thomas, eds. Printing on polymers: fundamentals and
applications. William Andrew, 2015..

3. Teng, Wan D., Mohan J. Edirisinghe, and Julian RG Evans. "Optimization of dispersion and
viscosity of a ceramic jet printing ink." Journal of the American Ceramic Society 80, no. 2 (1997).
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 8
1.1 Nature of printing Inks, drying characteristics. 2

1.2 Adhesive nature, reistance properties. 2

1.3 Printing processes, letterpress, lithographic, gravure. 2

Screen printing, non-impact printing, substrate selection, print

1.4 2
recognition.
2 Module II 9

2.1 Raw materials for printing Inks, pigments. 3

Dyestuffs, Oils, resins, solvents, plasticisers, driers.

2.2 3

Chelating agents, antioxidants, deodrants and reodrants, deforming

2.3 3
agents, laking agents.
3 Module III 10
3.1 Formulating principles of letterpress inks. 2

3.2 Formulating principles of lithographic inks, gravure inks. 3

3.3 Formulating principles of flexographic inks, screen inks. 2

Formulating principles of radiation curable systems, inks for special
3.4 3
purposes.
4 Module IV 9
4.1 Manufacture of inks and varnishes, processes. 3

4.2 Mixing equipment, milling equipment, handling. 3

Storage and manufacture of UV inks, manufacture of newspaper inks,

4.3 handling and storage of inks, modern production trends. 3

5 Module V 9
Rheology of printing inks, viscosity, power law, Newtonian and Non
5.1 Newtonian fluids, tack and tack measurements. 3

Dry paint performance tests, analysis of printing inks, safety measures in

5.2 handling printing chemicals, mechanical and operational aspects. 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
International standards and national standards in ink manufacturing area,
5.3 environmental aspects. 3
POLYMER ENGINEERING
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

S8 POLYMER ENGINEERING
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POLYMER PRODUCTS - CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT402
DESIGN AND TESTING PCC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Objective of this course is to explain various aspects associated with polymer products
design. This course introduces students to steps involved in polymer product design with the basic rules
and formulations. The formulation of typical rubber products, its processing, and curing process is a
part of the syllabus. After this course the student will be able to design plastic products with the
specifications as per the testing standards.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about polymer materials and methods of processing.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO1 Outline methods of polymer product design.

CO2 Apply methodology of design principles in various polymer products.

Relate various theoretical and practical aspects of polymer properties and product
CO3 requirements.

CO4 Learn methods for qualitative and quantitative testing of polymer products.

Understand various raw material, in process and product tests performed in various polymer
CO5
products.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 1 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 1 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 2 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 4 3 2 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 5 3 2 … … … … … … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 50
Analyze
Evaluate
Create 10 10 20

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum
2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Outline methods of polymer product design.

1. What is meant functional design.
2. Which are the long-term factors that affect polymer products?
3. What is meant by prototyping?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Apply methodology of design principles in various polymer products.

1. Explain fundamentals of mould design for ease of ejection.

2. Compare thermoplastics for its thermal expansion.
3. Write the advantages of fluropolymers in products.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Relate various theoretical and practical aspects of polymer properties and
product requirements.

1. Write the special features in design of plastic gears.

2. Explain the effect of coefficient of friction in bearing design?
3. Explain the effect of compounding in manufacture of PVC pipes?
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Learn methods for qualitative and quantitative testing of polymer products.
1. Explain the tests methods used for plastic films?
2. Explain the manufacturing stages of conveyor belts.
3. Give a note on the tests to evaluate properties of polyurethane foams.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand various raw material, in process and product tests performed
in various polymer products.

1. Explain various types of tests performed for rubber seals.

2. Explain the test processes of plastic pipes.
3. Compare test methods for evaluating dynamic properties of rubber products.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT402
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
POLYMER PRODUCTS - DESIGN AND TESTING
PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)

1. Sharp corners in plastic products shall be avoided. Why?

2. Give details of design features used to improve stiffness of plastic products?

3. Define internal and external undercuts.

4. What is meant by PV rating. What is its significance?

5. Which are the major rubbers used in oil seal manufacture? Why?

6. Why shrinkage is critical in plastic gears?

7. What is meant by SDR in pipes?

8. What is the major difference between dry and wet bearings?

9. Define water hammer.

10. What is meant by transmiscibility? How can it be reduced?

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. a) Explain the role of filler in polymer products with suitable examples.

b) Explain steps involved in product design with polymers. (9+5 = 14)

OR

12. a) Explain the long-term properties significant in polymer product design with equations.

b) Write note on (a) Creep curves (b) S-N curves in dynamic loading (8+6 = 14)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module 2

13.a) Explain the major differences in the manufacture of various gates used in Injection moulding.

b) What are the specialities of ejection mechanisms used in injection moulding. (8+6 = 14)

OR

14. a) Explain the constructional features of split moulds.

b) Explain the role of draft angle and cold slug well in moulding process.

. (8+6 = 14)

Module 3

15. a) Describe the major design features of wet bearings.

b) Explain the major design feature of plastic water tanks. (8+6 = 14)

OR

16.a) Compare and contrast between metallic and plastic gears.

b) Evaluate the methods used in testing of plastic foams. (8+6 = 14)

Module 4

17. Elaborate on the selection process of compounding ingredient for heat resistant flexible hoses
with justification.

OR

18. Explain in detail about yre tread formulation and justify the selection.

Module 5

19. a) Explain the major destructive tests done on tyres and tubes.

b) Compare processing of EPDM with Natural rubber.

OR

20. Explain in detail about design of rubber belting for power transmission.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Design fundamentals: Introduction, design principles, steps in product design, functional design,
aesthetic design, effect of fillers on properties and performance. Long term property analysis, creep,
stress relaxation, stress in products- tension, compression and shear, effect of cyclic loading, structural
design of products under static and dynamic loads.

Module 2
Design features of products, inside and outside corners, wall thickness, ribs, tapers, draft angles, weld lines,
gate size and location, tolerances, moulded-in-inserts, plastic threads, blind holes, undercuts, hinges,
functional surfaces and lettering, snap fitting, welding
Module 3
Design principles of plastic products- gears, plastic bearings, piping, films, sheets, bottles, water tanks,
wires and cables, Standard test methods of plastic products- pipe, film, sheet, PU foam, plastic optical goods,
food packing containers.

Module 4
Design fundamentals: rubber product design features, compound design principles of natural Rubber,
Styrene Butadiene Rubber, Butadiene Rubber, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Rubber, Chloroprene Rubber,
Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer, Isobutylene Isoprene Rubber.

Module 5
Design features and testing of Rubber Products: Rubber bearings, bridge bearings, rubber seals, static
and dynamic seals, hoses, couplings, sports goods. Belting, conveyer belt, fan and V-belt, cables,
rubber- to- metal components, footwear.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books:

1. Miller, E. (Ed.), Plastics products design Handbook: materials and components (Vol. 8).
Marcel Dekker, 1981
2. Levy, S., & DuBois, J. H., Plastics product design engineering handbook , Springer, Boston,
MA., 1984
3. Dym, J. B., Product design with plastics: A practical manual. Industrial Press Inc., 1983.
4. Freakley, P. K., & Payne, A. R., Theory and practice of engineering with rubber. Applied Science
Publishers, 1978
5. Birkley, A. W., Rubbery materials and their compounds, Elsevier Applied Science, London, 1989

Reference Books:

1. Belofsky, H., Plastics: product design and process engineering, Hanser, 1995
2. Shah, V. Handbook of plastics testing technology, John Wiely & Sons, 1998
3. P. F. Mastro, Plastics Product Design, John Wiley & Sons, 2016
4. M.T.MacLean-Blevins, Designing successful products with plastics: fundamentals of plastic
part design, Elsevier, 2017
5. P. A. Tres, Designing plastic parts for assembly, Carl Hanser Verlag GmbH & Co., 2019.
6. Bhowmick, A. K. (Ed.), Rubber products manufacturing technology. CRC Press, 1994
7. C.W. de Silva, Vibration Damping, Control, and Design, CRC Press, 2007
8. A. K. Chitale, R. C. Gupta, Product design and manufacturing, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2013
9. J. G. Sommer, Engineered Rubber Products, Hanser, 2009
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 8
Design fundamentals: Introduction, design principles, steps in product
1.1 design 2

Functional design, aesthetic design, effect of fillers on properties and

1.2 performance. 2

Long term property analysis, creep, stress relaxation, stress in products-

1.3 tension, compression and shear 2

Effect of cyclic loading, structural design of products under static and

1.4 2
dynamic loads.
2 Module II 7
Design features for plastics products, inside and outside corners, wall
2.1 3
thickness
2.2 Ribs, tapers, draft angles, weld lines, gate size and location, tolerances, 2
Moulded-in-inserts, plastic threads, blind holes, undercuts, hinges,
2.3 2
functional surfaces and lettering, snap fitting, welding
3 Module III 8
3.1 Design principles of plastic products- gears, plastic bearings 2

Design principles of piping, films, sheets, bottles, water tanks, wires and
cables.
3.2 2

3.3 Standard test methods of plastic products- pipe, film, sheets 2

Standard test methods of PU foam, plastic optical goods, food packing
3.4 2
containers.

4 Module IV 6
Design fundamentals: rubber product design features, compound design
4.1 principles of natural Rubber, Styrene Butadiene Rubber, 2

4.2 Design fundamentals: Butadiene Rubber, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Rubber 2

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Design fundamentals: Chloroprene Rubber, Ethylene Propylene Diene

4.3 Monomer, Isobutylene Isoprene Rubber. 2

5 Module V 6
Design features and testing of Rubber Products: Rubber bearings, bridge
5.1 bearings, rubber seals, static and dynamic seals. 2

Design features and testing of Rubber Products: hoses, couplings, sports

5.2 goods. Belting, conveyer belt, fan and V-belt. 2

Design features and testing of Rubber Products: cables, rubber- to- metal
5.3 components, footwear. 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT414 FIBRE TECHNOLOGY CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of introduction and
fibres used in polymer industry. Significant topics from methodology of detailed study of fibre
properties, classification of fibres and textile production from fibres are included in the remaining modules.
After the completion of this course, students should achieve sufficient knowledge about the basics of
fibre technology.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe fundamentals of fibre science.

CO 2 Explain the manufacturing, testing and applications of fibres.
CO 3 Illustrate classification of fibres.
CO 4 Explain different spinning operations
CO 5 Explain the various operations of making fabric.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe fundamentals of fibre science.

1. Describe the principle of fibre dimensions, units of measurements

2. Explain the use of fibres in the rubber and plastic industry.

3. Explain fibre manufacturing industries in India,

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Explain the manufacturing, testing and applications of fibres.
1. Explain the fibres used in polymer industry

2. Describe types and sources, chemical composition of fibres

3.Describe on crystallinity and orientation

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate classification of fibres.

1. Detailed study of fibre properties such as mechanical properties,

2.Explain relation between fibre properties and structure

3. Compare uses of vegetable fibres.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain different spinning operations.

1. Describe physical structure of fibre and chemical composition

2.Describe properties and testing.

3. Evaluate finishing and dyeing.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the various operations of making fabric.

1.Explain yarn and textile production from fibres.

2. Definition of various textile terms.

3.Explain the yarn properties.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT414 FIBRE TECHNOLOGY

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define fibre

2. Describe tex and denier

3. Describe the chemical composition of fibres

4. What are the sources of fibres?

5. Compare moisture absorption and moisture regain

6. Describe the uses of animal and mineral fibres.

7. Explain the dyeing process

8. Describe finishing process

9. Describe abrasion of fibres

10. Explain twist

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe uses of fibres in the rubber and plastic industry (14M)

Or

12 b) fibre manufacturing industries in India, present status and future (14M)

prospects
Module II
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

13 a) Describe the methods of investigating fibre structure (14M)

Or

14 a) Describe the different types of fibres used in polymer industry (6M)

b) Describe the crystallinity and orientation in fibres (8M)
Module -III

15 a) Describe the mechanical properties of fibres (14M)

Or

16 a) Explain the optical properties and fibre friction of fibres (14M)

Module -IV

17 a) Explain the structure of fibre forming polymers, production properties (14M)

of viscose rayon,
Or

18 a) Describe the production and properties nylon 66 (9M)

b) Explain the metallic fibres (5M)

Module -V

19 a) Describe different types of knit stiches (7M)

b) Explain drawing of fibres (7M)
Or
20 a) Describe friction and appearance ((5M)
b) Describes textile production from fibres (9M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1

Introduction, definition of fibre, fibre dimensions, units of measurements, tex, denier, conversion from
one system to another, use of fibres in the rubber and plastic industry, polymer products containing
fibres, fibre manufacturing industries in India, present status and future prospects
Module 2

Fibres used in polymer industry- types and sources, chemical composition, properties, concept of order
in fibres and polymers, crystallinity and orientation, orientation and fibre properties, methods of
investigating fibre structure. use of animal and mineral fibres.
Module 3

Detailed study of fibre properties such as mechanical properties, electrical properties, moisture
absorption, moisture regain optical properties and fibre friction, relation between fibre properties and
structure, uses of vegetable fibres such as cotton, flax, linen, coir, sisal, pineapple, jute, silk, banana,
Module 4

Manmade fibres, physical structure of fibre forming polymers, production, chemical composition,
properties and testing of viscose rayon, cellulose acetate, nylon 66 and nylon 6, polyester, acrylic, poly
vinyl alcohol, spandex, carbon fibre, metallic fibres, saran, Kevlar, Nomex, steel wire, finishing and
dyeing.
Module 5

Yarn and textile production from fibres, definition of various textile terms, fibre spinning, drawing of
fibres, felting, knitting, lacing, bonding and weaving, properties of yarns, yarn numbering system, brief
idea about spinning of cotton yarns and blends .Yarn properties such as count appearance, evenness,
strength, abrasion, fatigue, friction, twist, dynamic mechanical properties and their importance, fabrics,
brief idea about the construction, cover factor, geometry of weaves, fabric properties such as strength,
abrasion resistance, air permeability, bursting strength, thermal properties
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books

1 Moncrief,” Man Made Fibres

2 Bernard P Corbman Textiles Fibre to Fabric VI Edn Mc Graw-hill1983

References:

1. Booths, “Textile Testing”, Butterworths, Newness, U.K. 1980

2. Wake and D.B. Wooton, Textile reinforcement of Elastomers,” Applied Sciences”

1982

3. Evans,” House technology” Applied Science Publishes 1979

4. F.W. Billmeyer, “Text Book of Polymer Science”, Wiley – Inter science, 1971

5. Moncrief,” Man Made Fibers

6. Sadov et al, “Chemical technology of fibers and Material” Mir Publishers, Moscow,1978
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Definition of fibre (6 hours)
1.1 Introduction, definition of fibre, fibre dimensions, units of 2
measurements, tex, denier, conversion from one system to another,

1.2 use of fibres in the rubber and plastic industry, polymer products 2
containing fibres,
1.3 fibre manufacturing industries in India, present status and future 2
prospects

2 Crystallinity (6 hours)
2.1 Fibres used in polymer industry- types and sources, chemical 2
composition, properties,

2.2 concept of order in fibres and polymers, crystallinity and 2

orientation, orientation and fibre properties
2.3 methods of investigating fibre structure. use of animal and mineral 2
fibres
3 Fibre properties (7 hours)
3.1 Detailed study of fibre properties such as mechanical properties, 2
electrical properties, moisture absorption, ,
3.2 optical properties and fibre friction, relation between fibre 3
properties and structure
3.3 uses of vegetable fibres such as cotton, flax, linen, coir, sisal, 2
pineapple, jute, silk, banana

4 Manmade fibres (8 hours)

4.1 Manmade fibres, physical structure of fibre forming polymers, 3
production, chemical composition, properties and testing of viscose
rayon, cellulose acetate, nylon 66 and nylon 6,
4.2 polyester, acrylic, poly vinyl alcohol, 2
4.3 spandex, carbon fibre, metallic fibres, saran, Kevlar, Nomex, steel 3
wire, finishing and dyeing

5 Textile yarn (8 hours)

5.1 Yarn and textile production from fibres, definition of various textile 3
terms, fibre spinning, drawing of fibres, felting, knitting, lacing,
bonding and weaving, properties of yarns

5.2 yarn numbering system, brief idea about spinning of cotton yarns 3
and blends. Yarn properties such as count appearance, evenness,
strength, abrasion, fatigue, friction, twist, dynamic mechanical
properties and their importance, fabrics, brief idea about the
construction,

5.3 cover factor, geometry of weaves, fabric properties such as strength, 2

abrasion resistance, air permeability, bursting strength, thermal
properties
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT424 PETROLEUM REFINERY CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PEC 2 1 0 3
ENGINEERING

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of fundamentals of
origin, exploration and production. Significant topics from methodology of various treatment
techniques, production, and catalyst and operating parameters are included in the remaining modules.
After the completion of this course, students should achieve sufficient knowledge about the basics of
petroleum refinery.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain exploration and mining of petroleum

CO 2 Explain the types of crudes and distillation principles.
CO 3 Illustrate types and functions of secondary processing.
CO 4 Explain various treatment techniques to improve performance of petroleum
CO 5 Explain the unit processes in petroleum refining.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain exploration and mining of petroleum

1. Describe the types of crudes

2. Explain the testing of petroleum products.

3. Heat balance and material balance in distillation

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the types of crudes and distillation principles.

1. Explain the types and functions of secondary processing

2. Describe cracking of gaseous and liquid feed stocks

3. Comment on Lube oil and wax processing.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate types and functions of secondary processing.

1. Give an account of clay contacting, principles operating parameters.

2.Explain various treatment techniques.

3.Comment on polymerisation models and techniques

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain various treatment techniques to improve performance of

petroleum

1. Understand production of petroleum.

2. Understand the production of polyacrylonitrile, nylon, polycarbonates,

3. Evaluate Sulphonation and isomerization dehydrogenation process.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the unit processes in petroleum refining.

1.Explain Fluid catalytic feed stocks and product yields and qualities.

2. Comment on various catalyst and operating parameters.

3.Explain the synthesis of gas, cracking of gaseous and liquid feed stocks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name: ______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT424 PETROLEUM REFINERY ENGINEERING

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Describe the origin of petroleum

2. Describe types of crudes

3. Give the importance of secondary processing

4. Compare cracking and thermal cracking

5. Describe clay contacting

6. Differentiate different feed stocks.

7. Explain the production of polyurethanes

8. Describe the production of PET

9. Describe fluid catalytic feed stocks

10. Explain the product yields

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe composition, characteristics, product pattern and crude (14M)

heating,
Or
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

12 a) Describe stripping, atmospheric and vacuum distillation (10M)

b) Describe the types of trays (4M)
Module II

13 a) Compare hydro cracking and cracking of gaseous (7M)

b) Compare hydro cracking and cracking of liquid feed stocks (7M)

Or

14 a) Explain Lube oil and wax processing (7M)

b) Explain DE asphalting and steam reforming (7M)

Module -III

15 a) Describe various treatment techniques (7M)

b) Explain products, yields and qualities (7M)

Or

16 a) Explain solvent treatment processes, clay treatment and hydrofining (9M)

b) Describe polymerisation models and techniques (5M)

Module -IV

17 a) Explain production of PE, PP, PAN, Nylon and PC (14M)

Or

18 b) Describe alkylation, oxidation, dehydrogenation, nitration, (14M)

chlorination and sulphonation

Module -V

19 a) Describe Catalyst and operating parameters (7M)

b) Explain steam reforming and hydrogen (7M)

Or

20 a) Describe cracking of gaseous and liquid feed stocks, olefins, diolefins, (14M)
acetylene and aromatics
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1

Origin- exploration and production of petroleum, testing of petroleum products, types of crudes,
composition, characteristics, product pattern, crude heating, distillation principles, stripping,
atmospheric and vacuum distillation, heat balance and material balance in distillation, types of trays,
quality control
Module 2

Types and functions of secondary processing, cracking- thermal cracking, catalytic cracking, hydro
cracking, cracking of gaseous and liquid feed stocks, Vis-breaking, applications of Separation Process,
different feed stocks, Lube oil and wax processing, solvent extraction, dewaxing, deasphalting, steam
reforming,

Module 3
Clay contacting, principles operating parameters, feed and product equalities and yields. different feed
stocks, products, yields and qualities, various treatment techniques; removal of sulphur compounds in all
petroleum fractions to improve performance, solvent treatment processes, clay treatment, hydro fining,
polymerisation models and techniques,

Module 4

production of polyurethanes, PET, PVC, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyacrylonitrile, nylon,

polycarbonates, unit processes: Alkylation, oxidation, dehydrogenation,

nitration, chlorination, sulphonation and isomerization dehydrogenation.

Module 5

Fluid catalytic feed stocks and product yields and qualities. Catalyst and operating parameters. Steam
Reforming, Hydrogen, Synthesis gas, cracking of gaseous and liquid feed stocks, olefins, Diolefins,
Acetylene and Aromatics and their separation

Text Books:

1. B.K. Bhaskara Rao, Modern Petroleum Refining Processes, (Edn 5), Oxford and IBH
Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007
2. Groggins, Unit Processing in Organic Synthesis, (Edn 5), Tata McGraw Hill, 2001

References:

1. Nelson W.L Petroleum Refinery Engineering, McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Limited,

1941

2. Watkins, R.N., Petroleum Refinery Distillation, 2nd Ed, Gulf Publishing Company,
Texas, 1979
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Origin of petroleum (8 hours)

1.1 Origin- exploration and production of petroleum, testing of 2

petroleum products

1.2 types of crudes, composition, characteristics, product pattern, 3

crude heating, distillation principles, stripping
1.3 atmospheric and vacuum distillation, heat balance and material 3
balance in distillation, types of trays, quality control

2 Cracking (6 hours)
2.1 Types and functions of secondary processing, cracking- thermal 2
cracking, catalytic cracking, hydro cracking,

2.2 cracking of gaseous and liquid feed stocks, Vis-breaking, 2

applications of Separation Process, different feed stocks

2.3 Lube oil and wax processing, solvent extraction, dewaxing, 2

deasphalting, steam reforming
3 Treatment processes (6 hours)
3.1 Clay contacting, principles operating parameters, feed and product 2
equalities and yields. different feed stocks,

3.2 yields and qualities various treatment techniques; removal of sulphur 2

compounds in all petroleum fractions to improve performance,
3.3 products solvent treatment processes, clay treatment, hydro fining, 2
polymerisation models and techniques

4 Unit processes: (6 hours)

4.1 production of polyurethanes, PET, PVC, 2

4.2 Polyethylene, polypropylene, polyacrylonitrile, nylon, polycarbonates, 2

unit processes:
4.3 Alkylationoxidation, dehydrogenation, nitration, chlorination, 2
sulphonation and isomerization dehydrogenation

5 Feed stocks (9 hours)

5.1 Fluid catalytic feed stocks and product yields and qualities. Catalyst 3
and operating parameters

5.2 Steam Reforming, Hydrogen, Synthesis gas, cracking of gaseous 3

and liquid feed stocks, olefins
5.3 Diolefins, Acetylene and Aromatics and their separation 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT434 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of fundamentals of
history, classification and software’s for additive manufacturing. Significant topics from methodology
of powder based additive manufacturing systems Choosing materials for manufacturing and medical
and bio additive manufacturing are included in the remaining modules. After the completion of this
course, students should achieve sufficient knowledge about the basics of additive manufacturing.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe fundamentals of additive manufacturing

CO 2 Explain the methods and areas of usage of additive manufacturing technologies
CO 3 Describe the possibilities and limitations of this technology.
CO 4 Explain materials for manufacturing
CO 5 Explain the characteristics of materials used in Additive Manufacturing.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 3
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3
CO 5 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe fundamentals of additive manufacturing

1. Explain the Classification, Additive Manufacturing,

2.Describe the materials for additive manufacturing.

3. Comment on Data Processing for additive?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Describe fundamentals of additive manufacturing

1. Give an account of Softwares for additive manufacturing technology

2.Explain Classification, Liquid based system

3.Comment on Fused Deposition Modeling

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Describe the possibilities and limitations of this technology.

1. Give an account of Selective Laser Sintering

2.Explain Three-Dimensional Printing

3.Comment on Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS).

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain materials for manufacturing.

1. Comment on choosing materials for manufacturing.

2. Understand Hierarchical Materials & Biomimetics

3. Evaluate advanced AM materials.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the characteristics of materials used in Additive Manufacturing.

1.Explain Medical and bio additive manufacturing.

2. Comment on design and production.

3.Explain the Tissue Engineering (CATE)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name: ______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT434 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define additive manufacturing

2. Describe History of Additive Manufacturing,

3. Give the importance of Model Slicing.

4. Compare liquid based and solid based additive manufacturing

5. Give application of Selective Laser Sintering–.

6. Describe the Three-Dimensional Printing

7. Explain Choosing materials for manufacturing

8. Describe Ceramics & Bio-ceramics

9. Explain Medical and bio additive manufacturing

10. Explain Case studies for manufacturing

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Explain the Materials for Additive, Manufacturing Technology (7M)

b) Describe the Technology in product development (7M)

Or
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
12 a) Explain Digitization techniques and Model Reconstruction, (14M)

Module II

13 a) Explain Model Slicing and Tool path (7M)

b) Compare MIMICS and MAGICS (7M)

Or

14 a) Explain Solid based system and Fused Deposition Modeling (7M)

b) Explain Laminated Object Manufacturing (7M)

Module -III

15 a) Describe the Principle, Process, advantages and applications of (14M)

Three-Dimensional Printing

Or

16 a) Principle, process, advantages and applications- Laser (14M)

Engineered Net Shaping (LENS),

Module -IV

17 a) Describe Biomaterials, Hierarchical Materials & Biomimetics, (14M)

Or

18 a) Explain the 4D Printing and Advanced AM Materials (14M)

Module -V

19 a) Describe Customized implants and prosthesis (14M)

Or

20 a) Explain Design and production (7M)

b) Explain Bio-Additive Manufacturing- (7M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1

Introduction, History, Classification, Additive Manufacturing, Technology in product development,

Materials for Additive, Manufacturing Technology, Tooling, Applications, Basic Concept, Digitization
techniques, Model Reconstruction, Data Processing for Additive, Manufacturing Technology CAD
model preparation, Part Orientation and support generation
Module 2

Model Slicing, Tool path, Generation, Softwares for Additive Manufacturing Technology: MIMICS,
MAGICS Liquid based and solid based additive manufacturing systems, Classification, Liquid based
system, Stereo lithography Apparatus (SLA) - Principle, process, advantages and applications, Solid
based system, Fused Deposition Modeling – Principle, process, advantagesand applications, Laminated
Object Manufacturing

Module 3

Powder based additive manufacturing systems, Selective Laser Sintering– Principle, Process,
advantages and applications, Three-Dimensional Printing– Principle, process, advantages and
applications- Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS), Electron Beam Melting

Module 4

Choosing materials for manufacturing, multiple materials, metal AM processes, Composite Materials,
Biomaterials, Hierarchical Materials & Biomimetics, Ceramics & Bio-ceramics, Shape-Memory
Materials, 4D Printing, Advanced AM Materials.

Module 5

Medical and bio additive manufacturing, Customized implants and prosthesis: Design and production,
Bio-Additive Manufacturing- Computer Aided Tissue Engineering(CATE), Case studies

Text Books:

1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications,
3rd Edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010
2 Gebhardt A., Rapid prototyping, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003 Processing in
Organic Synthesis, (Edn 5), Tata McGraw Hill, 2001
References:

1. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box
for prototype development, CRC Press, 2007
2. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice, Springer, 2006
3. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications,
CRC press, 2000
4. P. K. Venuvinod, W. Ma, Rapid Prototyping: Laser-based and Other
Technologies,Springer, 2013
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 History of AM (8 hours)

1.1 Introduction, History, Classification, Additive Manufacturing, 2

Technology in product development, Materials for Additive, ,

1.2 Manufacturing Technology, Tooling, Applications, Basic Concept, 3

Digitization techniques, Model Reconstruction
1.3 Data Processing for Additive, Manufacturing Technology CAD 3
model preparation, Part Orientation and support generation

2 Manufacturing Technology (6 hours)

2.1 Model Slicing, Tool path, Generation, softwares for Additive 2
Manufacturing Technology: -
2.2 MIMICS, MAGICS Liquid based and solid based additive 2
manufacturing systems, Classification, Liquid based system, Stereo
lithography Apparatus (SLA)
2.3 Principle, process, advantages and applications, Solid based system, 2
Fused Deposition Modeling – Principle, process, advantages and
applications, Laminated Object Manufacturing
3 Powder based system (6 hours)
3.1 Powder based additive manufacturing systems, Selective Laser 2
Sintering– Principle, Process, advantages and applications,

3.2 Three-Dimensional Printing– Principle, process, advantages and 2

applications-,
3.3 Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS), Electron Beam Melting 2

4 AM processes (6 hours)
4.1 Choosing materials for manufacturing, multiple materials, metal 2
AM processes

4.2 Composite Materials, Biomaterials, Hierarchical Materials & 2

Biomimetics
4.3 Ceramics & Bio-ceramics, Shape-Memory Materials, 4D Printing, 2
Advanced AM Materials

5 Design and production (9 hours)

5.1 Medical and bio additive manufacturing, Customized implants and 3
prosthesis

5.2 Design and production, Bio-Additive Manufacturing 3

5.3 Computer Aided Tissue Engineering (CATE), Case studies 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT444 POLYMER NANO COMPOSITES CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of fundamentals of
Characterization and testing of polymers and polymer composites polymer composites. Significant
topics from methodology of composite preparation of composite, various methods used for the
incorporation of nano fillers in polymers and Characterization and testing of polymer composites are
included in the remaining modules. After the completion of this course, students should achieve
sufficient knowledge about the basics of composite technology.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe fundamentals of composite

CO 2 Explain the significance of the composite technology by using carbon nanotubes.
CO 3 Explain the special properties and application of polymers.
CO 4 Explain improvement in the product by nanotechnology
CO 5 Explain the incorporation of carbon nanotubes.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 2 1
CO 3 2 1
CO 4 3
CO 5 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe fundamentals of composite

1. Describe the polymer composites – Nano, micro and macro scales.

2. Explain the introduction to composite material, Classification.

3Explain the nano and micro composites

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the significance of the composite technology by using carbon
nanotubes.

1. Explain the significance of Polymer-filler interactions?

2.Describe the incorporation of reinforcements in polymer solution mixing-.

3. Comment on dispersion and nucleating effects

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Explain the special properties and application of polymers.
1. Give an account of various layered and non-layered nano and micro particles.

2.Explain preparation of long fibre and short fibre composites

3.Comment on different methods of preparation of composites.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain improvement in the product by nanotechnology

1. Understand Carbon nanotubes- single walled and multi walled- preparation,

2. Understand the salient features of polymer modification with carbon nanotube.

3. Evaluate various methods used for the incorporation of nano fillers in polymer matrix.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the incorporation of carbon nanotubes.

1. Explain characterization and testing of polymers and polymer composites.

2. Comment on thermal, mechanical and electrical properties- tribological characteristics.

3.Explain the composite material rheology

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT444 POLYMER NANO COMPOSITES

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define polymer composites

2. Describe classification of reinforcement

3. Describe the Polymer-filler interactions.

4. Explain the incorporation of reinforcements in polymer

5. Give the details of layered and non-layered nano composite

6. Differentiate long fibre and short fibre composites.

7. Define carbon nanotubes

8. Describe latex stage mixing and melt mixing.

9. Describe thermal characteristics of composite

10. Describe the applications of composites

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe thermoplastics and thermosets matrixes (9M)

b) Compare nano and micro composites (5M)

Or

12 a) Explain Short fibre and long fibre composite (14M)

Module II
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

13 a) Describe coupling and bonding agents (8M)

b) Describe dispersion and nucleating effects. (6M)

Or

14 a) Describe melt mixing, in-situ polymerization and precipitation (14M)

Module -III

15 a) Explain the preparation of long fibre and short fibre composites (8M)
b) Describe application of layered nano and micro particles in (6M)
modification
Or

16 a) Describe different methods of preparation of composites (14M)

Module -IV

17 a) Describe single walled and multi walled- preparation (8M)

b) Explain salient features of polymer modification with carbon (6M)
nanotubes
Or

18 a) Explain various methods used for the incorporation of nano fillers in (14M)
polymer matrix.

Module -V

19 a) Explain the characterization and testing of polymer composites (7M)

b) Illustrate fracture behaviour and Creep (7M)

Or

20 a) Explain the mechanical and electrical properties (7M)

b) Explain composite material rheology (7M)
..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1

Introduction to composite material, Classification, Introduction to polymer composites – Nano, micro

and macro scales. Reinforcements – Short fibre, long fibre and particulate fillers. Matrices –
thermoplastics-thermosets and rubbers, nano and micro composites. short and long fibre composites-
Treatment of reinforcements.

Module 2

Polymer-filler interactions, use of coupling and bonding agents. Incorporation of reinforcements in

polymer solution mixing- latex stage mixing-melt mixing and in-situ polymerization and precipitation
– Dispersion and nucleating effects-Intercalation and exfoliation.

Module 3

Application of layered and nonlayered nano and micro particles in polymer modification-Preparation
of long fibre and short fibre composites Different methods of preparation of composites.

Module 4
Mechanism of film formation and drying, factors affecting coating properties, film thickness, film density,
internal stresses, pigment volume concentration (PVC). different methods used for film preparation,
Mechanical and optical properties of coatings, ageing properties, effect of rheological behaviour on paint
performance.

Module 5
Adhesion properties of coatings, factors affecting adhesive bond, thermodynamics of adhesion, testing of
paint materials- destructive and non-destructive methods, paint film defects, surface cleaning treatments,
paint application methods.

Text Books

1.Chiao, C. C., Chiao, T. T., &Lubin, G. Handbook of Composites. Reinhold, New York.

(1982).

Reference Books

1. De, S. K., & White, J. R. (Eds.). Short fibre-polymer composites. Elsevier. (1996).
2. Chiao, C. C., Chiao, T. T., &Lubin, G. Handbook of Composites. Reinhold, New York.
(1982).
3. Matthews, F. L., & Rawlings, R. D. Composite materials: engineering and science.
Elsevier. (1999).
4. Mohr, J. G. SPI handbook of technology and engineering of reinforced plastics composites.
SPI Publishing. (1984).
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction to polymer composites (8 hours)

1.1 Introduction to composite materials, Classification, Introduction 3

to polymer composites – Nano, micro and macro scales
1.2 Reinforcements – Short fibre, long fibre and particulate fillers. 3
Matrices – thermoplastics-thermosets and rubbers
1.3 nano and micro composites. short and long fibre composites- 2
Treatment of reinforcements.

2 Coupling and bonding agents (6 hours)

2.1 Polymer-filler interactions, use of coupling and bonding agents. . 2
2.2 Incorporation of reinforcements in polymer solution mixing- latex 2
stage mixing-melt mixing
2.3 in-situ polymerization and precipitation – Dispersion and 2
nucleating effects-Intercalation and exfoliation
3 Fibres in composites (6 hours)
3.1 Application of layered and nonlayered nano and micro particles 2
in polymer modification-
3.2 Preparation of long fibre and short fibre composites. 2
3.3 Different methods of preparation of composites 2

4 Carbon nanotubes (6 hours)

4.1 Carbon nanotubes- single walled and multi walled- preparation, 2
treatment and functionalization-
4.2 Salient features of polymer modification with carbon nanotubes- 2
nano silica and nano clay. Organically modified layered clays:.
4.3 various methods used for the incorporation of nano fillers in 2
polymer matrix like solution mixing, latex stage mixing and melt
mixing

5 Characterization and testing (9 hours)

5.1 Characterization and testing of polymers and polymer 3
composites.

5.2 Thermal, mechanical and electrical properties- tribological 3

characteristics- Fracture behaviour- Creep and Fatigue behaviour
5.3 Composite material rheology. Long term effects- Applications of 3
composites
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT454 FAILURE ANALYSIS OF POLYMERS CATEGOY LT P CREDIT

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of fundamentals of
fracture mechanics and failure analysis. Significant topics from methodology of environmental effect
on polymer failure, degradation mechanisms and bio degradations are included in the remaining
modules. After the completion of this course, students should achieve sufficient knowledge about the
basics of failure analysis.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe fundamentals of failure analysis.

CO 2 Explain the significance of basic knowledge on degradation and failure of polymers
CO 3 Explain the various tests to find degradation profiles of polymers.
CO 4 Explain knowledge on effects of degradation.
CO 5 Explain the significance of bio degradation

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe fundamentals of failure analysis.

1. Describe the principle of fracture mechanics

2. Explain the fracture predictions based on an energy balance

3.What are the fracture predictions based on J- integrals.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Explain the significance of basic knowledge on degradation and failure
of polymers.

1. Explain the significance of short-term tensile strength,

2. Describe the failure of highly filled systems or composites.

3. Comment on fracture mechanics analysis of impact failure.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Explain the various tests to find degradation profiles of polymers.
1. Give an account of creep rupture tests.

2.Explain fracture mechanics analysis of creep rupture,

3.Comment on fatigue test method.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain knowledge on effects of degradation.

1. Understand environmental effect on polymer failure.

2. Understand weathering, chemical degradation, thermal degradation Failure analysis,.

3. Evaluate influence of stress, oxidizing medium, photo oxidation,

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the significance of bio degradation

1. Explain Degradation due to ionizing radiation

2. Comment on Environmental stress cracking.

3.Explain the Bio degradation microorganisms.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name: ______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT454 FAILURE ANALYSIS OF POLYMERS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define fracture predictions based on an energy balance

2. Describe Fracture mechanics

3. Compare brittle failure and ductile failure

4. What is the impact test method?

5. What is creep rupture?

6. Describe fatigue test method.

7. What is chemical degradation

8. What is thermo oxidation

9. Describe Environmental stress cracking

10. Explain electrochemical degradation

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe fracture predictions based on the stress intensity factor (14M)

Or

12 a) Explain linear viscoelastic fracture predictions based on J- integrals (14M)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module II

13 a) Explain failure of highly filled systems or composites (8M)

b) Describe short term tensile strength (6M)

Or

14 a) Describe impact strength (5M)

b) Explain fracture mechanics analysis of impact failure (9M)

Module -III

15 a) Explain the fracture mechanics analysis of creep rupture (14M)

Or

16 a) Describe stability of polymer structures. (5M)

b) Describe the fatigue test method, friction and wear. (9M)

Module -IV

17 a) Describe environmental effect on polymer failure (14M)

Or

18 a) Explain identification of strategic weakness. (8M)

b) Explain the effect of Influence of stress, oxidizing medium, photo (6M)
oxidation
Module -V

19 a) Give degradation mechanisms, chemical attack, hydrolysis (14M)

Or

20 a) Explain the electrical treeing and water treeing (7M)

b) Explain electrochemical degradation. (7M)
..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1

Fracture mechanics, Fracture predictions based on the stress intensity factor, Fracture predictions based
on an energy balance, Linear viscoelastic fracture predictions based on J- integrals.
Module 2

Short term tensile strength, brittle failure, ductile failure, Failure of highly filled systems or composites
Impact strength, Impact test method, Fracture mechanics analysis of impact failure.

Module 3

Creep rupture, creep rupture tests, Fracture mechanics analysis of creep rupture, fatigue, fatigue test
method, friction and wear, Stability of polymer structures
Module 4

Environmental effect on polymer failure, weathering, chemical degradation, thermal degradation

Failure analysis, identification of strategic weakness, thermo oxidation, stabilising additive metal
catalysis, Influence of stress, oxidizing medium, photo oxidation, the severity of exposure, stabilisation.

Module 5

Degradation due to ionizing radiation, degradation mechanisms, chemical attack, hydrolysis,

Environmental stress cracking, crazing and cracking in air, Electrical treeing and water treeing,
electrochemical degradation, Bio degradation microorganisms, diffusion, permeation and migration,
Physical ageing

Text Books

1.Barbara, H. S. Polymer analysis. John Wiley & Sons. (2002).

Reference Books

1. Wright, D Failure of plastics and rubber products: causes, effects and case studies involving
degradation. iSmithersRapra Publishing. . (2001).

2. Shah, V. Handbook of plastics testing and failure analysis (Vol. 21). John Wiley & Sons. (2007).

3. Barbara, H. S. Polymer analysis. John Wiley & Sons. (2002).

4. Gerdeen, J. C., &Rorrer, R. A. Engineering design with polymers and composites (Vol. 30). CRC
Press (2011).
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Fracture mechanics (8 hours)

1.1 Fracture mechanics, Fracture predictions based on the stress intensity 3

factor
1.2 Fracture predictions based on an energy balance 2
1.3 Linear viscoelastic fracture predictions based on J- integrals 3
2 Composites Impact strength (6 hours)
2.1 Short term tensile strength, brittle failure, ductile failure 2
2.2 Failure of highly filled systems or composites Impact strength 2
2.3 Impact test method, Fracture mechanics analysis of impact failure . 2
3 Creep rupture (6 hours)
3.1 Creep rupture, creep rupture tests, Fracture mechanics analysis of 2
creep rupture

3.2 fatigue, fatigue test method, friction and wear. 2

3.3 Stability of polymer structures 2

4 Environmental effect (6 hours)

4.1 Environmental effect on polymer failure, weathering, chemical 2
degradation, thermal degradation Failure analysis
4.2 Identification of strategic weakness, thermo oxidation, stabilising 2
additive metal catalysis,
4.3 Influence of stress, oxidizing medium, photo oxidation, the severity 2
of exposure, stabilisation

5 Degradation mechanisms (9 hours)

5.1 Degradation due to ionizing radiation, degradation mechanisms, 3
chemical attack, hydrolysis,

5.2 Environmental stress cracking, crazing and cracking in air, 3

Electrical treeing and water treeing, electrochemical degradation
5.3 Bio degradation microorganisms, diffusion, permeation and 3
migration, Physical ageing.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT464 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ANALYSIS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of fundamentals of
environmental impact and Factors for consideration in assessing environmental impact analysis.
Significant topics from methodology of impact analysis, socio impact analysis, air quality impact
analysis and water quality impact analysis are included in the remaining modules. After the completion
of this course, students should achieve sufficient knowledge about the basics of impact analysis.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe the fundamentals of impact analysis

CO 2 Outline significance of environmental impact analysis.
CO 3 Summarise Socio impact analysis
CO 4 Relate water quality criteria and standards.
CO 5 Compare Assessment methodologies

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2 1
CO 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 2 1
CO 5 3 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the fundamentals of impact analysis

1. Describe the principle of environmental protections

2. Explain the laws and Acts-air quality

3.What are legislation-fish and wild life resources.?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Outline significance of environmental impact analysis.

1. Explain the significance of legislation-historical preservation

2.What are the factors for consideration in assessing environmental impact

3. Comment on concept short term vs. long term effects.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Summarise Socio impact analysis

1. Give an account of socio impact analysis-physical.

2.Explain aesthetic and economic environment.

3.Describe the types of socio impact analysis.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Relate water quality criteria and standards.

1. Understand air pollutants-sources-atmospheric interactions.

2. Understand the factors affecting environmental impact-assessment methodology,

3. Evaluate noise impact analysis-effects of noise on people-.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Compare Assessment methodologies.

1. Explain water quality criteria and standards-modelling.

2. Comment on water quality impact by projects like High ways, power plants, agriculture and
irrigation.

3.Explain the impact on biota-summarisation of environmental impact-checklist method.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT464 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ANALYSIS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define environmental impact analysis

2. Describe environmental protections

3. Explain historical preservation.

4. What are the legislation Factors for assessment?

5. Describe aesthetic environment.

6. Explain socio impact analysis

7. What are the air pollutants-sources?

8. Describe Noise impact analysis

9. Describe water quality criteria and standards

10. Compare high ways and power plants for impact analysis

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe the concepts of environmental impact analysis (14M)

Or

12 a) Explain legislations, laws and Acts-air quality legislation (14M)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Module II

13 a) Describe the factors for consideration in assessing environmental (14M)

impact concept
Or

14 a) Describe short term vs. long term effects. (14M)

Module -III

15 a) Explain the social, aesthetic and economic environment (14M)

Or

16 a) Describe examples of types of socio impact analysis (14M)

Module -IV

17 a) Describe air quality impact analysis (8M)

b) Explain air pollutants-sources (6M)

Or

18 a) Explain atmospheric interactions-environmental impact- (8M)

assessment methodology
b) Explain the effect of noise impact analysis-effects of noise on (6M)
people
Module -V

19 a) What is standards-modelling-water quality impact? (7M)

b) Illustrate agriculture, irrigation and forest management, impact (7M)
analysis.
Or

20 a) Explain the impact on biota-summarisation of environmental (7M)

impact-checklist metho
b) Explain vegetation and wild life impact analysis. (7M)
..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Syllabus
Module 1

Concepts of environmental impact analysis-Environmental protections, legislations, laws and Acts-air

quality legislation-energy legislation-fish and wild life resources.
Module 2

legislation-historical preservation legislation Factors for consideration in assessing environmental

impact concept short term vs. long term effects.
Module 3

Socio impact analysis-physical, social, aesthetic and economic environment- examples of types of socio
impact analysis
Module 4

Air quality impact analysis- air pollutants-sources-atmospheric interactions-environmental impact-

assessment methodology, case studies. Noise impact analysis-effects of noise on people-estimating
transportation noise impact-examples.
Module 5

Water quality impact analysis-water quality criteria and standards-modelling-water quality impact by
projects like High ways, power plants, agriculture and irrigation, forest management, vegetation and
wild life impact analysis. Assessment methodologies- impact on biota-summarisation of environmental
impact-checklist method

Text Books

1. Rau, J. G., & Wooten, D. C. Environmental impact analysis handbook. McGraw Hill Book New
Delhi. (1980).

Reference Books

1. Rau, J. G., & Wooten, D. C. Environmental impact analysis handbook. McGraw Hill Book New
Delhi. (1980).

2. Kneese, A. V., & Bower, B. T. Managing water quality: economics, technology, institutions. Rff
Press. (2013).

3. Glasson, J., &Therivel, R. (2013). Introduction to environmental impact assessment. Routledge.

(2013)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Impact analysis (8 hours)

1.1 Concepts of environmental impact analysis-Environmental 2

protections -
1.2 Legislations, laws and Acts-air quality legislation 3
1.3 Energy legislation-fish and wild life resources 3

2 Legislation (6 hours)
2.1 Legislation-historical preservation legislation 2
2.2 Factors for consideration in assessing environmental impact 2
2.3 Concept short term vs. long term effects 2
3 Socio impact (6 hours)
3.1 Socio impact analysis-physical, 2
3.2 Social, aesthetic and economic environment- 2
3.3 Examples of types of socio impact analysis. 2

4 Air quality (6 hours)

4.1 Air quality impact analysis- air pollutants-sources-atmospheric 2
interactions-environmental
4.2 Impact-assessment methodology, case studies. 2
4.3 Noise impact analysis-effects of noise on people-estimating 2
transportation noise impact-examples.

5 Water quality (9 hours)

5.1 Water quality impact analysis-water quality criteria and 3
standards-modelling-water quality impact by projects like

5.2 High ways, power plants, agriculture and irrigation, forest 3

management, vegetation and wild life impact analysis.
5.3 Assessment methodologies- impact on biota-summarisation of 3
environmental impact-checklist method
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT474 ELECTRO CHEMICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of fundamentals of
electrochemical engineering and elements of electrochemical systems. Significant topics from
methodology of electrode, electrochemical thermodynamics, electrical double layer theory and
fundamentals of industrial electrochemical processes are included in the remaining modules. After the
completion of this course, students should achieve sufficient knowledge about the basics of
electrochemical engineering.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe fundamentals of electrochemistry.

CO 2 Explain the fundamental knowledge electrochemical engineering.
CO 3 Evaluate the potential of electrochemical systems based on thermodynamic data
CO 4 Explain use of technical measures to characterize properties of galvanic elements and
capacitors.
CO 5 Explain the significance of major industrial electrochemical processes and
electrochemical reactor design.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe fundamentals of electrochemistry.

1. Describe the introduction to electrochemical engineering

2. Explain the electrical circuit theory.

3.Explain the fundamentals of electrochemical systems

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the fundamental knowledge electrochemical engineering.

1. Explain the significance of elements of electrochemical Systems

2. Describe the Empirical laws of electrolyte conductivity

3. Describe the concept of pH and the idea of buffer solutions

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Evaluate the potential of electrochemical systems based on

thermodynamic data.
1. Give an account of Nernst Equation.

2.Explain Electrode Electrochemical Thermodynamics,

3.Comment on Electromotive Force and Electrode Kinetics

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain use of technical measures to characterize properties of galvanic
elements and capacitors.

1. Understand electrical double layers theory.

2. Understand the electrochemical energy engineering.

3. Explain fuel Cells, electrical, & electrochemical capacitors.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the significance of major industrial electrochemical processes
and electrochemical reactor design.

1.Explain industrial electrochemical processes.

2. Comment on chlor-alkali process

3.Explain the reactor design, & parameter.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name: ______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT474 ELECTROCHEMICAL ENGINEERING

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define Electrochemical Engineering

2. Describe Electrostatics

3. Explain the concept of pH.

4. What is the function of buffer solutions?

5. What is the function of Cell Potential?

6. Describe electromotive force,

7. Explain electrochemical capacitors

8. Describe electrokinetic phenomena

9. Explain Chlor-Alkali Process

10. Describe Hall Heroult Process

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe Electrical Circuit Theory (5M)

b) Explain electrostatics and electrodynamics (9M)

Or
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

12 a) Describe the fundamentals of electrochemical systems (14M)

Module II

13 a) Explain the elements of electrochemical systems (14M)

Or

14 a) Describe the transport processes within electrolytes (14M)

Module -III

15 a) Describe the electrochemical thermodynamics (7M)

b) Explain the Nernst Equation (7M)

Or

16 a) Describe electrode kinetics (7M)

b) Explain the electromotive force (7M)

Module -IV

17 a) Explain the Electrical Double Layers Theory, & Models (14M)

Or

18 a) Describe the Electrochemical Energy Engineering Batteries (9M)

b) Explain the Fuel Cells (5M)
Module -V

19 a) Describe the Reactor Design, & Parameter (14M)

Or

20 a) Explain the Electrochemical Extraction of Metals, (7M)

b) Explain the Industrial Electrochemical Processes (7M)

..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1

Introduction to Electrochemical Engineering, Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering, Electrostatics,

Electrodynamics, Electrical Circuit Theory, Fundamentals of Electrochemical Systems
Module 2

Elements of Electrochemical Systems, Electrolyte Transport processes within electrolytes, Empirical

laws of electrolyte conductivity. The concept of pH and the idea of buffer solutions
Module 3

Elements of Electrochemical Systems, Electrode Electrochemical Thermodynamics, Nernst Equation,

Reference Electrodes, Cell Potential, Electromotive Force, Electrode Kinetics

Module 4

Electrical Double Layers Theory, & Models Electrokinetic Phenomena, Electrochemical Energy
Engineering Batteries, Fuel Cells, Electrical, & Electrochemical Capacitors
Module 5

Industrial Electrochemical Processes, Fundamentals, Reactor Design, & Parameter Chlor-Alkali

Process, Electrochemical Extraction of Metals, Hall Heroult Process

Text Books:

1. M. Mench, “Fuel Cell Engines”, John Wiley, New York, 2008.

2. B. E. Conway, “Electrochemical Supercapacitors: Scientific Fundamentals and

Technological Applications”, Kluwer Academic / Plenum publishers, New York,1999

References:

1. Gholam Abbas Nazri, “Lithium Batteries – Science and Technology”, Springer, NewYork,
2009.
2. D.Pavlov, “Lead – Acid Batteries: Science and Technology”, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2011.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Electrochemical Engineering (7 hours)
1.1 Introduction to Electrochemical Engineering, Fundamentals of 2
Electrical Engineering,

1.2 Electrostatics, Electrodynamics, Electrical Circuit 2

1.3 Theory, Fundamentals of Electrochemical Systems 3

2 Electrolytes (7 hours)
2.1 Elements of Electrochemical Systems, Electrolyte Transport 3
processes within electrolytes,

2.2 Empirical laws of electrolyte conductivity. 2

2.3 The concept of pH and the idea of buffer solutions 2
3 Electrodes (6 hours)
3.1 Elements of electrochemical systems, electrode electrochemical 2
thermodynamics,

3.2 Nernst Equation, Reference Electrodes, 2

3.3 Cell Potential, Electromotive Force, Electrode Kinetics 2

4 Fuel Cells (6 hours)

4.1 Electrical double layers theory & models electrokinetic phenomena 2

4.2 Electrochemical Energy Engineering Batteries 2

4.3 Fuel Cells, Electrical, & Electrochemical Capacitors 2

5 Reactor Design (9 hours)

5.1 Industrial Electrochemical Processes, Fundamentals 3

5.2 Reactor Design, & Parameter Chlor-Alkali Process 3

5.3 Electrochemical Extraction of Metals, Hall Heroult Process 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT416 SPECIALITY POLYMERS CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Objective of this course is to establish sufficient knowledge in a simple and up-front manner
and to provide a broad background on special applications of polymers. This course introduces students
to basic ideas of polymers used in different applications. The five modules give a detailed study of
specialty polymers. They also attain ability to analyse various techniques and methods for preparation
of specialty polymers.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Learn about the high temperature polymers

CO 2 Know about liquid crystalline polymers and its properties
CO 3 Understand electrical and electronic application of polymers.
CO 4 Know about ionic polymers
CO 5 Learn about inorganic polymers and its applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO 11 PO
10 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1 2
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 1 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester

Tests Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 30
Understand 20 20 50
Apply 20 20 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the production of optical fibres used in telecommunication cables

2. Define organometallic polymers.
3. Give examples of polymers used as rocket propellants.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Discuss the factors affecting the thermal stability and fire resistance of polymers.

2. Give two examples each for heat and fire resistant polymers.

3. Comment on the thermal stability of flouropolymers

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Define liquid crystalline polymers.

2. List out the advantages and disadvantages of LCP

3. Differentiate between smectic and nematic phases of liquid crystals.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the mechanism of conductivity in Polyacetylene.

2. Explain the working of a photoresist.

3. Define conducting polymers.

Course Outcome 4 (CO5):

1. Explain inorganic polymers.

2. Explain about polymers used as rocket propellants
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hour

POT416 - Speciality Polymers

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define ionic polymers

2. What is meant by piezoelectric polymers

3. Differentiate between main chain and side chain LC polymers

4. Define inorganic polymers with suitable examples.

5. What are the various requirements for heat resistant polymers

6. Define lyotropic liquid crystals with an example.

7. Comment on negative photoresists.

8. Describe the physical properties and applications of ionic polymers.

9. Describe the preparation of polyketones.

10. Explain the method of wave signal communication in optical fibre?

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11. a) Explain the thermal stability of flouropolymers with respect to its structure.
(9M)

b) Describe the structure properties and applications of polyphenylene sulphide

(5M)

12. a) Explain the thermal behaviour of polyesters and polyamides. (9M)

b) Explain the different methods of improving the thermal properties of polymers.(5M)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module II

13 a) Discuss the concept of liquid crystalline phase. (7M)

b) Explain the synthesis of LCP. (7 M)

14. a) Comment on different theories of liquid crystallinity in polymers.(10M)

b) Discuss the advantages, disadvantages and applications of LCP (4M)

Module –III

15. a) Explain the conducting mechanism of polymers.(8M)

b) Describe the electrical and electronic properties of polymers (6M)

16. a) Explain the photoresists for semiconductor semiconductor applications. (8M) b)

Explain the photoconductivity of polymers with examples.

Module –IV

17. a) Describe the preparation, properties and applications of ionomers based on polystyrene.
(8M)

b) Explain the preparation, properties and applications of ionomers based on PTFE. (6M)

18. Discuss polymers for ion exchange resins. (14M)

Module –V

19. Explain the production of OFC fibbers used in telecommunication cables. state its advantages
also. (14M)

20. a) Describe the preparation, properties and applications of polysiloxanes.

b) Explain the polymers used as rocket propellants. Give examples

..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1: High temperature and fire-resistant polymers, polymers for low fire hazards, polymers for
high temperature resistance, fluoropolymers, aromatic polymers, polyphenylene sulphide,
polysulphones, polyesters, polyamides, polyketones.

Module 2 : Liquid crystalline polymers, structure, types, applications, structural requirements of LCP,
types of liquid crystalline (LC) phases, Types of liquid crystalline polymers, main chain and side chain
LC polymers, cholesterics, smectics, mesophase, lyotropic, thermotropic, calamitic, discotic,
mesogenic groups, Theories of liquid crystallinity in polymers, Advantages of LCP, disadvantages of
LCP.
Module 3: Electrical and electronic properties of polymers, insulating properties of polymers,
conducting polymers, conducting mechanisms, polyacetylene, polyparaphenylene polypyrrole.
Photoconducting polymers, polymers in non-linear optics, polymers with piezoelectric, pyroelectric
and ferroelectric properties. Photoresists for semiconductor fabrication, negative working photoresists,
positive photoresists, electron beam lithography.
Module 4: Ionic polymers, synthesis, physical properties and applications, ion exchange,
hydrophilicity, ionomers based on polyethylene, elastomeric ionomers, ionomers based on
polystyrene, ionomers based on PTFE, ionomers with polyaromatic backbones, polyelectrolytes for ion
exchange, polyelectrolytes based on carboxylates, polymers with integral ions, polyelectrolyte
complexes, inorganic ionic polymers.

Module 5: Inorganic polymers, polymers containing phosphorous, nitrogen and boron, organometallic
polymers, polysiloxanes. Optical fiber telecommunication cables, Polymer concrete and polymeric
binders for rocket propellants.

Text Books:
1.H.F.Mark, (Ed), Encyclopedia of polymer Science & Engineering, John Wiley & Sons,New York,
1989.
2. Matrin.T.Goosey, Plastics for Electronics, Elsevier, Applied Science, 1985.
3. R.W. Dyson, Specialty Polymers, Chapman & Hall, 2nd edition, 1998.
4. Manas Chanda, Salil.K.Roy, Plastics Technology Hand book, 2nd edition, Marcel
Dekker, New York, 1993

Reference Books

1. C.Ku & R.Liepins, Electrical Properties of Polymers, Hanser Publications, 1987

2. F. Bueche, Physical properties of polymers, Wiley, 1962.
3. J.Mort & G.Pfister, eds. Electronic properties of polymers, Wiley Interscience, 1982
4. V. Shibaev, Liquid Crystalline Polymers, S. Hashmi (Ed.), Reference Module in Materials Science
and Materials Engineering. Elsevier, 2016
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 High temperature and fire resistant polymers (6 hours)

1.1 High temperature and fire resistant polymers, polymers for low fire 2
hazards
1.2 polymers for high temperature resistance, 2
fluoropolymers, aromatic polymers, polyphenylene sulphide
1.3 polysulphones, polyesters, polyamides, polyketones, 2
2 Liquid crystalline polymers (7 hours)
2.1 Liquid crystalline polymers, structure, types, applications, 3
structural requirements of LCP, types of liquid crystalline (LC)
phases
2.2 Types of liquid crystalline polymers, main chain 2
and side chain LC polymers, cholesterics, smectics, mesophase,
lyotropic, thermotropic, calamitic, discotic, mesogenic groups
2.3 Theories of liquid crystallinity in polymers, Advantages of LCP, 2
disadvantages of LCP.
3 Polymers with electrical and electronic properties.(8 hours)
3.1 Electrical and electronic properties of polymers, insulating 4
properties of polymers, conducting polymers, conducting
mechanisms, polyacetylene, polyparaphenylene, polypyrrole
3.2 Photoconducting polymers, polymers in non-linear optics, polymers 2
with piezoelectric, pyroelectric and ferroelectric properties.
3.3 Photoresists for semiconductor fabrication, negative working 2
photoresists, positive photoresists, electron beam lithography.

4 Ionic polymers (8 hours)

4.1 Ionic polymers, synthesis, physical properties and applications, ion 3
exchange, hydrophilicity, ionomers based on polyethylene
4.2 elastomeric ionomers, ionomers based on 3
polystyrene, ionomers based on PTFE, ionomers with polyaromatic
backbones, polyelectrolytes for ion exchange.
4.3 polyelectrolytes based on carboxylates, polymers with integral ions, 2
polyelectrolyte complexes, inorganic ionic polymers

5 Inorganic polymers (6 hours)

5.1 Inorganic polymers, polymers containing phosphorous, nitrogen 2
and boron, organometallic polymers

5.2 Polysiloxanes Optical fibre telecommunication cables 2

5.3 Polymer concrete and polymeric binders for rocket propellants. 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POT426 POLYMERS FOR ELECTRONIC CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

APPLICATIONS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of fundamentals of
organic semiconductors and applications of conducting polymers. Significant topics from methodology
to enhance the processability of conducting polymers, synthesis and mechanism of doping are included
in the remaining modules. After the completion of this course, students should achieve sufficient
knowledge about the basics of polymers for electronic application.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe difference between inorganic and organic Semiconductors

CO 2 Explain the Conductivity applications
CO 3 Illustrate photoluminescence and electroluminescence.
CO 4 Explain the properties of polymer batteries
CO 5 Explain the significance of of doping and properties of conducting polymers.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe difference between inorganic and organic Semiconductors

1. Describe the inorganic semiconductors and organic semiconductors

2. Explain the electrical conductivity and photoconductivity

3. Explain basic structural characteristics of  conjugated polymers

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the Conductivity applications.

1. Explain the significance of Polymer rechargeable batteries

2. Describe the electro luminescent applications.

3. Comment on satellite communication links

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate photoluminescence and electroluminescence

1. Give an account of advantages and disadvantages of conducting polymers,

2.Explain electrochemical polymerization,

3.Describe methods to enhance the processability of conducting polymers.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain the properties of polymer batteries

1. Understand Synthesis of conducting polymers.

2. Understand the basic concepts of band model

3. Evaluate intrachain conductivity and interchain conductivity

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the significance of of doping and properties of conducting polymers.

1.Explain types of dopants.

2. Comment on effect of doping on the dielectric properties of conducting polymers.

3.Explain the absorption property of conducting polymers in the a.c and microwave fields
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT426 POLYMERS FOR ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define organic semiconductors

2. Describe conjugated polymers

3. Describe antistatic coatings,

4. What is the function of EMI shielding?

5. Explain the electrochemical polymerization

6. What is (ROMP)?

7. Describe properties of conducting polymers

8. Explain Carrier mobility

9. Describe the effect of doping on the dielectric properties

10. Compare properties of conducting polymers in the high and very high frequency fields

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe basic structural characteristics of  conjugated polymers (9M)

b) Difference between inorganic semiconductors and organic (5M)
semiconductors
Or

12 a) Describe the important properties of  conjugated polymers (7M)

b) Compare phthalocyanines and micro cyanine (7M)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module II

13 a) Name the applications of conducting polymers (2M)

b) Describe polymer rechargeable batteries, sensors and electrochemical (12M)
actuators
Or

14 Describe EMI shielding, Frequency selective surfaces and satellite (14M)

communication links.
Module -III

15 Explain the details of electrically conducting polymers (14M)

Or

16 a) Describe the advantages and disadvantages of conducting polymers (3M)

b) Explain the methods to enhance the processability of conducting (11M)
polymers.
Module -IV

17 a) Describe the synthesis of conducting polymers (7M)

b) Describe Valance Band theory, basic concepts of band model and band (7M)
model of conductor
Or

18 Explain the concept of doping- Charge carriers, polarons, bipolarons and (14M)
solitons.
Module -V

19 Describe types of dopants, oxidative dopants and reductive dopants and (14M)
mechanism of doping
Or

20 Explain inorganic and organic dopants, and effect of doping on the (14M)
dielectric properties of conducting polymers
..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1

Organic semiconductors – phthalocyanines, microcyanine, (SN)x, chlorophyll. Difference between

inorganic semiconductors and organic semiconductors.conjugated polymers - Historical
development,Basic structural characteristics of  conjugated polymers. Important properties of 
conjugated polymers- electrical conductivity, photoconductivity, charge storage capacity,
photoluminescence, and electroluminescence.

Module 2

Applications of conducting polymers- electro active applications-Polymer rechargeable batteries,

sensors, electrochemical actuators, electro luminescent applications. Conductivity applications-
antistatic coatings, conducting adhesives, artificial nerves. Electronic applications- EMI shielding,
Frequency selective surfaces, satellite communication links.

Module 3

Electrically conducting polymers- Chain growth polymerisation, step growth polymerization,

electrochemical polymerization, Metathesis polymerization (Ring opening metathesis polymer
(ROMP). Advantages and disadvantages of conducting polymers, methods to enhance the
processability of conducting polymers.

Module 4

Synthesis and properties of conducting polymers-Polyacetylene, Poly p-phenylene, Polyheterocyclic

and polyaromatic conducting polymers like polythiophene, poly vinyl carbazole, polypyrene,
polyaniline, Polypyrrole, Poly phenylenevinylene, Polypyridine. Valance Band theory- basic concepts
of band model, band model of conductor, semiconductor and insulator. Carrier mobility, intrachain
conductivity, interchain conductivity. Concept of doping- Charge carriers: polarons, bipolarons and
solitons.

Module 5

Types of dopants, oxidative dopants and reductive dopants, mechanism of doping, p-type doping and
n-type doping, inorganic and organic dopants, effect of doping on the dielectric properties of conducting
polymers, dielectric properties of conducting polymers in the high and very high frequency fields (a.c
field), ultra-high frequency field (Microwave field) . Dielectric constant, dielectric loss and absorption
property of conducting polymers in the a.c and microwave fields. Types of dopants, oxidative dopants
and reductive dopants, mechanism of doping, p-type doping and n-type doping, inorganic and organic
dopants, effect of doping on the dielectric properties of conducting polymers, dielectric .
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Text Books

1. M.E.O.Lyons, Electroactive polymers, Ed;Plenum Press; New York, PP 1-65, (1994).

2. J. Margolis, Conducting Polymers and Plastics, Chapman and Hal, London 1993

References:

1. T.A. Skotheim, R.L. Elsenbaumer, J.R. Reynolds, Hand book of conducting polymers,
2ed. Marcel Dekker, New york, vol.1-2., (1998).
2. H.S. Naiwa, organic conductive molecules and polymers, John wiley and sons; vol. 2,
England (1977).
3. J. L. Bredas, R. Silbey, conjugated polymers, kluwer, Dordrecht, (1991).
4. Mark Bikales Encyclopaedia of Polymer science and Engineering, second edition, Vol.5,
over Berger Menges John Wiley and Sons Inc., (1986).
5. M.E.O.Lyons, Electroactive polymers, Ed;Plenum Press; New York, PP 1-65, (1994).
6. J. Margolis, Conducting Polymers and Plastics, Chapman and Hal, London 1993
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Semiconductors (8 hours)
1.1 Organic semiconductors – phthalocyanines, micro cyanine, (SN)x, 3
chlorophyll. Difference between inorganic semiconductors and
organic semiconductors
1.2 conjugated polymers - Historical development, Basic structural 2
characteristics of  conjugated polymers.,
1.3 Important properties of  conjugated polymers- electrical 3
conductivity, photoconductivity, charge storage capacity,
photoluminescence, and electroluminescence Fundamentals of paint
science, reflection, refraction, diffraction

2 Conducting polymers (6 hours)

2.1 Applications of conducting polymers- electro active applications- 2
Polymer rechargeable batteries, sensors, electrochemical actuators,
2.2 electro luminescent applications. Conductivity applications- 2
antistatic coatings, conducting adhesives, artificial nerves.
2.3 Electronic applications- EMI shielding, Frequency selective 2
surfaces, satellite communication links
3 Polymerization (6 hours)
3.1 Electrically conducting polymers- Chain growth polymerisation, 2
step growth polymerization,
3.2 electrochemical polymerization, Metathesis polymerization (Ring 2
opening metathesis polymer (ROMP).,
3.3 Advantages and disadvantages of conducting polymers, methods to 2
enhance the processability of conducting polymers

4 Properties (7 hours)
4.1 Synthesis and properties of conducting polymers-Polyacetylene, 3
Poly p-phenylene, Polyheterocyclic and polyaromatic conducting
polymers like polythiophene, poly vinyl carbazole, polypyrene,
polyaniline

4.2 Polypyrrole, Poly phenylenevinylene, Polypyridine. Valance Band 2

theory- basic concepts of band model, band model of conductor,
semiconductor and insulator.

4.3 Carrier mobility, intrachain conductivity, interchain conductivity. 2

Concept of doping- Charge carriers: polarons, bipolarons and
solitons.

5 Dopants (8 hours)
5.1 Types of dopants, oxidative dopants and reductive dopants, 3
mechanism of doping, p-type doping and n-type doping, inorganic
and organic dopants, effect of doping on the dielectric properties of
conducting polymers,

5.2 dielectric properties of conducting polymers in the high and very 3

high frequency fields (a.c field), ultra-high frequency field
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
(Microwave field). Dielectric constant, dielectric loss and
absorption property of conducting polymers in the a.c and
microwave fields.
5.3 Types of dopants, oxidative dopants and reductive dopants, 2
mechanism of doping, p-type doping and n-type doping, inorganic
and organic dopants, effect of doping on the dielectric properties of
conducting polymers, dielectric.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT436 POLYMERS FOR SPACE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
APPLICATIONS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of Polymers for
aerospace research and high temperature resistant polymers. Significant topics from theory of
reinforcement, testing of composites and composite characterization techniques are included in the
remaining modules. After the completion of this course, students should achieve sufficient knowledge
about the basics of polymers for space application.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials for space applications.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Understand need for thermal protection in space research.

CO 2 Analyse the properties of polymer laminates.
CO 3 Design composite structures and joints.
CO 4 Compare propellant binders and their characteristics.
CO 5 Explain the significance of different types of composites.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 2 2
CO 2 2 2
CO 3 3 1
CO 4 3
CO 5 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand need for thermal protection in space research.
1. Describe the Synthesis and processing of thermal protection systems in space research

2. Explain the Synthesis and processing of advanced thermoplastics

3. Describe the high temperature resistant resins such as epoxy, phenolic and polyimides

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Analyse the properties of polymer laminates.

1. Explain the significance of composites for satellites and launch vehicles.

2. What are the functions of matrix in a composite?

3. Comment on types of fibres.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Design composite structures and joints.

1. Give an account on the theory of reinforcement.

2.Explain laminated composites.

3.Comment on special classification of laminates

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Compare propellant binders and their characteristics.

1. Comment on mechanical testing of composites

2.Explin inter laminar shear testing and fracture testing.

3. Evaluate environmental effects on composites.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the significance of different types of composites.

1. Explain composite characterization by mechanical, thermal and DMTA techniques.

2. Comment on failure mechanics of composites.

3.Explain the classification of propellants.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name: ______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT436 POLYMERS FOR SPACE APPLICATIONS (2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define Polymers for aerospace research?

2. Describe Synthesis and processing of thermal protection systems in space research.

3. Explain the high temperature resistant polymers

4. Describe the mechanical properties of fibres

5. Describe the theory of reinforcement,

6. Compare antisymmetric and non-symmetric laminates.

7. Explain the intra laminar shear testing,

8. Compare adhesively bonded joints & mechanically fastened joints

9. Describe the homogenous smokeless propellants,

10. Explain the failure mechanics of composites

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe the Synthesis and processing of thermal protection systems in (14M)

space research.

Or
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

12 a) Explain the high temperature resistant resins such as epoxy, phenolic and (14M)
polyimides.
Module II

13 a) Explain the composites for satellites and launch vehicles (14M)

Or

14 a) Describe thermosets and thermoplastics fibre reinforced polymer (14M)

Module -III

15 a) Explain the laminated composites and ply-orientation (14M)

Or

16 a) Describe special classification of laminates (9M)

b) Explain the directional properties composite laminate (5M)

Module -IV

17 a) Describe compressive testing and intra laminar shear testing (14M)

Or

18 a) Explain the Adhesively bonded joints & mechanically fastened joints (14M)

Module -V

19 a) Composite characterization by mechanical and thermal techniques (7M)

b) Illustrate Failure mechanics of composites (7M)

Or

20 a) Explain the synthesis, characteristics, applications. glycidylazide polymer (14M)

and its homologues,
..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1

Polymers for aerospace research- adhesives, coatings, ablatives. Synthesis and processing of advanced
thermoplastics: PEEK, polycarbonates, polyethers, polyether sulphones. Synthesis and processing of
thermal protection systems in space research. High temperature resistant resins such as epoxy, phenolic
and polyimides
Module 2

High temperature resistant polymers with metals in their back bone - Boron, Silicon and Phosphorous
contain polymers for space applications, composites for satellites and launch vehicles: Composites-
type of composites- fibre composites, particulate composites, foam composites. Desired properties of
a matrix. Polymer matrix: Thermosets and thermoplastics. Fibre reinforced polymer (FRP) Types of
fibres, mechanical properties of fibres, glass fibres, carbon fibres, aramid fibres, metal fibres, alumina
fibres, boron fibres, silicon carbide fibres, silica fibres, etc
Module 3

Theory of reinforcement, property dependence on resin and reinforcement, directional properties.

Laminated composites- Lamina & Laminate lay-up, ply-orientation definition. Strength of laminates,
laminate stiffness and ABD Matrices, special classification of laminates, symmetric, antisymmetric and
non-symmetric laminates
Module 4

Testing of Composites: Mechanical testing of composites, tensile testing, compressive testing, intra
laminar shear testing, inter laminar shear testing, fracture testing etc. Joining of composites: Adhesively
bonded joints & mechanically fastened joints, environmental effects on composites
Module 5

Composite characterization by mechanical, thermal and DMTA techniques. Failure mechanics of

composites.Propellant binders, classification of propellants- solid, liquid, hybrid and air breathing.
Solid propellants – homogenous smokeless propellants, Heterogeneous (composite) propellants. High
energy binders- synthesis, characteristics, applications. Glycidylazide polymer and its homologues,
polynitrato methyl methyloxetane, poly glycidyl nitrates.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books

1. S.K. Mazundar Composites manufacturing; materials, product and process engineering, CRC
press, Boca Raton 2002.

Reference Books

1. S.C Lin, E.M. Pearce, High Performance Thermosets, Chemistry, Properties and Applications,
Hanser Publictions, 1994
2. C.A. Dostaletal Engineered Materials Handbook vol 3 Adhesives and sealants, Vol.3, ASM
International, 1990
3. S.K. Mazundar Composites manufacturing; materials, product and process engineering, CRC
press, Boca Raton 2002.
4. K. Friedrich etal, Springer Polymer composite-from nano-to macro-scale, NY 2005
5. T. Urbanski Chemistry and Technology of Explosives, Vol.2, Vol.3 and Vol.4, Pergamon Press,
New York, 1984.
6. Boyars C and Klager K Propellants manufacture, Hazards and Testing, Advances in Chemistry
Series, American Chemical society, Vol.88, Washington D.C., 1969.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Polymers in space research (7 hours)

1.1 Polymers for aerospace research- adhesives, coatings, ablatives. 2

1.2 Synthesis and processing of advanced thermoplastics: PEEK, 2
polycarbonates, polyethers, polyether sulphones
1.3 Synthesis and processing of thermal protection systems in space 2
research.

1.4 High temperature resistant resins such as epoxy, phenolic and 1

polyimides

2 Composites for satellites and launch vehicles (7 hours)

2.1 High temperature resistant polymers with metals in their back bone 2
- Boron, Silicon and Phosphorous contain polymers for space
applications, composites for satellites and launch vehicles:
2.2 Composites- type of composites- fibre composites, particulate 2
composites, foam composites. Desired properties of a matrix.
Polymer matrix
2.3 Thermosets and thermoplastics. Fibre reinforced polymer (FRP) 1
Types of fibres,
2.3 mechanical properties of fibres, glass fibres, carbon fibres, aramid 2
fibres, metal fibres, alumina fibres, boron fibres, silicon carbide
fibres, silica fibres, etc
3 Laminated composites (6 hours)
3.1 Theory of reinforcement, property dependence on resin and 2
reinforcement, directional properties.
3.2 Laminated composites- Lamina & Laminate lay-up, ply-orientation 2
definition.
3.3 Strength of laminates, laminate stiffness and ABD Matrices, special 2
classification of laminates, symmetric, antisymmetric and non-
symmetric laminates,

4 Mechanical testing of composites (6 hours)

4.1 Testing of Composites: Mechanical testing of composites, tensile 2
testing, compressive testing,
4.2 Intra laminar shear testing, inter laminar shear testing, fracture 2
testing etc.
4.3 Joining of composites: Adhesively bonded joints & mechanically 2
fastened joints, environmental effects on composites

5 Composite characterization (9 hours)

5.1 Composite characterization by mechanical, thermal and DMTA 2
techniques. Failure mechanics of composites.

5.2 Propellant binders, classification of propellants- solid, liquid, 2

hybrid and air breathing.
5.3 Solid propellants – homogenous smokeless propellants, 2
Heterogeneous (composite) propellants.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
5.3 High energy binders- synthesis, characteristics, applications. 3
Glycidylazide polymer and its homologues, polynitrato methyl
methyl oxetane, poly glycidyl nitrates
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT446 COMPOSITE MATERIALS CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of f general
characteristics of composites and manufacturing processes for polymeric composites. Significant topics
from methodology of basic laminate theory and the service life and environmental effects on metallic
vs. composite structures are included in the remaining modules. After the completion of this course,
students should achieve sufficient knowledge about the basics of composite technology.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe fundamentals of composite technology

CO 2 Explain the significance of composite manufacturing.
CO 3 Illustrate anisotropic and isotropic materials.
CO 4 Explain the role of lamina and their arrangement in laminate.
CO 5 Explain the general considerations and process involved in composite structural
design.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe fundamentals of composite technology

1. Describe the general characteristics of composites

2. Explain the composite applications in detail

3. Explain the strengthening mechanism

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the significance of composite manufacturing.

1. Explain Fundamental physics in composite manufacturing

2. Describe the typical defects introduced in manufacturing.

3. Comment on common terminology in composites manufacturing.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Illustrate anisotropic and isotropic materials.

1. Explain the basic concepts, stiffness, strength, thermal and moisture expansion

2.Explain anisotropic and isotropic materials

3.Comment on the cause of discontinuous stresses in composite.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain the role of lamina and their arrangement in laminate.

1. Understand various laminate theory.

2. Understand the unidirectional composite subjected to mechanical, thermal and moisture loads.

3. Evaluate the role of lamina and their arrangement in laminate

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the general considerations and process involved in composite
structural design.

1.Explain the service life and environmental effects on metallic vs. composite structures.

2. Comment on long-term performance.

3.Explain the general considerations and process involved in composite structural design.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name: ______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT446 COMPOSITE MATERIALS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define composite

2. Describe advantages of using composites in high performance structures

3. Explain the fundamental physics in composite manufacturing.

4. What are the typical defects introduced in manufacturing?

5. Describe the tailored specific strengths.

6. Describe the basic concepts in stiffness

7. Explain the unidirectional composite subjected to mechanical loads

8. Describe the use of a specific layup orientation

9. Explain key damage mode for composites

10. Describe the high temperature applications behaviour

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe the advantages and disadvantages, (6M)

b) What are the advantages of using composites in high performance (8M)
structures?
Or
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

12 a) Explain the unction of the fibres and matrix in a composite (7M)

b) What are the Environmental effects to design of composite (7M)
structures?

Module II

13 a) Explain the traditional and novel approaches process fundamentals (14M)

in composite manufacturing

Or

14 a) Describe the common terminology in composites manufacturing. (14M)

Module -III

15 a) Describe the concepts in strength, thermal and moisture expansion. (7M)

b) Explain the tailored specific strengths. (7M)

Or

16 a) Compare discontinuous stresses in composites and metals (14M)

Module -IV

17 a) Describe the Hooke’s Law to unidirectional composites (7M)

b) Explain the Stress/strain/curvature of a laminate under constant (7M)
axial forces and bending moments

Or

18 a) Describe bending/stretching coupling and stretching-shear (7M)

coupling
b) Explain the role of lamina and their arrangement in laminate (7M)

Module -V

19 a) What are the Advantages and disadvantages of composites with (14M)

respect to Product lifecycle management?

Or

20 a) Describe the general considerations and process involved in (14M)

composite structural design
..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
General characteristics of composites, advantages and disadvantages, advantages of using composites in high
performance structures application trends. Composite applications in aircraft, space, transportation, energy
electronics, sports and medical industries. Characteristics of fibers, matrices, interface bonding, adhesives
microstructure of composites, the function of the fibre and matrix in a composite. Thermoplastic and thermoset
matrix composites. Composite products and their unique properties. The strengthening mechanism that makes
composites stronger. Environmental effects to design of composite structures.

Module 2
Traditional and novel approaches process fundamentals. Fundamental physics in composite manufacturing,
manufacturing processes for polymeric composites. Typical defects introduced in manufacturing and the
methods utilized to minimize these defects. Common terminology in composites manufacturing. Special tooling
considerations required for composite manufacturing

Module 3
Basic concepts, stiffness, strength, thermal and moisture expansion. Anisotropic and isotropic materials, tailored
specific strengths. The cause of discontinuous stresses in composites and how it differs from metals

Module 4
Laminate theory; micromechanical behaviour of a ply, out-of-plane effects. Hooke’s Law to unidirectional
composites. The stress-strain relations of a unidirectional composite subjected to mechanical, thermal and
moisture loads. Stress/strain/curvature of a laminate under constant axial forces and bending moments. The
unusual behaviours which may occur in laminates such as bending/stretching coupling and stretching-shear
coupling. The use of a specific layup orientation based on the loading conditions and CLT. The role of lamina
and their arrangement in laminate Failure criteria, Laminate Strength, Stress Concentrations

Module 5

The service life (fatigue) and environmental (damage/corrosion) effects on metallic vs. composite
structures. Key damage mode for composites and composite damage tolerance capabilities How do
actual composites for aerospace, automotive, sporting goods, high temperature applications behave?
Problem areas, long-term performance, influence of structural geometries the Advantages and
disadvantages of composites with respect to Product Lifecycle Management. General considerations
and process involved in composite structural design. Typical in-service damage types for composites.
Non-destructive inspection techniques for detecting damage in composites. Basic types of composite
repair and their benefits
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books:

1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications,3rd
Edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010
2. Gebhardt A., Rapid prototyping, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003 Processing in
Organic Synthesis, (Edn 5), Tata McGraw Hill, 2001

References:

1. G. Piatti, Advances in composite materialsApplied Science Publishers Ltd., London. (1978),

2. D. Hull, An Introduction to Composite Materials, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
3. G.Lubin, Handbook of composites, Van Nostrand, New York, 1982.
4. K.K. Chawala, Ceramic matrix composites, , 1st ed., Chapman & Hall, London. (1993)
5. K.K.Chawla, Composite Materials, 2nd ed., Springer-Verlag, New York(1987)
6. Katz.H.S. & J.V. Milewski, Handbook of Fillers and Reinforcement for plastics- Van Nostrand,
New York.
7. M.O.W. Richardson (Ed)Polymer Engineering Composites. Applied Science Publishers, London.
8. P. M. Ajayan, L. S. Schadler, P. V. Braun , Nanocomposite Science and Technology, , (2003),
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Co. KGaA, Weinheim.
9. V.V. Vasiliev and E.V. Morozov, Mechanics and Analysis of Composite Materials, , (2001),
Elsevier Science Ltd, The Boulevard, Langford Lane, Kidlington, Oxford OX5 lGB, UK.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Microstructure of composites (7 hours)

1.1 General characteristics of composites, advantages and 3

disadvantages, advantages of using composites in high performance
structures application trends. Composite applications in aircraft,
space, transportation, energy electronics, sports and medical
industries.
1.2 Characteristics of fibres, matrices, interface bonding, adhesives 2
microstructure of composites, the function of the fiber and matrix
in a composite.
1.3 Thermoplastic and thermoset matrix composites. Composite 2
products and their unique properties. The strengthening mechanism
that makes composites stronger. Environmental effects to design of
composite structures

2 Composite manufacturing (6 hours)

2.1 Traditional and novel approaches process fundamentals. 2

Fundamental physics in composite manufacturing,
2.2 manufacturing processes for polymeric composites. Typical defects 2
introduced in manufacturing and the methods utilized to minimize
these defects.
2.3 Common terminology in composites manufacturing. Special 2
tooling considerations required for composite manufacturing
3 Stresses in composites (6 hours)
3.1 Basic concepts, stiffness, strength, thermal and moisture expansion 2

3.2 Anisotropic and isotropic materials, tailored specific strengths 2

3.3 The cause of discontinuous stresses in composites and how it differs 2
from metals

4 Macromechanical behaviour (8 hours)

4.1 Laminate theory; macromechanical behaviour of a ply, out-of-plane 3
effects. Hooke’s Law to unidirectional composites. The stress-strain
relations of a unidirectional composite subjected to mechanical,
thermal and moisture loads.

4.2 Stress/strain/curvature of a laminate under constant axial forces and 3

bending moments. The unusual behaviours which may occur in
laminates such as bending/stretching coupling and stretching-shear
coupling.
4.3 The use of a specific layup orientation based on the loading 2
conditions and CLT. The role of lamina and their arrangement in
laminate Failure criteria, Laminate Strength, Stress Concentrations

5 Composite damage (8 hours)

5.1 The service life (fatigue) and environmental (damage/corrosion) 3
effects on metallic vs. composite structures. Key damage mode for
composites and composite damage tolerance capabilities How do.
5.2 Actual composites for aerospace, automotive, sporting goods, high 3
temperature applications behaviour Problem areas, long-term
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
performance, influence of structural geometries the Advantages and
disadvantages of composites with respect to Product Lifecycle
Management
5.3 General considerations and process involved in composite 2
structural design. Typical in-service damage types for composites.
Non-destructive inspection techniques for detecting damage in
composites. Basic types of composite repair and their benefits
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT456 LIQUID CRYSTAL POLYMERS CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of fundamentals of
polymers, history of liquid crystal polymers and types of liquid crystalline polymers. Significant topics
from methodology of theories of liquid crystallinity in polymers, LC blends, LC composites and LC
polymers as sensors are included in the remaining modules. After the completion of this course,
students should achieve sufficient knowledge about the basics of liquid crystal polymers.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Describe fundamentals of structural requirements of LCP and characteristics of

liquid crystal polymers
CO 2 Illustrate various types of liquid crystal polymers
CO 3 Describe the advantages and disadvantages of liquid crystal polymers
CO 4 Explain LC blends and LC composites.
CO 5 Explain the applications of liquid crystal polymers.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe fundamentals of structural requirements of LCP and

characteristics of liquid crystal polymers.

1. Describe the history of liquid crystal polymers

2. Explain the structural requirements of LCP.

3.Describe the types of liquid crystalline (LC) phases

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) : Illustrate various types of liquid crystal polymers

1. Explain the types of liquid crystalline polymers

2.Describe the properties of LCP

3. Comment on structural features of side chain LC polymers

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Describe the advantages and disadvantages of liquid crystal polymers.

1. Describe the steric theory and Onsager approach,

2.Explain Flory’s lattice model

3.Comment on effect of electric and magnetic field,

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain LC blends and LC composites.

1. Understand polymer dispersed LC.

2. Explain Characterization of LC phases DSC, POM, XRD, NMR, FTIR,

3.Compare LC blends and LC composites.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the applications of liquid crystal polymers.

1. Describe the applications of LC polymers

2. Explain the LC polymers as sensors

3.Explain the photomechanical LC actuators

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No: ______________

Name: ______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT456 LIQUID CRYSTAL POLYMERS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

11. Define liquid crystals

12. Describe structural requirements of LCP

13. Compare main chain and side chain LC polymers.

4. Explain anisotropic properties

5 Explain steric theory.

6. Describe Advantages and disadvantages of LCP

7. Describe LC block copolymers.

8. Explain the dielectric studies

9. Describe photo responsive LC polymers

10.Explain photomechanical LC actuators

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe types of liquid crystalline (LC) phases (9M)

b) Explain the structural requirements of LCP (5M)

Or

12 a) Explain the history of liquid crystal polymers (14M)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module II

13 a) Describe the types of liquid crystalline polymers (14M)

Or

14 a) Describe structural features of side chain LC polymer. (7M)

b) Describe spacer length and mesogenic groups (7M)

Module -III

15 a) Explain the effect of electric and magnetic field. (8M)

b) Give Advantages of LCP. (6M)
Or

16 a) Describe theories of liquid crystallinity in polymers (8M)

b) Explain the surface effect (6M)
Module -IV

17 a) Describe Characterization of LC phases by DSC, POM, NMR, FTIR (14M)

Or

18 a) Explain LC elastomers and LC ionomers (8M)

b) Compare LC blends and LC composites (6M)

Module -V

19 a) Describe applications of LC polymers (7M)

b) Illustrate ionogenic LC polymers (7M)

Or

20 a) Explain the photochromic LC polymers and LCD devices (7M)

b) What are high strength fibres (7M)

..............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1

Introduction, crystals, liquids, liquid crystals, polymers, history of liquid crystal polymers, structural
requirements of LCP, types of liquid crystalline (LC) phases, MLC, PLC.
Module 2
Types of liquid crystalline polymers, main chain and sidechain LC polymers, dendrimers, anisotropic
properties, nematic, cholesterics, smectic, mesophase lyotropic, thermotropic, calamitic, discotic,
structural features of side chain LC polymers, spacer length, mesogenic groups

Module 3
Theories of liquid crystallinity in polymers, steric theory, Onsager approach, Flory’s lattice model,
Advantages of LCP, disadvantages of LCP, Effect of electric and magnetic field, surface effect,
birefringence in LC

Module 4
LC block copolymers, polymer dispersed LC, LC blends composites, LC elastomers, LC ionomers.
Characterization of LC phases, DSC, POM, XRD, NMR, FTIR, dielectric studies

Module 5

Applications of LC polymers, photochromic LC polymers, photo responsive LC polymers as sensors,

LCD devices, high strength fibers, ionogenic LC polymers, photomechanical LC actuators.

Text Books

1. A. M. Donald, A. H. Windle, S. Hanna, Liquid Crystalline Polymers, Cambridge

University Press, 2006
2. V. Shibaev, Liquid Crystalline Polymers, S. Hashmi (Ed.), Reference Module in Materials
Science and Materials Engineering. Elsevier, 2016

Reference Books

1. A.A. Collyer, Liquid Crystal Polymers: From Structures to Applications, Springer

science, 2012
4. Gert R. Strobl, Condensed Matter Physics: Crystals, Liquids, Liquid Crystals, and
Polymers, Springer, 2012
5. L. Lawrence Chapoy, (Ed.) Recent Advances in Liquid Crystalline Polymers; Elsevier
Science, New York, 1985
6. Ed. D. Coates (Ed.), Liquid Crystal Polymers: Synthesis, Properties and Applications
iSmithers Rapra Publishing, 2000
7. V.K.Thakur, M.R. Kessler, Liquid Crystalline Polymers: Volume 1–Structure and
Chemistry, Springer, 2015
8. F. P. Mantia, Thermotropic Liquid Crystal Polymer Blends, CRC Press, 1993
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Lliquid crystals (8hours)

1.1 Introduction, crystals, liquids, liquid crystals, polymers, 2

1.2 History of liquid crystal polymers, structural requirements of LCP 3

1.3 Types of liquid crystalline (LC) phases, MLC, PLC 3

2 Types of LCP (6 hours)

2.1 Types of liquid crystalline polymers, main chain and sidechain LCP 2

2.2 Dendrimers, anisotropic properties, nematic, cholesterics, smectic, 2

mesophase lyotropic, thermotropic
2.3 Calamitic, discotic, structural features of side chain LC polymers, 2
spacer length, mesogenic groups.
3 Theories of liquid crystallinity (6 hours)
3.1 Theories of liquid crystallinity in polymers, steric theory, Onsager 2
approach
3.2 Flory’s lattice model, Advantages of LCP, disadvantages of LCP, 2
3.3 Effect of electric and magnetic field, surface effect, birefringence in 2
LC

4 Characterization of LC phases (6 hours)

4.1 LC block copolymers, polymer dispersed LC, LC blends, 2
4.2 LC composites, LC elastomers, LC ionomers. Characterization of LC 2
phases
4.3 DSC, POM, XRD, NMR, FTIR, dielectric studies 2
5 LCD devices (9 hours)
5.1 Applications of LC polymers, photochromic LC polymers 3

5.2 Photo responsive LC polymers as sensors, LCD devices, high 3

strength fibers
5.3 Ionogenic LC polymers, photomechanical LC actuators 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT466 PLASTICS PACKAGING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
TECHNOLOGY PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Out of five modules, first two modules deals with the detailed study of fundamentals of
plastics packaging. Significant topics from packaging materials, packaging equipment checklist,
wrapping, sealing methods, are included in the remaining modules. After the completion of this course,
students should achieve sufficient knowledge about the basics of plastic packages

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge in Polymer materials.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Outline significance of plastic packaging.

CO 2 Summarise major packaging plastics.
CO 3 Apply methodology of conversion process
CO 4 Relate film and flexible packaging.
CO 5 Compare different thermoforming and testing methods for plastic packages.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Outline significance of plastic packaging.

1. Describe the functions of packaging,

2. Explain the advantages of plastic packaging

3.What is packaging legislation and regulation, packaging as a system?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Summarise major packaging plastics.

1. Explain the Major packaging plastics, introduction, PE, PP, PS, PVC, polyesters

2. Packaging plastics, PVDC, vinyl acetate, PVA, EVA, PV Alcohol, PA, PC ionomers & fluoro
polymers.

3. Comment on Conversion process, compression & transfer moulding, injection moulding,

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Apply methodology of conversion process.

1. Give an account of blow moulding, extrusion, rotary thermoforming, lamination, metallizing,

decoration process.

2.Explain shrink wrapping, pallet & stretch wrapping, sealing methods, plasma barrier coatings

3.Comment on energy requirement for conversion, extrusion, film and flexible packaging,

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Relate film and flexible packaging.

1. Understand Laminations & co extrusions, stretch and shrink wrap.

2. Understand the evaluation of seals in flexible packages,

3. Evaluate the advantages of flexible packaging.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Compare different thermoforming and testing methods for plastic packages.

1. Explain advantages & disadvantages of moulding foams, other cushioning materials & distribution
packaging.

2. Comment on variations in thermoforming and solid phase pressure forming,

3.Explain the packaging hazards and their controls, environmental considerations

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT466 PLASTICS PACKAGING TECHNOLOGY

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Define plastics packaging,

2. Describe advantages of plastic packaging

3. Describe the major packaging plastics, PE and PP

4. Explain the Conversion process

5. Describe rotary thermoforming

6. Compare multi-layer film & sheet coatings

7. Compare laminations & co extrusions

8. Describe the specialized packaging for food products.

9. Describe the variations in thermoforming and solid phase pressure forming

10. Explain the advantages & disadvantages of moulding foams

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module I

11 a) Describe special requirements of food and medical packaging (9M)

b) Describe the packaging materials and packaging equipment (5M)

Or

12 a) Explain packaging legislation and regulation, packaging as a (14M)

system
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Module II

13 a) Describe the Major packaging plastics PVDC, vinyl acetate, PVA (8M)
and EVA
b) Describe Conversion process (6M)
Or

14 a) Describe compression, transfer moulding & injection moulding (14M)

Module -III

15 a) Explain rotary thermoforming, lamination, metallizing & (14M)

decoration process
Or

16 a) Describe wrapping, sealing methods, plasma & barrier coatings (8M)

b) Explain energy requirement for conversion (6M)

Module -IV

17 a) Describe specialized packaging for food products (8M)

b) Explain the evaluation of seals in flexible packages (6M)
Or

18 a) Explain laminations, co extrusions, stretch and shrink wrap, and (14M)

pouching
Module -V

19 a) Give advantages & disadvantages of moulding foams, other (7M)

cushioning materials
b) Illustrate variations in thermoforming and solid phase pressure (7M)
forming
Or

20 a) Explain the design of moulded cushioning systems, plastic pallets, (14M)

drums & other shipping containers

.............................................................................................
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to plastics packaging, functions of packaging, advantages of plastic packaging, distribution

hazards, special requirements of food and medical packaging, packaging legislation and regulation,
packaging as a system, elements, approach, package, design, relation criteria for packaging materials,
packaging equipment checklist, case histories.
Module 2

Major packaging plastics, introduction, PE, PP, PS, PVC, polyesters, PVDC, vinylacetate, PVA, EVA,
PV Alcohol, PA, PC ionomers&fluoro polymers. Conversion process, compression & transfer
moulding, injection moulding,

Module 3

Blow moulding, extrusion, rotary thermoforming, lamination, metallizing, decoration process, shrink
wrapping, pallet & stretch wrapping, sealing methods, plasma barrier coatings, energy requirement for
conversion, extrusion, film and flexible packaging, extrusion, cast film & sheet, blown film, multi-layer
film & sheet coatings
Module 4

Laminations & co extrusions, stretch and shrink wrap, pouching, sealing, evaluation of seals in flexible
packages, advantages of flexible packaging, flexible packaging products, specialized packaging for
food products.

Module 5

Thermoformed, moulded and rigid packages, thermoforming packages, position & thermoforming &
wrap forming, variations in thermoforming and solid phase pressure forming, scrabbles, twin sheet &
melt to mould thermoforming, skin packaging, thermoforming moulds, thermoforming fill real, aseptic
thermoforming, advantages & disadvantages of moulding foams, other cushioning materials &
distribution packaging, polystyrene & other foams systems cushioning, design of moulded cushioning
systems, plastic pallets, drums & other shipping containers, testing plastic packages, barrier, migration
& compatibility, printing, labelling& pigmenting, sterilization systems and health care products,
packaging hazards and their controls, environmental considerations.

Text Books

1. Selke, S. E. Understanding plastics packaging technology. HanserVerlag. (1997).

Reference Books

1. Selke, S. E. Understanding plastics packaging technology. HanserVerlag. (1997).

2. Coles, R., McDowell, D., &Kirwan, M. J. (Eds.). Food packaging technology
(Vol. 5). CRC Press. (2003).
3. Piringer, O. G., &Baner, A. L. (Eds.). Plastic packaging materials for food:
barrier function, mass transport, quality assurance, and legislation.
John Wiley & Sons. (2008).
4. Massey, L. K. Permeability properties of plastics and elastomers:
a guide to packaging and barrier materials. William Andrew. (2003).
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Introduction to plastic packaging (8 hours)

1.1 Introduction to plastics packaging, functions of packaging, 2

advantages of plastic packaging,
1.2 distribution hazards, special requirements of food and medical 3
packaging, packaging legislation and regulation, packaging as a
system,
1.3 elements, approach, package, design, relation criteria for packaging 3
materials, packaging equipment checklist, case histories

2 Packaging plastics (6 hours)

2.1 Major packaging plastics, introduction, PE, PP, PS, PVC, 2

2.2 Polyesters, PVDC, vinyl acetate, PVA, EVA, PV Alcohol, PA, PC 2

ionomers & fluoro polymers.
2.3 Conversion process, compression & transfer moulding, injection 2
moulding
3 Sealing methods (6 hours)
3.1 Blow moulding, extrusion, rotary thermoforming, lamination, 2
metallizing, decoration process, shrink wrapping, pallet & stretch
wrapping

3.2 sealing methods, plasma barrier coatings, energy requirement for 2

conversion, extrusion
3.3 film and flexible packaging, extrusion, cast film & sheet, blown 2
film, multi-layer film & sheet coatings.

4 Flexible packaging (6 hours)

4.1 Laminations & co extrusions, stretch and shrink wrap, pouching, 2

4.2 sealing, evaluation of seals in flexible packages, advantages of 2

flexible packaging
4.3 flexible packaging products, specialized packaging for food 2
products

5 Thermoforming (9 hours)
5.1 Thermoformed, moulded and rigid packages, thermoforming 3
packages, position & thermoforming & wrap forming, variations in
thermoforming and solid phase pressure forming, scrabbles, twin
sheet & melt to mould thermoforming, skin packaging,
thermoforming moulds, thermoforming fill real

5.2 Aseptic thermoforming, advantages & disadvantages of moulding 2

foams, other cushioning materials & distribution packaging,
polystyrene & other foams systems cushioning,
5.3 design of molded cushioning systems, plastic pallets, drums & other 2
shipping containers, testing plastic packages,
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
5.4 barrier, migration & compatibility, printing, labelling & 2
pigmenting, sterilization systems and health care products,
packaging hazards and their controls, environmental considerations
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
MODERN METHODS OF CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POT476
INSTRUMENTATION PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Instrumentation methods enable the students to learn the basic measurements system,
understand the concepts of temperature pressure and flow measurements system and the
instrumentation applications in polymer analytical techniques.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Understand the general concept of measurements

CO 2 Acquire the knowledge in instruments for measurement

CO 3 Familiarize with the indicating and recording instruments used in industry machinery
CO 4 Understand the role of process control in polymer machinery

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3

CO 2 3 3 2 2

CO 3 3 1 1

CO 4 3 3 1 1

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 50
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the general concept of measurements.

1. Explain the three stages of generalized measurement system
2. Explain non conduct measurements.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Acquire the knowledge in instruments for measurement.
1. Explain optical pyrometer
2. Explain pressure measurement systems.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Familiarize with the indicating and recording instruments used in industry
machinery.
1. Explain venture meter.
2. Explain magnetic flow meters.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Understand the role of process control in polymer machinery
1. What are electrical indicating instruments?
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 3
Reg No: ______________ Name: __________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT476
MODERN METHODS OF INSTRUMENTATION
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)
1. Explain non conduct measurements.
2. Explain transducer.
3. List and explain about three beneficial applications of thermometer.
4. Explain McLeod gauge.
5. Explain how pressure gauge is calibrated using dead weight tester.
6. Explain orifice meter.
7. Explain the principle of PMMC.
8. What is CRT?
9. Mention instrumentation in analytical technique
10. Suggest any three methods of colour measurements.

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. Explain classification of transducer (14)
OR

12. (a) What is LVDT? (5)

13. (b) Explain the factors considered in selection of Transducers (9)

Module 2
14. (a) Explain the mechanism of optical pyrometer. (7)
(b) Explain thermal conductivity gauges (7)
OR
15. Explain thermistor and thermocouple (14)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module 3
16. Explain the principle of magnetic flow meters (14)
OR
17. Explain turbine type meters. (14)

Module 4
18. Explain the principle of Wattmeter and Ammeter (14)
OR
19. Explain the various recording instruments. (14)

Module 5
20. Explain gas chromatography. (14)

OR
21. Explain the working of thermal conductivity analyzer. (14)

****************
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 hours)
Measurement -The three stages of generalized measurement system, Transducer:
classification. Factors considered in selection of Transducers classification of errors,
potentiometer, LVDT, tachometer. Strain gauge Types of electric strain gauges. Calibration of
strain gauges, Non conduct measurements

Module 2 (7 hours)
Thermometer, Resistance Temperature Detector, thermistor, thermocouple, total radiation
pyrometers, optical pyrometer, Pressure measurement: Manometers, Elastic transducers,
McLeod gauge, thermal conductivity gauges, calibration of pressure gauge using dead weight
tester.

Module 3 (7 hours)
Venturimeter, Orifice & nozzle meters, Pitot tube, turbine type meters, hot wire anemometer,
magnetic flow meters. Level measurement: float level meters & electrical conductivity meters.

Module 4 (7 hours)
Electrical indicating instruments-analog and digital, current Galvanometer, PMMC, Electro
Dynamometer – Wattmeter-ammeter, recording –analog and digital , Galvanometer recording , null
typer, potentiometeric, magnetic typer, cathode ray tube.

Module 5 (7 hours)
IR spectroscopy, Gas chromatography, X-ray spectrometer, Thermoanalytical method, Thermal
conductivity analyzer, Measurement of color.

Text Books

1. A.K.Shawhney, “A Course in Mechanical Measurements and instrumentation”,

Dhanpat Rai, New Delhi, 2001 12th edition.
2. R.S.Khandpur, “Analytical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,2004, 5th
edition.

Reference Books
1. Rangan, Mani & Sharma, Instrumentation, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1997.
2. I.J. Nagarath and M. Gopal, Control systems engineering, 2nd Ed. New Age International Pvt. Ltd.,
1982.
3. R. K. Jain, Mechanical & Industrial measurements, Khanna Publishing. 1988.
4. B.C.Nakra, K.K.Chaudhry, “Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis”. Tata McGrawHill, New
Delhi, 2006, 7th edition.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 GENERAL CONCEPTS OF MEASUREMENTS (7 hours)
Measurement -The three stages of generalized measurement system,
1.1 1
Transducer: classification.
Factors considered in selection of Transducers classification of errors,
1.2 3
potentiometer, LVDT, tachometer
Strain gauge Types of electric strain gauges. Calibration of strain gauges,
1.3 3
Non conduct measurements
2 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS (7 hours)
Thermometer, Resistance Temperature Detector, thermistor,
2.1 3
thermocouple,
2.2 total radiation pyrometers, optical pyrometer 2
Pressure measurement: Manometers, Elastic transducers, McLeod gauge,
2.3 2
thermal conductivity gauges,
3 FLOW AND MISCELLANEOUS MEASUREMENTS (7 hours)
3.1 Venturi, Orifice & nozzle meters, Pitot tube 3
3.2 turbine type meters, hot wire anemometer, magnetic flow meters. 2
3.3 Level measurement: float level meters & electrical conductivity meters. 2
4 INDICATING AND RECORDING INSTRUMENTS (7 hours)
Electrical indicating instruments- analog and digital, current
4.1 3
Galvanometer, PMMC
Electro Dynamometer – Wattmeter-ammeter, recording –analog and
4.2 digital, Galvanometer recording, null typer, potentiometric, magnetic 4
typer, cathode ray tube.
5 INSTRUMENTATION IN ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUE (7 hours)
5.1 IR spectroscopy, Gas chromatography, X-ray spectrometer 3
Thermo analytical method, Thermal conductivity analyzer, Measurement
5.2 4
of color.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POLYMERS AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT418
ENVIRONMENT PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Objective of this course is to explain the coexistence of human beings and materials around.
This course introduces students to the significance of sustainable development. The recycling and reuse
of polymer materials its methods are also included. After this course the student will be able to explain
the biological and environmental aspects of polymer usage and methods to rectify pollution and other
global environmental issues.
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about polymer processing and elastomers.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Outline different types plastic recycling methods.

CO2 Discuss the impact of plastic waste on environment.

CO3 Understand treatment methods for polymer recycling.

CO4 Explore the prospects of biodegradable plastics.

CO5 Understand various raw materials and processes associated with Rubber reclamation.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 … … … … … 2 … … … … …

CO 2 3 … … … … … 3 … … … … …

CO 3 3 … … … … … 1 … … … … …

CO 4 3 … … … … … 3 … … … … …

CO 5 3 … … … … … 2 … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 10 10 20
Analyze 10 10 30
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum
2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Outline different types plastic recycling methods.

1. Mention the advantages of plastics over metals and ceramics.
2. Understand the ease of plastic recycling.
3. Estimate the cost requirement for plastic products recycling.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Discuss the impact of plastic waste on environment.
1. Estimate plastic physical recycling.
2. Estimate polymer reclamation from rubbers.
3. Elaborate the side effects of plastic littering and plastic burning.
Course Outcome 3(CO3): Understand treatment methods for polymer recycling.

1. Explain process of hydrogenation of plastic waste.

2. Explain the machineries used in plastic chemical recycling.
3. Explain froth floatation and ultracentrifugation.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explore the prospects of biodegradable plastics.

1. Explain major sources of biodegradable plastic.

2. Explain the chemical and physical nature of bioplastics.
3. Understand the processing behavior of biopolyesters.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand various raw materials and processes associated with Rubber
reclamation.

1. Give details of various methods of rubber reclamation.

2. Explain the applications of rubber reclaim.
3. Understand the chemicals used in reclamation and its environmental problems.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper
QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT418
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
POLYMERS AND ENVIRONMENT
PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)
1. What is the significance of sorting and segregation in plastic waste?
2. What is meant by SPI coding?
3. Which are the methods commonly used to reclaim rubber.
4. Write a short note on WTR.
5. Write the steps in synthesis of biopolyesters.
6. What is meant by enzyme specificity.
7. Give note on intracellular biodegradation.
8. What is the difference between devulcunisation and reclamation.
9. What is meant by energy recovery.
10. Give details of chemical recycling by hydrogenation.

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. a ) Compare the cost of manufacture of plastic and metal parts for similar application.
b) Explain manufacturability and sustainability of polymers with examples.
(8+6=14)
OR

12. a ) Explain the various components of sustainable development.

b) Explain global environmental problems with examples. (8+6=14)
Module 2
13. a ) Compare and contrast between local and global environmental issues.
b) Explain how plastics contribute towards sustainability. (7+7=14)

OR

14. a ) Explain major environmental issues created by polymers.

b) Explain the how to overcome the present problems associated with plastic burning.
(8+6=14)
Module 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

15. a ) Elaborate on the primary, secondary, tertiary and quartternary recycling with examples.
b) Explain primary and secondary recycling with examples. (6+8=14)

OR

16. a ) Compare different chemical recycling processes.

b) Explain different methods used for recycling of PET. (8+6=14)

Module 4
17. a ) Thermoplastic elastomers find extensive application in automobiles. Why ?
b) Explain tyre reclamation by various methods. (8+6=14)

OR

18. a ) Compare the recycling of TPO and rubbers.

b) Explain reclamation of latex based rubber products. (7+7=14)

Module 5

19. a ) Explain the manufacture of Bioplastics from microbes.

b) Explain various methods of pretreatments done for biopolyesters. (9+5=14)

OR

20. a ) Explain the role of enzymes in manufacture of biopolymers. Explain

various types of enzymes and its reactions.
b) Explain various tests used to evaluate biodegradation. (7+7=14)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllubus

Module 1

Impact of polymers on environment: Introduction, resources of polymers, comparison of total energy

costs for product manufacture based on polymers, ceramics and metals, polymer production and
consumption, comparison of the impact of polymers and other materials on environment.

Module 2

Environmental pollution, non-biodegradability of polymers, drawbacks, burning of polymers, remedy

for environmental problem by polymers, awareness program, need for recycling of plastics from urban
solid wastes.
Module 3

Plastic waste segregation: Sorting and segregation of waste, plastics identification, SPI coding, Primary
recycling, equipments for primary recycling, specific recycling techniques, PE films, PP battery case,
crushing and separation, PET films, Secondary recycling, plastics wastes containing paper, hydrolytic
treatment.

Module 4

Rubber and mixed waste: Processing of mixed plastics waste, household waste, industrial sector, TPO
based materials, use of recyclable plastics in motor vehicles, recoverable material, disposal of residuals,
recycling of rubber, difficulty in recycling of rubber products, reclaimator process, WTR, advantages
of reclaimed rubber in cost, mixing and processing.

Module 5

Bio-degradation of polymers, introduction, enzymes, enzyme nomenclature, enzyme specificity,

physical factors affecting the activity of enzymes, enzyme mechanism, chemical degradation initiates
biodegradation, hydrolysis of synthetic biodegradable polymers. Development of starch based
polymers, manufacture of master batch, biodegradation, assessment, biopolyesters, synthesis, isolation,
solvent extraction, properties, degradation, intracellular biodegradation, extra cellular biodegradation,
thermal degradation, hydrolytic degradation, environmental degradation.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books:

10. La Mantia, F. P., Recycling of plastic materials. Chem Tec Publishing, 1993
11. Azapagic, A., Emsley, A., & Hamerton, I., Polymers: the environment and sustainable development.
John Wiley & Sons., 2003

Reference Books:
1. Swift, G., Polymers, Environmentally Degradable. Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology. Brown, R.
(Ed.), 2000.
2. Scott, G. (Ed.), Degradable polymers: principles and applications. Springer Science & Business
Media, 2002.
3. Tarr, M. A. (Ed.)., Chemical degradation methods for wastes and pollutants: environmental and
industrial applications. CRC Press, 2003.
4. A. L. Andrady, Plastics and the Environment, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
5. Kalia, Luc Avérous, Biodegradable and bio-based polymers for environmental and biomedical
Applications, John Wiley & Sons, 2016.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 8
1.1 Impact of polymers on environment: Introduction, resources of polymers. 2
Comparison of total energy costs for product manufacture based on
1.2 2
polymers.
Energy costs of product manufacture of ceramics and metals, polymer
1.3 2
production and consumption.
Comparison of the impact of polymers and other conventional materials
1.4 2
on environment. Sustainable development.
2 Module II 6

2.1 Environmental pollution- Global and local issues. 2

Non-biodegradability of polymers, drawbacks, burning of polymers.

2.2 2

Remedy for environmental problem by polymers, awareness program,

2.3 2
need for recycling of plastics from urban solid wastes.
3 Module III 8
3.1 Plastic waste segregation: Sorting and segregation of waste. 2
Plastics identification, SPI coding, Primary recycling, equipments for
3.2 2
primary recycling.
Specific recycling techniques, PE films, PP battery case, crushing and
3.3 2
separation, PET films.
Secondary recycling, plastics wastes containing paper, hydrolytic
3.4 2
treatment.
4 Module IV 6
Rubber and mixed waste: Processing of mixed plastics waste, household
4.1 waste, industrial sector. 2

TPO based materials, use of recyclable plastics in motor vehicles,

4.2 recoverable material, disposal of residuals, recycling of rubber, difficulty 2
in recycling of rubber products.

Reclaimator process, WTR, advantages of reclaimed rubber in cost,

4.3 mixing and processing 2

5 Module V 7
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Bio-degradation of polymers, introduction, enzymes, enzyme
5.1 nomenclature, enzyme specificity, physical factors affecting the activity 2
of enzymes, enzyme mechanism.
Chemical degradation initiates biodegradation, hydrolysis of synthetic
5.2 biodegradable polymers. Development of starch based polymers, 3
manufacture of master batch, biodegradation, assessment.
Biopolyesters, synthesis, isolation, solvent extraction, properties,
degradation, intracellular biodegradation, extra cellular biodegradation,
5.3 2
thermal degradation, hydrolytic degradation, environmental degradation.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

BIOMEDICAL AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT428
BIOPOLYMERS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Objective of this course is to explain the applications of biopolymers and biomedical
materials with its research and development. This course introduces students to biological aspects of
human beings with special reference to implants and artificial body parts. After this course the student
will be able to understand the requirements for biopolymer materials and its functions inside the body.
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about plastics and rubbers.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Familiarise various bio polymers.

CO2 Learn about the bio medical applications of polymers.

CO3 Study polymers as contact lenses and dental materials.

CO4 Understand polypeptides and proteins.

CO5 Analyse various types of dental implants and its uses.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 4 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 5 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 50
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum
2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Familiarise various bio polymers.

1. What is the role of biopolymers in body implants?

2. What is meant by sterilisation.
3. Which are the major applications of implants?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Learn about the bio medical applications of polymers.

1. Understand the design of cardiovascular implants.

2. Design and formulate artificial bones.
3. Compare various biocompatible materials and its peculiarities.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Study polymers as contact lenses and dental materials.

1. Formulation of dental implants.

2. Explain the process and materials for making soft lenses?
3. Explain the advantages of novel biomaterials in hydrogels?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4 Understand polypeptides and proteins.

1. Explain structural features of polysaccharides?

2. Explain the significance of regenerated cellulose.
3. Understand various features of RNA and DNA.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Analyse various types of dental implants and its uses.

1. Explain the sealants and sutures of biocompatibility?

2. Explain the role of hardeners in curing the dental components?
3. Compare implant materials used for dental applications.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT428
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
BIOMEDICAL AND BIOPOLYMERS
PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)

1. Differentiate RNA from DNA.

2. Write a note on Hydrogels.
3. Give the structural form of polypeptides.
4. Define Biomaterials.
5. What is agar? Give any two applications.
6. What is meant by viscose rayon?
7. How is dental restorative materials made?
8. Give details of blood clotting systems.
9. Explain the structure of polymer skin.
10. What is the biomedical significance of polymer membranes.

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. a) With detailed mechanism of wound healing explain the defence mechanism of human body.

b) Explain the procedure followed in Implant design. (9+5 = 14)

OR

12. a) Explain the role of blood clotting in immune system of humans .

b) Explain the functions of various blood cells and its significance in biomedical device fabrication.
(8+6 = 14)

Module 2
13.a) Explain the major types of silicone implants and its constitution.

b) What are the specialities of bone implants. (8+6 = 14)

OR
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

14. a) Explain the constructional features of polymeric blood.

b) Explain the functional design of polymer skin.

(8+6 = 14)

Module 3
15. a) Describe the significance and design of polymer soft lenses.

b) Explain the advantages of RPG lenses. (8+6 = 14)

OR

16.a) Compare and contrast between various hydrogels and their mechanisms of action.

b) Compare the performance of hard and soft lenses. (8+6 = 14)

Module 4
17. Elaborate on the structural organisation in proteins with diagram.

OR

18. Explain in detail about polypeptides and proteins.

Module 5
19. Explain the manufacture of dental impression materials and dental crown.

OR

20. Explain in detail about denture materials and maxillofacial products .

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Biomaterials, classification, requirements, biocompatibility, sterilisation, inflammation and wound
healing, blood clotting system, biological responses to implants, implant design and applications.
Module 2
Biomedical applications of polymers, orthopaedics, cardio vascular, silicone implants, polymer
membranes, polymer skin, polymeric blood, poly (vinyl pyrollidone), bioerodable polymers and
application, silicone polymer implants.
Module 3
Contact lenses, hard lenses, gas permeable lenses, flexible lenses, soft lenses, hydrogels, equilibrium
swelling, absorption and desorption, oxygen permeability, types of soft lenses, manufacture, cleaning
and disinfection.

Module 4
Chemistry of peptides, polypeptides and proteins, synthetic approach to polypeptides and proteins,
structural organisation in proteins. Nucleic acids, RNA, DNA, structure, chemistry of polysaccharides,
starch and cellulose, chemical modifications of cellulose, regenerated cellulose, viscose rayon and
cuprammonium rayon

Module 5
Dental applications, denture base, denture reliners, crown and bridge resins, plastic teeth, mouth
protectors, maxillofacial prosthetic materials, restorative materials, polyelectrolyte based restorative
sealants, adhesives, dental impression and duplicating materials.

Text Books:

1. Comprehensive Polymer Science Vol.7 (Ed) David Byrom, Bio-Material Macmillan

Publishers Ltd. and ICI Biological products Business, 1991
2. Wilfred Lynch, Hand book of Silicone rubber fabrication, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company.

Reference Books:
1. R.H. Yocum and E.B. Nyquist, Eds., Functional Monomers, Vol 1, Marcel Dekker, 1973,
Chapter 3, PP 299-487
2. M.A.Galin and M.Ruben, Ed, Soft contact lenses: Clinical and Applied Technology, John
Wiley and sons,1978
3. Lehninger, Principles of Biochemistry
4. Shulz and Bhirmer, Principles of protein structure, Academic Press.
5. H.F. Mark (Ed), Encyclopedia of polymer science and engineering, John Wiley and Sons,
1989
6. Galin and M. Ruben Ed., Soft compact Lenses clinical and applied Technology, John Wiley
and Sons, 1978.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 7
1.1 Biomaterials, classification, requirements. 2
1.2 Biocompatibility, sterilization. 2
1.3 Inflammation and wound healing, blood clotting system. 2
1.4 Biological responses to implants, implant design and applications. 1

2 Module II 6
Biomedical applications of polymers, orthopaedics, cardio vascular,
2.1 silicone implants. 2

Polymer membranes, polymer skin, polymeric blood, poly (vinyl

2.2 2
pyrollidone).
2.3 Bioerodable polymers and application , silicone polymer implants. 2

3 Module III 8
3.1 Contact lenses, hard lenses, gas permeable lenses. 2

3.2 Flexible lenses, soft lenses, hydrogels. 2

Equilibrium swelling, absorption and desorption.

3.3 2

Oxygen permeability, types of soft lenses, manufacture, cleaning and

3.4 2
disinfection.
4 Module IV 7
Chemistry of peptides, polypeptides and proteins, synthetic approach to
4.1 polypeptides and proteins. 2

Structural organisation in proteins. Nucleic acids, RNA, DNA, structure,

4.2 chemistry of polysaccharides, starch and cellulose. 3

Chemical modifications of cellulose, regenerated cellulose, viscose rayon

4.3 and cuprammonium rayon. 2

5 Module V 7
Dental applications, denture base, denture reliners, crown and bridge
5.1 resins. 2

Plastic teeth, mouth protectors, maxillofacial prosthetic materials,

5.2 restorative materials. 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Polyelectrolyte based restorative sealants, adhesives, dental impression
5.3 and duplicating materials. 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

ADHESIVE SCIENCE AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT438
TECHNOLOGY PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Objective of this course is to explain the Industrial manufacturing of adhesives with its
development processes. This course introduces students to theoretical and practical aspects in
formulating adhesives for commercial and speciality uses.
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about polymer materials and its processing.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand types of adhesion and thermodynamics of adhesion.

CO2 Define theory and treatments of adhesion .

CO3 Correlate the formulation of various types of adhesives.

CO4 Explain the industrial and special applications of adhesives.

Understand various tests methods used to evaluate the adhesion strength and other
CO5
properties.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 … … … … … … … … … … …

CO 4 3 1 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 5 3 1 … … … … … … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 10 10 20
Analyze 10 10 20
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum
2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand types of adhesion and thermodynamics of adhesion.

1. What is the role of contact angle in adhesion?

2. What is meant by surface energy.
3. Which are the major functions of adhesive?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Define theory and treatments of adhesion.

1. Define the mechanical and electrostatic theory of adhesion.

2. Compare various wetting agents in adhesion.
3. How can we evaluate the surface preparation before application od adhesive.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Correlate the formulation of various types of adhesives.

1. Formulation of hot melt adhesive and give justification for the selection.
2. Explain the treatment of hot melt adhesives?
3. Explain the specific functions pressure sensitive adhesives?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain the industrial and special applications of adhesives.

1. Explain the parameters in determining joint design ?

2. Explain the significance of service life and joint design.
3. Give short note on TPE based adhesive.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand various tests methods used to evaluate the adhesion strength
and other properties.

1. Explain the test processes of environmental attack on adhesives.

2. Compare static and dynamic fatigue.
3. Compare destructive and non-destructive tests for adhesives.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT438
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
ADHESIVE SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)

1. What is meant by surface treatments. What is its significance?

2. Which are the properties significant for hot melt adhesives?

3. Define contact angle and strength of adhesion.

4. What are the major functions of adhesives?

5. Derive the equations for thermodynamics of adhesion.

6. Why wetting is critical for adhesive treatment?

7. What is meant by aerobic adhesive?

8. What is the major factors affecting the bonding process?

9. Define static and dynamic fatigue.

10. Explain various hardening techniques used for adhesives?

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. a) Which are the advantages and disadvantages of joining using adhesives.

b) Explain different theories of adhesion. (9+5 = 14)

OR

12. a) Explain the thermodynamic conditions suitable for an adhesive.

b) Explain the how surface modification is carried out by chemical treatment.

. (8+6 = 14)

Module 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

13.a) Explain the major mechanical treatments used for surface preparation.

b) What are the specialities of primers used in adhesive treatment for marine applications.

(8+6 = 14)

OR

14. a) Compare various methods of adhesive application.

b) Explain the diffusion theory and acid-base theory of adhesion.

. (8+6 = 14)

Module 3
15. a) Describe the application of phenolic adhesives and its manufacture.

b) Explain the synthesis of epoxy adhesives. (8+6 = 14)

OR

16.a) Compare and contrast between cyanoacrylate and diisocyanate adhesives.

b) Explain the methods used to find the performance of hot melt adhesive. (8+6 = 14)

Module 4
17.a) Elaborate on the automotive and aerospace applications of adhesives.

b) Explain the role of adhesives in electronic applications. (7+7=14)

OR

18. Explain in detail about adhesives used in constructional field with significant examples.

Module 5
19. Explain the major destructive tests done in adhesive joints. Explain the types of adhesive joints.

OR

20. Explain in detail about non destructive tests used for evaluating adhesion. Explain the fracture
formation mechanism of adhesive joints.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Definition of adhesives and adhesive bonding, functions of adhesives, classification of adhesives,
advantages and disadvantages of joining using adhesives, requirements of a good bond,
thermodynamics of adhesive, contact angle, work of adhesion, wetting, strength of adhesion, rheology
of adhesion.
Module 2
Surface treatments for metals and plastics, solvent cleaning, mechanical abrasion, chemical
treatments, primers, plasma treatments, Methods for Evaluating the Effectiveness of Surface
Preparation, theories of adhesion, Mechanical Theory, Electrostatic (Electronic) Theory, Diffusion
Theory, Wetting Theory, Chemical Bonding, Acid–Base Theory, Weak Boundary Layer Theory,
diffusion theory.
Module 3
Classification of adhesives, adhesives from natural sources, rubber based adhesives, TPE based
adhesives, poly vinyl acetates, poly vinyl alcohols, di isocyanates, cyano acrylate, anaerobic, acrylic,
hot melt adhesives, pressure sensitive adhesives,structural adhesives, Phenolic resins, epoxides, wood
adhesives.
Module 4
Adhesive applications and bonding processes, methods of adhesive application, adhesives in the
electronics Industry, adhesives in the automotive and aerospace, adhesives in building construction,
adhesives in electrical industry.

Module 5
Stresses, types of joints, selection of joint detail, joint design criteria effect of joint geometry, effect
of temperature, dynamic and static fatigue, environmental attack, service life prediction. standard test
methods destructive and non destructive testing, engineering properties of adhesives, fracture
mechanics of adhesives.

Text Books:

1. Pizzi (Ed), Wood Adhesives, Chemistry and Technology, Marcel Dekker 1983
2. Ebnesajjad, Handbook of Adhesives and Surface Preparation: Technology, Applications and
Manufacturing, William Andrew, 2010.

Reference Books:
1. P. Ghosh, Adhesive and Coating Technology, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008
2. Skiests (Ed). Handbook of Adhesives, 3rd Ed., Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1990
3. Shields, Handbook of Adhesives, Butterworths, 1984
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 8
1.1 Definition of adhesives and adhesive bonding, functions of adhesives. 2

1.2
Classification of adhesives, advantages and disadvantages of joining using 2
adhesives.
Requirements of a good bond, thermodynamics of adhesive, contact angle.
1.3 2

1.4 Work of adhesion, wetting, strength of adhesion, rheology of adhesion. 2

2 Module II 7
Surface treatments for metals and plastics, solvent cleaning, mechanical
2.1 abrasion. 2

Chemical treatments, primers, plasma treatments, methods for evaluating

2.2 2
the effectiveness of surface preparation,
Theories of adhesion, mechanical theory, electrostatic (electronic)
2.3 theory, diffusion theory, wetting theory, chemical bonding, acid–base 3
theory, weak boundary layer theory , diffusion theory.
3 Module III 6
3.1
Classification of adhesives, adhesives from natural sources, rubber based 2
adhesives.
3.2
TPE based adhesives, poly vinyl acetates, poly vinyl alcohols, 2
di isocyanates, cyano acrylate, anaerobic, acrylic.
3.3
Hot melt adhesives, pressure sensitive adhesives, structural adhesives, 2
Phenolic resins, epoxides, wood adhesives.
4 Module IV 7
Adhesive applications and bonding processes, methods of adhesive
4.1 application. 3

Adhesives in the electronics Industry, adhesives in the automotive and

4.2 aerospace. 2

4.3 Adhesives in building construction, adhesives in electrical industry. 2

5 Module V 7

5.1 Stresses, types of joints, selection of joint detail. 2

5.2
Joint design criteria effect of joint geometry, effect of temperature, 2
dynamic and static fatigue, environmental attack, service life prediction.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Standard test methods destructive and non-destructive testing,
5.3 engineering properties of adhesives, fracture mechanics of adhesives. 3
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POLYMER BLENDS AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT448
COMPOSITES PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Objective of this course is to explain the synthesis of different types of polymer blends and
composites. This course introduces students to thermodynamics of formation of polymer blends and its
structural features and properties. After this course the student will be able to explain the behaviour of
composites and select appropriate type of composite material for various applications.

Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about plastics and elastomers.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand the miscibility of polymer blends.

CO2 Describe the structure property relationships of polymer blends.

CO3 Correlate the formulation of long and short fibre composite.

CO4 Explain composite manufacturing techniques.

CO5 Understand applications of various types of polymer blends and composites.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 1 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 2 3 1 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 3 3 2 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 4 3 2 … … … … … … … … … …

CO 5 3 2 … … … … … … … … … …

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 30
Apply 20 20 50
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum
2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the miscibility of polymer blends.

1. What is the role of miscibility in polymer blends

2. What is meant by spinodal decomposition.
3. Which are the major functions LCST and UCST?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Describe the structure property relationships of polymer blends.

1. Compare miscible and immiscible blends.

2. What is meant by phase separation.
3. What is dynamic vulcunisation?

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Correlate the formulation of long and short fibre composite.

1. Explain the formation of composite structures with strong interphase?

2. Explain the equation for critical fibre length?
3. Illustrate functions of coupling agents.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain composite manufacturing techniques.

1. Explain pultrusion process?

2. Explain the filament winding method of composites?
3. Explain the process of reinforced reaction injection moulding.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand applications of various types of polymer blends and
composites.

1. Explain various commercial application of polymer blends

2. Explain the performance of high quality polymer composites.
3. Compare performance of reinforcements in composites.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No:______________
Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT448
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
POLYMER BLENDS AND COMPOSITES
PART – A
Answer All the Questions(10 x 3 = 30)

1. What is meant by immiscible blend?

2. Which are the properties significant for spinoidal decomposition?

3. Define thermodynamic equation for polymer solutions .

4. What are the major thermoplastic elastomers of commercial significance?

5. Which are the major fibres used in polymer composites?

6. Why interphase properties are critical in composites?

7. What is meant by polymer concrete?

8. Which are the major differences between RTM and RRIM?

9. Define pultrusion process.

10. What is meant by rule of mixtures?

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)

Module 1
11. a) With a neat sketch explain LCST and UCST .

b) Explain the significance of phase morphology in polymer blends. (9+5 = 14)

OR

12. a) Explain the term nucleation and growth in polymer blends.

b) Explain the major methods to evaluate polymer blend formation.

(7+7 = 14)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Module 2
13. a) Explain the advantages of thermoplastic elastomers.

b) Explain the manufacture of polyurethane based TPE. (8+6 = 14)

OR

14. a) Explain the constructional features of styrene block copolymers.

b) Explain the functional property of rubber - plastic blend with examples.

. (8+6 = 14)

Module 3
15. a) Elaborate on the polymer matrix materials commonly used for high temperature applications.

b) Explain the advantages of short fibre composites. (9+5 = 14)

OR

16.a) Compare and contrast between various cords materials used in tyres.

b) Compare the performance of metal reinforced and plastic reinforced polymer composite.

(8+6 = 14)

Module 4
17. a) Elaborate on the vacuum bag moulding.

b) Explain the process of Hand lay Up. (7+7 = 14)

OR

18. Explain in detail about modern machineries used in composite manufacture.

Module 5
19. a) Explain the major destructive tests done in tyre industries.

b) Compare Raw material test and In- Process tests in a paint industry. (9+5 = 14 )

OR

20. a) Explain in detail about fiberous fillers used in polymer matrices to enhance strength.

b) Explain the industrial applications of polymer composites.

(9+5 = 14)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1
Introduction, preparation of polymer blends, thermodynamic criteria for polymer miscibility, specific
interactions, copolymer effect, phase separation, spinodal decomposition, nucleation and growth, phase
diagram, morphology, blend characterisation techniques.

Module 2
Structure-property relationship, rubber plastic blends, phase morphology, properties of blends prepared
by dynamic vulcanization, technological application, thermoplastic styrene block copolymers,
polyester thermoplastic elastomers, thermoplastic polyurethane elastomers.

Module 3
Introduction to particulate and fibre filled composites, applications, function of matrix, function of
fibres, polymer-fibre interface, factors influencing the performance of composite, coupling agents,
bonding agents, short fibre composites, continuous fibre composites, analysis of long fibre composites,
analysis of short fibre composites, critical fibre length, rule of mixtures.

Module 4
Preparation and properties of glass fibre, carbon fibre and aramid fibre, polymer concrete, polymer
impregnated concrete, polymeric binders for rocket propellants Composite manufacturing techniques,
hand lay-up, spray-up, compression moulding, vacuum bag moulding, pressure bag moulding, filament
winding, resin transfer moulding, pultrusion, Reinforced Reaction Injection Moulding.

Module 5
Structure, manufacture, morphology, commercial grades, applications, thermoplastic 1,2-
polybutadiene, trans 1,4-polyisoprene, ionic thermoplastic elastomers, silicone based thermoplastic
elastomers, polyamide 1,2-elastomers. Applications of polymer blends with formulations for specific
applications, industrial applications of polymer composites, composites for speciality applications,
reinforcements used in polymer composites.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books:

1. Hand book of Elastomers, New Developments and Technology (Eds), A.K. Bhowmic, and H.C.
Stephense, Markel Dekker, Inc., New york.

2. O.Olabisi, I.W. Robeson, and M.T. Shaw, Polymer-polymer Miscibility, Academic Press, New
York, 1979

Reference Books:
1. Paul S. Newman (Ed) ‘Polymer Blends’” Academic Press, New York, 1978.

2. G.Alliger, etal, Rubber world, 164930,51(1971).

3. Goettler inc, the role of the polymeric matrix in the processing and structural prpperties of
copmposite materials (J C Sferis and L.Nicolars, (Edn) Plenum, New York 1983.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 8
1.1 Introduction, preparation of polymer blends. 2

1.2 Thermodynamic criteria for polymer miscibility, specific interactions. 2

Copolymer effect, phase separation, spinodal decomposition, nucleation
1.3 2
and growth.
1.4 Phase diagram, morphology, blend characterisation techniques. 2

2 Module II 7

2.1 Structure-property relationship, rubber plastic blends. 2

Phase morphology, properties of blends prepared by dynamic

Vulcanization, technological application, thermoplastic styrene block
2.2 copolymers, polyester thermoplastic elastomers, thermoplastic 3

polyurethane elastomers.

Thermoplastic styrene block copolymers, polyester thermoplastic

2.3 elastomers, thermoplastic polyurethane elastomers. 2

3 Module III 7
Introduction to particulate and fibre filled composites, applications,
3.1 function of matrix, function of fibres, polymer-fibre interface. 2

Factors influencing the performance of composite, coupling agents,

3.2 bonding agents, short fibre composites. 2

3.3 Continuous fibre composites, analysis of long fibre composites. 2

3.4 Analysis of short fibre composites, critical fibre length, rule of mixtures. 1

4 Module IV 7
4.1 Preparation and properties of glass fibre, carbon fibre and aramid fibre. 2

Polymer concrete, polymer impregnated concrete, polymeric binders for

rocket propellants Composite manufacturing techniques, hand lay-up,
4.2 spray-up, compression moulding, vacuum bag moulding, pressure bag 3
moulding.

Filament winding, resin transfer moulding, pultrusion, reinforced

4.3 reaction injection moulding. 2
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
5 Module V 6
Structure, manufacture, morphology, commercial grades, applications,
5.1 thermoplastic 1,2- polybutadiene, trans 1,4-polyisoprene. 2

Ionic thermoplastic elastomers, silicone based thermoplastic elastomers,

5.2 polyamide 1,2-elastomers. Applications of polymer blends with 3
formulations for specific applications.
Industrial applications of polymer composites, composites for speciality
5.3 3
applications, reinforcements used in polymer composites.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT 458 SAFETY ENGINEERING OF CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PROCESS PLANTS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course introduces students to the concepts of process safety, safety practices in
industries and emergency procedures. It also outlines the various types of hazards and risk.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Impart the basic concepts of safety in Process Industries.

CO 2 Apply the chemical engineering fundamentals in the chemical hazards prevention
techniques.
CO 3 Analyse the physical hazards and human factors in process safety.
CO 4 Develop an understanding about safety practices in industries and emergency
planning.
CO 5 Identify various hazards associated with chemical process industries using various
techniques and knowledge of risk.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3
1
CO 3
2
CO 3
3
CO 3
4
CO 3 3
5

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Impart the basic concepts of safety in Process Industries.

1. List the various site selection criteria for a safer industrial complex.

2. Assess the cost of accidents

3. Define the components of a MSDS; demonstrate the need in updating its contents.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Apply the chemical engineering fundamentals in the chemical hazards
prevention techniques.

1. List the classification of fire

2. Define fire pyramid and review its application in fire extinguishing

3. Describe BLEVE.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Analyse the physical hazards and human factors in process safety.

1. List the physical hazards present in a process industry

2. Define the phenomenon of electric shocks and lightning stroke.

3. Describe the human factors in safety.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Develop an understanding about safety practices in industries and
emergency planning.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

1. List the safety procedures to be followed in the transportation of hazardous chemicals by road

2. Illustrate HAZCHEM CODE, TREM CARD

3. Describe the need of emergency planning in a process industry

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Identify various hazards associated with chemical process industries
using various techniques and knowledge of risk.

1. Explain the HAZOP methodology.

2. Describe Event tree analysis

3. List some salient features in Factories Act, Incorporating safety provisions.

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QP CODE: Reg No:______________

PAGES:3 Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: POT 458

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

POT 458 SAFETY ENGINEERING OF PROCESS PLANTS

(2019-Scheme)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1. Write the significance of work permit systems.

2. Define accident.

3. What are the factors affecting the thermal runaway reaction.

4. Distinguish between Deflagration and detonation.

5. Differentiate between hazard and risk.

6. How will you quantify the radiation dose?

7. Write the significance of SIL.

8. Discuss the contents of TREM Card.

9. Differentiate between individual risk and societal risk.

10. What is probit equation? (10x3=30 marks)

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

MODULE I

11. a)What are the factors affecting the cost of accidents. Explain.

b) Explain the major uses of MSDS. (10+4=14 marks)

12. a) What are the major reasons for Bhopal tragedy. Explain.

b) Suggest a suitable plant layout for the Naphtha cracker unit. (8+6=14 marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
MODULE II

13. What are the potential fire hazards in Petroleum and petrochemical industries? Explain

(14 marks)

14. Explain in detail about the fixed fire protection system for a storage tank contains Naphtha.

(14 marks)

MODULE III

15. a) Explain in detail about the lightning protection for a storage tank contain LPG.

b) What are physical hazards? Discuss with suitable examples. (9+5=14 marks)

16. a) Discuss about different types of Human errors.

b) Explain the significance of ergonomics in process safety. (7+7=14 marks)

MODULE IV

17.a) What are the statutory provisions leads to the preparation of Emergency plan.

b) Differentiate between onsite and offsite emergency plan. (7+7=14 marks)

18. a) An ammonia storage tank having a capacity of 10000 Tons situated at Eloor having a
GPHtot of 1.5, SPHtot of 3.6. Calculate the Dow Fire & Explosive index and toxicity index
of the installation. Also determine the hazardous category of the storage tank.

Data:-

Material factor of Ammonia = 6

NFPA index figure =3

MAC value = 20ppm (10 marks)

b) Discuss about the significance of flame arresters in process industries. (4marks).

MODULE V

19.a) Explain the concept of inherent safety. Describe the various tools for assessing inherent
process safety.
b) Explain the OR and AND gate rules with examples. (8+6=14 marks)

20.a) Develop a methodology for HAZOP technique as a tool for hazard identification.
b) Differentiate between individual risk and societal risk with examples.
(8+6 =14 marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 hours)

Introduction to process safety: Concept and importance of process safety. Safety in the site selection
and lay out. Review of Industrial Accidents- Major Chemical Industry Accidents, Bhopal, Flixborough,
SEVESO. Cost of accidents. Material safety data sheet (MSDS). Work permit system, Personal
Protective Equipments (PPE).

Regulatory Bodies: - National safety council, OSHA, Loss prevention association, PESO, NEBOSH.

Module 2 (8 hours)

Chemical Hazards:- Fire triangle, LFL,UFL, Types of fire- Pool fire, jet fire, Flash fire and Fire ball.
Fire prevention techniques in process industry. Flammability diagram- construction and application.

Explosion :- Deflagration, Detonation, UVCE, BLEVE and Dust explosion. Prevention techniques for
explosion.

Toxic release: - Types of exposure, Measure of toxicity, Types of toxic effects. Run away reactions and
their mitigation.

Module 3 (6 hours)

Process and Plant hazards: Physical hazards- Atmospheric contaminants, Sound, Light, Radiation,
Pressure, and Temperature. Electrical hazards- electric shock, flash over, lightning Strokes.
Mechanical hazards. Environmental hazards.

Human Errors- People Oriented Errors, Situation Oriented errors, System oriented errors. Ergonomics.

Module 4 (7 hours)

Prevention techniques for hazards. Hazardous area classification. Safety in transportation of

hazardous chemicals by road-HAZCHEM CODE, TREM CARD Relief system and Detectors. Flame
arresters and Flare system.

Hazard rating of chemical plants- Dow fire, explosion and Toxicity index. Chemical exposure index.
Emergency planning-onsite and offsite emergency planning, Mock drill.

Module 5 (7 hours)

Hazard identification and Risk: HAZOP, Bow tie diagram, Fault tree analysis, failure mode and
effect analysis, Event tree analysis, Layer of protection analysis. Examples.

Quantitative Risk Assessment (methodology only), Probit equations, FN curves, Risk-individual risk,
societal risk. Safety integrity level (SIL). The concept of inherent safety and Reliability. Security in
process industries.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Reference Books

1. B. K. Bhaskara Rao, Er. R. K. Jain , Vineet Kumar, ” Safety in Chemical Plants/Industry and Its
Management”, Khanna Publishers, First edition, 2010

2. Daniel A. Crowl/ Joseph F. Louvar , Chemical Process Safety Fundamentals with applications,
Prentice Hall international series, Second edition.

3. K.S.N Raju,Chemical Process Industrial safety, McGraw Hill, 2014.

4. Ralph King, Safety in the Process Industries, Butterworth-Heinemann.

5. R.K.Jain & Sunil S Rao, Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management Systems, Khanna
Publishers, Fourth Edition,2000

6. Encyclopaedia of Occupational Health & Safety, International labour Office, Geneva, 2012

7. Frank P. Lees- “Loss Prevention in Process Industries” ,Vol.1,2&3,Second Edn, Butterworth-

Heinemann.1996

8. Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedure. Centre for Chemical Process Safety.AICHE,1992

9. K.V. Raghavan and A. A. Khan : Methodologies in Hazard Identification and assessment Manual
by CLRI, December 1990.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction to process safety (7 hours)
1.1 Concept and importance of process safety, Safety in the site 2
selection and lay out.
1.2 Review of Industry Accidents, Major Chemical Industry Accidents 2
Cost of accidents.
1.3 Material safety data sheet (MSDS). Work permit system, Personal 2
Protective Equipments (PPE).

1.4 Regulatory Bodies: - National safety council, OSHA, Loss 1

prevention association, PESO, NEBOSH.

2 Chemical Hazards (8 hours)

2.1 Fire triangle, LFL,UFL, Types of fire- Pool fire, jet fire, Flash fire 4
and Fire ball. Fire prevention techniques in process industry.
Flammability diagram- construction and application.

2.2 Explosion: - Deflagration, Detonation, UVCE, BLEVE and Dust 2

explosion. Prevention techniques for explosion.

2.3 Toxic release: - Types of exposure, Measure of toxicity, Types of 2

toxic effects. Run away reactions and their mitigation.
3 Process and Plant hazards (6 hours)

3.1 Physical hazards- Atmospheric contaminants, Sound, Light, 3

Radiation, Pressure, Temperature.

3.3 Electrical hazards- electric shock, flash over, lightning Strokes. 2

Mechanical hazards.
3.4 Human Errors- People Oriented Errors, Situation Oriented errors, 1
System oriented errors. Ergonomics.

.
4 Prevention techniques for hazards (7 hours)

4.1 Hazard area classification. Safety in transportation of hazardous 2

chemicals by road

4.2 HAZCHEM CODE, TREM CARD Relief system and Detectors. 2

Flame arresters and Flare system
4.3 Hazard rating of chemical plants- Dow fire, explosion and 2
Toxicity index. Chemical exposure index.
4.4 Emergency planning-onsite and offsite emergency planning, Mock 1
drill.
5 Hazard identification and Risk (7 hours)

5.1 HAZOP, Bow tie diagram, Fault tree analysis, failure mode and 3
effect analysis, Event tree analysis, Layer of protection analysis.
Examples.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
5.2 Quantitative Risk Assessment (methodology only), Probit 2
equations, FN curves, Risk-individual risk, societal risk. Safety
integrity level (SIL).

5.3 The concept of inherent safety and Reliability. Security in process 2

industries.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

POLYMERS AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT468
SEPARATION PROCESS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Separation techniques are integral unit operation in most of the chemical, pharmaceutical
and other process plants. Polymer materials finds application as membranes for separation process. The
separation processes, like, membrane based techniques, and chromatographic separations are gaining
importance in plants. The present course is designed to emphasize on these novel separation processes.
Prerequisites: Knowledge of mass transfer operations

After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Summarize the factors influencing the choice of separation techniques.

CO2 Develop models and the solutions for membrane separation processes

CO3 Solve problems involving surfactant and adsorption based separation

CO4 Describe the treatment of process liquids by ion exchange process and it’s
applications.

CO5 Explain the treatment of process liquids by Chromatographic Separations and it’s
applications.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3
CO 6 3

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum
2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Summarize the factors influencing the choice of separation techniques.
1. What are the factors influencing the choice of separation process?
2. Explain inherent separation factor
3. Discuss the solvent properties
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Develop models and the solutions for membrane separation processes

1. Classify the membrane separation processes

2. Discuss the principle involved in Ultrafiltration
3. Classify models for membrane separation processes

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Solve problems involving surfactant and adsorption based separation
1. Explain Micro emulsion and Macro emulsion.
2. Discuss the classifications of surfactant based separation techniques
3. Explain the principle of Foam flotation

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe the treatment of process liquids by ion exchange process and it’s
applications.
1. Explain the principle Ion exchange separation process
2. Explain the applications of Ion exchange process
3. Explain Ion exclusion
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the treatment of process liquids by Chromatographic Separations
and it’s applications.
1. List out the different types of chromatography
2. What is the principle of retention theory
3. Comparison of chromatography with other separation techniques.

***********
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 2
Reg No: ______________ Name: ______________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 468
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
COURSE CODE: POT-468
POLYMERS AND SEPARATION PROCESS
PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)
1. Explain inherent separation factor
2. What are the factors influencing the choice of separation process
3. Classify the various separation processes.
4. What are the advantages of membrane separation processes over conventional separation
processes?
5. Enlist the factors affecting membrane performance.
6. Write a note on ultrafiltration.
7. Explain solvent ablation
8. Explain adsorption e q u i l i b r i u m .
9. Discuss the binary ion exchange equilibrium.
10. Explain the principle of chromatographic separation.
PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)
Module 1
11. (a) Discuss the recent advances in separation techniques based on size and surface properties
(b) Explain the energy requirements of separation processes. (7+7 = 14 Marks)
OR
12. (a) Discuss the characteristics and selection of separation process.
(b) Differentiate the rate based versus equilibrium separation processes
(7+7 = 14 Marks)
Module 1I
13. (a) What are the experimental techniques used for characterization of membranes ?
(b) Discuss the working principle, flux equation and applications of ultrafiltration process with
neat sketch. (7+7 = 14 Marks)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

OR
14. A dialysis process is being designed to recover a certain solute from a dilute solution having
solute concentration 2.0 × 10–2 kg mol/m3 through a membrane to a solution having solute
concentration 0.3 × 10–2 kg mol/m3. The membrane is 1.59 × 10–5 m thick. The distribution
coefficient is 0.75; the diffusivity of solute through membrane is 3.5 × 10 –11 m2/s. The mass
transfer coefficients in the upstream and downstream are 3.5 × 10 –5 m/s and 2.1 × 10–5 m/s,
respectively. Calculate: (i) The individual resistance, total resistance and total percent resistance
of the two films. (ii) The flux at steady state and the total area in m2 for a transfer of 0.01 kg
mol solute/h. (14 Marks)
Module III
15. (a) Discuss the principle and classifications of surfactant based separation process
(b) Differentiate between Micro emulsion and Macro emulsions (7+7 = 14 Marks)
OR
16. (a) Explain Adsorptive bubble separations and Ion flotation
(b) Explain surfactants at Inter phases and in bulk (7+7=14 Marks)
Module IV
17. Discuss in detail the process principles involved in Pressure Swing Adsorption (PSA) and
Temperature Swing Adsorption (TSA) with industrial applications. (14 Marks)
OR
18. (a) Explain binary ion exchange equilibrium and Ion movement theory
(b) Explain mass transfer in ion exchange systems. (7+7=14 Marks)
Module V
19. Define the following terms in connection with chromatographic separations and give
appropriate equations

(a) Partition coefficient , (b) Retention Volume (c) Retention Ratio

d) Capacity factor (e) Separation factor (f) Resolution (g) separation efficiency

(7x2 =14 Marks)

OR
20. (a) Comparison of chromatography with other separation methods.
(b) Discuss different types of chromatography and explain any one in detail (9+5 = 14 Marks)

*****************
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Syllabus
Module 1 (8 hrs)
Separation Processes and their Selection:
Characteristics and selection of separation process: Importance and variety of separation, economic
significance, inherent separation factor, selection, factors influencing the choice of separation process,
solvent selection, selection of equipment. Recent advances in separation techniques based on size,
surface proper ties, ionic properties and other special characteristics of substances, Rate based versus
equilibrium separation processes, Selection of separation process, Energy requirements of
separation processes. Polymer materials used as membranes, functional polymer membranes.
Module 2(6 hrs)
Membrane processes: Introduction, Type and choice of membranes, Plate and frame, tubular,
spiral wound and hollow fibre membrane reactors and their relative merits, Membrane filtration,
Microfiltration, Nanofiltration, Ultrafiltration, Reverse Osmosis, Dialysis, Models for membrane
separations.
Module 3 (6 hrs)
Surfactant Based Separation Techniques: Basic principles, classifications, Surfactants at Inter
phases and in bulk, Foam fractionation, Foam flotation, Adsorptive bubble separations, Ion flotation,
Micro emulsion /Macro emulsions, Hydrotopes, Solvent ablation.
Module 4 (8 hrs)
Adsorption systems: Interacting solutes, Adiabatic adsorbers, velocity effects. Adsorption-
Desorption operations: Thermal desorption of gases, Activated carbon solute recovery, Processing
liquid using thermal regeneration, Pressure swing and vacuum swing adsorption, Regeneration with
purge and desorbent. Ion exchange: Basics of Ion exchange, Ion exchange resins, Binary ion
exchange equilibrium, Ion movement theory, Applications, Applications without exchange: Ion
exclusion, Mass transfer in ion exchange systems.
Module 5 (7hrs)
Chromatographic Separations: Introduction, types of chromatography, Elution
chromatography: Principles and Retention theory, Band broadening and separation efficiency, Types
of chromatography, Large scale elution (cyclic/batch) chromatography, Selective adsorption of
biological macromolecules, Simulated countercurrent techniques, Comparison with other separation
methods.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Text Books
1. Seader, J D, and Ernest J Henley. Separation Process Principles. New York, Wiley, 1998.
2. Marcel Mulder, “Basic Principles of Membrane Technology”, 2 Ed., Springer Publications,
2007
3. King C. J.; “Separation Processes”; Tata McGraw–Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 1982.
4. Wankat, P. C. “Rate- Controlled Separations”, Springer, 1994.
5. R W Rousseau, Handbook of Separation Process Technology, John Wiley & Sons (2009)

Reference Books
1. Nunes S P, Peinemann K V, “Membrane Technology in the chemical industry”, 2nd
Edition, Wiley-VCH, 2006.
2. Rautanbach and Albrecht R., “Membrane Process”, John Wiley and Sons.1989.
3. Crespo. J G, Bodekes K W, “Membrane Processes in separation and Purification”,
Kluwer Academic Publications, Netherland, 1994.
4. Geankoplis C J “Transport processes and Unit Operations”, 4th Edition, PHI, New
Delhi, 2006.
5. Philip Schweitzer; “Handbook of Separation Techniques for Chemical Engineers”,
Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill New York, 1997.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:
No. of
No. Details
Lectures
1 Module 1 8
1.1 Characteristics and selection of separation process 1
1.2 Importance and variety of separation, economic significance 1
Inherent separation factor, selection, factors influencing the choice of
separation process, solvent selection, selection of equipment. Recent
1.3 2
advances in separation techniques based on size, surface proper ties,
ionic properties and other special characteristics of substances
1.4 Rate based versus equilibrium separation processes, 1
Selection of separation process, Energy requirements of separation
1.5 1
processes.
Polymer materials used as membranes
1.6 1

1.7 Functional polymer membranes. 1

2 Module II 6
2.1 Introduction, Type and choice of membranes 1
Plate and frame, tubular, spiral wound and hollow fibre membrane
2.2 1
reactors and their relative merits
2.3 Membrane filtration, Microfiltration, Nano filtration 1
2.4 Ultrafiltration, Reverse Osmosis, Dialysis 2
2.5 Models for membrane separations. 1
3 Module III 6
Basic principles, classifications, Surfactants at Inter phases and in bulk,
3.1 2
Foam fractionation
3.2 Foam flotation, Adsorptive bubble separations, 2
3.3 Ion flotation, Micro emulsion /Macro emulsions 1
3.4 Hydro topes, Solvent ablation 1
4 Module IV 8
4.1 Interacting solutes, Adiabatic adsorbers, 1
velocity effects. Adsorption-Desorption operations: Thermal desorption
4.2 1
of gases,
Activated carbon solute recovery, Processing liquid using thermal
4.3 2
regeneration,
Pressure swing and vacuum swing adsorption, Regeneration with purge
4.4 2
and desorbent.
Basics o f Ion exchange, Ion exchange resins, Binary ion exchange
4.5 1
equilibrium, Ion movement theory,
4.6 Applications, Applications without exchange: Ion exclusion, Mass 1
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
transfer in ion exchange systems.
5 Module V 7
5.1 Introduction, types of chromatography, Elution chromatography: 1
Principles and Retention theory, Band broadening and separation
5.2 2
efficiency
Types of chromatography, large scale elution (cyclic/batch)
5.3 2
chromatography
5.4 Selective adsorption of biological macromolecules, 1
Simulated countercurrent techniques, Comparison with other separation
5.5 1
methods.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
POT POLYMERS AND FUEL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
478 CELL TECHNOLOGY PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: One of the most critical challenges facing the world is the development of clean, reliable,
and efficient energy conversion processes. Because the standard of living of virtually all nations is
directly related to per capita energy consumption, the demand for energy will inevitably increase. One
of the most promising near-term technologies are those based on fuel cells, which convert chemical
energy into electrical energy with higher efficiencies and far fewer environmental effects than other
options. This course is intended to provide an insight into the fuel cell and fuel cell technology focuses
on developments made in the area and the challenges facing in its wide practical applications. The
course also brings an overview on future prospects in the development and application of fuel cell.

Prerequisite: Reaction Engineering, Mass Transfer Operations

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Explain the fundamentals of electrochemistry, thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, and

heat and mass transfer, components of fuel cells and fuel cell systems.
CO 2 Illustrate various types of fuel cells and compare it with conventional systems.
CO 3 Defend the significance of fuel cell technology in the new global energy scenario.
CO 4 Design and explain fuel cell stack and fuel cell systems.
CO 5 Distinguish the expectances of hydrogen as a fuel and energy vector in the context of
renewable energy.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO 3 3 1 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 1 1 3
CO 5 3 1 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 10 10 20
Apply 20 20 50
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer
all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one.
Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the fundamentals of electrochemistry, thermodynamics, fluid

mechanics, and heat and mass transfer, components of fuel cells and fuel cell systems.

1. Outline the major functions of bipolar plates in a PEM fuel cell. Illustrate how material selection
is carried out for the gas diffusion layer to meet its major functions.
2. A direct methanol fuel cell uses methanol (CH3OH) as fuel instead of hydrogen:
𝐶𝐻3 𝑂𝐻 + 3⁄2 𝑂2 → 𝐶𝑂2 + 2𝐻2 𝑂(𝑙𝑖𝑞)
Calculate the standard-state reversible potential for a direct methanol fuel cell and standard state
Gibbs free energy change of the reaction. Also calculate the reversible voltage of the fuel cell
operating at a temperature 350 K. The entropy of the reaction at 350 K is given - 82 J/(mol K).
The standard state potential of half reaction is given below
𝐶𝑂2 + 6𝐻+ + 6𝑒̅ ↔ 𝐶𝐻3 𝑂𝐻 + 𝐻2 𝑂 𝐸 𝑂 = +0.03 𝑉
𝑂2 + 4𝐻+ + 4𝑒̅ ↔ 2𝐻2 𝑂 𝐸 𝑂 = +1.229 𝑉

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Illustrate various types of fuel cells and compare it with conventional
systems.

1. Compare fuel cell with batteries

2. Explain principle, working with neat sketch of PAFC.
Course Outcome 3(CO3): Defend the significance of fuel cell technology in the new global energy
scenario.
1. Explain the significance of fuel cell technology in the new global energy scenario.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Design and explain fuel cell stack and fuel cell systems.

1. Design a hydrogen – air fuel cell stack to produce a power output of 10 kW. Fuel cell is used
for power backup having voltage 24 V. Following data are provided for the design.
Parameter Unit Value
Fuel -- Hydrogen
Oxidant -- Air
Temperature K 350
Pressure kPa 101.3
Gas constant, R J/(mol K) 8.314
Transfer coefficient, α -- 1
No. of electrons involved, n -- 2
Faraday’s constant, F C/mol 96485
2
Current loss, iloss A/cm 0.0015
2
Reference exchange current A/cm 2.5x10-6
density, io
Limiting current density, iL A/cm2 1.5
2
Internal resistance, Ri Ohm-cm 0.125

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Distinguish the expectances of hydrogen as a fuel and energy vector in the
context of renewable energy.
1. List the unique features that make hydrogen an ideal energy carrier.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 3
Reg No: ______________ Name: __________________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Course Code: POT 478
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
POLYMERS AND FUEL CELL TECHNOLOGY
PART – A
Answer All the Questions (10 x 3 = 30)
1. Compare fuel cell with batteries
2. Write the chemical reactions involved in PEMFC and SOFC
3. Explain activation overvoltage.
4. Describe the effect of concentration on rate of reaction.
5. Define ohmic resistance
6. Define limiting current density
7. Define fuel cell stack.
8. Explain fuel cell stack clamping.
9. Explain autothermal reforming.
10. Write the chemical reactions involved in the partial oxidation and steam reforming.

PART – B
Answer one full question from each module (5 x 14 = 70)
Module 1
11 a) Explain the significance of fuel cell technology in the new global energy (7)
scenario.
b) Explain principle, working with neat sketch of PAFC. (7)
Or
12 Outline the major functions of bipolar plates in a PEM fuel cell. Illustrate how (14)
material selection is carried out for the gas diffusion layer to meet its major
functions.
Module 2
13 a) Derive Tafel equation. (8)
b) Derive an expression to show the relation between Gibbs free energy and (6)
electrical work.
Or
14 a) A direct methanol fuel cell uses methanol (CH3OH) as fuel instead of (8)
hydrogen:

𝐶𝐻3 𝑂𝐻 + 3⁄2 𝑂2 → 𝐶𝑂2 + 2𝐻2 𝑂(𝑙𝑖𝑞)

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Calculate the standard-state reversible potential for a direct methanol fuel cell
and standard state Gibbs free energy change of the reaction. Also calculate the
reversible voltage of the fuel cell operating at a temperature 350 K. The entropy
of the reaction at 350 K is given - 82 J/(mol K). The standard state potential of
half reaction is given below

𝐶𝑂2 + 6𝐻+ + 6𝑒̅ ↔ 𝐶𝐻3 𝑂𝐻 + 𝐻2 𝑂 𝐸 𝑂 = +0.03 𝑉

𝑂2 + 4𝐻+ + 4𝑒̅ ↔ 2𝐻2 𝑂 𝐸 𝑂 = +1.229 𝑉

b) Illustrate how increase in temperature and increase in reactant concentration (6)
increases reaction rate in a fuel cell.
Module 3
15 a) Consider the two fuel cells, Fuel cell-1 (Area 8 cm2 and resistance 0.15 Ω) and (8)
Fuel cell-2 (Area 20 cm2 and resistance 0.1 Ω). Determine which fuel cell
subject to larger ohmic voltage loss, at a current density of 3 A∕cm2.
b) Illustrate how concentration affects Nernst voltage. (6)
Or
16 a) Explain the ionic conduction in the aqueous electrolytes and ceramic (8)
electrolyte.
b) List the requirements that an electrolyte should meet in a fuel cell. (6)
Module 4
17 a) Explain the heat removal methods in the fuel cell (7)
b) Explain the polarization curve as a diagnostic tool for fuel cell. (7)
Or
18 Design a hydrogen – air fuel cell stack to produce a power output of 10 kW. (14)
Fuel cell is used for power backup having voltage 24 V. Following data are
provided for the design.

Parameter Unit Value

Fuel -- Hydrogen
Oxidant -- Air
Temperature K 350
Pressure kPa 101.3
Gas constant, R J/(mol K) 8.314
Transfer coefficient, α -- 1
No. of electrons involved, n -- 2
Faraday’s constant, F C/mol 96485
Current loss, iloss A/cm2 0.0015
Reference exchange current density, io A/cm2 2.5x10-6
Limiting current density, iL A/cm2 1.5
Internal resistance, Ri Ohm-cm2 0.125

Module 5
19 a) Describe oxygen and hydrogen supply system in a H2 – O2 fuel cell system. (7)
b) Discuss the humidification system for PEM fuel cell. (7)
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Or

20 a) List the unique features that make hydrogen an ideal energy carrier. (7)
b) Discuss various technologies for storing hydrogen. (7)

******************

Syllabus

Module 1 (7 Hrs.)
Introduction: Fuel Cell, Brief History of fuel cells, Fuel Cell and conventional processes –
comparison, Types of Fuel Cells Application scenarios, Advantages and disadvantages, Energy &
power relations, units, Working of a PEM fuel Cell, Polymer materials as components of fuel cell,
Major Cell Components, Material Properties, Processes and Operating Conditions of PEMFC.

Module 2 (7 Hrs.)
Thermodynamics: Gibb's free energy -Work potential of fuel, Reversible voltage - NERNST
Equation, Voltage and P, T and concentration dependence – examples, Faraday's Laws, Efficiency:
thermodynamic, voltage and fuel.
Reaction Kinetics: Electrochemical reaction fundamentals, electrode kinetics, Charge transfer and
activations energy, Exchange current density - slow and fast reactions, Potential and equilibrium -
galvanic potential, Reaction rate and potential - Butler Volmer equation & Tafel equation, Exchange
Currents and Electrocatalysis: How to Improve Kinetic Performance, Electrode design basics.

Module 3 (7 Hrs.)
Charge and Mass Transport: Charge transport resistances, voltage losses, Ionic and electronic
conductivities, Ionic conduction in different FC electrolytes: Aqueous, polymeric and ceramic,
Diffusive transport & voltage loss: Limiting current density, Nernstian and kinetic effect, Convective
transport: flow channels, gas diffusion / porous layer, gas velocity, pressure.

Module 4 (7 Hrs.)
Stack Design: Sizing of a Fuel Cell Stack, Stack Configuration, Uniform distribution of Reactants,
Heat removal, Stack Clamping.
Fuel Cell Diagnostics: Polarization Curve, Current Interrupt, AC Impedance Spectroscopy, Pressure
drop as a diagnostic tool.

Module 5 (7 Hrs.)
Fuel Cell System Design: Hydrogen-Oxygen Systems, Hydrogen-Air Systems, Fuel Cell Systems
with Fuel Processor, System Efficiency
Fuel Cells and Hydrogen Economy: Hydrogen Energy Systems, Hydrogen Energy Technologies,
Transition to Hydrogen Economy.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Text Books
1. Ryan P. O’Hayre, Suk-Won Cha, Whitney Colella & Fritz B. Printz, Fuel Cell Fundamentals,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New Jersey, 2006
2. Frano Barbir. PEM Fuel Cells: Theory and Practice. Elsevier, 2005

Reference Books
1. Vielstich, W, Gasteiger, H. A. Lamm, A. (Eds):Handbook of Fuel Cells Fundamentals,
Technology and Applications. John Wiely & Sons Ltd: NY, 2003; Vols1-4
2. Fuel Cell Handbook,7the Edn., EG & G Technical Services, Nov 2004
3. Hordeski, M. F. Alternative Fuels: The Future of Hydrogen, The Fairmont Press: Lilburn, GA,
2007.
4. Kordesch, K.; Simader, G. Fuel Cells and Their Applications. VCH: 1996
5. Larminie, J.; Dicks, A. Fuel Cell Systems Explained. John Wiely & Sons Ltd: Chichester, 1999.
6. Andreas Zuttel; Andreas Borgschulte; Louis Schdaptach, Hydrogen as a future energy carrier,
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co., KGaA, Weinheim, 2008.
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction (7 Hrs.)
Introduction: Fuel Cell, Brief History of fuel cells, Fuel Cell and
1.1 1
conventional processes – comparison.
1.2 Types of Fuel Cells 1
1.3 Application scenarios, Advantages and disadvantages. 1
1.4 Energy & power relations, units 1
1.5 Working of a PEM fuel Cell, polymer materials as components of fuel cell. 1
Major Cell Components, Material Properties, Processes and Operating
1.6 2
Conditions of PEMFC.
2 Thermodynamics and Reaction Kinetics (7 Hrs.)
Gibb's free energy-Work potential of fuel, Reversible voltage - NERNST
2.1 2
Equation, Voltage and P, T and concentration dependence – examples.
2.2 Faraday's Laws, Efficiency: thermodynamic, voltage and fuel. 1
Electrochemical reaction fundamentals, electrode kinetics, Charge transfer
2.3 1
and activations energy
Exchange current density - slow and fast reactions, Potential and
24 1
equilibrium - galvanic potential
Reaction rate and potential - Butler Volmer equation & Tafel equation,
2.5 Exchange Currents and Electrocatalysis: How to Improve Kinetic 2
Performance, Electrode design basics
3 Charge and Mass Transport (7 Hrs.)
Charge transport resistances, voltage losses, Ionic and electronic
3.1 2
conductivities
Ionic conduction in different FC electrolytes: aqueous, polymeric and
3.2 1
ceramic
Diffusive transport & voltage loss: Limiting current density, Nernstian and
3.3 2
kinetic effect
Convective transport: flow channels, gas diffusion/porous layer, gas
3.4 2
velocity, pressure
4 Stack Design and Fuel Cell Diagnostics (7 Hrs.)
4.1 Sizing of a Fuel Cell Stack 2
4.2 Stack Configuration, Uniform distribution of Reactants 2
4.3 Heat removal, Stack Clamping 1
4.4 Polarization Curve, Current Interrupt 1
4.5 AC Impedance Spectroscopy, Pressure drop as a diagnostic tool 1
5 Fuel Cell System Design and Hydrogen Economy (7 Hrs.)
5.1 Hydrogen-Oxygen Fuel Cell Systems 1
5.2 Hydrogen-Air Fuel Cell Systems 1
5.3 Fuel Cell Systems with Fuel Processor 1
5.4 System Efficiency 1
5.5 Hydrogen Energy Systems 1
5.6 Hydrogen Energy Technologies 1
5.7 Transition to Hydrogen Economy 1
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

COMPREHENSIVE COURSE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

POT404
VIVA PCC 1 0 0 1

Preamble: The objective of this Course viva is to ensure the basic knowledge of each student in
the most fundamental core courses in the curriculum. The viva voce shall be conducted based on
the core subjects studied from third to eighth semester. This course helps the learner to become
competent in placement tests and other competitive examinations.

Guidelines
 The course should be mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for practicing
questions based on the core courses listed in the curriculum.
 The viva voce will be conducted by the same three member committee assigned for final
project phase II evaluation. It comprises of Project coordinator, expert from
Industry/research Institute and a senior faculty from a sister department.
 The pass minimum for this course is 25.
 The mark will be treated as internal and should be uploaded along with internal marks of
other courses.
 Comprehensive Viva should be conducted along with final project evaluation by the three
member committee.

Mark Distribution
Total marks: 50, only CIE, minimum required to pass : 25 Marks
 POLYMER ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POD416 PROJECT PHASE II
PWS 0 0 12 4

Preamble: The course ‘Project Work’ is mainly intended to evoke the innovation and invention
skills in a student. The course will provide an opportunity to synthesize and apply the knowledge
and analytical skills learned, to be developed as a prototype or simulation. The project extends to
2 semesters and will be evaluated in the 7th and 8th semester separately, based on the achieved
objectives. One third of the project credits shall be completed in 7th semester and two third in 8th
semester. It is recommended that the projects may be finalized in the thrust areas of the respective
engineering stream or as interdisciplinary projects. Importance should be given to address societal
problems and developing indigenous technologies.

Course Objectives
 To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving.
 To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems.
 To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems.

Course Outcomes [COs]: After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:

Model and solve real world problems by applying knowledge across domains
CO1
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Develop products, processes or technologies for sustainable and socially relevant
CO2
applications (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Function effectively as an individual and as a leader in diverse teams and to
CO3
comprehend and execute designated tasks (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Plan and execute tasks utilizing available resources within timelines, following ethical
CO4
and professional norms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Identify technology/research gaps and propose innovative/creative solutions
CO5
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Organize and communicate technical and scientific findings effectively in written and
CO6
oral forms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1
2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO1
CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 1

CO4 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 3 1 2 1

CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO # Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability
PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of
PO4 complex problems PO0 Communication

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

PROJECT PHASE II

Phase 2 Targets

 In depth study of the topic assigned in the light of the report prepared under Phase - I;
 Review and finalization of the approach to the problem relating to the assigned topic.
 Preparing a detailed action plan for conducting the investigation, including teamwork.
 Detailed Analysis/ Modeling / Simulation/ Design/ Problem Solving/Experiment as
needed.
 Final development of product/ process, testing, results, conclusions and future
directions.
 Preparing a paper for Conference Presentation/ Publication in Journals, if possible.
 Presenting projects in Project Expos conducted by the University at the cluster level
and/ or state level as well as others conducted in India and abroad.
 Filing Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) if applicable.
 Preparing a report in the standard format for being evaluated by the Department
Assessment Board.
 Final project presentation and viva voce by the assessment board including the
external expert.

Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics

Total: 150 marks (Minimum required to pass: 75 marks).

 Project progress evaluation by guide: 30 Marks.
 Two interim evaluations by the Evaluation Committee: 50 Marks (25 marks for each
evaluation).
 Final evaluation by the Final Evaluation committee: 40 Marks
 Quality of the report evaluated by the evaluation committee: 30 Marks

(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator and
project supervisor. The final evaluation committee comprises of Project coordinator, expert from
Industry/research/academic Institute and a senior faculty from a sister department).
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Evaluation by the Guide

The guide/supervisor must monitor the progress being carried out by the project groups on regular
basis. In case it is found that progress is unsatisfactory it should be reported to the Department
Evaluation Committee for necessary action. The presence of each student in the group and their
involvement in all stages of execution of the project shall be ensured by the guide. Project
evaluation by the guide: 30 Marks. This mark shall be awarded to the students in his/her group by
considering the following aspects:

Project Scheduling & Distribution of Work among Team members: Detailed and extensive
Scheduling with timelines provided for each phase of project. Work breakdown structure well
defined. (5)

Literature survey: Outstanding investigation in all aspects. (4)

Student’s Diary/ Daily Log: The main purpose of writing daily diary is to cultivate the habit of
documenting and to encourage the students to search for details. It develops the students’ thought
process and reasoning abilities. The students should record in the daily/weekly activity diary the
day to day account of the observations, impressions, information gathered and suggestions given,
if any. It should contain the sketches & drawings related to the observations made by the students.
The daily/weekly activity diary shall be signed after every day/week by the guide. (7)

Individual Contribution: The contribution of each student at various stages. (9)

Completion of the project: The students should demonstrate the project to their respective guide.
The guide shall verify the results and see that the objectives are met. (5)
 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation - 1
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
Good evidence of an implementable
Some of the aspects of the proposed
The project is not addressing any project. There is some evidence for The project has evolved into incorporating
idea can be implemented. There is
useful requirement. The idea is the originality of the work done by the an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
still lack of originality in the work
Novelty of idea, and evolved into a non-implementable team . There is fresh specifications/ which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done so far by the team. The project
Implementation scope one. The work presented so far is features/improvements suggested by Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
2-a 5 is a regularly done theme/topic
[CO5] lacking any amount of original work without any freshness in terms of the team. The team is doing a design which is also Implementable. Could be a
[Group Evaluation] by the team. from fundamental principles, and patentable / publishable work.
specifications, features, and/or
there is some independent learning
improvements.
and engineering ingenuity.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Good evidence of task allocation Excellent display of task identification and

being done, supported by project distribution backed by documentary
No task distribution of any kind. Task allocation done, but not journal entries, identification of tasks
Effectiveness of task evidence of team brainstorming, and
Members are still having no clue on effectively, some members do not through discussion etc. However, the project journal entries. All members are
2-b distribution among 5 what to do. have any idea of the tasks assigned. task distribution seems to be skewed, allocated tasks according to their
team members. Some of the tasks were identified but and depends a few members heavily
[CO3] capabilities, and as much as possible in an
not followed individually well. than others. Mostly the tasks are being equal manner. The individual members are
[Group Evaluation]
followed by the individual members. following the tasks in an excellent manner.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Little or no evidence of continued There is some improvement in the Good evidence of planning done and Excellent evidence of enterprising and
planning or scheduling of the primary plan prepared during phase I. extensive project planning and follow-up
being followed up to a good extent
project. The students did not stick to There were some ideas on the since phase I. Continued use of project
after phase I. Materials were listed
Adherence to project the plan what they were going to materials /resources required, but not management/version control tool to track
and thought out, but the plan wasn't
schedule. build nor plan on what materials / really thought out. The students have followed completely. Schedules were the project. Material procurement if
2-c 5 resources to use in the project. The some idea on the finances required, applicable is progressing well. Tasks are
[CO4] prepared, but not detailed, and needs
[Group Evaluation] students do not have any idea on the but they have not formalized a budget updated and incorporated in the schedule.
improvement. Project journal is
budget required even after the end of plan. Schedules were not prepared. presented but it is neither complete A well-kept project journal showed
phase - I. No project journal kept or The project journal has no useful evidence for all the above, in addition to
nor updated regularly.
the journal. details on the project. the interaction with the project guide.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

 The team showed some interim The interim results showed were good
There were significant interim results
Interim Results. results, but they are not complete / and mostly consistent/correct with
There are no interim results to show. presented which clearly shows the progress.
2-d [CO6] 5 consistent to the current stage, Some respect to the current stage. There is
[Group assessment] corrections are needed. room for improvement.
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
Very poor presentation and there is Presentation is average, and the Good presentation. Student has good Exceptionally good presentation. Student
Presentation
no interim results. The student has student has only a feeble idea about idea about the team's project. The has excellent grasp of the project. The
2-e [Individual 5 no idea about the project proposal. the team work. overall presentation quality is good. quality of presentation is outstanding.
assessment]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 1 Total Marks: 25

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation – 2
No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The student does not show any The student appears to apply some The student is able to show some Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Application of evidence of applying engineering basic knowledge, but not able to evidence of application of engineering and its adaptation. The student is able to
engineering knowledge on the design and the show the design procedure and the knowledge in the design and apply knowledge from engineering
knowledge methodology adopted. The student's methodologies adopted in a development of the project to good domains to the problem and develop
2-f [CO1] 10 contribution in application of comprehensive manner. extent. solutions.
[Individual engineering knowledge in the project
Assessment] is poor.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

The individual contribution is evident.

Involvement of No evidence of any Individual There is evidence for some amount Evidence available for the student acting
The student has good amount of
individual participation in the project work. of individual contribution, but is as the core technical lead and has excellent
5 involvement in core activities of the
members limited to some of the superficial contribution to the project.
2-g [CO3] project.
tasks.
[Individual
Assessment] (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

None of the expected outcomes are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Only a few of the expected outcomes
Results and achieved yet. The team is unable to achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
are achieved. A few inferences are
inferences upon derive any inferences on the failures/ inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
5 made on the observed failures/issues.
execution [CO5] issues observed. Any kind o f identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
2-h No further work suggested.
[Group Assessment] observations or studies are not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Documentation and The individual student has no idea on The individual's presentation is done
Presentation's overall quality needs The individual’s presentation
presentation. the presentation of his/her part. The professionally and with great clarity. The
5 to be improved. performance is satisfactory.
2-i .[CO6] presentation is of poor quality. individual’s performance is excellent.
[Individual assessment]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 2 Total Marks: 25

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Final Evaluation
No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
The team is able to show evidence of Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Engineering The team does not show any evidence The team is able to show some of the
application of engineering knowledge and its adaptation. The team is able to
2-j knowledge. [CO1] of applying engineering knowledge design procedure and the
10 in the design and development of the apply knowledge from engineering
[Group Assessment] on the design and the methodology methodologies adopted, but not in a
project to good extent. There is scope domains to the problem and develop an
adopted. comprehensive manner.
for improvement. excellent solution.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Relevance of the The project has some relevance with The project is relevant to the society The project is exceptionally relevant to
project with respect to The project as a whole do not have respect to social and/or industrial and/or industry. The team is mostly society and/or industry. The team has
2-k societal and/or 5 any societal / industrial relevance at application. The team has however successful in translating the problem made outstanding contribution while
industrial needs. all. made not much effort to explore into an engineering specification and solving the problem in a professional and/
[Group Assessment] further and make it better. managed to solve much of it. or ethical manner.
[CO2]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
Some of the aspects of the proposed Good evidence of an implementable
The project is not addressing any The project has evolved into incorporating
idea appears to be practical. There is project. There is some evidence for the an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
useful requirement. The idea is
still lack of originality in the work originality of the work done by the
evolved into a non-implementable which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done. The project is a regularly done team. There is fresh specifications/
Innovation / novelty / one. The work presented so far is Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
theme/topic without any freshness in features/improvements suggested by the which is also Implementable. Could be a
lacking any amount of original work
2-i Creativity 5 terms of specifications, features, and/ team. The team is doing a design from patentable publishable work.
[CO5] by the team.
or improvements. fundamental principles, and there is
[Group Assessment] some independent learning and
engineering ingenuity. Could be
translated into a product / process if
more work is done.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Only a few of the expected outcomes
None of the expected outcomes are are achieved. A few inferences are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Quality of results / achieved. The team is unable to made on the observed failures/issues. achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
conclusions / 10 derive any inferences on the No further work suggested. inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
2-m solutions. [CO1] failures/issues observed. Any kind of identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
[Group Assessment] observations or studies is not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

 Presentation slides follow a good style
Presentation slides follow professional The presentation slides are exceptionally
format and there are only a few issues.
The presentation slides are shallow style formats to some extent. However, good. Neatly organized. All references
Organization of the slides is good. Most
Presentation - Part I and in a clumsy format. It does not its organization is not very good.
of references are cited properly. The cited properly. Diagrams/Figures, Tables
Preparation of slides. 5 follow proper organization. Language needs to be improved. All and equations are properly numbered,
flow is good and team presentation is
[CO6] references are not cited properly, or and l i s ted. Results/ inferences clearly
neatly organized. Some of the results
[Group Assessment]. acknowledged. Presentation slides highlighted and readable.
are not clearly shown. There is room
needs to be more professional.
for improvement.

2-n (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Good presentation/ communication by
Presentation - Part The student is able to explain some of Clear and concise communication
the student. The student is able to
II: Individual The student is not communicating the content. The student requires a lot exhibited by the student. The
explain most of the content very well.
Communication 5 properly. Poor response to of prompts to get to the idea. There are presentation is outstanding. Very
There are however, a few areas where
[CO6] questions. language issues. confident and tackles all the questions
the student shows lack of preparation.
[Individual without hesitation. Exceptional traits of
Language is better.
Assessment]. communicator.
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Final Evaluation, Marks: 40

 EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Report Evaluation
Sl.
No. Parameters Mark Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
s
The prepared report is shallow and not Project report shows evidence of
Project report follows the standard The report is exceptionally good. Neatly
as per standard format. It does not systematic documentation. Report is
format to some extent. However, its organized. All references cited properly.
follow proper organization. Contains mostly following the standard style
organization is not very good. Diagrams/Figures, Tables and equations
mostly unacknowledged content. Lack format and there are only a few issues.
2-o Report [CO6] 30 Language needs to be improved. All are properly numbered, and listed and
of effort in preparation is evident. Organization of the report is good.
references are not cited properly in the clearly shown. Language is excellent and
References are not cited. Mostly consistently formatted. Most of
report. There is lack of formatting follows professional styles. Consistent
Unprofessional and inconsistent references/sources are cited/
consistency. formatting and exceptional readability.
formatting. acknowledged properly.

(0 - 11 Marks) (12 - 18 Marks) (19 - 28 Marks) (29 - 30 Marks)

Phase - II Project Report Marks: 30

 POLYMER ENGINEERING

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
POD496 MINI PROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 4

Preamble: Mini Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature
or the students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad field
of Chemical Engineering, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both theoretical and
practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four students, under the
guidance of a Supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s) in R&D
work. The assignment to normally include:
 Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
 Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
 Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
 Block level design documentation
 Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/
Feasibility;
 Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the Department;

CO1 Identify and synthesize problems and propose solutions to them.

CO2 Prepare work plan and liaison with the team in completing as per schedule.

Validate the above solutions by theoretical calculations and through

CO3
experimental
CO4 Write technical reports and develop proper communication skills.
CO5 Present the data and defend ideas.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO12
0 1
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
*1-slight/low mapping, 2- moderate/medium mapping, 3-substantial/high mapping
 POLYMER ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Sl. No. Level of Evaluation Marks

1 Interim evaluation by the committee 20
2 Project Guide 30
3 Final Seminar evaluation by the committee 30
4 The report evaluated by the evaluation committee 20
Total 100
Minimum required to pass 50

The evaluation committee comprises a panel of HoD or a senior faculty member, Project
coordinator and project supervisor.